JP6678373B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine.

2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally , a gaming machine provided with a decorative substrate on which a light emitting body is mounted has been proposed (for example, Patent Document 1). A variety of effects using the light emitting effect by such a light emitting body are provided to the player.

JP-A-2006-154676 (paragraph [0019], FIG. 5)

However, in recent years, there has been a demand for a new embodiment that suppresses a decrease in gaming interest in a light emitting effect.

The present invention has been made in view of such circumstances, and an object of the present invention is to provide a gaming machine capable of suppressing a decrease in gaming interest .

To achieve the above object, the present invention provides:
A gaming machine that advances a game based on a lottery result by a lottery means,
The gaming machine includes an effect display device capable of displaying a predetermined still image or moving image, and a game board having a decorative body,
The decorative body is provided with a decorative substrate on which a plurality of electronic components including a light emitting body are mounted,
The decorative substrate includes a front mounting surface on which the light emitter is mounted and a back mounting surface on which the light emitter is not mounted,
A white coating film provided on the surface mounting surface of the decorative substrate, and a notation portion formed of a yellow paint on the white coating film and corresponding to the luminous body,
A light-emitting decorative portion having a light-transmitting property is arranged in front of the front mounting surface of the decorative substrate having the notation portion formed of a yellow paint on a white paint film,
It is characterized by the following.

In the gaming machine of the present invention, it is possible to suppress a decrease in gaming interest .

It is a front view of the pachinko machine which is one Embodiment of this invention. It is a right view of a pachinko machine. It is a left view of a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine from the back. It is a front view of the pachinko machine at the time of the press operation part of an effect operation unit being in an ascent position. It is the perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine at the time of the press operation part of an effect operation unit being in an ascent position from the front right. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine including a partially enlarged view seen from the front in a state where the door frame is opened from the body frame and the body frame is opened from the outer frame. FIG. 13 is a perspective view of a pachinko machine including a partially enlarged view seen from the front in a state where a door frame is opened from a main body frame and a main body frame is opened from an outer frame in another embodiment. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the pachinko machine into the door frame, the game board, the main body frame, and the outer frame, and looked from behind. It is a front view of the outer frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of an outer frame. It is a right view of an outer frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the outer frame from back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the outer frame for every main member and looked at from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, each of which is exploded and viewed from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame from the front and disassembled. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 as viewed from the upper front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of (a) viewed from the lower front. It is a front view of the door frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of a door frame. It is a left view of a door frame. It is a right view of a door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the right front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the door frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit of the door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame base unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame base unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the ball feeding unit from the back. FIG. 3A is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 2B is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit after the rear case and the fraud prevention member are removed. (A) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 4A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from the front, and FIG. 4B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from behind. FIG. 39 is a sectional view taken along line XX of FIG. 38 (a). FIG. 40 is a sectional view taken along line YY of FIG. 39 including a partially enlarged view. It is an exploded perspective view of a foul cover unit including a partial enlarged exploded view showing another form of the operation line invalidating member. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional plan view including a partially enlarged view of a foul cover unit showing another mode of the operation line nullification member. FIG. 10 is a cross-sectional plan view including a partially enlarged view of a foul cover unit showing another mode of the operation line nullification member. (A) is a longitudinal section front view of a foul cover unit showing another form of the operation line nullification member, and (b) is a cross-sectional plan view thereof. It is a vertical front view of the foul cover unit which shows other fraud prevention means. (A), (b) is an enlarged view of a main part of FIG. 45 showing a normal flow of a game ball (foul ball), and (c) is an enlarged view of a main part of FIG. 45 showing a state in which an illegal ball is prevented from reversing. . It is a top view of a foul cover unit. It is a top view of a foul cover unit which shows other forms of an operation line nullification member. It is a vertical front view of the foul cover unit which shows other fraud prevention means. (A) is an enlarged view of the Z part of FIG. 49, (b) is an enlarged view of the Z part of FIG. 49 showing a state in which a foul ball passes. (A), (b) is the enlarged view of the Z section of FIG. 49 which shows the state in which the operation line is invalidated. (A), (b) is a magnified view corresponding to the Z part of FIG. 49 showing a state in which the operation line invalidating member is motorized, and showing a state in which the operation line is invalidated. It is a perspective view of an important section showing other forms of an operation line nullification member. FIG. 3A is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as exploded and viewed from the front, and FIG. 3B is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit exploded and viewed from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit of the door frame. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate unit for every main member and looked from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in the plate unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the plate base unit in the plate unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the plate base unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish base unit for every main member and looked from behind. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit in the dish unit from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the dish decoration unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the dish decoration unit for every main member and looked from behind. It is the top view which looked at the production operation unit in the plate unit from the advancing and retreating direction of the production operation unit button unit. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rendering operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rendering operation unit from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the effect operation unit disassembled for every main member from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation unit for every main member and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring of the production operation unit from the upper front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the production operation ring from the lower front. FIG. 2A is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 2B is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring disassembled and viewed from the lower front. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the rotary drive unit of the production operation unit from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the rotary drive unit from the back. FIG. 3 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the right front. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the rotation drive unit from the left front. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit from the front and the upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the effect operation button unit and looked from the front lower part. (A) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the lower position, and (b) is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the upper position. It is an explanatory view showing the relation between the production operation ring and the rotation drive unit in the left side view of the production operation unit. It is an explanatory view showing a relation between a production operation ring and a production operation ring decoration board in a plan view of the production operation unit viewed from a pressing direction of a pressing operation unit. (A) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is at the raised position, and (c) is a center pressing operation unit of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the plate unit when is pressed. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit of the door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame left side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame left side unit and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit of the door frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame right side unit from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame right side unit and looked from behind. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit in the door frame from the front, (b) is the perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the back, and (c) is the state which removed the top lower cover. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown by. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the door frame top unit and looked at from the front upper part. It is the disassembled perspective view which looked at the door frame top unit from the front lower part disassembled. It is a front view of the door frame shown with each decorative board. It is a front view of a main part frame in a pachinko machine. It is a rear view of the main body frame in a pachinko machine. It is the perspective view which looked at the main-body frame from the front right. It is the perspective view which looked at the main-body frame from the left front. It is the perspective view which looked at the main part frame from the back. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the main body frame for every main member and looked at from the front. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. (A) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front of the body frame, and (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left corner of the front of the body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the body frame. It is explanatory drawing which shows operation | movement of the connection cable guide member of a main body frame at the time of opening and closing of a door frame with respect to a main body frame. (A) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main frame viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device viewed from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit of the main body frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout base unit from the back. (A) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit in the main body frame from the front, and (b) is the perspective view which looked at the payout unit from the back. (A) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and (b) is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. FIG. 5 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit, which is cut at the center of the dispensing blade in the front-rear direction. (A) is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in an open state, and (b) is a cross-sectional view cut along line AA in (a). . It is a rear view of the dispensing device for explaining the rotation position of the dispensing blade. It is a rear view of the payout apparatus for demonstrating prevention of ball clogging and ball dropout. It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the foul cover unit of a door frame, and a lower full tank path unit. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game ball in a main part frame. (A) is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the board unit viewed from the back. It is the perspective view which looked at the board unit from the lower back. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the substrate unit, which is disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the board | substrate unit for every main structure and looked at from behind. It is an expanded side sectional view which shows the lower part of the pachinko machine cut | disconnected in the horizontal direction center. (A) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit as viewed from the back. (A) is a plan view of the body frame, and (b) is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in (a). It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the upper part in the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from behind. (A) is a perspective view seen from the upper front in a state where the tank rail and the like are assembled to the ball tank, and (b) is a perspective view seen from the lower front in (a). FIG. 119 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the exploded view of FIG. It is explanatory drawing which shows the area | region where the game ball overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of a main body frame distribute | circulates. It is explanatory drawing which shows the flow of the game ball which overflowed from the ball tank in the upper part of a main body frame. It is an explanatory view showing a flow of a game ball to a detour passage in an upper part of a main part frame. It is an enlarged view which expands and shows the tank rail vicinity in the perspective view which looked at the main body frame from the hinge side back. It is the figure which expanded a part of sectional drawing cut | disconnected by CC line of FIG. 117 (a). It is another structure of this invention in which a countermeasure against metal powder is taken (configuration of countermeasure against metal powder according to the second embodiment). It is another structure of the present invention in which measures against metal powder are taken (configuration of measures against metal powder according to the third embodiment). It is another structure of this invention in which a countermeasure against metal powder is taken (configuration of countermeasure against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment). 14 shows another configuration of the present invention in which countermeasures against metal powder are taken (configuration of countermeasures against metal powder according to the fifth embodiment). It is a front view of the game board which made the game panel opaque in the pachinko machine. FIG. 130 is a perspective view of the gaming board of FIG. 130 as viewed from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the game board from behind. It is the exploded perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member and looked at from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the game board for every main member and looked from behind. It is a front view of the game board in the state which made the game panel transparent. It is a front view of a game board showing a state in which a game panel is made opaque to show a game area in which game balls circulate and obstacle nails. It is a front view which expands and shows the vicinity of an attacker unit in a game board. It is a front view of a front component and a game panel in a game board. It is the perspective view which looked at the front component and the game panel from the front. It is the perspective view which looked at the front component and the game panel from the back. It is the exploded perspective view which looked at the front component member and the game panel from the front by disassembling. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the front component member and the game panel and looked from behind. (A) is a front view of the game panel shown with the board cover removed, and (b) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the lower panel decorative board in (a). It is explanatory drawing which shows the relationship between the decoration pattern of a game panel, a front component, and a front unit. It is a front view of the game board which shows the relationship between the decorative pattern and the obstacle nail in the game panel. (A) is a front view of the panel board in which the decoration pattern different from FIG. 143 was formed, (b) is a front view which shows the panel board of (a) with a front unit. It is a front view which shows the nail adjustment film for adjusting the obstacle nail implanted in the game panel. It is a front view of a main part frame shown in the state where a game board was attached. (A) is an explanatory view showing an enlarged state before the nail adjustment film is mounted on the game board, and (b) is an explanatory view showing an enlarged state where the nail adjustment film is mounted on the game board. FIG. 4 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring routing from a function display unit on a main control board. It is a front view of a presentation effect unit. It is a front view which shows the state which made the 1st design light-emitting decoration in the presentation effect unit. It is a front view which shows the state which made the 2nd design light-emitting decoration in the presentation effect unit. It is a front view showing the state where the 2nd picture of the presentation effect unit different from this embodiment was made to luminous decoration. It is the perspective view which looked at the back unit from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which disassembled the lower back movable decoration body with which the lower back effect unit provided in the back unit was seen from the front. It is the disassembled perspective view which decomposed | disassembled the lower back movable decoration body with which the lower back production unit was provided and was seen from behind. It is a front view showing movement of a lower back movable ornament. It is a schematic perspective view of an internal structure, such as a back left movable decorative body. It is a front view showing movement of a back left movable decoration object of a back left production unit in a back unit. From the normal state, raise the lower back movable decorative body of the back lower production unit from the standby position, and move the lower back moving arm to the same as the lower left lower movable movable body of the back left directing unit and the lower right lower movable movable body of the back right directing unit At the same time as the height, the movable decorative body on the back of the back production unit is lowered from the standby position, and the upper back moving arm is the same as the upper left movable decorative body of the back left production unit and the upper right movable decoration of the back right production unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state made into height. FIG. 161 shows a state in which the lower back movable decorative body, the upper back movable decorative body, the back upper left movable decorative body, the back lower left movable decorative body, the back upper right movable decorative body, and the back lower right movable decorative body are being rotated. It is a front view of a game board. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state where the back left movement arm of the back left production unit and the back right movement arm of the back right production unit were moved from the normal state to the second state. 163 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back upper left movable decorative body, the back lower left movable decorative body, the back upper right movable decorative body, and the back lower right movable decorative body have been moved to the second state from the state of FIG. 163. The back left moving arm is moved to the right and the back right moving arm to the left from the normal state, and the back upper left movable decorative body and the lower right lower movable decorative body, and the lower left lower movable movable body and the lower right movable decorative body are moved. It is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the effect image was displayed on the effect display device after the body was turned so as to face each other. The lower back movable decorative body, upper back movable decorative body, back upper left movable decorative body, back lower left movable decorative body, back upper right movable decorative body, and back lower right movable decorative body were moved from the normal state to the second united position. It is a front view of the game board showing a state. From the state of FIG. 166, the lower back movable decorative body, the upper back movable decorative body, the back upper left movable decorative body, the back lower left movable decorative body, the back upper right movable decorative body, and the back lower right movable decorative body are moved to the first combined position. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which was set. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the 1st design was made to light-emission decoration in the light guide plate of the presentation effect unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where the 2nd design was made to light-emission decoration in the light guide plate of the presentation effect unit. 168 and FIG. 169 are front views of the game board showing a second pattern of the display effect unit of the embodiment different from that of FIG. The first pattern is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate of the display effect unit, and the lower back movable decorative body, the upper back movable decorative body, the back left upper movable movable body, the back lower left movable decorative body, the back upper right movable decorative body, and the lower right lower back are provided. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where a movable ornament was moved to the second union position. The first pattern is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate of the display effect unit, and the lower back movable decorative body, the upper back movable decorative body, the back left upper movable movable body, the back lower left movable decorative body, the back upper right movable decorative body, and the lower right lower back are provided. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state where a movable ornament was moved to the first union position. 172, the second pattern is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate of the display effect unit according to the embodiment different from that of FIG. 172, and the lower back movable decorative body, the upper back movable decorative body, the lower left upper movable movable body, the lower left lower movable movable body, the upper right lower back It is a front view of the game board which shows the movable decorative body and the back lower right movable decorative body moved to the first united position. It is a front exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. It is a back exploded perspective view of a peripheral control unit. It is a front view of a peripheral control unit. FIG. 177 is a cross-sectional view taken along line XX of FIG. 176. FIG. 176 is a view as viewed from the direction indicated by the arrow A in FIG. 176. It is a block diagram showing roughly the control structure of a pachinko machine. It is a block diagram which shows the outline of the connection relationship with a panel drive board. FIG. 180 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. 180. It is a figure showing composition of a frame earth board. FIG. 2 is a circuit diagram illustrating an outline of a circuit configuration of a power supply board. It is the perspective view which expanded the power supply board partially. FIG. 189 is a view as viewed from the direction of the arrow B in FIG. 184. FIG. 9 is a silk printing (part 1) of an electronic component printed on a mounting surface of a power supply board. FIG. 9 is a silk printing (part 2) of the electronic component printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board. It is a perspective view explaining the outline of a production discontinuation electronic component. This is a configuration of a measure against a commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment. FIG. 3 is a schematic circuit diagram illustrating a circuit of a main control board. It is a schematic circuit diagram which shows the circuit of a payout control board. FIG. 4 is a perspective view illustrating an outline of wiring to a substrate treated as a main substrate. It is a block diagram explaining electrical connection of each decoration board with which a door frame is provided. It is a block diagram showing an example of a decoration board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit. It is a block diagram showing an example of a decoration board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits. It is a schematic diagram of an arrangement method of an LED constant current drive circuit. FIG. 210 is an enlarged view of a part D in FIG. 196 as viewed from a surface where no LED is mounted. This is a configuration of a countermeasure such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment. This is a configuration of a measure against a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment. FIG. 213 is an enlarged view of the D ′ part of FIG. 198 or the D ″ part of FIG. 199 as viewed from the LED non-mounting surface. This is a configuration of a countermeasure such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 201 is an enlarged view of a D ″ ″ part in FIG. 201 as viewed from a surface where LEDs are not mounted. It is a block diagram which shows an example of the decoration board provided with a magnetic pole change detection circuit etc. It is a flowchart which shows an example of the process at the time of main control side power-on. 204 is a flowchart showing the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIG. 204. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a main control timer interrupt process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power supply of a payment control part. 207 is a flowchart showing a continuation of the power-on processing of the payout control unit in FIG. 207. 210 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the processing at the time of turning on the power of the payout control unit, following FIG. 208. It is a flowchart which shows an example of a payout control part timer interruption process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of processing at the time of power supply of a peripheral control part. 9 is a flowchart illustrating an example of a peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part 1ms timer interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control part command reception interruption processing. It is a flow chart which shows an example of peripheral control section power failure notice signal interruption processing. It is a modification of a dispensing device. FIG. 3 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

[1. Overall structure of pachinko machine]
A pachinko machine 1 according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 1 is a front view of a pachinko machine according to an embodiment of the present invention. FIG. 2 is a right side view of the pachinko machine, FIG. 3 is a left side view of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 4 is a rear view of the pachinko machine. 5 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the right front, FIG. 6 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the front left, and FIG. 7 is a perspective view of the pachinko machine viewed from the back. FIG. 8 is a front view of the pachinko machine when the pressing operation unit of the effect operation unit is in the ascending position, and FIG. is there. 10 and 11 are perspective views of the pachinko machine viewed from the front with the door frame opened from the main frame and the main frame opened from the outer frame. FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the pachinko machine disassembled into a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 13 shows the pachinko machine as a door frame, a game board, a main body frame, and an outer frame. FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the disassembled device viewed from behind.

  The pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment includes a frame-shaped outer frame 2 installed in an island facility (not shown) of a game hall, a door frame 3 that closes the front of the outer frame 2 so that it can be opened and closed, and a door frame 3. A main body frame 4 that is supported so as to be openable and closable and is mounted on the outer frame 2 so as to be openable and closable, and a player that is detachably attached to the main body frame 4 from the front side and is visible from the player side through the door frame 3 And a game board 5 having a game area 5a into which a game ball B (see FIG. 106) is driven.

  The outer frame 2 is formed as a rectangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically. The outer frame 2 connects the upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 with the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 extending vertically and separated from each other. The outer frame upper member 30, the outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 to each other, and the outer frame upper member 30 And an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the upper outer frame assembly 40.

  The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility of a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and the upper frame hinge assembly 50 and the lower frame lower hinge member 60 allow the outer frame 2 to be connected to the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame. The lower frame hinge assembly 520 is rotatably supported coaxially, and the main body frame 4 is attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in front view.

  Also, when the main frame 4 is closed, the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 to form a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. Is formed, and the sound output to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 is inverted in phase and radiated forward, so that the player can hear a deeper sound.

  The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by a player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1.

  In addition, the door frame 3 is provided with an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player separately from the handle 182. When the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates the effect operation unit 301. Thus, the player can participate in the effect, and the player can be entertained by operating the effect operation unit 301 in addition to the game using the game ball B.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body frame base unit 500 whose rear portion can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and can support the outer periphery of the game board 5. Hinge member 510 and lower hinge assembly 520 for mounting the door frame 3 so that it can be opened and closed and the door frame 3 to be opened and closed, and a metal frame reinforcing frame 530 for reinforcing the body frame base unit 500. And a ball launching device 540 for hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a of the game board 5, a payout base unit 550 for receiving the game ball B supplied from the island equipment of the game hall, and a payout base unit 550. A payout unit 560 for paying out the received game balls B to the player side, a board unit 620 having a power supply board 630 and a payout control board 633, and attached to the main body frame base 501 A back cover 640 that covers the rear side of the game board 5 includes outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and the locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, a.

  The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side, and uses the game ball B used for the game. To the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall). The main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape having an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The main body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facility of the game hall above and below the front left side front end, and the door frame 3 is closed so that the open front side is closed. Is mounted so that it can be opened and closed.

  The game board 5 includes a game area 5a in which a game ball B is played by a player's operation, a front component 1000 that divides the outer periphery of the game area 5a and has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, A plate-shaped game panel 1100 attached to the rear side and defining the rear end of the game area 5a, a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and a board attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a cage main control board 1310, a function display unit 1400 for displaying a game situation based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a centrally arranged game area 5a in front view; An effect display device 1600 capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a rear side of the game panel 1100 and a rear surface side of the effect display device 1600. A peripheral control unit 1500 is configured as that the transparent substrate box, and a table unit 2000 attached to the front of the gaming panel 1100, a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100, the. The back unit 3000 includes various effect units capable of performing a movable effect or a light emitting effect according to a game state.

  In the game area 5a of the game board 5, a plurality of obstacle nails that are in contact with the game balls B and are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement, and a predetermined privilege ( For example, a general winning opening 2001 for giving out a predetermined number of game balls B), a first starting opening 2002, a gate unit 2003, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 are provided. The obstacle nail N is implanted in the front of the game panel 1100. The general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate unit 2003, the second starting opening 2004, and the big winning opening 2005 are provided in the front unit 2000.

  In the gaming area 5 a of the gaming board 5, the player can hit the game ball B by operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. Thereby, the game ball B is received or passed through the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate unit 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the like in the game area 5a. In addition, the player can enjoy the driving operation of the handle 182.

  In addition, the game board 5 displays a predetermined effect image on the effect display device 1600 according to the game state that is changed by hitting the game ball B into the game area 5a, or the front effect unit 2600, the back lower effect. The player can enjoy the movable effect and the luminous effect by various effect units such as the unit 3100, the back upper effect unit 3200, the back left effect unit 3300, and the back right effect unit 3400.

[2. Overall configuration of outer frame]
The outer frame 2 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 14 is a front view of an outer frame of the pachinko machine, FIG. 15 is a rear view of the outer frame, and FIG. 15 is a right side view of the outer frame. FIG. 17 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 18 is a perspective view of the outer frame as viewed from the rear. FIG. 19 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame disassembled into main members and viewed from the front. The outer frame 2 is attached to an island facility (not shown) in which the pachinko machine 1 is installed, such as a game hall. The outer frame 2 is formed as a rectangular frame whose front view shape extends vertically.

  As shown, the outer frame 2 includes an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20 that are vertically separated and extend vertically, and an outer frame left assembly 10 and an outer frame right assembly 20. An outer frame upper member 30 connecting upper ends thereof, an outer frame lower assembly 40 connecting lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20, and an upper surface of the outer frame upper member 30 An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 attached to the left end, an outer frame lower hinge member 60 attached to the lower right side of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the upper left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 are provided. ing.

  The outer frame 2 forms a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 when the outer frame lower assembly 40 cooperates with the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main frame 4 when the main frame 4 is closed. In addition, the sound output to the rear of the main frame speaker 622 can be radiated forward with its phase inverted.

  The outer frame 2 allows the outer frame hinge assembly 50 to detachably support the body frame upper hinge member 510 of the body frame 4. The outer frame 2 supports the upper body frame hinge member 510 and the lower body frame hinge assembly 520 of the main body frame 4 coaxially and rotatably by the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 and the outer frame lower hinge member 60. The main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable forward with the left side as the center in front view.

[2-1. Outer frame left assembly and outer frame right assembly]
The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 20 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame left assembly and the outer frame right assembly of the outer frame, which are respectively disassembled and viewed from the front. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2 extend up and down, and are disposed apart from each other left and right. The outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 support the main frame upper hinge member 510 and the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4 so as to be rotatable coaxially. This is for mounting the main body frame 4 so that it can be opened and closed.

  First, the outer frame left assembly 10 includes an outer frame left member 11 extending vertically in a front-rear direction with a constant width (depth), and an upper left connecting member 12 attached to an upper right end of the outer frame left member 11. And a lower left connecting member 13 attached to the lower end of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11.

  The outer frame left member 11 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame left member 11 has a concave portion 11a that is flatly depressed rightward in a rear portion of the left side surface obtained by dividing the front-rear direction into three equal parts, and a right portion from a portion opposite to the concave portion 11a in the right side surface. It has a bulging portion 11b bulging to the right and a hollow portion 11c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 11b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame left member 11 are increased by the concave portion 11a and the bulging portion 11b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 11c.

  The outer frame left member 11 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right side surfaces. The plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame left member 11 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame right member 21 of the outer frame right assembly 20 described later.

  The upper left connecting member 12 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper left connecting member 12 includes a flat horizontal fixing portion 12a extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 12b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 12a, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 12c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b on the left side of 12a. The upper left connecting member 12 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper left connecting member 12 allows the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c to be inserted into the hollow portion 11c of the outer frame left member 11, and causes the horizontal fixing portion 12a to abut on the upper end of the outer frame left member 11; By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 12c from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11 with the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 12c abutting on the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. , Attached to the outer frame left member 11. The upper left connecting member 12 makes the horizontal fixing portion 12a abut on the lower surface on the left end side of the outer frame upper member 30 and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b into the cutout portion 30a on the left side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 12a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 12b, whereby the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower left connecting member 13 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame left member 11 and the left end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (the outer frame lower member 41). The lower left connecting member 13 has a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 13a, and a flat upper and lower side extending upward from the left side of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 13a. A fixing portion 13b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 13c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b behind the horizontal fixing portion, and a right side from a rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b. And a flat contact portion 13d extending short. The lower left connecting member 13 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower left connecting member 13 causes the rear surface of the contact portion 13d to contact the front surface of the bulging portion 11b of the outer frame left member 11, and the left side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b to the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11. In contact with the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower end of the outer frame left member 11, a screw is screwed into the upper horizontal fixing portion 13b from the outside of the left side surface of the outer frame left member 11, so that the outer side is fixed. It is attached to the frame left member 11. The lower left connecting member 13 causes the horizontal fixing portion 13a to abut on the upper surface on the left end side of the outer frame lower member 41 and causes the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c to be inserted into the cutout portion 41a on the left side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 13a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c, thereby being attached to the outer frame lower member 41.

  Next, an outer frame right assembly 20 includes an outer frame right member 21 extending vertically in a front-rear direction with a constant width (depth), and an upper right connecting member attached to an upper left end of the outer frame right member 21. 22, a lower right connecting member 23 attached to the lower end of the left side of the outer frame right member 21, an upper hooking member 24 attached to the upper left side of the outer frame right member 21, and an outer frame right member 21. A lower hook member 25 attached to the lower part of the left side surface.

  The outer frame right member 21 extends vertically with a constant cross-sectional shape, and is formed of an extruded aluminum alloy material. The outer frame right member 21 has a concave portion 21a which is flatly depressed to the left at a rear portion of the right-side surface where the front-rear direction is divided into three equal parts, and a left portion which is leftward from a portion opposite to the concave portion 21a on the left side surface. It has a bulging portion 21b bulging in the upward direction, and a hollow portion 21c vertically penetrating the bulging portion 21b. The strength and rigidity of the outer frame right member 21 are increased by the concave portion 21a and the bulging portion 21b, and the weight is reduced by the hollow portion 21c.

  The outer frame right member 21 has a plurality of vertically extending grooves formed on both left and right sides. The plurality of grooves on the right side are formed in a V shape, and the plurality of grooves on the left side are formed in a semicircular shape. The outer frame right member 21 is formed symmetrically with the outer frame left member 11 of the outer frame left assembly 10.

  The upper right connecting member 22 is for connecting the upper end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame upper member 30. The upper right connecting member 22 includes a flat horizontal fixing portion 22a extending horizontally, a flat upper horizontal fixing portion 22b extending upward from the middle in the front-rear direction on the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 22a, and a horizontal fixing portion. And a pair of lower horizontal fixing portions 22c extending downward from both front and rear sides of the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b on the right side of 22a. The upper right connecting member 22 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The upper right connecting member 22 inserts the rear lower fixing portion 22c into the hollow portion 21c of the outer frame right member 21 and makes the horizontal fixing portion 22a abut on the upper end of the outer frame right member 21. By screwing a screw into the lower horizontal fixing portion 22c from outside the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21 with the rear lower horizontal fixing portion 22c abutting on the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. , Attached to the outer frame right member 21. The upper right connecting member 22 causes the horizontal fixing portion 22a to abut on the lower surface on the right end side of the outer frame upper member 30, and inserts the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b into the cutout portion 30a on the right side of the outer frame upper member 30. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame upper member 30 through the horizontal fixing portion 22a and the upper horizontal fixing portion 22b, whereby the outer frame upper member 30 is attached to the outer frame upper member 30.

  The lower right connecting member 23 is for connecting the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and the right end of the outer frame lower assembly 40 (the outer frame lower member 41). The lower right connecting member 23 has a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal fixing portion 23a, and a flat plate-like upper portion extending upward from the right side of the horizontal fixing portion 23a and extending rearward from the horizontal fixing portion 23a. The horizontal fixing portion 23b, a flat lower horizontal fixing portion 23c extending downward from a portion of the lower side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b behind the horizontal fixing portion, and a left side from the rear side of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b. And a flat contact portion 23d extending shortly toward the right side. The lower right connecting member 23 is formed by bending a flat metal plate.

  The lower right connecting member 23 causes the rear surface of the contact portion 23d to abut on the front surface of the bulging portion 21b of the outer frame right member 21 and the right side surface of the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21. By contacting the lower surface of the horizontal fixing portion 23a with the lower end of the outer frame right member 21 and screwing a screw into the upper horizontal fixing portion 23b from outside the right side surface of the outer frame right member 21, It is attached to the outer frame right member 21. The lower right connecting member 23 makes the horizontal fixing portion 23a abut on the upper surface on the right end side of the outer frame lower member 41, and inserts the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c into the cutout portion 41a on the right side of the outer frame lower member 41. In this state, a screw is screwed into the outer frame lower member through the horizontal fixing portion 23a and the lower horizontal fixing portion 23c, whereby the outer frame lower member 41 is attached.

  The upper hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25 are used to hook an outer frame hook 653 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 described later. The upper hooking member 24 extends up and down with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is a flat attachment portion 24a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 24a. And a plate-shaped hooking piece 24b on which the hook 653 for the outer frame on the cage is hooked.

  The lower hook member 25 extends up and down with a constant width in the front-rear direction, and is a flat attachment portion 25a attached to the left side surface of the outer frame right member 21, and extends leftward from the front side of the attachment portion 25a. And a flat-shaped hooking piece 25b on which the lower outer frame hook 653 is hooked, and an insertion through which the lower outer frame hook 653 penetrates forward and backward through the hooking piece 25b. And a mouth 25c.

[2-2. Outer frame member]
The outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame upper member 30 is for connecting upper ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated to the left and right. The outer frame upper member 30 has a width in the front-rear direction substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by The outer frame upper member 30 is formed to have the same length in the left-right direction as the length in the left-right direction of the outer frame lower member 41 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 described later.

  The outer frame upper member 30 is provided with cutouts 30a that are respectively depressed toward the center in the left-right direction while penetrating vertically at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right sides. The upper left and right fixing members 12b and the upper and right fixing members 22b of the upper right connecting member 22 are attached to the cutouts 30a at both left and right ends, respectively.

  Further, the outer frame upper member 30 includes a mounting step portion 30b in which the upper surface and the front surface are depressed from the general surface at the left end. An outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 described later is attached to the attachment step 30b.

[2-3. Outer frame lower assembly]
The outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 21 is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame lower assembly of the outer frame as viewed from the front. The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 which are separated to the left and right, and closes the lower side of the pachinko machine 1 below the door frame 3. It is for decoration.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 connects the lower ends of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the outer frame right assembly 20 that are separated to the left and right, and extends left and right, and an outer frame lower member 41, A box-shaped front panel member 42 that is disposed in front of the member 41, extends left and right along the outer frame lower member 41, and has an open rear, and is attached to the rear side of the front panel member 42. A left and right box-shaped curtain plate rear member 43 that is attached to the upper surface of the outer frame lower member 41 and is open frontward, and a ball bite prevention formed at the left end of the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43 And a mechanism 44.

  The outer frame lower member 41 has a width in the front-rear direction that is substantially the same as the front-rear direction of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21, a constant vertical thickness, and extends in the left-right direction. Is formed by The length of the outer frame lower member 41 in the left-right direction is formed to be the same as the length of the outer frame upper member 30 in the left-right direction.

  The outer frame lower member 41 includes cutouts 41a which are respectively depressed toward the center in the left-right direction while being vertically penetrated at the center in the front-rear direction on both left and right sides. The lower horizontal connecting portion 13c and the lower horizontal connecting portion 23c of the lower right connecting member 23 are attached to the cutouts 41a at both left and right ends, respectively, in a state where the lower horizontal fixing portion 13c and the lower right connecting member 23 are inserted. Thereby, the lower ends of the outer frame left member 11 and the outer frame right member 21 can be connected to each other.

  The outer frame lower member 41 is concave from the upper surface, and has a concave portion 41b into which the lower portion of the curtain plate rear member 43 is inserted. The concave portion 41b extends to the left and right, and escapes to the front end side from a rearward position at the center in the front-rear direction. The concave portion 41b maximizes the capacity of the curtain plate internal space 40a formed by the curtain plate front member 42 and the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The curtain plate front member 42 has a length in the left-right direction extending to the same length as the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a horizontally long rectangular parallelepiped box shape having a short depth in the front-rear direction with respect to the height, The entire rear side is open. The front panel 42 is closed by the rear panel 43 so that the open rear side cooperates with the rear panel 43 to become a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. A space 40a is formed. The curtain plate front member 42 has a long hole-shaped opening 42a that penetrates in the front-rear direction and extends right and left on the front surface near the right end.

  The curtain plate rear member 43 has a length in the left-right direction slightly shorter than the outer frame lower member 41, and is formed in a box shape with an open front. By attaching the front panel 42 to the front side of the rear panel 43, the front panel 42 cooperates with the front panel 42 to form a panel internal space 40a that becomes a part of the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622. The rear part 43 of the curtain plate has a tubular connection tube part 43a extending left and right and projecting upward at the center in the left-right direction on the upper surface and communicating with the curtain plate internal space 40a. The connection cylinder portion 43a is inclined such that the upper end is located upward as it goes rearward from the front end side, which coincides with a general upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. In the present embodiment, the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees.

  The connecting cylinder portion 43a is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is about ３ of the entire length of the rear plate 43, and the depth in the front-rear direction is greater than the depth of the whole rear member 43. Are also slightly shorter. A plurality of ribs 43b connecting the front end side and the rear end side are provided in the connection tube portion 43a. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 of the speaker unit 620 a of the board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 is connected to the upper end of the connection cylinder 43 a. The enclosure 624a is in communication with the internal space of 620a.

  The ball-meshing preventing mechanism 44 causes the game ball B to stay between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 by staying the game ball B at the outer frame lower hinge member 60 at the left end on the upper surface of the curtain plate rear member 43. This is for preventing the pinching.

  The ball bite prevention mechanism 44 is formed at the left end of the upper surface of the rear panel member 43, and has a mounting portion 44 a formed flat so as to be touched by an outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later; A first discharge port 44b opening upward at the left end of 44a, a second discharge port 44c opening upward to the right of the first discharge port 44b of the mounting portion 44a, A standing wall portion 44d extending upward from the rear side and the right side of the placing portion 44a; and an upper end protrusion projecting forward from the upper end of the standing wall portion 44d and being inclined so that the upper surface is located upward as going backward. A portion 44e.

  The first discharge port 44b is formed at a position corresponding to a discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 described later. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c are formed in a size that allows the game balls B to pass. The first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c do not communicate with the inner space 40a of the curtain plate, and open to the rear surface of the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. Therefore, the game balls B that have entered the first discharge port 44b and the second discharge port 44c can be discharged to the rear of the curtain plate rear member 43.

  The ball biting prevention mechanism 44 is used when an illegal tool such as a piano wire is inserted through a gap between the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and a body frame lower hinge assembly 520 described later. The standing wall portion 44d that rises from the rear end of the mounting portion 44a can prevent unauthorized entry of a tool. Even if the tip of the incorrect tool abuts on the upright wall portion 44d, even if it bends upward, it comes into contact with the forwardly projecting upper end protruding portion 44e provided at the upper end of the upright wall portion 44d, and further intrusion occurs. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent a fraudulent act from being performed through the portion of the outer frame lower hinge member 60.

  By the way, in the case where the standing wall portion 44d is provided at the rear end of the placing portion 44a, when the main body frame 4 is opened with respect to the outer frame 2, the game sphere B that has fallen on the placing portion 44a for some reason becomes the standing wall portion. Since the rearward movement of the outer frame 2 is prevented by 44d, the game balls B easily stay on the placing portion 44a. When the game balls B are staying on the placing portion 44a, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B are sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4. As a result, there occurs a problem that the main frame 4 cannot be closed.

  On the other hand, in the ball biting prevention mechanism 44 of the present embodiment, the game ball B that has fallen on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 or the placing portion 44a is transferred to the discharge hole 60d of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 and the first hole 60d. Through the discharge port 44b or the second discharge port 44c, the game ball B can be discharged to the rear of the rear panel member 43 (the rear of the outer frame 2), and between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is possible to prevent the game ball B from being pinched.

  The outer frame lower assembly 40 closes the pair of guide members 45 disposed on the upper surfaces of the front panel 42 and the rear panel 43 so as to be separated from each other, and the opening 42a of the front panel 42 from the rear side. A grill member 46 having a flat plate shape, and a port member 47 having two cylinders that are attached to the inside of the curtain plate front member 42 so as to close the opening 42a with the grill member 46 interposed therebetween and have two cylinders extending in the front and rear directions. And a frame-shaped seal member 48 disposed at the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43.

  When the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the pair of guide members 45 abuts on the lower ends of the door frames 3. The guide member 45 is made of a low-friction material having a low frictional resistance, makes the lower end of the main body frame 4 easy to slide, and facilitates opening and closing.

  The grill member 46 is formed of a punching metal having countless small holes. The port member 47 communicates the curtain plate inner space 40 a (enclosure 624) with the front of the outer frame 2 via the grill member 46 by two cylinders. The port member 47 has two cylinders formed with a predetermined inner diameter and a predetermined length, and resonates and amplifies a low sound emitted rearward (in the enclosure 624) from the main frame speaker 622 by the principle of Helmholtz resonance. Thus, a rich bass can be radiated to the front of the outer frame 2 (the player side). That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear heavy bass.

  When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the seal member 48 is sandwiched between the upper end of the connection tubular portion 43 a and the lower end of the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621 in the main body frame 4 and is compressed. This prevents sound in the speaker enclosure from leaking from between the connection tube 43a and the connection 621c.

[2-4. Hinge assembly on outer frame]
The outer frame hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 22 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame upper hinge assembly of the outer frame 2 as viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 22 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the outer frame 2 as viewed from the lower front. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the outer frame left assembly 10 and the left end of the outer frame upper member 30, and is for attaching the main body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinged. It is. The outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 is attached to the upper end of the concave portion 11a of the outer frame left member 11 and the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51. And a mounting screw 53 for mounting the lock member 52 to the hinge member 51 on the outer frame.

  The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped upper fixing portion 51a attached to the upper surface of the mounting step 30b of the outer frame upper member 30, and extends forward from the front side of the upper fixing portion 51a. A flat front extending portion 51b, a bearing groove 51c extending vertically from the middle of the right side of the front extending portion 51b to the left and right center of the front extending portion 51b, and an upper fixing portion; A flat horizontal fixing portion 51d extending downward from the left side of 51a, and a lower portion extending from the edge extending from the left side to the front side of the front extension portion 51b to a portion where the bearing groove 51c is open. And a flat edge wall portion 51e that is continuous with the cage horizontal fixing portion 51d. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding. The outer frame upper hinge member 51 can rotatably support a body frame upper hinge pin 512 of the body frame upper hinge member 510 described later in the bearing groove 51c.

  The lock member 52 includes a band-shaped lock body 52a extending forward and backward, an operation piece 52b protruding rightward from a rear end of the lock body 52a, and a lock member 52 extending leftward from a rear end of the lock body 52a. An elastically deformable rod-like elastic portion 52c extending diagonally left forward and a mounting hole 52d vertically penetrating near the rear end of the lock body 52a are provided. The lock member 52 is formed of a synthetic resin. The lock member 52 is rotatably mounted on the lower surface of the front extension portion 51b of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by a mounting screw 53 at a position rearward of the bearing groove 51c.

  When the lock member 52 is attached to the outer frame upper hinge member 51, the lock body 52 a can block the bearing groove 51 c in plan view, and the right side near the front end is the end of the outer frame upper hinge member 51. The edge wall portion 51e extends forward so as to be able to contact a portion extending to the opening of the bearing groove 51c. The distal end of the elastic portion 52c extending leftward from the rear end of the lock body 52a is in contact with the inner peripheral surface of the edge wall 51e of the outer frame hinge member 51. The lock member 52 is urged by the urging force of the elastic portion 52c in a direction in which the front end rotates leftward about the mounting hole 52d. Therefore, in a normal state, the right side surface near the front end of the lock body 52a of the lock member 52 is in contact with the edge wall 51e. In this state, a space is formed in the bearing groove 51c at a position on the front side of the lock body 52a so as to accommodate the hinge pin 512 on the body frame of the hinge member 510 on the body frame.

  By operating the operation piece 52b, the lock member 52 can rotate the lock body 52a against the urging force of the elastic portion 52c. Then, by operating the operation piece 52b, the lock body 52a is rotated in the direction in which the front end moves to the left, whereby the lock body 52a can be retracted from the bearing groove 51c in a plan view, and the bearing groove 51c Can be in a state of being all over. Thus, the upper hinge pin 512 can be inserted into the bearing groove 51c, or the upper hinge pin 512 can be removed from the bearing groove 51c.

[2-5. Hinge member under outer frame]
The outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 includes a horizontally extending flat plate-like horizontal portion 60a, and a flat plate-like rising portion 60b that rises upward from a portion on the left side of the horizontal portion 60a behind the center in the front-rear direction. An outer frame lower hinge pin 60c protruding upward from the vicinity of the front end of the horizontal portion 60a, and a discharge hole 60d sized to penetrate vertically through the horizontal portion 60a and allow only one game ball B to pass therethrough. ing. The outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed by punching and bending a metal plate by press molding.

  The horizontal portion 60a of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is formed in a trapezoid with the left side as the bottom side in plan view. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c has a columnar shape, and is formed in a truncated conical shape in which the upper end is narrower at the upper portion than the center in the vertical direction. The outer frame lower hinge pin 60c is attached to a position near the left near the front end of the horizontal portion 60a. The discharge hole 60d is formed in the horizontal portion 60a so as to be in contact with a central portion in the front-rear direction of the rising portion 60b and to extend rightward from the left side of the horizontal portion 60a in an inverted U-shape. The discharge hole 60d is formed to have substantially the same size as the first discharge port 44b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40.

  When the outer frame lower hinge member 60 is assembled to the outer frame 2, the rear portion of the horizontal portion 60 a is mounted on the mounting portion 44 a of the curtain plate rear member 43 in the outer frame lower assembly 40, and a screw (not shown) is provided. Thus, it is fixed to the rear member 43 of the curtain plate. The rising portion 60b is attached to a portion of the right side surface of the outer frame left member 11 on the front side of the bulging portion 11b by a screw (not shown). The outer frame lower hinge member 60 cooperates with the outer frame upper hinge member 51 by inserting the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c into the outer frame lower hinge hole 521a of the main frame lower hinge assembly 520 of the main frame 4. Thus, the main body frame 4 can be attached so as to be openable and closable.

  When the outer frame 2 is assembled, the discharge holes 60 d coincide with the first discharge ports 44 b of the ball bite prevention mechanism 44 in the outer frame lower assembly 40. Thereby, the game ball B on the horizontal portion 60a can be dropped (discharged) behind the outer frame 2 through the discharge hole 60d and the first discharge port 44b. More specifically, when the main frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the game balls B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the outer frame 2 and the main frame are closed as the main frame 4 is closed. 4 gradually narrows, so that the rolling is performed to the rear side with a large interval, and the air can be discharged from the discharge hole 60d. At this time, the discharge hole 60d is formed at a position substantially the same as the rear end of the main body frame 4 when the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2 in a state assembled in the pachinko machine 1. By discharging the game ball B dropped between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 from the discharge hole 60d, it is possible to easily prevent the game ball B from rolling backward from the main body frame 4, and It is possible to make it difficult for the game ball B to stay at the position of the lower hinge member 60.

[3. Overall configuration of door frame]
The door frame 3 of the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 23 is a front view of a door frame in a pachinko machine, FIG. 24 is a rear view of the door frame, FIG. 25 is a left side view of the door frame, and FIG. 26 is a right side view of the door frame. FIG. 27 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 28 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 29 is a perspective view of the door frame viewed from the back. FIG. 30 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 31 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind.

  The door frame 3 is formed in a rectangular shape having substantially the same size as the inside of the outer frame 2 and extending vertically when viewed from the front. The inside of the outer frame 2 can be opened and closed from the front side via the main body frame 4. Have been. The door frame 3 closes the game area 5a of the game board 5 into which the game balls B are driven so as to be visible from the front side, stores the game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and stores the stored games. A handle 182 operated by a player to hit the ball B into the game area 5a is provided. The door frame 3 decorates the entire front of the pachinko machine 1.

  The door frame 3 includes a quadrangular frame-shaped door frame base unit 100 having an outer shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a game board 5 detachably attached to the door frame base unit 100 and attached to the main body frame 4. A glass unit 160 that closes the game area 5a so as to be visible from the front, a security cover 170 attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover a lower part of the glass unit 160 from the rear, and a door frame base unit 100 A handle unit 180 attached to the lower right corner of the front of the tray, a dish unit 200 attached to the lower front of the door frame base unit 100, and an upper side of the dish unit 200 attached to the left front of the door frame base unit 100. The door frame left side unit 400 and the upper side of the plate unit are attached to the right front part of the door frame base unit 100. A frame right side unit 410, and a door frame top unit 450 which is attached to the upper front portion of the door frame base unit 100 at the upper side of the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410, a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame base 101 having a square (rectangular) shape whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically and having a door window 101a that penetrates forward and backward, and a front right side of the door frame base 101. A handle mounting member 102 mounted below, a speaker duct 103 mounted on the rear lower right corner on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and mounted near a rear right lower end on the rear lower portion of the door frame base 101. Door frame main relay board 104, a door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view of the door frame main relay board 104, and a door frame sub relay board 105 attached to the left side of the rear view of the door frame sub relay board 105. The relay frame 106 after the handle, the door frame relay substrate cover 107 that covers a part of the door frame main relay substrate 104 and a part of the door frame sub-relay substrate 105 from the rear side, A handle after the relay board cover 108 for covering a cable cover 109 for covering the distribution cable, and a.

  The door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a hinge assembly 120 on the door frame attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door. An under-frame hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached behind the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the lower right portion of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view.

  The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the door frame base 101 to provide rigidity. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 and the door frame lower hinge member 125 are for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be openable and closable. The cylinder lock 130 is used for opening and closing the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 and for opening and closing the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 in cooperation with the locking unit 650 of the main body frame 4.

  The ball feeding unit 140 is for supplying the game balls B in the upper plate 201 one by one to the ball firing device 540 of the main body frame 4. The foul cover unit 150 guides the game ball B (foul ball) fired by the ball firing device 540 and not reaching the game area 5a of the game board 5 to the lower plate 202 and is paid out from the payout device 580. The game ball B is guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202.

  The glass unit 160 has a transparent glass plate 162 and closes the door window 101a of the door frame base 101. The security cover 170 is attached to the door frame base 101 so as to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. The handle unit 180 includes a handle 182 that can be rotated by a player. By operating the handle 182, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is moved by the ball launching device 540 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. It is for playing a game to drive into.

[3-1. Overall configuration of door frame base unit]
The door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 32A is a perspective view of the door frame base unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 32B is a perspective view of the door frame base unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 33 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 34 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. is there.

  The door frame base unit 100 is mounted on the left side of the main frame 4 so as to be hinged rotatable with respect to the main frame 4, closes the front surface of the main frame 4 so as to be openable and closable, and has a game board mounted on the main frame 4. The game area is visible from the front. The door frame base unit 100 includes a quadrangular flat plate-shaped door frame base 101 having an outer shape extending vertically, a handle mounting member 102 mounted on the lower right of the front surface of the door frame base 101 for mounting the handle unit 180, And a speaker duct 103 attached to the rear lower right corner of the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a door frame main relay board 104 attached near the right end in rear view at a rear lower portion of the door frame base 101 and a door frame main relay at a rear lower portion of the door frame base 101. A door frame sub-relay board 105 mounted on the left side of the board 104 in rear view, and a handle rear relay board mounted on the rear view of the door frame sub-relay board 105 at the rear lower portion of the rear side of the door frame base 101. 106, a door frame relay board cover 107 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to cover a part of the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board 105 from the rear side, and a door frame base 101. And a cover attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 and covering the wiring cable. And Burukaba 109, and a.

  Further, the door frame base unit 100 includes a frame-shaped door frame reinforcement unit 110 attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, a door frame hinge assembly 120 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a door. An under-frame hinge member 125, an opening / closing cylinder lock 130 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and a ball feeding unit 140 attached behind the door frame base 101 and above the rear handle relay board 106. And a foul cover unit 150 attached to the lower right portion of the rear side of the door frame base 101 in rear view.

  The door frame base unit 100 has a handle unit 180 at the lower front corner, a dish unit 200 at the lower front surface of the door window 101a, a door frame left side unit 400 at the left outer front surface of the door window 101a, and a door window 101a. A door frame right side unit 410 is mounted on the right outer front surface, and a door frame top unit 450 is mounted on the upper outer front surface of the door window 101a.

  A glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base unit 100 so as to close the door window 101a from behind, and a transparent security cover 170 is attached to cover the lower part of the glass unit 160 from behind. .

[3-1-1. Door frame base]
The door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame base 101 is formed in a quadrangular (rectangular) shape whose outer shape in a front view extends vertically. The door frame base 101 is provided with a door window 101a that penetrates back and forth, and whose inner peripheral shape in a front view is formed in a substantially rectangular shape extending vertically. The upper side and both left and right sides forming the inner periphery of the door window 101a are close to the outer periphery of the door frame base 101, respectively. The lower side forming the inner periphery is vertically It is located at a height of about 1/3 of the direction. As described above, the entire door frame base 101 is formed in a frame shape by the door windows 101a penetrating front and rear. The door frame base 101 is integrally formed of a synthetic resin.

  The door frame base 101 is formed at the lower right corner in front view of the front surface, and has a handle mounting seat surface 101b whose left end is inclined slightly forward from the right end side, a handle mounting seat surface 101b, and a door window 101a. Between the front side and the right end in the front view, from the rear side to the front side, and into the insertion recess 101c into which the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is inserted, The cylinder insertion hole 101d through which the cylinder body 131 is inserted, and the cylinder insertion hole 101d and the handle mounting seat surface 101b, which penetrate back and forth on the front left side in front view, and pass through the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 in front. And a ball feeding opening 101e for facing the ball.

  Further, the door frame base 101 is located to the left from the center in the left-right direction and penetrates back and forth at substantially the same height as the handle mounting seat surface 101b, and the ball for the lower plate that faces the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150 forward. A passage opening 101f, a ball passage opening 101g for an upper plate that penetrates back and forth so as to be adjacent to a lower side of the door window 101a near the left end in a front view and that faces a through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150; A glass unit mounting portion 101h that is recessed forward from the rear surface along the inner periphery of the window 101a and into which the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 is inserted.

  The door frame base 101 has a plurality of vertically elongated slits 101i formed at the lower left corner in front view (below the upper plate ball passage opening 101g) and penetrating back and forth. A speaker duct 103 is attached to the rear side of the plurality of slits 101i. Further, the plurality of slits 101i are provided such that the speaker port 211b of the dish unit base 211 of the dish unit 200 is located forward and the body frame of the speaker unit 620a of the body frame 4 is located rearward when the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. The speaker 622 is located, and the sound from the main frame speaker 622 can be emitted forward.

  Further, the door frame base 101 is provided with a through hole 101j penetrating back and forth above the handle mounting seat surface 101b below the door window 101a. The through hole 101j is a hole through which a wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame base unit 100 side and the dish unit 200 side is inserted, and penetrates the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110 described later. It is formed so as to coincide with the portion 114b.

[3-1-2. Handle mounting member]
The handle mounting member 102 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The handle mounting member 102 is for mounting a handle unit on the front surface of the door frame base 101, and is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b on the front surface of the door frame base 101.

  The handle mounting member 102 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 102a extending in the front-rear direction, an annular flange portion 102b extending outward from the rear end of the tubular portion 102a in a direction perpendicular to the axis of the tubular portion 102a, A plurality (three in this example) of ridges 102c protruding into the portion 102a and extending over the entire axial length of the cylindrical portion 102a and arranged at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a; And a plurality of reinforcing ribs 102d that connect the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical portion 102a and the front surface of the flange portion 102b and are arranged in a plurality in the circumferential direction of the cylindrical portion 102a.

  The handle mounting member 102 is mounted to the handle mounting seat surface 101b with screws in a state where the rear surface of the flange portion 102b is in contact with the front surface of the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101.

  The inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102a is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 of the handle unit 180. One of the three ridges 102c is provided on the upper part of the cylindrical part 102a, and the other two are provided on the lower part of the cylindrical part 102a. These three ridges 102c are formed at positions corresponding to the three grooves 181c in the handle base 181. Therefore, the handle mounting member 102 can insert the base 181a of the handle base 181 into the cylindrical portion 102a only in a state where the three protrusions 102c and the three grooves 181c of the handle base 181 are aligned. The rotation position of the handle base 181 (handle unit 180) with respect to the door frame base 101 can be regulated.

  The handle mounting member 102 is mounted on the inclined handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 because the axis of the cylindrical portion 102a extends perpendicular to the rear surface of the flange portion 102b. The axis of the cylindrical portion 102a is inclined so as to extend to the front right, and the handle unit 180 can be attached to the door frame base 101 in a state of being similarly inclined.

[3-1-3. Speaker duct]
The speaker duct 103 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The speaker duct 103 is formed in a tubular shape, and is attached to a portion on the rear side of the door frame base 101 where a plurality of slits 101i are formed. The rear end of the tubular portion of the speaker duct 103 is located in front of the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4 in a state where the pachinko machine 1 is assembled. Thus, the sound (sound) emitted (output) from the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4 can be guided forward without being diffused. Through the speaker opening 211b of the plate unit base 211, it is possible to favorably guide the pachinko machine 1 to the front (player side).

  Further, the speaker duct 103 includes a cable holder 103a for holding the connection cable 503 on a rear surface below the cylindrical portion. The cable holder 103a is disposed on the left side in front view of the door frame relay board cover 107, and connects the connection cable 503 connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 to the door frame 3. It is held so as to extend to the left end.

[3-1-4. Door frame main relay board, door frame sub relay board, relay board after handle]
The door frame main relay board 104, the door frame sub relay board 105, and the post-handle relay board 106 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame main relay board 104 is formed in a quadrangular shape whose outer shape extends vertically, and is attached to the lower right corner in rear view at the lower rear portion of the door frame base 101. The door frame main relay board 104 is for relaying the connection between the relay board 106 after the handle and the interface board 635 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4, and the connection cable 503 (FIG. 99) extending from the main body frame 4. And FIG. 100) are connected.

  The door frame sub-relay board 105 is formed in an inverted L-shape in which an external shape is combined with a rectangular shape extending left and right on the right side in a front view of an upper part of a rectangular shape extending vertically and extending vertically. The frame main relay board 104 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to be adjacent to the left side in rear view. The door frame auxiliary relay board 105 includes a handle decorative board 184 of the handle unit 180, a dish unit relay board 214 of the dish unit 200, a door frame left side decorative board 402 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a side of the door frame right side unit 410. It is for relaying the connection between the in-window decorative part decorative board 413, the door frame right side decorative board 418, the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, and the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4. The rest of the connection cable 503 extending from the body frame 4 is connected.

  The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are attached to the door frame base 101 such that the connection terminals protrude rearward. The door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 are assembled with the door frame base unit 100 in such a manner that a portion extending up and down of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 is a door. The rear side is covered by the frame relay board cover 107, and the remaining part of the door frame sub-relay board 105 is covered by the foul cover unit 150 on the rear side.

  The handle relay board 106 is formed in a quadrangular shape extending left and right, and is attached to the rear of the handle attachment seat surface 101b below the ball feed opening 101e on the rear side of the door frame base 101. The relay board 106 after the handle is connected to the door frame main relay board 104 and the handle rotation sensor 189, the handle touch sensor 192, the single-button operation sensor 194 of the handle unit 180, and the ball feed solenoid 145 of the ball feed unit 140. Is for relaying. The relay board 106 after the handle is in a state where the rear side is covered by the relay board cover 108 after the handle in a state where the door frame base unit 100 is assembled.

[3-1-5. Door frame relay board cover, relay board cover after handle, cable cover]
The door frame relay board cover 107, the relay board cover 108 after the handle, and the cable cover 109 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame relay board cover 107 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101, so that the door frame main relay board 104 and a part of the door frame sub relay board (a vertically extending portion in an inverted L-shape) are provided. It covers the side. The door frame relay board cover 107 is formed in a box shape that is open at the front and at the left in front view. When assembled to the door frame base unit 100, the connection terminals of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 covering the rear side are exposed inside the door frame relay board cover 107, and are open. The connection cable 503 can be inserted inside from the left side and connected to these terminals.

  The post-handle relay board cover 108 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 so as to cover the rear side of the post-handle relay board 106. The cable cover 109 is attached to the rear side of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 in the door frame reinforcing unit 110, and connects a wiring cable (not shown) for connecting the door frame main relay board 104 and the ball rental operation unit 220 of the plate unit 200. It is for coating. The cable cover 109 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and an opening for passing a wiring cable is formed near the left end on the front surface and in the center in the left and right direction on the lower surface.

[3-1-6. Door frame reinforcement unit]
The door frame reinforcement unit 110 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 to reinforce the flat door frame base 101 and to provide the door frame base unit 100 with rigidity. The door frame reinforcement unit 110 includes a left reinforcement frame 111 and a right reinforcement frame 112 that are vertically separated and are disposed at right and left sides and a left reinforcement frame 111 and a right reinforcement frame 112 that connect upper ends of the left reinforcement frame 111 and the right reinforcement frame 112 to each other. An extended upper reinforcing frame 113, an intermediate reinforcing frame 114 whose left end is attached to a position closer to the upper side from the lower end of the left reinforcing frame 111 and extends rightward to near the right reinforcing frame 112, and a right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114. A plurality of cylinder mounting frames 115 connecting the right reinforcement frame 112 and a plurality of cylinders are vertically mounted on the rear side of the right reinforcement frame 112 so as to be vertically separated from each other. And a hooking member 116 to be provided.

  The left reinforcing frame 111 and the right reinforcing frame 112 have a constant width in the left-right direction, and extend up and down with a length substantially equal to the vertical height of the door frame base 101. The right reinforcing frame 112 is formed with a plurality of insertion holes that are vertically separated from each other and penetrate in the front-rear direction. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the tip of the door frame hook 652 of the locking unit 650 is inserted into these insertion holes. The upper reinforcement frame 113 has a constant width in the up-down direction, and extends left and right with a length substantially equal to the left and right widths of the door frame base 101.

  The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 extends left and right in a vertical direction that is wider than the vertical width of the upper reinforcing frame 113. The intermediate reinforcing frame 114 has a cutout portion 114a cut squarely downward from the upper end near the left end, and a penetrating portion 114b penetrating back and forth near the right end. The cutout portion 114a is formed at a position that matches the upper plate ball passage opening 101g of the door frame base 101, and the through portion 114b is formed at a position that matches the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101.

  The cylinder mounting frame 115 is spaced apart left and right and has a pair of rear pieces formed in a rectangular flat plate shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and a pair of rear pieces facing each other. A pair of side pieces extending in a flat shape from the sides to the front, and a flat front piece connecting the sides of the front ends of the pair of front extensions are provided. The cylinder mounting frame 115 is formed in a convex shape that projects forward when viewed in plan. The cylinder mounting frame 115 has a left rear piece attached to the right end of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 and a right rear piece attached to the right reinforcing frame 112. A cylinder lock 130 is attached to the front piece of the cylinder attachment frame 115.

  The hook member 116 is attached to the rear side of the right reinforcing frame 112 at a portion of an insertion hole that penetrates forward and backward. The hook members 652 of the locking unit 650 are locked by these hook members 116.

  The left reinforcing frame 111, the right reinforcing frame 112, the upper reinforcing frame 113, the intermediate reinforcing frame 114, the cylinder mounting frame 115, and the hooking member 116 constituting the door frame reinforcing unit 110 are formed by punching a metal plate by press molding. It is formed by bending. These are assembled by rivets.

  In the door frame reinforcement unit 110, the left reinforcement frame 111, the right reinforcement frame 112, and the upper reinforcement frame 113 are assembled along the left side, the right side, and the upper side of the door frame base 101, and the intermediate reinforcement frame 114 is And the door frame base 101 is located below the door window 101a.

  The door frame reinforcement unit 110 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 by a plurality of screws (not shown). When the door frame reinforcing unit 110 is attached to the door frame base 101, the cutout portion 114a and the through portion 114b of the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 match the upper plate ball passage opening 101g and the through hole 101j of the door frame base 101. And the cylinder mounting frame 115 is inserted into the insertion recess 101c of the door frame base 101.

[3-1-7. Hinge assembly on door frame]
The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame is attached to the upper left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in a front view. The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame lower hinge member 125. The hinge assembly 120 on the door frame includes a hinge bracket 121 attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110, a hinge pin 122 attached to the hinge bracket 121 movably in the vertical direction, and a flange attached to the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. It includes a member 123 and a lock spring 124 that urges the hinge pin 122 on the door frame to move upward.

  The hinge bracket 121 includes a flat mounting piece 121a having a rectangular shape in a front view, and a flat protruding piece 121b extending forward from upper and lower sides of the mounting piece 121a. The hinge bracket 121 has a mounting piece 121 a mounted on the door frame reinforcing unit 110. The hinge bracket 121 is formed by bending a metal plate.

  The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is formed by bending a cylindrical metal rod into an L shape. When the hinge pin 122 on the door frame is assembled to the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame, a vertically extending portion penetrates from below near a front end of the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge bracket 121, and an upper end is located on the upper side. A portion that extends upward from the protruding piece 121b and extends horizontally contacts the lower surface of the lower protruding piece 121b. The upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame is rotatably inserted into the upper hinge hole 511 a for the door frame of the upper hinge body 511 of the upper frame body hinge member 510 of the main body frame 4.

  The flange member 123 is an E-ring, and is attached to a portion between the pair of protruding pieces 121b of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The lock spring 124 is formed in a coil shape, and is covered between the flange member 123 and the lower protruding piece 121b of the hinge bracket 121 around a portion extending vertically of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame. The hinge pin 122 on the door frame is urged upward by the lock spring 124 via the flange member 123.

  The door frame upper hinge assembly 120 is in a state in which the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is urged upward by a lock spring 124, and a horizontally extending portion at the lower end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is a lower projecting piece. By abutting on the lower surface of 121b, further upward movement is restricted. In this state, the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame projects a predetermined amount above the upper surface of the upper projecting piece 121b.

  When the horizontally extending portion of the lower end of the upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame is moved downward against the urging force of the lock spring 124, the hinge assembly 120 moves the entire upper hinge pin 122. The upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 can be immersed below the upper surface of the upper protruding piece 121b. Therefore, the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 can insert or pull out the upper end of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the main frame upper hinge member 510. it can. By inserting the upper end of the hinge pin 122 on the door frame into the upper hinge hole 511a for the door frame of the body frame upper hinge member 510, the upper left end of the door frame 3 in the front view can be hinged with respect to the body frame 4. It can be supported as much as possible.

  Further, in the door frame upper hinge assembly 120, a vertically extending portion of the door frame upper hinge pin 122 is located coaxially with a door frame lower hinge pin 126 of a door frame lower hinge member 125 described later. Thus, the door frame 3 can be hinged in a favorable state with respect to the main body frame 4 by the door frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126.

[3-1-8. Hinge member under door frame]
The door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the lower left corner of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 when viewed from the front. The door frame lower hinge member 125 is for attaching the door frame 3 to the main body frame 4 so as to be hinge-rotatable in cooperation with the door frame upper hinge assembly 120.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 is attached to the door frame reinforcement unit 110 and has a rectangular flat plate-like mounting piece 125a in front view, a flat protruding piece 125b extending forward from a lower side of the mounting piece 125a, and a protruding piece. And a hinge pin 126 below the door frame (see FIG. 23) protruding downward from the lower surface near the front end of the front end 125b.

  The mounting piece 125a and the protruding piece 125b of the door frame lower hinge member 125 are formed by bending a metal plate. The hinge pin 126 below the door frame is a cylindrical metal rod, and a tapered chamfer is applied to the outer periphery of the lower end. The hinge pin 126 below the door frame, when assembled to the door frame base unit 100, is coaxial with a portion of the protruding piece 125b that extends vertically above and below the hinge pin 122 on the door frame of the hinge assembly 120 on the door frame. Installed.

  The door frame lower hinge member 125 supports the door frame 3 so that the door frame 3 can be hinge-rotated with respect to the main body frame 4 by inserting the door frame lower hinge pin 126 into the door frame hinge hole of the main frame side lower hinge member. Can be.

[3-1-9. Cylinder lock]
The cylinder lock 130 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The cylinder lock 130 is mounted on the cylinder mounting frame 115 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110, and cooperates with a locking unit 650 described later to open and close the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4, and to open and close the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4. It is used for opening and closing locking. The cylinder lock 130 has a columnar cylinder body 131 extending back and forth, a keyhole 132 formed on the front end face of the cylinder body 131, and a regular lock inserted into the keyhole 132 and attached to the rear side of the cylinder body 131. A rotation transmission member 133 that rotates together with the rotation of the key.

  The cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates the front piece of the cylinder mounting frame 115 from behind, and the rear end is attached to the front piece. The rotation transmitting member 133 is formed in a cylindrical shape with an open rear (specifically, a conical cylindrical shape whose diameter increases toward the rear), and moves forward from the rear end to a position facing the center axis. It has a pair of notches cut out. The rotation transmission member 133 is formed such that the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 is inserted from behind, and the rotation of the rotation transmission member 133 is achieved by inserting a pair of projections of the transmission cylinder 654 into a pair of notches. The rotation of the transmission member 133 (the key inserted into the keyhole 132) can be transmitted to the transmission cylinder 654 and rotated.

  When the cylinder lock 130 is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end of the cylinder main body 131 is substantially aligned with the front end of the cylinder insertion opening 252 h of the plate unit main body 252 in the plate unit 200 (see FIG. 23 and the like).

[3-1-10. Ball feeding unit]
The ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 35A is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 35B is a perspective view of the ball feeding unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 36 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 36 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the ball feeding unit viewed from the rear after removing the rear case and the fraud prevention member. is there. The ball feeding unit 140 can supply the game balls B supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 one by one to the ball launching device 540 of the main body frame 4, and play the game stored in the upper plate 201. The ball B can be pulled out to the lower plate 202 by operating the upper plate pull button 222.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has an entrance 141a through which the game balls B are supplied from the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 and penetrates in the front-rear direction, and a ball outlet 141b opening below the entrance 141a. Is a box-shaped front cover 141 having an open front end, and a game ball which has entered a front cover 141 which is formed in a box shape having a front end opened and closed at the rear end thereof, which penetrates in a front-rear direction. A rear cover 142 having a hit ball supply port 142a for supplying B to the ball firing device 540, and a front cover rotatably supported about an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the rear cover 142 and the front cover 141. At the rear side of the ball 141, a ball removing member 143 having a partition portion 143a for partitioning between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b, and the game balls B on the partition portion 143a of the ball removing member 143 are provided one by one in the rear cover 14. The ball feeding member 144 is rotatably supported around a vertically extending axis between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and the ball feeding member 144 is rotated. And a ball feeding solenoid 145.

  As shown in the drawing, the ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding member 144 disposed on the right side of the entrance 141a when viewed from the front, and a ball ejection member 143 on the left side of the ball feeding member 144. A ball feeding solenoid 145 is arranged on the right side of the feeding member 144.

  The front cover 141 of the ball feeding unit 140 has an arc-shaped slit 141c formed concentrically with the rotation center of the ball ejection member 143 on the left side of the ball outlet 141b in a front view. An operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 described later extends forward from 141c. The front cover 141 has an upper side extending upward from the upper edge of the entrance 141a. When the door frame 3 is assembled, the ball feeding guide path 241b of the rear base 241 in the unit for removing the upper bowl ball 240 is provided. Further, a portion that is open rearward on the upstream end side of the ball guide path 241c is formed to be closed from the rear side.

  The ball removing member 143 has a partition part 143a below the entrance 141a and between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b, the upper surface of which is lower in the direction of the ball feeding member 144, and a partition part 143a. Around the axis extending downward from the end opposite to the ball feeding member 144 and bent in a V-shape from near the center in the vertical direction toward the lower center of the ball outlet 141b, and the lower end extends in the front-rear direction. A rotating rod portion 143b rotatably supported by the rotating rod portion 143b, a rod-shaped operating rod 143c protruding forward from an upper end of the rotating rod portion 143b, and a rotating rod portion 143b below the operating rod 143c. And a weight portion 143d protruding from the side surface to the opposite side to the partition portion 143a. The operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 is formed so as to protrude forward through an arc-shaped slit 141c formed in the front cover 141 (see FIG. 35A). The operating rod 143c is connected to the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray removing slider 242 that moves downward by pressing the upper tray removing button 222 of the tray unit 200 via the ball feeding opening 101e of the door frame base 101 (see FIG. (Upper surface).

  The ball feeding member 144 includes a blocking portion 144a having a fan shape in a plan view centered on a rotation axis extending in the vertical direction and facing the entrance 141a and the partitioning portion 143a of the ball removing member 143, and a rear portion of the blocking portion 144a. The ball holder 144b includes an arc-shaped recess 144b extending from the end toward the rotation axis, and a rod-shaped rod 144c extending downward from the rear end of the ball holder 144b. The blocking portion 144a and the sphere holding portion 144b of the sphere feeding member 144 are formed adjacent to each other within an angle range of about 180 ° about the rotation axis. Further, the ball holding portion 144b of the ball feeding member 144 has a size that can hold one game ball B. The ball feeding member 144 rotates around the axis of rotation by driving the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the rod 144c disposed at a position eccentric to the axis of rotation in the left-right direction.

  The ball feeding member 144 includes a supply position in which the blocking portion 144a faces the direction of the partition portion 143a and a ball holding portion 144b in a direction in which the ball holding portion 144b communicates with the hit ball supply port 142a, and a ball holding portion 144b in which the ball holding portion 144b faces the partition portion 143a. It is designed to pivot between a holding position facing the direction. When the ball feeding member 144 is at the supply position, the game ball B held by the ball holding portion 144b is supplied from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball firing device 540, and enters the partition 143a from the entrance 141a. The game ball B is stopped by the blocking unit 144a from moving toward the ball holding unit 144b (hit ball supply port 142a), and stays on the partition unit 143a (a state where it stays at the standby position). On the other hand, when the ball feeding member 144 rotates to the holding position, the ball holding portion 144b faces the partitioning portion 143a, and the end of the ball holding portion 144b on the rod portion 144c side closes the hit ball supply port 142a. Thus, only one game ball B on the partition portion 143a, which is the standby position, is held in the ball holding portion 144b.

  The ball feeding unit 140 has a ball feeding operation rod 146 whose tip swings up and down by driving (energizing) the ball feeding solenoid 145, and a tip that swings up and down in the ball feeding operation rod 146. And a ball feeding crank 147 for rotating the ball feeding member 144 about an axis extending in the up-down direction while rotating about an axis extending in the front-rear direction by the movement of the ball.

  The ball feeding operation rod 146 includes an iron plate 146 a at a position below the ball feeding solenoid 145. The ball feeding operation rod 146 extends left and right, and is attached to the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142 so that the end (right end) opposite to the ball feeding crank 147 can rotate around an axis extending forward and backward. Have been. When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the iron plate 146a is drawn toward the ball feeding solenoid 145 (upward) by the magnetic force generated when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven. The left end near the crank 147 rotates so as to move upward. Thereafter, when the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released, the magnetic force disappears, and the weight of the iron plate 146a acts, so that the left end side near the ball feeding crank 147 moves around the right end part downward. To return to the initial state. As a result, the ball feeding operation rod 146 causes the ball feeding solenoid 145 to swing the left end (tip) near the ball feeding crank 147 in the vertical direction.

  The ball feeding crank 147 is engaged with the vertically moving tip of the ball feeding operating rod 146 and is engaged with an engaging portion 147a extending in the left-right direction and the ball feeding operating rod 146 of the engaging portion 147a. A shaft 147b that is disposed on the opposite side to the side and that is rotatably supported around an axis extending in the front-rear direction between the front cover 141 and the rear cover 142, and extending upward from the shaft 147b. And a transmission portion 147c that engages with a rod-shaped rod portion 144c (see FIG. 36 (b)) protruding downward from a position eccentric to the center of rotation of the ball feeding member 144.

  The ball feeding unit 140 drives the ball feeding solenoid 145 to move the tip (left end) of the ball feeding operating rod 146 upward, thereby moving the ball feeding crank 147 via the ball feeding operating rod 146. It can be rotated around an axis that extends back and forth.

  When the ball feeding solenoid 145 is not driven (normal time), the ball feeding unit 140 moves the ball feeding operating rod 146 away from the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145 and the tip thereof is positioned downward. In this state, the ball feeding member 144 is located at the supply position. Also, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven, the ball feeding operating rod 146 is sucked by the lower end of the ball feeding solenoid 145, and the tip (left end) is positioned upward, and the ball feeding member 144 is held at the holding position. To rotate. That is, when the ball feeding solenoid 145 is driven (ON state), the ball feeding member 144 receives one game ball B at the standby position, and the driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 is released (OFF). State), the game ball B received by the ball feeding member 144 can be sent (supplied) to the ball firing device 540 side. The driving of the ball feeding solenoid 145 in the ball feeding unit 140 is controlled by the firing control unit 633b (see FIG. 179) of the payout control board 633 in synchronization with the driving control of the firing solenoid 542.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 is configured to apply a moment such that it rotates in a counterclockwise direction as viewed from the front by the ball removing member 143 rotatably supported by the shaft or the weight portion 143d. However, the operating rod 143c protruding forward of the ball removing member 143 contacts the upper end of the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper ball removing slider 242 operated by pressing the upper ball removing button 222 of the plate unit 200. In the normal state, the partitioning portion 143a of the ball removing member 143 is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball removing portion 141b to partition the ball. The game ball B does not invade.

  Then, when the player presses the upper plate removing button of the plate unit downward, the upper plate removing slider slides downward together with the operation transmitting portion, and the operating rod 143c moves with the downward movement of the operation transmitting portion. Also move relatively downward. When the operating rod 143c moves downward together with the operation transmitting portion, the ball removing member 143 rotates counterclockwise in front view, and the partition 143a moves from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b to partition. Is released. As a result, the game ball B entered from the entrance 141a falls to the ball outlet 141b side, and is discharged from the ball outlet 141b to the ball guide path 241c of the unit 240 after the upper plate ball is removed from the plate unit 200, It can be discharged (supplied) to the lower plate 202 via the lower plate ball supply port 211c.

  In addition, since the upper countersunk ball removing slider 242 in which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the operating member 143c of the removing member 143 contacts is formed by the spring 243, the game ball B is placed on the partition 143a. , The impact can be absorbed by the spring 243 via the operating rod 143c, the ball punching member 143 and the like can be prevented from being damaged, and the game ball B can be separated from the partitioning portion. At 143a, it is possible to prevent bouncing.

  Further, the ball feeding unit 140 has a rectangular mounting recess 142b (see FIG. 36 (b) and the like) which is recessed forward and to the upper right in the rear view of the hit ball supply port 142a in the rear cover 142, and The operation line invalidating member 700, which is the first fraud prevention means, is mounted in the mounting recess 142b. The operation line nullifying member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140 is formed of a hard metal plate such as tool steel or stainless steel, and is detachably attached to the inside of the attachment recess 142b of the rear cover 142 from the rear side. I have. Here, the invalidation of the operation line means that the operation line cannot be normally operated because the operation line is cut or pinched (pinched and stopped) or entangled (rolled up) or adhered by hot melt or the like. It refers to the state.

  The operation line disabling member 700 is formed in a rectangular shape having an outer shape in a front view extending left and right, and is vertically separated at a substantially vertical center at a predetermined distance from the right side to the left. The inclined portion 703 formed in a C-chamfered shape at the tip end side (right end side in front view) of the opposing sides of the first and second piece portions 701 and 702 and the first and second piece portions 702 and 702, respectively. And The first piece 701 of the operation line nullifying member 700 is bent with respect to the flat surface of the operation line nullifying member 700 such that the right end in front view in FIG. On the other hand, the second piece 702 extends on the same plane as the flat surface of the operation line nullifying member 700. Thus, in plan view, the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 form a shearing portion 700v that spreads in a V-shape toward the right.

  The operation line nullifying member 700 is attached to the attachment concave portion 142b of the rear cover 142, so that the V-shaped shearing portion 700v formed by the first piece portion 701 and the second piece portion 702 is located inside the hit ball supply port 142a. It is in a state of communicating with.

  According to the operation line nullifying member 700, an unauthorized ball (a game ball or a metal ball having substantially the same diameter as the game ball) to which a flexible string-shaped operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire, or a catheter) is attached. Or, a synthetic resin ball having substantially the same diameter as that) is driven from the upper plate 201 into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 via the ball feeding unit 140, and comes out to the upper plate 201 side attached to the illegal ball. The game is played by the ball launching device 540 when an operation line is operated to form an illegal ball flow path using an illegal ball, or when an illegal act such as moving an illegal ball into and out of the first starting port 2002 is performed. The operation line attached to the illegal ball is inserted between the first piece 701 and the second piece 702 due to the momentum of the illegal ball fired (hit) with a strength that can reach the area 5a. The first piece 701 and the second piece 702 Can be cut into as scissors by narrowed site of formation shear portion 700v, it is possible to suppress the fraud using a fraud sphere takes place thus invalidates the operating line.

  Note that the first fraud prevention means provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is not limited to the above-described embodiment, and may be another embodiment. For example, if the operation line attached to the fraudulent ball is cut or narrowed to prevent fraud, the metal plate may be bent in a different form from the above, or the bent operation line invalidating member 700 may be bent. The configuration may be provided, or a resin molded member having a shape capable of cutting or narrowing the operation line attached to the illegal ball may be provided instead of the metal plate.

  When the illegal ball is made of a synthetic resin such as acrylic, a metal game ball at the above-described standby position (on the above-mentioned partition 143a) of the ball feeding unit 140 is replaced with a non-contact type (for example, a proximity switch). ), And the detection signal is added to the driving conditions of the ball feeding solenoid 145 which is the electric feeding means, thereby preventing the illegal ball from being shot. This is because the non-contact type sensor does not detect an illegal ball made of synthetic resin, and the ball feeding solenoid 145 does not drive for ball feeding.

[3-1-11. Foul cover unit]
Fail cover unit 150 of door frame base unit 100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 37 and 38. FIG. 37A is a perspective view of the foul cover unit of the door frame base unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 37B is a perspective view of the foul cover unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 38A is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from the front, and FIG. 38B is an exploded perspective view of the foul cover unit with the lid member removed and viewed from behind.

  The foul cover unit 150 is attached to the lower rear portion of the door frame base 101 on the right side in rear view. The foul cover unit 150 is fired by the ball firing device 540 with a weaker force (a firing force that cannot reach the game area 5a) than a predetermined force (a fire force that can reach the game area 5a), and the game area 5a of the game board 5 is fired. The game balls B (foul balls) that have not reached the inside are guided to the lower plate 202, and the game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 are guided to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202. .

  As shown, the foul cover unit 150 is mounted on the rear side of the door frame base 101 and has a shallow box-shaped unit main body 151 whose front side is open, and a flat lid member mounted on the front surface of the unit main body 151. 152.

  The foul cover unit 150 penetrates back and forth at the upper left corner in a front view, and has a lower normal payout passage 610 a of the lower full ball path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 and an upper dish ball supply port 211 a which is a ball opening of the dish unit 200. And a lower full tank discharge unit 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610 of the main body frame 4 which is open rearward at the lower right side of the through ball path 150a when viewed from the front. And a full tank receiving port 150b.

  Further, foul cover unit 150 opens upward on the right side in front view of full tank receiving port 150b, and lacks momentum despite being fired from firing rail 544 by ball firing device 540 of main body frame 4. A foul ball receiving portion 150c for receiving a game ball B (foul ball) that has fallen into a foul ball drop port 1013 formed between the firing rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 without reaching the inside of the game area 5a, and a right front view. In the vicinity of the lower corner, the game ball B, which is open frontward and is received by the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving portion 150c, is discharged forward and the lower dish ball supply port 211c, which is an opening for a ball of the dish unit 200, is provided. Outlet 150d that communicates with the air, a communication passage 150 that connects the ball outlet 150d (strictly speaking, a storage passage 150e described later) and the foul ball receiving portion 150c. It has a, and. The communication passage 150h has an upper passage wall 150i disposed under the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c at a gradient opposite to that of the bottom wall 150g, and approximately one ball of the game ball from the upper passage wall 150i. And a lower passage wall 150j disposed in parallel at a distance from the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c. And open downward.

  In addition, a series of passages from the foul ball drop port 1013 established between the firing rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 to the ball discharge port 150d through the foul ball receiving portion 150c, the communication passage 150h, and the storage passage 150e are returned as foul ball return. A return passage 1014 is formed by a series of these elements.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is formed between the full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving section 150c and the ball discharging port 150d by the unit body 151 and the cover member 152, and stores a predetermined amount of game balls B. A storage passage 150e having a possible area is provided.

  The through ball passage 150a is formed so as to extend over both the unit body 151 and the cover member 152. The full ball receiving port 150b and the foul ball receiving portion 150c are formed in the unit main body 151. The ball discharge port 150d is formed in the lid member 152. The storage passage 150 e is formed by the unit main body 151 and the lid member 152.

  Further, foul cover unit 150 constitutes a part of the inner wall of storage passage 150e, and has a flat movable piece 153 whose lower end is rotatably attached to unit body 151 and lid member 152, and movable piece 153. And a spring 155 that urges the movable piece 153 toward the storage passage 150e.

  When the inside of the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 is filled with the game balls B and the game balls B are not discharged from the ball discharge port 150d to the lower plate 202 side, the foul cover unit 150 moves into the storage passage 150e to some extent. Game balls B can be stored. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the upper end of the movable piece 153 moves away from the storage passage 150e against the urging force of the spring 155 due to the weight of the game balls B. Then, the movable piece 153 rotates, and the rotation is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. This makes it possible to determine that the lower plate 202 is full with the game balls B, and stops the further payout of the game balls B when the full tank is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154. At the same time, the fact can be notified to a player, a staff member of a game hall, or the like, and a prompt can be made to cancel the fullness of the lower plate 202.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is attached to the rear side of the unit main body 151 and below the through ball passage 150 a, and a discharge passage opening / closing door of a lower full tank path unit 610 in a discharge unit 560 described later of the main body frame 4. 613 is provided with a door opening / closing contact portion 150f to which the operation protrusion 613a can contact (see FIG. 109). The door opening / closing contact portion 150f is inclined such that the rear surface moves forward as the rear surface goes downward. When the operating protrusion 613a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 abuts on the door opening / closing contact portion 150f, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotated, and the downstream ends of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b ( Front opening) can be opened.

  Further, the foul cover unit 150 is provided with an operation line invalidating member 7000 as a second fraud prevention means for suppressing fraud by the fraudulent ball Q to which the operation line L is attached, and similarly, the firing rail 544 and the outer rail 1001 are provided. The operation line invalidating members 7000H and 7000S, which are the third fraud prevention means, are provided at the foul ball drop opening 1013 opened between the two.

  The second operation line nullifying member 7000 provided in the foul cover unit 150 is an internal space between the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c. As shown in the figure, both lateral projections 7001 are fitted and supported in the mounting holes 151h of the unit body 151 and the mounting holes 152h of the lid member 152, and are fixedly attached (adhered) to the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i. Furthermore, the unit body 151 and the cover member 152 cover and house the unit so that the hands of employees and gaming machine assembly workers are difficult to contact due to safety considerations.

  The specific operation line nullifying member 7000 includes components equivalent to the operation line nullifying member 700 provided in the ball feeding unit 140, and corresponds to the bent first piece 701 in FIG. A V-shape opening in a direction facing the downward flow direction of the sphere of the communication passage 150h by the one piece portion 7010 and the second piece portion 7020 extending from the convex portion 7001 corresponding to the straight second piece portion 702. Is formed.

  In addition, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 40, the center of the V-shaped shearing portion 7000v of the operation line nullifying member 7000 is the center of the lid member 152 of the foul cover unit 150 of the embodiment. It is disposed so as to be substantially flush with the inner surface, and is directed toward the shearing portion 7000v of the operation line nullifying member 7000 at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h. A tapered guiding portion 150k that can guide the operation line L is provided. Specifically, the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c has a surface width necessary for the game ball to flow down on the upper surface thereof, and is turned toward the lid member 152 at the folded portion with the upper passage wall 150i. The first inclined portion 150ka descending to the operation line nullifying member 7000 side, and the width is narrowed along the lid member 152 toward the shearing portion 7000v of the operation line nullifying member 7000 so as to be continuous with the first inclined portion 150ka. It has a second tapered portion 150 kb having a tapered shape (a shape capable of capturing the operation line L), and a tapered guiding portion 150 k formed of the second inclined portion 150 kb. Then, when the operation line L, which is tensioned by the rolling of the illegal ball Q or the tension from the outside, comes into sliding contact with the guiding portion 150k, the tension applied to the operation line L causes the second inclined portion 150ka to move from the first inclined portion 150ka to the second inclination portion 150ka. The operation line L is guided to the operation line invalidating member 7000 by sliding on the inclined portion 150 kb of. Thus, the operation line L can be reliably captured by the operation line invalidating member 7000. In this way, it is responsible for smooth flow of the normal ball and guiding the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q. In order to make it easier to capture the operation line L, the corners of the first inclined portion 150ka and the second inclined portion 150kb of the guiding portion 150k may be formed in a curved shape.

  Since the second operation line nullifying member 7000 provided in the foul cover unit 150 is configured as described above, the operation line L is changed using the space communicating from the lower counter ball supply port 211c to the game area 5a. The attached illegal ball Q is made to enter the game area 5a, and at the same time, the operation line L protruding toward the lower counter ball supply port 211c is operated to form an illegal ball flow path using the illegal ball Q, It is possible to prevent illegal acts such as moving the ball Q into and out of the first starting port.

  For example, using a special tool such as a cell plate, the illegal ball Q is pushed into the return passage unit 1014 from the lower counter ball supply port 211c, flows backward, and is sent to the firing position of the ball firing device 540 (hereinafter, “illegal act”). A)), when the illegal ball Q moves toward the firing position of the firing rail 544 over the folded portion of the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c, The operation line L is pulled (pulled by tension) and wraps around the folded portion in a U-turn shape. Then, the operation line L is guided by the operation line nullifying member 7000 along the taper of the guiding portion 150k, enters the V-shaped shearing portion 7000v of the first piece 7010 and the second piece 7020, and finally enters Since the operation line L is cut off and the operation line L cannot be operated as a result, it is possible to suppress an illegal act using the illegal ball Q.

  Further, a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L, and one of them is sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the firing position, which is intentionally turned into a foul ball, and the lower counter ball supply port 211c which is a ball opening. Also, in the event that an illegal act of grasping the operation line L connected to the illegal ball that has become a foul ball and firing the subsequent illegal ball Q to the game area 5a (hereinafter referred to as “illegal act B”) is performed, The operation line L existing at the folded portion between the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c is pulled by the subsequent ejection of the illegal ball Q (with tension applied). L is pressed against the folded portion, and the operation line L enters the shearing portion 7000v and is cut in the same manner as described above, and as a result, the operation line L cannot be operated. Yes To become. FIG. 39 and FIG. 40 are explanatory diagrams assuming a case where the fraudulent act B is performed. Also, with respect to the above-mentioned fraudulent act B, there is a possibility that the operation line nullifying member 700 or the like as the first fraud prevention means cannot sufficiently exert an effect on the fraudulent ball Q which becomes a foul ball (for example, a foul ball). The operation line L may not be invalidated by the first fraud prevention means even if the fraudulent ball Q is fired with a certain degree of strength). Therefore, the present embodiment reinforces the measures against fraud by the first fraud prevention means. Also has the effect of doing. Therefore, when the injustice B is targeted, the operation line nullifying members 700 and 7000 as the first and second fraud preventing means, and the operation line nullifying member 7000H as the third fraud preventing means described later. , 7000S are appropriately used together, and one first operation line nullifying member 700 and another second operation line nullifying member 7000 or a third operation line nullifying member 7000H, 7000S are provided. The pachinko machine 1 may be provided together. In this case, the first operation line nullifying member 700 and the second operation line nullifying member 7000 are provided together on the door frame 3 side and in a state where they are not exposed to the outside. Even if the door frame 3 is opened due to the trouble described above, the anti-fraud information is hard to leak. In addition, the operation line nullifying members 700 and 7000 can easily maintain the security performance if replaced with the door frame 3 because the sharpness and the like affect the security performance.

  By the way, the operation line nullifying members 700 and 7000, which are the first and second fraud prevention means described above, cut the operation line L by the shearing portions 700v and 7000v and nullify the operation line L, but pinch the operation line L. That is, the operation line L is sandwiched between the two metal plates 7011 and 7022, for example, so that the flexible operation line L cannot be pushed or pulled so that it is difficult to push and pull, and the illegal ball Q connected to the operation line L cannot be easily operated. May be invalidated as follows.

  Specifically, for example, as shown in FIGS. 41 and 42, the operation line nullifying member 7000 is formed of two metal plates 7011 and 7022 joined by hatched portions in the enlarged view of FIG. 41, and the metal plates 7011 and 7022 The first half of the non-joined portion at the tip of is expanded into a V-shape to form an introduction guide portion 7033, and the second half of the non-joined portion is defined as a clamping portion 7044. Such an operation line nullifying member 7000 is fixedly attached to the inner surface of the lid member 152, and furthermore, the unit main body 151 is hardly touched by an employee or a game machine assembler due to safety considerations. And is covered and accommodated from outside by a lid member 152.

  According to the operation line nullifying member 7000, as shown in the enlarged view of FIG. 42, the operation line L is pulled by the illegal ball Q and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h and the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c. When the folded portion of the metal plate is turned into a U-turn shape, it is guided by the operation line nullifying member 7000 along the taper of the guide portion 150k of the folded portion, and the clamping portion in the latter half of the non-joined portion between the metal plate 7011 and the metal plate 7022 7044, it is pinched and pinched like tweezers.

  As a result, the illegal ball Q that has flowed backward from the lower counter ball supply port 211c due to the illegal act A described above reaches the firing position of the firing rail 544, or the illegal ball Q intentionally turned into a foul ball by the illegal act B. Can be prevented from reaching the lower dish ball supply port 211c, which is a ball opening, and even if it reaches there, the operation line L is sandwiched by the operation line invalidating member 7000. Therefore, no matter how much the flexible operation line L is pushed in from the lower counter ball supply port 211c, the flexible operation line L is only loosened thereat, and as a result, the amount of the operation line L to be extended cannot be adjusted (the illegal ball Q hanging on the game area 5a). Since the height cannot be adjusted), it is possible to prevent an illegal act using the illegal ball Q.

  In the above-described embodiment, the first half of the non-joined portion at the tip of the two metal plates 7011 and 7022 is expanded in a V-shape to be the introduction guide portion 7033, and the second half of the non-joined portion is set to the clamping portion 7044. However, instead of this, one metal plate is bent so as to overlap the plate surface, and the leading end portion of one of the bent plate surfaces is expanded in a V-shape to introduce the introduction guide portion 7033 (the guide portion). ), And the sandwiching portion between both plate surfaces may be used as the sandwiching portion 7044. Thereby, while achieving the same effect as the above-described fraud deterrence effect, the assembling work efficiency by reducing the number of parts of the metal plate can be improved.

  The operation line nullifying member 7000 for pinching the operation line L is not shown, but a double-sided tape is installed in a gap between the second inclined portions 150 kb in FIG. Thus, an adhesive portion may be formed, and the operation line L guided to the second inclined portion 150 kb may be immobilized by being adhered to the adhesive portion.

  Also, the operation line nullifying member 7000 for holding the operation line L is configured by changing the above-mentioned one composed of the two metal plates 7011 and 7022 to a coil spring as shown in FIG. The guide portion 150k may be installed and formed such that the guide direction of the second inclined portion 150kb and the center axis of the guide portion 150k are substantially orthogonal to each other. The operation line L guided by the second inclined portion 150 kb fits between adjacent coils of the coil spring and is clamped.

  Coil springs, such as tension coil springs and torsion coil springs, which have a structure in which adjacent coils are in contact with each other when there is no load, must be installed in a compressed state, such as a compression coil spring. This is more advantageous for installation work.

  In addition, the coil spring may be installed in a straight state when no load is applied. However, as shown in FIG. 43, the coil spring is installed so as to be curved in a direction in which the coils on the entry side of the operation line L slightly expand. It is more preferable that the operation line L enters smoothly. As described above, when the operation line nullifying member 7000 is formed of a coil spring, it can be manufactured at a low cost, so that the cost can be reduced.

  Further, a foreign substance such as a cell plate is inserted into the operation line nullifying member 7000 from the ball opening (lower counter ball supply port 211c), and the guide plate 150k to the operation line nullifying member 7000 is closed with the cell plate. In order to cope with this, in the embodiment described above, a course change portion of the return path portion 1014 of the foul ball (a portion corresponding to a position directly above the lower counter ball supply port 211c in the present embodiment). Further, a slit 1015 into which the cell plate (foreign matter) enters is formed (see FIG. 39). Accordingly, it is possible to suppress further unauthorized manipulation of inserting the foreign matter from the ball opening (lower counter ball supply port 211c) and closing the guide portion 150k. In addition, as a countermeasure against illegal work in which foreign matter such as a cell plate is inserted from the ball opening (lower dish ball supply port 211c) to close the guide portion 150k, foreign matter such as a cell plate as in the above-described slit 1015 is removed. A configuration in which a projection-shaped obstacle 1016 that impinges on a foreign substance such as a cell plate or the like to impede reaching the guide 150k as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. As such, a higher level of fraud prevention may be achieved.

  Also, the first and second operation line nullifying members 700 and 7000 described above have a static structure that nullifies the operation line L after entering it, but FIGS. 49, 50, and 51. 52 and 53, a dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D that positively invalidates the operation line L due to the presence of the illegal ball Q may be used.

  FIGS. 49, 50, and 51 show one specific example of the dynamic operation line nullification member 7000D. The operation line nullification member 7000D has a foul ball return path (return path section 1014). (A corner corresponding to a position directly above the lower bowl supply port 211c).

  That is, in FIG. 49, the operation line nullifying member 7000D includes a horizontal plate-shaped ball receiving portion 2645, a plate-shaped nullifying portion 2646 vertically projecting from the right end of the ball receiving portion 2645, and a ball receiving portion 2645. And a shaft hole 2647 formed at a corner where the nullification portion 2646 intersects with the center portion, and an arc-shaped ball stopper 2648 centered on the shaft hole 2647 protruding rightward from the upper edge of the nullification portion 2646, A support shaft 2649 implanted in the foul cover unit 150 is rotatably inserted into the shaft hole 2647, and is rotated about 90 ° counterclockwise from the ball receiving position in FIG. Can swing to the release position. Further, the operation line nullifying member 7000D is provided with a balance weight 2660 on the opposite side of the ball receiving portion 2645 and the nullifying portion 2646 across the shaft hole 2647. The ball receiving portion 2645 is urged by the balance weight 2660. The ball receiving position shown in FIG. 50A is maintained in a state where no external force (specifically, the load for one game ball) is applied, while the load for one game ball is applied to the ball receiving portion 2645. At this time, it swings to the release posture of FIG. 50 (b).

  In addition, the end edge of the nullification portion 2646 of the operation line nullification member 7000D is an intersection 2651 that turns around the shaft hole 2647 and crosses the foul ball return passage (return passage portion 1014). When the nullification member 7000D swings to the release position shown in FIG. 50 (b), the intersecting side portion 2651 fits into the receiving portion 2652 of the foul ball return passage.

  When a normal foul ball flows into the foul cover unit 150 provided with the above-described dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D, the foul ball connects to the communication passage 150h of the foul ball return passage as shown in FIG. Immediately after flowing down and changing the course in the downward direction by the course changing unit, it is placed on the ball receiving unit 2645 of the operation line nullifying member 7000D in the ball receiving posture. Due to the load of the foul ball, the operation line nullifying member 7000D rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 2649, and changes to the release posture of FIG. Then, the foul ball placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line nullification member 7000D is discharged to the downstream storage passage 150e, and the operation line nullification member 7000D released from the foul ball is attached with the balance weight 2660. Return to the original ball receiving posture by the force.

  In rare cases, a plurality of foul spheres may be generated at once. Even in such a case, while the first foul sphere is processed by the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the subsequent foul sphere is as shown in FIG. 50 (b). Is stopped by the arcuate ball stopper 2648, and the processing is continued after the operation line invalidating member 7000D has returned. Therefore, even if a plurality of foul spheres are generated at the same time, processing can be performed one by one without any trouble.

  Next, the above-described fraudulent act B (a plurality of fraudulent balls Q are connected to the operation line L and one of the fraudulent balls Q is fired from the hit ball supply port 142a) to the foul cover unit 150 having the dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D. Into a foul sphere by intentionally launching the foul sphere weakly, and take it out from the lower dish ball supply port 211c, which is a ball opening. When the illegal ball Q flows due to an illegal act of firing the ball Q into the game area 5a), the illegal ball Q flows down the communication passage 150h as shown in FIG. 51 (a), and the course is changed downward by the course changing unit. Immediately after being placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line nullifying member 7000D in the ball receiving posture. Then, due to the load of the illegal ball Q, the operation line nullifying member 7000D rotates counterclockwise about the support shaft 2649 and changes to the release posture of FIG. 51 (b). At this time, the nullifying portion 2646 of the operation line nullifying member 7000D also rotates, and the intersection side 2651 of the edge crosses the foul ball return passage and fits in the receiving portion 2652 on the passage side. When crossing the foul ball return path, the operation line L passing through the foul ball return path naturally also crosses the foul ball return path, so that the operation line L is caught between the intersection side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652 as shown in FIG. Stop). Then, since the illegal ball Q connected to the operation line L cannot fall, the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D continues the release posture without being released from the illegal ball Q. Of course, since the operation line nullifying member 7000D is located at a position where it cannot be reached even if a hand is put in through the lower dish ball supply port 211c which is an opening for a ball, there is no possibility that the illegal ball Q remaining at this position is taken out from the outside.

  If it is difficult to reverse the operation line L by meandering the operation line L between the intersection side portion 2651 and the receiving portion 2652, the state in which the operation line L is caught by the operation line invalidating member 7000D is obtained. It is also difficult to return the illegal ball Q to the hit ball supply port 142a. This allows the illegal ball Q remaining on the operation line invalidating member 7000D to be saved and collected as a proof ball.

  The dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D described above utilizes the own weight of the illegal ball Q. However, the operation line invalidating member 7000D may be operated by the electric driving means as shown in FIG. Good.

  That is, the operation line nullifying member 7000D of FIG. 52 connects the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 serving as the electric driving means to the portion where the above-described balance weight 2660 is provided, and also connects the ball detector to the nullifying portion 2646 of the operation line nullifying member 7000D. When the game ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 and detected by the ball detector 2655, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 rises, and the operation line invalidating member 7000D shifts from the ball receiving position to the release position. When the game ball changes, and the game ball is released from the ball receiving portion 2645 and is detected by the ball detector 2655 (change of the signal from the presence or absence of the game ball), the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 is lowered and the operation line is lowered. The invalidating member 7000D is to return from the release position to the ball receiving position. .

  When a normal ball is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line nullifying member 7000D, the occurrence and release of the ball are detected by a change in the signal of the ball detector 2655, and the solenoid 2653 is received in response thereto. In order to operate appropriately, the foul balls are processed one by one similarly to the operation line nullifying member 7000D using the own weight.

  On the other hand, when the illegal ball Q is placed on the ball receiving portion 2645 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the illegal ball Q is detected by the ball detector 2655, and the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 rises to invalidate the operation line. Although the member 7000D changes to the release posture with the illegal ball Q, as described above, the operation line L is caught by the intersection side portion 2651 of the invalidating portion 2646 and the receiving portion 2652, and the illegal ball Q does not fall. Since no emission signal is generated from the ball detector 2655, the plunger 2654 of the solenoid 2653 stays at the raised position. Therefore, since the illegal ball Q cannot be taken out from the aimed ball opening, illegality can be prevented beforehand.

  Note that the above-described dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D cuts and invalidates the operation line L by providing a cutting blade at the intersection 2651 and / or the receiving portion 2652 of the invalidating portion 2646. be able to. In addition, the operation line nullifying member 7000D of the embodiment has a function of preventing the intrusion of the illegal ball Q from the ball opening side in a state where the ball receiving portion 2645 covers the return passage portion 104. It can also be used as reverse running prevention means. Therefore, a higher fraud prevention function is exhibited.

  Further, in addition to the above-described configuration, the dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D has, for example, a nullifying portion formed in a shutter plate structure that linearly advances and retracts to open and close the communication passage 150h, and has a tip end of the shutter plate. Is a crossed side crossing the foul ball return passage, and a ball detector is installed in the middle of the flow path of the communication passage 150h and downstream from the movable region of the crossed side, and passes through the movable region of the crossed side. After detecting the illegal ball Q by this ball detector, the invalidating portion is operated, and the operation line L is pinched or cut off at the intersection side crossing the communication passage 150h. Is also good.

  Further, the above-described dynamic operation line nullification member 7000D can be applied to the first operation line nullification member 700 of the ball feeding unit 140. Specifically, the ball feeding solenoid 145 provided in the ball feeding unit 140 is replaced with the solenoid 2653 of the operation line invalidating member 7000D, and the ball feeding member 144 is replaced with the operation line invalidating member 7000D. In this case, since the illegal ball Q stops in the ball feeding unit 140 and is not supplied to the ball launching device 540, the effect of suppressing illegality can be surely enhanced.

  FIG. 53 shows a dynamic operation line invalidating member 7000D, which winds and invalidates the operation line L.

  In other words, the operation line nullifying member 7000D is a square ring-shaped nullifying portion 2646 attached to the communication passage 150h of the foul cover unit 150 so as to be rotatable around a rotation shaft 2656 that is orthogonal to the passage. And a motor 2657 as an electric driving means for rotating the nullification unit 2646, and a horizontal bar crossing the communication passage 150h of the nullification unit 2646 as an intersection side 2651 provided downstream of the movable (rotation) area of the intersection side 2651. And a ball detector 2655, and the invalidation unit 2646 is rotated once each time a foul ball is detected by the ball detector 2655.

  When a normal foul ball flows into the foul cover unit 150 provided with such an operation line nullification member 7000D, the foul ball enters the communication passage 150h, passes through the nullification section 2646, and the foul ball is detected by a ball. The invalidating unit 2646 idles once by being detected by the detector 2655, but the foul ball flows down as it is and is discharged to the outside from the ball opening.

  On the other hand, when the illegal ball Q due to the illegal act B described above flows into the foul cover unit 150 provided with the operation line invalidating member 7000D, the operation line L is also invalidated when the illegal ball Q dives through the invalidation section 2646. Since the illegal ball Q passes through the invalidating unit 2646 and the invalidating unit 2646 makes one rotation, the operation line L is wound around the invalidating unit 2646. Therefore, since the illegal ball Q stops in the communication passage 150h, there is no possibility that the illegal ball Q will reach the hands of the unauthorized person.

  Note that the ball detector 2655 that detects the illegal ball Q may be one that is displaced by receiving the tension of the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q. In such a case, the illegal ball Q can be reliably detected. Therefore, it is possible to eliminate the unnecessary idle rotation of the operation line invalidating member 7000D for winding the operation line L described above.

The description of the embodiment relating to the dynamic operation line invalidating member includes the following technical idea.
"A game area where games are played with game balls,
A ball launching device that launches a game ball,
A launching passage section that forms a launching sphere passage communicating from the launching position of the ball launching device to the game area,
A return passage portion forming a foul ball return passage connecting a foul ball drop opening established in the middle of the launching ball passage and a ball opening for discharging a game ball to the outside in front of the machine,
Fraud prevention means capable of preventing the operation line attached to the fraudulent ball from being operated from the forefront,
The fraud prevention means is an operation line invalidating member that invalidates the operation line by nipping or cutting or winding the operation line,
The operation line disabling member includes an intersection that crosses the foul ball return path of the game ball, and operates the intersection when the illegal ball passes through the movable area of the intersection. A gaming machine configured to cross a return path, and to pinch, cut, or wind up the operation line passing through the foul ball return path at the intersection side to invalidate the operation line. "

  Next, as shown in FIG. 10, FIG. 11, FIG. 39, FIG. 47, and FIG. ) And an operation line nullifying member 7000S provided at an end of the outer rail 1001 (specifically, a resin rail base 1001x).

  The operation line nullifying member 7000H provided at the end of the protruding side of the firing rail 544 is a sharp cutting blade, and a metal triangular plate is comb-shaped so that an operator's hand does not directly touch the cutting edge. Are covered by the safety cover 1017 arranged side by side. The cutting blade is supported by the safety cover 1017.

  Therefore, as described above, using the special tool such as a cell plate, the illegal ball Q is pushed into the return passage portion 1014 from the lower counter ball supply port 211c to flow backward, and is sent to the firing position of the ball firing device 540. When A is performed, when the illegal ball Q is placed on the end of the firing rail 544 and rolls due to the inclination toward the firing position, the operation line L is pulled (with tension applied) to the operation line invalidating member. It is cut by touching the cutting blade of 7000H. Therefore, the operation line L cannot be operated.

  In addition, a plurality of illegal balls Q are connected to the operation line L, and one of them is sent to the firing position from the hit ball supply port 142a, and is intentionally made into a foul ball from the lower counter ball supply port 211c which is a ball opening. Even in the event of cheating B in which the operation line L connected to the fraudulent ball Q is grasped and the subsequent fraudulent ball Q is launched into the game area 5a, the fraudulent ball Q becomes a foul ball and the return passage 1014 Since the operation line L touches the cutting blade of the operation line invalidating member 7000H in the process of falling, it is cut at that stage. Therefore, the operation line L cannot be operated.

  On the other hand, the operation line nullifying member 7000S provided on the resin rail base 1001x constituting the outer rail 1001 has a large number of hard resin wires in a brush shape as shown in FIGS. It protrudes.

  According to the operation line nullifying member 7000S, the illegal ball Q tentatively reaches the game area 5a and hangs in a state of being connected to the operation line L, and the end of the operation line L is a lower dish ball supply port which is a ball opening. Even if a fraudulent person is grasping via the 211c, when the operation line L is pulled from the outside to raise the fraudulent ball Q in the game area 5a, the operation line L is caused by the tension of the wire of the operation line invalidating member 7000S. After that, even if the force of manipulating the operation line L to lower the illegal ball Q is subsequently relaxed, the operation line L is less likely to slip due to the resistance received from the wire group of the operation line invalidating member 7000S. Movement of the hand that has been loosened does not reach the illegal ball Q. That is, since the illegal ball Q in the game area 5a cannot be lowered, an illegal act using the illegal ball Q can be suppressed as a result.

  Thus, the third fraud prevention means is that the operation line nullifying member 7000H on the firing rail 544 side exhibits an effect in the initial stage of fraudulent acts A and B, and even if it is broken, the outer rail 1001 Since the operation line nullifying member 7000S on the side exerts an effect, a higher level of fraud prevention effect can be obtained.

  Note that it is of course possible to use either one of the operation line nullifying members 7000H and 7000S alone, and it is also possible to implement a specific nullifying member for the operation line nullifying member 7000H and the operation line nullifying member 7000S. The forms may be interchanged, or the same invalidating member may be employed.

  In addition to the case where the operation line nullifying members 7000H and 7000S are separately formed as in the embodiment and attached to the firing rail 544 or the outer rail 1001, for example, a metal plate forming the firing rail 544 is appropriately processed to disable the operation line. Forming member 7000H integrally, or by integrally forming a wire on a resin rail base 1001x constituting the outer rail 1001, or by forming a V-groove at the corner of the rail base 1001x as shown in FIG. 8B. May be engraved, and the operation line L may be attracted to the inside of the groove of the holding portion 7000Sv to be held.

  Further, the operation line nullifying member 7000S of the outer rail 1001 has the same configuration as the second operation line nullifying member 7000 as shown in FIG. 48, for example, the two metal plates 7011 described in FIGS. , 7022, and a guide portion 150k including a first inclined portion 150ka and a second inclined portion 150kb may be provided on the rail base 1001x of the outer rail 1001.

  As described above, in the embodiment in which the second operation line nullifying member 7000 for nullifying the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q is provided in the return passage portion 1014. Although the embodiment provided in the ball drop port 1013 has been described, the present invention is not limited to the above embodiment.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the operation line nullifying member 7000 is provided at the folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h, that is, at the entrance of the communication passage 150h. The line nullification member 7000 is provided at the exit portion of the communication passage 150h (see the arrow z in FIG. 39), is provided on the rear surface side of the ball discharge port 150d in FIG. The operation line L is a portion that bends by contacting a part of the return passage portion 1014, such as being provided at the start end of the rail 1001 and the end of the firing rail 544, and the operation line L is determined by the weight of the illegal ball Q and the like. In any position in the return passage portion 1014, provided that it is a portion that receives a pressing force when it is going to be stretched straight by receiving the tension caused by the pulling force by an unauthorized person. Unishi may be. In addition, the installation position of the operation line invalidating member 7000 of the embodiment is a position where the player cannot touch even if the fingertip is inserted from the ball opening, and this position is the safety surface of the player and the operation line invalidation. It is preferable in consideration of a security surface that makes it difficult to perform unauthorized operations on the forming member 7000 itself.

  Further, in the embodiment, the operation line nullifying member 7000 is provided to be offset to one side of the communication passage 150h. However, as shown in FIGS. 44A and 44B, the operation line nullifying member 7000 is formed so as to fill the entire passage width. A cutting blade may be arranged. In FIGS. 44 (a) and (b), the end portion of the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the start end portion of the communication passage 150h are formed as a comb-shaped safety cover portion 1017, and the cutting edge of the cutting blade is an operator. Is not touched. As the cutting blade of the operation line nullifying member 7000 in this case, a known cutting blade structure or a tip structure is used, which is installed in the sheath-shaped holder portion 1018 on the upper surface of the upper passage wall 150i, and the unit main body 151 If a loading port 1019 and a discharge port 1020 are provided in each of the lid members 152, and the cutting blade is pushed out in such a way that the old and new can be replaced, the sharpness can always be maintained. In addition, in FIGS. 44 (a) and (b), reference numeral 1021 is a pinching part for the operating line L cut into the valley of the safety cover part 1017, and the operating line L can bite into the pinching part 1021. It has become. Therefore, even if the operation line invalidating member 7000 of the cutting blade fails to cut the operation line L, the operation line L may bite into the pinching part 1021 such as the bottom wall 150g, so that the certainty of the fraud prevention is improved. improves.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the example in which the foul ball is returned to the lower plate is shown. However, there is a gaming machine having a structure in which the foul ball is returned to the upper plate (including the case where the lower plate is not provided). In the case of, the fraudulent act of invading the illegal ball Q, to which the operation line L is attached, into the gaming area 5a by using a space communicating from the upper bowl supply port (ball opening) to the gaming area 5a (the illegal acts A, B). In the case of such a gaming machine, it is illustrative that a second fraud prevention means is provided at a predetermined portion of the foul return passage located in a space communicating from the upper bowl supply port to the gaming area 5a as in the above-described embodiment. it can.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage portion 1014 is provided on the door frame 3 side, but the foul cover unit 150 may be provided on the main body frame 4 side.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the second falsification prevention unit is provided in the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage unit 1014, but a plurality of second fraud prevention units may be provided. For example, in the case of a passage configuration in which a plurality of bent portions such as the folded portions of the above-described embodiment are formed in the return passage portion 1014, each of the bent portions (at each of the folded portions) has Second fraud prevention means may be provided. As a result, it is possible to further enhance the effect of deterring an illegal act using the illegal ball Q.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the metal plate is provided as the second fraud prevention means in the foul cover unit 150 constituting the return passage unit 1014, but a resin molded product having a similar configuration is provided instead of the metal plate. Alternatively, the molding of the foul cover unit 150 itself may be formed into a special shape so as to function as the second fraud prevention means. For example, the metal plate which is the second fraud-preventing means in the above-described embodiment is not provided, and instead, a taper provided at a folded portion between the bottom wall 150g of the foul ball receiving portion 150c and the upper passage wall 150i of the communication passage 150h. In order to capture the operation line L at the narrowest portion (narrowest portion) of the guide member 150k, a slit-like capture portion is formed in the resin molded part constituting the return passage portion 1014. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q is pinched by the capture portion that is the narrowest portion of the guide portion 150k. Even with such a configuration, the same illegal deterrence effect as that of the above-described embodiment can be achieved.

  In the above-described embodiment, the operation line L attached to the illegal ball Q is cut or pinched by the operation line invalidating member 7000. In FIGS. 45, 46 and 49, the illegal sphere Q that prevents the illegal sphere Q from entering through the ball opening (prevents the illegal sphere Q from moving backward and back) without affecting the flow of the normal foul sphere. By providing the reverse running prevention means, the illegality by the illegal ball Q is prevented.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 45, a special tool such as a cell plate (foreign matter) for pushing an illegal ball Q into a course changing portion (a portion corresponding to immediately above the lower counter ball supply port 211c) of the return passage portion 1014. In addition, it is possible to exemplify the provision of the attracting portion 1022 for attracting the illegal ball Q itself to another passage and sealing the movement (first illegal ball reverse movement prevention means). Thereby, it is possible to suppress an illegal act such as the illegal act A described above, which reverses the illegal ball Q, without affecting the flow of the normal ball. In addition, at the entrance of the attraction unit 1022, a capture valve that can swing only in the direction of entry of the counterflowing illegal ball Q into the attraction unit 1022 (allows entry into the attraction unit 1022, A one-sided valve (not shown) that disables disengagement may be provided, so that traces of using the illegal ball Q and evidence of misconduct can be left.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 46, a check valve 1023 that can swing only in the downflow direction of the game ball is provided at a predetermined portion of the return passage portion 1014 to prevent the illegal ball Q from moving backward (backflow). Yes (the second illegal ball reverse prevention means). Even with such a configuration, it is possible to suppress a fraudulent act of backflowing the fraudulent ball Q, such as the fraudulent act A described above, without affecting the flow of the normal ball. The operation line invalidating member 7000D in FIG. 49 is also a type of check valve, and has the same effect as the check valve 1023.

  Further, the static operation line invalidating member and the dynamic operation line invalidating member described above may of course have both.

  In the above-described embodiment, an operation line nullification member different from the first operation line nullification member 700 is provided in the return passage portion 1014. However, such an operation line nullification member is provided, for example, in a foul ball drop port 1013. And between the launch position and the fall ball drop port 1013 and the upper end of the inner rail 1002.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game machine applied to the pachinko machine 1 has been described, but the present invention is not limited to this, and is applied to a pachislot machine or a game machine obtained by fusing a pachinko machine and a pachislot machine. In this case, the same operation and effect as described above can be obtained.

[3-2. Glass unit]
The glass unit 160 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The glass unit 160 is inserted into the glass unit mounting portion 101h from the rear so as to close the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and is detachably mounted. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the glass unit 160 makes the game area 5 a of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 visible from the player side (front), and The front of the area 5a is closed.

  The glass unit 160 has a frame-like glass frame 161 that is larger than the inner peripheral shape of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 and can be attached to the glass unit attaching portion 101h, and the inside of the glass frame 161 is closed and the outer periphery is a glass frame. Two transparent glass plates 162 attached to the door frame base 161 and a pair of glass units rotatably attached to the rear side of the door frame base 101 in the door frame base unit 100 to attach the glass frame 161 to the door frame base 101. And a mounting member 163.

  The glass frame 161 has a pair of mounting pieces 161a extending in a flat plate shape outward from a position below the upper left and right corners in front view, and a band protruding downward from the lower end and extending along the lower side. And a plate-shaped locking piece 161b. The mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161 can be brought into contact with the projection 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163. The locking piece 161b can be inserted into the space between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 (see FIG. 115). The two glass plates 162 are respectively attached to the front end side and the rear end side of the glass frame 161 and are separated from each other so as to form a space between each other (see FIG. 115).

  The glass unit mounting member 163 includes a disk-shaped base 163a rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction on the rear side of the door frame base 101, and protrudes from the base 163a in a rod shape in a direction perpendicular to the rotation axis. Projecting portion 163b. The glass unit attachment member 163 is rotatably attached to the outside of the upper two corners of the four corners of the door window 101a on the rear surface of the door frame base 101.

  In order to attach the glass unit 160 to the door frame base 101, first, the glass unit attachment member 163 attached to the door frame base 101 is rotated so that the protrusion 163b is positioned above the base 163a. I do. Then, from the rear side of the door frame base 101, the locking pieces 161b of the glass frame 161 of the glass unit 160 are inserted from above into the gap between the door frame base 101 and the intermediate reinforcing frame 114 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110. Above, the front end of the glass frame 161 is brought into contact with the rear surface of the glass unit mounting portion 101h of the door frame base 101. Thereafter, the glass unit mounting member 163 is rotated such that the protrusion 163b is positioned below the base 163a, and the protrusion 163b is brought into contact with the rear surface of the mounting piece 161a of the glass frame 161. Thus, the glass unit 160 is attached to the door frame base 101.

  When removing the glass unit 160 from the door frame base 101, it can be removed by a procedure reverse to the procedure described above. Thus, the glass unit 160 is detachable from the door frame base 101 (door frame base unit 100).

  In the glass unit 160, when the protruding portion 163b of the glass unit mounting member 163 is at a rotational position located below the base 163a, the protruding portion 163b regulates the rearward movement of the glass frame 161. Therefore, even if vibration or the like acts on the glass unit attachment member 163, the projection 163b does not rotate to a position above the base 163a. Therefore, the restriction of the rearward movement of the glass frame 161 is not released naturally, and the glass unit 160 does not naturally come off the door frame base 101.

[3-3. Security cover]
The security cover 170 of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The security cover 170 is attached to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 so as to cover the lower portion of the rear surface of the glass unit 160, and is formed of a transparent synthetic resin. The security cover 170 is provided with a flat main body 171 having an outer periphery formed in a predetermined shape, and a flat rear protruding piece 172 projecting rearward shortly along the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. And a pair of locking pieces 173 that protrude forward from the main body 171 and can be locked to the rear side of the door frame base 101.

  The main body 171 of the security cover 170 is formed such that the lower end thereof protrudes downward from the lower end of the glass unit 160 when attached to the door frame base unit 100. The upper end of the main body 171 is formed along the lower end of the game area 5a of the game board 5 in a state where the upper end is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. More specifically, the upper end of the main body 171 is formed in a shape along a part of an inner rail 1002, an out guiding part 1003, a part of a lower right rail 1004, and a right rail 1005 of a front component 1000 described later. The pachinko machine 1 is formed so as not to protrude into the game area 5a when assembled in the pachinko machine 1.

  The rear projecting piece 172 is formed over substantially the entire outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. Therefore, the security cover 170 is formed in a shallow box shape opened rearward by the main body portion 171 and the rear projecting piece 172, and has high strength and rigidity. The rear projecting piece 172 also projects rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 different from the outer peripheral edge of the main body 171. A rear projecting piece 172 projecting rearward from a part of the rear surface of the main body 171 is formed along a part of the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 of the game board 5 in a state where the rear projecting piece 172 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. ing.

  The rear protruding piece 172 is not formed in a portion located between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 in the game board 5 in a state where the rear protruding piece 172 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. Thereby, the game ball B (the game ball B fired by the ball firing device 540) passing between the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 does not abut on the rear protruding piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the game area. The hitting of the game ball B into 5a is not inhibited.

  The pair of locking pieces 173 are elastically locked to the rear side of the door frame base unit 100 (the speaker duct 103 and the cable cover 109). Thereby, the security cover 170 can be easily attached to and detached from the door frame base unit 100.

  In the state where the security cover 170 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1, a portion where the front surface of the main body 171 contacts the rear surface of the glass unit 160 (the rear end of the glass frame 161) and projects rearward from the lower side of the main body 171. The removed rearward projecting piece 172 is inserted into the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Further, the security cover 170 has a state in which the rear protruding piece 172 protruding rearward from the lower side of the main body 171 protrudes rearward from the front surface of the front component 1000 so as to be in contact with the lower surface of the front component 1000. . Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, the rear projection 172 and the security recess 1009 prevent the tool. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

[3-4. Handle unit]
The handle unit 180 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 54 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 54 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the handle unit as viewed from the rear. The handle unit 180 is attached to the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, and can be operated by a player to drive the game ball B in the upper plate 201 into the game area 5a of the game board 5. Things.

  The handle unit 180 covers the handle base 181 attached to the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 of the door frame base unit 100, the handle 182 rotatably attached to the front end of the handle base 181, and the front end side of the handle 182. A cover base 183 attached to the handle base 181, a handle decoration board 184 mounted on the front side of the cover base 183 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface, and a front side of the handle decoration board 184. And a handle cover 185 attached to the cover pedestal 183.

  The handle unit 180 has an inner base 186 attached to the front of the handle base 181 behind the handle 182 and a handle 182 attached to the front end, and is rotatably attached by the inner base 186 and the handle base 181 to the outer periphery. A handle member 181 having a shaft member 187 having a drive gear portion 187a, a transmission gear 188 meshing with the drive gear portion 187a of the shaft member 187, and a detection shaft 189a rotating integrally with the transmission gear 188; A handle rotation detection sensor 189 sandwiched between the base and the base 186.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has one end attached to the handle base 181 and the other end attached to the handle 182 so as to return the handle 182 to an initial rotation position (a counterclockwise rotation end in front view). The energizing handle return spring 190 has one end attached to the inner base 186 and the other end attached to the transmission gear 188, and the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is rotated clockwise in front view via the transmission gear 188. And an auxiliary spring 191 urged in the direction.

  Further, the handle unit 180 has a handle touch sensor 192 attached to the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a front end side projecting outward from the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the front end of the handle base 181 when viewed from the front. A single button 193 whose end side is rotatably mounted on an axis extending back and forth on the handle base 181 behind the inner base 186, and a single button mounted on the handle base 181 by detecting a pressing operation of the single button 193. An operation sensor 194.

  The handle base 181 of the handle unit 180 has a cylindrical base 181a extending forward and backward, a disk-shaped front end 181b protruding in the radial direction from the front end of the base 181a, and a depression from the outer peripheral surface of the cylindrical base 181a. And three grooves 181c extending in the axial direction and formed at irregular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer diameter of the base 181a of the handle base 181 is slightly smaller than the inner diameter of the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102. The three groove portions 181c are formed at positions corresponding to the three ridges 102c of the cylindrical portion 102a in the handle mounting member 102. Therefore, with the three grooves 181c aligned with the three ridges 102c, the base 181a can be inserted into the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102, and the ridges 102c are respectively formed in the three grooves 181c. By being inserted, the handle base 181 cannot rotate relative to the handle mounting member 102.

  The handle 182 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d, which protrude outward from the outer peripheral surface in a circumferential direction, and a rotating shaft (a shaft member 187). Two slits 182e extending in an arc shape as a center and penetrating in the front-rear direction, and projecting rearward from a position inside the rotation center with respect to the slit 182e, and the other end of the handle return spring 190 is locked. And a locking projection 182f.

  The four first projections 182a, the second projections 182b, the third projections 182c, and the fourth projections 182d are sequentially provided in a clockwise direction in a front view. More specifically, the first protrusion 182a is formed such that a side surface in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front of a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 bulges outward, and the first protrusion 182a is the opposite side. Side is concave (gouge) so as to curve inward. The second projection 182b is such that a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the first projection 182a by a rotation angle of about 85 degrees in a clockwise direction. It protrudes slightly lower. The second protrusion 182b has a side surface in the clockwise direction as viewed from the front of the most protruding portion bulging outward, and the opposite side surface in the counterclockwise direction curves inward. And is formed in a shape similar to the first protrusion 182a.

  The third protrusion 182c is such that a portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from a most protruding portion of the second protrusion 182b by a rotation angle of about 70 degrees in a clockwise direction. It protrudes at about half the height. The side surface of the third protrusion 182c is substantially linearly inclined on both sides, and the side surface in the clockwise direction is more gradually inclined than the side surface in the counterclockwise direction, which is the opposite side. The fourth protrusion 182d is such that the portion most protruding from the general outer peripheral surface of the handle 182 is separated from the most protruding portion of the third protrusion 182c by a clockwise rotation angle of about 55 degrees, and It protrudes slightly higher. The side surfaces of both sides of the fourth protrusion 182d are substantially linearly inclined, and are formed in a substantially isosceles triangle.

  The cover pedestal 183 is formed in a disk shape and includes three mounting bosses 183a projecting rearward from the rear surface. The three mounting bosses 183a penetrate the slit 182e of the handle 182 from the front and are mounted on the front surface of the handle base 181. Since the mounting boss 183a of the handle cover 185 passes through the slit 182e of the handle 182, the mounting boss 183a comes into contact with the circumferential end of the slit 182e, thereby restricting the rotation angle of the handle 182. In this example, the handle 182 can be rotated within a rotation angle of about 120 degrees.

  The handle cover 185 has a front surface that bulges forward and round, and has translucency. The handle cover 185 has a lens member formed three-dimensionally of a transparent member inside. The handle cover 185 is illuminated and decorated by appropriately illuminating the LEDs on the front surface of the handle decoration board 184.

  The handle unit 180 is mounted on the handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 via the handle mounting member 102. The handle mounting seat surface 101b of the door frame base 101 is inclined such that the right end side is located behind the left end side in plan view and faces outward (open side). The handle unit 180 that is attached via is also inclined outwardly in plan view (in other words, its tip end is inclined toward the outside of the pachinko machine 1 with respect to a line orthogonal to the front surface of the pachinko machine 1). To be fixed to the door frame 3. This makes it easy for the player to grip the handle 182 of the handle unit 180, and can perform the rotation operation without feeling uncomfortable.

  The handle rotation detection sensor 189 of the handle unit 180 is a variable resistor. When the handle 182 is rotated, the detection shaft 189a of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 rotates via the shaft member 187 and the transmission gear 188. The internal resistance of the handlebar rotation detection sensor 189 changes according to the rotation angle of the detection shaft 189a, and the driving force of the firing solenoid 542 in the ball firing device 540 described later changes according to the internal resistance of the handlebar rotation detection sensor 189. The game ball B is driven into the game area 5a with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182.

  The handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting on the handle unit 180. When the player contacts the handle 182 or the like, the handle touch sensor 192 detects static electricity acting from the player, and the player touches the handle 182 or the like. Detect contact. When the handle 182 is rotated while the handle touch sensor 192 detects the contact of the player, the detection of the handle rotation detection sensor 189 is received, and the firing solenoid is activated with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182. The drive of 542 is controlled, and the game ball B can be driven. That is, even if the player tries to hit the game ball B into the game area 5a by rotating the handle 182 by some method without touching the handle 182, the handle touch sensor 192 does not detect the contact of the player. For this reason, the firing solenoid 542 is not driven, and cannot hit the game ball B. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the player from rotating the handle 182 in a different manner from the original and playing the game, and to reduce the load (burden) on the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. .

  In addition, when the player presses the single-shot button 193 while the player rotates the handle 182, the single-shot button operation sensor 194 detects the operation of the single-shot button 193, and the handle control unit 633b of the payout control board 633 controls the handle unit 180. The driving of the firing solenoid 542 is stopped. Thus, the firing of the game ball B can be temporarily stopped without returning the rotation operation of the handle 182, and the operation before the operation of the single-shot button 193 is performed by releasing the pressing operation of the single-shot button 193. The game ball B can be driven into the game area 5a again with the driving strength.

  Further, the handle unit 180 includes four first protrusions 182a, second protrusions 182b, third protrusions 182c, and fourth protrusions 182d on the handle 182, and the handle 182 is most rotated clockwise in a front view. Then, when the game ball B is hit into the game area 5a most strongly (so-called "right-handed"), the fourth protrusion 182d is pressed by the first protrusion 182a when the handle 182 is not rotated. Since the position is substantially the same as the position, the handle 182 can be maintained in the "right-handed" position in a comfortable state by changing the handle 182 by using the fourth protrusion 182d as the first protrusion 182a, The player's feeling of fatigue can be reduced, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

[3-5. Overall configuration of dish unit]
The plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 55 is a perspective view of the dish unit of the door frame, and FIG. 56 is a perspective view of the dish unit as seen from behind. FIG. 57 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 58 is an exploded perspective view of the plate unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the back. The plate unit 200 is attached to a portion of the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 below the door window 101a. The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 for storing game balls B to be driven into the game area 5a, and a game ball provided below the upper plate 201 and supplied from the upper plate 201 or the foul cover unit 150. And a lower plate 202 capable of storing B.

  The plate unit 200 has an upper plate 201 and is mounted on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a lower plate 202 mounted on the front surface of the plate base unit 210. , And an effect operation unit 300 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250 and the dish base unit 210 and operable by the player.

  The plate base unit 210 includes a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 extending in the left and right directions, an upper plate main body 212 attached to the upper front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having the upper plate 201, and a right side of the upper plate main body 212. A mounting base 213 mounted on the mounting base 213 and protruding forward, a plate unit relay board 214 mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213, a ball rental operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213, The unit includes an upper tray removing unit 230 attached below the mounting base 213, and an upper tray removing unit 240 attached behind the upper tray removing unit 230.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to a lower part of the front of the dish unit base 211 and has a lower dish body 251 having the lower dish 202, and is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. A dish unit main body 252, a lower dish removing unit 260 attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251, a dish upper left decorative unit 270 attached to the upper front surface of the dish unit body 252, and separated from each other in the left and right directions. It includes a dish upper right decoration unit 275, a dish lower left decoration unit 280 and a dish lower right decoration unit 285 attached below the dish left upper decoration unit 270 and the dish upper right decoration unit 275, respectively.

  The rendering operation unit 300 includes, as the rendering operation unit 301 that can be operated by the player, a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotation operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302, and an operation ring for transmitting rotation of the rotation drive unit 340 to the rotation operation unit 302. A transmission gear 350 and a gear mounting member 351 for rotatably mounting the transmission ring transmission gear 350 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to a lower surface of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 for decorating the effect operation ring 330 with light, a decorative substrate cover 353 for covering the upper side of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and the operation unit base 320. Vibration speaker 354, an effect operation button unit 360 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the effect operation ring 330, and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320. And

  The plate unit 200 is entirely bulged forward, and the effect operation unit 300 is disposed so that the upper surface of the effect operation unit 301 faces obliquely upward and forward at the center in the left-right direction, and the left side of the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface. A ball rental operation unit 220 is disposed on the right side of the effect operation unit 300 with the upper plate 201, and a lower plate 202 is disposed on the left side of the effect operation unit 300 below the upper plate 201.

[3-5-1. Upper plate]
The upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate 201 is formed by a plate unit base 211 and an upper plate main body 212. The upper plate 201 is formed in a container shape which bulges forward to a large extent on the left side from the left and right center in front view and opens upward. In the upper plate 201 (upper plate main body 212), a portion which is about 1/3 from the left end to the right with respect to the width of the door frame 3 in the left-right direction bulges forward most. The front end of the upper plate 201 is receded rearward from the most bulged portion toward the right in front view, and the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B (FIG. 62). ). The entire bottom surface of the upper plate 201 including the guide passage portion 201a is inclined such that the right end side is lower, and the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a in front view is sunk below the ball lending operation unit 220.

  When the upper plate 201 is assembled to the plate unit 200, the bottom surface thereof is positioned at a position lower than the upper plate ball supply port 211 a of the plate unit base 211 to the upper end of the upper plate ball supply port 211 e. B is inclined so as to be lower toward a position slightly lower than the outer diameter of B. Thereby, the game balls B discharged forward from the upper dish ball supply port 211a can be received and stored in the upper dish 201, and the received game balls B can be stored from the right end side of the guide passage portion 201a. It can be supplied to the ball feeding unit 140 side through the upper dish feeding port 211e.

  The guide passage 201a is provided with a metal grounding member 201b which is electrically grounded (grounded) in the pachinko machine 1, and the game ball B comes into contact (rolls) with the game ball. It is possible to remove the static electricity charged to B.

[3-5-2. Lower plate]
The lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower plate 202 is disposed below the upper plate 201 and to the left of the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200 (door frame 3) when viewed from the front. The lower plate 202 is formed by a lower plate main body 251 and a plate unit base 211. The lower plate 202 is formed in a container shape capable of storing the game balls B, and has a lower plate ball hole 202a which penetrates up and down the bottom wall so that the game balls B can be discharged. The lower bowl 202 is closed by a lower bowl removing unit 260 so that it can be opened and closed.

  The lower plate 202 is formed in a substantially square shape having a plan view extending left and right, and a front end on the left side from the center in the left and right direction projects forward from the right side. The lower plate 202 has a lower plate hole 202a penetrating vertically, which is disposed near the front end near the right end. The lower plate 202 is inclined so that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate hole 202a. The lower bowl 202 of the lower bowl 202 is located below the effect operation unit 300 in front of the lower bowl supply port 211c in a state where the lower bowl 202 is assembled to the pan unit 200.

  The lower plate 202 can store the game ball B discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c while the lower plate hole 202a is closed, and open the lower ball hole 202a. Can be discharged below the dish unit 200 (for example, a dollar box). In addition, in a state where the lower dish ball hole 202a is opened, the lower dish ball hole 202a is disposed in front of the lower dish ball supply port 211c. The released game balls B can be promptly discharged downward from the lower bowl extraction hole 202a by moving the shortest distance.

[3-5-3. Dish base unit]
The dish base unit 210 of the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 59 is a perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 60 is a perspective view of the plate base unit in the plate unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 61 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 62 is an exploded perspective view of the plate base unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. is there. The dish base unit 210 is mounted below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and the dish decoration unit 250 and the effect operation unit 300 are mounted on the front surface.

  The plate base unit 210 is a plate-shaped plate unit base 211 attached to the lower part of the front surface of the door frame base unit 100 and extending left and right, and an upper plate attached to the upper part of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 and having the plate 201. A main body 212, a mounting base 213 which is mounted on the upper right side of the upper plate main body 212 in the upper front part of the plate unit base 211 and protrudes forward, and which is mounted on the right side of the mounting base 213 on the front side of the plate unit base 211. And a dish unit relay board 214.

  The plate base unit 210 includes a ball rental operation unit 220 mounted on the upper surface of the mounting base 213, and an upper plate ball removal unit 230 mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 below the mounting base 213. And a unit 240 for removing an upper tray ball attached to the rear of the tray unit base 211 behind the unit 230 for removing the upper tray ball.

[3-5-3a. Dish unit base]
The plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The plate unit base 211 is attached below the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and extends in the right and left direction over the entire width of the door frame base 101 (a shallow open rear portion). (Box shape).

  The plate unit base 211 penetrates forward and backward near the upper left corner in a front view, and extends rearward and downward under the upper plate ball supply port 211a. A speaker port 211b having a punched metal mounted on the front side, a lower tray ball supply port 211c penetrating back and forth at a lower portion on the left side with respect to the right and left center in front view, and extending rearward in a tubular manner; A cutout portion 211d, which is cut out to a size that allows the game ball B to pass therethrough, on the right side wall of the portion that extends cylindrically behind the ball supply port 211c, and front and back at the upper right side in front view of the lower dish ball supply port 211c. And an upper plate ball feed port 211e which extends vertically and has an upper portion located at the right end of the upper plate main body 212.

  Further, the plate unit base 211 protrudes forward to the right of the upper plate ball feed port 211e, and has a mounting protrusion 211f on which the mounting base is mounted, and an upper portion at the left of the upper plate ball feed port 211e. A slider insertion opening 211g through which the operation transmitting portion 242b of the upper tray ball removing slider 242 of the upper tray removing unit 240 penetrates forward and backward below the tray body, and penetrates forward and backward at the lower right corner in front view. A handle insertion opening 211h through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle attachment member 102 of the cage door frame base unit 100 is inserted, and a cylinder insertion through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 penetrates back and forth near the right corner in front view. Port 211i.

  The upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211 is opened to the rear wall of the upper plate 201 in a state where the upper plate ball supply port 211a is assembled to the door frame 3, and the cylindrical rear end thereof passes the upper plate ball for the door frame base 101. The mouth 101g penetrates from the front side and is connected to the front end of the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game balls B paid out from the payout device 580 of the payout unit 560 are supplied (paid) into the upper plate 201 through the upper plate ball supply port 211a.

  In a state where the lower dish ball supply port 211c is assembled to the door frame 3, the front end is opened to the rear wall of the lower dish 202, and the cylindrical rear end is connected to the lower dish ball passage port 101f of the door frame base 101 from the front side. It penetrates and is connected to the front end of the ball discharge port 150d of the foul cover unit 150. Thereby, the game balls B flowing in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 are supplied into the lower plate 202 through the lower plate ball supply port 211c. The downstream end of the ball guide path 241c in the rear base 241 of the unit 240 after the upper ball is removed is connected to a notch 211d formed at a portion of the lower ball supply port 211c that extends in a cylindrical shape. ing. As a result, the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 are moved to the upper plate ball outlet 211e, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b of the ball feed unit 140, by operating the upper ball drain button 222. The ball is discharged from the lower bowl supply port 211c into the lower bowl 202 via the ball feeding guide path 241b and the ball removal guide path 241c of the unit 240 after the tray is removed.

  The upper bowl feeding port 211e is located in front of the ball receiving port 241a of the rear base 241 in the upper bowl removing unit 240 when assembled to the bowl base unit 210. B is supplied from the ball receiving port 241a of the unit 240 after removing the upper bowl to the ball feeding guide path 241b.

[3-5-3b. Upper plate body]
The upper plate main body 212 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper plate main body 212 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211, and forms the upper plate 201 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211. The upper plate main body 212 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) in which the upper part and the rear part are opened. The upper plate main body 212 extends left and right, and the left side is larger than the left and right center in front view and bulges forward. The upper plate main body 212 has a front end receding rearward as it goes rightward in a front view from a portion that bulges forward most, and a depth in the front-rear direction is formed to have a width slightly larger than an outer diameter of the game ball B. ing. The bottom surface of the upper plate main body 212 is inclined such that the right end is the lowest. The upper plate main body 212 is closed at the upper portion near the right end.

  The upper plate main body 212 is attached so that a portion near the right end, which is closed at the top, is sunk below the ball rental operation unit 220 in a state where the upper plate main body 212 is assembled to the plate unit 200. The upper plate main body 212 has an effect operation unit attachment portion 212a formed at an upper middle portion in the left-right direction, and a part of the effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit attachment portion 212a.

[3-5-3c. Mounting base]
The mounting base 213 of the dish base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The mounting base 213 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 while being mounted on the upper surface of the mounting protrusion 211f of the plate unit base 211, and the ball rental operation unit 220 is mounted on the upper side. The mounting base 213 is formed in a shallow box shape whose upper part is open. The mounting base 213 includes an insertion hole 213a vertically penetrating near the left end, and a through hole 213b vertically penetrating at the rear right corner.

  The front slider 232 of the unit for removing upper and lower balls 230 is inserted through the insertion port 213a of the mounting base 213. In addition, a wiring cable for connecting the ball lending operation unit 220 and the door frame main relay board 104 is inserted into the through hole 213b.

[3-5-3d. Dish unit relay board]
The plate unit relay board 214 of the plate base unit 210 relays the connection between the door frame sub-relay board 105 in the door frame base unit 100, the lower left dish decorative board 283, the lower right dish decorative board 288, and the operation section relay board 392. It is for doing. The plate unit relay board 214 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 on the right side of the mounting protrusion 211f. When the dish unit relay board 214 is attached to the dish unit base 211, the rear surface faces the rear side of the dish unit base 211.

[3-5-3e. Ball rental operation unit]
The ball lending operation unit 220 of the plate base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The ball rental operation unit 220 is mounted on the front surface of the plate unit base 211 via the mounting base 213. The ball lending operation unit 220 discharges the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate 202, and sends cash to a ball lending machine (not shown) provided adjacent to the pachinko machine 1. After a predetermined number of game balls B are inserted into the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 after the player or the prepaid card is inserted, the remaining amount of cash or the prepaid card inserted into the ball rental machine is displayed, or the ball rental machine is used. To return the cash or the prepaid card inserted in the game ball B after renting out the game ball B.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 includes a base portion 221 mounted on the upper side of the mounting base 213, an upper flat ball removal button 222 disposed near the left end of the upper surface of the base portion 221, and an upper flat ball on the upper surface of the base portion 221. A disc-shaped ball lending operation base 223 that is disposed to the right of the extraction button 222 and has a translucency, a ball lending button 224 that is disposed on the front left side of the ball lending operation base 223, and a ball lending operation It includes a return button 225 disposed on the front right side of the base 223, and a ball rental display unit (not shown) disposed below the rear of the ball rental operation base 223.

  The upper bowl removing button 222 protrudes upward in a columnar shape from the upper surface of the base portion 221 and can be moved downward by a pressing operation by the player. The ball lending button 224 is formed in a circular shape. The return button 225 is formed in a triangular shape. The ball lending display section is constituted by three 7-segment LEDs, and can be visually recognized through the transparent ball lending operation base 223 while emitting light.

  The ball lending operation unit 220 can discharge the game balls B stored in the upper plate 201 to the lower plate by pressing the upper plate ball removal button 222. When a ball rental button 224 is pressed after a prepaid card with cash or balance is inserted into the ball lending machine, a predetermined number of game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201. When the return button 225 is pressed, the game ball B that has been lent is deducted and returned to the cash or prepaid card inserted in the ball lending machine. The ball lending display section displays the amount of cash or prepaid card remaining in the ball lending machine. An error code is displayed on the ball lending display unit when the ball lending machine breaks down.

[3-5-3f. Unit for removing the upper plate ball and unit after removing the upper plate ball]
The unit 230 for removing the upper tray ball and the unit 240 for removing the upper tray ball in the tray base unit 210 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 61 and 62. When the upper ball removing button 222 of the ball lending operation unit 220 is pressed, the upper ball removing unit 230 and the upper ball removing unit 240 cooperate with the ball feeding unit 140 to form the upper plate 201. This is for discharging the game balls B stored in the lower plate 202.

  The upper bowl removing unit 230 is attached to the front of the bowl unit base 211 to the left of the mounting protrusion 211f and below the ball lending operation unit 220. The unit for removing the upper tray ball 240 is attached to a rear portion of the unit for removing the upper tray ball 230 on the rear surface of the tray unit base 211.

  The upper bowl removing unit 230 is attached to the front of the bowl unit base 211 and has a vertically extending tubular front base 231, and a front barrel 231 that is vertically movably inserted into the barrel of the front base 231. And a slider 232. The front base 231 is attached to the front of the dish unit base 211 near the front of the upper dish ball feeding port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g. The front slider 232 extends vertically and has an upper end abutting on the lower end of the upper counter ball removing button 222 and a lower end of the operation receiving portion 242a of the upper counter ball removing slider 242 of the upper counter ball removing unit 240. It is in contact with the upper surface.

  The unit 240 for removing the upper tray ball is provided with a rear base 241 attached to the rear surface of the tray unit base 211 so as to close the upper tray ball feed port 211e and the slider insertion port 211g from the rear, and a vertical direction on the front surface of the rear base 241. A slider 242 that is slidably mounted on the upper plate, a spring 243 that urges the slider 242 upward, and a rear cover 244 that is mounted on the rear side of the rear base 241. It has.

  The rear base 241 protrudes upward from a portion to which the upper ball removing slider 242 is slidably attached and opens forward, and has a ball receiving port 241a through which the game ball B can pass, and a ball receiving port 241a. A ball feeding guide path 241b that guides the received game ball B downward at the rear surface of the rear base 241 and then guides the ball backward, and a game at a position lower than the ball feeding guide path 241b at the rear surface of the rear base 241. And a guiding path 241c that guides the ball B downward and then to the right in rear view.

  The ball receiving port 241a is assembled with the plate base unit 210, and forwardly passes through the upper plate ball feeding port 211e of the plate unit base 211 at the downstream end (right end in front view) of the guide passage portion 201a of the upper plate 201. It is formed at the position where it opens. The ball feeding guide path 241b is formed such that the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 is located behind the lower portion in a state where the ball feeding guiding path 241b is assembled to the door frame 3. Thereby, the game ball B supplied to the upper plate 201 enters the entrance 141a of the ball feeding unit 140 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b.

  The portion extending to the left and right of the ball guide path 241c protrudes rightward in rear view from the portion where the upper plate ball slide slider 242 is slidably attached, and is inclined so that the right end side in rear view is lower. And is open on the right side in rear view. A portion extending left and right of the ball guide path 241c is closed by a rear cover 244 on the rear side. In a state where the ball guide path 241c is assembled to the door frame 3, the upper portion of a portion extending vertically below the ball feed guide path 241b is located in front of the ball outlet 141b of the ball feed unit 140. At the same time, the right end of the portion extending left and right in the rear view is formed so as to be connected to the cutout portion 211d of the lower dish ball supply port 211c in the dish unit base 211. Thereby, the game ball B discharged from the ball outlet 141b of the ball feeding unit 140 is discharged from the lower tray ball supply port 211c into the lower tray 202 via the ball guide path 241c and the notch 211d.

  The upper dish removing slider 242 has a square shape in a front view, and has an operation receiving portion 242a protruding forward from an upper left corner and protruding rearward from a rear surface on the rear side of the operation receiving portion 242a. And an operation transmission unit 242b. The operation receiving portion 242a has a flat upper surface. Further, the operation transmitting portion 242b is inclined such that the upper surface is positioned downward as it goes rearward, and the lower surface extends horizontally so as to be connected to the rear end of the upper surface.

  In the state where the slider 242 for removing the upper tray ball is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation receiving portion 242 a penetrates the slider insertion opening 211 g of the plate unit base 211 from the rear side and protrudes forward, and the operation receiving portion 242 a The lower end of the front slider 232 of the upper bowl removing unit 230 is in contact with the upper surface of the head. Further, in the state in which the upper ball removing slider 242 is assembled to the door frame 3, the operation transmitting portion 242 b protrudes to the rear of the rear base 241, and the operation of the ball removing member 143 of the ball feeding unit 140 on the upper surface. The rod 143c is in contact.

  The spring 243 has an upper end attached to the rear base 241 and a lower end attached to the upper countersunk slider 242, and urges the upper counterslider 242 upward. Accordingly, the upper countersunk slider 242 is located at the upper moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, and can move downward by opposing the urging force of the spring 243.

  The unit for removing the ball from the upper ball 230 and the unit after removing the ball from the upper ball 240 are positioned at the upward moving end by the biasing force of the spring 243, and the slider for the upper ball from the ball is removed. The upper ball removing button 222 is positioned at the moving end upward through the front slider 232 in contact with the upper surface of the operation receiving portion 242a. In addition, since the upper countersunk ball removing slider 242 is positioned at the upward moving end by the urging force of the spring 243, the downward movement of the operating rod 143c abutting on the upper surface of the operation transmitting portion 242b is prevented. The partition 143a of the ball removing member 143 is located between the entrance 141a and the ball removing port 141b to partition between them.

  Therefore, in a state where the upper plate ball removing button 222 is not pressed, the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b are partitioned in the ball feeding unit 140, and are sent from the upper plate 201 to the ball receiving port 241a. The game ball B can be sent from the hit ball supply port 142a to the ball launching device 540 through the entrance 141a and the ball feed member 144.

  On the other hand, when the upper disc removing button 222 is pressed downward against the urging force of the spring 243, the upper disc removing slider 242 moves downward via the front slider 232, and the operation of the upper disc removing slider 242 is performed. The operating rod 143c of the ball removing member 143 that is in contact with the upper surface of the transmission portion 242b can move downward, and the ball removing member 143 rotates by the load of the weight portion 143d of the ball removing member 143, and the partitioning portion 143a. Retreats from between the entrance 141a and the ball outlet 141b. Thereby, the game ball B which has entered the entrance 141a from the upper plate 201 through the ball receiving port 241a and the ball feeding guide path 241b is discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b opened below the entrance 141a. Will be done. Then, the game ball B discharged forward from the ball outlet 141b is guided from the notch portion 211d into the lower dish ball supply port 211c through the ball ejection guide path 241c, and is then lowered from the lower dish ball supply port 211c. The game ball B in the upper plate 201 is discharged into the plate 202 and is discharged into the lower plate 202.

  When the downward pressing of the upper tray removing button 222 is released, the upper tray removing slider 242 is moved upward by the urging force of the spring 243, and the upper tray is removed via the front slider 232 in contact with the operation receiving portion 242a. As the ball pullout button 222 is raised, the ball pullout member 143 is rotated by the operating rod 143c abutting on the operation transmitting portion 242b, and the partition 143a is positioned between the entrance 141a and the ball dropout 141b. It will return to the original state.

  In this manner, the game ball B in the upper plate 201 is sent to the ball launching device 540 side via the ball feed unit 140 by the unit for removing the upper plate ball 230 and the unit for removing the upper plate ball 240, It can be discharged to the lower plate 202 side.

[3-5-4. Dish decoration unit]
The dish decoration unit 250 in the dish unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 63 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit in the dish unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 64 is a perspective view of the dish decoration unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 65 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 66 is an exploded perspective view of the dish decoration unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. is there. The dish decoration unit 250 has the lower dish 202, is attached to the front of the dish base unit 210, and has the effect operation unit 300 attached to the center in the left-right direction from the front. The dish decoration unit 250 decorates substantially the entire dish unit 200.

  The dish decoration unit 250 is attached to a lower part of the front of the dish unit base 211 and cooperates with the dish unit base 211 to form the lower dish 202, and a dish unit base 251 covering the outer periphery of the lower dish body 251. A dish unit main body 252 attached to the front surface of the dish 211, a lower dish emptying unit 260 attached to the lower face of the lower dish body 251, and a dish attached to the upper part of the front face of the dish unit body 252 while being left and right apart from each other. The upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275, and the lower left decorative unit 280 and the lower right decorative unit mounted below the upper left decorative unit 270 and the upper right decorative unit 275 on the entire surface of the main unit 252, respectively. 285.

[3-5-4a. Lower plate body]
The lower plate main body 251 in the plate decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower plate main body 251 forms the lower plate 202 in cooperation with the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210. The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a container shape (dish shape) that extends left and right and that is open at the top and rear. The lower plate main body 251 is attached to a lower left portion of the front surface of the plate unit base 211 from the center in the left-right direction so that the open rear portion is closed.

  The lower plate main body 251 is formed in a substantially rectangular shape having a plan view extending left and right, and a front end on the left side from the center in the left and right direction projects forward from the right side. The lower dish main body 251 is formed with a lower dish ball hole 202a penetrating vertically in the vicinity of the right front end in plan view. The lower plate main body 251 is inclined such that the bottom surface becomes lower toward the lower plate hole 202a. The lower bowl removing hole 202a is openably and closably closed by a lower bowl removing unit 265.

  The lower plate main body 251 is in a state where the outer periphery and a part of the lower surface are covered with the plate unit main body 252 in a state where the lower plate main body 251 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250. When the lower dish main body is assembled to the dish unit 200, the bottom surface is located below the lower dish ball supply port 211c of the dish unit base 211, and the lower dish ball outlet hole 202a is connected to the lower dish ball supply port. It is located in front of 211c. Thereby, the game ball B discharged forward from the lower dish ball supply port 211c can be stored.

[3-5-4b. Dish unit body]
The dish unit main body 252 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The plate unit main body 252 is attached to the front surface of the plate unit base 211 of the plate base unit 210, and decorates the front surface of the plate unit 200. The plate unit main body 252 protrudes so that the center in the left-right direction protrudes forward on the upper side, and protrudes forward on the left side in the left-right direction on the lower side. The upper surface of the dish unit main body 252 is curved so that the center in the left-right direction is the lowest. The dish unit main body 252 is formed in a box shape opened rearward.

  The dish unit main body 252 bulges forward from the left and right ends to the center in the left and right direction at the upper part and extends downward and is separated to the left and right. Has a lower front decorative portion 252b bulging forward so as to cover the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251; and a bottom plate portion 252c extending rearward from the lower end of the lower front decorative portion 252b in a flat plate shape. .

  The left and right upper side bulging portions 252a are formed in a box shape with an open rear, and have a dish upper left decorative unit 270, a dish lower left decorative unit 280, a dish upper right decorative unit 275, and a dish lower right decorative unit on the front surfaces thereof. 285 are attached. The right side of the lower surface of the upper side bulging portion 252a on the left side is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower end of the right upper side bulging portion 252a is connected to the lower front decorative portion 252b.

  The plate unit main body 252 has a lower plate opening 252d penetrating back and forth between the left upper side bulging portion 252a and the lower front decorative portion 252b. The lower plate opening 252d has a size that allows a player's fingers to be inserted, and is formed such that the top and bottom become wider toward the left. The lower plate opening 252d is formed in a tubular shape extending forward and backward by the lower plate main body 251 and the lower surface of the left upper side bulging portion 252a.

  In addition, the plate unit body 252 includes a front notch 252e cut out upward from a lower front end of a portion of the lower front decorative portion 252b covering the outer periphery of the lower plate main body 251 and a lower plate main body 251 in the bottom plate 252c. And a bottom notch 252f which is cut out at a portion below the bottom. In the front notch 252e and the bottom notch 252f, the lower tray removing unit 260 is inserted.

  Further, the plate unit main body 252 penetrates back and forth at the lower right corner of the lower front decorative portion 252b, and has a handle insertion opening 252g through which the cylindrical portion 102a of the handle mounting member 102 is inserted, and a lower front surface above the handle insertion opening 252g. The effect operation unit is formed between a cylinder insertion opening 252h that penetrates the decorative portion 252b back and forth and through which the cylinder body 131 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted, and a pair of upper side swelling portions 252a that are located at the center in the left-right direction. And a production operation unit attachment portion 252i to which the attachment 300 is attached. The effect operation unit attachment portion 252i is formed to have a width that is approximately １ ／ of the width of the plate unit main body 252 in the left-right direction.

  The plate unit main body 252 is formed so as to entirely cover the front surface of the plate base unit 210 when assembled to the plate unit 200, and the speaker port 211b faces forward through the lower plate opening 252d. . Further, in a state where the lower plate removing unit 260 is assembled with the lower plate removing unit 260, the lower plate removing button 260 of the lower unit removing unit 260 faces forward from the front notch 252e, and the lower plate removing base 260 of the lower unit removing unit 260 is attached. The bottom notch 252f is closed so that the lower surfaces are on the same plane.

[3-5-4c. Lower plate empty unit]
The lower dish removing unit 260 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower dish ball removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower dish main body 251, and by opening and closing the lower dish ball extracting hole 202 a, the game balls B are stored in the lower dish 202 or the game balls B are discharged from the lower dish 202. It is to make it.

  The lower plate removing unit 260 is attached to the lower surface of the lower plate main body 251 and has a plate-like lower plate removing base 261 having a through hole vertically penetrating at the right front corner in plan view, and a lower plate removing unit 261. A slider 262 mounted on the upper surface side of the base 261 so as to be slidable forward and backward, a lower counter ball removal button 263 mounted on a front end of the slider 262, and a spring 264 for urging the slider 262 forward; The slider 262 is provided with a lower ball removing cover 265 that opens and closes a through hole by moving the slider 262 in the front-rear direction, and a holding mechanism 266 that holds the lower ball removing cover 265 through the slider 262 in an open state.

  The lower plate empty base 261 is formed in a size to close the bottom cutout 252f of the plate unit main body 252, and is vertically moved to a position corresponding to the lower plate empty hole 202a of the lower plate 202 (lower plate main body 251). A penetrating through hole is formed. The through hole of the lower bowl removing hole 261 is formed in the same size as the lower bowl removing hole 202a. The slider 262 is formed in a flat plate shape extending in the front-back direction, and is slidably mounted in the left-right center of the lower dish removal base 261 so as to slide back and forth. The slider 262 includes a protruding pin that protrudes upward in a columnar shape.

  The lower ball removing cover 265 is attached to the lower ball removing base 261 at a position on the left side of the slider 262 at a position on the left side of the slider 262 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically. And the right end side is formed so that the through hole can be closed. The lower bowl removing lid 265 is formed with a left-right extending slit into which the protruding pin of the slider 262 is slidably inserted.

  In the state where the lower dish removing unit 260 is assembled to the dish decoration unit 250, the lower dish removing base 261 closes the bottom cutout 252f of the dish unit main body 252, and the lower face of the lower dish removing base 261 is closed. It is located on the same plane as the lower surface of the bottom plate portion 252c. Further, the lower dish ball removal button 263 faces forward from the front notch 252e of the dish unit main body 252. In the lower tray removing unit 260, in a normal state, the slider 262 is located at the front moving end by the urging force of the spring 264, and the right end side of the lower tray removing lid 265 is located immediately above the through hole. And the through hole (lower countersunk ball hole 202a) is closed.

  In this normal state, the lower bowl 202 is closed by the lower bowl removing lid 265, and the lower bowl 202 can store the game ball B. Further, in a normal state, the front surface of the lower bowl removing button 263 substantially coincides with the front surface around the front notch 252e on the front surface of the lower front decoration portion 252b.

  In a normal state, when the lower counter button 263 is pressed rearward to move rearward against the urging force of the spring 264, the slider 262 moves rearward together with the lower counter button 263. Becomes When the slider 262 moves rearward, the protruding pin of the slider 262 presses the lower bowl removing lid 265 rearward through the slit, and the lower bowl removing lid 265 centers on the left end side and the right end side moves backward. It turns in the moving direction. Then, the right end side of the lower dish ball removing cover 265 located immediately above the through hole moves rearward from the position of the through hole, whereby the through hole is opened and the lower dish ball removing hole 202a is opened. The game balls B in the lower plate 202 can be discharged below the plate unit 200 through the lower plate hole 202a.

  When the slider 262 is moved rearward by the pressing of the lower plate removing button 263, the rear end of the slider 262 is held by the holding mechanism 266, and the pressing of the lower plate removing button 263 is released. However, the slider 262 does not move forward due to the urging force of the spring 264. As a result, the right end side of the lower bowl removing lid 265 is kept rotating backward, the lower bowl removing hole 202a is kept open, and the game balls B in the lower bowl 202 are continuously connected. It can be discharged downward.

  To close the lower bowl removing hole 202a from this state, when the lower bowl removing button 263, which is retracted from the front surface of the lower front decoration part 252b, is pressed backward, the holding of the slider 262 by the holding mechanism 266 is released. You. Then, when the pressing of the lower ball removing button 263 is released, the slider 262 is moved forward by the urging force of the spring 264, and the front surface of the lower ball removing button 263 is returned to a state in which it coincides with the front surface of the lower front decorative portion 252b. At the same time, the lower countersunk ball cover 265 rotates and the right end side is located immediately above the through-hole, and the lower countersunk ball hole 202a is closed by the lower countersunk ball cover 265. Thereby, the game balls B can be stored in the lower plate 202.

[3-5-4e. Plate upper left decorative unit and plate upper right decorative unit]
The upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275 are attached to the upper front side of the upper side bulging portion 252 a of the dish unit main body 252. The upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275 decorate the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300 above the dish unit 200.

  The upper left dish decoration unit 270 has a semi-cylindrical shape, extends left and right and has a translucent upper left dish decoration 271, an upper left dish reflector 272 attached to the rear side of the upper left dish decoration 271, And a dish upper left decorative board 273 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper left reflector 272 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on its front surface.

  The upper left dish 271 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and is attached to the upper portion of the left upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper left decorative body 271 has a shape in which a semicircular arc bulging forward has a central axis extending diagonally to the upper left at the left end, and a central axis extending left and right at the right end, and the half cylinder is twisted. Is formed. The upper left decorative body 271 is formed in milky white.

  The upper left dish reflector 272 is inserted from the rear inside the upper left decorative body 271, and a through-hole is formed in a portion of the upper left dish substrate 273 corresponding to the LED. The upper left dish decorative substrate 273 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the upper left decorative body 271. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper left decorative board 273 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish upper left decorative body 271 can be made to emit light.

  The upper left plate decoration unit 270 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the left end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame left side unit 400, and the right end is the left end of the plate center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. And is continuous. Since the upper left dish decoration unit 270 does not have a rib in the middle in the longitudinal direction in the upper left dish decoration 271, when the plurality of LEDs of the upper left decoration board 273 emit light, the entire front of the upper left dish decoration 271 is illuminated. Light emission decoration can be performed substantially uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The plate upper right decorative unit 275 is a semi-cylindrical shape, extends right and left, and has a translucent plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate upper right reflector 277 attached to the rear side of the plate upper right decorative body 276, and And a dish upper right decorative board 278 mounted on the rear side of the dish upper right reflector 277 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side.

  The dish upper right decorative body 276 extends in a curved manner so as to move forward and downward from the right end to the left end, and is attached to the upper part of the right upper side bulging portion 252a. The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a shape in which a semicircular arc bulging forward has a central axis extending obliquely right and upper at the right end, and a central axis extending left and right at the left end, and the half cylinder is twisted. Is formed. The dish upper right decorative body 276 is formed in milky white.

  The dish upper right reflector 277 is inserted into the dish upper right decorative body 276 from the rear, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the dish upper right decorative board 278 corresponding to the LED. The dish upper right decorative substrate 278 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the dish upper right decorative body 276. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish upper right decorative board 278 are full-color LEDs, and by emitting light, the dish upper right decorative body 276 can be made to emit light.

  The dish upper right decorative unit 275 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is continuous with the lower end of the door frame right side unit 410, and the left end is the right end of the dish center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. And is continuous. Since the dish upper right decorative unit 275 does not have a rib in the middle of the dish upper right decorative body 276 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs of the dish upper right decorative board 278 emit light, the entire front surface of the dish upper right decorative body 276 is illuminated. Light emission decoration can be performed substantially uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-4f. Bottom left dish decoration unit and bottom right dish decoration unit]
The lower left dish decoration unit 280 and the lower right dish decoration unit 285 in the dish decoration unit 250 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower left dish decoration unit 280 and the lower right dish decoration unit 285 are attached to the lower part of the front side of the upper side bulging portion 252a of the dish unit main body 252 so as to extend along the upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275, respectively. Can be The lower left dish decoration unit 280 and the lower right dish decoration unit 285 cooperate with the upper left dish decoration unit 270 and the upper right dish decoration unit 275 to decorate the front surface of the dish unit 200 and the left and right sides of the effect operation unit 300. .

  The lower left dish decoration unit 280 has a semi-cylindrical shape, extends left and right, and has a translucent lower dish decoration 281, a lower left dish reflector 282 attached to the rear side of the lower left dish decoration 281, A lower left dish decoration board 283 mounted on the rear side of the lower dish reflector 282 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front.

  The lower left dish decoration 281 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward from the left end to the right end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. Is attached to the lower portion of the upper side bulging portion 252a. In the lower left dish decoration 281, a semicircular arc bulging forward with a smaller radius than the upper left decoration 271 and the upper right decoration 276 has a central axis extending slightly obliquely to the upper left rear at the left end, and a center at the right end. The shaft extends left and right, and is formed in a shape such that a half cylinder is bent. The lower left corner of the dish 281 has a spherical shape at the left end. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the lower left decorative plate 281 becomes thinner toward the left end. The lower left decoration 281 is formed in milky white.

  The lower left dish reflector 282 is inserted from the rear inside the lower left decorative body 281, and a through hole is formed in a portion of the lower left decorative board 283 corresponding to the LED. The lower left dish decoration substrate 283 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the lower left dish decoration 281. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower left dish decoration board 283 are full-color LEDs, and the lower left decoration body 281 can be made to emit light by emitting light.

  The lower left dish decoration unit 280 is located on the lower left side of the upper left dish decoration unit 270 in a state where the lower left decoration unit 280 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end of the lower left dish decoration unit 312 b of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300 is located. It is continuous with the left end. In the lower left dish decoration unit 280, the left end of the lower left decoration body 281 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the left end appears to be sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower left dish decoration unit 280 does not have a rib in the middle of the lower left decoration piece 281 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs of the lower left decoration board 283 emit light, the entire front surface of the lower left decoration piece 281 is illuminated. Light emission decoration can be performed substantially uniformly, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The lower right decoration unit 285 is a semi-cylindrical shape, extends right and left, and has a translucent lower right decoration 286 and a lower right lower dish attached to the rear side of the lower right decoration 286. It comprises a reflector 287 and a lower right decorative plate 288 mounted on the rear side of the lower right reflector 287 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface.

  The dish lower right decorative body 286 extends in a curved shape so as to move forward and downward as going from the right end to the left end, and extends in an arc shape having a center in the rear in plan view. It is attached to the lower part of the right upper side bulge 252a. The lower right dish decoration 286 has a semicircular arc that bulges forward with a smaller radius than the upper left decoration 271 and the upper right decoration 276. The central axis extends left and right, and is formed in a shape such that a half cylinder is bent. The right lower end of the dish lower right decorative body 286 is formed in a spherical shape. The curvature of the semicircular arc changes so that the lower right decoration 286 becomes thinner toward the right end. The lower right decoration 286 is formed in milky white.

  The dish lower right reflector 287 is inserted from the rear inside the dish lower right decorative body 286, and a through hole is formed in a part of the dish lower right decorative board 288 corresponding to the LED. The dish lower right decorative board 288 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the dish lower right decorative body 286. The plurality of LEDs mounted on the lower right decoration plate 288 are full-color LEDs, and the lower right decoration body 286 can be illuminated by emitting light.

  The dish lower right decorative unit 285 is assembled to the door frame 3, and the right end is located below the right end of the dish upper right decorative unit 275, and the left end is the dish center lower decorative body 312 b of the unit front cover 312 in the rendering operation unit 300. Is continuous with the right end of In the lower right dish decoration unit 285, the right end of the lower right decoration body 286 is formed in a spherical shape, so that the right end appears to be sunk into the door frame 3. Since the lower right dish decoration unit 285 does not have a rib in the middle of the lower right decoration piece 286 in the longitudinal direction, when the plurality of LEDs on the lower right decoration board 288 emit light, the lower right decoration body 286 The entire front surface can be almost uniformly illuminated and decorated, and it can be seen that the fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-5-5. Overall configuration of staging operation unit]
The overall configuration of the effect operation unit 300 in the plate unit 200 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 67 is a plan view of the effect operation unit in the plate unit as viewed from the direction in which the effect operation button moves forward and backward. FIG. 68 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 68 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 69 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 70 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation unit disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. The effect operation unit 300 is provided at the center in the left-right direction of the plate unit 200, decorates the plate unit 200, and, when the player participation type effect is executed, the player operates and participates in the effect. Is what you can do. The production operation unit 300 is attached to the dish base unit 210 and the dish decoration unit 250.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player. The rendering operation unit 301 includes a rotation operation unit 302 that can be rotated by the player, and a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. In the effect operation unit 301, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in an annular shape having an inner diameter of about に 対 し て of the outer diameter, and the pressing operation unit 303 is arranged in the ring. . The pressing operation unit 303 is disposed at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and has a center pressing operation unit 303 a having a diameter slightly larger than half of the inner diameter of the rotation operation unit 302, and an outer periphery of the center pressing operation unit 303 a and the rotation operation unit 302. And an annular outer periphery pressing operation portion 303b disposed between the inner periphery and the inner periphery.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310 attached to the front of the dish decoration unit 250, the operation unit base 320 housed in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320. An annular effect operation ring 330 having a rotating operation unit 302, a rotation drive unit 340 for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and a rotation operation of the rotation drive unit 340 and the effect operation ring 330 An operating ring transmission gear 350 for transmitting rotation to and from the portion 302 and a gear mounting member 351 for rotatably mounting the operating ring transmission gear 350 to the operating section base 320 are provided.

  The effect operation unit 300 is attached to the upper surface of the operation unit base 320 below the effect operation ring 330 and has a plurality of effect operation ring decoration substrates 352 and effect operation ring decoration substrates 352. The decoration board cover 353 attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to cover the upper side of the display unit, the vibration speaker 354 attached to the lower surface of the operation unit base 320, and the operation unit facing the inside of the effect operation ring 330. An effect operation button unit 360 attached to the base 320 and an operation unit relay board unit 390 attached to the rear surface of the operation unit base 320 are provided.

[3-5-5a. Production operation unit cover unit]
The effect operation unit cover unit 310 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is attached to the effect operation unit mounting portion 252i of the dish unit main body 252 of the dish decoration unit 250, and decorates the front surface of the effect operation unit 300 at the center in the left and right direction of the dish unit 200. The effect operation unit cover unit 310 is formed in a container shape with the upper part and the rear part opened.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 includes a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 that is depressed downward, a semi-annular unit front cover 312 attached to the upper front end of the unit lower cover 311 and bulging forward, A dish center upper reflector 313 attached from the rear inside the dish center decoration body 312a of the cover 312, and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the dish center reflector 313 and capable of irradiating light forward are mounted. The dish center upper decorative board 314, the dish center lower reflector 315 attached from the rear inside the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312, and the dish center lower reflector 315 attached to the front light And a decorative board 316 below the center of the dish on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating the LED are mounted.

  The unit lower cover 311 is formed in a hemispherical shape that bulges downward at the front side from the center rearward in the front-rear direction, and the rear side of the unit lower cover 311 is a production operation unit mounting portion of the plate unit main body 252. 252i so as to be placed from above. The unit lower cover 311 is attached in an inclined state such that an axis perpendicular to an imaginary plane formed on an upper end edge extending in a front semicircular shape is located forward as it goes upward. In the present embodiment, it is inclined at an angle of about 18 degrees (18.65 degrees) with respect to the vertical line. The unit lower cover 311 has a plurality of drain holes 311a formed at the lowest part when assembled to the dish unit 200.

  The unit front cover 312 is formed in a semicircular shape whose front view is bulged forward along the front end of the unit lower cover 311, and is formed on the front upper end of the unit lower cover 311. Installed. The unit front cover 312 includes a dish center upper decorative body 312a in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends along a front end of the unit lower cover 311, and a forward part below the dish center upper decorative body 312a. A lower plate center decoration 312b in which the protruding semi-arc extends along the front end of the unit lower cover 311 in a semi-arc shape. In the unit front cover 312, the lower end of the dish center lower decorative body 312 b is attached to the unit lower cover 311.

  The plate center upper decorative body 312a and the plate center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312 are formed by halving a cylinder having substantially the same thickness (radius), and extending in a semi-arc shape with the split surface toward the center. It is formed in a shape bent as described above. The lower plate center decoration 312b extends in a semicircular shape with a large curvature with respect to the plate center upper decoration 312a, and the plate center lower decoration 312b has a slightly smaller thickness than the plate center upper decoration 312a. Is formed in a semi-cylindrical shape. When the unit front cover 312 is assembled to the dish unit 200, the front end of the dish center upper decorative body 312a projects forward from the front end of the dish center lower decorative body 312b. In addition, when assembled to the dish unit 200, the left and right ends of the dish upper decorative body 312a are respectively connected to the right end of the dish upper left decorative unit 270 and the left end of the dish upper right decorative unit 275, and the dish center lower decorative body The left and right ends of 312b are respectively connected to the right end of the lower left decorative unit 280 and the left end of the lower right decorative unit 285. The unit front cover 312 has translucency and is formed in milky white.

  The unit front cover 312 is assembled to the door frame 3, and its front end is the front end of the door frame 3. The distance from the front of the door frame base 101 to the front end of the unit front cover 312 is equal to the door frame. The distance is about の of the total width of the base 101 in the left-right direction.

  The dish center upper reflector 313 is formed in a semicircular shape bulging forward, and is inserted from the rear into the dish center upper decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312 and attached thereto. The dish center reflector 313 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish center decoration board 314 from leaking rearward (inward). The dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is formed in an elongated strip shape having a semi-circular shape along the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and has a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) on the upper surface. Has been implemented. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center decoration board 314 are full-color LEDs, and the dish center decoration body 312a can be made to emit light by emitting light.

  The dish center lower reflector 315 is formed in a semicircular shape bulging forward, and is inserted and attached from the rear into the dish center lower decorative body 312b of the unit front cover 312. The dish bottom reflector 315 blocks the light from the LED mounted on the dish bottom decorative board 316 from leaking backward (inside). The dish-under-center decoration board 316 is formed in an elongated strip shape having a semi-circular shape along the dish-under-center decoration 312b, and has a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light forward (outward) on the upper surface. Has been implemented. The plurality of LEDs on the dish center lower decorative substrate 316 are full-color LEDs, and the light emitting decoration of the dish center lower decorative body 312b can be performed by emitting light.

  Since the effect operation unit cover unit 310 does not have a reinforcing rib in the middle of the semi-circular shape of the upper plate decoration 312a and the lower plate decoration 312b of the unit front cover 312, When the LED of the upper center decorative substrate 314 and the LED of the lower plate center decorative substrate 316 emit light, the whole can be almost uniformly light-emitting and decorated, and it can be seen that a fluorescent lamp is embedded.

  The effect operation unit cover unit 310 has a front end protruding farther forward than the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 when assembled to the plate unit 200. Further, in the effect operation unit cover unit 310, the plate center upper decorative body 312a is continuous with the plate upper left decorative body 271 and the plate upper right decorative body 276, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b is the plate lower left decorative body 281 and the plate right. It is continuous with the lower decorative body 286. As a result, the effect operation unit 300 is made to stand out, and the appearance is improved by integral decoration.

[3-5-5b. Operation unit base]
The operation unit base 320 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The operation unit base 320 is inserted into the effect operation unit cover unit 310 from above, the lower end is attached to the effect operation unit cover unit 310, and the upper rear end is the effect operation unit mounting of the upper plate main body 212 in the plate base unit 210. It is attached to the part 212a. The operation unit base 320 is formed in a container shape whose upper part is opened.

  The operation unit base 320 has a substantially cubic box-shaped outer shape, and a main body 321 whose upper part is open, and extends outward from the upper end of the main body 321 and has a circular outer periphery. Flange portion 322, a plurality of (here, four) legs 323 projecting downward from the bottom surface of the main body portion 321, and an upper mounting portion formed at the rear end of the flange portion 322 and mounted to the dish base unit 210. A portion 324 and a gear bearing portion 325 that opens upward through the flange portion 322 on the left outer side of the main body portion 321 and rotatably supports the operation ring transmission gear 350.

  The operation unit base 320 is formed in such a size that the main body 321 can accommodate the effect operation button unit 360 inside. The main body 321 has a vibration speaker 354 attached to the bottom wall from below, and a portion of the lower surface where the vibration speaker 354 is attached is formed on a flat surface. The bottom wall of the main body 321 is formed so as to easily resonate with the vibration from the vibration speaker 354, and can amplify the vibration and convert the vibration into sound such as voice or music and output the sound. it can.

  The leg 361b of the button unit base 361 of the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the upper surface of the bottom wall of the main body 321. In the main body 321, a through hole for discharging the liquid that has entered the main body 321 is formed on the outer peripheral edge of the bottom wall. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side wall of the main body 321, and the operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to the outside of the rear side wall.

  The outer diameter of the flange portion 322 is formed to have a diameter substantially coincident with the inner circumference of the upper plate center decoration 312a of the unit front cover 312. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 and the decoration substrate cover 353 are attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322, and the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 is attached. The lower ends of the plurality of legs 323 are attached to the upper surface of the unit lower cover 311 in the effect operation unit cover unit 310.

  The gear bearing portion 325 can cooperate with the gear mounting member to mount the operation ring transmission gear rotatably around an axis extending left and right. When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the gear bearing portion 325, the upper portion of the operation ring transmission gear 350 projects upward, and the drive side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350 has a flange portion. 322 is exposed outside.

  When the operation unit base 320 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of the flange 322 is located slightly below the upper surface of the dish center upper decorative body 312 a of the unit front cover 312. Further, in a state where the vibration speaker 354 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the vibration speaker 354 is attached to a lower surface of the main body 321.

[3-5-5c. Production operation ring]
The effect operation ring 330 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 71 and 72. FIG. 71 (a) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring of the effect operation unit as viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 71 (b) is a perspective view of the effect operation ring as viewed from the lower front. FIG. 72 (a) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring as disassembled as viewed from above, and FIG. 72 (b) is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation ring as exploded as viewed from below. The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and has a rotation operation portion 302 that can be rotated by a player. The effect operation ring 330 (rotation operation section 302) has a diameter (outer diameter) approximately twice as large as the dimension in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and an inner diameter of approximately 3/5 of the outer diameter. It is formed in an annular shape. In the present embodiment, the outer diameter of the effect operation ring 330 is about 13 cm.

  The effect operation ring 330 includes an annular ring mounting base 331 mounted on the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation section base 320, an annular rotating base 332 rotatably mounted on the ring mounting base 331, and a rotating base. A plurality of bushes 333 which are in contact with the outer peripheral surface of the shaft 332 and are rotatably mounted around an axis which extends vertically to the ring mounting base 331, and which are mounted on the ring mounting base 331 to move the rotary base 332 upward. And a restricting ring retaining member 334.

  The effect operation ring 330 is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332 and is attached to a lower outer ring cover 335 constituting a part of the rotation operation unit 302 and a lower side of the outer ring cover 335. The outer ring lower cover 336 forming a part of the rotary operation unit 302 and the inner peripheral side of the ring outer upper cover 335 are mounted on the upper surface of the rotary base 332 to form a part of the rotary operation unit 302. And a ring inner cover 337. The ring outer upper cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 are each formed in a translucent annular shape.

  The outer diameter of the ring mounting base 331 is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and the inner diameter is formed to be substantially the same as the inner diameter of the flange portion 322. The ring mounting base 331 is separated from the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface side along the inner peripheral edge on which the rotating base 332 is mounted so as to be slidable in the circumferential direction, in the outer circumferential direction outside the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. And a boss 331b for cylindrically protruding upward from a plurality of (four in this case) portions for rotatably mounting the bush 333 and a circumferentially spaced outer side than the mounting portion 331a on the upper surface. And a through hole 331c penetrating vertically at a plurality of portions. The plurality of through-holes 331c are formed at positions corresponding to the LEDs on the effect operation ring decorative board 352.

  The rotation base 332 has an outer diameter slightly smaller than the diameter (outer diameter) of the mounting portion 331 a of the ring attachment base 331, and an inner diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring attachment base 331. The rotation base 332 includes a ring gear 332a protruding downward from the lower surface and extending in the circumferential direction. The ring gear 332a is formed as a bevel gear so as to protrude downward toward the center of the rotation base 332. The ring gear 332a is formed to have an outer diameter smaller than the inner diameter of the ring mounting base 331, and when assembled to the rendering operation ring 330, the ring gear 332a faces downward from the inner peripheral side of the ring mounting base 331. The ring gear 332a meshes with the ring-side gear portion 350a of the operation ring transmission gear 350 in a state where the ring gear 332a is assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a three-dimensional shape on the outer upper surface portion 335a and the outer upper surface portion 335a in which a circular arc constituting the outer and upper part of the circle extends in an annular shape. And a plurality of outer upper cover attachment portions 335c extending downward from the inner peripheral end of the outer upper surface portion 335a and then extending to the center side and arranged in the circumferential direction. I have. The outer upper surface portion 335a of the ring outer upper cover 335 is formed in a shape in which an arc of a quarter of a circle extends in an annular shape. The decorative part 335b has a hexagonal outer shape. The outer upper cover attachment portion 335c extends slightly below the lower end of the outer upper surface portion 335a, and is attached to the upper surface of the rotating base 332.

  The ring outer lower cover 336 has an outer lower surface portion 336a in which a circular arc forming an outer and lower portion of a circle extends in an annular shape, and protrudes upward and to the center side from the inside of the outer lower surface portion 336a. And a plurality of outer lower cover mounting portions 336b which are arranged in plurality. The outer lower surface portion 336a of the ring outer lower cover 336 is formed in a shape in which an arc extending in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The outer lower cover attaching portion 336b is attached to the ring outer upper cover 335.

  The ring inner cover 337 includes an inner surface portion 337a in which a circular arc forming an inner and upper part of a circle extends in an annular shape, and a tube extending downward from an inner end of the inner surface portion 337a in parallel with the central axis. A cylindrical surface portion 337b and an inner cover mounting portion 337c formed on the outer periphery of the cylindrical surface portion 337b and arranged in the circumferential direction. The inner surface 337a of the ring inner cover 337 is formed in a shape in which a circular arc extending in a range of 1/8 of a circle extends in an annular shape. The cylindrical inner surface 337 b has the same cylindrical inner diameter as the rotary base 332. The inner cover attachment portion 337c is attached to the upper surface of the rotation base 332.

  The outer upper cover 335, the outer lower cover 336, and the inner cover 337 are assembled to the rendering operation ring 330, and the outer upper surface 335a, the outer lower surface 336a, and the inner surface 337a are continuous. The outer upper surface portion 335a, the outer lower surface portion 336a, and the inner surface portion 337a form a portion of a half or more of a circle, and the entire portion has a donut shape. The effect operation ring 330 can be illuminated and decorated by the effect operation ring decoration substrate 352.

[3-5-5d. Rotary drive unit]
The rotation drive unit 340 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 73 (a) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the front, and FIG. 73 (b) is a perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 74 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the front right, and FIG. 75 is an exploded perspective view of the rotary drive unit as viewed from the front left. The rotation drive unit 340 is for rotating the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and detecting the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302. The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the outside of the left side surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The rotation drive unit 340 includes a rotation drive base 341 attached to the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320, and an operation ring drive motor 342 attached to the rear right side of the rotation drive base 341 so that the rotation axis projects leftward. A drive gear 343 attached to the rotating shaft of the operation ring drive motor 342; a transmission gear 344 rotated by the drive gear 343; and a transmission detection gear member rotated by the transmission gear 344 and rotating the operation ring transmission gear 350. The gear cover 345, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 are rotatably mounted in cooperation with the rotary drive base, and cover the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, and the transmission detection gear member 345 from the left. 346.

  The rotation drive unit 340 is attached to the gear cover 346 and detects the rotation position of the transmission detection gear member 345, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the first rotation detection sensor 347. And a sensor cover 349 attached to the gear cover 346 so as to cover the second rotation detection sensor 348 from the left.

  The rotation drive base 341 is formed in a shallow box shape that is short in the left-right direction, extends long in the front-rear direction, and is open to the left. The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor. The drive gear 343 is a spur gear. The transmission gear 344 includes a spur gear-shaped first gear 344a that meshes with the drive gear, and a spur gear-shaped second gear 344b that rotates integrally with the first gear 344a and has a large diameter. I have. The second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 meshes with the gear 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345.

  The transmission detection gear member 345 has a larger diameter (twice the diameter of the second gear 344b) than the transmission gear 344, and a leftward protruding portion from the left side of the gear portion 345a. A plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at regular intervals. The gear portion 345a meshes with the second gear 344b of the transmission gear 344 and also meshes with the drive-side gear portion 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. The plurality of detecting pieces 345b have the same length in the circumferential direction as the interval apart in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, eight detecting pieces 345b are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals of a rotation angle of 45 degrees. These detection pieces 345b are detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b of the transmission detection gear member 345. The first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are arranged in the circumferential direction at intervals different from integral multiples of the intervals of the detection pieces 345b arranged in the circumferential direction. In the present embodiment, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are separated by a rotation angle of 101.25 degrees. Accordingly, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 do not detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing, and one of them detects the detection piece 345b first. It has become. Thereby, the rotation direction and the rotation speed of the rotation operation unit 302 in the effect operation ring 330 can be detected via the transmission detection gear member 345.

  When the rotation drive unit 340 is assembled, the upper part of the gear part 345a of the transmission detection gear member 345 is exposed upward, and the exposed part of the gear part 345a is the drive side gear part 350b of the operation ring transmission gear 350. Meshes with In addition, the rotation drive unit 340 is located in the effect operation unit cover unit 310 as a whole in a state where the rotation drive unit 340 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300.

  The rotation drive unit 340 drives the operation ring drive motor 342 to drive the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 through the drive gear 343, the transmission gear 344, the transmission detection gear member 345, and the operation ring transmission gear. Can be rotated in the direction of. In addition, the rotation drive unit 340 causes the drive gear 343 to repeat forward and reverse rotations within a predetermined rotation angle range by the operation ring drive motor 342, thereby causing the rotary operation unit 302 to reciprocate and vibrate. it can.

  In addition, when the rotation operation unit 302 of the rendering operation ring 330 is rotated by the player, the rotation drive unit 340 rotates the transmission detection gear member 345 via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and the rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345. The detection piece 345b is detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected. Therefore, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302.

  Further, in the rotation drive unit 340, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected by the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348, the operation ring drive is performed in the same rotation direction as the rotated operation. By driving the motor 342, the rotation operation of the player can be assisted, and by driving the operation ring drive motor 342 in a direction opposite to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302, the rotation operation of the player can be performed. Can be loaded. Therefore, by appropriately combining these, it is possible to provide the rotation operation unit 302 with an operation feeling or a click feeling according to the content of the player participation type effect.

[3-5-5e. Transmission gear for operating ring]
The transmission ring transmission gear 350 of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The operation ring transmission gear 350 transmits rotation between the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 and the rotation base 332 of the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330, and the gear of the operation unit base 320. It is rotatably attached to the bearing 325.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is a bevel gear-shaped ring-side gear portion 350a that meshes with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and rotates integrally with the ring-side gear portion 350a to detect transmission of the rotation drive unit 340. And a drive-side gear portion 350b in the form of a spur gear meshing with the gear portion 345a of the gear member 345. The ring gear 350a and the drive gear 350b have the same pitch circle diameter. The bevel gear ring side gear portion 350a is narrowed in the direction of the rotation axis of the rotation base 332.

  The operation ring transmission gear 350 is attached to the operation unit base 320 such that the rotation axis extends in the left-right direction and intersects with the rotation axis of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330. The operation ring transmission gear 350 is rotatably attached to the operation portion base 320 by being inserted into the gear bearing portion 325 of the operation portion base 320 from above and the gear attachment member 351 being attached to the operation portion base 320. Can be

  When the operation ring transmission gear 350 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the ring gear 350a is meshed with the ring gear 332a of the rotation base 332 of the effect operation ring 330, and the drive gear 350b is The transmission drive gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 meshes with the gear 345a. Therefore, the operation ring transmission gear 350 can transmit the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 of the rendering operation ring 330 to the rotation drive unit 340 side, and can also rotate the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340. It can be transmitted to the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 and rotated.

[3-5-5f. Directional operation ring decorative board]
The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described mainly with reference to FIGS. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached to the upper surface of the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320, and a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the upper surface. The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 is attached below the effect operation ring 330, and the effect operation ring 330 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be light-emitting decorated by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is formed in a form in which a ring is divided into front and rear, and a front decorative substrate 352a formed in a long and narrow strip shape having a front semicircular arc shape, and a rear semicircle. And a rear decorative substrate 352b formed in an elongated strip shape having an arc shape. On each of the upper surfaces of the front decorative substrate 352a and the rear decorative substrate 352b, a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a row along the outer periphery. The plurality of LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352 are full-color LEDs.

  The effect operation ring decorative board 352 is located below the ring attachment base 331 of the effect operation ring 330 in a state where the effect operation ring decorative board 352 is assembled to the effect operation unit 300. The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 is covered with a decorative substrate cover 353 having a transparent upper side. The decorative substrate cover 353 is formed in a form divided into front and rear similarly to the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, and covers the front decorative substrate 352 a from the upper side and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation portion base 320. 353a and a rear substrate cover 353b that covers the rear decorative substrate 352b from above and is attached to the flange portion 322 of the operation unit base 320.

  The effect operation ring decoration substrate 352 emits a plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface, and passes through the decoration substrate cover 353 and the through-hole 331c of the ring attachment base 331 to form the rotation operation portion 302 on the outside of the ring. The cover 335, the ring outer lower cover 336, and the ring inner cover 337 can be illuminated from inside. Therefore, it is possible to show the player a light emitting decoration in which the LED is provided in the rotation operation unit 302.

[3-5-5 g. Vibration speaker]
The vibration speaker 354 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The vibration speaker 354 is attached to the lower surface of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 with its output direction facing upward, and can output vibrations of various frequencies in addition to sounds such as voice and music. It is.

  The vibration speaker 354 can output sound (sound) such as voice, sound effect, and music by vibrating the bottom wall of the operation unit base 320 as a vibration plate. In addition, the vibration speaker 354 can vibrate the entire production operation unit 300 via the operation unit base 320. At this time, the player gets a feeling as if the effect operation unit 300 was shaking. The vibration speaker 354 can generate vibrations of various frequencies as compared with a vibration device in which an eccentric weight is rotated by a motor, and can provide a variety of effects to a player.

  The purpose of the vibration speaker 354 is to give sound information to vibrate the effect operation unit 301, and to give sound information so that vibration is obtained by resonance. Here, since the resonance depends on the characteristics of the vibrating speaker 354 attached to the gaming machine, the material and hardness of the member for attaching the vibrating speaker, and the mounting method, input sound information only at a specific frequency. In such a case, vibration may not be obtained without resonance due to variations in characteristics. In the present embodiment, in order to absorb the variation in these characteristics, the frequency of the input sound information is not a single frequency but is input as a frequency having a certain width. Specifically, a sine wave of 40 Hz ± 2 Hz, 38 Hz to 42 Hz is changed (swept) eight times in one cycle of each 1 Hz, approximately one second. This is intermittently repeated for one second sweep input and one second later input again.

  In the assembling work of the gaming machine, the inspection (operation confirmation) of the vibrating speaker at the time of shipment is performed by operating the RAM clear switch provided on the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 for controlling the progress of the game. It is designed to be based on this. Specifically, when the inspector operates the RAM clear switch within a predetermined period when turning on the game machine (or when the inspector turns on the game machine while operating the RAM clear switch), the main control board 1310 transmits (outputs) a command for clearing and initializing the RAM to the peripheral control board of the peripheral control unit 1500 described later. When the peripheral control board receives this command, the peripheral control board performs a vibration speaker operation confirmation process for inspecting (operating) the vibration speaker. The inspector can confirm the sound (sound) of the sound and the music by the vibration speaker 354 and also confirm the vibration of the staging operation unit 300 by the vibration speaker 354 by the vibration speaker operation confirmation processing. .

[3-5-5h. Direction operation button unit]
The effect operation button unit 360 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 76 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit of the effect operation unit as viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 77 is an exploded perspective view of the effect operation button unit as viewed from the lower front. FIG. 78A is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the lower position, and FIG. 78B is a cross-sectional view of the effect operation button unit when the pressing operation unit is at the upper position. The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the operation unit base 320 so as to face the inside of the effect operation ring 330, and has a pressing operation unit 303 that can be pressed by the player. The pressing operation unit 303 of the effect operation button unit 360 includes a cylindrical central pressing operation unit 303a and a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b formed so as to cover the outer periphery of the central pressing operation unit 303a. ing.

  The effect operation button unit 360 has a substantially circular outer periphery, and is arranged symmetrically with a button unit base 361 attached in the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320 and a center axis of the button unit base 361 as a boundary. A pair of guide shafts 362 extending upward and in a columnar shape, and a disc-shaped connecting the upper ends of the pair of guide shafts 362 to each other and having a circular outer shape smaller than the button unit base 361. The upper base 363 is mounted between the upper base 363 and the button unit base 361 so as to be vertically movable by a pair of guide shafts 362, and the outer periphery is formed in a circular shape having substantially the same size as the button unit base 361. Disk-shaped lifting base 364 and a pair of guide shafts 362 A pair of lift springs 365 urges the provided lift base 364 is passed upwardly, and a.

  The effect operation button unit 360 has a central shaft 366 extending upward from the center of the button unit base 361 in a columnar shape and having an upper end attached to the upper base 363, and a rotation axis on the lower surface of the button unit base 361. The operation button elevating drive motor 367 mounted to protrude upward, the spur gear-shaped elevating drive gear 368 mounted on the rotating shaft of the operation button elevating drive motor 367, and the elevating drive gear 368 mesh with each other. A spur gear-like driven gear 369 rotatably mounted on the upper side of the cage button unit base 361, and an elevating cam drive gear member rotatably mounted by being rotated by the driven gear 369 so that the central shaft 366 is inserted therethrough. 370, the lower and upper cam drive gear member 370 are connected to the lower end, and the central shaft The elevating cam member 371 which is rotatably mounted and rotatably attached to the elevating base member 364, and the elevating driving gear 368, the driven gear 369, and the elevating cam driving gear member 370 are covered from above. And a disc-shaped gear cover 372 mounted on the upper side of the button unit base 361.

  Furthermore, the production operation button unit 360 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having an inner diameter larger than the upper base and extending vertically, and is mounted above the elevating base 364 so as to be movable vertically by a pair of guide shafts 362. Center button body 373, a pair of button springs 374 disposed between the center button body 373 and the elevating base 364 and urging the center button body 373 upward, and substantially the same as the center button body 373. A central button cover 375, which is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape having a closed upper end with a diameter and is attached to the upper end of the central button body 373 so as to cover above the upper base 363, and is attached to the upper surface of the upper base 363. And a center button decoration board 376 on which a plurality of LEDs capable of irradiating light upward are mounted. In the effect operation button unit 360, the center button main body 373 and the center button cover 375 constitute a center pressing operation section 303a.

  The effect operation button unit 360 is attached to a portion of the upper surface of the elevating base 364 outside the center button main body 373 and has an annular outer peripheral button decoration board 377 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted, and an outer peripheral portion. An outer peripheral board cover 378 attached to the elevating base 364 so as to cover the upper side of the button decoration board 377 and the outer periphery of the central button body 373, and a portion of the outer peripheral board cover 378 which covers the outer periphery of the central button body 373. A cylindrical outer decorative lens 379 having a three-dimensional decoration and disposed on the outer peripheral side and above the outer peripheral button decorative board 377, and ascending and descending so as to cover the outer peripheral and upper surfaces of the outer decorative lens 379. A transparent outer peripheral button attached to the base 364 with the central button cover 375 facing upward at the center Is provided with a bar 380, a. In the effect operation button unit 360, the outer peripheral substrate cover 378, the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, and the outer peripheral button cover 380 constitute an outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b.

  Further, the effect operation button unit 360 is attached to the button unit base 361 and detects a pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303. The pressing detection sensor 381 is attached to the button unit base 361. An elevation detection sensor 382 that detects the elevation of the elevation base 364 by detecting the rotational position.

  The button unit base 361 includes a disk-shaped base body 361a and a plurality of legs 361b protruding downward from the base body 361a. The outer diameter of the base main body 361 a of the button unit base 361 is formed to be slightly smaller than the inner peripheral diameter of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320. The base body 361a has a pair of guide shafts 362, a central shaft 366, a driven gear 369, a lifting / lowering cam drive gear member 370, and a gear cover 372 mounted on the upper surface, and a pressing detection sensor 381 and a lifting detection sensor 382 on the lower surface. Is attached. The button unit base 361 has the lower end of the leg 361 b attached to the bottom wall of the main body 321 of the operation unit base 320.

  The pair of guide shafts 362 are mounted on the upper surface of the base main body 361a of the button unit base 361, forward and rearward from the center, at a distance of half the diameter of the base main body 361a. The pair of guide shafts 362 and the central shaft 366 are formed by metal rods. The pair of guide shafts 362 are formed thicker than the central shaft 366.

  The outer diameter of the upper base 363 is formed to be about half the outer diameter of the base body 361a of the button unit base 361. The pair of elevating springs 365 are coil springs, and the lower ends thereof are in contact with the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361, and the upper ends are in contact with the elevating base 364. The elevating spring 365 is a spring having a stronger urging force than the button spring 374.

  The elevating base 364 has an outer diameter substantially equal to the outer diameter of the base body 361 a of the button unit base 361. The elevating base 364 includes a pair of guide holes 364a into which the pair of guide shafts 362 are slidably inserted, and a central hole 364b vertically penetrating at the center so as to allow the elevating cam member 371 to pass therethrough. An upright wall portion 364c that protrudes upward from the periphery of the central hole 364b in a cylindrical shape, and a pair of guide pins 364d that project toward the inside of the central hole 364b near the lower end of the upright wall portion 364c. I have. The pair of guide pins 364d face each other on the same axis and are rotatably mounted around the axis.

  The elevating base 364 is guided so as to be able to move up and down in a vertical direction by inserting a pair of guide shafts 362 into a pair of guide holes 364a. The elevating base 364 has a space in which the bottom part 373b of the center button body 373 can move between the upper base 363 and the upper part 363, while the upper end of the upright wall part 364c abuts on the upper base 363. Has formed. Further, the lifting base 364 is moved up and down by a pair of guide pins 364 d being guided by the cam portion 371 a of the lifting cam member 371.

  The elevating cam drive gear member 370 includes a spur gear-shaped gear portion 370a that meshes with the driven gear 369, a connecting portion 370b that protrudes upward from the gear portion 370a and is connected to a lower end of the elevating cam member 371, and a gear portion 370a. And an elevation detecting piece 370c which is cylindrically protruded downwardly from and is notched at two locations facing each other, and is detected by an elevation detecting sensor 382. The lifting cam drive gear member 370 is rotatably mounted by inserting a central shaft 366 into the center of the gear portion 370a.

  The elevating cam member 371 is rotatably mounted by inserting a central shaft 366 at the center. The elevating cam member 371 has a pair of cam portions 371a that are 180 degrees apart in the circumferential direction on the outer peripheral surface of the columnar shape and protrude outward. The pair of cam portions 371a guide the guide pins 364d of the lifting base 364.

  The cam portion 371a includes a first cam 371b extending in the direction perpendicular to the axis near the lower end, a locking portion 371c recessed upward in the middle of the first cam 371b, and one of the first cams 371b. A second cam 371d extending upward from the end in parallel with the axis, a third cam 371e spirally extending upward from an end of the first cam 371b opposite to the second cam 371d, (See FIG. 78). The second cam 371d and the third cam 371e extend upward to the same height, and are separated by a distance smaller than the diameter of the guide pin 364d of the lifting base 364 between the adjacent cam portions 371a.

  In addition, the lifting cam member 371 has a connected portion 371f connected to the connecting portion 370b of the lifting cam drive gear member 370 at the lower end.

  The elevating cam member 371 extends upward from the rear end side of the first cam 371b when the second cam 371d rotates the elevating cam member 371 in the counterclockwise direction in plan view in the cam portion 371a. It is formed as follows. By rotating the elevating cam member 371, the cam portion 371a guides the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 to move the elevating base 364 up and down.

  The central button body 373 has a cylindrical tubular portion 373a extending vertically, a bottom portion 373b closing the lower end side of the tubular portion 373a, and a pair of guide shafts penetrating the bottom portion 373b. A pair of guide holes 373c into which the 362 is slidably inserted, a central opening 373d penetrating at the center of the bottom 373b with a diameter larger than the outer diameter of the upright wall 364c of the elevating base 364, and downward from the bottom 373b. It includes a pressing detection piece 373e that protrudes and is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and a pair of guide bosses 373f that protrude rearward from the bottom 373b in a columnar shape and are inserted into the button spring 374.

  The center button body 373 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a cylindrical portion 373a and a bottom portion 373b. The center button main body 373 is formed such that the bottom portion 373b is disposed between the upper base 363 and the elevating base 364, and the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373a protrudes above the upper base 363. The central opening 373d is formed in a cylindrical shape that extends shortly downward, and its lower end abuts on the upper surface of the elevating base 364, whereby the downward movement of the central button body 373 is restricted. The upper end of the vertical wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 contacts the upper base 363 through the central opening 373d of the center button main body 373.

  The center button body 373 is urged upward by a pair of button springs 374 into which a pair of guide bosses 373f are inserted. The pair of guide bosses 373f are formed so that the lower ends extend downward through the elevating base 364, and the lower ends are attached with screws into which washers are inserted. When the washer attached to the lower end of the guide boss 373f contacts the lower surface of the elevating base 364, the upward movement of the center button main body 373 is restricted.

  The pressing detection piece 373 e of the center button body 373 is moved up and down when the bottom 373 b (lower end of the center opening 373 d) of the center button body 373 comes into contact with the upper surface of the lifting base 364 against the urging force of the pair of button springs 374. 364 is formed so as to penetrate downward. The center button body 373 is formed opaque. The pair of button springs 374 are coil springs having a smaller urging force than the lifting spring 365.

  The center button cover 375 includes a disc-shaped top plate portion 375a having substantially the same diameter as the tube portion 373a of the center button body 373, and a cylindrical peripheral wall portion 375b extending downward from the outer periphery of the top plate portion 375a. It is provided so as to have translucency. The center button cover 375 is formed in a bottomed cylindrical shape by a top plate portion 375a and a peripheral wall portion 375b. In the center button cover 375, the lower end of the peripheral wall portion 375 b is attached to the upper end of the cylindrical portion 373 a of the center button body 373.

  A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the center button decoration board 376 are full color LEDs. The center button decoration board 376 can cause the center button cover 375 to emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the upper surface of the outer periphery button decoration board 377 are full color LEDs. The outer peripheral button decoration board 377 can make the outer peripheral decorative lens 379 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The outer peripheral board cover 378 covers an upper side of the outer peripheral button decoration board 377 and is attached to the elevating base 364. The annular board section 378 a is extended from the inner periphery of the board section 378 a in a cylindrical shape. A cylindrical portion 378b that covers the outer periphery. The outer peripheral substrate cover 378 is formed transparent.

  In the outer peripheral decorative lens 379, twisted portions extending so as to move in the circumferential direction upward are arranged at regular intervals in the circumferential direction. The outer peripheral decorative lens 379 is mounted on the outer peripheral substrate cover 378 above the substrate portion 378a. The outer peripheral button cover 380 includes a cylindrical tubular portion 380a covering the outer periphery of the outer decorative lens 379, and an annular annular portion 380b extending from the upper end of the tubular portion 380a to the center. In the outer peripheral button cover 380, the lower end of the cylindrical portion 380 a is attached to the elevating base 364. The annular portion 380b has an inner diameter substantially the same size as the cylindrical portion 378b of the outer peripheral substrate cover 378.

  In the assembled state, as shown in FIG. 78 (a), the effect operation button unit 360 has the guide pins 364d of the lift base 364 in a state where the lift base 364 is urged upward by a pair of lift springs 365. The lifting cam member 371 is inserted from below into a locking portion 371c of the cam portion 371a. In this state, the elevating base 364 is in a lowered position in which the elevating base 364 has moved downward, and the pair of elevating springs 365 are compressed. In this state, the center button main body 373 is located at the upper moving end by the urging force of the button spring 374, and the upper surface of the center button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. It has become.

  Therefore, in the state assembled to effect operation unit 300, the upper surface of outer peripheral button cover 380 projects slightly upward from the upper surface of effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of central button cover 375 is higher than the upper surface of outer peripheral button cover 380. Also project upward (see FIG. 79 and the like).

  In this state (the state shown in FIG. 78A), when the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward and moved downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, the center button body 373 is pressed. Is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and the pressing operation of the central pressing operation section 303a is detected. When the center pressing operation section 303a is pressed, the upper surface of the center button cover 375 has a height substantially coincident with the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 (see FIG. 81 (c)).

  Further, in this state, even if the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b) is pressed downward, the outer peripheral button cover 380 does not move downward, and the pressing detection piece 373e of the central button body 373 is pressed. There is no detection by the detection sensor 381. That is, the pressing operation of the pressing operation unit 303 is not detected.

  In this lowered position, when the elevating drive gear 368 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the elevating cam drive is driven via the driven gear 369 meshed with the elevating drive gear 368. The gear member 370 rotates counterclockwise in plan view, and the lifting cam member 371 connected to the lifting cam drive gear member 370 also rotates in the same direction. When the elevating cam member 371 rotates in the counterclockwise direction, the cam portion 371a seen from the front in FIG. 78 moves rightward, and the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is moved from the locking portion 371c to the fourth position. Rolling to the left part of the locking portion 371c of the one cam 371b, the lifting base 364 moves downward via the guide pin 364d against the urging force of the lifting spring 365.

  Then, when the guide pin 364d that relatively rolls leftward along the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 is positioned from the left end of the first cam 371b to the second cam 371d side, Since the second cam 371d extends vertically upward with respect to the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d moves upward along the second cam 371d by the urging force of the elevating spring 365. At the same time, the elevating base 364 rises to the state of the ascending position.

  In the state of the ascending position, as shown in FIG. 78 (b), the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the second cam 371d of one cam portion 371a and the third cam 371e of the remaining cam portion 371a. It is in a state. In this state, the operation of the operation button elevating drive motor 367 is temporarily stopped.

  In the state of the ascending position, the upper end of the standing wall portion 364c of the elevating base 364 is in contact with the lower surface of the upper base 363, and further upward movement of the elevating base 364 is restricted. In the state of the ascending position, the positional relationship between the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b) at the time of the lowering position is maintained. In addition, the entire pressing operation portion 303 including the outer peripheral button cover 380 has moved upward, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 has protruded above the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380.

  When the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are moved to the ascending position in a state where they are assembled to the effect operation unit 300, the central button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 are projected more than the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330 (FIG. reference).

  When the center button cover 375 (the center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward with a force stronger than the urging force of the button spring 374 in the state of the raised position, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 are attached to the button spring 374. The central button body 373 moves downward against the force and comes into contact with the lifting base 364. When the center button body 373 is in contact with the elevating base 364, the pressing detection piece 373 e of the center button body 373 protrudes below the elevating base 364, but the elevating base 364 is connected to the button unit base 361. , The pressing detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381.

  When the center button cover 375 (center pressing operation portion 303a) is pressed downward by a force stronger than the urging force of the elevating spring 365, the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 resist the urging force of the button spring 374, After the center button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the lifting base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lifting spring 365, and the lower end of the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361. Become. When the elevating base 364 contacts the button unit base 361, the elevating base 364 is in the lowered position, and together with the elevating base 364, the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation part 303b) is also in the lowered position.

  As described above, when the lifting base 364 contacts the button unit base 361 in a state where the center button body 373 contacts the lifting base 364, the pressing detection piece 373e of the center button body 373 projecting downward from the lifting base 364. Is detected by the pressing detection sensor 381, and pressing of the center button cover 375 (the center pressing operation unit 303a) is detected.

  On the other hand, when the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b) is pressed downward by a force greater than the urging force of the elevating spring 365 in the state of the ascending position, the elevating base 364 is moved via the outer peripheral button cover 380 to the elevating spring. It moves downward against the urging force of 365, and the lower end of the elevating base 364 comes into contact with the button unit base 361. In this state, the outer peripheral button cover 380 and the elevating base 364 are in the lowered position. However, since the center button cover 375 (central pressing operation part 303a) projects upward by the urging force of the button spring 374, the center button body The pressing detection piece 373e of 373 does not protrude downward from the elevating base 364, and the pressing detection piece 373e is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381.

  In order to return the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 (the pressing operation section 303) from the raised position to the lowered position, the operation button elevating drive motor 367 rotates the elevating cam member 371 in a counterclockwise direction in plan view. Then, in FIG. 78 (b), the third cam 371e in contact with the upper left of the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 moves rightward (in the direction of the guide pin 364d). The guide pin 364d is pressed downward by 371e, and the lift base 364 moves downward against the urging force of the lift spring 365 via the guide pin 364d.

  Then, when the guide pin 364d moves from the lower end of the third cam 371e toward the first cam 371b with the rotation of the elevating cam member 371, the downward movement of the elevating base 364 stops, and the guide pin 364d is moved to the first cam. Rolls along 371b. Thereafter, when the guide pin 364d reaches the position of the locking portion 371c in the middle of the first cam 371b, the guide pin 364d is inserted into the locking portion 371c depressed upward by the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the operation is performed. By stopping the rotation of the elevating cam member 371 by the button elevating drive motor 367, the original lowering position is restored.

[3-5-5i. Operation section relay board unit]
The operation unit relay board unit 390 in the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The operation unit relay board unit 390 is attached to a rear surface of the operation unit base 320. The operation section relay board unit 390 includes a box-shaped board box 391 mounted on the rear surface of the main body section 321 of the operation section base 320, and an operation section relay board 392 mounted inside the board box 391.

  The substrate box 391 has a motor cover portion 391a that covers the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotation drive unit 340 from the rear side when assembled to the rendering operation unit 300. The operation section relay board 392 includes a dish center upper decoration board 314, a dish center lower decoration board 316, an operation ring drive motor 342, a first rotation detection sensor 347, a second rotation detection sensor 348, an effect operation ring decoration board 352, and a vibration speaker. 354, the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the center button decoration board 376, the outer periphery button decoration board 377, the press detection sensor 381, and the elevation detection sensor 382, and the connection between the dish unit relay board 214 of the dish base unit 210 and the relay. I have.

[3-5-5j. Operation of the production operation unit]
Next, the operation of the effect operation unit 300 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 79 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the rendering operation ring and the rotary drive unit in the left side view of the rendering operation unit. FIG. 80 is an explanatory view showing the relationship between the effect operation ring and the effect operation ring decorative board in a plan view of the effect operation unit viewed from the pressing direction of the pressing operation unit. FIG. 81 (a) is a front view of the plate unit shown in a normal state, FIG. 81 (b) is a front view of the plate unit when the pressing operation unit is at the raised position, and FIG. 81 (c) is the center pressing of the pressing operation unit. It is a front view of the dish unit when the operation part is pressed.

  The effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation unit 301 that can be operated by a player on the upper surface. The effect operation unit 301 includes a large annular rotation operation unit 302 and a pressing operation unit 303 disposed in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302. The pressing operation unit 303 includes a cylindrical center pressing operation unit 303a located at the center of the rotation operation unit 302, and an annular outer circumference pressing operation unit disposed between the center pressing operation unit 303a and the rotation operation unit 302. 303b.

  The rotation operation unit 302 is formed by the outer ring upper cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337 of the effect operation ring 330. The center pressing operation unit 303a is formed by the center button cover 375 and the center button body 373 of the effect operation button unit 360, and the outer pressing unit 303b is formed by the outer button cover 380 and the outer substrate cover 378.

  The production operation unit 300 is assembled to the plate unit 200 in a state where the front side of a virtual plane formed by the upper surface of the circular rotation operation unit 302 (production operation ring 330) is inclined to be lower. Therefore, the pressing direction of the pressing operation portion 303 disposed in the ring of the rotary operation portion 302 is inclined so as to move backward as it goes downward (in other words, move forward as it goes upward). .

  In the effect operation unit 300, in a normal state, the pressing operation unit 303 projects slightly upward from the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. More specifically, the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380 projects slightly upward from the upper surface of the effect operation ring 330, and the upper surface of the central button cover 375 projects upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral button cover 380. (See FIG. 79, etc.).

  In this normal state, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated clockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342 of the rotary drive unit 340, the effect operation ring 330 is transmitted via the operation ring transmission gear 350. Rotates in the clockwise direction in plan view. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated counterclockwise in the left side view by the operation ring drive motor 342, the rotation operation unit 302 of the rendering operation ring 330 rotates counterclockwise in the plan view. .

  The operation ring drive motor 342 is a stepping motor, and can rotate and reciprocate the rotary operation unit 302 by repeating forward and reverse rotations within a predetermined rotation angle range. This vibration is different from the vibration by the vibration speaker 354, and only the rotary operation unit 302 vibrates.

  The rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be rotated not only by the operation ring drive motor 342 but also by a player. When the rotation operation unit 302 is rotated clockwise in a plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 of the rotation drive unit 340 is rotated clockwise in the left side view via the operation ring transmission gear 350, and is rotated. When the operation unit 302 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in plan view, the transmission detection gear member 345 is rotated in a counterclockwise direction in left side view. The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by two sensors, a first rotation detection sensor 347 and a second rotation detection sensor 348.

  The rotation of the transmission detection gear member 345 is detected by detecting the plurality of detection pieces 345b with the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348. More specifically, the interval between the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 that are separated in the circumferential direction is different from the interval between the plurality of detection pieces 345b arranged at equal intervals in the circumferential direction. , The interval is not an integral multiple. Thus, the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 are configured not to detect the detection piece 345b at the same timing.

  In the present embodiment, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates clockwise in a left side view, the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b and then the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b. I do. On the other hand, when the transmission detection gear member 345 rotates in the counterclockwise direction when viewed from the left side, the first rotation detection sensor 347 detects the detection piece 345b, and then the second rotation detection sensor 348 detects the detection piece 345b. Detect. Therefore, the rotation direction of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be detected by the order in which the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348 detect the detection piece 345b. Further, the rotation speed of the transmission detection gear member 345 (the rotation operation unit 302) can be detected based on the detection time of the detection piece 345b of the first rotation detection sensor 347 and the second rotation detection sensor 348.

  Thus, since the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 can be detected, the content of the player participation type effect can be changed according to the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302. Further, when the rotation operation of the rotation operation unit 302 is detected, the rotation operation unit 302 is driven to rotate in the same direction as the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, so that the rotation operation can be lightened and assisted. At the same time, the rotation operation unit 302 is driven to rotate in a direction opposite to the rotation operation direction by the operation ring drive motor 342, so that the rotation operation can be made heavy or a click feeling can be given.

  The rotation operation section 302 of the effect operation ring 330 is formed by the outer ring upper cover 335, the outer ring lower cover 336, and the inner ring cover 337, and is formed in a shape in which a half or more arc of a circle extends annularly. ing. In other words, the rotation operation unit 302 is formed in a donut shape. And, as shown in the figure, the rotation operation unit 302 is attached in a state where the outer peripheral surface, the upper surface, and a part of the inner peripheral surface are exposed, and thus is formed in a shape that is easy to grasp by a player's hand. .

  This allows the player to touch the rotation operation unit 302 from various directions, so that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated in a manner that the player can easily perform. Sex is raised. Further, the rotation operation unit 302 can perform a rotation operation even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the lower position or the upper position. In addition, since the lower surface side of the rotation operation unit 302 is attached to the operation unit base 320, the rotation operation unit 302 cannot be gripped like a steering wheel of an automobile.

  As shown in FIG. 80, the effect operation unit 300 includes an effect operation ring decorative board 352 in which a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring shape below the effect operation ring 330. Thus, by turning on the LEDs of the effect operation ring decoration board 352, the rotation operation unit 302 of the effect operation ring 330 can be light-embellished. In the effect operation ring decoration board 352, a plurality of LEDs are arranged in a ring along the rotation operation unit 302. By emitting light, only a specific part of the rotating operation unit 302 that is rotating can be made to emit light. Thereby, it is possible to give an illusion to a player as if an LED (decorative board) is provided in the rotating operation unit 302 that rotates.

  In the effect operation unit 300, in a normal state, as shown in FIG. 81 (a), the pressing operation unit 303 arranged in the ring of the rotation operation unit 302 has an upper surface higher than the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302. It is in the state of the descending position that projects slightly upward. In this state, the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated, and the center pressing operation unit 303a of the pressing operation unit 303 can be pressed. When the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed downward, the upper surface of the center pressing operation unit 303a (central button cover 375) is lowered to substantially the same height as the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b (outer peripheral button cover 380). Pressing is detected by the sensor 381.

  In the normal (down position) state, even if the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b of the pressing operation section 303 is pressed downward, the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b (the outer peripheral button cover 380) does not move downward, and the pressing detection is performed. No pressure is detected by the sensor 381.

  In a normal state, when the elevating cam member 371 is rotated counterclockwise in plan view by the operation button elevating drive motor 367, the guide pin 364d of the elevating base 364 is disengaged from the cam portion 371a (first cam 371b). Then, the urging force of the pair of elevating springs 365 causes the pressing operation portion 303 to vigorously protrude upward together with the elevating base 364 to be in the ascending position (see FIG. 81 (b)). In the state of the raised position, the upper surface of the pressing operation unit 303 is located above the upper surface of the rotating operation unit 302. In other words, the center button cover 375 and the outer peripheral button cover 380 protrude upward more than the upper surface of the rendering operation ring 330.

  When the center operation unit 303a is pressed downward in the state where the operation unit 303 is in the raised position, first, the center operation unit 303a moves downward against the urging force of the button spring 374, and the center operation unit 303a The upper surface and the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b are in a state of substantially the same height. In this state, the pressing detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressing. Further, the central pressing operation portion 303a moves downward together with the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b against the urging force of the elevating spring 365, and the upper surfaces of the central pressing operating portion 303a and the outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b The state is substantially the same as the upper surface (see FIG. 81 (c)). In this state, the pressing detection sensor 381 detects pressing.

  Further, when the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b is pressed downward in a state where the pressing operation section 303 is in the raised position, the upper surface of the central pressing operation section 303a is projected upward from the upper surface of the outer peripheral pressing operation section 303b. The outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b and the center pressing operation unit 303a move downward, and the upper surface of the outer periphery pressing operation unit 303b becomes substantially the same height as the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 (see FIG. 81A). . In this state, the pressing detection sensor 381 does not detect the pressing.

  As described above, regardless of the lowered position or the raised position, the pressing operation unit 303 of the present embodiment is not detected by the pressing detection sensor 381 unless the center pressing operation unit 303a is pressed to the downward moving end. ing. Therefore, it is possible to urge the player to press the center pressing operation unit 303a firmly, so that attention can be paid to the operation of the staging operation unit 301 in the player participation type effect. , It is possible to further entertain the player-participating type production.

  Note that the rotation operation unit 302 can be rotated even when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position. Therefore, when the pressing operation unit 303 is in the raised position, depending on the player, the rotation operation is facilitated by using the pressing operation unit 303 as a clue, or the rotation operation is difficult due to the pressing operation unit 303 becoming a hindrance. As a result, the operability of the rotation operation unit 302 can be changed, and more various operations can be enjoyed.

[3-6. Door frame left side unit]
The door frame left side unit 400 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 82 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 82 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame left side unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 83 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the front and exploded. FIG. 84 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame left side unit viewed from the back. The door frame left side unit 400 is attached to the upper left side of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the left outside of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame left side unit 400 includes a door frame left side base 401 attached to the left outside of the door window 101 a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and a door frame left side base 401 attached to the front surface of the door frame left side base 401. A door frame left side decorative board 402 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface of the cage, a left side reflector 403 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the door frame left side decorative board 402, And a door frame left side decorative body 404 attached to the door frame left side base 401 so as to cover the front side of the left side reflector 403.

  The door frame left side base 401 is formed in a box shape extending vertically and opening forward. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the door frame left side decorative body 404, and includes a left side upper decorative substrate 402a and a left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Have been. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 are full color LEDs. The door frame left side decorative substrate 402 can emit and decorate the door frame left side decorative body 404 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The left side reflector 403 has a through hole 403a penetrating front and rear at a position corresponding to the LED mounted on the door frame left side decorative board 402. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a translucent milky white. The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically. Thereby, the door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened rearward.

  The door frame left side unit 400 is formed so that the lower end is continuous with the left end of the upper left dish decoration 271 of the upper left dish decoration unit 270 of the plate unit 200, and the upper end is the door frame top unit 450 and the door frame top decoration 453. Is formed so as to be continuous with the left lower end.

  In the door frame left side unit 400, the width in the left-right direction and the depth in the front-rear direction are formed at substantially the same distance. The door frame left side unit 400, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the left outer side of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and looks as if a columnar fluorescent lamp is embedded.

[3-7. Door frame right side unit]
The door frame right side unit 410 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 85A is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit of the door frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 85B is a perspective view of the door frame right side unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 86 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit when disassembled and viewed from the front, and FIG. 87 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame right side unit disassembled and viewed from behind. The door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the front right side of the door frame base unit 100 above the plate unit 200, and decorates the right outside of the game area 5a in front view.

  The door frame right side unit 410 extends forward from the right side of the door frame 3 to substantially the same position as the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 of the plate unit 200 in a flat plate shape, and penetrates in the left-right direction. And a plurality of decorative portions 410b inside the side window capable of emitting light, which are arranged in the side window 410a. This door frame right side unit 410 makes it difficult for the pachinko machine 1 where the pachinko machine 1 is installed to obscure the inside of the game area of the pachinko machine disposed on the right side, and the player playing with the right pachinko machine. Thus, it is possible to make the inside of the game area 5a of the pachinko machine 1 difficult to see, and to form a personal space for the player that protects the privacy of the game.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a door frame right side base 411 attached to the right outside of the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 and extending vertically, and a door frame right side base 411. A side window decoration member 412 attached to the front surface and having a plurality of side window decoration portions 410b extending cylindrically forward and arranged vertically, and a plurality of sides of the side window decoration member 412 on the front surface. A plurality of LEDs are mounted on portions corresponding to the in-window decorative portion 410b, and a plurality of side-window decorative portion decorative substrates 413 mounted on the front side of the door frame right side base 411, and a plurality of side-window decorative members 412 are provided. And an internal reflector 414 inserted into the interior of the side window interior decoration portion 410b.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is disposed on the front side of the front end of the side window interior decoration member 412 and extends up and down, and is attached to the door frame right side base 411. A door that extends in a flat plate shape in the up-down direction and the front-rear direction so as to cover the right side surfaces of the right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415 and that has a through hole 416a that penetrates in the left and right direction and forms a side window 410a. It is attached to the frame right side outer panel 416, the door frame right side base 411, and the right side reflector 415, and is flat in the vertical and front and rear directions so as to cover the left side surfaces of the door frame right side base 411 and the right side reflector 415. Frame that has a through-hole 417a that extends in the shape and penetrates in the left-right direction and forms a side window 410a. The side panel and 417, and a.

  Further, the door frame right side unit 410 is attached to the rear surface of the right side reflector 415 and covers the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 418 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted and the front side of the right side reflector 415. And a door frame right side decorative body 419 attached to the right side reflector 415.

  The door frame right side base 411 is formed in a box shape extending vertically and opening rearward. The side window interior decoration member 412 has a flat connection base 412a that connects the lower ends of a plurality (three in this case) of side window interior decoration portions 410b arranged in the vertical direction. The decorative portion 410b in the side window of the decorative member 412 in the side window has a front end side formed in a truncated conical cylinder whose outer diameter is slightly smaller than a rear end side, and a front end of the cylinder is formed in a hemispherical shape. ing. In the side window interior decoration member 412, the front end of the side window interior decoration portion 410b is attached to the door frame right side outer panel 416. The decorative member 412 in the side window is attached to a portion of the front surface of the right side base 411 of the door frame from a position lower than the center in the vertical direction to an upper portion. The side window interior decorative member 412 is formed in a milky white color having a light transmitting property.

  The decorative portion decorative substrate 413 in the side window is formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the decorative member 412 in the side window, and the decorative member 412 in the side window is formed on the front surface of the door frame right side base 411. Is attached to a portion behind the connection base 412a. The plurality of LEDs provided on the decorative portion decorative board 413 in the side window are full-color LEDs. In the side window decorative portion decorative board 413, four LEDs are arranged in a vertical and horizontal cross shape around the axis of the side window decorative portion 410b at a position behind each of the plurality of side window decorative portions 410b. Have been.

  The internal reflector 414 is formed in an X shape when viewed from the front, and extends in the front-rear direction along the inner surface of the side window interior decoration portion 410b to be inserted. The internal reflector 414 divides the inside of the side window interior decoration portion 410b into four parts, up, down, left, and right.

  The right side reflector 415 extends up and down at the same height as the door frame right side base 411, and is formed in a wavy shape such that the shape in the front-rear direction moves forward and then rearward from the upper end to the lower end. Have been. The right side reflector 415 is formed with a plurality of through holes 415a that penetrate back and forth, and in which the LEDs of the door frame right side decorative board 418 face forward.

  The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a flat plate shape and extends up and down and front and rear, and has a rear side extending vertically and linearly, and a front side extending wavy along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side outer panel 416 has a through hole 416a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in an elliptical shape extending vertically, and a front side of the connection base 412a of the side window interior decorative member 412 and the door frame. The right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side outer panel 416 is formed opaque.

  The inner panel 417 on the right side of the door frame has a flat plate shape and extends up and down and back and forth. The rear side extends vertically and linearly, and the front side extends wavy along the right side reflector 415. The door frame right side inner panel 417 has a through hole 417a penetrating in the left-right direction formed in an elliptical shape extending up and down, and a front side of the connection base 412a of the side window decorative member 412 and the door frame. The right side decorative substrate 418 (right side reflector 415) is formed so as to be able to cover the rear side. The door frame right side inner panel 417 is formed to be opaque.

  The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the door frame right side decorative body 419 and includes a right side upper decorative substrate 418a and a right side lower decorative substrate 418b. Have been. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front side of the door frame right side decorative board 418 are full color LEDs. The door frame right side decorative substrate 418 can emit light and decorate the door frame right side decorative body 419 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a translucent milky white. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in a form in which a semicircular arc bulging forward extends vertically in a wavy manner along the right side reflector 415. Thereby, the door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened rearward.

  The door frame right side unit 410 is formed so that the lower end is continuous with the right end of the upper right decorative plate 276 of the upper right decorative unit 275 of the plate unit 200, and the upper end of the upper right side of the door frame 450 of the door frame top unit 450. The body 453 is formed so as to be continuous with the lower right end.

  The door frame right side unit 410, when assembled to the door frame 3, decorates the right outside of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101, and the part of the door frame right side decorative body 419 has a cylindrical fluorescent lamp. Looks embedded. The front side (front side) of the door frame right side unit 410 extends forward in a wavy manner so that a ４ portion from the top projects most forward, and is formed in a screen shape. The door frame right side unit 410 has a side window 410a penetrating in the left-right direction, and the opposite side can be visually recognized through the side window 410a.

  The door frame right side unit 410 includes a cylindrical (cylindrical) side window interior decoration section 410b extending in the front and rear direction within the side window 410a, and emits light from the LED of the side window interior section decoration board 413. Thus, the decorative portion 410b in the side window can be decorated with light. Then, by illuminating the decoration portion 410b inside the side window, the inside of the side window 410a can be made dazzling, and the opposite side can be hardly seen through the side window 410a.

  According to the door frame right side unit 410 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, the LEDs of the side window decoration unit decorative board 413 for emitting and decorating the plurality of side window decoration units 410b are turned off. The game area 5a can be visually recognized from the side of the pachinko machine 1 (the end of the island facility) through the space between the three side window decorations 410b at 410a. Therefore, a player who is searching for the present pachinko machine 1 (the main game board 5) as a pachinko machine for playing does not need to move to the front of the present pachinko machine 1 along the island facilities to easily operate the present pachinko machine 1. It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game in the present pachinko machine 1 and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, even if the side window 410a penetrates through the door frame right side unit 410, other parts including the side window interior decoration part 410b can block the line of sight of a player located in the vicinity. The player can make the entire game area 5a hard to see from the player, and make it difficult for the player to feel as if viewed by another player, so that the player can play the game without hesitation. .

  Furthermore, when the three side window decoration portions 410b are made to emit light by the LEDs of the side window decoration portion decoration substrate 413, the light can make the inside of the side window 410a dazzling and change the visibility through the side window 410a. Let it. At this time, since the three side window interior decoration portions 410b are formed in a columnar shape, light is radiated in a band shape and radially. This makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize the game area 5a, and makes it difficult for another player, such as an adjacent player, to look inside the game area 5a. As described above, since it is possible to make it difficult for the inside of the game area 5a to be seen, it is possible to prevent another player from paying attention to the pachinko machine 1, and therefore, the attention is paid to the other player. You can prevent discomfort from becoming unable to concentrate on the game as a result of being unable to concentrate on the game, and prevent the mood from being lost by inducing mistakes, and make the game more fun by focusing the player on the game In addition, it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest.

[3-8. Door frame top unit]
The door frame top unit 450 in the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 88 (a) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit in the door frame as viewed from the front, FIG. 88 (b) is a perspective view of the door frame top unit as viewed from the rear, and FIG. It is a bottom view of the door frame top unit shown in the state which carried out. FIG. 89 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit when disassembled and viewed from the upper front, and FIG. 90 is an exploded perspective view of the door frame top unit disassembled and viewed from the lower front. The door frame top unit 450 is mounted on the front upper part of the door frame base unit 100 above the door frame left side unit 400 and the door frame right side unit 410.

  The door frame top unit 450 covers the door frame top base 451 attached above the door window 101a on the front surface of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100, and covers both left and right sides and the front upper part of the door frame top base 451. , A top frame cover 452 attached to the door frame top base 451, a door frame top decoration 453 attached to the front end of the top top cover 452, a lower end of the door frame top decoration 453, and the door frame top base 451. And a door frame top bottom plate 454 connecting the lower end of the door frame.

  The door frame top unit 450 is attached to the center of the front surface of the top cover 452 behind the door frame top decorative body 453, and has a door frame top center decorative substrate 455 on which a plurality of LEDs are mounted on the front surface. A door frame top left decorative board 456 mounted to the left of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face; A door frame top right decorative board 457 mounted on the right side of the door frame top center decorative board 455 on the front of the top top cover 452 behind the frame top decorative body 453 and having a plurality of LEDs mounted on the front face. Have.

  The door frame top unit 450 includes a top central reflector 458 disposed between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and attached to the front surface of the top upper cover 452, and a door frame top decoration. A top left reflector 459 disposed between the body 453 and the door frame top left decorative board 456 and attached to the front of the top top cover 452, and between the door frame top decorative body 453 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 And a top right reflector 460 attached to the front of the top top cover 452.

  Further, the door frame top unit 450 includes a central speaker box 461 attached to the center of the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454, a pair of top central speakers 462 attached to the central speaker box 461 downward, and a door. A pair of speaker brackets 463 attached near the left and right ends of the front surface of the frame top base 451, a pair of top side speakers 464 respectively attached to the pair of speaker brackets 463, and the door frame top bottom plate 454 are covered from below. A bottom cover 465 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454; a bottom cover frame 466 attached to the door frame top bottom plate 454 so as to press the outer peripheral edge of the top bottom cover 465 from below; Door frame top relay installed near the upper right end of the base 451 A plate 467, and a door frame top top plate 468 is attached to the top on the cover 452 so as to cover the upper part of the door frame top base 451, a.

  The door frame top base 451 includes a flat main body 451a extending left and right at the same length as the width of the door frame base 101 of the door frame base unit 100 in the left and right direction, and near the left and right ends on the front surface of the main body 451a. And a front protruding portion 451b protruding forward. The main body 451a is formed in a curved shape such that the center in the left-right direction is located upward so that the lower side is along the upper edge of the door window 101a in the door frame base 101. The left and right front protruding portions 451b are inclined so that the front ends move rearward as the front ends downward, and are formed in a box shape opened rearward. The front protruding portion 451b on the right side in the front view is also opened upward.

  The top upper cover 452 has a shape in front view substantially the same shape as the door frame top base 451. The top upper cover 452 covers the outside of each of the left and right front protrusions 451b of the door frame top base 451, and is formed in a shape that connects between the upper front ends of the left and right front protrusions 451b. The front end of the top top cover 452 has the center in the left-right direction most protruding forward, and extends in a curved shape so as to move downward and backward from the center in the left-right direction to both ends in the left-right direction. In addition, the top upper cover 452 has an opening 452a that is largely cut away from the rear end toward the front on the upper surface. This opening 452a is closed by a door frame top top plate 468.

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in milky white having a light transmitting property. The door frame top decoration body 453 has a form in which the semicircular arc bulging forward becomes smaller in curvature from the left and right ends toward the center in the left and right direction, and extends in the left and right direction along the front end of the top cover 452. Is formed. Thereby, the door frame top decorative body 453 is formed in the shape of a half tube opened rearward. The door frame top decorative body 453 is oriented so that both ends in the left-right direction extend downward, and is formed so as to be continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively.

  The door frame top bottom plate 454 extends in the front-rear direction so as to connect the lower end of the door frame top decorative body 453 and the lower end of the main body 451a of the door frame top base 451, and the center in the left-right direction bulges upward. So that it extends in the left-right direction. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is formed in a bent shape so that the center in the front-rear direction projects downward. The door frame top bottom plate 454 is spaced apart in the left-right direction, connects the front end and the rear end, and extends vertically between the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a. It has a pair of center speaker openings 454b facing the top center speaker 462, and a pair of side speaker openings 454c penetrating up and down on the left and right outer sides of the pair of reinforcing ribs 454a and facing the top side speaker 464. ing. A central speaker box 461 is mounted between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454.

  The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top center decorative board 455 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top center decorative substrate 455 can make the center part of the door frame top decorative body 453 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top left decorative board 456 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top left decorative substrate 456 can illuminate and decorate the left part of the door frame top decorative body 453 by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right. A plurality of LEDs mounted on the front surface of the door frame top right decorative board 457 are full-color LEDs. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 can make the right portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 emit light by appropriately emitting a plurality of LEDs.

  The top center reflector 458, the top left reflector 459, and the top right reflector 460 extend in the left-right direction, respectively, and are connected to the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457. Through holes are formed at positions corresponding to the mounted LEDs, respectively.

  The central speaker box 461 is formed in a box shape extending left and right, and is attached so that a pair of top central speakers 462 face downward and forward. The center speaker box 461 is mounted between a pair of reinforcing ribs 454a on the upper surface of the door frame top bottom plate 454. The top center speaker 462 is a full-range speaker, and outputs sounds such as voice and music in a wide frequency band.

  The speaker bracket 463 is attached to the lower surface of the left and right front protruding portions 451b of the door frame top base 451. The top side speaker 464 is a tweeter and outputs a high range of sound such as voice and music.

  The top lower cover 465 is formed of a punching metal made of a metal plate having countless through holes. Sound output from the top center speaker 462 and the top side speaker 464 is radiated forward and downward through the top lower cover 465.

  The door frame top relay board 467 includes a door frame top center decorative board 455, a door frame top left decorative board 456, a door frame top right decorative board 457, a top center speaker 462, a top side speaker 464, and a door frame base unit 100. This is for relaying the connection with the door frame sub-relay board 105.

  The door frame top top plate 468 closes the opening 452 a of the top top cover 452, and has a front end locked to the top top cover 452 and a rear end attached to the door frame base unit 100.

  The door frame top unit 450 decorates the upper and outer sides of the door window 101a of the door frame base 101 when assembled to the door frame 3. In the door frame top unit 450, the left and right ends of the door frame top decorative body 453 are continuous with the upper ends of the door frame left side decorative body 404 and the door frame right side decorative body 419, respectively, and form an integral decoration. I have. Further, the door frame top unit 450 can output sound such as voice and music to the player side by a pair of top center speakers 462 and a pair of top side speakers 464.

[3-9. Door frame decoration]
The decoration of the door frame 3 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 91 and the like. FIG. 91 is a front view of the door frame shown together with each decorative substrate. As shown in the figure, the door frame 3 has a substantially rectangular door window 101a extending in the vertical direction and closed by a transparent glass plate 162 of the glass unit 160 at the center in front view. The door frame 3 includes a plate upper left decorative body 271 of the plate unit 200, a plate upper right decorative body 276, a plate center upper decorative body 312a of the production operation unit 300, a door frame left side decorative body 404 of the door frame left side unit 400, and a door frame. The outer periphery of the door window 101a is entirely surrounded by the door frame right side decorative body 419 of the right side unit 410 and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450.

  A dish upper left decorative body 271, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, and a door frame top decorative body surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a. Since 453 is formed in a semi-tubular shape, the player can see a decoration in which the entire periphery of the door window 101a is surrounded by fluorescent lights.

  In the door frame 3, a dish upper left decorative body 271, a dish upper right decorative body 276, a dish center upper decorative body 312a, a door frame left side decorative body 404, a door frame right side decorative body 419, surrounding the outer periphery of the door window 101a, and Behind the door frame top decorative body 453, a dish upper left decorative board 273, a dish upper right decorative board 278, a dish center upper decorative board 314, a door frame left side decorative board 402, a door frame right side decorative board 418, a door frame top center decorative Since the board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are arranged, the entire outer periphery of the door window 101a can be illuminated and decorated by appropriately emitting LEDs on the decorative boards, A light emission effect can be shown to a player so that light moves along the outer periphery of the door window 101a.

  In the plate unit 200 of the door frame 3, on the upper surface, an annular donut-shaped rotary operation unit 302 having a diameter larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201 and a coaxial arrangement in the ring of the rotary operation unit 302. A pressing operation portion 303 including a cylindrical outer peripheral pressing operation portion 303b and a cylindrical central pressing operation portion 303a is attached, and a semi-circular arc similar to the rotation operation portion 302 below the rotation operation portion 302. The two donut-shaped (semi-cylindrical or semi-tubular) and large-diameter dish upper decorations 312a and 312b are attached vertically spaced apart from each other at the top and bottom of the dish. Door frame left side decorative body 404, door frame right side unit 41 of door frame left side unit 400 of the same shape so as to be continuous with both ends of decorative body 312a and plate center lower decorative body 312b Door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453 of the door frame top unit 450 is attached to the outside of Tobiramado 101a of the door frame base 101 so as to surround the outer periphery of the gaming region 5a.

  Thus, in the dish unit 200, the rotation operation unit 302 and the two dish upper decorations 312a and the dish lower decoration 312b are vertically arranged with three donut-shaped members. Since the pressing operation unit 303b and the center pressing operation unit 303a are arranged concentrically, the visual impact can be increased, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made more conspicuous.

  In addition, the upper left dish decoration 271, the upper right dish decoration 276, and the lower left dish decoration 281, the lower right dish decoration 286, and the lower dish decoration 312 b arranged below the upper dish decoration body 312 a are cut in half. The thickness of the tube-shaped tube is made slightly thinner, and a hemispherical unit lower cover 311 is provided below the dish center lower decorative body 312b. Thereby, in the effect operation unit 300, since it becomes larger upward from the lower end, it is possible to emphasize the perspective in the vertical direction, and the rotation operation unit 302, which can be operated by the player arranged on the upper side, The pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large, and the interest of the player can be strongly attracted to the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 in the effect operation unit 300 on the upper surface of the plate unit 200, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest. it can.

  Further, a donut-shaped rotary operation unit 302 is rotatably mounted on an upper surface of the plate unit 200 around an axis extending so as to be located forward as it goes upward. Since the state is inclined so as to be lower, the upper surface of the rotation operation unit 302 or the pressing operation unit 303 faces the direction of the head (face) of the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1, and the rotation from the player. The entire contents of the operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made easily visible, and the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be made to look large. Further, as described above, since the entire contents of the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 can be easily understood, it is possible to make it easier for the player to recognize that the rotation operation unit 302 has a donut shape. Therefore, the player can immediately recognize that the donut-shaped rotation operation unit 302 is to be rotated, and when the player participation type effect is executed, the player immediately rotates. The rotation of the operation unit 302 can be performed, and the player's participation-type effects can be enjoyed by the operation of the rotation operation unit 302, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the diameter of the rotation operation unit 302 is larger than the distance in the front-rear direction of the upper plate 201, and the diameter of the upper plate decoration 312a and the lower center decoration 312b is larger than the rotation operation unit 302. In the plate unit 200 of the pachinko machine 1, the front end sides of the rotating operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b protrude forward more than the upper plate 201, and the plate center Since the decorative body 312a and the lower plate center decorative body 312b are in a state of decorating the outer periphery of the rotary operation unit 302, the rotary operation unit 302, the plate center upper decorative body 312a, and the plate center lower decorative body 312b can be greatly conspicuous. At the same time, the appearance around the rotary operation unit 302 can be improved by the upper plate center decoration 312a and the lower plate center decoration 312b. Therefore, it is possible to make the player recognize that the pachinko machine 1 is different from the other pachinko machines at first glance, and it is possible to strongly attract the interest of the player and to appeal the player. And the pachinko machine 1 can be easily selected as a pachinko machine to be played.

[4. Overall configuration of body frame]
The entire configuration of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 92 is a front view of the main frame of the pachinko machine, and FIG. 93 is a rear view of the main frame of the pachinko machine. FIG. 94 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front right, FIG. 95 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the front left, and FIG. 96 is a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from the rear. FIG. 97 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 98 is an exploded perspective view of the main body frame disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind.

  The main body frame 4 holds the game board 5 having a game area 5a in which a game is played by hitting the game ball B, and also pays out the game ball B to the player side, and uses the game ball B used for the game. To the rear of the pachinko machine 1 (the island facility side of the game hall). As shown in the figure, the main body frame 4 is formed in a box shape with an open front, and a game board 5 is detachably accommodated therein from the front. The body frame 4 is openably and closably attached to the frame-shaped outer frame 2 attached to the island facilities of the game hall on the upper and lower sides of the front left side front end, and the door frame 3 is opened and closed so that the open front side is closed. Mounted as possible.

  The main body frame 4 has a frame-shaped main body base unit 500 having a rear portion insertable into the frame of the outer frame 2 and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and a left front view of the main body frame base unit 500. A main frame upper hinge member 510 which is rotatably mounted on the upper frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and is rotatably mounted to the upper frame hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3; A lower body frame hinge assembly which is attached to the lower left end of the base unit 500 on the front view and is rotatably attached to the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 and to which the door frame lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is rotatably mounted. And a solid 520.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is mounted on the left side of the main body frame base unit 500 when viewed from the front and is made of metal. The main body frame 4 is mounted on the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500. A ball launching device 540 for driving game balls B therein, an inverted L-shaped payout base unit 550 attached along the upper side and the left side of the rear side of the main frame base unit 500 in front view, and a payout base A payout unit 560 attached to the rear side of the unit 550 for paying out the game balls B to the player side; a board unit 620 attached to the lower rear portion of the body frame base unit 500; A back cover 640 that is attached to the rear side of the game board 5 so as to be openable and closable and covers the rear side of the game board 5 attached to the body frame base 501; And Tsu (500) viewed from the front right side with an installed and the outer frame 2 and the main frame 4, and the door frame 3 and locking unit 650 for locking between the body frame 4, and a.

  The body frame base unit 500 has a body frame base 501 formed in a rectangular frame shape whose front view extends vertically and a connection cable guide member that guides a connection cable 503 for connecting to the door frame 3 side. 502 and a game board lock member 505 for detachably holding the game board 5.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to the rear side of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and a ball tank attached to the payout base 551 and opened upward in a box shape extending left and right. 552, a tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and having a single guide passage extending leftward in a groove shape opened upward, and a second tank rail 553 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553. A first rail cover 554, a second rail cover 555 that is separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view and attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553, and between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at the position shown in FIG. It includes a Tamatome member 557 are, a.

  The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 having a single guide path for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 downward in a meandering manner, and a game ball guided by the single guide path of the ball guiding unit 570. B, a payout device 580 that pays out B one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game balls B through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full tank path. And a lower full tank path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B passing through the unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, a base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 501, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b. 620c, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the main body frame base 501, a plurality of door frame hooks 652 that protrude forward from the unit base 651 and can be locked to the door frame 3, and protrude rearward from the unit base 651. A plurality of outer frame hooks 653 that can be locked to the outer frame 2, a door frame hook 652 or a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction, and the door frame hook 652 is attached downward. A lock spring 655 that is urged and urges the outer frame hook 653 upward, and an outer frame unlocking lever 656 that moves the outer frame hook 653 downward is provided.

[4-1. Body frame base unit]
The main body frame base unit 500 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 99 (a) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left front corner of the main body frame, and FIG. 99 (b) is an enlarged perspective view showing the lower left front corner of the main body frame when the door frame is opened with respect to the main body frame. FIG. 100 is an explanatory view showing the operation of the connection cable guide member of the main frame when the door frame is opened and closed with respect to the main frame. The body frame base unit 500 has a rear portion inserted from the front into the frame of the outer frame 2 and holds the outer periphery of the game board 5 inserted from the front.

  The main body frame base unit 500 is attached to the lower left corner on the front surface of the main body frame base 501 and is connected to the connection cable 503, and is provided to guide the connection cable 503. A connection cable guide member 502 and a game board lock member 505 that is rotatably attached to a lower part of the front surface of the body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around an axis that extends back and forth, and holds the game board 5 in a detachable manner. ing.

  The main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a base main body 501a having a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front, and about ３ of the total height from a position slightly below the upper end of the base main body 501a. A game board insertion port 501b penetrating the game board 5 from the front side, and a game board on which the game board 5 is placed, forming a lower side of the game board insertion port 501b. The game device includes a placement section 501c and a game board regulation section 501d that protrudes upward from the center of the game board placement section 501c in the left-right direction and regulates movement of the lower end of the game board 5 to the left, right, and rear.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 is recessed rearward on the lower right side in front view of the game board mounting portion 501c on the front surface of the base main body 501a, and has a firing device mounting portion 501e for mounting the ball firing device 540, and a firing device mounting portion. The cylinder unit 501e penetrates back and forth on the right side of the unit 501e when viewed from the front, and the cylinder unit 501f through which the transmission cylinder 654 of the locking unit 650 is inserted. At 620, a circular speaker opening 501g of the main unit frame 620a of the speaker unit 620a facing the front and a main frame base 501 are recessed rearward below the speaker opening 501g and extend to the left and right. A cable mounting recess 501h to which the connection cable guide member 502 is mounted, and a cable mounting recess 501h And a, a cable insertion hole 501i extending through the front and rear at the right end upper viewing.

  Further, the main body frame base 501 extends rearward in a plate shape from the right side of the game board insertion opening 501b of the base main body 501a in a front view, and a locking unit 650 is attached to a right side surface, and a back cover 640 is provided at a rear end. A rearwardly extending portion 501j that is rotatably mounted and formed near the upper and lower ends on the left side in front view of the rear surface of the base body 501a to mount the body frame upper hinge member 510 and the body frame lower hinge assembly 520. And an upper hinge mounting portion 501k and a lower hinge mounting portion 501l.

  A game board lock member 505 is rotatably attached to the main body frame base 501 at a position below the game board placement portion 501c on the front side and to the right of the speaker opening 501g, around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The game board lock member 505 can restrict the forward movement of the game board 5 inserted through the game board insertion port 501b, thereby enabling the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion port 501b to be attached and detached.

  The cable mounting recess 501h of the body frame base 501 extends in the left-right direction from the right end side of the lower hinge mounting portion 501l to the right of the speaker opening 501g to a position below the portion where the game board lock member 505 is mounted. . The cable attachment recess 501h is formed to have a size capable of accommodating the connection cable guide member 502, and can be attached to the right end side of the connection cable guide member 502 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame base unit 500 has a flat guide body 502a extending left and right, and protrudes forward at both upper and lower sides of the guide body 502a and extends rightward from the right end of the guide body 502a. A pair of strip-shaped frame pieces 502b protruding, a column-shaped mounting shaft 502c connecting the right ends of the pair of frame pieces 502b to each other, and penetrating front and rear at both upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a and And a plurality of through holes 502d arranged in the direction.

  The length of the connection cable guide member 502 in the left-right direction is slightly shorter than the length in the left-right direction of the cable mounting concave portion 501h of the main body frame base 501, and is large enough to be accommodated in the cable mounting concave portion 501h. Is formed. The connection cable guide member 502 is attached such that the attachment shaft 502c is rotatable around an axis that extends vertically near the right end in the cable attachment recess 501h. Accordingly, the connection cable guide member 502 can rotate (hinge rotation) so that the left end side projects forward.

  The connection cable guide member 502 is for guiding the connection cable 503. The connection cable 503 is composed of a plurality of wiring cords, one end of which is connected to the interface board 635 of the board unit 620, and the other end of which is the door frame main relay board 104 of the door frame 3 and the door frame auxiliary. Connected to relay board 105.

  Next, the function and effect of the connection cable guide member 502 will be described. As shown in FIG. 100 and the like, the connection cable guide member 502 has an end portion (right end portion) opposite to a side (left side) on which the door frame 3 in the left and right direction is hingedly attached to the main body frame base 501 (left side). ) Is rotatably mounted around an axis extending parallel to the hinge axis of the door frame 3.

  The connection cable 503 that connects the interface board 635 of the main body frame 4 to the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 has a connection cable guide member on the side connected to the interface board 635. In a state in which the guide body 502a is in contact with the front surface of the guide body 502a so as to extend from the right to the left of the guide body 502a, the left and right directions of a plurality of through holes 502d formed on the upper and lower ends of the guide body 502a are changed. It is attached to the guide main body 502a by being fastened together with the guide main body 502a by the binding band 504 inserted into the pair of through holes 502d at the same position.

  The connection cable guide member 502 of the main body frame 4 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1 and the rear of the door frame main relay board 104 and the door frame sub relay board 105 of the door frame 3 with the door frame 3 closed with respect to the main body frame 4. (See FIG. 100 (a)). In this state, after the connection cable 503 extends leftward from the connection cable guide member 502, it is bent back in front of the lower hinge attachment portion 501l, passes through the cable holder 103a of the door frame 3, and covers the door frame relay board cover. 107. The cable holder 103a of the door frame 3 is arranged on the left side of the left end of the connection cable guide member 502.

  In this state, when the door frame 3 is hinge-rotated to open with respect to the main body frame 4, the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is pulled forward by the side of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3, The connection cable guide member 502 rotates around the right end mounting shaft 502c. At this time, in the present embodiment, the relationship between the opening angle α of the door frame 3 and the opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 satisfies α / 2 ≧ β (preferably α / 3 ≧ β). (See FIG. 100 (b)).

  The open angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 is 0 degree when the door frame 3 is closed (the open angle α of the door frame 3 is 0 degree). The opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 increases as the opening angle α increases when the door frame 3 is opened, but stops increasing when the opening angle α exceeds a certain degree (for example, about 90 degrees). It changes as follows. In the present embodiment, the maximum angle of the opening angle β is less than 45 degrees.

  As described above, when the door frame 3 is opened, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates so that the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 moves forward from the main body frame base 501. By guiding the connection cable 503, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 from hanging down between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4.

  When the open door frame 3 is closed, the portion of the connection cable 503 attached to the door frame 3 moves relatively rearward, so that the connection cable 503 pushes the left end side of the connection cable guide member 502 rearward. Then, the connection cable guide member 502 rotates about the mounting shaft 502c so that the left end moves backward. At this time, since the connection cable guide member 502 is opened at an opening angle β of less than 45 degrees, the connection cable guide member 502 does not hinder the movement of the door frame 3 in the closing direction. Can be closed smoothly. Further, since the connection cable 503 is guided by the connection cable guide member 502, the connection cable 503 is not pinched between the door frame 3 and the main body frame 4 when the door frame 3 is closed. Can be prevented from occurring.

  When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the connection cable 503 guided by the connection cable guide member 502 is folded 180 degrees, so that the connection cable 503 is folded at the folded portion. You can add a habit. Thus, when the portion of the connection cable 503 that is folded back by 180 degrees changes to open by opening the door frame 3, a force for closing the connection cable 503 due to the folding habit acts. Therefore, when closing the door frame 3, it is possible to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving in the opening direction due to the folding habit, and to prevent the connection cable 503 (connection cable guide member 502) from moving. The door frame 3 can be guided in the closing direction, and the door frame 3 can be closed smoothly.

  Further, on the side of the door frame 3, the folded connection cable 503 is connected to the cable holder 103 a at a position closer to the center axis (axial center) of the upper hinge pin 122 and the lower hinge pin 126 than the tip of the connection cable guide member 502. When the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 is moved by the connection cable 503 held by the cable holder 103 a when the door frame 3 is closed. It can be pulled toward the center axis (axial center) of the hinge pin 126 below the door frame.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the door passes through the center of rotation of the connection cable guide member 502, and is centered on the center axis (axis) of the hinge pin 122 above the door frame and the hinge pin 126 below the door frame. An angle at which a tangent to a circle passing through a portion (pressing portion) protruding rearward on the center axis (axis center) side of the frame upper hinge pin 122 and the door frame lower hinge pin 126 intersects the front surface of the main body frame 4 is 45 degrees. It is configured as follows. Accordingly, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the pressing portion abuts on the connection cable 503, thereby closing the distal end side of the connection cable guide member 502 opened via the connection cable 503. As the door frame 3 is moved in the closing direction, the connection cable guide member 502 can be smoothly closed, and the door frame 3 can be securely closed. In addition, since the maximum opening angle β of the connection cable guide member 502 that rotates (opens and closes) with the opening and closing of the door frame 3 can be set to 45 degrees or less, when the door frame 3 is closed, the connection cable guide member 502 is closed. Can be reliably rotated in the closing direction, and the same operational effects as described above can be obtained.

[4-2. Hinge member on body frame]
The main frame upper hinge member 510 in the main frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to the upper hinge attachment portion 501k of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and is rotatably attached to the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50 of the outer frame 2 and the door frame 3 The hinge assembly 120 above the door frame is rotatably mounted.

  The main frame upper hinge member 510 includes an upper hinge body 511 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate material is bent downward in an L shape, and a cylindrical shape protruding upward from a front end of the upper hinge body 511. And an upper hinge pin 512 that is pivotally supported by the outer hinge assembly 50. The upper hinge main body 511 penetrates vertically on the left side of the main frame upper hinge pin 512 when viewed from the front in a horizontally extended portion, and has a door frame upper hinge hole 511 a for pivotally supporting the door frame upper hinge assembly 120. Have.

  The main frame upper hinge member 510 is attached to an upper hinge mounting portion 501k of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500 at a portion of the upper hinge main body 511 that is bent downward and extends vertically. The body frame upper hinge member 510 is rotatably supported by inserting the body frame upper hinge pin 512 into the bearing groove 51c of the outer frame upper hinge member 51 of the outer frame upper hinge assembly 50. The door frame upper hinge pin 122 of the door frame upper hinge assembly 120 of the door frame 3 is rotatably inserted from below into the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511.

  The body frame upper hinge member 510 can cooperate with the body frame lower hinge assembly 520 to attach the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 such that the body frame 4 can be hinge-rotated. 3 can be mounted so that it can be hinged.

[4-3. Hinge assembly under body frame]
The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The main frame lower hinge assembly 520 is mounted on the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l of the main frame base 501 of the main frame base unit 500, and is rotatably mounted on the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2, and the door frame 3. Door frame lower hinge member 125 is rotatably mounted.

  The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 is disposed above the lower hinge first main body 521 and a lower hinge first main body 521 in which a rear portion of a horizontally extending flat plate-shaped material is bent upward in an L-shape. And a lower hinge second main body 522 in which a rear portion of the flat plate-shaped plate member extending horizontally is bent upward in an L-shape. The main body frame lower hinge assembly 520 includes a horizontally extending part of the lower hinge second main body 522 arranged at an interval upward from a horizontally extending part of the lower hinge first main body 521, and a lower part. The vertically extending portion of the lower hinge second body 522 is in contact with the front surface of the vertically extending portion of the hinge first main body 521.

  The lower hinge first main body 521 vertically penetrates near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the outer frame lower hinge pin 60c of the outer frame lower hinge member 60 of the outer frame 2 is inserted from below. It has a hinge hole 521a. The outer frame lower hinge hole 521 a is formed coaxially with the main frame upper hinge pin 512 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

  The lower hinge second main body 522 penetrates vertically near the front end of the horizontally extending portion, and the lower part for the door frame into which the lower hinge pin 126 of the lower hinge member 125 of the door frame 3 is inserted from above. A hinge hole 522a, and a restriction piece 522b extending upward from a position behind the lower hinge hole 522a for the door frame on the left side of the horizontally extending portion and restricting the rotation range of the door frame 3. , Is provided. The door frame lower hinge hole 522a is formed coaxially with the door frame upper hinge hole 511a of the upper hinge body 511 of the main frame upper hinge member 510.

  In the main frame lower hinge assembly 520, the vertically extending portions of the lower hinge first main body 521 and the lower hinge second main body 522 are attached to the lower hinge mounting portion 501 l of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500. Can be The body frame lower hinge assembly 520 can cooperate with the body frame upper hinge member 510 to attach the body frame 4 to the outer frame 2 so as to be hinge-rotatable, and to attach the door frame 3 to the body frame 4. Can be mounted so that the hinge can be rotated.

[4-4. Body frame reinforcement frame]
The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is attached to the left side surface of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 has a U-shaped cross section in plan view, and has a constant cross section and extends vertically. In the present embodiment, the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 is formed of a metal extrusion.

  The main body frame reinforcing frame 530 restricts the game board 5 inserted into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 from moving forward and vertically behind a portion extending rightward from the front end. Two left position restricting members 531 are vertically separated from each other.

  The main body frame reinforcement frame 530 reinforces the left side (hinge side) of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500, and also passes through the space between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 inside the main body frame 4 (from the left side). The illegal insertion of a tool into the game board 5) is prevented.

[4-5. Ball launching device]
The ball launching device 540 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 101 (a) is a perspective view of the ball launching device in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 101 (b) is a perspective view of the ball launching device as viewed from the back. The ball launching device 540 is attached to the lower part of the front surface of the main body frame base unit 500, and the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 is mounted on the main body frame 4. 5 for driving into the game area 5a. The ball shooting device 540 can hit the game ball B with a strength corresponding to the rotation angle of the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 at the lower right corner of the front surface of the door frame 3.

  The ball launching device 540 is attached to the flat-plate-like launching base 541 attached to the launching device attaching portion 501e of the body frame base 501 of the body frame base unit 500, and is attached to the rear surface of the launching base 541 on the right side when viewed from the front, and rotates. A firing solenoid 542 composed of a rotary solenoid whose shaft extends forward through the firing base 541, a hitting hammer 543 having a base end attached to the rotating shaft of the firing solenoid 542, and a vicinity of the tip of the hitting hammer 543. A shooting rail 544 attached to the front surface of the firing base 541 so as to extend obliquely upward to the left and on which the game ball B can roll.

  In the ball launching device 540, the game ball B is supplied from the ball feeding unit 140 of the door frame 3 to the upper right end of the firing rail 544, and the game ball B is supplied to the upper right end of the firing rail 544. When the handle 182 is rotated in the state of being turned, the firing solenoid 542 is driven with a strength corresponding to the rotation operation angle, and the game ball B is hit by the hitting hammer 543. Then, the game ball B hit by the ball hammer 543 is guided by the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5 through the firing rail 544, and is hit into the game area 5a.

  In the case where the hit ball B does not reach the game area 5a due to the strength of the hit of the game ball B or the like, the firing rail 544 and the game board 5 (the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002) are used. From there, it falls to the foul ball receiving port 150c of the foul cover unit 150 below, passes through the foul cover unit 150, and is discharged to the lower plate 202.

[4-6. Dispensing base unit]
The payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 102 and the like. FIG. 102 (a) is a perspective view of the payout base unit of the main frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 102 (b) is a perspective view of the payout base unit viewed from the back. The payout base unit 550 is formed in an inverted L shape, and is attached to the rear side of the main frame base unit 500.

  The payout base unit 550 includes a payout base 551 attached to a rear side of the main body frame base 501 in the main body frame base unit 500. The dispensing base 551 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and has a top plate 551a extending in the front-rear direction with a substantially constant width in the left and right direction, and a width in the front-rear direction from the left side in front view of the top plate 551a. A left side plate portion 551b extending substantially downward and having substantially the same width; and a right side plate portion 551c having a width in the front-rear direction extending from the right side of the top plate portion 551a in the front-rear direction and having a width substantially the same as that of the top plate portion 551a and extending shortly downward. A back plate upper portion 551d extending downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c, and substantially constant rightward from a position closer to the front than the rear side of the left side plate portion 551b. A left back plate portion 551e extending to the vicinity of the lower end in width, an inner plate portion 551f extending rearward from the right side of the left back plate portion 551e to the same position as a rear side of the left plate portion 551b, and a left plate portion 551b. From the front of the lower side to the right to the left of the backboard Includes a bottom plate portion 551g which extends substantially to the same position as 51e right side of the connecting plate portion 551h, which connects the lower side of the right inner plate portion 551f of the bottom plate portion 551g, a. The payout base 551 is formed in an inverted L-shape in a front view, and is formed in a box shape opened forward and inward in the L-shape. In addition, on the rear surface of the upper part 551d of the back plate, an eave part 551da protruding rearward is formed in a region separated by a predetermined length from the lower side in the left-right direction.

  In the payout base 551, the top plate portion 551a extends left and right with a length substantially equal to the width in the left-right direction of the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501, and the left plate portion 551b has upper and lower sides of the game board insertion opening 501b. It extends up and down with the same length as the height in the direction. In the payout base 551, the front ends of the top plate portion 551a, the left plate portion 551b, and the right plate portion 551c are attached to the rear side of the body frame base 501.

  The payout base 551 has a shallow concave portion that is opened rearward and extends vertically by the left side plate portion 551b, the left back plate portion 551e, and the inner side plate portion 551f. A unit 560 is mounted. Further, the payout base 551 protrudes rightward in the upper part of the right side of the inner plate portion 551f in front view, and has a back cover attaching portion 551i to which the back cover 640 is attached.

  The payout base unit 550 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551, and has a box-shaped ball tank 552 that extends left and right and is open upward. A tank rail 553 attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 on the upper side and extending leftward in a groove shape opened upward.

  Further, the dispensing base unit 550 is provided at the upper end of the tank rail 553 with a first rail cover 554 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction. A second rail cover 555 attached and extending to the left end of the tank rail 553, and a ball rectifying member 556 attached to the upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555. And a ball retaining member 557 attached to the lower end of the tank rail 553 near the left end in front view.

  The ball tank 552 is made of conductive resin containing carbon in polycarbonate, is molded in opaque black, and is formed to have a length in the left-right direction which is about half the width in the left-right direction of the top plate portion 551a of the payout base 551. And the front-back direction is formed to be shorter than the front-back depth of the top plate portion 551a. The ball tank 552 is mounted on the upper surface of the top plate 551a at a position closer to the right in the left-right direction. The bottom surface of the ball tank 552 is inclined so that the left end side is lower. The left end side of the ball tank 552 communicates with the tank rail 553.

  The tank rail 553 is molded of a non-conductive transparent synthetic resin, and is attached to the upper surface of the top plate 551a of the payout base 551 near the rear end on the left side of the center in the left-right direction. The tank rail 553 has a shape in plan view in which the depth in the front-rear direction is diagonally left and rearward from the right end communicating with the ball tank 552, and the depth in the front-rear direction is approximately one minute from the depth several times the outer diameter of the game ball B After extending to the depth, the depth in the front-rear direction is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and is formed to extend straight to the left. The bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is inclined so that the left end side is low, and the left end of the bottom surface is slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B and opens downward to form one guide passage. Have been. An opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 communicates with an upper end opening of one guide passage 570a in the ball guiding unit 570 of the payout unit 560.

  Also, the tank rail 553 is steeper than the bottom so that the upper end of the portion extending straight to the left has a height slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B on the left end side. It is inclined so that the left end side becomes lower at an appropriate angle. The tank rail 553 is attached to the upper surface of the top plate 551a such that the rear end of the portion extending straight leftward substantially coincides with the rear side of the top plate 551a. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate 551a, the top plate 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d are disposed substantially on the same plane. It has become so. The cross-sectional shape of the top plate 551a in which the tank rail 553 is arranged in the front-rear direction is plurally bent downward from the front side to the rear side of the top plate 551a (from the front to the rear of the top plate 551a). It is formed in a stepped shape. The first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, the ball rectifying member 556, and the ball stopping member 557 are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight leftward.

  The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are made of polyamide (nylon) resin, are molded in opaque white, and are attached to the upper end of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends straight leftward. . The first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 are for preventing the depth of the upper end of the tank rail 553 in the front-rear direction from expanding or narrowing due to the pressure of the game ball B in the tank rail 553. Things.

  The ball rectifying member 556 is made of a polyamide (nylon) resin, is molded in an opaque white color, and has a second portion at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555 at the upper end of the tank rail 553. One rail cover 554 side end is rotatably mounted around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The ball straightening member 556 includes a straightening piece 556a that protrudes into the tank rail 553 and extends in the left-right direction (see FIG. 110). This rectifying piece 556a delays the flow of the game balls B on the upper side of the game balls B circulating in the upper and lower stages, and rectifies them so that they flow in a single stage on the downstream side. Even if the height decreases, the ball is not clogged.

  The ball stopping member 557 is made of a polyamide (nylon) resin, is molded in opaque red, and is slidably attached to the lower surface of the tank rail 553 in the vicinity of the left end in front view, in the left-right direction. By sliding the game ball B, the opening at the left end of the bottom surface of the tank rail 553 is closed, so that the game ball B does not flow from the tank rail 553 to the payout unit side downstream.

  As described above, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate portion 551a in which the tank rail 553 is disposed is lower downward from the front side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a) as described above. It is formed in the shape of a plurality of bent steps. A part of the plurality of bent steps is formed as a board housing portion 551aa for mounting the external terminal plate 558 and the frame ground board 559. The upper side of the external terminal plate 558 is covered with a terminal cover 551k molded of a transparent synthetic resin. The external terminal plate 558 includes a mounting surface and a plurality of wire connection terminals 558a (a plurality of external terminals (in this embodiment, external terminals XCN1 arranged in a line from left to right as viewed from the rear of the payout base unit 550). ＸXCN10 are provided.) The substrate is accommodated in such a manner that the payout base 551 is viewed from the front and the mounting surface thereof is vertical toward the rear of the payout base 551 so that the external terminals are exposed. It is attached to the portion 551aa. On the other hand, the frame ground substrate 559 has a mounting surface on which a plurality of ground terminals (in this embodiment, five ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 are provided) are mounted with the mounting surface facing downward. When viewed from the front, the dispensing base 551 is disposed in front of the external terminal plate 558, attached to the substrate accommodating portion 551aa, and covered by the terminal cover 551k. Therefore, the frame ground board 559 is housed in a space formed by the board housing portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k. Since the terminal cover 551k is molded of a transparent synthetic resin, the frame ground substrate 559 accommodated in the space formed by the substrate accommodating portion 551aa and the terminal cover 551k can be visually recognized from outside the terminal cover 551k. It has become.

  Note that among the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the height of the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is 13.4 mm (the mounting height becomes 18.6 mm when the housing corresponding to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 is inserted). On the other hand, the height of the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is 7 mm (the mounting height becomes 9.8 mm when the housing corresponding to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 is inserted). In a state where the frame ground substrate 559 is housed and mounted inside the substrate housing portion 551aa and the external terminal plate 558 is mounted on the rear surface of the substrate housing portion 551aa, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, the frame ground substrate 559 is formed. Is hidden by the presence of the external terminal plate 558, making it difficult to see. However, among the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 of the frame ground substrate 559, only the ground terminals ECN2 and ECN4 protrude from the lower side of the external terminal plate 558, and the pachinko machine 1 can be viewed from the back (for example, see FIG. 93). Although the height of the ground terminal ECN3 is 13.4 mm, which is high as described above, when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back, the pachinko machine 1 is hidden by the ball rectifying member 556 and is difficult to visually recognize. The ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 have a low height of 7 mm as described above, cannot protrude from the lower side of the external terminal plate 558, and are hidden by the presence of the external terminal plate 558 when the pachinko machine 1 is viewed from the back. Is difficult to see. A detailed description of the frame ground substrate 559 will be described later.

  The external terminal board 558 is for making an electrical connection between the pachinko machine 1 and the island facilities of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. The frame ground substrate 559 is for temporarily collecting electromagnetic wave noise generated in various places and grounding (grounding) the island equipment in the game hall.

[4-7. Overall structure of payout unit]
The overall configuration of the payout unit 560 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 103 (a) is a perspective view of the payout unit in the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 103 (b) is a perspective view of the payout unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 104A is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 104B is an exploded perspective view of the dispensing unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. is there. The payout unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the left back portion 551e of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550.

  The payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 that guides the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner, and a game ball B that is disposed below the ball guiding unit 570 and is guided by the ball guiding unit 570. Payout device 580 that pays out the game balls one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, and an upper full tank path unit And a lower full tank path unit 610 that guides the game ball B passing through 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side.

  The ball guiding unit 570 supplies the payout device 580 with the game balls B arranged in a line by one guide path of the tank rail 553. The payout device 580 includes a single payout passage 580a through which the game balls B supplied from the single guide passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 can flow, and a single ball removal branching from the middle of the payout passage 580a. In the normal state, the game ball B is discharged from the payout passage 580a to the upper full ball path unit 600 side based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, and the ball ejection lever 593 is operated. The game ball B is released from the ball-exiting passage 580b to the upper full tank path unit 600 side.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 separately guides the game balls B discharged from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B discharged from the ball discharge passage 580b downward. The lower full tank path unit 610 guides the game ball B released from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 to the door frame 3 side via the upper full tank path unit 600, and is released from the ball discharge path 580b. The game ball B is guided to the substrate unit 620 side.

[4-7-1. Ball guidance unit]
The ball guiding unit 570 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The ball guiding unit 570 is attached from the rear to the upper rear surface of the left back portion 551e of the payout base 551 in the payout base unit 550, receives the game ball B from the tank rail 553, and guides the game ball B to the payout device 580 side. It is for doing.

  The ball guiding unit 570 includes a box-shaped guiding unit base 571 that has a meandering guiding passage 570a through which the game balls B can flow and is opened forward, and closes the front side of the guiding unit base 571. A flat guiding path front cover 572, a movable piece member 573 movable by a game ball B flowing in the guiding path 570 a, and a game ball B in the guiding path 570 a by detecting the movement of the movable piece member 573. And a ball-cut detection sensor 574 for detecting the presence / absence of (see FIG. 110).

  In the ball guiding unit 570, the shape of the guiding unit base 571 and the guiding path front lid 572 in a front view is formed in a quadrangular shape extending vertically. The guide passage 570a opens upward near the left end of the upper surface of the guide unit base 571, extends vertically downward from the upper end to near the center of the guide unit base 571 in the height direction, and then bends to the right to guide. The unit base 571 extends downward in a meandering manner while repeatedly turning over the width in the left-right direction, and opens downward near the left end of the lower surface of the guide unit base 571.

  The guide passage 570a is formed such that the depth in the front, rear, right and left directions and the width in the left-right direction are slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B with respect to the distribution direction of the game ball B. Can be guided in a row.

  In the ball guiding unit 570, a movable piece member 573 is attached near the upper part so as to be able to advance and retreat into the guiding passage 570a. More specifically, the movable piece member 573 has an upper portion rotatably mounted around an axis extending frontward and rearward at a position on the right outside of the guide passage 570a when viewed from the front, and a part of the lower end protrudes into the guide passage 570a by its own weight. It is formed so that. The movable piece member 573 is in a state in which the game ball B abuts on a portion projecting into the guide passage 570a, whereby the projecting portion is pushed by the game ball B and retreats from the guide passage 570a and does not protrude. Becomes

  When a part of the movable piece member 573 protrudes into the guide passage 570a, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 does not detect the movable piece member 573, and the movable piece member 573 retreats from the inside of the guide passage 570a. When not protruding, the movable piece member 573 is detected. Therefore, the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is in a detection state when the game ball B is present in the guide path 570a, and is in a non-detection state when the game ball B is not present in the guide path 570a.

  When the ball guiding unit 570 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upstream end of the guiding passage 570 a communicates with the downstream end of the tank rail 553, and the downstream end of the guiding passage 570 a is connected to the discharging passage of the discharging device 580. 580a communicates with the upstream end. In the ball guiding unit 570, since the guiding path 570a for guiding the game ball B extends in a meandering shape, the guiding path 570a extends longer than the total height of the ball guiding unit 570, and many games are provided in the guiding path 570a. The sphere B can be stored. In addition, since the ball guiding unit 570 can detect the presence or absence of the game ball B in the guidance passage 570a by the ball cut detection sensor 574, it detects the presence or absence of the game ball B in the ball tank 552 via the guidance passage 570a. can do.

[4-7-2. Dispensing device]
The payout device 580 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 105 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade. FIG. 106A is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade when the ball-moving movable piece is in an open state, and FIG. It is. FIG. 107 is a rear view of the dispensing device for explaining the rotation position of the dispensing blade. FIG. 108 is a rear view of the dispensing device for explaining prevention of clogging of the ball and dropping of the ball. In FIG. 107, in order to explain the rotational position of the dispensing blade, a dispensing gear member and a part of various gears, which are not visible from the back of the dispensing device, are described so as to be visible and are to be described. A small circle is attached to the bottom of the ball housing portion 589b of the dispensing blade 589. Here, the configuration of the dispensing device 580 will be described first, and then, the rotation position of the dispensing blade, prevention of ball clogging and prevention of ball dropout will be described.

[4-7-2a. Configuration of Dispensing Device]
The payout device 580 is detachably attached to the rear of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550 from the rear below the ball guiding unit 570 on the rear surface of the left back plate portion 551e. The dispensing device 580 includes a dispensing device main body 581 having a dispensing passage 580a that is a box-like shape opened backward and through which game balls B can flow, and a ball ejection passage 580b that branches off from the middle of the dispensing passage 580a. A flat-plate-shaped dispensing device rear lid 582 that closes the device main body 581 from the rear side, and a shallow box-shaped dispensing device front lid 583 attached to the front side of the dispensing device main body 581 and opened rearward. ing. The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583 are made of polycarbonate resin, and are molded in opaque black. The dispensing device rear lid 582 is made of polycarbonate resin and is molded transparently. Therefore, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 and the game balls B flowing down the payout passage 580a can be visually recognized from the back side of the payout device 580 through the transparent payout device rear lid 582.

  The dispensing device 580 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing device main body 581 and has a rotating shaft protruding between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front cover 583. An attached spur gear drive gear 585 (number of teeth Z0: 9), and a spur gear gear meshed with the drive gear 585 and rotatably attached by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. And the second transmission gear 586 (the number of teeth Z1: 20), the second transmission gear 586, and a spur gear-shaped second gear rotatably mounted by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583. The transmission gear 587 (the number of teeth Z2: 20), the spur gear-shaped payout gear 588a meshing with the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a (the number of teeth Z3: 24) extend outwardly. A dispensing gear member 588 having a number of detecting pieces 588b and rotatably mounted between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device front lid 583, and dispensing between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582. A dispensing blade 589 having a plurality of blade pieces 589a that rotate integrally with the gear member 588 and protrude into the dispensing passage 580a, and a detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 which is attached to the rear side of the dispensing device main body 581 and is detected. And a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that performs the rotation. The payout motor 584 is controlled by the payout control board 633 and driven stepwise. When the payout motor 584 is step-driven, the payout motor 584 rotates the rotary shaft in a stepwise manner at a predetermined angle (18 degrees in the present embodiment). That is, the payout motor 584 rotates its rotation axis by 18 degrees in one step rotation. The detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is input to the payout control board 633. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear member 588 are made of polyamide (nylon) resin, and are molded in opaque black. The dispensing blade 589 is made of a polyamide (nylon) resin, and is molded into an opaque white color.

  Further, the payout device 580 is attached at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a by a payout device main body 581 and a payout device rear cover 582, and detects a game ball B, a payout detection sensor 591, and the payout device main body 581 and the payout device. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is attached to the part branched from the pay-out passage 580a by the lid 582 so that the ball-moving passage 580b can be opened and closed, and can be held at a position where the ball-moving movable piece 592 closes the ball removing passage 580b. And a ball ejection lever 593 slidably mounted in the up-down direction by the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is made of polyamide (nylon) resin, and is molded to be opaque white. The ball extraction lever 593 is made of a polyamide (nylon) resin, and is molded in opaque red.

  The dispensing device 580 is formed in a rectangular shape whose plan view shape extends vertically. The payout device 580 is formed such that the width in the left-right direction is larger rightward in front view than the width in the left-right direction of the ball guiding unit 570.

  As shown in FIG. 105, the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 has an upstream end opening upward at a position closer to the left from the center in the left-right direction and a downstream end at a position near the right end in the left-right direction in rear view. It opens downward. The payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upper end to a height of about 1/3 of the total height so as to gradually move leftward from the upstream end downward, and after being bent slightly diagonally rightward from there, It bends at about 1/3 of the left and right width and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the dispensing blade 589. Then, above the center of the payout blade 589, after bending to the right in rear view with a width slightly larger than the outer diameter of the game ball B, a gap slightly larger than the game ball B between the payout blade 589 and the outer periphery thereof. Are formed so as to form a circular arc concentric with the dispensing blade 589 so as to be formed, and extend vertically downward to the downstream end at a position on the right side in the rear view from the center of the dispensing blade 589.

  In the dispensing passage 580a, a dispensing detection sensor 591 is disposed below the dispensing blade 589 and immediately above the downstream end. As the payout detection sensor 591, a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used.

  The ball passage 580b extends obliquely downward from the upstream end in the payout passage 580a and bends rightward, and extends vertically to the lower end along the left side in rear view. It opens downward near the left end. A part of the inner wall of the passage forming the dispensing passage 580a has a predetermined distance dimension and a rib-shaped ball blocking prevention portion 581r protrudes toward the ball ejection passage 580b at the branching portion. The upper surface of 581r and the inner wall surface of the passage forming the dispensing passage 580a are formed in the same plane to form a right-downward inclined surface in rear view. A detailed description of the ball clogging prevention unit 581r will be described later.

  The dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582 face each other on the side where the dispensing passage 580a and the ball removal passage 580b are branched, and on the side where the ball removal movable piece 592 is attached, the outer diameter of the game ball B. A main body-side guide wall 581a that projects rearward and forward from each so as to form a narrower gap, and that is formed so as to be continuous with the left side wall of the payout passage 580a and the ball ejection passage 580b in rear view. And a rear lid side guide wall 582a. The main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a are branched from the ball passage 580b in the payout passage 580a and extend rightward as viewed from the rear at a height of about 1/3 from above in rear view. It is formed at the left position. The main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a are curved so as to be depressed diagonally upward to the left when viewed from the rear, and are formed so as to mainly constitute the side wall of the ball passage 580b. The ball-moving movable piece 592 rotates between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a.

  The payout motor 584 is attached to the right side of the back view of the portion of the payout device main body 581 where the payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upstream end. The drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear member 588 are disposed in front of the dispensing device main body 581, and the front side is covered by a dispensing device front lid 583. The payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat detecting pieces 588b having an arc shape extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction.

  The dispensing blade 589 is disposed between the dispensing device main body 581 and the dispensing device rear lid 582. The dispensing blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a each having a circular arc shape and extending concentrically outward from the rotation axis thereof at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. The blade piece 589a extends from the upper side in the payout passage 580a toward the rotation axis and then extends rightward in rear view so that the distance between the blade and the side wall of the payout passage is smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball B. And protrudes into the payout passage 580a. The dispensing blade 589 includes a ball housing portion 589b that is recessed toward the center with an arc having a radius that is slightly larger than the radius of the game ball B between the three blade pieces 589a. By forming the ball accommodating portions 589b at equal intervals, a shape is formed in which three wing pieces 589a serving as peaks and three ball containing portions 589b serving as valleys are alternately formed. Only one game ball B can be accommodated in the ball accommodation portion 589b. Thereby, the payout blade 589 can restrict the game ball B in the payout passage 580a from moving to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 by the blade piece 589a, and also rotates clockwise in rear view. This allows the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b to move to the downstream side.

  The dispensing gear member 588 and the dispensing blade 589 are mounted coaxially and integrally rotatable by a dispensing device rear lid 582 and a dispensing device front lid 583. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 is disposed on the left side of the rotation axis of the payout gear member 588 in rear view as viewed in rear view. The blade rotation detection sensor 590 detects the rotation of the dispensing blade 589 by detecting the detection piece 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 that rotates integrally with the dispensing blade 589.

  The ball-moving movable piece 592 has its upper end rotatably mounted on the upper and lower ends of the main body-side guide wall 581a and the rear lid-side guide wall 582a around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is bent in a rectangular shape, and is attached so that the concave side faces the inside of the payout passage 580a. The ball-moving movable piece 592 is formed such that the depth in the front-rear direction is smaller than the gap between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, and the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a. Through the gap between them, it can protrude into the ball ejection passage 580b or retreat outside the ball ejection passage 580b.

  The ball removal lever 593 is attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 so as to be slidable in the vertical direction on the left side in rear view near the upper end of the ball removal movable piece 592. The ball pull lever 593 partially projects through the dispensing device rear lid 582 and projects rearward, and can be slid by operating the projecting portion. By positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the lower end, the lower portion can contact the ball removal movable piece 592, and the rotation of the ball removal movable piece 592 in the clockwise direction in rear view can be restricted. The ball removal passage 580b can be closed by the ball removal movable piece 592. Further, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened (FIG. 106). In this manner, the ball can be removed by opening the ball removal passage 580b using the ball removal lever 593.

  When the ball removal is performed by raising the ball removal lever 593 so that the ball removal movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B is in a state like a rosary connection upstream of the ball removal movable piece 592. Flows down to the ball removal passage 580b side beyond the ball removal movable piece 592. At this time, since the ball removal passage 580b extends straight and straight from the upstream side of the payout passage 580a, the game balls B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a flow straight down to the ball removal passage 580b. At the same time, since the downstream side of the ball passage 580b communicates with the island facility side, there is no such thing as suppressing the flow of the game ball B like the payout blade 589, so that the game ball B is moved from the payout passage 580a side. Will also flow down quickly.

  As described above, in a state where the ball-moving movable piece 592 is rotatable, the game ball B flows down at a high speed in the ball-pulling passage 580b, so that the ball-moving movable piece 592 protruding into the ball-pulling passage 580b. Game ball B abuts vigorously against the lower end of the payout device, but the ball removal movable piece 592 passes between the main body side guide wall 581a of the payout device main body 581 and the rear cover side guide wall 582a of the payout device rear cover 582. Since it is possible to move outside the inner surface of the ball removal passage 580b, the contacting force causes the ball removal movable piece 592 to move to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b. The ball is not sandwiched between the wall of the extraction passage 580b and the game ball B, and a strong force is not applied to the movable ball 592 by the game ball B, and the ball is movable by the collision of the game ball B. Piece 59 Deterioration and breakage of the durability can be suppressed.

  Because of this, the ball-moving movable piece 592 can be hardly damaged, and more game balls B can be discharged to the island facilities downstream of the ball-pulling passage 580b more quickly. It is possible to suppress an increase in the time required for replacement or maintenance of the machine 1, and to reduce the burden on the game hall.

  Also, when the ball-moving movable piece 592 is in a rotatable state, the ball-moving movable piece 592 passes through a space between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a at a smaller interval than the game ball B, and the ball removing passage 580b. When the game ball B comes into contact with the ball-moving movable piece 592 protruding into the ball-passing passage 580b, the ball-moving movable piece 592 is moved between the main-body-side guide wall 581a and the rear-lid-side guide wall 582a. When moving to the outside through the gap, even if the game ball B moves to the side between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a together with the ball removal movable piece 592, the game ball B is spaced more than the game ball B. Between the narrow main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, only the game ball B can be prevented from moving outward.

  The movement of the game ball B to the outside is prevented between the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, so that the game ball B is separated from the ball-movable piece 592, and the subsequent ball Since the movement of the movable pulling piece 592 is based on the inertial force, no strong force acts on the movable ball removing piece 592, and the movable ball removing piece 592 can be hardly damaged, and the main body side guide can be used. The game ball B does not jump out of the ball passage 580b from between the wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a, and the game ball B can be reliably circulated to the downstream side of the ball passage 580b.

[4-7-2b. Rotation position of dispensing blade]
As described above, the dispensing device 580 includes a spur gear-shaped driving gear 585 (number of teeth Z0: 9) attached to the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584, and a spur gear-shaped first transmission gear 586 (meshed with the driving gear 585). The number of teeth Z1: 20), the second transmission gear 587 in the form of a spur gear meshing with the first transmission gear 586 (number of teeth Z2: 20), and the dispensing gear 588a in the form of a spur gear meshing with the second transmission gear 587 (number of teeth) Z3: 24) and a plurality of detection pieces 588b, a payout gear member 588, a payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588, a blade rotation detection sensor 590 that detects the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588, and the like. When the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotationally driven, the rotation is performed via the driving gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear 588a of the dispensing gear member 588. It is transmitted to rotate the blade 589.

  Here, the rotation speed of the payout gear member 588 is obtained by reducing the rotation speed of the payout motor 584 by the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588. . This reduction ratio n is set to the number of teeth Z0 (= 9) of the drive gear 585 / the number of teeth Z3 (= 24) of the dispensing gear 588a of the dispensing gear member 588 by calculation based on mechanics. In the present embodiment, the payout motor 584 is a stepping motor that is excited by 2-2 phase excitation and has a rotation axis that rotates 18 degrees in one step rotation (360 degrees after the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 rotates 20 steps). = 18 degrees × 20 steps). The discharge blade 589 that rotates integrally with the discharge gear member 588 is 6.75 degrees (= 18 degrees × reduction ratio n) when the rotation shaft of the discharge motor 584 rotates one step. It will rotate. Thus, when the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 rotates 54 steps, the payout blade 589 rotates 364.5 degrees (= 6.75 degrees × 54 steps), and when it makes one rotation (360 degrees rotation), it becomes 4.5. It will rotate extra degrees.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, when the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated 54 steps, the dispensing blade 589 rotates 364.5 degrees, so that the dispensing blade 589 makes one rotation (360 degree rotation). It is necessary to rotate the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 by 53.333... (= 360 degrees ÷ 6.75 degrees) stepwise, and stepwise drive the payout motor 584 corresponding to one rotation (360 ° rotation) of the discharge blade 589. The number of steps, which is the number of times, is not an integer.

  That is, in the present embodiment, three ball housing portions 589b are formed at equal intervals in the dispensing blade 589, and the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by 18 degrees as a predetermined angle according to the step driving, Through the driving gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the dispensing gear 588a of the dispensing gear member 588, the dispensing blade 589 rotates by 6.75 degrees (that is, the rotation axis of the dispensing motor 584 is 1). The payout blade 589 rotates 6.75 degrees when the step is rotated (rotated by 18 degrees), so that the payout blade 589 can send out one ball of the game ball B every 120 degrees rotation. In order to rotate the blade 589 by 120 degrees, it is necessary to rotate the rotation axis of the dispensing motor 584 by 17.777... Step rotation (= 120 degrees ÷ 6.75 degrees). Thus, in the present embodiment, the payout blade 589 sets the 18-step rotation, which is an integer rounded up to the decimal point, to the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589. By rotating 589 over 120 degrees (actually, rotating 121.5 degrees (= 18 step rotations × 6.75 degrees)), the rotation position of the payout blade 589 reaches the position where the next game ball B is received. Can be rotated.

  The payout blade 589 can pay out three game balls B each time it makes one rotation (360 degree rotation), but sometimes pays out only one game ball B. For example, tobacco dust or dust For example, the rotation position of the payout blade 589 may be erroneously detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 590. Therefore, each time one game ball B is paid out, the process of setting the origin of the rotational position of the payout blade 589 is performed. Is preferred. In the present embodiment, as described above, the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589 is 18 step rotation, which is an integer rounded up to the decimal point, as described above. The payout blade 589 is rotated beyond 120 ° (actually, 121.5 ° rotation (= 18 step rotation × 6.75 °)), and the payout blade 589 pays out each time one game ball B is paid out. The process of setting the origin of the rotation position of the blade 589 is performed to improve the accuracy of the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589.

  In addition, the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout blade 589 is not an integer as described above, so that each time one game ball is paid out. Even if errors accumulate, the rotation angle of the dispensing blade 589 is detected by a plurality of detecting pieces 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the dispensing blade 589, so that one game ball can be detected. Each time a payout is made, the accumulated error can be reset. Thereby, even if an error occurs every time one game ball is dispensed due to the influence of cigarette dust or dust, the accumulated error can be reliably reset every time one game ball is dispensed. I can do it. Therefore, it is possible to reduce an error in the rotational position of the payout blade 589 that receives and sends out the game ball.

  In addition, the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout blade 589 is not an integer as described above, so that each time one game ball is paid out. The positioning position is different every time. Thus, the positions where the game balls and the payout blades 589 contact each time are different each time, so that the adhesion positions of the dust and the dust can be dispersed. Also, if the speed reduction ratio of the rotation transmitting member is set to cause such a positioning error, the error accumulates. However, even if the error accumulates every time one game ball is paid out, the rotation angle of the payout blade 589 becomes larger. The detection is performed by the plurality of detecting pieces 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 shown in FIG. 105 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the dispensing blade 589, and is reset when the accumulated error accumulates to some extent. Thereby, the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out is secured. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, by changing the rotation position of the ball feed rotation unit that receives and sends out the game balls every time the game balls are paid out, the position where the dust and the dust are attached is dispersed, so that the ball and the dust are dispersed. On the other hand, a strong payout device 580 can be provided. Note that the payout device 580 has one payout passage 580a as described above. Therefore, when the payout speed of the game balls is the same as compared with the payout device having the payout blades in the two payout passages, the payout blade 589 of the payout device 580 having the single payout passage 580a in the present embodiment. Needs to rotate twice as fast. Then, the payout blade 589 of the payout device 580 having one payout passage 580a in the present embodiment collides with the game ball and the payout blade 589 as compared with the payout device having payout blades in the two payout passages. Since the number of times is doubled, there is a high probability that tobacco tar and dust will adhere to the dispensing blade 589.

  In the present embodiment, when the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is rotated by 54 steps, as described above, the payout blade 589 exceeds one rotation. When the control for determining and managing the set is performed, the angular difference of 4.5 degrees is generated with respect to one rotation of the discharge blade 589 every time the rotation shaft of the discharge motor 584 rotates 54 steps. In this case, the angle difference eventually builds up to 360 degrees (= 4.5 degrees × 80 sets), and the number of balls to pay out the game balls B increases by three.

  As described above, the payout gear member 588 is provided with three flat detecting pieces 588b extending outward at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. Specifically, three 120-degree regions having a 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b is formed and a 60-degree region where the detection piece 588b is not formed are arranged along the circumferential direction. . As described above, the detection piece 588b is detected by the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is input to the payout control board 633.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the payout control board 633 rotates the payout blade 589 that rotates integrally with the payout gear member 588 so that the above-described angle difference does not occur. By setting a 120-degree area having a 60-degree area where the detection piece 588b is formed and a 60-degree area where the detection piece 588b is not formed as one management range, one game ball B can be used. It can be managed as a payout operation.

  Specifically, first, of the 120-degree area in the circumferential direction of the payout gear member 588, the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 in the 60-degree area where the detection piece 588b is formed. In this state, the light-shielding range corresponds to nine-step rotation of the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 (corresponding to 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees × 9 steps) rotation of the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588). The area of 60 degrees where the detection piece 588b is not formed is a state where the detection piece 588b does not block the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, so that the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is set as a light receiving range by 9 steps. (Corresponding to 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees × 9 steps) of rotation of the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588).

  In other words, in the present embodiment, the area of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction of the dispensing gear member 588 is set as a light-shielding area of the area of 60 degrees where the detecting piece 588b is formed, and the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by 9 steps. The area of 60 degrees where the piece 588b is not formed is set as a light receiving range and controlled by 18 step rotations including the 9 step rotation of the rotation axis of the payout motor 584, and the payout of one game ball B is performed. The rotation is performed by rotating the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 by 18 steps.

  When the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates nine steps, the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 rotates 60.75 degrees (= 6.75 degrees × 9 steps). And the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 can be rotated slightly larger than the light receiving range of 60 degrees, so that a 60-degree area (light-shielding range) where the detecting piece 588b is formed, A 60-degree area (light receiving range) where the detection piece 588b is not formed can be reliably determined.

  Here, a method of setting the origin of the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 will be described with reference to FIG. As shown in FIG. 107 (a), the payout control board 633 is in a state where the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 has transitioned the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 from the blocking state to the non-blocking state (“the first edge”). The rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 is set as the point A. At this point A, the movement of the game ball B in the payout passage 580a to the downstream side from the payout blade 589 is restricted by the blade piece 589a of the payout blade 589.

  The dispensing control board 633 sets the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 obtained by rotating the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 by five steps from the point A as the origin as shown in FIG. 107 (b). At this origin, only one game ball B in the payout passage 580a is housed in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589. In this state, the center (center of gravity) of the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589 are arranged on the same vertical line.

  The dispensing control board 633 sets the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 obtained by rotating the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 by four steps from the origin as the point B. At this point B, the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588 transitions from the non-blocking state to the blocking state of the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 (referred to as a "second edge detection state"). As shown in FIG. 107 (d), in a region where the rotation position of the discharge blade 589 that rotates integrally with the discharge gear member 588 rotates from the point A to the origin and the point B, as shown in FIG. Of the 120-degree area in the circumferential direction of the member 588, a 60-degree area where the detection piece 588b is not formed).

  The dispensing control board 633 sets the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 obtained by rotating the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 by nine steps from the point B as the point A again. At this time, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 at the origin is moved to the downstream side of the payout blade 589 in the payout passage 580a. As shown in FIG. 107 (d), in a region where the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 that rotates integrally with the dispensing gear member 588 rotates from the point B to the point A, as shown in FIG. (A 60-degree area where the detection piece 588b is formed).

  Here, the control of the payout device 580 by the payout control board 633 will be briefly described. The payout control board 633 executes the payout control-side power-on process when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when the power is restored after a power failure (a momentary power failure that occurs momentarily). When performing the initial setting process and the interrupt start setting in the payout control-side power-on process, the payout control board 633 repeatedly executes the regular process. The payout control board 633 generates an interrupt every 2 milliseconds (ms) after the interrupt start setting, and executes the payout control side 2 ms interrupt processing. The payout control board 633 repeatedly performs various processes such as a payout motor control process, a history creation process, and an origin setting process in the payout control side 2 ms interrupt process.

  The payout control board 633 excites the payout motor 584 by performing 2-2 phase excitation with a pulse width of 4 ms by repeatedly executing the payout motor control processing. The payout control board 633 checks the presence or absence of the input of the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 every 2 ms by repeatedly executing the history creation processing. The dispensing control board 633 controls the excitation of the dispensing motor 584 by the 2-2 phase excitation every 4 ms, that is, based on the detection signals from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 confirmed this time and the previous time, respectively. The result of confirming whether the detection piece 588b is in the state of blocking or not blocking the optical axis is determined from the least significant bit of the history information having an 8-bit width from the least significant bit. After shifting one bit at a time toward the bit, if the result of confirmation of the current and previous times indicates that the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the value 0 is set to the least significant bit. On the other hand, when both the current and previous confirmation results indicate that the detection piece 588b does not block the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, or When the result of confirmation is different from the time (for example, one of the confirmation results of the current time and the previous time is a time when the detection piece 588b blocks the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and the other is the result of the blade rotation detection sensor When the detecting piece 588b does not block the optical axis 590), the value 1 is set to the least significant bit.

  As described above, in the history creation processing, the payout control board 633 updates and generates history information having an 8-bit width every 4 ms when the excitation of the payout motor 584 by the 2-2 phase excitation is switched. The payout control board 633 executes an origin setting process of setting the rotational position of the payout blade 589 to the origin based on the history information updated and created every 4 ms. The dispensing control board 633 repeatedly executes the dispensing motor control processing to rotate the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 by five steps from the state where the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 is located at the point A, as described above. Since the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 becomes the origin, the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is located in a 60-degree area where the above-described detection piece 588b is not formed, and the optical axis of the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is detected. 588b is in a non-blocking state.

  Then, in the information from the most significant bit to the least significant bit stored and held in the history information having an 8-bit width, the detection piece 588b is provided by the blade rotation detection sensor 590 immediately before the rotation position of the discharge blade 589 is located at the point A. 0000001B ("B" indicates bit information; the same applies hereinafter) is set because the optical axis has transitioned from the blocking state to the non-blocking state (first edge detection state). . When the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 advances from the point A to the origin, since 00111111B is set in the information from the most significant bit to the least significant bit stored in the history information having an 8-bit width, In the origin setting process, the payout control board 633 performs the first masking process on the history information with the first determination value of 11110000B, thereby extracting data from eight times to five times before from the history information as a calculation result. Later (here, the calculation result becomes 00110000B by the first masking process), and the second determination value of 00010000B is further subjected to the second masking process on the extracted data, thereby obtaining the data five times before the history information. The data is taken out as the operation result (here, the operation result is 00010000 by the second mask process). If the value is 0, it is determined that the current rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is not at the origin, and the current rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is not set as the origin. It is determined that the current rotation position of the blade 589 is at the origin, and the current rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 is set as the origin.

  Note that, in the origin setting processing, when the rotation position of the ejection blade 589 is set as the origin in the origin setting processing, the ejection control board 633 rotates the rotation shaft of the ejection motor 584 by five steps from the state where the rotation position of the ejection blade 589 is located at the origin. Then, the rotation position of the discharge blade 589 is set to the point B, and the rotation shaft of the discharge motor 584 is rotated nine steps from the state where the rotation position of the discharge blade 589 is located at the point B (that is, the rotation shaft exceeds the light shielding range). This process is completed again in a total of 13 step rotations in which the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 is set to the point A again. In other words, in the present embodiment, when the payout control board 633 sets the rotational position of the payout blade 589 as the origin in the origin setting process, the payout control board 633 waits until the time required to rotate the rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 for a total of 13 steps elapses. An origin detection prohibition time is provided to prohibit the origin setting for the dispensing blade 589.

  The payout control board 633 executes the payout motor control processing to switch the excitation of the payout motor 584 by the 2-2 phase excitation every 4 ms. As shown in FIG. 107, the dispensing control board 633 rotates the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 by five steps from the state where the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is located at the point A, and determines the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 as the origin. Is 20 ms (= 4 ms × 5 step rotation), and the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by 5 steps from the state where the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 is located at the origin to change the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 to B. The time taken as a point is 16 ms (= 4 ms × 4 step rotation), and the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is rotated 9 steps from the state where the rotation position of the discharge blade 589 is located at the point B (that is, the light-shielding range is changed). The time when the rotational position of the dispensing blade 589 is again set to the point A is 36 ms (= 4 ms × 9 step rotation). As described above, the payout of one game ball B is performed by the 18-step rotation of the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584. Since the rotation is performed by 18 steps of rotation of the rotating shaft of the motor 584, the time is 72 ms (= 4 ms × 18 steps).

  Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine including a payout device that pays out a number of game balls according to the rotation amount of a payout rotating body that receives and sends out game balls by driving a payout motor (for example, JP-A-2004-041261 (paragraph [0052] and FIG. 4). In the gaming machine of this document, the rotation time of one step of the payout motor is set to 18 mS, and the payout motor is set to rotate 30 degrees and pay out one game ball by outputting data drive data for four steps. ing. In pachinko machines installed in pachinko parlors, it is inevitable that tobacco tar, dust and the like adhering to the game balls adhere to the inside of the payout device. In addition, since the dispensing device is not disassembled and cleaned, a dispensing device that is resistant to cigarette dust and dust is required. By the way, in the gaming machine of this document, the payout motor is set to rotate 30 degrees and pay out one game ball by driving the payout motor for four steps. It can be seen that the contact position between the ball and the payout rotating body is the same every time. For this reason, there has been a problem that the positions where tobacco dust and dust adhere are fixed and are easily deposited.

[4-7-2c. Ball clogging prevention and ball dropout prevention]
Next, prevention of ball clogging and ball dropout will be described with reference to FIG. Here, first, prevention of ball clogging at the time of ball removal will be described, and subsequently, prevention of ball dropout due to a non-energized state of the payout motor 584 will be described.

  As described above, by positioning the ball removal lever 593 at the rising end, the ball removal movable piece 592 can be rotated to the outside of the ball removal passage 580b, and the ball removal passage 580b can be opened. I can do it. When removing the ball, the ball removal lever 593 is raised to bring the ball removal movable piece 592 into a rotatable state. At this time, when the rotation position of the discharge blade 589 is stopped at the origin, as shown in FIG. 108 (a), a part of the inner wall of the passage forming the discharge passage 580a from the ball housing portion 589b of the discharge blade 589. In this state, a total of four game balls B are parked over a rib-shaped ball blocking prevention portion 581r which has a predetermined distance dimension and protrudes toward the ball ejection passage 580b. As the predetermined distance dimension, the center (center of gravity) position of the game ball B stopped on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r is on the right side of the left end side of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r and on the downstream side (that is, the payout blade 589 exists). (The downstream side of the discharge passage 580a). As a result, a part of the inner wall of the passage forming the dispensing passage 580a has a predetermined distance dimension from the ball accommodating portion 589b of the dispensing blade 589, and the rib-shaped ball clogging preventing portion protrudes toward the ball discharge passage 580b. When a plurality of game balls B stop in the payout passage 580a up to 581r, a part of the last game ball B to be stopped protrudes toward the ball removal passage 580b in the ball blocking prevention part 581r. That is, the predetermined distance dimension is formed so as to constitute the side wall of the ball passage 580b when the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) is parked on the upper surface of the ball blocking prevention portion 581r. The above-mentioned game ball B flowing down along the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear lid side guide wall 582a collides with the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) which is parked on the upper surface of the ball blocking prevention portion 581r. In this case, the length is such that it can flow down to the ball extraction passage 580b. As described above, by stopping the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) on the upper surface of the ball blocking prevention unit 581r in a state where a part thereof protrudes toward the ball removal passage 580b (in other words, the ball blocking prevention). (The length of a portion of the game ball B parked on the upper surface of the portion 581r protrudes toward the ball passage 580b), and the width of the ball passage 580b is limited to a width that allows one ball B to flow down. You can do it.

  In addition, as described above, the ball clogging prevention portion 581r has the upper surface and the inner wall surface of the passage forming the payout passage 580a formed in the same plane, and has a downward-sloping right inclined surface in rear view.

  That is, in the case where the ball is to be removed while the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) is parked on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r, the game ball B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a. However, even if the ball collides with the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stopped on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r, the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r has a downward-sloping right inclined surface in rear view. The center (center of gravity) of the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stopped on the upper surface of the ball blocking prevention unit 581r is located on the right side and downstream of the left end side of the ball blocking prevention unit 581r. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) stopped on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r from being hit by the collision and flowing down to the ball removal passage 580b. Be able to Going on. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game balls B flowing down from the upstream of the payout passage 580a from being clogged near the left end of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r.

  As a result, the game ball B (that is, the last game ball B) parked on the upper surface of the ball clogging prevention portion 581r is moved along the ball removal path (the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover side guide wall 582a). The downward flow path of the game ball B on the side (flow path to the side) is restricted to the width of one ball of the game ball B as the width of the ball passage 580b as shown by the one-dot chain line in FIG. 108 (a). This can prevent ball clogging. Therefore, clogging of a ball at the time of ball removal can be reliably prevented. In the present embodiment, the width of the ball ejection path 580b is set to be from the minimum width: 12 mm to the maximum width: 14 mm, although the width varies depending on the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589. It is set to 13 mm when the position is stopped at the origin. Incidentally, ball clogging is likely to occur in a place where the width of each passage is narrowed from a place wider than twice the diameter of the game ball (11 mm) to slightly smaller than twice the diameter of the game ball (for example, 21 mm).

  Next, prevention of a ball dropout due to a non-energized state of the payout motor 584 will be described. In the state where the rotation position of the dispensing blade 589 is stopped at the origin, as shown in FIG. 108A, only one game ball B in the dispensing passage 580a is accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the dispensing blade 589. At the same time, the game ball B is connected to the game ball B, and the subsequent game ball B abuts on the payout passage 580a in a state of contact with the game ball B. In this state, as described above, the center (center of gravity) of the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 and the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589 are arranged on the same vertical line. Further, as described above, the payout passage 580a extends obliquely downward from the upper side by about ３ of the total height so as to gradually move leftward from the upstream end to the lower side, and slightly rightward therefrom. After being bent obliquely downward, it is bent at about 1/3 of the left and right width, and extends substantially vertically downward toward the center (rotation axis) of the dispensing blade 589.

  For this reason, the center (center of gravity) position of the game ball B abutting on the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 is set at the center (the center of the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589). (Center of gravity) position and slightly shifted to the left side of the position. When the rotation position of the payout blade 589 is stopped at the origin, the game ball B accommodated in the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589 follows. A rightward force (that is, a clockwise rotation force) acts on the rotation center axis of the payout blade 589 due to the ball pressure of the game ball B due to its own weight.

  In this state, when the dispensing motor 584 is de-energized, the dispensing blade 589 naturally rotates clockwise with respect to the rotation center axis of the dispensing blade 589, and is accommodated in the ball housing portion 589b of the dispensing blade 589. The game ball B flows down (is sent out) to the downstream side of the payout passage 580a, so that a ball dropout occurs.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the dispensing motor 584 is in a non-energized state, the rotation axis of the dispensing motor 584 is rotated by the dispensing blade 589 even if it naturally rotates clockwise with respect to the rotation center axis of the dispensing blade 589. The shape of the dispensing passage 580a on the right side of the dispensing blade 589 in rear view is formed so that the dispensing can be stopped by six steps of rotation from the origin.

  Specifically, as shown in FIGS. 108 (b) and (c), when the dispensing motor 584 is de-energized, the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates six steps from the origin of the dispensing blade 589 and stops. , The game ball B contacting the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the dispensing blade 589, the point S1 contacting the side wall of the dispensing passage 580a, and the outer periphery of the dispensing blade 589 having the arc-shaped blade piece 589a. Of the surface is closer to the ball housing portion 589b in which the game ball B is housed (that is, the ball housing portion 589b in which the game ball B is housed, and the ball housing portion in which the game ball B subsequent to the ball housing portion 589b is not housed) Part 589b and the S2 point of the outer peripheral surface of the blade piece 589a connecting the ball 589a to the ball housing portion 589b side where the game ball B is housed from the center of the outer circumferential surface. It is formed the shape of sea urchin dispensing passage 580a. As a result, a ball pressure can be generated that presses the outer peripheral surface of the blade piece 589a of the dispensing blade 589, and the rotating shaft of the dispensing motor 584 can be rotated six steps from the origin of the dispensing blade 589 and stopped. Therefore, it is possible to reliably prevent the ball from slipping out due to the non-energized state of the payout motor 584.

  In the case where the payout control board 633 starts controlling the payout motor 584 in a state where the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 rotates six steps from the origin of the payout blade 589 and stops, the payout blade 589 rotates six steps from the origin of the payout blade 589. As shown in FIG. 107 (d), the state is advanced by rotating two steps in the light-shielding range (9 steps) beyond point B, which has been rotated four steps from the origin, as shown in FIG. 107 (d). However, when the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 rotates 13 steps (as shown in FIG. 107 (d), the rotation proceeds two steps out of the nine steps and proceeds by the remaining seven steps + the fifth step from the point A), the dispensing blade 589 Is the origin, the game ball B accommodated in the ball accommodating portion 589b of the payout blade 589 flows down (is sent out) to the downstream side of the payout passage 580a, and the payout is performed. It is adapted to be reliably detected by the detection sensor 591. Therefore, even when the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is shifted from the origin of the payout blade 589 (rotated and advanced by six steps) and stopped, an excessive number of balls to be paid out of the game balls B does not occur.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the payout control board 633 responds to the pressing operation of the ball lending button 224 of the ball lending operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 or the payout command from the main control board of the game board 5 or the like. In response, the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is controlled to pay out the designated number of game balls B to the player side (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202). At the time of power recovery at the time of power recovery after (a momentary power failure that occurs momentarily), the payout motor 584 is not controlled to return the rotational position of the payout blade 589 to the origin. As described above, when the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 is shifted from the origin of the payout blade 589 (rotates by 6 steps and stops), the number of balls to be paid out is increased. This is to prevent that.

[4-7-3. Upper full tank path unit]
The upper full tank path unit 600 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The upper full tank path unit 600 is attached to the payout base unit 550 from the rear below the payout device 580 at the lower rear surface of the left back portion 551e of the payout base 551. The upper full tank path unit 600 is for guiding the game ball B discharged downward from the payout device 580 to the lower full tank path unit 610. The upper full spherical path unit 600 is formed in a square shape whose front view is vertically extended.

  An upper full tank path unit 600 is attached to the payout base 551 and has a box-shaped upper full tank base 601 with an open rear side, and a box-shaped mount attached to the rear side of the upper full tank base 601 and has an open front. And a dispensing device pressing member 603 rotatably mounted near the upper end of the upper full cover 602 and capable of pressing the dispensing device 580 upward. The upper full tank base 601 protrudes rightward from the right side in a front view, and includes a back cover attaching portion 601a for attaching a back cover.

  The upper full tank path unit 600 opens upward near the left end in the front view on the upper surface, and extends downward along the left side from the bottom to a height of about ／ of the total height. The ball receiving passage 600a communicates with the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a, and extends rightward as viewed from the front by about 3/4 of the entire width, and extends downward from below to a height of about 1/6 of the total height. An upper sphere storage passage 600b, an upper normal discharge passage 600c extending downward from the left-right center of the upper sphere storage passage 600b in the left-right direction and opening downward at the lower surface, and an upper portion adjacent to the upper normal discharge passage 600c. An upper full tank discharge passage 600d extending downward from the right side in the front view from the center in the left-right direction of the ball storage passage 600b and opening downward at the lower surface, and near the right end of the upper surface in the front view. And a, and upper ball 抜通 passage 600e that opens downward in the lower surface near the right end after extending substantially vertically downwards and opens upwardly (see Figure 110).

  On the lower surface of the upper full tank path unit 600, an upper normal discharge passage 600c, an upper full discharge passage 600d, and an upper ball discharge passage 600e are sequentially opened downward from the left side in a front view. When the upper full ball path unit 600 is assembled to the payout unit 560, the upstream end of the upper payout ball receiving path 600a is opened directly below the downstream end of the payout path 580a in the payout device 580, and The upstream end of the passage 600e opens just below the downstream end of the ball ejection passage 580b in the dispensing device 580. Thus, the game balls B released (paid) from the payout passage 580a of the payout device 580 pass through the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a and the upper ball storage passage 600b, and then the upper normal payout passage 600c or the upper full tank payout passage 600d. Is released downward from any of the. Further, the game balls B discharged downward from the ball discharge passage 580b of the payout device 580 are discharged downward through the upper ball discharge passage 600e.

[4-7-4. Lower full tank path unit]
The lower full tank path unit 610 in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The lower full tank path unit 610 is placed on the bottom plate portion 551g of the payout base 551 of the payout base unit 550, and is attached to the lower part of the upper full tank path unit 600. The lower full ball path unit 610 guides the game balls B discharged downward from the upper full ball path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side. The lower full tank path unit 610 extends in the front-rear direction so that the front end side is lower, and the rear end extends upward.

  The lower full tank path unit 610 includes a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball discharge passage 610c, and extends in the front-rear direction and is open upward. 611, a lower full tank cover 612 mounted on the upper side of the lower full base 611, and a lower normal dispensing passage 610a mounted on the front end of the lower full base 611 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending in the front-rear direction. A discharge passage opening / closing door 613 capable of opening and closing the downstream end opening of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a discharging passage opening / closing door 613 in a direction to close the downstream end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b. And a closing spring 614 that is biased.

  In the lower full tank path unit 610, a lower normal discharge passage 610a, a lower full tank discharge passage 610b, and a lower ball discharge passage 610c are arranged in order from the front left, on the upper surface of a portion extending above the rear end. In this state, each upstream end is open upward. The lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b extend forward in a state where they are arranged side by side, and open forward at the front end of the lower full tank path unit 610. The lower full tank payout passage 610b extends forward in a state slightly lower than the lower normal payout passage 610a. The lower ball passage 610c extends forward along the right side of the lower full tank discharge passage 610b in a front view, and opens rightward in the front-rear direction.

  The payout passage opening / closing door 613 is rotatably mounted at a position between the front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b. The discharge passage opening / closing door 613 is urged in a clockwise direction in a front view by a closing spring 614, and in a normal state, the front end opening (downstream end) of each of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full tank discharge passage 610b. Opening) is closed. The dispensing passage opening / closing door 613 includes an operation protrusion 613a that protrudes forward. The operating projection 613a is formed in a short arc shape centered on the rotation center of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 when viewed from the front, and as the front end face approaches the end side in the counterclockwise direction. It is inclined to protrude forward. The operation protrusion 613 a is formed so as to come into contact with the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3 when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4.

  The lower filled tank path unit 610 is assembled with the dispensing unit 560, and the lower normal dispensing passage 610a, the lower filled tank dispensing passage 610b, and the lower ball emptying passage 610c, which are open upward at the rear upper end, are respectively filled with the upper filled tank. It is located immediately below the downstream ends of the upper normal payout passage 600c, the upper full tank payout passage 600d, and the upper ball discharge passage 600e of the tan ball path unit 600. Thus, the game balls B discharged downward from the upper normal payout passage 600c flow through the lower normal payout passage 610a, and the game balls B discharged downward from the upper full fill payout passage 600d are lower full fill payout passages 610b. , And the game balls B released downward from the upper ball passage 600e flow through the lower ball passage 610c.

  When the lower full tank path unit 610 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the front ends (downstream ends) of the lower normal discharge passage 610 a and the lower full discharge passage 610 b pass through the foul cover unit 150 in the door frame 3. It is open immediately after the ball passage 150a and the full tank receiving port 150b. Further, the downstream end of the lower ball passage 610c is opened so as to face the ball guide portion 627 opened to the left in the base unit 620b of the substrate unit 620.

  In the normal full tank path unit 610, in a normal state (a state in which the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4), the operating protrusion 613 a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 contacts the door opening / closing of the foul cover unit 150. By abutting on the portion 150f, it rotates counterclockwise in front view against the urging force of the closing spring 614. As a result, the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal dispensing passage 610a and the lower full tank dispensing passage 610b are in an open state, and communicate with the through ball passage 150a and the full tank receiving port 150b of the foul cover unit 150. It is in a state.

  On the other hand, when the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the operating projection 613 a of the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is separated from the door opening / closing contact portion 150 f of the foul cover unit 150, and the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is provided. Is rotated clockwise in front view by the urging force of the closing spring 614, and the openings at the downstream ends of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b are closed. In this state, the game balls B in the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b cannot move forward from the respective front end openings. Thereby, even if the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main body frame 4, the game ball B does not spill from the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full fill payout passage 610b.

[4-7-5. Game ball flow in payout unit]
Subsequently, the flow of the game balls B in the payout unit 560 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The dispensing unit 560 is attached to the rear surface of the dispensing base 551 when assembled in the main body frame 4. In a normal state, the ball ejection lever 593 of the dispensing device 580 is located at the lower end, and the ball ejection passage 580b branched from the ejection passage 580a is closed at the branch portion. In the lower full tank path unit 610, the payout passage opening / closing door 613 is in an open state.

  The ball tank 552 that is open upward has a predetermined number based on the detection of the ball being cut by the ball cut detection sensor 574 of the ball guidance unit 570, for example, from the island facility of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed. Of game balls B are supplied. The game balls B supplied and stored in the ball tank 552 are sent into the payout path 580a of the payout device 580 through the guide path 570a of the ball guide unit 570 while being aligned in a row by the tank rail 553. In a state in which the payout motor 584 is not rotating, the game balls B cannot move (flow down) downstream of the payout blades 589, and a plurality of game balls B stay upstream of the payout blades 589. Becomes

  Then, the game ball B in the guiding path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 presses the movable piece member 573, and the ball cutting detection sensor 574 detects the movable piece member 573. Thus, it can be seen that the game balls B are stored in at least the passage from the movable piece member 573 to the payout blade 589.

  In this state, when the payout blade 589 is rotated clockwise in the rear view by the payout motor 584, the game ball B accommodated in the ball housing portion 589b moves clockwise in the rear view, and the payout blade 580a in the payout passage 580a. It is discharged downstream from 589. Then, the game balls B released from the payout blades 589 (ball storage portions 589b) are sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 after being detected by the payout detection sensor 591.

  The game ball B sent to the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a of the upper full tank path unit 600 normally passes through the upper ball storage passage 600b and is disposed immediately below the upper payout ball receiving passage 600a. It flows down to the upper normal dispensing passage 600c. Then, the game ball B flowing down to the upper normal payout passage 600c passes through the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610 and the through ball passage 150a of the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3, and passes through the plate unit 200. Is discharged into the upper plate 201 from the upper plate ball supply port 211a of the plate unit base 211.

  When many game balls B are paid out from the payout device 580 and the inside of the upper plate 201 is filled with the game balls B, it becomes impossible to discharge the game balls B forward from the upper plate ball supply port 211a. The game balls B paid out from the 580 stay in the lower normal payout passage 610a of the lower full tank path unit 610, and when the game balls B are further paid out, the game balls B are upstream from the lower normal payout passage 610a. It also stays in the upper normal payout passage 600c of the upper full tank path unit 600 that is in communication. When the game balls B are further paid out in a state where the inside of the upper normal payout passage 600c is full of the game balls B, the upper normal payout passage 600c enters the upper ball storage passage 600b communicating with the upstream side of the upper normal payout passage 600c. The game balls B start to stay, and the game balls B begin to flow down to the upper full payout passage 600d adjacent to the upper normal payout passage 600c.

  Then, the game ball B that has flowed down to the upper full tank payout path 600d passes through the lower full tank payout path 610b of the lower full tank path unit 610, and the full ball receiving port 150b in the foul cover unit 150 of the door frame 3 Can be received. Thereafter, the game balls B received by the full tank receiving port 150b are discharged into the lower plate 202 through the storage passage 150e, the ball discharge port 150d, and the lower plate ball supply port 211c of the plate unit base 211. Thus, when the game ball B is further paid out in a state where the upper plate 201 is full of the game ball B, the game ball B can be automatically paid out to the lower plate 202.

  When the lower plate 202 is full of the game balls B and the game balls B cannot be discharged forward from the lower plate ball supply port 211c, and the game balls B are further paid out, the lower plate is dispensed. The game balls B are retained and stored in the storage passage 150e of the foul cover unit 150 on the upstream side of the ball supply port 211c. When a certain number of game balls B are stored in the storage passage 150e, the movable piece 153 moves and is detected by the full tank detection sensor 154, and the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 are filled with the game balls B ( The player is notified that the tank is full, and the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 is temporarily stopped until the full tank detection sensor 154 is in a non-detection state.

  When the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 are to be discharged from the pachinko machine 1 during maintenance or replacement of the pachinko machine 1, the ball ejection lever 593 of the payout device 580 is moved upward from the position of the descending end. Slide to the state of the rising end position. Thereafter, the lower end side of the ball-moving movable piece 592 is pushed by the game ball B, and rotates in the clockwise direction as viewed from the rear. , And is pushed out of the ball passage 580b. As a result, the game balls B can enter the ball passage 580b branched from the payout passage 580a, and the game balls B on the upstream side are discharged downward through the ball passage 580b.

  At this time, at the portion of the ball-moving movable piece 592, the flowing game ball B abuts more strongly on the main body side guide wall 581a and the rear cover-side guide wall 582a than the ball-moving movable piece 592. Is hard to break.

  Then, the game ball B discharged downward from the ball empty passage 580b of the payout device 580 passes through the upper ball empty passage 600e of the upper full ball empty path unit 600 and the lower ball empty passage 610c of the lower full ball empty path unit 610. After being discharged from the downstream end opening of the lower ball ejection passage 610c to the ball ejection guiding portion 627 of the substrate unit 620, it passes through the ejection ball receiving portion 628 and the ball ejection port 629 to the rear outside (the game hall) of the pachinko machine 1. To the island facility side).

[4-8. Substrate unit]
The board unit 620 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 111A is a perspective view of the board unit of the main body frame as viewed from the front, and FIG. 111B is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the back. FIG. 112 is a perspective view of the board unit as viewed from the lower rear. FIG. 113 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from the front, and FIG. 114 is an exploded perspective view of the board unit disassembled for each main configuration and viewed from behind. FIG. 115 is an enlarged side sectional view showing the lower portion of the pachinko machine cut at the center in the left-right direction. The board unit 620 is attached to a lower portion of the rear surface of the body frame base unit 500.

  The board unit 620 includes a speaker unit 620a mounted on the rear surface of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 below the game board mounting portion 501c, and a main body frame to cover a part of the speaker unit 620a from behind. A base unit 620b attached to the rear surface of the base 501, a power supply unit 620c attached to the rear side of the base unit 620b, a payout control unit 620d attached to the rear side of the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control unit 620d. And an interface unit 620e attached to the rear surface of the speaker unit 620a so as to partially cover it from behind.

  The speaker unit 620a is mounted on the rear surface of the main frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 at a position lower than the game board placement portion 501c, and forwards near the left end in front view of the rear surface of the speaker cover 621. And a container-shaped speaker box 623 attached to the rear side of the speaker cover 621 so as to cover the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 and opened forward. .

  The speaker cover 621 extends in the left-right direction, penetrates in the front-rear direction near the left end in front view, and has a circular speaker mounting portion 621a formed by a plurality of vertically extending slits, and a front surface of the speaker mounting portion 621a. A space front concave portion 621b that is depressed so as to swell from the rear to the front on the right side of the view, and protrudes downward from the lower surface of the space front concave portion 621b and extends in the left-right direction and diagonally downward toward the rear. And an open connection portion 621c.

  The body frame speaker 622 is attached to the speaker attachment portion 621a of the speaker cover 621 from the rear side toward the front. The connection portion 621c of the speaker cover 621 is inclined at an angle of 45 degrees so that the lower end coincides with the upper end of the connection tube portion 43a of the rear panel member 43 of the outer frame lower assembly 40 of the outer frame 2. . The body frame speaker 622 is a cone-shaped speaker that mainly outputs bass sound.

  The speaker box 623 is formed in a container shape that is opened forward, and a portion on the rear side of the main body frame speaker 622 protrudes most rearward. Is formed so that the protrusion of the boss becomes small. Thus, a sufficient space on the right rear side of the center of the speaker box 623 when viewed from the front can be sufficiently secured, and the base unit 620b, the power supply unit 620c, and the like can be arranged. The speaker box 623 is formed so as to cover (close) the entire rear surface of the speaker cover 621 except for the connection portion 621c.

  The speaker unit 620a includes the speaker cover 621 and the speaker box 623, and forms a part of the enclosure 624 that contains the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear. In the enclosure 624, the front recess 621b for the space bulging forward is formed on the right side of the speaker mounting portion 621a in the speaker cover 621 when viewed from the front. Even if it is formed in a step shape so as to reduce the amount, the space to the right of the main frame speaker 622 is sufficiently widened.

  When the main unit frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the speaker unit 620 a is connected to the connection tube portion 43 a so as to sandwich the seal member 48 between the connection portion 621 c of the speaker cover 621, and the rear of the main frame speaker 622. And the inner space 40a of the outer frame 2 communicate with each other. Therefore, an enclosure 624 of a wide space can be formed by the speaker cover 621, the speaker box 623, the front panel 42, and the rear panel 43 on the rear side of the main frame speaker 622, and the rear of the main frame speaker 622. Can be output (radiated) forward from the opening 42a of the front panel 42 of the curtain plate.

  More specifically, as described above, in the speaker unit 620a, the space behind the body frame speaker 622 (a part of the enclosure 624) is extended to a relatively large depth to the right in front view, and the connection unit 621c and Since it is communicated with the outer frame lower assembly 40 via the connection cylinder portion 43a, the sound output from the main frame speaker 622 to the rear is not attenuated particularly in the low frequency range, and the outer frame lower assembly 40 is not attenuated. In addition to being transmitted to the side, the transmitted bass range can be resonated and amplified by passing through the two port members 47 and radiated forward from the opening 42 a of the front panel 42.

  At this time, the sound radiated forward from the opening 42a of the front panel member 42 is radiated in a state where the phase is inverted. The sound radiated from the speaker opening 211b of the speaker 200 resonates so as to amplify the sound, so that a large sound with heavy bass can be output even if the aperture of the main frame speaker 622 is small.

  That is, in the present embodiment, the enclosure 624 of the main frame speaker 622 is of a bass reflex type, so that the player can hear heavy bass. Thus, a sound output from the front of the main frame speaker 622 and emitted from the speaker opening 211b of the plate unit 200 and a sound output from the rear surface of the main frame speaker 622 and emitted from the grill member 46 of the outer frame 2 are obtained. This allows the player to hear a sound having rich bass.

  In the speaker unit 620a, a through hole 621d penetrating in the front-rear direction at a position between the lower portion of the speaker mounting portion 621a and the front recess 621b for space is formed in the speaker cover 621, and the speaker box 623 is formed. In addition, a through-tube 623a which extends in a tubular shape in communication with the through-hole 621d and penetrates forward and backward is formed. When assembled to the speaker unit 620a, the through-hole 621d and the through-tube 623a communicate with each other and become independent of the enclosure 624. The connection cable 503 is inserted into the through-hole 621d and the through-tube 623a.

  The base unit 620b of the board unit 620 includes a front base 625 attached to the rear surface of the body frame base 501 so as to cover part of the speaker box 623 from the rear, and a power supply unit attached to the rear side of the front base 625. And a rear base 626 to which the 620c is attached.

  Further, the base unit 620b is formed in cooperation with the front base 625 and the rear base 626, receives the game ball B discharged from the lower ball passage 610c of the lower full-ball path unit 610, and is viewed from the front. A ball-pulling guiding unit 627 that guides the ball to the right, and a discharge ball receiving unit that opens upward on the right side when viewed from the front downstream of the ball-pulling guiding unit 627 and receives game balls B discharged downward from the game board 5. 628, and a ball discharge port 629 for discharging the game ball B having passed through the ball guiding unit 627 and the discharged ball receiving unit 628 downward.

  The ball-pulling guide portion 627 has an upstream end opening leftward at an upper portion of a left side in a front view, and a downstream end opening leftward of the discharged ball receiving portion 628. In a state in which the ball guide unit 627 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the opening at the upstream end is opposed to the downstream end opening of the lower ball discharge passage 610 c of the lower full tank path unit 610, and the lower end guide portion 627 has the lower end. The game ball B released from the ball passage 610c can be received and guided to the discharged ball receiving portion 628.

  The ejection ball receiving portion 628 is open upward and extends left and right. The bottom surface of the ejected ball receiving portion 628 has a left end in front view continuous with the bottom surface of the ball extraction guide portion 627, and is inclined so as to become lower toward the right.

  The base unit 620b guides the game ball B pulled out from the ball tank 552 or the game ball B discharged from the game board 5 to the right in a front view by a ball pull-out guiding unit 627 or a discharged ball receiving unit 628, and Since the air is discharged downward from the discharge port 629, it is easy to secure a wide space on the left side from the center in the left-right direction when viewed from the front. Thereby, the space of the enclosure 624 of the speaker unit 620a can be widened, and the player can hear a sound having a richer bass than a conventional pachinko machine.

  The power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630 mounted on the rear side of the rear base 626 of the base unit 620b and a power supply board cover mounted on the rear base 626 so as to cover the rear side of the power supply board 630. 631. The power supply board cover 631 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin so that the power supply board 630 can be viewed through the power supply board cover 631 without removing the power supply board cover 631 from the rear base 626. I have. A transformer (not shown) is provided in the island facility of the game hall, and reduces a commercial power supply voltage of AC 100 volts (AC 100 V) to a game machine power supply voltage of AC 24 volts (AC 24 V). 24V AC which is stepped down in the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power supply board 630 via a power cord (not shown). The power supply board 630 generates various power supplies (various DC voltages such as DC +35 V, DC +12 V, DC +5 V, etc.) from 24 V AC supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and supplies them to various boards. The power supply board 630 must be supplied with a power supply voltage of 24 VAC for a gaming machine. However, there is a possibility that a commercial power supply voltage of 100 VAC is supplied due to incorrect connection of a power cord (not shown), and the power supply board 630 is broken. Thus, in the present embodiment, the power supply unit 620c is configured to be exchangeable using a Phillips screwdriver, which is a general tool (note that the power supply unit 620c is fastened without using a general tool such as a Phillips screwdriver). It can also be configured so that the tool can be manually attached and detached).

  The payout control unit 620d includes a box-shaped payout control board box 632 that is detachably attached to the rear side of the power supply board cover 631 in the power supply unit 620c, and a payout control board 633 (see FIG. 115). The payout control board 633 controls the payout motor 584 of the payout device 580 in response to a pressing operation of the ball rental button 224 of the ball rental operation unit 220 in the plate unit 200 or a payout command from the main control board or the like of the game board 5. Then, the designated number of game balls B are paid out to the player (upper plate 201 or lower plate 202).

  The payout control board box 632 includes a cover (not shown) and a base (not shown). The cover body and the beta body are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded transparently. The payout control board 633 can be accommodated in the internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the beta body are transparently molded from a polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the payout control board 633 (whether or not an unauthorized modification has been made or an unauthorized IC is mounted) Can be checked from outside the payout control board box 632. The dispensing control board box 632 has a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the beta body, respectively. When the dispensing control board box 632 is closed using one sealing mechanism, In order to open the control board box 632, it is necessary to destroy the sealing mechanism, and a trace of opening and closing of the payout control board box 632 can be left. Therefore, by looking at the traces of the opening and closing, it is possible to detect the illegal opening and closing of the payout control board box 632, and the deterrent to the payout control board box 632 against improper actions is enhanced.

  The interface unit 620e covers the rear side of the speaker box 623 in the speaker unit 620a, the interface board 635 mounted on the rear face of the board base 634, and the rear side of the interface board 635. And an interface board cover 636 attached to the board base 634.

  The board base 634 is attached to the rearmost surface of the speaker box 623, which is the rearmost part of the main frame speaker 622, and most protrudes rearward. The interface board 635 is connected to one end of the connection cable 503 (the body frame 4 side). The interface board 635 is connected to a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, a main control board, a peripheral control board, and the like, and is also connected to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. The interface board cover 636 extends to the right of the board base 634 (interface board 635) in front view so as to cover a part of the payout control unit 620d.

[4-9. Back cover]
The back cover 640 of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The back cover 640 covers the rear side of the game board 5 which is inserted from the front into the game board insertion opening 501b of the main body frame base 501 of the main body frame base unit 500 and attached thereto. The back cover 640 has a right side in front view attached to a vertically extending rear end of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 so as to be rotatable around an axis extending vertically, and a left side thereof is a payout base 551. And the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full tank path unit 600. When the left side of the back cover 640 is mounted on the back cover mounting portion 551i of the payout base 551 and the back cover mounting portion 601a of the upper full-bottle path unit 600, it is formed on the upper side of the back cover 640.

  The back cover 640 is formed in such a shape that the right side in a front view of a flat plate extending up, down, left, and right is bent forward, and a contact portion 640a that is lowered forward by one step is formed on the upper side. When assembled to the frame 4, the rear surface is formed so as to be located substantially on the same plane as the rear surface of the upper back plate 551 d of the payout base 551 (the rear surface of the eave portion 551 da formed on the above-described upper back plate 551 d). I have. When the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a comes into contact with the rear surface of the upper back plate 551 d of the payout base 551, and the contact portion is , And are covered with an eaves portion 551da protruding from the upper portion 551d of the back plate.

  Except for the contact portion 640a, the back cover 640 is formed with a plurality of slits 641 that penetrate back and forth and extend vertically. In the present embodiment, the back cover 640 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin, and the inside of the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear side of the pachinko machine 1.

[4-10. Locking unit]
The locking unit 650 in the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 116 (a) is a perspective view of the locking unit of the main frame viewed from the front, and FIG. 116 (b) is a perspective view of the locking unit viewed from the back. The locking unit 650 is attached to the body frame base 501 of the body frame 4 and locks between the body frame 4 and the door frame 3 and between the body frame 4 and the outer frame 2.

  The locking unit 650 includes a unit base 651 attached to the right side surface of the rear extension portion 501j of the main body frame base 501 and extending vertically, and a plurality of locking units 650 protruding forward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the door frame 3. A door frame hook 652, a plurality of outer frame hooks 653 projecting rearward from the unit base 651 and capable of engaging with the outer frame 2, and projecting forward from a lower front end of the unit base 651, and depending on the rotation direction, the door frame. And a transmission cylinder 654 that moves the hook 652 or the outer frame hook 653 in the vertical direction.

  Further, the locking unit 650 urges the door frame hook 652 downward and the outer frame hook 653 upward, and the transmission cylinder 654 at the front end of the unit base 651. An outer frame unlocking lever 656 that protrudes forward from an upper position and slides downward to move the outer frame hook 653 downward.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the plurality of (three) door frame hooks 652, the transmission cylinders 654, and the outer frame unlocking lever 656 move forward from the front surface of the main body frame base 501. It is protruding. The transmission cylinder 654 protrudes forward through the cylinder insertion opening 501 f of the main body frame base 501, and closes the door frame 3 with respect to the main body frame 4 so that the front end rotates the cylinder lock 130 of the door frame 3. The rotation of the key inserted into the keyhole 132 is transmitted by being engaged with the transmission member 133 and rotated.

  In the locking unit 650, a plurality (three) of door frame hooks 652 are locked to the hooking members 116 of the door frame reinforcing unit 110 in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3, and a plurality (two) of outside members are provided. The frame hook 653 is locked to the upper hook member 24 and the lower hook member 25 of the outer frame right assembly 20 of the outer frame 2.

  When the locking unit 650 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1 and the key corresponding to the key hole 132 of the cylinder lock 130 is inserted and rotated counterclockwise in front view, a plurality of The door frame hook 652 moves upward, and the door frame 3 is unlocked with respect to the main body frame 4. On the other hand, when the key is rotated clockwise in a front view, the plurality of outer frame hooks 653 move downward via the transmission cylinder 654, and the main frame 4 is unlocked with respect to the outer frame 2. In a state where the door frame 3 is opened with respect to the main frame 4, when the unlocking lever 656 for the outer frame is slid downward, the plurality of hooks 653 for the outer frame move downward, and the outer frame 2 is moved relative to the main frame 4. 4 is unlocked. In this way, the lock between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2 can be unlocked.

  When locking between the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 or between the main body frame 4 and the outer frame 2, the tip ends of the door frame hooks 652 and the outer frame hooks 653 are inclined so as to be thin. Therefore, when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4 or the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the hook 652 for the door frame and the hook 653 for the outer frame become the hook member 116 and the upper hook member. After moving downward and upward so as to get over the lower hooking member 24 and the lower hooking member 25, the lock state is established by the urging force of the lock spring 655.

[4-11. Detailed Configuration of Upper Body Frame]
Next, a detailed configuration of the upper portion of the main body frame 4 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 117A is a plan view of the main body frame, and FIG. 117B is a cross-sectional view taken along line BB in FIG. FIG. 118 is an enlarged view showing an upper portion in an enlarged manner in a perspective view of the main body frame as viewed from behind. FIG. 119 (a) is a perspective view seen from the upper front in a state where the tank rail and the like are assembled to the ball tank, and FIG. 119 (b) is a perspective view seen from the lower front in (a). FIG. 120 is an exploded perspective view of FIG. FIG. 121 is an explanatory diagram showing an area in the upper part of the main body frame where game balls overflowing from the ball tank circulate. FIG. 122 is an explanatory diagram showing the flow of game balls overflowing from the ball tank in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 123 is an explanatory diagram showing a flow of game balls to a detour passage in the upper part of the main body frame. FIG. 124 is an enlarged view showing the vicinity of the tank rail in a perspective view of the main body frame viewed from behind the hinge side.

  As described above, the main body frame 4 has a rear portion that can be inserted into the frame of the outer frame 2 and is detachably attached to the outer frame 2 by the upper body frame hinge member 510 and the lower body frame hinge assembly 520. A frame-shaped body frame base 501 rotatably mounted and capable of supporting the outer periphery of the game board 5, and an inverted L-shaped body mounted along the upper side and the left side of the rear side of the body frame base 501 in front view. A dispensing base 551, a ball tank 552 attached to the dispensing base 551 and extending upward and downward in a box-like (container) shape extending left and right, and attached to the left side of the ball tank 552 and opened upward. A tank rail 553 extending to the left in a groove shape, a first rail cover 554 attached to a part of the upper end of the tank rail 553, and a tank rail 553 separated from the first rail cover 554 to the left in front view. A second rail cover 555 attached to an upper end of the clair 553, a ball rectifying member 556 attached to an upper end of the tank rail 553 at a position between the first rail cover 554 and the second rail cover 555, and a tank rail. A ball stop member 557 attached to the downstream end of 553; a payout device 580 attached to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 behind the payout base 551 to pay out the game ball B to the player side; , Is provided.

  The spherical tank 552 is formed in a rectangular shape extending in the left-right direction in plan view, and has a bottom wall 552a that is inclined so that the left side is lower in front view, and a front side and a rear side of the bottom wall 552a. It has a front wall 552b and a rear wall 552c extending upward, a left wall 552d and a right wall 552e extending upward from both left and right sides of the bottom wall 552a, respectively, and is formed in a container shape having an open upper side. Have been. In the ball tank 552, game balls B supplied from island facilities such as a game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed are stored.

  Further, the ball tank 552 has an overflow portion 552f that is cut out from above on the front wall 552b and that is formed lower than the remaining outer peripheral upper edge. The overflow portion 552f has a length of about ／ of the length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from the end of the left wall 552d to the end of the front wall 552b on the opposite side (the side of the right wall 552e). It is formed throughout.

  The tank rail 553 has a right end side (upstream side) communicating with the inside of the ball tank 552 in a front view, and a downstream side extending to one side in the left-right direction (left side) so as to be away from the ball tank 552. . The tank rail 553 extends from the vicinity of the upstream to the downstream end at the bottom, and has a gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a in which the width direction orthogonal to the flowing direction of the game balls B is formed so that only one game ball B can flow. Have. The main guiding portion 553a is inclined so as to become lower toward the left in front view. In plan view, the main guiding portion 553a extends from the right end to the left in the left-right direction after extending from the right end to a position about 1/10 of the total length in the left-right direction in parallel with an axis extending leftward and rightward from the right end side. It is formed in a crank shape extending obliquely from the right end to a position about 4/10 of the total length in the left-right direction so as to move backward as it goes, and extending to the left end in parallel with an axis extending in the left-right direction from there. .

  The tank rail 553 has a portion extending in the main guide portion 553a parallel to an axis extending in the left-right direction from the left end to the right and extending to the upper end with the same width. The upper side is closed by attaching the cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556. In addition, the tank rail 553 is formed such that the height of the flow path through which the game balls B flow becomes lower toward the downstream end (left end) at the portion where the upper side is closed, and the game balls B are formed at the downstream end. Is formed at a height at which only one can be circulated (a height slightly higher than the outer diameter of the game ball B).

  In addition, the tank rail 553 has a predetermined length in the left and right direction at the portion where the upper side is closed, on the bottom surface of the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a and on the rear wall of the main guiding portion 553a when viewed from the front (in the present embodiment, approximately Three rectangular cutout portions 553aa having a length of 30 mm) are formed at predetermined intervals (in the present embodiment, approximately 10 mm). The rectangular cutout portion 553aa allows the bottom surface of the main guiding portion 553a to have a thickness (approximately 2.5 mm in the present embodiment) of the rear wall from the rear wall toward the front of the main guiding portion 553a. A rectangular hole having a length of about 30 mm in the left-right direction is formed, and the thickness of the bottom plate of the bottom surface of the rear wall of the main guide portion 553a from the bottom surface of the main guide portion 553a upward (in the present embodiment, in this embodiment). , About 2.5 mm), a rectangular hole having a height of about 7 mm and a length of about 30 mm in the left-right direction is formed, and these rectangular holes are connected to each other.

  The game balls B flowing from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 fall due to metal powder being peeled off from the game balls B due to abrasion such as collision of the game balls B or rubbing. For this reason, when the metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B is attached to the main guiding portion 553a, the flow of the game ball B in the downstream direction is obstructed, so that the game ball B is smoothly moved toward the downstream side. , And the payout of the game balls B by the payout device 580 is stopped.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa are formed in the main guiding portion 553a so that metal powder generated by abrasion of the game balls B can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a. Thereby, for example, the metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B naturally falls from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa, so that the metal powder can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a. Due to the vibration of the game ball B rolling on the main guiding portion 553a, the metal powder generated by the abrasion of the game ball B attached to the main guiding portion 553a falls to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa. As a result, the metal powder can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a, and a cotton swab is inserted into the cutout portion 553aa by an attendant such as a game hall clerk, and is caused by abrasion of the game ball B attached to the main guiding portion 553a. By performing the operation of removing the metal powder, the metal powder can be removed from the main guiding portion 553a.

  In addition, the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed above the main guiding portion 553a, and the main rail 553 is arranged such that a plurality of game balls B are arranged in a width direction orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B. It has a bulging portion 553b bulging wider than the width of the guiding portion 553a and narrowing in width direction from the upstream end to the downstream side so as to match the width of the main guiding portion 553a. I have. By the bulging portion 553b, a plurality of game balls B that have spread in the width direction on the upstream side can be aligned so that the width direction becomes the width of one game ball B toward the downstream side. The bulging portion 553b is formed so that the width direction becomes narrower from the upper end side to the lower main guiding portion 553a. For this reason, the tank rail 553 can align the plurality of game balls B flowing through the bulging portion 553b such that the width direction becomes one line as it goes downstream and downward.

  The bulge portion 553b of the tank rail 553 has a center of curvature disposed on the inner side, and is formed into a three-dimensionally curved shape. Since the center of the curved curvature of the bulging portion 553b is disposed above the main guiding portion 553a, the bulging portion 553b slightly extends at the boundary between the main guiding portion 553a and the bulging portion 553b in the tank rail 553. A chamfered corner is formed. Further, the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a larger curvature on the downstream side than on the upstream side. For this reason, in the game ball B flowing through the three-dimensionally curved bulging portion 553b, the direction in which the reaction force from the bulging portion 553b acts depends on the position of the bulging portion 553b that comes into contact. It changes in various directions, and it is possible to suppress the occurrence of ball dust in the bulging portion 553b. More specifically, when the bulging portion 553b is formed to have a shape extending constantly, a reaction force always acts in a certain direction from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b on the game ball B flowing through the bulging portion 553b. Since the reaction force is difficult to disperse, the inside game ball B is always pushed in a fixed direction, so that the game ball B becomes difficult to escape and ball clogging (ball dust) is liable to occur. On the other hand, since the bulging portion 553b has a three-dimensional curved surface, the direction of the reaction force acting from the inner surface of the bulging portion 553b varies depending on the position of the game ball B, so that the inside circulates. By dispersing the direction in which the plurality of game balls B are pushed, the pushed game balls B can be easily escaped, and ball clogging (ball damage) can be suppressed.

  The tank rail 553 is made of a transparent material, and is configured so that the inside can be visually recognized from the outside. Accordingly, even if a ball jam (ball damage) occurs in the tank rail 553, the state of the game ball B in the tank rail 553 can be seen from the outside, so that the place where the ball is jammed can be quickly identified. can do. Therefore, the clogging of the ball in the tank rail 553 can be quickly eliminated, and the interruption of the game due to the occurrence of the clogging can be shortened as much as possible. The decrease can be suppressed. Further, since the tank rail 553 is made transparent, the rear side (the back unit 3000) of the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 can be visually recognized from the rear through the tank rail 553. When a malfunction occurs in various effecting units or the like, it is possible to check the status of the drive motor and the transmission mechanisms such as gears and belts while the game board 5 is still attached to the main body frame 4. The same operation and effect as the application effect can be obtained.

  The main body frame 4 is provided on the front side of the ball tank 552, extends in the front-rear direction, and has the same side as the downstream side of the tank rail 553 in the left-right direction (left side in front view) outside the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552. In order to return the game ball B overflowing forward from the ball tank 552 to the ball tank 552, the rear end side is inclined at the same height as the overflow portion 552f and the front end side is higher. Of the ball tank 552 at the rear end of the overflowing surface 501m and the rear end of the overflowing surface 501m to the upper side of the bulging portion 553b of which the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and the rear end side is low. And is inclined so that the side (left side) away from the ball tank 552 in the left-right direction becomes lower, and the overflow surface from the ball tank 552 A bypass passage 552g to induce some of the game balls B full of 501m, and a.

  Further, the main body frame 4 is provided on the opposite side of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 in the left and right outer sides of the detour passage 552g, the interval in the left and right direction is wider than the outer diameter of the game ball, and A discharge portion 551j whose height is lower than a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is open, and a position lower than the overflow surface portion 501m on the opposite side to the bypass passage 552g with the discharge portion 551j interposed therebetween. An external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring can be connected from the rear, and an upper surface of the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (external terminal plate 558) are covered, and the upper surface is an overflow surface portion. A terminal cover 551k extending horizontally at a position higher than 501m.

  The overflow surface portion 501m is formed on the main body frame base 501. The overflow surface portion 501m has a flat plate shape from a position lower by a distance of 2 to 4 times the outer diameter of the game ball B from an upper side of a rear surface of the base body 501a formed in a rectangular shape extending vertically when viewed from the front. Has been extended to. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the length in the left-right direction is about 1/3 of the length in the left-right direction of the main body frame base 501, and the left end in front view is from the left end of the main body frame base 501. It is located to the right of one-third of the total length in the left-right direction. The overflow surface portion 501m is formed such that the height from the front end to the rear end is about half the outer diameter of the game ball B. When the main body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, a gap having a distance about twice the outer diameter of the game ball B is formed between the overflow surface 501 m and the outer frame upper member 30. .

  The main body frame base 501 is disposed on the left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m, and extends substantially horizontally at the same height as the front end of the overflow surface 501m. The upper end is higher than the left and right steps 501n and 501o on both left and right outer sides of the left and right steps 501n and 501o, and extends in a front and rear direction in a strip shape. And a plurality of ribs 501p arranged in rows at a smaller interval than the diameter. The left step part 501n is formed to be shorter in the left-right direction than the length in the front-rear direction. Further, the left-stage portion 501n is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the right corner at the rear end becomes slightly lower in a front view. The right step portion 501o is formed to be longer in the left-right direction than the length in the front-rear direction. The right step part 501o is inclined with respect to the horizontal plane so that the rear left corner is slightly lower in a front view.

  The plurality of ribs 501p of the body frame base 501 are formed higher than the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and when the body frame 4 is closed with respect to the outer frame 2, the lower surface of the outer frame upper member 30 of the outer frame 2 is formed. Is formed at a height that is smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball B.

  The main body frame base 501 is assembled with the main body frame 4 and, when viewed from the front, the right end of the overflow surface 501m coincides with the right end of the overflow portion 552f of the spherical tank 552 in the left-right direction, and the overflow surface 501m. The left end of the right side of the detour passage 552g coincides with the left end of the detour passage 552g, and the right end of the right step portion 501o coincides with the right side wall 552e of the ball tank 552.

  The bypass passage 552g is formed integrally with the ball tank 552. Hereinafter, the container-shaped region surrounded by the bottom wall 552a, the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, the left side wall 552d, and the right side wall 552e is also simply referred to as a spherical tank 552. The detour passage 552g extends in a flat plate shape from the outside of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 to the left, and has a front end that is the same height as the overflow portion 552f and is inclined so that the rear end is lower. And a weir extending upward from an end of the passage surface 552h opposite to the left side wall 552d to the same height as the left side wall 552d. As for the rear end side of the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g, the left end side (the weir portion 552i side) of the rear end side extends rearward to the same position as the rear wall 552c of the ball tank 552 in a front view, and the left end side thereof. From the right to the right end. Note that the passage surface 552h of the bypass passage 552g may have a horizontal inclination in the horizontal direction.

  The detour passage 552g, when assembled to the main body frame 4, has a rear end extending along a front end side of a portion of the tank rail 553 that extends in the left-right direction and extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. Extending. That is, the rear end of the bypass passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left-right direction. As a result, the game ball B guided rearward by the detour passage 552g changes its distribution direction from the slanted rear end to be perpendicular to the slanted rear end. The obliquely extending rear end of the detour passage 552g extends substantially parallel to the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 (in the direction in which the game ball B flows in the tank rail 553). Therefore, since the game ball B is discharged from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g in a direction substantially perpendicular to the flow direction (width direction) of the tank rail 553, the bypass passage 552g is widened at the tank rail 553. From the game ball B. Further, since the game balls B are supplied from the bypass path 552g into the tank rail 553 in a direction substantially perpendicular (perpendicular to the flow direction) of the game balls B, the tank rails formed by the game balls B from the bypass path 552g. Ball clogging in 553 can be made difficult to occur.

  Since the detour passage 552g extends obliquely with respect to the left and right direction such that the rear end moves rearward toward the downstream side of the tank rail 553, the game ball B moves from the detour passage 552g to the tank rail 553 side. When released, the game ball B can be released to the upstream side, which is wider than the downstream side, where the width of the tank rail 553 is narrower, due to the rear end that extends diagonally. By discharging the gas to a wide area, the occurrence of ball dust in the tank rail 553 can be suppressed.

  In addition, a portion where the game ball B is guided by the detour passage 552g corresponds to an outer portion of the rear portion of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 and the left portion of the rear wall 552c in the front view on the tank rail 553. A game ball B that flows under the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 (on the ceiling side of the opening 552k) flows from the inside of the ball tank 552 to this portion. For this reason, at a position behind the bypass passage 552g in the tank rail 553, the height of the plurality of game balls B stacked in the vertical direction is equal to the height of the ceiling of the opening 552k (the height of the wall of the tank rail 553). Height). Therefore, on the tank rail 553 downstream of the ball tank 552, that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to secure a space (empty space) where the game balls B can be stacked upward, so that the bypass passage 552g. Thus, the game ball B guided rearward can be reliably received on the tank rail 553, and the game ball B does not spill backward from the tank rail 553.

  The spherical tank 552 is a flat plate that extends rightward from a position slightly lower than the overflow portion 552f of the left side wall 552d on the inside surrounded by the front wall 552b, the rear wall 552c, and the left side wall 552d. Has a guide surface portion 552j. The guide surface 552j extends in the front-rear direction from the front wall 552b to the rear wall 552c. In addition, the guide surface portion 552j has a right end in a front view from a position about 1/3 of a total length of the front wall 552b in the left-right direction from a left end of the front wall 552b, and a right end side in a left-right direction of the front wall 552b from the left end of the front wall 552b. After extending obliquely rearward from the front wall 552b at about 1/9 of the total length to a position near about 1/2 of the total length of the left side wall 552d in the front-rear direction, and extending parallel to the left side wall 552d to the vicinity of the rear wall 552c, The rear wall 552c is formed to have a constant width in the front-rear direction and to extend from the left end of the rear wall 552c to a position about one-third of the total length of the rear wall 552c in the left-right direction in parallel with the rear wall 552c.

  In the spherical tank 552, in plan view, a right end of the guide surface portion 552j formed in the above-described shape and a straight line connecting the end of the right end to the front wall 552b and the end to the rear wall 552c. The enclosed area has an opening 552k formed to penetrate vertically. Further, the ball tank 552 has a flat flange extending in the left-right direction outward and the up-down direction on the same plane as the front wall 552b on the front end side of the right side wall 552e and the front end side of the weir portion 552i of the bypass passage 552g. It has a portion 552l. The spherical tank 552 is configured such that the heights of the upper edge of the front wall 552b excluding the overflow portion 552f and the upper edges of the two flange portions 552l are the upper edges of the left wall 552d and the rear wall 552c (the body frame base 501). (The upper surface of the left step portion 501n and the right step portion 501o).

  When the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are assembled to each other, the upstream end (the right end in a front view) of the tank rail 553 is connected to the opening 552k of the ball tank 552. Further, the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape in a plan view and the portion extending straight leftward in the left-right direction are located behind the ball tank 552 (projecting). )doing. The rear end side of the left side detour passage 552g of the left side wall 552d of the ball tank 552 is located at the front end of the obliquely extending portion of the tank rail 553 extending in the left-right direction in a crank shape.

  The discharge section 551j is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The discharge portion 551j, when assembled to the main body frame 4, is stepped downward from the height lower than the bypass passage 552g to the same height as the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 in the ball tank 552 so as to step backward. After extending rearward from the rear side of the flange portion 552l on the left side in the front view to the tank rail 553, a position higher than the upper end of the tank rail 553 to the left along the tank rail 553 (the center of the second rail cover 555 in the left-right direction). Nearby position) and then extend rearward.

  The external terminal plate 558 is mounted on the rear surface in a state where a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a are arranged in the left-right direction. The electric wire connection terminal 558a is a one-touch terminal that can open a grip portion by operating a lever to grip the end of the electric wiring. The external terminal plate 558 is disposed in front of a portion where the upper side of the tank rail 553 is closed by the first rail cover 554, the second rail cover 555, and the ball rectifying member 556 when assembled to the main body frame 4. . A terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558 (the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a) is formed on the upper surface of the payout base 551. The upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is formed at substantially the same height as the upper end of the flange portion 552l of the ball tank 552.

  Next, the operation and effect of the upper part of the main body frame 4 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described. First, the overflow surface portion 501m, the left stage portion 501n, the right stage portion 501o, and the bypass passage 552g are arranged such that the overflow surface portion 501m and the bypass passage 552g are lower on the rear end side as shown by the outline arrows in FIG. The left-stage portion 501n is inclined such that the right end of the rear end is lower, and the right-stage portion 501o is inclined such that the rear end left corner is lower. In addition, the bottom wall 552a of the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 (main guide portion 553a) are inclined such that the left end sides thereof are lower in a front view. Further, the guide surface portion 552j of the ball tank 552 is inclined such that the right end side in the opposite direction to the bottom wall 552a is lower.

  When the amount of the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 increases by being supplied from the island facility, first, the game balls B exceed the lowest overflow section 552f of the outer peripheral upper end edge. The game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 can escape to the overflow surface portion 501m, and can be caused to flow out from the ball tank 552 to the forward overflow surface portion 501m. The game ball B can be returned into the ball tank 552 by the inclination of the overflow surface 501m (see FIG. 122). Therefore, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from further increasing in the ball tank 552, so that it is possible to suppress the game balls B from strongly pressing each other (increase in ball pressure) in the ball tank 552. In addition, the occurrence of clogging (so-called ball dust) due to the engagement of the game balls B in the ball tank 552 can be prevented.

  Further, since the detour passage 552g is provided, the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the detour passage 552g as shown in FIG. As a result, it is possible to prevent the backward pressing force from acting on the game balls B in the ball tank 552 by the game balls B accumulated on the overflow surface 501m, and the game balls B in the ball tank 552 are clogged. Can be prevented. Further, since the game balls B can be sent to the tank rail 553 via the bypass passage 552g, it is possible to prevent the game balls B overflowing from the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface 501m from spilling to the outside (rear side) of the main body frame 4. Can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to avoid a problem that the game ball B spilled outside the main body frame 4 is sandwiched between the outer frame 2 and the main body frame 4 so that the main body frame 4 cannot be opened and closed.

  Further, a part of the game ball B overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the overflow surface portion 501m can be guided to the downstream side of the tank rail 553 by the detour passage 552g, and along the left side away from the ball tank 552. Since the game ball B can be sent to the tank rail 553 from a certain position, the flow (pressure) of the game ball B sent to the tank rail 553 by the bypass path 552g can be directed to the downstream side of the tank rail 553. In addition, it is possible to prevent the game balls B from strongly pressing each other in the tank rail 553 to prevent the game balls B from being clogged.

  In addition, since the height of the remaining upper edge other than the overflow portion 552f is higher than the overflow portion 552f at the outer peripheral upper edge of the ball tank 552, the ball between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is formed. The upper edge of the left side wall 552d on one side in the left-right direction of the tank 552 is higher than the overflow portion 552f, that is, the rear end of the overflow surface portion 501m. Thus, the game ball B flowing from the ball tank 552 over the overflow portion 552f to the overflow surface 501m and flowing from the overflow surface 501m to the bypass passage 552g is moved to the left side of one side of the ball tank 552. By being blocked by the wall 552d, it is possible to prevent the detour passage 552g from returning to the ball tank 552 side. It is possible to prevent clogging of the game balls B in the tank 552.

  Further, as described above, the upper edge of the left side wall 552d between the ball tank 552 and the bypass passage 552g is closer to the rear end of the overflow surface 501m (the passage surface 552h on which the game ball B rolls in the bypass passage 552g). , The game ball B can be prevented from overflowing from the ball tank 552 to the bypass 552g without passing through the overflow surface 501m. Thus, the inflow of the game ball B from the side (the ball tank 552) into the bypass passage 552g can be prevented, so that the flow of the game ball B in the bypass passage 552g is rearward from the overflow surface 501m on the front end side. The flow can be in a certain direction toward the tank rail 553 on the end side, and the pressure of the game ball B guided to the tank rail 553 from the detour passage 552g can be in a certain direction. Therefore, in the tank rail 553, the directions of the pressure applied to the game balls B are different, so that it is possible to prevent the game balls B from pushing and biting each other, thereby preventing the game balls B from being clogged. Can be prevented.

  In addition, since the bottom of the tank rail 553 is provided with the main guiding portion 553a extending to the downstream end, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 reach the main guiding portion 553a, and are aligned in the left-right direction. Since they are arranged side by side, the game balls B in the tank rail 553 can be aligned, and the game balls B can be reliably guided to the payout device 580 on the downstream side. In addition, since the upper portion of the tank rail 553 has a wide bulging portion 553b in which a plurality of game balls B can be arranged, a game discharged from the rear end of the bypass passage 552g is provided. The ball B can be reliably received, and the above-described effects can be reliably achieved.

  In addition, the bulging portion 553b of the tank rail 553 extends from the upstream end to a portion where the upper side is closed, and the width direction becomes narrower from the upstream end to the downstream side so that the width of the main guiding portion 553a is reduced. Since the game balls B are changed so as to coincide with each other, the plurality of game balls B can be aligned so as to be aligned in the width direction as the plurality of game balls B move downstream in the bulging portion 553b. In addition, since the portion of the tank rail 553 whose upper side is closed is formed so that the height of the flow path through which the game balls B flow decreases toward the downstream end, the upstream side (the ball tank 552 side). A plurality of game balls B stacked in a plurality of stages in the height direction are passed downstream through the portion of the tank rail 553 where the upper side is closed, thereby reducing the number of stages in the height direction and forming one row. Can be aligned. Therefore, the plurality of game balls B can be guided to the downstream side (payout device 580 side) in a state of being aligned in a line by the tank rail 553.

  Further, since the overflow surface 501m and the bypass passage 552g are provided, a certain number of game balls B can be stored therein, and the tank rail 553 has a bulging portion 553b. Therefore, since the volume in the tank rail 553 can be increased, more game balls B can be stored together with the ball tank 552.

  Further, an external terminal plate 558 having a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a to which electric wiring is connected and a plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a (on the side opposite to the ball tank 552 with the bypass passage 552g and the discharge portion 551j therebetween). Since the terminal cover 551k that covers the upper side of the external terminal plate 558) is provided, the wire connection terminal 558a and the terminal cover 551k can be farther from the ball tank 552 to which the game ball B is supplied from the island facility. Therefore, even if the game ball B supplied from the island facility jumps or is supplied vigorously in the ball tank 552 or the overflow surface 501m, it is difficult to reach (contact) the wire connection terminal 558a or the like. However, there is no problem such as a short circuit or disconnection of the electric wiring due to the contact of the game ball B.

  Further, since the plurality of wire connection terminals 558a are directed rearward and the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k is higher than the overflow surface portion 501m, the game ball B supplied to the ball tank 552 from the island facility is used for the ball 552. Even if the game ball B jumps on the overflow surface 501m, it is difficult to ride on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, and even if the game ball B rides on the upper surface of the terminal cover 551k, it is difficult to fall from the rear side. It is possible to easily avoid occurrence of such a problem.

  Further, the game ball B returned from the overflow surface 501m to the guide surface 552j of the ball tank 552 is sent to the upstream side of the ball tank 552 (to the right in FIG. 122) due to the inclination of the guide surface 552j. Thereby, it is possible to prevent the game balls B on the guide surface portion 552j from being pressed in the downstream direction with respect to the game balls B in the ball tank 552, and the game balls B are clogged in the ball tank 552. Can be prevented.

  Also, the game ball B supplied to the ball tank 552 from the island facilities bounces at the ball tank 552 and the overflow surface 501m, and rides on the left and right steps 501n and 501o on the left and right sides of the overflow surface 501m. Also, as shown in FIG. 122, the game balls B can be guided to the overflow surface portion 501m and the detour passage 552g by their inclination, and a problem occurs when the game balls B spill outside the main body frame 4. Can be prevented.

  Further, when the game balls B flow from the ball tank 552 to the tank rail 553 side, the game balls B pass under the guide surface portion 552j, so that the game balls stacked on the tank rail 553 by the guide surface portion 552j. The amount (height) of B can be regulated so as not to be higher than the lower surface of the guide surface portion 552j. Therefore, a space (vacant space) where the game balls B can be stacked upward can be secured on the tank rail 553 downstream of the ball tank 552 (guide surface portion 552j), that is, on the rear end side of the bypass passage 552g. The game ball B guided by the bypass path 552g can be reliably received.

  Further, since the plurality of electric wire connection terminals 558a and the terminal cover 551k are arranged in front of a portion of the tank rail 553 in which the upper side is closed, even if the game ball B falls rearward from the terminal cover 551k, it is not affected. The game ball B is not received by the tank rail 553, and it is possible to prevent the game ball B from affecting the game ball B in the tank rail 553 and causing a problem.

  Further, while the ball tank 552 is molded of a conductive resin, the tank rail 553 and a peripheral control board box of a peripheral control unit 1500 described later are molded of a non-conductive resin. In the present embodiment, when the tank rail 553 and the peripheral control board box are charged, they have the same polarity. Therefore, the metal powder of the game ball B attached to the tank rail 553 is removed from the peripheral control board box having the same polarity. And is not attracted to the peripheral control board box.

[4-12. Configuration of measures against metal powder]
Next, an electric trouble (short-circuit) caused by the metal powder of the game ball B dropped from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553. ) Will be described with reference to FIG. 125. FIG. 125 is an enlarged view of a part of a cross-sectional view taken along line CC of FIG. 117 (a), and is a schematic diagram of a configuration for preventing metal powder. In FIG. 125, the outer shape of the game board 5 is represented by a solid line, and only a portion of the game board 5 necessary for description is shown as a cross-sectional view.

  When metal powder (foreign matter) of the game ball B falling from a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 adheres to the peripheral control unit 1500 disposed below the tank rail 553, An electrical trouble may occur, causing a problem in the peripheral control unit 1500 or causing a malfunction. For example, a peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 includes an IC such as a peripheral control IC, a ROM, and an SDRAM described later, and a peripheral data ROM substrate described later includes an IC such as a peripheral data ROM. As the pin spacing of these ICs is reduced, the pin spacing of various connectors and special connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is reduced, and the number of connectors on the peripheral control board 1510 is increased, whereby the spacing between the various connectors is reduced. Therefore, since the distance between the connector and the special connector is narrow, it is necessary to take measures against an electric trouble due to a foreign object falling from the tank rail.

  First, as shown in FIG. 125, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 are on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It is displaced rearward as compared with the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface (on the rear side) (in the present embodiment, about half the diameter of the game ball B). Are displaced by the distance dimension of).

  As described above, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate 551a of the payout base 551 on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is from the front side to the back side of the top plate 551a (from the front to the back of the top plate 551a). ), A plurality of steps are formed in a stepped shape bent downward. A back plate upper portion 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top plate portion 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side plate portion 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate 551a, the bent top plate 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d are substantially flush with each other. It is to be arranged. When the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 comes into surface contact with the rear surface of the upper back plate 551 d of the payout base 551. In addition, the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da that protrudes rearward on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d.

  As a result, the metal powder of the game sphere B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa, is received and adhered to the top plate portion 551a, or adhered to the convex portion 551da. You can do it. Further, the contact portion where the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d of the payout base 551 are in surface contact protrudes rearward at the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. Since the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the notch portion 553aa through the notch portion 553aa, is covered by the formed convex portion 551da, the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 starts from the contact portion. Of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) so as not to fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. It has become.

  In this manner, the top plate portion 551a and the back plate upper portion 551d of the payout base 551 are formed of the metal of the game ball B dropped to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. Prevents powder from falling toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as an eaves that can be used. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an electric trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of notches 553aa formed in the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a of the tank rail 553 and the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) The cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the attached effect display device 1600 is shifted (in the present embodiment, shifted by a distance dimension that is about half the diameter of the game ball B). (That is, the peripheral control unit 1500 is not disposed immediately below the cutout portion 553aa), thereby causing an electric trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553. This is effective for preventing metal powder.

  The ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 are provided on the rear surface (cover flat plate described later) of the cover body 1501, while the upper side, the left side, and the like of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later) are provided. Since the metal powder of the game ball B adheres to the upper side wall of the cover body 1501 (the cover side wall formed on the upper side of the cover flat plate described later) because it is not provided on each of the cover side walls provided on the lower side and the right side, respectively. However, it is possible to make it difficult to enter the inside of the cover 1501.

  The cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 has a square-shaped FAN mounting recess for mounting the air-cooling fan FAN at the center thereof, and a plurality of concentric circles on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess. A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes, which will be described later, are respectively formed along the slits. The cover body 1501 has seven connector holes provided along a lower side thereof, which are provided on a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501, and seven connector holes at positions corresponding to a volume adjustment switch, and A volume adjustment hole is formed, and two connector holes are formed at positions corresponding to two connectors provided on a liquid crystal output substrate described later. In a state where the peripheral control board 1510 is attached inside the cover body 1501, gaps are formed in the seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501. Seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are respectively exposed from the seven connector holes, and a gap is formed between a volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a volume control hole formed on the cover body 1501, A volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is exposed from the volume control hole. Further, in a state where a liquid crystal output board described later is attached inside the cover body 1501, a gap is formed between two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board and two connector holes formed on the cover body 1501, The two connectors provided on the liquid crystal output board are respectively exposed from these two connector holes.

  When the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 rotate, the rotation causes the air in the space inside the cover body 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the wings, thereby controlling the periphery. Air from outside the unit 1500 is passed through a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover 1501 and a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540 housed in the space between the cover 1501 and the base 1502. And a volume control switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510, a gap formed in the above-mentioned gap (seven connectors provided in the peripheral control board 1510, and seven connector holes formed in the cover body 1501), and a cover. And a sound volume adjustment hole formed in body 1501. During and through the two connectors provided on the liquid crystal driving board, and two connector hole formed in the cover body 1501, a gap) formed, so that the capturing.

  The sum (total area) of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes formed on the bottom surface of the FAN attachment concave portion of the cover body 1501 is the sum of the area of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 and the area described above. Clearance (seven connectors provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and seven connector holes formed on the cover body 1501), a volume adjustment switch provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and formed on the cover body 1501 A volume adjustment hole, a gap formed in the liquid crystal output board, and an area in a gap formed in the two connector holes formed in the cover body 1501 and the two connectors formed in the cover 1501). It is getting smaller. Therefore, when the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the peripheral control unit 1500 rotate, the rotation causes the air in the space inside the cover body 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the wings. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 and a plurality of ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540 accommodated in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When the air is taken in through the cover, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover body 1501 can be reduced. Thus, it is possible to prevent the heavy powder of the metal powder of the game ball B from entering the inside space of the cover body 1501 through the ventilation holes 1501az under the influence of the air flow.

  By the way, when the wings of the air cooling fan FAN of the peripheral control unit 1500 rotate, when the air outside the peripheral control unit 1500 is sucked toward the inner space of the cover body 1501 through the wings by this rotation, the air cooling fan FAN Since the flow velocity of the air due to the rotation of the wings increases, the probability that the heavy powder of the metal powder of the game ball B is sucked toward the inner space of the cover body 1501 under the influence of the air flow increases, An electrical trouble (short circuit) caused by the metal powder causes a malfunction (failure) in various electronic components provided on various substrates such as the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 attached to the inside of the cover body 1501. Become.

  Therefore, in order to prevent such an electrical trouble (short circuit), by forming a protruding portion along the upper side of the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500, heavy powder of metal powder of the game ball B is air-cooled. The game ball can be configured to have a function as an eave for preventing the fan from being sucked into the fan FAN, and by forming a protruding portion along the vicinity of the upper side of the FAN mounting recess formed on the cover body 1501. It can be configured to have a function as an eave to prevent heavy powder called metal powder B from being sucked into the air-cooling fan FAN, and the distance dimension (thickness) in the depth direction of the air-cooling fan FAN is thin. (That is, the distance dimension (thickness) in the depth direction of the air-cooling fan FAN compared to the distance dimension in the depth direction of the FAN mounting concave portion. When the air-cooling fan FAN is accommodated in the FAN mounting recess formed in the cover body 1501, heavy powder called metal powder of the game ball B is removed by the inner wall of the FAN mounting recess when the fan is mounted in the FAN mounting recess. It can be configured so as to have a function as an eave for preventing being sucked into the FAN. A detailed description of the configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described later.

  Next, another configuration of the present invention in which a countermeasure against metal powder that can avoid an electrical trouble caused by the metal powder of the game ball B is taken (hereinafter referred to as a “countermeasure against metal powder according to the second to fifth embodiments”) Will be described with reference to FIGS. 126 to 129. FIG. 126 shows a configuration of a countermeasure against metal powder according to the second embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of a configuration of a countermeasure against metal powder according to the second embodiment. FIG. 127 shows a configuration of a countermeasure against metal powder according to the third embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of a configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the third embodiment. FIG. 128 shows the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment. FIG. 129 shows a configuration of a countermeasure against metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, and is a schematic diagram of a configuration of a countermeasure against metal powder according to the fifth embodiment. In FIGS. 126 to 129, members having the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIG. 125 (hereinafter, referred to as “the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment”) are denoted by the same reference numerals. In addition, the outer shape of the game board 5 is represented by a solid line, and only the portions of the game board 5 necessary for explanation are shown as cross-sectional views.

[Comparison between the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate 551a in which the tank rail 553 is arranged in the front-rear direction goes from the front side to the rear side of the top plate 551a as described above ( The upper part 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top part 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side part 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate 551a, the top plate 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed as described above, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the upper portion of the back plate 551d are provided. The rear surface and the rear surface are arranged on substantially the same plane.

  On the other hand, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 126, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate portion 551a on which the tank rail 553 is arranged is the front portion of the top plate portion 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment is formed in a stepped shape bent a plurality of downwards from the side toward the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). Is not provided at all, the rear side of the bent top plate portion 551a is parallel to the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a formed on the top plate portion 551a, and upward from the bottom of the main guide portion 553a. And a predetermined distance dimension (in the present embodiment, a distance dimension of about one-half the diameter of the game ball B). That is, the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed above the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate 551a and the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 is arranged below the tank rail 553, The rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 in the rear unit 3000 are arranged on substantially the same plane. Note that the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 arranged on substantially the same plane as the tank rail 553 is formed so as to branch from the portion where the effect display device 1600 is attached and extend rearward.

  In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 has the payout base 551. Abuts against the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d, and the abutting portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the second embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is connected to the rear surface 3010 d of the back box 3010. Is in contact with the mounting recess 3010da, which is in contact with the mounting recess 3010da, and the abutting portion is covered by an upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010da.

  As described above, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate 551a, the top plate 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail 553 is disposed. While the rear surface of the upper plate 553 and the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d are disposed on substantially the same plane, the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate unit 551a in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the second embodiment. When the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the back face of the tank rail 553 and the back box of the back unit 3000. The difference is that a rear surface 3010d of the base 3010 is disposed on substantially the same plane. In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is formed on the back plate upper portion 551 d of the payout base 551. The rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d is covered with a convex portion 551da formed on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the second embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is attached to the rear surface 3010 d of the back box 3010. It is said that it is in a contact state where it comes into surface contact with 3010da, and the contacted portion is covered by an upper wall formed by the mounting recess 3010da. It is different at the point.

  In the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the second embodiment, the same operation and effect as the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment can be obtained. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen out of the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a, is received by the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000. It can be attached. Further, the contact portion where the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the mounting concave portion 3010da formed on the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 are in surface contact with each other is defined by the upper wall formed by the mounting concave portion 3010da. Because of being covered, the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen out of the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa, comes into contact with the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back unit 3000). Of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 (not shown).

  As described above, the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 and the rear surface 3010d of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 have fallen out of the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. The metal powder of the game ball B is directed toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as an eave that can prevent it from falling. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an electric trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

  In the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the second embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa, is provided on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 ( It cannot fall toward the cover 1501 and the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the effect display device 1600 attached to the back of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. For this reason, it is desirable to provide the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 with a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later) in order to improve the cooling effect.

[Comparison between the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the third embodiment]
In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate 551a in which the tank rail 553 is arranged in the front-rear direction goes from the front side to the rear side of the top plate 551a as described above ( The upper part 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top part 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side part 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate 551a, the top plate 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed as described above, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the upper portion of the back plate 551d are provided. The rear surface and the rear surface are arranged on substantially the same plane.

  On the other hand, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 127, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed in the front-rear direction is different from that of the top plate 551a. The back plate upper portion 551d in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment is formed in a stepped shape bent a plurality of downwards from the side toward the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a). Is not provided at all. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate 551a, the bent top plate 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the end surface of the bent top plate 551a is close to the rear surface of the tank rail 553. It is arranged so as to protrude below the notch 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a.

  In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 has the payout base 551. Abuts against the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d, and the abutting portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the third embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is positioned below the tank rail 553. The upper surface of the bent top plate portion 551a and the upper surface of the contact portion 640a which are in contact with the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553. Are arranged on the same plane.

  As described above, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate 551a, the top plate 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail 553 is disposed. In contrast to the rear surface of the upper plate 551d and the rear surface of the upper plate 551d, the rear surface of the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate 551a in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the third embodiment. A bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and a rear surface of the tank rail 553 and an end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 are substantially flush with each other. In that they are located in In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is formed on the back plate upper portion 551 d of the payout base 551. The rear surface is in contact with the rear surface, and the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da that protrudes rearward on the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d. In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the third embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is bent below the tank rail 553. The upper surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 is in contact with the end surface of the top plate portion 551a, and the contact portion 6 And the upper surface of 0a are different in that they are arranged on the same plane.

  Also in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the third embodiment, the same operation and effect as the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment can be obtained. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen out of the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a, is bent below the tank rail 553. It can be received and adhered on the upper surface of the contact portion 640 a of the rear cover 640. Further, the contact portion where the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 are in contact with each other is in contact. As a result, the gap is not formed, so that the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa, comes into contact with the game panel of the game board 5 from the contact portion. It cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the 1100 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It has become.

  As described above, the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 is provided with the game ball B dropped from the main guide portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. It is assumed that the metal powder falls toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). It functions as an eaves that can be prevented. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an electric trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

  A contact portion where the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 are in contact is in contact. As a result, no gap is formed, but the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 is sunk closely below the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553. Or the positional relationship in which the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 is sunk closely under the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640. A gap is not formed in the closely contacted portion between the formed contact portion 640a and the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553. The metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa, comes to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000) from the closely contacted portion. The peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface (on the rear side) cannot fall down toward the cover 1501 and the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the third embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa, is provided on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 ( It cannot fall toward the cover 1501 and the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the effect display device 1600 attached to the back of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. For this reason, it is desirable to provide the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 with a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later) in order to improve the cooling effect.

[Comparison between the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment]
In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate 551a in which the tank rail 553 is arranged in the front-rear direction goes from the front side to the rear side of the top plate 551a as described above ( The upper part 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top part 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side part 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate 551a, the top plate 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed as described above, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the upper portion of the back plate 551d are provided. The rear surface and the rear surface are arranged on substantially the same plane.

  On the other hand, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 128, the cross-sectional shape in the front-rear direction of the top plate 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed is different from the front plate 551a. Although it is formed in a stepped shape bent a plurality of downwards from the side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a), the above-described back plate upper portion 551d in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment. Is not provided at all. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate 551a, the bent top plate 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the end surface of the bent top plate 551a extends rearward from the rear surface of the tank rail 553. It is arranged so as to protrude by a predetermined distance dimension (in this embodiment, a distance dimension of about one third of the diameter of the game ball B).

  In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 has the payout base 551. Abuts against the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d, and the abutting portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, when the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 is positioned below the tank rail 553. And is in contact with the convex portion 551ab formed on the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a so as to protrude downward, and the contacted portion is the tank rail 553. Is covered by a rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the top plate 551a.

  As described above, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate 551a, the top plate 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail 553 is disposed. In contrast to the rear surface of the top plate 551a, the rear surface of the tank 553 and the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d are arranged on substantially the same plane. In addition, the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed below the tank rail 553, and the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is disposed so as to slightly project rearward from the rear surface of the tank rail 553. Is different. In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is formed on the back plate upper portion 551 d of the payout base 551. The rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d is covered with a convex portion 551da formed on the rear surface of the back plate upper portion 551d. In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, the front surface of the abutting portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is bent below the tank rail 553. The rear surface of the top plate portion 551a is in contact with a convex portion 551ab formed so as to protrude downward and is in contact with the convex portion 551ab. Disposed below the tank rails 553, are different in that covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate 551a.

  In the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, the same operation and effect as the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment can be obtained. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen out of the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a, is bent below the tank rail 553. 551a so that they can be received and adhered. Further, a front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640, and a convex portion 551ab formed below the tank rail 553 and formed to protrude downward on the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a. Since the abutting portion that is in surface contact is covered by the rear surface of the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553, the contact portion falls outside from the main guide portion 553a via the cutout portion 553aa. From the portion where the metal powder of the played game ball B abuts, it is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). The peripheral control unit 1500 cannot fall toward the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502.

  As described above, the bent top plate portion 551a disposed below the tank rail 553 is a game ball B that has fallen to the outside from the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. Metal powder falls toward the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). , And also functions as a tray for the metal powder of the game balls B. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an electric trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

  In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, the bent top plate portion 551a functioning as an eave disposed below the tank rail 553 is used as a separate member (another structural component) as the top plate portion 551a. It can also be configured to be attached to

  When the top plate portion 551a is formed as another member (another structural component), a mechanism that can be detached or moved from the mounting position to return to the mounting position may be used for the purpose of removing the attached metal powder. In this case, by making the top plate portion 551a a color different from that of the peripheral members, the mechanism portion that can be detached or moved from the attachment position to be returned to the attachment position can be clarified, and the work of removing the attached metal powder is improved. Let it.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the fourth embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen out of the main guiding portion 553a through the cutout portion 553aa, is provided on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 ( It cannot fall toward the cover 1501 and the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the effect display device 1600 attached to the back of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. For this reason, it is desirable to provide the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 with a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later) in order to improve the cooling effect.

[Comparison between the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the fifth embodiment]
In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate 551a in which the tank rail 553 is arranged in the front-rear direction goes from the front side to the rear side of the top plate 551a as described above ( The upper part 551d of the back plate 551d extends downward from the rear side of the top part 551a to the same position as the lower side of the right side part 551c. When the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate portion 551a, the top plate portion 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is arranged as described above, and the rear surface of the tank rail 553 and the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d. Are arranged on substantially the same plane.

  On the other hand, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 129, the cross-sectional shape of the top plate 551a on which the tank rail 553 is disposed in the front-rear direction is different from that of the top plate 551a. Although it is formed in a stepped shape bent a plurality of downwards from the side to the rear side (from the front to the rear of the top plate portion 551a), the above-described back plate upper portion 551d in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment. Is not provided at all, the rear side of the bent top plate portion 551a is parallel to the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guide portion 553a formed on the top plate portion 551a, and downward from the bottom of the main guide portion 553a. And a predetermined distance dimension (in the present embodiment, a distance dimension of about one-half the diameter of the game ball B). In other words, the end surface of the bent top plate portion 551a is arranged so as to protrude downward from the bottom of the main guide portion 553a.

  In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 has the payout base 551. Abuts against the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d, and the abutting portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the contact portion formed by largely bending the upper side of the back cover 640 forward. The front surface of 640a is arranged in parallel with the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a, and comes into surface contact with the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a which is arranged to project downward from the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a. It is in contact.

  In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, as described above, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 has the payout base 551. Abuts against the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d, and the abutting portion is covered by a convex portion 551da formed to project rearward on the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d. ing.

  On the other hand, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 has a gutter-shaped main guide. The top plate 551a, which is disposed parallel to the front wall of the portion 553a and protrudes downward from the bottom of the main guide portion 553a, is in contact with the rear surface of the top plate 551a. The contacting portion is disposed so as to be largely shifted forward from the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a.

  As described above, in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, when the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate 551a, the top plate 551a bent below the tank rail 553 is disposed, and the tank rail 553 is disposed. While the rear surface of the top plate 551a and the rear surface of the top plate 551d are disposed on substantially the same plane, the tank rail 553 is attached to the top plate 551a in the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the fifth embodiment. In the state where the bent top plate portion 551a is not disposed below the tank rail 553 and the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4, the upper side of the back cover 640 is largely bent forward to form a contact. The difference is that the portion 640a is arranged. In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the first embodiment, the front surface of the contact portion 640 a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is formed on the back plate upper portion 551 d of the payout base 551. The rear surface is in contact with the rear surface, and the abutted portion is covered by a convex portion 551da that protrudes rearward on the rear surface of the upper back plate 551d. In the configuration for preventing metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, the front surface of the abutting portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 in a state where the back cover 640 is assembled to the main body frame 4 is in contact with the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a. It is in a state of being in contact with the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a that is arranged in parallel and that projects downward from the bottom of the main guide portion 553a, and is in contact with this. Min, is different in that it is arranged largely shifted forward from notches 553aa which is plurally formed to the main guiding part 553a.

  In the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, the same operation and effect as the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the first embodiment can be obtained. That is, the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a, is disposed on the lower side of the tank rail 553 and on the upper side of the back cover 640. The side can be received and adhered on the upper surface of the contact portion 640a formed by bending the side largely forward. Furthermore, it is arranged in parallel with the front surface of the contact portion 640a formed on the back cover 640 and the front wall of the gutter-shaped main guiding portion 553a, and is arranged so as to protrude downward from the bottom of the main guiding portion 553a. The contact portion where the rear surface of the top plate portion 551a is in surface contact with the cutout portion 553aa formed plurally in the main guiding portion 553a is largely shifted forward and is in contact with the contact portion. Are not formed. For this reason, the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa, comes into contact with the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the back box of the back unit 3000). The peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the display 3010 cannot fall down toward the cover 1501 and the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500.

  As described above, the contact portion 640a formed by largely bending the upper side of the back cover 640 toward the front is externally transmitted from the main guide portion 553a through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guide portion 553a. The metal powder of the dropped game ball B is sent to the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). In addition to functioning as an eave that can be prevented from falling down, it also functions as a tray for the metal powder of the game balls B. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an electric trouble due to the metal powder of the game ball B from the tank rail 553.

  In the configuration of the countermeasure against metal powder according to the fifth embodiment, the metal powder of the game ball B, which has fallen from the main guiding portion 553a to the outside via the cutout portion 553aa, is provided on the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 ( It cannot fall toward the cover 1501 and the base 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the effect display device 1600 attached to the back of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. For this reason, it is desirable to provide the cover body 1501 in the peripheral control unit 1500 with a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed on the upper side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate described later) in order to improve the cooling effect.

  Incidentally, a game machine provided with a tank rail for guiding a game ball from a ball tank to a downstream side has been conventionally proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2013-215440 (FIG. 2)). This tank rail was provided with a hole for discharging foreign matter generated by the game ball. However, if foreign matter falling from the hole provided in the tank rail adheres to the control board disposed below the tank rail, an electrical trouble may occur, causing the control board to malfunction or malfunction. Had become. In recent control boards, as the number of objects to be controlled increases, the pin interval between connectors becomes narrower. As the number of connectors increases, the interval between connectors becomes narrower, and furthermore, the pin interval between ICs becomes smaller. Therefore, it is necessary to take measures against electric trouble due to foreign matter falling from the tank rail.

[5. Overall configuration of gaming board]
The overall configuration of the game board 5 in the pachinko machine 1 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 130 is a front view of a game board in which a game panel is made opaque in a pachinko machine. FIG. 131 is a perspective view of the game board of FIG. 130 viewed from the front, and FIG. 132 is a perspective view of the game board viewed from the back. FIG. 133 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from the front, and FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the game board disassembled for each main member and viewed from behind. FIG. 135 is a front view of the game board with the game panel made transparent. FIG. 136 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the game panel is opaque and the inside of the game area where game balls circulate and obstacle nails are shown. FIG. 137 is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the attacker unit in the game board.

  The game board 5 of the pachinko machine 1 has a game area 5a into which a game ball B is hit by a player operating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180. In the game area 5a, a general winning opening 2001 for giving a predetermined privilege (for example, a payout of a predetermined number of game balls B) to the player by receiving or passing the game balls B, a first starting port 2002, a gate unit 2003, a second starting port 2004, and a special winning opening 2005 are provided. Therefore, the game board 5 receives or passes the game ball B to the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the gate unit 2003, the second starting opening 2004, the big winning opening 2005, and the like in the gaming area 5a. This is for performing a game in which the driving operation of the handle 182 and the distribution of the game balls B in the game area 5a are enjoyed.

  The game board 5 partitions the outer periphery of the game area 5a, and has a front component 1000 whose outer shape is substantially square when viewed from the front. And a plate-shaped game panel 1100. A plurality of obstacle nails N (see FIG. 136) abutting on the game balls B are implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a portion of the front surface of the game panel 1100 which is within the game area 5 a. The game board 5 has a board holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the game panel 1100, and a game performed by hitting a game ball B into the game area 5a, which is attached to the rear surface of the board holder 1200. A main control unit 1300 having a main control board 1310 (see FIGS. 115 and 179 and the like) for controlling the contents.

  Further, the game board 5 displays a game state based on a control signal from the main control board 1310, and a function display unit 1400 attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 so as to be visible to the player side, and a game panel. A peripheral control unit 1500 disposed on the rear side of the game panel 1100, an effect display device 1600 disposed at the center of the game area 5a in front view and capable of displaying a predetermined effect image, and a rear side of the game panel 1100. Further, there are further provided a driving board unit 1700, a front unit 2000 attached to the front surface of the gaming panel 1100, and a back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100.

  The effect display device 1600 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000, and the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear surface of the effect display device 1600. In addition, a drive board unit 1700 is attached to the rear surface of the back unit 3000 behind the effect display device 1600.

  The game panel 1100 has an outer periphery slightly larger than an inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000, and also holds a transparent flat panel plate 1110 and an outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 (see FIG. 141 and the like) to which the rear unit 3000 is mounted on the rear side while the rear unit 3000 is mounted on the rear side.

  The drive board unit 1700 includes a panel relay board 1710 that relays the connection between the main control board 1310 and various sensors provided on the game board 5, and a front unit 2000 and a back unit 3000 in response to commands from the peripheral control board 1510. And a panel drive board 1720 for driving the decorative board and the drive motor provided in the panel board, and a drive board box 1730 accommodating the panel relay board 1710 and the panel drive board 1720. The drive board box 1730 has a left side in rear view that is rotatably mounted on a rear surface of the back box 3010 in the back unit 3000 and a right side in rear view that is detachably mounted on a rear surface of the effect display device 1600.

  The front unit 2000 includes a plurality (four in this example) of general winning ports 2001 which are always open to accept the game balls B driven into the gaming area 5a, and a plurality of general winning ports 2001. A first starting port 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at a different position in the game area 5a, a gate section 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detecting passage of the game ball B, A second starting port 2004 in which game balls B can be received in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game balls B through the gate unit 2003, and a first starting port 2002 or a second starting port 2004. And a special winning opening 2005 in which game balls B can be received in accordance with a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result selected by receiving game balls B.

  Further, the front unit 2000 is attached to the center of the game area 5a in the left-right direction and right above the lower end of the game area 5a, and has a first start port 2002, and a front face of the start port unit 2100. A side unit 2200 that is mounted along the inner rail 1002 on the left side as viewed and has three general winning openings 2001, and is mounted along the inner rail 1002 at the upper left of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. It is attached to the side slope 2300 and the right side of the starting port unit 2100 which is the lower right corner of the gaming area 5a in the front view and has one general winning opening 2001, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005. The attacker unit 2400, the starting port unit 2100, and the side unit 2200, and the game area a, which is attached to the approximate center of the front view in a, and slightly upward, and has a gate-shaped center role 2500 having a gate portion 2003, and a center role 2500 to close the frame of the center role 2500. And a presentation effect unit 2600 attached thereto.

  The attacker unit 2400 has a general winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting a game ball B received in a general winning opening 2001 provided therein, and a second detecting game ball B received in a second starting opening 2004. A start port sensor 2402 and a special winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 are provided. The center role item 2500 includes a gate sensor 2506 that detects the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003.

  The back unit 3000 is mounted on the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with a front opening and a rectangular opening 3010a on the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. The back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B received in a general winning opening 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, and a game received in the first starting opening 2002. A first starting port sensor 3002 for detecting the ball B and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting near the first starting port 2002 are provided (see FIG. 179).

  In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a lower back effect unit 3100 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and an upper back effect unit 3200 mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. And a back left effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back right effect unit 3400 attached to the right side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. .

[5-1. Front component]
The front component 1000 of the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 138 is a front view of the front components and the game panel in the game board, FIG. 139 is a perspective view of the front components and the game panel as viewed from the front, and FIG. 140 is a view of the front components and the game panel as viewed from the back. FIG. FIG. 141 is an exploded perspective view of the front structural member and the game panel as viewed from the front, and FIG. 142 is an exploded perspective view of the front structural member and the game panel as viewed from the rear.

  The front component 1000 is formed entirely transparent. The front component 1000 has a substantially square outer shape when viewed from the front, has a substantially circular inner shape penetrating in the front-rear direction, and defines the outer periphery of the game area 5a by the inner periphery of the inner shape. An outer rail 1001 extending in an arc shape along the clockwise circumferential direction from the lower left end from the center in the left-right direction in front view and extending clockwise in the circumferential direction in front view, passing through the upper center in the left-right direction in front view, and extending obliquely to the upper right, An inner rail 1002 that is arranged inside the front component 1000 substantially along the outer rail 1001 and extends in an arc shape from the lower center in the left-right direction in front view to the upper left corner in front view, and a game is played on the lower right side of the lower end of the inner rail 1002 in front view. And an out guiding portion 1003 formed at the lowest position of the region 5a and inclined so as to become lower toward the rear.

  The front component 1000 includes a lower right rail 1004 and a lower right rail 1004 that are linearly inclined so that the right end side is slightly higher from the right end of the out guiding portion 1003 in a front view to the vicinity of the right side of the front component 1000. A right rail 1005 extending from the right end to the lower side of the upper end of the outer rail 1001 along the right side of the front component 1000 and having an upper part curved inside the front component 1000; an upper end of the right rail 1005 and the outer rail And an impact portion 1006 which connects the upper end of the game ball 1001 and which the game ball B rolling along the outer rail 1001 comes into contact with.

  The front component 1000 is rotatably supported by the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to be rotatable, and extends upward from the upper end of the inner rail 1002 so as to close between the inner rail 1002 and the front view clock. A backflow prevention member that is turned by a spring (not shown) so as to be rotatable in the circumferential direction and rotatable only between the open position where the outer rail 1001 is opened and the closed position. 1007.

  Further, the front component 1000 includes an out opening 1008 that penetrates forward and backward at the rear end of the out guiding portion 1003 at the lower center in the left-right direction in front view within the frame. The game ball B guided rearward by the out guiding unit 1003 is discharged to the rear of the front component 1000 (game panel 1100) through the out port 1008.

  In addition, the front component 1000 is located outside the vicinity of a portion of the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 that extends substantially vertically from the lower end thereof, below the out guiding portion 1003 and the lower right rail 1004, and outside the right rail 1005. Each part is provided with a security recess 1009 recessed rearward from the front end. When the game board 5 is mounted on the main body frame 4 and the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear protrusion 172 protruding rearward of the security cover 170 of the door frame 3 is formed in the security recess 1009. It will be in the inserted state. Accordingly, the space between the security cover 170 and the game board 5 (the front component 1000) is complicatedly bent by the rear projecting piece 172 of the security cover 170 and the security recess 1009 of the front component 1000. Even if an unauthorized tool such as a piano wire is allowed to enter the game area 5a through the space between the security cover 170 and the front component 1000 from below the front surface of the board 5, the rear projection 172 and the security recess 1009 prevent the tool. In addition, it is possible to prevent an unauthorized tool from entering the game area 5a.

  In addition, the front component 1000 includes a notch 1010 that is notched upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. The notch 1010 coincides with the notch of a panel holder (not shown) in the game panel 1100. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the lower full tank path passes through the notch 1010 and the notch. The front end openings of the lower normal payout passage 610a and the lower full tank payout passage 610b of the unit 610 face forward.

  Furthermore, the front component 1000 is formed at the upper left corner in a front view, and includes a function display unit attaching portion 1011 to which the function display unit 1400 is attached, and a certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 formed at the lower left corner. I have.

  In addition, the front component 1000 is formed substantially entirely transparent so that the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 disposed on the rear side can be visually recognized from the front. That is, through the front component 1000, a portion overlapping the front and rear of the decorative pattern 1150 described later can be visually recognized from the front (see FIG. 144).

  The front component 1000 includes columnar bosses 1020 protruding forward at four corners on the front surface. These four bosses 1020 are for positioning the front components 1000 in an overlapped state when transporting only the plurality of front components 1000 to prevent a load shift.

[5-2. Game panel]
The game panel 1100 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 138 to 145 and the like. FIG. 143 (a) is a front view of the gaming panel with the board cover removed, and FIG. 143 (b) is an enlarged front view showing the vicinity of the lower panel decorative board in FIG. FIG. 144 is an explanatory diagram showing the relationship between the decorative pattern of the gaming panel, the front component, and the front unit. FIG. 145 is a front view of the game board showing the relationship between the decorative pattern and the obstacle nail in the game panel.

  The game panel 1100 is attached to the rear surface of the front component 1000, and has the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 attached. The game panel 1100 has a flat panel panel 1110 whose outer periphery is formed slightly larger than the inner periphery of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and is made of transparent synthetic resin, and holds the outer periphery of the panel plate 1110. And a frame-shaped panel holder 1120 attached to the rear side of the front component 1000 and the back unit 3000 attached to the rear surface.

  Also, the game panel 1100 has a panel decoration board 1130 on which a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a for irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110 are mounted, and a board on which the panel decoration board 1130 is mounted on the panel holder 1120. And a cover 1135. The panel decoration board 1130 includes an upper left panel decoration board 1131 arranged at the upper left corner of the panel holder 1120 when viewed from the front, and a lower left panel decoration board 1132 arranged at the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 when viewed from the front. The board cover 1135 includes an upper left board cover 1136 for attaching the upper left panel decorative board 1131 to the panel holder 1120, and a lower left board cover 1137 for attaching the lower left panel decorative board 1132 to the panel holder 1120.

  The panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is formed of a synthetic resin plate such as an acrylic resin, a polycarbonate resin, a polyarylate resin, or a methacrylic resin, or an inorganic plate such as glass or metal. The thickness of the panel plate 1110 is thinner than the panel holder, and is the minimum necessary thickness (8 to 10 mm) that can be sufficiently held even when the obstruction nail N is planted on the front surface or the front unit 2000 is attached. It has been. In the present embodiment, the panel plate 1110 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin plate.

  The panel plate 1110 has an out recess 1111 which is the lowest position in the game area 5a and corresponds to the out port 1008 of the front component 1000 and is recessed upward from the lower end. The panel plate 1110 is provided with a plurality of openings 1112 that penetrate back and forth to mount the front unit 2000.

  Further, the panel plate 1110 has a plurality of positioning holes 1113 formed in a round hole and a short long hole penetrating back and forth, and is separated in the left and right directions at an upper edge and a lower edge, and is formed to be thin. And a plurality of engaging step portions 1114 provided. The positioning hole 1113 is for positioning with the panel holder 1120 by inserting the protruding pin 1124 of the panel holder 1120. The engagement step portion 1114 is to be detachably attached to the panel holder 1120 by being engaged with the engagement claws 1125 and the engagement pieces 1126 of the panel holder 1120.

  As shown in FIG. 143 (a) and the like, the panel plate 1110 has a large opening 1112 for attaching the center role 2500, which is offset to the upper right from the center in front view. As a result, the panel plate 1110 has a frame shape, and when viewed from the front, the width orthogonal to the distribution direction of the game balls B (the circumferential direction of the frame) has a plurality of games on the left and lower sides from the center. The ball B has a wide width that can be lined up, and the upper side and the right side have a narrow width where a plurality of game balls B cannot be lined up.

  The panel plate 1110 has a decorative pattern 1150 formed by a plurality of linear grooves on the rear surface. The decorative pattern 1150 of the present embodiment includes a plurality of horizontal lines extending horizontally at regular intervals, a plurality of upper right oblique lines rotated counterclockwise by 60 degrees at the same intervals as the plurality of horizontal lines, a horizontal line and an upper right oblique line. And a plurality of diagonal lines rising leftward, which are rotated clockwise by 60 degrees at the same interval as the plurality of horizontal lines, passing through the intersection with. In other words, the decorative pattern 1150 is a geometric pattern in which a plurality of regular triangular contours formed by a horizontal line, an upper right diagonal line, and a left upward diagonal line are arranged in a fixed pattern. The decorative pattern 1150, when assembled on the game board 5, has two regular triangular contour parts on the left and right sides of the first starting port 2002 and three regular triangular contour parts near the upper end of the inner rail 1002. Inside each of the above, there is further provided a picture composed of two regular triangles having different sizes.

  The decorative pattern 1150 has a V-shaped cross section. The decorative pattern 1150 can be seen from the front player side even when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 is not emitting light, and decorates the inside of the game area 5a. In addition, when the panel board 1110 emits light into the panel board 1110 by emitting the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration board 1130, the decoration formed in a geometric pattern composed of a plurality of regular triangular outlines. The pattern 1150 can be illuminated.

  The decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 is mainly composed of a radiating portion 1151 that reflects the light applied to the inside from the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 forward, and the light emitted to the inside from the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 forward. A radiation light guide 1152 that reflects light and guides the light along a line. The radiation light guide section 1152 satisfies at least one of a deeper groove and a longer perimeter in cross section as compared to the radiation section 1151. The radiation light guide section 1152 is formed so as to connect (or intersect) the plurality of radiation sections 1151, and irregularly reflects the light emitted from the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 to the inside in the panel plate 1110. Light can be guided in the direction in which the groove extends. In other words, the radiation light guide 1152 plays a role of guiding light from one of the plurality of radiations 1151 connected to itself to the other, so that the arrangement portion and the number of the panel decoration LEDs 1130a are reduced. Among the limitations, the sensitivity (the ratio of the amount of light emitted (reflected) forward) of the entire decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 is increased. Specifically, as shown by a two-dot chain line in FIG. Light is guided to the radiating portion 1151 disposed outside the area of the light region 1103, and the radiating portion 1151 emits light, so that the sensitivity of the entire decorative pattern 1150 is increased.

  Accordingly, the radiation light guide section 1152 has more light than the radiation section 1151 of the decoration pattern 1150 formed in a part where light from the panel decoration LED 1130a is hard to reach (a part outside the normal light guide area 1103). It is possible to make the radiating portion 1151 emit light with a sufficient amount of light by receiving light. Therefore, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 emits light, the light incident on the inside of the panel plate 1110 is reflected forward from the radiating portion 1151 and the radiating light guiding portion 1152, and the light from the outline of the plurality of regular triangles. The decorative pattern 1150 formed in a geometrical pattern can be illuminated with uniform brightness over substantially the entirety.

  The panel board 1110 has a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement. The plurality of obstacle nails N have specific obstacle nails N1 which have an important role in the game. As shown in FIG. 145, the specific obstacle nail N1 is disposed near a warp entrance 2501, a general winning opening 2001, a first starting opening 2002, and a gate unit 2003. When the specific obstacle nail N1 is distorted or bent by the contact of the game ball B, the probability that the game ball B can be accepted into the warp entrance 2501, the general winning opening 2001, or the like changes. The maintenance is always performed so that there is no distortion or the like.

  In this embodiment, as shown in FIG. 145, the decoration prohibited area 1104 is defined within a predetermined range (for example, a radius of 1.5 mm to 3 mm) around the specific obstacle nail N1, and the decoration pattern 1150 is included in the range. The radiation part 1151 and the radiation light guide part 1152 are not formed. Thereby, when the pachinko machine 1 is maintained, the specific obstacle nail N1 can be easily seen, and it can be easily confirmed whether or not the specific obstacle nail N1 is distorted. Also, since the grooves of the radiating portion 1151 and the radiating light guiding portion 1152 are not formed in the decoration prohibited area 1104 around the specific obstacle nail N1, the specific obstacle nail N1 is adjusted in order to adjust the specific obstacle nail N1 at the time of maintenance or the like. When the obstacle nail N1 is hit, the force is transmitted from the specific obstacle nail N1 to the radiating portion 1151 or the radiation light guiding portion 1152, so that the panel plate 1110 can be prevented from being cracked or cracked.

  Further, among the obstacle nails N excluding the specific obstacle nail N1, the obstacle nail N implanted at a portion overlapping with the decorative pattern 1150 is not shown, but the tip is implanted on the panel plate 1110. Protrudes inside the groove that forms the decorative pattern 1150. Therefore, when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 emits light to enter the inside of the panel plate 1110, the light is irradiated from the groove of the decoration pattern 1150 to the tip of the obstacle nail N protruding into the groove. Then, the light is reflected at the inclined tip of the obstacle nail N, and the tip of the obstacle nail N can be made to shine. Thus, the obstacle nail N can be illuminated, and the player can see a light emission effect that is not available in the conventional pachinko machine. In addition, in the game area 5a, the decorative pattern 1150 may be intentionally overlapped with the obstacle nail N implanted at a special site, whereby the decorative pattern 1150 and the luminous decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 are combined. The specially designed obstacle N can be illuminated, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted to the specially designed obstacle N, and the game ball B aimed at the special obstacle N can be driven. Operation can be performed.

  In the present embodiment, the decorative pattern 1150 composed of linear grooves is formed on the panel plate 1110 by cutting. The decorative pattern 1150 is formed before the formation of the planting hole for planting the obstacle nail N. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the cutting waste discharged by the formation of the decorative pattern 1150 from clogging the planting hole, and to plant the obstacle nail N in a good state.

  The panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100 is large enough to include the panel plate 1110, has a substantially rectangular outer shape, and is formed thicker (about 20 mm in the present embodiment) than the panel plate 1110. The panel holder 1120 is formed of a transparent synthetic resin (for example, a thermoplastic synthetic resin). The panel holder 1120 has a holding step 1123 which is substantially the same size as the panel plate 1110 and is recessed from the front side to the rear side, and has a holding step 1123 which is substantially the same size as the game area 5a in the front-rear direction. The through hole 1121 is provided.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 includes a cutout portion 1122 cut out upward from the lower end at the lower left corner in front view. The notch 1122 is formed so as to coincide with the notch 1010 of the front component 1000. When the game board 5 is attached to the main body frame 4, the notch 1122 penetrates through the notch 1010 and the notch to penetrate the lower part. The front end openings of the lower normal discharge passage 610a and the lower full discharge passage 610b of the full sphere path unit 610 face forward.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 protrudes forward from the holding step portion 1123 and is disposed outside the holding step portion 1123 with a plurality of projecting pins 1124 inserted into the plurality of positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110 respectively. The three engaging claws 1125 elastically engaged with the engaging step portions 1114 at the upper and lower left inclined portions of the panel panel 1110, and the panel projects upward from the lower outside of the holding step portion 1123. It has a pair of engagement pieces 1126 that respectively engage with the two engagement steps 1114 on the lower side of the plate 1110. The panel holder 1120 engages the engagement step 1114 on the lower side of the panel plate 1110 with the engagement piece 1126 from diagonally above the front, and then moves the upper part of the panel plate 1110 rearward to move the upper and lower left. By elastically engaging the engaging step 1114 of the inclined portion with the engaging claw 1125, the panel plate 1110 can be removably attached while being housed in the holding step 1123. At this time, the projecting pins 1124 of the panel holder 1120 are inserted into the positioning holes 1113 of the panel plate 1110, and the panel plate 1110 is positioned at a predetermined position with respect to the panel holder 1120.

  The panel holder 1120 has two substrate mounting recesses 1127 that are recessed from the front to the rear at the upper left corner and the upper right corner in front view outside the holding step portion 1123, and the rear side of each of the substrate mounting recesses 1127. And two connector recesses 1128 recessed forward from the front. An upper left substrate cover 1136 to which the upper left panel decorative substrate 1131 is mounted and a lower left substrate cover 1137 to which the lower left panel decorative substrate 1132 are mounted are respectively attached to the two substrate mounting recesses 1127 from the front. The upper board mounting recess 1127 is located behind the function display unit 1400. Further, the lower substrate mounting concave portion 1127 is located behind the certificate stamp attaching portion 1012 in the front component 1000. An engagement claw 1125 that engages with an engagement step 1114 at an oblique lower left portion of the panel plate 1110 protrudes from the lower board mounting recess 1127 at a boundary with the holding step 1123.

  In the connector recess 1128 of the panel holder 1120, the connector 1131a of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 attached to the board attachment recess 1127 and the connector 1132a of the lower left panel decoration board 1132 pass through the rear wall of the board attachment recess 1127. The connection connector 1131a and the connection connector 1132a are formed in such a size that a sufficiently large space is formed so that a finger can enter around the connection connector 1131a and the connection connector 1132a. This makes it easy to connect and disconnect a connection cable (not shown) to and from the connector 1131a and the connector 1132a.

  The panel decoration substrate 1130 includes an upper left panel decoration substrate 1131 and a lower left panel decoration substrate 1132. The upper left panel decoration board 1131 has a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the front surface. The plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 are arranged along the upper left diagonal part of the periphery of the panel board 1110, with the uppermost part facing rightward and the lowermost part facing downward. It is mounted so as to irradiate light, and so as to irradiate light downward and to the right so that the rest is perpendicular to the diagonally upper left portion of panel panel 1110. The upper left panel decoration board 1131 has a connector 1131a protruding rearward attached to the rear surface.

  The lower left panel decoration board 1132 has a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a mounted on the front surface. As shown in FIG. 143 (b), the lower left panel decorative board 1132 is cut out so as to avoid the lower engaging claw 1125 of the panel holder 1120, and a plurality of cuts are made in a state where the cut-out portion is avoided. The panel decoration LED 1130a is mounted so as to emit light upward, to the right, and to the upper right. The lower left panel decorative board 1132 has a connector 1132a protruding rearward on the rear surface.

  The panel decoration substrate 1130 is formed of a white member, and is not noticeable from the front. Further, the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 are side-view type wide-angle full-color LEDs, and can emit light forward.

  The panel decoration substrate 1130 is arranged such that the front surface (plate surface) on which the side-view type panel decoration LED 1130a is mounted is parallel to the surface of the panel plate 1110. Thereby, the dimension of the panel decoration board 1130 in the front-rear direction can be made thinner than the panel board 1110, and the panel decoration board 1130 can be attached to the panel holder 1120 without any problem, and the panel holder 1120 (game panel 1100) The decorative pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 can be illuminated while suppressing an increase in the dimension in the front-rear direction of the panel board 1110.

  The panel decoration substrate 1130 has a plate surface parallel to the surface of the panel plate 1110, and has a size that is sufficiently larger than the size of the panel decoration LED 1130a mounted on the plate surface (front surface). It has a plate surface. In other words, the panel decoration board 1130 has another area (excess area) where the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a having a size 40 to 100 times larger than the LED mounting area occupied by the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a to be mounted is not mounted. Region). Thereby, the mounting strength of the panel decoration board 1130 can be increased, and even if vibrations or shocks generated during transportation, installation, maintenance, and the like of the pachinko machine 1 act, the panel decoration board 1130 and the panel plate 1110 can be connected to each other. Can be hardly generated, and the optical axis of the LED 1130a for panel decoration can be suppressed from being shifted, thereby preventing a problem in light incidence on the panel plate 1110.

  Further, since the panel decoration substrate 1130 is mounted on the substrate mounting recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120 via the substrate cover 1135, vibrations and shocks generated during transportation, installation, maintenance, etc. of the pachinko machine 1 are provided. However, it is difficult to transmit to the panel decoration substrate 1130. Therefore, it is possible to reduce the vibration or the like acting on the panel decoration board 1130 (the panel decoration LED 1130a), suppress the decrease in the durability of the panel decoration LED 1130a, and reduce the panel decoration board 1130 and the panel plate 1110. Can be made hard to occur, and the optical axis of the panel decoration LED 1130a can be prevented from being shifted, thereby preventing a problem in light incidence on the panel plate 1110.

  The panel decoration substrate 1130 is attached to the rear side of the substrate cover 1135. The board cover 1135 is formed in a frosted glass semi-transparent shape so that the panel decoration board 1130 attached to the rear side is difficult to recognize, and is formed so as to diffuse light from the panel decoration LED 1130a. I have. Thereby, it is possible to reduce the possibility that the light emitted (leaked) forward from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 illuminates the player, causing the player to feel dazzling. It is possible to prevent the player from feeling uncomfortable.

  In the gaming panel 1100 according to the present embodiment, a decorative pattern 1150 having a plurality of regular triangular outlines is formed on a transparent panel board 1110, and is transparent and three-dimensional as compared with the conventional decoration using a print sheet. The decoration can be shown to the player. When the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 emits light, the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 can be made to emit light, and the game ball B in the game area 5a, which has not been seen in the past pachinko machines, is displayed. The luminous decoration of the distribution area can be shown to the player.

  In addition, since the decoration pattern 1150 is formed only in the decoration pattern forming area 1101 in which the game balls B in the game area 5a circulate through various flow paths, the decoration pattern 1150 is formed in the entire game area 5a. As compared with the case where the decorative pattern 1150 is formed, the cost for forming the decorative pattern 1150 can be reduced.

  Further, in the gaming panel 1100 of the present embodiment, since the upper left panel decoration board 1131 is disposed behind the function display unit 1400, when the LED 1130a for panel decoration of the upper left panel decoration board 1131 emits light, the function display unit 1400 is turned on. The light can be illuminated from behind, and the player can see a light emission effect in which the function display unit 1400 (function display unit), which is not provided in the conventional pachinko machine, is decorated with light emission.

  Also, in the gaming panel 1100 of the present embodiment, the lower left panel decorative board 1132 is disposed behind the certificate stamp attaching section 1012. The attached stamp (not shown) can be illuminated by illuminating it from behind, and the player can see a luminous effect in which a stamp that is not present in a conventional pachinko machine is illuminated.

  In the gaming panel 1100 of the present embodiment, no condensing lens or diffusion lens is arranged between the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 and the side surface of the panel plate 1110. Accordingly, the light from the panel decoration LED 1130a is directly radiated to the side surface of the panel plate 1110 over a wide range, and the light can be made to enter a wide range inside the panel plate 1110, and the decoration pattern 1150 is formed. Light emitting decoration can be made beautifully.

  Furthermore, in the gaming panel 1100 of the present embodiment, by providing the panel holder 1120 with the panel decoration board 1130 (panel decoration LED 1130a) for emitting and decorating the decoration pattern 1150 formed on the rear surface of the panel board 1110, When changing to a panel board 1110 provided with another different decorative pattern in order to change the model of the game board 5 or to make a minor change in the model, it is possible to cope only by exchanging the panel board 1110. The holder 1120, the front component 1000, the panel decoration board 1130, and the board cover 1135 can be used as common components. Thereby, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has high versatility with other models having the panel plate 1110 on which the other decorative patterns 1150 are applied, and aims to suppress the cost of the pachinko machine 1. be able to.

  Also, in the gaming panel 1100 of the present embodiment, the panel decoration substrate 1130 is mounted via the substrate cover 1135 in the substrate mounting recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120, and the panel decoration substrate 1130 and the panel plate 1110 are separately provided. I am trying to install it. Thereby, the panel holder 1120 from which the board cover 1135 and the panel decoration board 1130 are removed can be used for a pachinko machine (game board) having a normal panel board 1110 on which the decoration pattern 1150 is not applied. 1120 and front component 1000 can be common components. Thereby, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment has high versatility with other models having the panel plate 1110 on which the other decorative patterns 1150 are applied, and aims to suppress the cost of the pachinko machine 1. be able to. When used in a model having a panel plate 1110 on which the decorative pattern 1150 is not applied, a dummy board cover 1135 may be attached to the board attachment recess 1127 of the panel holder 1120, or the panel holder 1120 may be used. It may be used with the substrate cover 1135 and the panel decoration substrate 1130 attached.

[5-2-1. Second Embodiment of Decorative Pattern in Gaming Panel]
Subsequently, in the game panel 1100 of the game board 5, a decoration different from the decoration pattern 1150 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “decoration pattern 1150 according to the first embodiment”) illustrated in FIGS. 143 to 145 and the like. Panel panel 1110 on which pattern 1160 (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “decorative pattern 1160 according to the second embodiment”) is described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 146. FIG. 146 (a) is a front view of a panel plate on which a decorative pattern different from that of FIG. 143 is formed, and FIG. 146 (b) is a front view showing the panel plate of FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 146, the decorative pattern 1160 according to the second embodiment has a V-shaped cross section on the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110, similar to the decorative pattern 1150 according to the first embodiment. I have. The decorative pattern 1160 can be viewed from the front player side even when the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration board 1130 is not emitting light, and decorates the inside of the game area 5a. The decoration pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 can be illuminated and decorated by making the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration board 1130 emit light to make light enter the inside of the panel board 1110.

  As shown, the decorative pattern 1160 includes a general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200, a first starting opening 2002, a gate section 2003, a side slope 2300, a warp entrance 2501 of the center role 2500, A radiating portion 1161 that reflects light incident inside from the side surface of the panel plate 1110 forward is formed in a rear portion such as. Thus, when the decorative pattern 1160 (radiating section 1161) is illuminated, the general winning opening 2001, the first starting port 2002, the gate section 2003, the side slope 2300, the warp entrance 2501 of the center role 2500, etc. Can be illuminated from behind to make them stand out.

  Although not shown, the decorative pattern 1160 may be formed with a plurality of radiation light guides for guiding light from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 to the radiation part 1161. Further, the decorative pattern 1160 may be combined with the decorative pattern 1150.

[5-2-2. Adjustment of obstacle nail in game panel]
Subsequently, the adjustment of the plurality of obstacle nails N planted on the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 147 to 149 and the like. FIG. 147 is a front view showing a nail adjustment film for adjusting an obstacle nail implanted in a game panel. FIG. 148 is a front view of the main body frame shown with the game board mounted. FIG. 149 (a) is an enlarged explanatory view showing a state before the nail adjustment film is attached to the game board, and FIG. 149 (b) is an enlarged explanatory view showing the state where the nail adjustment film is attached to the game board. is there.

  As shown in FIG. 136 and the like, the game board 5 has a plurality of obstacle nails N implanted in a predetermined gauge arrangement in a game area 5a. More specifically, a plurality of obstacle nails N are planted on the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 between the inner periphery of the frame of the frame-shaped front component 1000 and the outer periphery of the frame-shaped center role 2500. Has been established.

  By the way, since the game is performed on the plurality of obstacle nails N implanted in the game area 5a, the game ball B driven into the game area 5a frequently comes into contact with the nail N, so that the operating time is long. Indeed, the distortion of the obstacle nail N increases. When the distortion of the obstacle nail N increases, the flow path of the game ball B changes from the state at the time of manufacture, and the winning opening (general winning opening 2001, first starting opening 2002, second starting opening 2004, large opening opening). (The winning opening 2005, etc.), it becomes difficult for the game ball B to be accepted, or the game ball B becomes difficult to pass through the gate portion 2003, so that the player cannot enjoy the game and the interest in the game is reduced. There was a problem. Alternatively, as the distortion of the obstacle nail N increases, the game balls B are more likely to be accepted into the winning opening, and the payout of the game balls B increases, so that the burden on the game hall side where the pachinko machine is installed is increased. There was a problem that increases. Further, when the distortion of the obstacle nail N becomes large, some players recognize that the game ball B is difficult to enter the winning opening just by looking at the board surface of the game board 5, and as a pachinko machine for playing. However, there is a problem that the game with the pachinko machine is avoided and the operation rate of the pachinko machine is reduced.

  In order to solve such a problem, on the side of the game hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, a hammer that hits the obstacle nail N and a nail adjustment in which a gauge ball having the same diameter as the game ball B is attached to the tip of an elongated rod. The distortion of the obstacle nail N is periodically adjusted by using a gauge for use. However, in the adjustment using the nail adjustment gauge, since the distorted nail N is adjusted by intuition or experience, the adjustment of the nail N is likely to vary. In addition, the adjustment of the obstacle nail N may be performed not only by a skilled technician but also by an unskilled technician. There was a problem that it took.

  To solve such a problem, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment is provided with a nail adjustment film 1170 as shown in FIG. The nail adjusting film 1170 is formed by, on a transparent resin film, a front pattern 1171 that is the same as the front view of the game board 5 (here, the front component 1000 and the front unit 2000) and a nail pattern 1172 that is the same as the obstacle nail N. Has been printed. The nail pattern 1172 is drawn in a circle having substantially the same diameter as the head of the obstacle nail N. In addition, the nail adjustment film 1170 has an identification unit 1173 indicating a specific obstacle nail N1 which plays an important role in a game among the plurality of obstacle nails N. The identification portion 1173 is a circle pattern having a diameter slightly larger than the nail pattern 1172. As a result, the specific obstacle nail N1 is drawn in a double circle with the nail pattern 1172 and the pattern of the identification unit 1173, and can be identified at a glance. In the identification unit 1173, circles of different line types are drawn according to the importance of the specific obstacle nail N1. Here, the degree of importance of the specific obstacle nail N1 is divided into “most important” and “important”, and “most important” is drawn by a dotted line (broken line), and “important” is drawn by a one-dot chain line. (See the enlarged view of FIG. 147).

  As a resin film constituting the nail adjustment film 1170, a polyethylene terephthalate film, a polyethylene naphthalate film, a polypropylene film, a polystyrene film, a polycarbonate film, a polyimide film, a polyphenylene sulfide film, a nylon film, an aramid film, a polyethylene film, a celluloid Film and the like. In the present embodiment, a material that easily generates (charges) static electricity is used as the resin film constituting the nail adjustment film 1170.

  The nail adjustment film 1170 has a positioning part 1174 for positioning with respect to the game board 5. The positioning part 1174 of the present embodiment is a hole into which four bosses 1020 (see FIG. 148) protruding forward from the front surface of the front component 1000 are inserted.

  In addition, the positioning part 1174 is not limited to the hole into which the boss 1020 of the front component 1000 is inserted. The front component 1000 or the main body frame 4 to which the game board 5 is attached from the front is projected forward. The game board lock member 505, the payout passage opening / closing door 613, the hook 652 for the door frame, the unlocking lever 656 for the outer frame, and the like may be inserted. Alternatively, the positioning unit 1174 may be positioned above the nail adjustment film 1170 (upper side) and inserted into a gap between the game board insertion slot 501b of the main body frame base 501 and the upper end of the game board 5 for positioning. good. Further, the positioning part 1174 is set to the left side of the nail adjustment film 1170, and when the door frame 3 is closed with respect to the main body frame 4, the rear left end of the left reinforcement frame 111 of the door frame reinforcement unit 110 in the door frame 3 is inserted. As a result, the pachinko machine 1 is inserted into the groove 530a (see FIG. 148) of the main body frame reinforcing frame 530 of the main body frame 4 to prevent an unauthorized tool from being inserted into the inside from the left side surface, and positioned. You may do it.

  Next, a method of adjusting the obstacle nail N using the nail adjustment film 1170 will be described. In a state where the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the island facility of the game hall, the door frame 3 is opened forward with respect to the main body frame 4. In this state, the nail adjustment film 1170 is put on the game board 5 attached to the main body frame 4 from the front, and the boss 1020 of the front component 1000 is inserted through the positioning part 1174, and the game board 5 The nail adjustment film 1170 is positioned. In this embodiment, since the nail adjustment film 1170 is formed of a material that is easily charged, the nail adjustment film 1170 is stuck to the front surface of the front component 1000 by static electricity when the game board 5 is charged. Therefore, the nail adjustment film 1170 can be positioned and fixed to the front surface of the game board 5 by the static electricity.

  When viewed from the front with the nail adjustment film 1170 positioned on the front surface of the game board 5, the front picture 1171 of the nail adjustment film 1170 matches the shape of the front component 1000 or the front unit 2000. The deviation can be confirmed. In this state, the head of the obstacle nail N can be seen through the transparent nail adjustment film 1170. When the obstacle nail N is distorted, the circle of the nail pattern 1172 and the circle of the head of the obstacle nail N are not concentric, and the centers of the circles do not coincide with each other ( FIG. 149 (b)). Thus, the obstacle nail N to be adjusted can be easily determined.

  Then, when adjusting the distorted nail N, the nail adjusting film 1170 is turned over, the relevant nail N is hit with a hammer, the nail adjusting film 1170 is covered, and the circle of the nail pattern 1172 is adjusted. The deviation from the circle of the head of the nail N is confirmed, and this is repeated to adjust the circle of the head of the obstacle N to be concentric with the circle of the nail pattern 1172. Further, when adjusting the obstacle nail N, since the identification portion 1173 indicating the specific obstacle nail N1 is drawn on the nail adjustment film 1170, the specific obstacle nail N1 is carefully adjusted.

  As described above, according to the nail adjustment film 1170 of the present embodiment, since the same front pattern 1171 as the front component 1000 and the front unit 2000 is drawn, the front pattern 1171 matches the front component 1000 and the front unit 2000. By doing so, the positioning of the nail adjustment film 1170 with respect to the game board 5 can be easily performed. In addition, since the identification portion 1173 indicating the specific obstacle nail N1 which plays an important role in the game is drawn on the nail adjustment film 1170, the position of the specific obstacle nail N1 requiring careful adjustment can be easily determined. Can be determined. Further, since the nail adjustment film 1170 includes the positioning portion 1174 into which the boss 1020 of the front component 1000 is inserted, the nail adjustment film 1170 can be easily positioned with respect to the game board 5. Therefore, by adjusting the obstacle nail N in accordance with the nail adjustment film 1170, the variation in the adjustment of the obstacle nail N can be reduced, and the inexperienced technician can easily adjust the obstacle nail N. In addition, the work time required for adjusting the obstacle nail N can be reduced.

  In the nail adjustment film 1170, the identification portion 1173 is shown as a circle with a diameter larger than the circle of the nail pattern 1172. However, the present invention is not limited to this. , May be color-coded.

[5-3. Substrate holder]
The substrate holder 1200 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The substrate holder 1200 is formed in a horizontally long box shape with the top and the front open, and the bottom surface is inclined so as to become lower toward the center in the left-right direction. The substrate holder 1200 has a discharge portion 1201 that is cut away from the front end toward the rear at the center in the left-right direction on the bottom surface. This board holder 1200 covers the lower part of the back unit 3000 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 from below and the rear side in a state where it is assembled on the game board 5, and has the main control unit 1300 on the rear side. A main control board box 1320 is mounted.

  When the substrate holder 1200 is assembled in the pachinko machine 1, the discharge unit 1201 is located immediately above the discharge ball receiving unit 628 of the base unit 620 b in the substrate unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Thereby, the game balls B discharged to the rear side of the game panel 1100 through the out port 1008 and the game balls B discharged downward from the front unit 2000 and the back unit 3000 can all be received. Can be discharged to the discharge ball receiving portion 628 below.

[5-4. Main control board unit]
The main control unit 1300 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. Main control unit 1300 is detachably attached to the rear surface of substrate holder 1200. The main control unit 1300 includes a main control board 1310 (see FIG. 179) for controlling the content of the game and the payout of the game balls B, and a main control board box 1320 that houses the main control board 1310 and is attached to the board holder 1200. And

  The main control board box 1320 includes a cover (not shown) and a base (not shown). The cover body and the beta body are made of polycarbonate resin and are molded transparently. The main control board 1310 can be accommodated in an internal space formed by the cover body and the base body. Since the cover body and the beta body are transparently molded from a polycarbonate resin, the state of the front side and the back side of the main control board 1310 (whether or not unauthorized alteration has been performed or an unauthorized IC is mounted) Is checked from the outside of the main control board box 1320. Further, the main control board box 1320 includes a plurality of sealing mechanisms corresponding to the cover body and the beta body, respectively. When the main control board box 1320 is closed using one sealing mechanism, In order to open the control board box 1320, it is necessary to break the sealing mechanism, and a trace of opening and closing of the main control board box 1320 can be left. Therefore, by looking at the traces of opening and closing, it is possible to detect unauthorized opening and closing of the main control board box 1320, and the deterrence against improper acts on the main control board 1310 is enhanced.

  The main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 is connected to the interface board 635 and the peripheral control board 1510. The main control board 1310 includes a function display unit 1400, a gate sensor 2506, a second starting port sensor 2402, a special winning port sensor 2403, a starting port solenoid 2412, an attacker solenoid 2414, a general winning port sensor 2401, and a general winning port sensor 3001. , The first starting port sensor 3002 and the magnetic sensor 3003.

[5-5. Function display unit]
The function display unit 1400 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. 130, FIG. 132, FIG. 140, FIG. 142, FIG. FIG. 150 is a schematic explanatory diagram of wiring routing from the function display unit on the main control board.

  As shown in FIG. 130, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. The function display unit 1400 can be visually recognized from the front (the player side) through the door window 101a of the door frame 3 in a state where the function display unit 1400 is assembled to the pachinko machine 1. The function display unit 1400 uses a plurality of LEDs based on a control signal from the main control board 1310 that is input to a connection connector 1400a that protrudes rearward from the upper side of the back surface, and uses a game state (game state). Or a normal lottery result or a special lottery result.

[5-5-1. Configuration of Function Display Unit]
Although not shown in detail, the function display unit 1400 includes a state indicator formed of three LEDs for displaying a game state, and two displays for displaying a normal lottery result selected by passing the game ball B to the gate unit 2003. A normal symbol display including LEDs and a normal reservation display including two LEDs for displaying the number of reservations relating to the passage of the game ball B to the gate unit 2003 are provided.

  Further, the function display unit 1400 includes a first special symbol display including eight LEDs for displaying a first special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B into the first starting port 2002, and a first starting port 2002. The first special reservation number indicator consisting of two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves relating to the reception of the game balls B to the second ball and the second special lottery result drawn by the reception of the game balls B to the second starting port 2004 A second special symbol display comprising eight LEDs to be displayed, and a second special reserve number display comprising two LEDs for displaying the number of reserves relating to the acceptance of the game ball B to the second starting port 2004. ing.

  Further, when the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result is “big hit” or the like, the function display unit 1400 includes a round formed of five LEDs for displaying the number of repetitions (number of rounds) of the opening and closing pattern of the special winning opening 2005. Display.

  The function display unit 1400 can display the number of holdings, symbols, and the like by appropriately turning on, off, and blinking the provided LEDs.

[5-5-2. Noise measures]
Here, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected, and a plurality of wires (hereinafter, simply referred to as “wires”) for transmitting a control signal from the main control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400 are sometimes used. Will be described in detail.

  As described above, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a. As shown in FIG. 132, the wiring FCBL electrically connected via the connector 1400a provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400 is drawn from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. When it is turned, it is bent downward below the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is gathered together by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and after the game panel 1100. The main control unit 1300 that is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower side is pulled downward along the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. Turned.

  Then, when the wiring FCBL is routed to the lower side of the main control board box 1320, it is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320, and the function display unit connector MFCN is provided along the lower side of the main control board box 1320. After that, it is electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN.

  As described above, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 has a longer wiring length, and particularly, the rear face of the game panel 1100 from the upper right corner of the game board 5 and the back box. The wiring FCBL routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 is bent downward below the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is formed by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 vertically formed along the right side of the back surface of the back box 3010. The main control board box 1320 is routed to the lower side of the main control board box 1320 along the right side of the main control board box 1320 on the rear surface of the board holder 1200 attached to the game panel 1100 at the lower rear side thereof. In the state where the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1 in the area where the wiring FCBL is routed in this way, the area in front of the payout unit 560 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. Will be arranged.

  Further, behind the function display unit 1400, the upper left panel decorative board 1131 is disposed as described above. As shown in FIGS. 132 and 142, the wiring UPCBL, which is a connection cable electrically connected via the connection connector 1131a provided on the back side of the upper left panel decoration board 1131, is bent upward on the rear side of the game panel 1100. Then, it is bent toward the rear surface of the back box 3010 at the upper side of the front surface of the back box 3010, and is routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 in a state close to (or in contact with) the above-described wiring FCBL. Then, it is bent toward the lower side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is combined together by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and below the peripheral control unit 1500. Then, it is routed to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. Then, the wiring UPCBL is separated from the path of the wiring FCBL described above, is bent toward the left side at the upper side of the driving board unit 1700 under the peripheral control unit 1500, and along the upper side of the driving board unit 1700. After being routed and routed above a predetermined connector of the panel drive board 1720 in the drive board unit 1700, it is electrically connected to the predetermined connector.

  As described above, the wiring UPCBL that electrically connects the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the panel driving board 1720 disposed behind the function display unit 1400 has a longer wiring length, and in particular, has an upper right corner of the game board 5. The wiring FCBL that is routed from the corner to the rear surface of the gaming panel 1100 and to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 is bent downward below the rear surface of the back box 3010, and moves up and down along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. The wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in a plurality of directions collectively extend to the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 and to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. Like the wiring FCBL described above, the area where the wiring UPCBL is routed is attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 115 when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1. Is arranged in front of the payout unit 560 that has been set.

  As described above, the payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 having a single guiding path for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner, and a single guiding path of the ball guiding unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out the guided game balls B one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward, A lower full tank path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B passing through the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side.

  Further, as described above, the game balls B are polished in the island facilities of the game hall, or rubbed with each other in the circulation between the island facilities and the pachinko machine 1, and are charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby causing electromagnetic noise. Release. For this reason, static electricity easily accumulates in the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 in which the game balls B can stay and the payout unit 560 are installed, and around the area.

  The main control board 1310 includes a main control MPU 1310a which is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs and various commands, a RAM for temporarily storing data, and the like, which will be described in detail later. Have. The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter, referred to as a "built-in reset circuit"). The forced reset by the circuit cannot be controlled and invalidated by a user program. Therefore, when a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is performed, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described later, and executes the main control side power-on process described later again. Will be done. In this case, since the main-control-side power-off process is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error of the RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a always occurs, as described later. The contents of the RAM are completely erased (cleared). That is, when the main control MPU 1310a is activated again after the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit, the RAM is cleared.

  In the present embodiment, a zip (Zigzag Inline Package) type package is adopted as a package of the main control MPU 1310a. The main control board 1310 projects from the soldering surface (the surface opposite to the mounting surface). That is, various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protrude toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320.

  As described above, since the static electricity easily accumulates in the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 are mounted and the surrounding area, when the electromagnetic wave noise is emitted by the electrostatic discharge, the function display is arranged in front of the payout unit 560. In some cases, the wiring may intrude into the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the unit 1400 and the main control board 1310, and the upper left panel decoration board 1131 disposed behind the function display unit 1400 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected. Invading the wiring UPCBL. Accordingly, the electromagnetic noise entering the wiring FCBL may jump out and enter the wiring UPCBL. On the contrary, the electromagnetic noise entering the wiring UPCBL may jump out and enter the wiring FCBL.

  For example, a wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 to the main control board 1310 temporarily moves in a wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. It is routed linearly from a predetermined position on the right side of the control board box 1320 toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 (for example, on the right side of the main control board box 1320 and approximately from the upper side of the main control board box 1320). It is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320 so as to be parallel to the upper side or the lower side of the main control board box 1320 where it has a quarter length. When passing over the function display unit connector MFCN disposed closer to the main control board box 1320, After being bent toward the side and pulled out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320 and then electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN, when the electromagnetic wave noise enters the wiring FCBL, the wiring FCBL is When routed in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, the front of the main control board 1310 corresponding to the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a (that is, the main When passing through the region (in front of the bottom plate of the control board box 1320), the electromagnetic noise enters the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a projecting toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 via the wiring FCBL, and has entered. Under the influence of electromagnetic wave noise, the main control MPU 1310a performs forced reset by its own built-in reset circuit. Door and there is a consuming fear.

  Note that, when a wiring accommodation groove is formed in the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 instead of in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control substrate box 1320, the wiring FCBL is After being drawn out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320, it is housed not along the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320, but drawn out from the lower side of the main control board box 1320. It is electrically connected to the unit connector MFCN. Also in this case, when electromagnetic noise enters the wiring FCBL, as described above, when the wiring FCBL is housed and routed along the wiring housing groove formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200, the main control MPU 1310a When passing through a region in front of the main control board 1310 (that is, in front of the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320) corresponding to the mounting position of, electromagnetic wave noise is transmitted to the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 via the wiring FCBL. There is a possibility that the main control MPU 1310a may be forcedly reset by its own built-in reset circuit under the influence of the penetrated electromagnetic wave noise.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 150, the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected and the mounting position of the main control MPU 1310a are represented by a functional display unit. The connector MFCN is disposed closer to the left side from the center of the lower side of the main control board 1310, and the main control MPU 1310a is disposed above a center line passing through the middle point between the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310. . That is, in the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged below the function display unit connector MFCN below a center line passing through the midpoint between the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310. By arranging the main control MPU 1310a above the line, the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a are separated from each other on the main control board 1310.

  This allows the main control MPU 1310a to be arranged at a distance from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected. It is possible to prevent the MPU 1310a from entering the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a projecting toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through a space separated from the main control board 1310 by the main control board 1310. Therefore, main control MPU 1310a can be protected from wiring FCBL into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Further, by arranging the main control MPU 1310a apart from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected, even if electromagnetic noise enters the wiring FCBL, the main control MPU 1310a is not affected. On the main control board 1310, or in a space where the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a are separated from each other on the main control board 1310, it is possible to attenuate electromagnetic wave noise that enters through the wiring FCBL. ing. Also in this regard, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  In the present embodiment, the main control MPU 1310a is arranged such that the right side of the package is separated from the right side of the main control board 1310 by at least a predetermined distance dimension (hereinafter, referred to as “first wiring separation distance dimension”). ing. This is because the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is routed downward along the right side of the main control board box 1320, so that the electromagnetic wave that has entered the wiring FCBL This is to prevent noise from entering various pins of the main control MPU 1310a projecting toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 from the wiring FCBL via a space having the first wiring separation distance dimension.

  Further, as described above, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 is provided in the wiring space formed between the rear surface of the board holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. (Or accommodated along the wiring accommodating groove formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200), without being drawn around, on the right side of the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. When it is routed downward along, it is bent toward the left side of the main control board box 1320, and is routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 to below the function display unit connector MFCN. The main control board box 132 is electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN. The distance dimension between the wiring FCBL routed along the lower side and the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 (hereinafter, referred to as "second wiring separation distance dimension"). ) Can be largely secured. The second wiring separation distance dimension has a larger distance dimension than the first wiring separation distance dimension. Thus, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL enters the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 from the wiring FCBL through a space having the second wiring separation distance dimension. Can be prevented. Also in this regard, the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  In this embodiment, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are directly electrically connected by the wiring FCBL. However, the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected to each other through the panel relay board 1710. It is also possible to configure so that the connection is established. In this case, it is preferable to provide an element capable of reducing or eliminating the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL on the panel relay board 1710 (that is, a plurality of elements that transmit a control signal from the main control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400). It is preferable to provide an element capable of reducing or eliminating electromagnetic wave noise with respect to the wiring FCBL). Thus, it is possible to prevent the electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring FCBL from affecting the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, main control MPU 1310a can be protected from wiring FCBL into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Examples of such an element include a resistor and a filter circuit. It is known from the observation result of the electromagnetic wave noise waveform that the waveform width of the electromagnetic wave noise falls within about 2 microseconds (μs). Designed to pass.

  Further, as such an element, in addition to a resistor, a filter circuit, and the like, an EMC countermeasure component (a coil, a bead, a capacitor, and the like) can be given. When a capacitor is used, it is inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wirings FCBL. When a more abrupt attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the plurality of wirings FCBL. May be inserted respectively.

  In addition, the panel relay board 1710 detects a game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 provided on the game board 5 and a gate sensor 2506 that detects the game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 provided on the game board 5. Large winning opening sensor 2403, general winning opening sensors 2401 and 3001 for detecting game balls B received in general winning opening 2001 provided in gaming board 5, and magnetism acting near first starting opening 2002 provided in gaming board 5. , Two wires from various sensors such as a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting the electric current are electrically connected and collected. That is, in the panel relay board 1710, in addition to the two wires from the various sensors, the wires FCBL from the function display unit 1400 are also electrically connected and collected. Note that two wires from the first starting port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received by the first starting port 2002 and a second starting port for detecting the game ball B received by the second starting port 2004 The two wires from the sensor 2402 are electrically connected directly to the respective predetermined connectors of the main control board 1310 without going through the panel relay board 1710.

  The panel relay board 1710 electrically connects the wiring FCBL from the function display unit 1400 in addition to the two wirings from various sensors to the main control board 1310 via the connector 1710a shown in FIG. I have. Therefore, when the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are configured to be electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710, the panel relay board 1710 can reduce or reduce the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL. By providing an element capable of removing (that is, by providing an element capable of reducing or eliminating electromagnetic wave noise to a plurality of wirings FCBL transmitting a control signal from the main control board 1310 to the function display unit 1400, respectively) ), It is possible to prevent electromagnetic wave noise from entering the two wires from various sensors.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the wiring UPCBL that electrically connects the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the panel driving board 1720 disposed behind the function display unit 1400 has a longer wiring length, as described above. In particular, the wiring UPCBL routed from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 is bent downward below the rear surface of the back box 3010, Since a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface are combined and routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 and to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700, wiring is thus performed. In a region where the UPCBL is routed, similarly to the above-described wiring FCBL, electromagnetic wave noise may enter. As described above, the wiring UPCBL is bent toward the left side at the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 below the peripheral control unit 1500 and is routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700, and After being routed above a predetermined connector of the panel drive board 1720 in 1700, it is electrically connected to the predetermined connector, so that the influence of electromagnetic wave noise due to the wiring UPCBL reaches the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500. There is a risk.

  More specifically, on the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500, the connectors CN2 to CN7 (see FIG. 176) provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the connector provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are described in detail later. CN8 and CN9 are arranged (see FIG. 176). Various wirings respectively corresponding to the connectors CN2 to CN9 are electrically connected. For this reason, when various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 and the wiring UPCBL are arranged so as to intersect or contact with each other (straddling), the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL jumps out to the connectors CN2 to CN9. When invading various wirings that are electrically connected, the effect of the electromagnetic wave noise that invades the wiring UPCBL causes, for example, the effect image drawn on the effect display device 1600 to be disturbed (for example, a pattern such as a black screen). Disturbance occurs).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, although not shown, various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 are routed along the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 so as to be separated from the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. I have. Thus, the wiring UPCBL routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 does not intersect or contact (straddle) various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9. Specifically, the wiring UPCBL routed along the upper side of the driving board unit 1700 does not contact in parallel with various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9, and does not electrically connect to the connectors CN2 to CN9. Does not come in contact with some of the various wires connected to In this embodiment, in order to prevent the main control MPU 1310a from being forcibly reset by the above-described built-in reset circuit, various wirings electrically connected to the main control board 1310 intersect or contact with the wiring UPCBL. Not arranged to be.

  Further, in the present embodiment, the wiring UPCBL that is routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 and along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 and the peripheral control IC of the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500 As a positional relationship with a mounting position of a peripheral control IC 1510a (to be described later shown in FIG. 150), the peripheral control IC 1510a is disposed above a center line passing through a midpoint between the right side and the left side of the peripheral control 1510. That is, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control IC 1510a is arranged above the center line passing through the midpoint between the right side and the left side of the peripheral control board 1510, so that the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a Are separated from each other.

  Accordingly, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 is arranged apart from the wiring UPCBL routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 and along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. Therefore, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL is accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 via the space separating the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the noise of the peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 is reduced. Intrusion into various pins can be prevented. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL into which the electromagnetic noise can enter.

  In addition, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500 is separated from the wiring UPCBL routed under the peripheral control unit 1500 and along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. Accordingly, even if electromagnetic noise enters the wiring UPCBL, the wiring UPCBL may be provided on the peripheral control board 1510 or in a space separating the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a so that the peripheral control IC 1510a is not affected. To attenuate the electromagnetic noise that enters. Also in this respect, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL into which the electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

  Furthermore, the board between the peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the panel drive board 1720 of the drive board unit 1700 is electrically connected via wiring (not shown), and the wiring and the wiring UPCBL intersect or contact with each other. Therefore, the electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring UPCBL is attenuated in the panel driving board 1720, so that the peripheral control board 1510 is connected from the panel driving board 1720 through the wiring. It is extremely difficult to invade the peripheral control board 1510 due to the electromagnetic wave noise. Also in this respect, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL into which the electromagnetic wave noise can enter.

  In the present embodiment, the panel drive board 1720 attenuates the electromagnetic wave noise entering through the wiring UPCBL by ground (solid earth). However, an element capable of reducing or eliminating the electromagnetic wave noise is provided. (That is, an element capable of reducing or removing electromagnetic noise from a plurality of wirings UPCBL transmitting a control signal from the panel driving board 1720 to the upper left panel decoration board 1131 disposed behind the function display unit 1400, respectively) It is preferred to provide). This makes it possible to reliably attenuate or eliminate the electromagnetic wave noise that enters through the wiring UPCBL in the panel drive board 1720. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL into which the electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Examples of such an element include a resistor and a filter circuit. It is known from the observation result of the electromagnetic wave noise waveform that the waveform width of the electromagnetic wave noise falls within about 2 microseconds (μs). Designed to pass.

  In addition, as such an element, in addition to a resistor, a filter circuit, and the like, an EMC countermeasure component (a coil, a bead, a capacitor, and the like) can also be cited. When a capacitor is used, it is inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wirings UPCBL. If a more abrupt attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into a plurality of wirings UPCBL, or a bead and a capacitor may be inserted. May be inserted respectively.

  By the way, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which a display device (display unit) for displaying a normal figure change display game, a special figure change display game, a display of a game state, and the like is arranged on the surface of a game board (for example, JP-A-2006-154676 (paragraphs [0014] and [0070], FIG. 2 and FIG. 21). The display of the display device (display unit) is controlled by a CPU (game control microprocessor) of the game control device. By the way, when electromagnetic wave noise enters the wiring for electrically connecting the display device (display unit) and the game control device (game control means), the CPU (game control microprocessor) of the game control device passes through this wire. There was a possibility of affecting.

[5-6. Peripheral control unit]
The peripheral control unit 1500 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG.
The peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes a peripheral control board 1510 for controlling an effect to be presented to the player based on a control signal from the main control board 1310.

  The peripheral control board 1510 of the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected to the main control board 1310, the effect operation unit 300, various decorative boards on the side of the door frame 3, and other boards (a peripheral data ROM board, a liquid crystal output board to be described later) and the like. ing. The configuration of the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described later.

[5-7. Effect display device]
The effect display device 1600 in the game board 5 will be described. The effect display device 1600 is arranged at the center of the game area 5a in a front view, and is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 via the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. The effect display device 1600 is detachably attached to a substantially central rear surface of a rear wall of the back box 3010. The effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the front side (the player side) through the frame of the frame-shaped center role 2500 in a state where the game board 5 is assembled. The effect display device 1600 is a 19-inch full-color liquid crystal display device using a white LED as a backlight. The effect display device is connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and can display a predetermined still image or moving image.

  The effect display device 1600 includes two upper fixing pieces 1601 protruding outward from the upper surface and lower fixing pieces 1602 protruding outward from the lower surface. The effect display device 1600 includes two fixing grooves 3010c opening on the upper inner peripheral surface of a frame-shaped liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b of a back box 3010 described below, with the liquid crystal screen facing forward. After inserting two upper fixing pieces 1601 from diagonally behind 3010, the lower fixing piece 1602 side is moved forward, and the lower fixing piece 1602 is inserted into the opening of the lock mechanism 3020, and the lock mechanism 3020 is viewed from the rear. Is attached to the back box 3010 by sliding to the right.

[5-8. Overall configuration of table unit]
The front unit 2000 in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 130, 131, 133, 134, 136, and the like. The front unit 2000 is attached to the panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 from the front, the front end protrudes forward from the front face of the panel board 1110, and a part of the rear end is an opening 1112 of the panel board 1110. And project rearward from the rear surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The front unit 2000 is capable of receiving a game ball B driven into the game area 5a and has a plurality (four in this example) of general winning ports 2001 which are always open, and a plurality of general winning ports 2001. A first starting port 2002 which is always open to receive the game ball B at a different position in the area 5a, a gate section 2003 attached to a predetermined position in the game area 5a and detecting passage of the game ball B, To the second starting port 2004 and the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004 in which the game balls B can be received in accordance with a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game balls B through the gate portion 2003. And a special winning opening 2005 that enables the reception of the game ball B according to the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by receiving the game ball B.

  A plurality (four in this example) of general winning openings 2001 are arranged below the center in the up-down direction in the game area 5a, three on the left and one on the right with respect to the center in the left-right direction. ing. The general winning opening 2001 on the left side is arranged at a lower part in the gaming area 5a, and the general winning opening 2001 on the right side is arranged near the right end in the gaming area 5a and lower than the center in the up-down direction. The first start port 2002 is arranged right above the out port 1008 at the lowermost end in the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a. The gate unit 2003 is arranged near the upper right corner in front view in the game area 5a. The second starting port 2004 is arranged below the right winning opening 2001 on the right side and higher than the first starting port 2002. The special winning opening 2005 is located on the left side of the second starting opening 2004 and at a height between the first starting opening 2002 and the second starting opening 2004.

  Note that the plurality of general winning openings 2001 (four general winning openings 2001) are winning openings (ball entry openings) having similar uses, and the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the gate section 2003 have different uses. It is a similar winning opening (ball entry opening). Here, the first starting port 2002, the second starting port 2004, and the gate unit 2003 will be briefly described as winning ports (ball entry ports) having similar uses. The first special lottery result is obtained by executing the lottery by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 based on the acceptance of the game ball B. The second special lottery result is obtained by performing the lottery by the main control board 1310 of the control unit 1300. The gate unit 2003 controls the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 based on the passing of the game ball B. This is because a normal lottery result is obtained by executing the lottery according to.

  The front unit 2000 is mounted right above the lower end of the game area 5a at the center in the left-right direction in the game area 5a and has a start port unit 2100 having a first start port 2002, and a left front view of the start port unit 2100. Side unit 2200 which is attached along the inner rail 1002 and has three general winning openings 2001, and a side slope which is attached along the inner rail 1002 at the upper left of the side unit 2200 when viewed from the front. 2300 and one general winning opening 2001, a second starting opening 2004, and a big winning opening 2005 which are attached to the right of the starting opening unit 2100 which is the lower right corner of the playing area 5a when viewed from the front. Above the attacker unit 2400, the starting port unit 2100, and the side unit 2200, within the game area 5a. A frame-shaped center member 2500 having a gate portion 2003 attached substantially at the center in front view and attached to the center member 2500 so as to close the frame of the center member 2500. And a presentation effect unit 2600.

[5-8-1. Starting port unit]
The starting port unit 2100 of the front unit 2000 is disposed immediately above the out port 1008 near the lower end in the left-right direction in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The starting port unit 2100 has a first starting port 2002 that is always open upward with a width that allows only one game ball B to be received. The starting port unit 2100 is entirely formed to be transparent, and the rear side (the decorative pattern 1150 of the transparent panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 and the back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 144).

  When the starting port unit 2100 is attached to the panel plate 1110, the general winning opening 2001 protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and is opened upward, and the first starting port 2002 is a center to be described later. It is located directly below the center of the stage 2503 of the accessory 2500. Therefore, when the game ball B is released downward from the center of the stage 2503, it is accepted to the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability. The starting port unit 2100 can guide the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and deliver it to the guide path in the back unit 3000. The game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is detected by the first starting port sensor 3002 provided in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 179).

  The first starting port sensor 3002 includes a first starting port sensor main side (hereinafter, referred to as a “first starting port sensor main side 3002a”) and a first starting port sensor subordinate side (hereinafter, “first starting port sensor 3002a”). The first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the first starting port sensor subside 3002b are at least erroneous detection prevention distance dimensions (14 mm in the present embodiment). And has a larger distance dimension than the diameter of the game ball (11 mm).) Since the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b use the same non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the first starting port are used. When the sensor ball 3002b and the sensor slave side 3002b are arranged in a state where the distance is equal to or less than the erroneous detection prevention distance dimension, the game ball B passing through the first starting port sensor main side 3002a is moved together with the first starting port sensor main side 3002a to the first starting port. The game ball B passing through the first starting opening sensor subordinate side 3002b may be detected by the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a together with the first starting opening sensor main side 3002a. This is because there are cases.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the first starting port sensor sub-side 3002b are spaced apart from each other by a dimension distance (43 mm in the present embodiment) larger than the erroneous detection prevention distance dimension. Thereby, when the first starting port sensor main side 3002a detects the game ball B passing through the first starting port sensor main side 3002a, the electrical influence of the detection reaches the first starting port sensor subordinate side 3002b. Thus, the physical structure prevents the first starting port sensor slave 3002b from erroneously detecting even though the game ball B has not yet passed through the first starting port sensor slave 3002b. When the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b detects a game ball B passing through the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b, Since the electric influence of the knowledge affects the first starting port sensor main side 3002a, the first starting is performed even though the game ball B has already passed the first starting port sensor main side 3002a. The mouth sensor main side 3002a can prevent erroneous detection by a physical structure. In this way, the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is first detected by the first starting port sensor main side 3002a by passing through the first starting port sensor main side 3002a, and then is detected by the first starting port sensor main side 3002a. After passing through the side 3002b, the first starting port sensor is detected by the slave side 3002b, and then discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port sensor 3002 composed of two sensors (double sensors) of the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the first starting port sensor sub-side 3002b is employed, so that the first starting port sensor is provided. The game ball B received in the mouth 2002 can be reliably detected. In addition, an illegal ball (a game ball, a metal ball having substantially the same diameter as this, or a synthetic resin ball having substantially the same diameter as this) to which a flexible string-shaped operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire, or a catheter) is attached. ) Will be described in detail later on a fraud detection process that can detect and report fraud by radio wave irradiation using the first opening sensor 3002 including two sensors (double sensors).

[5-8-2. Side unit]
The side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000 extends along the inner rail 1002 to the left of the starting port unit 2100 in the game area 5a, and is attached to the panel board 1110 from the front. The side unit 2200 includes three general winning openings 2001 that are open so that the game balls B can be always received. The three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200 are arranged in an arc along the inner rail 1002.

  In the side unit 2200, the rightmost general winning opening 2001 is opened upward at the same height as the first starting opening 2002 of the starting opening unit 2100. Is open upward at a position higher than the general winning opening 2001, and the leftmost general winning opening 2001 is open toward the upper left in front view at a position higher than the general winning opening 2001 on the middle side. I have.

  The side unit 2200 is entirely formed to be transparent, so that the rear side (the decorative pattern 1150 of the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 144). By attaching the side unit 2200 to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the three general winning openings 2001 protrude forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110. The side unit 2200 can guide the game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 to the rear of the panel board 1110 and deliver it to the guide path of the back unit 3000. The game ball received in the general winning opening 2001 is detected by the general winning opening sensor 3001 provided in the back unit 3000 (see FIG. 179).

[5-8-3. Side slope]
The side slope 2300 of the front unit 2000 is attached along the inner rail 1002 at the upper left of the side unit 2200 in a front view. The side slope 2300 includes a shelf 2301 that is inclined so that the right end is lower in a front view. The side slope 2300 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, and the shelf 2301 projects forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110.

  The side slope 2300 can guide the game ball B flowing down in the left area of the center role 2500 to the right. The side slope 2300 is formed entirely transparent so that the rear side (the decorative pattern 1150 of the transparent panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 and the back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 144).

[5-8-4. Attacker unit]
The attacker unit 2400 of the front unit 2000 is disposed on the right side of the starting port unit 2100, which is the lower right corner in front view, in the game area 5a, and is attached to the front of the panel board 1110 from the front. The attacker unit 2400 is formed substantially transparent in its entirety, and the rear side (the decorative pattern 1150 of the transparent panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 and the back unit 3000) can be visually recognized (see FIG. 144). The attacker unit 2400 is provided with one of the four general winning openings 2001, a general winning opening 2001, a second starting opening 2004, and a large winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 136 and the like).

  The attacker unit 2400 is formed in an L-shape in which the outer shape when viewed from the front is formed such that the upper end on the right side extends upward from substantially the center in the left-right direction. The attacker unit 2400 has a general winning opening 2001 which is always open upward at the upper right corner, and can open upward at a position on the left side of the general winning opening 2001 at a position closer to the left. Two starting ports 2004 are arranged. In addition, the attacker unit 2400 has a large winning opening 2005 that can be opened upward at the lower left of the second starting opening 2004.

  In the attacker unit 2400, the general winning opening 2001 is opened with a size slightly larger than the gaming ball B. In the attacker unit 2400, the second starting port 2004 is slightly larger than the game ball and is opened upward, and the large winning opening 2005 is approximately three times the outer diameter of the game ball in the left-right direction. It is open upward with a width of 5 times.

  The attacker unit 2400 includes a general winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting a game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, a second starting opening sensor 2402 for detecting a game ball B received in the second starting opening 2004, A large winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the game ball B received in the winning opening 2005 (see FIG. 179).

  The attacker unit 2400 opens and closes the second starting port door 2411 that can open and close the second starting port 2004, and opens and closes the second starting port door 2411 according to a normal lottery result drawn by passing the game ball B of the gate unit 2003. The starting port solenoid 2412, the special winning opening door 2413 capable of opening and closing the special winning opening 2005, and the large winning opening door 2413 are drawn by accepting the game ball B to the first starting opening 2002 or the second starting opening 2004. An attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes according to one special lottery result or a second special lottery result.

  As shown in FIG. 137, the attacker unit 2400 includes a right upper left passage 2421, a right upper passage 2422, and a right upper right passage 2422 through which the game ball B can flow downward on the left and right sides of the general winning opening 2001 arranged on the upper right. The lower right guide shelf 2423 and the lower right guide shelf 2423 are inclined downward to the left so as to dip below the general winning opening 2001 from the downstream end and merge with the upper right passage 2421. The second starting port upper guide shelf 2424 extending to the left so as to be lower toward the second starting port 2004 from directly below the upper right left passageway 2421, and the left end side of the second starting port 2004 is lower from the left end. A second start-up lower guide shelf 2425 extending to the left and a space below and below the second start-up lower guide shelf 2425 from the left end of the second start-up lower guide shelf 2425. A large winning opening upper guide shelf 2426 extending leftward so as to become lower from the rank toward the big winning opening 2005, and a large winning opening extending leftward so that the left end side of the large winning opening 2005 becomes lower from the left end. And a lower guide shelf 2427.

  In addition, the attacker unit 2400 opens leftward on the right end side of the second starting port upper guiding shelf 2424, and guides the game ball B downward from the second starting port 2004 and the special winning opening 2005 to the center right. A central left passage that opens upward between the passage 2428, the second starting opening lower guiding shelf 2425, and the special winning opening upper guiding shelf 2426, and guides the game ball B below the special winning opening 2005. 2429.

  The second starting port door 2411 is formed in a plate shape extending left and right so as to extend forward and backward and having a lower left end, and is opened upward by moving forward and backward. Can be opened and closed. The second starting port door 2411 is attached near the upper end of the second starting port 2004 so as to be able to move forward and backward. The second starting port door 2411 closes the second starting port 2004 by moving forward, guides the game ball B flowing through the second starting port upper guiding shelf 2424 to the left, and then sets the second starting port to the left. It can be delivered to the lower guide shelf 2425. By driving the starting port solenoid 2412, the second starting port door 2411 retreats backward, thereby opening the second starting port 2004 and receiving the game ball B flowing down to the second starting port 2004. it can. The second starting port door 2411 closes the second starting port 2004 when the starting port solenoid 2412 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the second starting port 2004 when the starting port solenoid is ON (when energized). Let it.

  The special winning opening door 2413 is formed in a plate shape extending left and right so as to extend forward and backward and having a lower left end, and opens and closes the special winning opening 2005 opened upward by moving forward and backward. It is possible. The special winning opening door 2413 closes the special winning opening 2005 by moving forward, guides the game ball B flowing through the special winning opening upper guiding shelf 2426 to the left, and then sets the special winning opening lower guiding shelf. 2427. The special winning opening door 2413 is opened by opening the special winning opening 2005 by retreating by driving the attacker solenoid 2414, and the game ball B flowing through the right guide passage 2510 of the center role 2500 is moved to the special winning opening 2005. Can be accepted. The special winning opening door 2413 closes the special winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is OFF (when not energized), and opens the special winning opening 2005 when the attacker solenoid 2414 is ON (when energized).

  When the attacker unit 2400 is attached to the front surface of the panel plate 1110, the general winning opening 2001 is located below (slightly leftward from immediately below) an opening on the downstream side of the right guide passage 2510 in the center role 2500 described later. The second starting port 2004 is located above the stage 2503 of the center role 2500, and the special winning opening 2005 is positioned below the stage 2503 of the center role 2500. In a state where the nail N is attached to the panel board 1110, a plurality of obstacle nails N are present between the lower end of the right guide passage 2510 of the center role item 2500 and the upper end (general winning opening 2001).

  Next, the flow of the game ball B in the attacker unit 2400 will be described. Since the general winning opening 2001 and the second starting opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 are located above the stage 2503 of the center role 2500 when assembled on the gaming board 5, the game ball B is Even if it is released, it will not be accepted in the general winning opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400. Therefore, only the game ball B that has flowed down the right side (the right guide passage 2510) of the center role item 2500 may be accepted in the general winning opening 2001 or the second starting opening 2004 of the attacker unit 2400. Downstream of the right guide passage 2510 of the center role 2500, a right upper left passage 2421, a general winning opening 2001, and a right upper right passage 2422 are opened side by side from the left, and a game ball flowing down the right side of the center role 2500. B will enter any of them.

  When the game ball B supplied above the general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 through the right guide passage 2510 of the center role 2500 is received by the general winning opening 2001, it is detected by the general winning opening sensor 2401. Is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) at the rear side of the game panel 1100. On the other hand, when the game ball B enters the upper right left passage 2421 on the left side or the upper right right passage 2422 on the right side of the general winning opening 2001 without being accepted by the general winning opening 2001, it falls onto the second guide opening upper guiding shelf 2424. Then, it flows to the second start port 2004 side (left side). In a state where the second starting port 2004 is closed by the second starting port door 2411, the left end side of the second starting port door 2411 is inclined so as to be lower, so that the left side of the second starting port door 2411 is left. To the second starting port lower guide shelf 2425, and is discharged to the left from the left end of the second starting port lower guide shelf 2425. When the game ball B passes through the second starting port upper guidance shelf 2424, if the second starting port 2004 is open, the game ball B is accepted into the second starting port 2004 with a high probability.

  The game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) behind the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2402. When the game ball B flowing down the right side of the center role 2500 is not accepted by the second starting port 2004, it is discharged to the left special winning opening 2005 side through the second starting port lower guiding shelf 2425. . When the game ball B released from the upper right left passage 2421 to the second starting port upper guiding shelf 2424 enters the center right passage 2428 from the right end side of the second starting port upper guiding shelf 2424, the second starting port 2004 There is no opportunity to be accepted into the special winning opening 2005 and the first starting opening 2002, and the game is discharged out of the gaming area 5a from the out opening 1008.

  The second starting port lower guide shelf 2425 is arranged above the special winning opening 2005 and the first starting port 2002, and a plurality of obstacle nails N are located on the left side of the second starting port lower guide shelf 2425. Has been planted. Then, the game ball B discharged to the left from the second starting port lower guiding shelf 2425 flows down to any of the first starting port 2002 side, the special winning opening 2005 side, and the center left passage 2429 side. Become. If the special winning opening 2005 is closed by the special winning opening door 2413 when flowing down to the special winning opening 2005 side, it is guided to the left by the special winning opening door 2413 and the large winning opening lower guide shelf 2427 is moved to the left. Is released to the left. When the special winning opening door 2413 closing the special winning opening 2005 retreats and the special winning opening 2005 is opened, the game ball B flowing down from the second starting opening lower guide shelf 2425 to the special winning opening 2005 side. Is received in the special winning opening 2005. The game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005 is detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403 and then discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) behind the gaming panel 1100.

  The game ball B that has entered the center left passage 2429 from the second starting port lower guide shelf 2425 and the game ball B that has been discharged to the left from the special winning port lower guide shelf 2427 are played through the out port 1008. It is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) behind the panel 1100.

  The game ball B that has flowed down from the second starting port lower guide shelf 2425 to the first starting port 2002 via the obstacle nail N may be accepted by the first starting port 2002. The game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 is discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) after being detected by the first starting port sensor 3002 on the rear side of the game panel 1100. On the other hand, the game balls B not received in the first starting port 2002 pass through the out port 1008 at the lower end of the game area 5a and are discharged downward (on the substrate holder 1200) behind the game panel 1100.

[5-8-5. Center role]
The center role 2500 of the front unit 2000 is disposed above the starting port unit 2100, the side unit 2200, and the like, in the game area 5a, substantially at the center in front view, and slightly upward. It is attached to the front of 1110. The center role 2500 is formed in a frame shape, and it is possible to visually recognize, from the front, various effect units provided in the effect display device 1600 and the back unit 3000 disposed behind the game panel 1100 through the frame. it can. The center role 2500 is formed substantially transparent so that the rear side (the decorative pattern 1150 of the transparent panel board 1110 of the game panel 1100 and the back unit 3000) can be visually recognized.

  In the frame-shaped center role 2500, the entire circumference excluding the lower side protrudes forward from the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, and the game ball B driven into the game area 5a is positioned inside the frame. To prevent intrusion.

  The center role item 2500 has a warp entrance 2501 on the outer peripheral surface on the left side when viewed from the front, in which the game ball B in the game area 5a is open to enter, and a game ball B entering the warp entrance 2501 can be released. There is provided a warp exit 2502 that opens inside, and a stage 2503 that can release the game ball B released from the warp exit 2502 in the left-right direction and then into the game area 5a after rolling.

  The stage 2503 of the center role 2500 has a curved shape in which the center side in the left-right direction is depressed, and corresponds to a position directly above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, that is, the center role 2500 is placed on the game panel 1100 (panel board). 1110), it is formed in a wavy shape such that the substantially central position in the left-right direction is slightly higher than the left and right sides thereof. The stage 2503 is tilted so that a portion (top) slightly higher than the left and right sides at the center in the left and right direction and a lowest portion (valley) on the left and right sides thereof become lower toward the front. The game balls B can be released into the game area 5a from those portions.

  When the center role item 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the raised portion (top) in the center in the left-right direction of the stage 2503 is located immediately above the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100. Thereby, when the game ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503, it is accepted in the first starting port 2002 with an extremely high probability.

  In addition, the center role 2500 is located at a position slightly below the upper right corner in front view (a position immediately below the stop portion 1006 of the front component 1000 when assembled to the game board 5). A gate space forming portion 2505 that forms a space of a predetermined size through which the game ball B can flow between the rail 1005 and the game ball B from the downstream end of the gate space forming portion 2505 along the outer peripheral surface on the right side in front view. And a right guide passage 2510 that is caused to flow down, to be guided slightly to the left near the lower end, and then to be discharged downward.

  The center role item 2500 has a gate portion 2003 provided in the center of the gate space forming portion 2505, and a gate sensor 2506 for detecting a game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003 is attached. The gate space forming part 2505 is large enough to allow the game balls B to flow on both left and right sides of the gate part 2003. In the space formed by the gate space forming portion 2505, a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted above the gate portion 2003.

  The right guide passage 2510 is formed such that the downstream end of the right guide passage 2510 is located slightly to the right of the general winning opening 2001 in the attacker unit 2400 in a state where the center role item 2500 is assembled on the game board 5. I have.

  When the center role 2500 is assembled on the game board 5, the distance between the right side of the center of the upper outer peripheral surface and the outer rail 1001 of the front component 1000 is slightly smaller than the outer diameter of the game ball B. It is formed so as to be largely apart. Thereby, when the game ball B is driven into the game area 5a so as to flow on the right side of the center role item 2500 (so-called right-handed), the space formed by the gate space forming part 2505 and the right guide passage 2510 Are always circulated and flow down above the attacker unit 2400. Therefore, in order to pass the game ball B to the gate portion 2003, it is necessary to make a right-hand shot, and by right-handing when the special winning opening 2005 is opened, a high probability of a game ball being sent to the special winning opening 2005 is obtained. B can be accepted.

  In addition, the center role item 2500 includes a sub-function display unit 2520 in a frame in the upper right corner. The sub-function display unit 2520 has a plurality of full-color LEDs. The sub-function display unit 2520 is interlocked with the ordinary symbol display, the first special symbol display, and the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400. The normal lottery result drawn by passing game ball B to 2003 and the first special lottery result and second special lottery result drawn by accepting game ball B to first starting port 2002 and second starting port 2004 are displayed. Is what you do.

  Since the center role 2500 is formed substantially transparent, the flange-shaped portion that comes into contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100 is also formed transparent. Therefore, when the center role 2500 is attached to the game panel 1100, the decoration pattern 1150 formed on the rear panel 1110 is visually recognized from the front through the center role 2500 as shown in FIG. 144 in an enlarged manner. be able to. Thereby, when assembling to the game board 5, the part where the decorative pattern 1150 and the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 in the rendering unit 2600 described later are interrupted is made as narrow as possible. Thus, the continuity between the decorative pattern 1150 and the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 can be enhanced, and a sense of unity can be given.

[5-8-6. Table production unit]
Next, the table presentation unit 2600 in the table unit 2000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 151 to 154 and the like. FIG. 151 is a front view of the presentation effect unit. FIG. 152 is a front view showing a state where the first pattern is illuminated and decorated in the display effect unit, and FIG. 153 is a front view showing a state where the second pattern is illuminated and decorated in the display effect unit. FIG. 154 is a front view showing a state in which the second pattern of the presentation effect unit different from that of the present embodiment is decorated with light emission.

  The presentation effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 is attached to the center role 2500 so as to close the inside of the frame of the frame-shaped center role 2500. The display effect unit 2600 is attached to the rear side of the center role 2500 and is a transparent flat light guide plate 2601 that closes the frame of the center role 2500 and allows light to enter from the upper surface of the light guide 2601. A first pattern decoration board 2612 on which a plurality of LEDs 2611 for a first pattern 2610 to be light-emission-decorated are mounted, and a second pattern 2620 to be light-emission-decorated by irradiating light from the right side of the light guide plate 2601. A second pattern decorative substrate 2622 on which the plurality of LEDs 2621 are mounted, and a plurality of diffusion lenses 2623 provided between the right side surface of the light guide plate 2601 and the LEDs 2621 to diffuse light from the LEDs 2621. ing. The LED 2611 and the LED 2621 are full color LEDs.

  The light guide plate 2601 includes a first pattern 2610 (see FIG. 152) formed by an innumerable upper reflection portion having an uneven shape that reflects only light from above in the forward direction, and forwards only light from the right direction. And a second pattern 2620 (see FIG. 153) formed by an innumerable number of right and left reflecting portions having an uneven shape to be reflected. That is, when the LED of the first design decorative board 2612 emits 2611 light, the display effect unit 2600 can cause the first picture 2610 to emit light, and when the LED 2621 of the second design decorative board 2622 emits light, The two patterns 2620 can be displayed by light emission.

  In the light guide plate 2601, the innumerable upper reflection portions forming the first pattern 2610 and the innumerable right reflection portions forming the second pattern 2620 are each formed with minute irregularities. In a state where the LED 2611 of the picture decoration board 2612 and the LED 2621 of the second picture decoration board 2622 do not emit light, it looks transparent, and various decorative bodies and the effect display device 1600 of the back unit 3000 arranged on the rear side are displayed. Can be visually recognized in a favorable state.

  The plurality of upper reflecting portions forming the first pattern 2610 and the right reflecting portion forming the second pattern 2620 are perpendicular to a straight line connected to the corresponding LED 2611 or LED 2621, respectively. It has a plane that extends and is inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the rear surface of the light guide plate 2601. The upper reflector and the right reflector are recessed in a pent roof triangle. The upper reflector and the right reflector reflect light incident from the corresponding LED 2611 or LED 2621 in a direction substantially parallel to a vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate 2601. On the other hand, light incident from unsupported LEDs 2611 and 2621 is reflected in a direction inclined with respect to a vertical line on the front surface of the light guide plate 2601. Therefore, only the light from the corresponding LED 2611 or LED 2621 can reach the eyes of the player located in front of the light guide plate 2601.

  The plurality of LEDs 2611 mounted on the lower surface of the first picture decoration board 2612 are arranged in a line in the left-right direction, and are grouped into four groups of a first LED 2611a, a second LED 2611b, a third LED 2611c, and a fourth LED 2611d. Divided. The first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, and the fourth LED 2611d are arranged in a predetermined number (here, three) from the left so as to make two rounds.

  As shown in FIG. 152, the first pattern 2610 is a pattern related to the decorative pattern 1150 formed on the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100. The first picture 2610 is a picture composed of a plurality of equilateral triangles bordered by respective extension lines of the horizontal line, upper right diagonal line, and left upward diagonal line forming the decorative pattern 1150 (see FIG. 168). . The first pattern 2610 is composed of six large triangular patterns having substantially the same size as a regular triangle formed by collecting four contours of one regular triangle in the decorative pattern 1150, and a contour of one regular triangle in the decorative pattern 1150. And a plurality of small triangular patterns that fit inside. The six large triangle patterns are arranged in a circle around the center of the game area 5a so that the whole becomes a hexagon, and a plurality of small triangle patterns are arranged so as to surround the six large triangle patterns. Are located.

  The large triangle pattern of the first pattern 2610 is superimposed such that a plurality of equilateral triangles having different sizes are eccentric to the vertex side near the center of the game area 5a, and the sizes are reduced in order. It is formed in a simple pattern. The small triangular pattern of the first pattern 2610 is formed in a pattern in which contour lines of a regular triangle are arranged concentrically.

  The first pattern 2610 is composed of a first pattern part 2610a composed of a plurality of upper reflection parts corresponding to the first LED 2611a, and a second pattern part 2610b composed of a plurality of upper reflection parts corresponding to the second LED 2611b. And a third picture portion 2610c constituted by a plurality of upper reflection portions corresponding to the third LED 2611c, and a fourth picture portion 2610d constituted by a plurality of upper reflection portions corresponding to the fourth LED 2611d. It is configured.

  The first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the third pattern portion 2610c such that a large triangular pattern in which a plurality of equilateral triangles having different sizes are overlapped in the first pattern 2610 are sequentially reduced in size. , A fourth pattern portion 2610d, a first pattern portion 2610a, a second pattern portion 2610b, and a third pattern portion 2610c are eccentrically stacked toward the center of the game area 5a. On the other hand, a small triangular pattern composed of a plurality of regular triangular contours in the first pattern 2610 has a first pattern portion 2610a, a second pattern portion 2610b, a third pattern portion 2610c, and a The four picture portions 2610d are arranged concentrically in this order.

  As shown in FIG. 153, the second pattern 2620 is a pattern having a guide (message) to the player including characters “CHANCE!”.

  As a second embodiment of the presentation effect unit 2600, a second pattern 2630 as shown in FIG. 154 may be displayed by light emission. The second pattern 2630 is a pattern related to the decorative pattern 1150 formed on the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100. The second pattern 2630 is a geometric pattern in which the horizontal line, the upper right diagonal line, and the left upward diagonal line forming the decorative pattern 1150 are each extended with a thick width (see FIG. 170).

  Next, the light emitting effect by the display effect unit 2600 of the embodiment will be described in detail. When the first LED 2611a of the first design decorative board 2612 emits light, the light incident on the light guide plate 2601 is reflected to the front at the first design portion 2610a, and the remaining second design portion 2610b and the third design portion are provided. 2610c, the fourth pattern portion 2610d, and the second pattern 2620 are reflected to other than the front, so that only the first pattern portion 2610a appears to be shining from the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine 1. When the second LED 2611b of the first design decoration board 2612 emits light, the light incident on the light guide plate 2601 is reflected to the front by the second design part 2610b, and the remaining first design part 2610a and the third In the picture part 2610c, the fourth picture part 2610d, and the second picture 2620, the light is reflected to other than the front, so that only the second picture part 2610b appears to be shining from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1.

  When the third LED 2611c of the first design decoration board 2612 emits light, the light incident on the light guide plate 2601 is reflected to the front by the third design portion 2610c, and the remaining first design portion 2610a and the second In the picture part 2610b, the fourth picture part 2610d, and the second picture 2620, since the light is reflected to other than the front, only the third picture part 2610c appears to be shining from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. Further, when the fourth LED 2611d of the first design decorative board 2612 emits light, the light incident into the light guide plate 2601 is reflected to the front by the fourth design portion 2610d, and the remaining first design portion 2610a and the second In the picture part 2610b, the third picture part 2610c, and the second picture 2620, the light is reflected to other than the front, so that only the fourth picture part 2610d appears to be shining from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1.

  In the first pattern 2610, in the portion of the large triangle pattern, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, the fourth pattern portion 2610d, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b and a third pattern portion 2610c are eccentrically superimposed on the center side of the game area 5a, and in a small triangular pattern portion, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the third pattern portion 2610c. , The fourth picture portion 2610d, concentrically arranged toward the center in the order of, the first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, the fourth LED 2611d, in order to emit light, the first picture The portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, and the fourth pattern portion 2610d emit light in this order, and the center is from the outside. Towards a like motion to move it can be performed emission effect, such as animation.

  On the other hand, when light is emitted in the order of the fourth LED 2611d, the third LED 2611c, the second LED 2611b, and the first LED 2611a, the order of the fourth pattern portion 2610d, the third pattern portion 2610c, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the first pattern portion 2610a is increased. It is possible to perform a light emission effect such as an animation in which the light is emitted from the center and moves outward from the center side.

  Furthermore, when the first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, and the fourth LED 2611d emit light of different colors, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, and the fourth pattern portion 2610d are turned on. Can emit light of different colors.

  Further, when the plurality of LEDs 2621 of the second pattern decoration substrate 2622 emit light, the light incident on the light guide plate 2601 is reflected to the front by the second pattern 2620, and the remaining first pattern portion 2610a and the second pattern The part 2610b, the third picture part 2610c, and the fourth picture part 2610d are reflected to other than the front, so that only the second picture 2620 appears to be shining from the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1. Therefore, the second pattern 2620 composed of the characters “CHANCE!” Can be emitted by the plurality of LEDs 2621.

  As described above, according to the presentation effect unit 2600, a plurality of (three or more) different patterns (the first pattern part 2610 a, the second pattern part 2610 b, the third pattern part 2610 c, the third pattern part 2610 c) are formed by one light guide plate 2601. Since the four picture portions 2610d) can emit light, it is not necessary to provide a plurality of light guide plates for each picture in order to perform animation display or the like, and the thickness in the front-rear direction can be made as thin as possible. Therefore, a large space can be easily secured behind the light guide plate 2601, so that other effect units can be arranged in the space, and the appeal to the player can be enhanced, and the player can be enhanced. Can be enjoyed, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

  In addition, the light guide plate 2601 allows the translucent first pattern 2610 to appear in front of the back unit 3000 and the effect display device 1600 to show a light-emitting decoration that moves like an animation. It can have a strong impact on players who are familiar with the luminous effect that was used, and can surprise and entertain the player, as well as make the player think that there is something good It is possible to increase the player's expectation of the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, since the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 are patterns related to the decorative pattern 1150 formed on the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100, the inside and outside of the frame of the center role 2500 are continuous. A decoration with a sense of unity can be shown to the player, and the appearance in the game area 5a can be improved.

  In addition, since only the player sitting in front of the pachinko machine 1 can view the luminous display of the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2620 by the light guide plate 2601 satisfactorily, other games distant from the front. From the player, the luminous display of the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2620 becomes difficult to see, and it is possible to make it difficult for other players to notice that the effect using the light guide plate 2601 is being performed, It is possible to prevent other players from paying attention and to play the game without worrying about the other players, thereby making it possible to entertain the game and to suppress a decrease in interest.

[5-9. Back unit]
The back unit 3000 in the game board 5 will be described mainly with reference to FIG. FIG. 155 is a perspective view of the back unit as viewed from the front. The back unit 3000 is attached to the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 in the gaming panel 1100, and the peripheral control unit 1500, the effect display device 1600, and the drive board unit 1700 are attached to the rear side.

  The back unit 3000 is mounted on the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 and has a box-like shape with a front opening and a rectangular opening 3010a on the rear wall. A lock mechanism 3020 for detachably attaching the display device 1600. The back unit 3000 includes a general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects a game ball B received in a general winning opening 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 of the front unit 2000, and a second opening unit 2100 that is provided in the starting unit 2100. A first starting port sensor 3002 for detecting a game ball B received in one starting port 2002 and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting near the first starting port 2002 are provided (see FIG. 179). .

  In addition, the back unit 3000 includes a lower back effect unit 3100 attached below the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and an upper back effect unit 3200 mounted above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. And a back left effect unit 3300 attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010, and a back right effect unit 3400 attached to the right side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. .

  Further, the back unit 3000 receives the game balls B received at the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100 and the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200 and guided to the rear of the game panel 1100, respectively, and And a guide path for discharging into the substrate holder 1200.

  The back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 has a box-like shape with an open front and an opening 3010a penetrating the rear wall in a square shape, and a flat frame-like shape protruding rearward with a gap from the periphery of the opening 3010a. A liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b, two fixing grooves 3010c into which the upper fixing piece 1601 of the effect display device 1600 is recessed upward from the inside of the frame at the upper side of the liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b; A notch portion 3010d, which is cut out from the rear end to the rear wall of the back box 3010 near the center of the lower side in the left-right direction, to which the lock mechanism 3020 is attached (see FIGS. 133 and 134).

  The opening 3010a of the back box 3010 is formed to have substantially the same size as the display screen of the effect display device 1600. The liquid crystal mounting portion 3010b is formed in a size that allows the effect display device 1600 to be fitted into the frame. The lock mechanism 3020 is attached to the back box 3010 so that the lock mechanism 3020 is slidable left and right on the left side of the rear surface of the cutout portion 3010d in a rear view.

  Further, the back box 3010 includes a flat fixing piece 3010e extending outward from the front end. The fixed piece 3010e is attached to the panel holder 1120 with the front surface in contact with the rear surface of the panel holder 1120 of the game panel 1100. In the back box 3010, bosses and mounting holes for mounting each movable effect unit and the like are formed at appropriate positions.

[5-9-1. Back lower production unit]
Next, the underside effect unit 3100 in the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 155 to 158 and the like. FIG. 156 is an exploded perspective view of the underside movable decorative body provided in the underside production unit in the backside unit as viewed from the front. FIG. 157 is an exploded perspective view of the lower back movable decorative body provided in the lower back effect unit when viewed from behind. FIG. 158 is a front view showing the movement of the lower back movable decorative body. The lower back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the lower side of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010.

  The underside effect unit 3100 extends in the left-right direction so as to straddle the underside movable decorative body 3110 having an equilateral triangle and a front-pointed triangular pyramid shape, and the effect display device 1600. A lower movable arm 3130 (see FIG. 161 and the like) to which the lower movable decorative body 3110 is attached and both ends in the left-right direction are movably supported in the vertical direction, and a lower movable arm 3130 in the vertical direction. And a back-and-back elevating mechanism 3150 for moving.

  The lower back movable decorative body 3110 includes a disc-shaped decorative body base 3111 attached to the lower back moving arm 3130, and a lower back rotary drive motor mounted to the rear surface of the decorative body base 3111 with the rotation axis protruding forward. 3112; a drive gear 3113 attached to the rotation shaft of the lower back rotation drive motor 3112; a transmission gear member 3114 rotated by the drive gear 3113 and rotatably attached to the ornament base 3111; A rear-stage base 3115 rotatably supported by the base 3111 and having a substantially triangular outer shape in a flat plate shape; a rear-stage decoration portion 3116 attached to the front surface of the rear-stage base 3115 and rotated by the transmission gear member 3114; It is arranged in front of the portion 3116 and is rotatably supported by the rear decoration portion 3116. A middle base 3117 rotated by a cage drive gear 3113, a middle decorative portion 3118 attached to the front surface of the middle base 3117, and a middle decorative portion 3118, a middle base 3117 disposed in front of the middle decorative portion 3118, and A front-stage decorative portion 3119 penetrating the rear-stage decorative portion 3116 and having a rear end attached to the decorative body base 3111, and a back-and-back rotation detection attached to the rear surface of the decorative body base 3111 and detecting the rotational position of the rear-stage base 3115 The sensor 3120, the lower back decoration board 3121 attached to the front surface of the decorative body base 3111 for emitting and decorating the rear decoration section 3116, and the front decoration section 3119 between the middle base 3117 and the middle decoration section 3118. It is attached and makes the middle decorative part 3118 and the former decorative part 3119 emit light. And back under before decorative substrate 3122 of the eye, it has a.

  The lower back rotation drive motor 3112 is attached to the decorative body base 3111 such that the rotating shaft projects forward at a position eccentric from the center of the disk-shaped decorative body base 3111. The transmission gear member 3114 is attached to the decorative body base 3111 such that the center of rotation is eccentric to the center of the disk-shaped decorative body base 3111. The transmission gear member 3114 has a spur gear-shaped first gear portion 3114a that meshes with the drive gear 3113, and a spur gear-shaped second gear portion 3114b that rotates integrally with the front side of the first gear portion 3114a. . The first gear portion 3114a meshes with a drive gear 3113, and the second gear portion 3114b meshes with a later gear portion 3116d of a later decorative portion 3116 described later.

  The rear-stage base 3115 includes a bearing hole 3115a into which the outer periphery of the disc-shaped decorative body base 3111 is slidably inserted, and a detection piece 3115b detected by the lower back rotation detection sensor 3120. The rear base 3115 constitutes the bottom surface of the lower back movable decorative body 3110 having a triangular pyramid shape.

  The rear decorative portion 3116 has an outer shape formed in the shape of the rear side when the front-pointed triangular pyramid is divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction, and has three trapezoidal flat plate-like side plate portions with a narrowed front side. 3116a and an equilateral triangular flat plate-shaped front plate portion 3116b connecting front end sides of the three side plate portions 3116a. The rear decorative portion 3116 is formed in a container shape with the rear side opened by three side plate portions 3116a and one front plate portion 3116b, and the rear base 3115 is provided at the rear end so that the opened rear side is closed. Is attached. Further, the rear decorative portion 3116 is formed at the center of the front plate portion 3116b with a bearing hole 3116c having a smaller diameter than the decorative body base 3111 and penetrating forward and backward, and at the rear side of the front plate portion 3116b. And a rear gear portion 3116d having a spur gear shape penetrating therethrough. A shaft cylindrical portion 3117b of a middle base 3117 described later is inserted into the bearing hole 3116c so as to be relatively rotatable. The rear gear portion 3116d meshes with the second gear portion 3114b of the transmission gear member 3114. The rear decorative portion 3116 is formed to have a light-transmitting property.

  The middle base 3117 is a regular triangular plate-shaped main body 3117a smaller than the front plate 3116b of the rear decorative part 3116, and has a cylindrical shape extending through the center of the main body 3117a and rearward from the rear surface of the main body 3117a. It has a protruding shaft tube portion 3117b and a spur gear-shaped middle gear portion 3117c formed at the rear end of the outer peripheral surface of the shaft tube portion 3117b. The shaft cylinder portion 3117b is inserted into the bearing hole 3116c of the rear decoration portion 3116 so as to be relatively rotatable. The middle gear portion 3117c meshes with the drive gear 3113.

  The middle decorative portion 3118 has an outer shape formed in an intermediate shape when a front-pointed triangular pyramid is divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction. And a front plate portion 3118b having a regular triangular plate shape and connecting front end sides of the three side plate portions 3118a. The middle decorative portion 3118 is formed in a container shape with the rear side opened by three side plate portions 3118a and one front plate portion 3118b, and has a middle base 3117 at the rear end so that the opened rear side is closed. (Main body 3117a) is attached. The middle decorative portion 3118 has a through-hole 3118c penetrating front and rear at the center of the front plate portion 3118b. The middle decorative portion 3118 is formed to have translucency.

  The outer shape of the former decorative portion 3119 is formed in a triangular pyramid shape narrowed forward. The front decorative portion 3119 includes a columnar front shaft portion 3119a protruding rearward from the center of the rear surface of the triangular pyramid. The front shaft portion 3119a is inserted into the shaft tube portion 3117b of the middle base 3117 so as to be relatively rotatable, and the rear end is attached to the decorative body base 3111. The former decorative part 3119 is formed so as to have translucency.

  A plurality of full-color LEDs (side-view type) that irradiate light toward the outside in the normal direction are mounted on the front and rear surfaces of the lower back rear decorative substrate 3121. The lower back front decorative substrate 3122 has a plurality of full-color LEDs (side-view type) that irradiate light toward the outside in the normal direction, and a plurality of full-color LEDs (top-view type) that irradiates light forward. ) And have been implemented. The lower back front decorative substrate 3122 is attached to the front shaft portion 3119a of the front decorative portion 3119.

  The lower back moving arm 3130 is formed to have a length that straddles the opening 3010a (effect display device 1600) of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction, and the lower back movable decorative body 3110 is attached to the center of the front surface. The lower back arm 3130 has a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted in a row on the front surface. The lower back arm 3130 is mounted so that both ends in the left-right direction are movable in the up-down direction.

  The lower-back raising and lowering mechanism 3150 is mounted below the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. Although not shown in detail, the lower-bottom elevating mechanism 3150 includes a lower-lower elevating drive motor 3151 (see FIG. 180) and a bar-shaped lower-lower that rotates about one end by driving the lower-lower elevating drive motor 3151. A lifting arm. The tip of the lower back lifting arm is connected to the lower back moving arm 3130. By rotating the lower back lifting arm by the lower back driving motor 3151, the lower back moving arm 3130 is moved via the lower back lifting arm. Can be raised and lowered.

  Next, the operation of the underside effect unit 3100 will be described. In the normal state, the back lower production unit 3100 forms one triangular pyramid by matching the vertices of the respective triangles of the rear decorative portion 3116, the middle decorative portion 3118, and the front decorative portion 3119 of the lower movable movable body 3110. And one vertex of the triangle faces upward. In a normal state, the lower back moving arm 3130 is located at the lower moving end by the lower back lifting mechanism 3150. In this normal state, the pointed apex of the front end of the triangular pyramid in the lower back movable decorative body 3110 is located at substantially the same height as the stage 2503 in the center role 2500, and most of the lower back movable decorative body 3110 Are in a standby position below the effect display device 1600. In this state, the lower back moving arm 3130 and the lower back elevating mechanism 3150 are located behind the lower left lower back decoration 3380 of the back left rendering unit 3300 and the lower right lower back decoration 3480 of the back right rendering unit 3400 described later. , Invisible from the front (see FIG. 135 and the like).

  In a normal state, when the lower back moving arm 3130 is moved to the upper moving end via the lower back raising / lowering arm by the lower back raising / lowering drive motor 3151, the upper vertex of the lower back movable decorative body 3110 in a front view becomes a game area. The first united position is located near the center of 5a (see FIG. 166).

  The underside effecting unit 3100 moves the underside movable decorative body 3110 via the underside moving arm 3130 by the underside elevation mechanism 3150 to the standby position (original position) where it has moved to the lowest position, and to the second position where it has moved to the highest position. It can be raised and lowered freely between the united position. In the present embodiment, the second united position is set in which the distance from the first united position to the standby position is 1/7 of the entire moving distance from the standby position to the first united position.

  In the normal state, the back lower production unit 3100 forms one triangular pyramid by matching the vertices of the respective triangles of the rear decorative portion 3116, the middle decorative portion 3118, and the front decorative portion 3119 of the lower movable movable body 3110. And one vertex of the triangle is facing upward (see FIG. 158 (a) and the like). In this state, the detection piece 3115b of the rear base 3115 is detected by the lower back rotation detection sensor 3120, and the original position (standby position) of the rear decorative portion 3116 and the middle decorative portion 3118 of the lower back movable decorative body 3110 is determined. Become.

  When the drive gear 3113 is rotated by the back lower rotation drive motor 3112 in a state where the lower back movable decorative body 3110 is moved to the first united position or the second united position, the first gear unit is added to the drive gear 3113. The transmission gear member 3114 with which the 3114a meshes rotates in the opposite direction to the drive gear 3113, and via the rear gear portion 3116d of the rear decoration portion 3116 which meshes with the second gear portion 3114b of the transmission gear member 3114. , The rear decorative portion 3116 rotates in the opposite direction to the transmission gear member 3114. That is, the rear decorative portion 3116 rotates in the same direction as the drive gear 3113. On the other hand, in addition to the first gear portion 3114a of the transmission gear member 3114, the middle gear portion 3117c of the middle base 3117 is meshed with the drive gear 3113, and the middle decoration portion 3118 is driven by the middle decoration portion 3118 via the middle gear portion 3117c. It rotates in the opposite direction to 3113. Since the front decorative portion 3119 is attached to the decorative body base 3111, the front decorative portion 3119 does not rotate even when the drive gear 3113 is rotated by the lower back rotation drive motor 3112 (see FIG. 158 (b)). reference).

  Therefore, when the lower back rotation drive motor 3112 is driven, the rear decorative portion 3116 and the middle decorative portion 3118 rotate in opposite directions while the front decorative portion 3119 is stopped. In the present embodiment, the respective gear ratios are set such that when the rear decorative portion 3116 makes one rotation, the middle decorative portion 3118 makes two rotations.

  Also, in the underside rendering unit 3100, the LEDs mounted on the underside back decorative board 3121 and the underside back decorative board 3122 of the underside movable decorative body 3110 are appropriately illuminated, so that the underside movable decorative body 3110 is turned off. Light-emitting decoration can be performed, and light-emitting decoration can be performed even while the rear-stage decorative portion 3116 and the middle-stage decorative portion 3118 are rotating.

  Further, in the underside effect unit 3100, by emitting a plurality of LEDs provided on the underside movement arm 3130, the underside movement arm 3130 can be illuminated and decorated, and a plurality of the underside movement arm 3130 can be illuminated. By causing the LEDs to emit light in order toward the lower back movable decorative body 3110, a light emission effect in which light flows to the lower back movable decorative body 3110 can be performed. In addition, by causing the plurality of LEDs of the lower back moving arm 3130 to emit light sequentially so as to move away from the lower back movable decorative body 3110, a light emission effect in which light flows from the lower back movable decorative body 3110 can be performed.

[5-9-2. Uragami production unit]
Next, the back effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIG. The back effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 is attached above the opening 3010a in the back box 3010. The back upper effect unit 3200 extends in the left-right direction so as to straddle the upper back movable decorative body 3210 having an equilateral triangle and a pointed front and a triangular pyramid, and the effect display device 1600. The upper movable arm 3230 (see FIG. 161 and the like) to which the upper movable decorative body 3210 is attached and both ends in the left and right directions are movably supported in the vertical direction, and the upper rear movable arm 3230 is moved in the vertical direction. And a rear elevating mechanism 3250 for moving.

  The upper back movable decorative body 3210 has the same configuration as the lower back movable decorative body 3110. Although not shown in detail, the upper back movable decorative body 3210 is attached to a rear surface of the decorative body base with a disc-shaped decorative body base attached to the upper back moving arm 3230 and a rotating shaft protruding forward. The upper back rotation drive motor 3212 (see FIG. 180), the drive gear attached to the rotation shaft of the back upper rotation drive motor 3212, and the rotation driven by the drive gear, rotatably attached to the decorative body base. A transmission gear member, a rear stage base which is rotatably supported by the decorative body base and has a substantially triangular outer shape, and a rear decoration portion 3216 attached to the front surface of the rear stage base and rotated by the transmission gear member. And a middle stage which is arranged in front of the rear decoration unit 3216, is rotatably supported by the rear decoration unit 3216, and is rotated by the drive gear. And a middle decorative portion 3218 attached to the front surface of the middle base, and a rear end which is disposed in front of the middle decorative portion 3218 and penetrates through the middle decorative portion 3218, the middle base, and the rear decorative portion 3216 to form a rear end. A front upper decorative portion 3219 attached to the decorative body base, a back upper rotation detection sensor 3220 attached to the rear surface of the decorative body base and detecting the rotational position of the rear base (see FIG. 180); A back decoration board attached to the front surface for decorating the rear decoration section 3216 with light, and a front decoration section 3219 between the middle base and the middle decoration section 3218, the middle decoration section 3218 and the front decoration. And a front and back decoration substrate for making the portion 3219 emit light.

  The rear decorative portion 3116 has an outer shape formed by dividing a triangular pyramid that is pointed forward into three equal parts in the front-rear direction. The rear decorative portion 3116 is formed to have a light-transmitting property. The middle decorative portion 3118 has an outer shape formed in an intermediate shape when a forwardly pointed triangular pyramid is divided into three equal parts in the front-rear direction. The middle decorative portion 3118 is formed to have translucency. The outer shape of the former decorative portion 3119 is formed in a triangular pyramid shape narrowed forward. The former decorative part 3119 is formed so as to have translucency.

  A plurality of full-color LEDs (side-view type) that irradiate light toward the outside in the normal direction are mounted on the front and rear surfaces of the lower back rear decorative board. On the front side, the front and back decorative boards are a plurality of full-color LEDs (side-view type) that irradiate light toward the outside in the normal direction, and a plurality of full-color LEDs (top-view type) that irradiate light forward. And have been implemented.

  The upper back moving arm 3230 is formed to have a length that spans the opening 3010a (effect display device 1600) of the back box 3010 in the left-right direction, and the upper back movable decorative body 3210 is attached to the center of the front surface. In addition, a plurality of full-color LEDs are mounted in a row on the front surface of the back upper moving arm 3230. This back upper movement arm 3230 is attached so that both ends in the left-right direction are movable in the up-down direction.

  The back lifting mechanism 3250 is mounted above the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. Although not shown in detail, the back-up / down mechanism 3250 includes a back-up / down drive motor 3251 (see FIG. 180) and a bar-shaped back-top that rotates around one end by driving the back-up / down drive motor 3251. A lifting arm. The tip of the back up / down arm is connected to the back up / down movement arm 3230, and the back up / down movement arm is rotated by the back up / down drive motor 3251 to move the back up / down movement arm 3230 via the back up / down arm. Can be raised and lowered.

  Subsequently, an operation of the back upper presentation unit 3200 will be described. In the normal state, the back upper presentation unit 3200 forms one triangular pyramid by matching the vertices of the respective triangles of the rear decorative portion 3216, the middle decorative portion 3218, and the front decorative portion 3219 of the back upper movable decorative body 3210. And one vertex of the triangle faces downward. In this state, since the back upper movable decorative body 3210 has the same configuration as the lower back movable decorative body 3110, a detection piece (not shown) corresponding to the detection piece 3115b of the rear base 3115 of the lower back movable decorative body 3110 is placed on the back upper movable decorative body 3110. At the same time as being detected by the rotation detection sensor 3220, it becomes the original position (standby position) of the rear decorative portion 3216 and the middle decorative portion 3218 of the upper back movable decorative body 3210. In a normal state, the back upper moving arm 3230 is positioned at the upper moving end by the back raising / lowering mechanism 3250. In this normal state, the pointed apex of the front end of the triangular pyramid in the back upper movable decorative body 3210 is located at substantially the same height as the upper end of the inner rail 1002 of the front component 1000, and the back upper movable decorative body 3210 Are in a standby position located above the effect display device 1600. In this state, the back upper moving arm 3230 and the back raising / lowering mechanism 3250 are located behind the back left upper decorative body 3370 of the back left producing unit 3300 and the back upper right decorative body 3470 of the back right producing unit 3400, which will be described later. It is invisible from the front (see FIG. 135 etc.).

  In a normal state, when the upper back moving arm 3230 is moved to the lower moving end via the back raising / lowering arm by the back raising / lowering drive motor 3251, the lower vertex of the upper back movable decorative body 3210 in a front view is a game. This is the state of the first united position located near the center of the region 5a (see FIG. 166).

  The back upper staging unit 3200 moves the upper back movable decorative body 3210 via the back upper moving arm 3230 by the back raising / lowering mechanism 3250 to the standby position (original position) where it has been moved to the uppermost position and the second position where it has been moved to the lowermost position. It can be raised and lowered freely between the united position. In the present embodiment, the second united position is set in which the distance from the first united position to the standby position is 1/7 of the entire moving distance from the standby position to the first united position.

  When the back upper presentation unit 3200 drives the back upper rotation drive motor 3212 in a state where the upper back movable decorative body 3210 is moved to the first united position or the second united position, the former decorative unit 3219 is stopped. In the state as it is, the rear decorative portion 3216 and the middle decorative portion 3218 rotate in directions opposite to each other. In the present embodiment, the respective gear ratios are set such that when the rear decorative portion 3216 makes one rotation, the middle decorative portion 3218 makes two rotations.

  Also, in the back-up presentation unit 3200, the LEDs mounted on the back-upper decorative board and the back-upper front decorative board can be appropriately illuminated, so that the back-upper movable decorative body 3210 can be illuminated and decorated. Even when the decorative portion 3216 and the middle decorative portion 3218 are rotating, light-emitting decoration can be performed.

  Also, in the back-up presentation unit 3200, by emitting a plurality of LEDs provided on the back-upside movement arm 3230, the back-upside movement arm 3230 can be illuminated and decorated, and the plurality of back-upside movement arms 3230 can be illuminated. By causing the LEDs to emit light in order toward the upper movable ornamental body 3210, a light emission effect in which light flows to the upper movable movable ornamental body 3210 can be performed. In addition, by causing the plurality of LEDs of the upper back movable arm 3230 to emit light in order to move away from the upper back movable decorative body 3210, a light emission effect in which light flows from the upper back movable decorative body 3210 can be performed.

[5-9-3. Back left production unit]
Next, the back left rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 155, 159, 160, and the like. FIG. 159 is a schematic perspective view of the internal structure of the back left movable decorative body and the like, and FIG. 160 is a front view showing the movement of the back left movable decorative body of the back left effect unit in the back unit. In FIG. 159, some members are represented as wire frames so that the internal structure can be easily understood, and reference numerals related to the internal structures of a plurality of movable decorations other than the back left movable decorative body are expressed in parentheses. .

  The back left production unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the left side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010.

  The back left rendering unit 3300 extends in the up-down direction across the triangular pyramid-shaped upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320 with the tip directed rightward, and the effect display device 1600. The decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 are respectively movably attached, and the back left moving arm 3330 and the back left moving arm 3330 whose both ends in the vertical direction are movably supported in the left and right directions, respectively. And a back left traversing mechanism 3350 for moving in the direction. The rear upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the rear left lower movable decorative body 3320 have an outer shape of a regular triangle in a front view. In addition, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 in the shape of a triangular pyramid are inclined such that the tips are located forward in the left-right direction.

  In addition, the back left rendering unit 3300 is a flat back left back decoration plate 3360 extending in the left and right direction in front of the upper end of the back left moving arm 3330, and extends in the left and right direction below the back decoration plate. A back upper left decorative body 3370 in which a three-dimensional truss-like decoration is formed, and a back left lower end in which a three-dimensional truss-like decoration is formed extending forward and leftward in the vicinity of the lower end of the back left moving arm 3330. A decorative body 3380.

  The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 has a trapezoidal base decoration part 3311 whose shape in a front view narrows to the right, and is rotatably attached to the right side surface of the base decoration part 3311, with the tip directed rightward. A triangular pyramid shaped first-stage decorative portion 3312, a back upper left rotation drive motor 3313 (see FIG. 180) mounted inside the base-stage decorative portion 3311 for rotating the first-stage decorative portion 3312. A back upper left base decoration board attached to the interior of the decoration section 3311 for emitting and decorating the base decoration section 3311, and a front decoration section 3312 mounted on the right side of the base decoration section 3311 to emit light. And a back upper left front decorative board 3311a. The base decorative portion 3311 and the preceding decorative portion 3312 are formed so as to have translucency.

  A plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decoration part 3311 to which the base decoration board 3311 is attached are mounted on the back upper left base decoration board. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa (in this embodiment, eight full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8)) that irradiate light toward the left side of the first-stage decorative portion 3312 are mounted on the back upper left first-stage decorative board 3311a. ing.

  The rotation of the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the back left upper rotation drive motor 3313 is performed by rotating the main gear (not shown) attached to and fixed to the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the back left upper rotation drive motor 3313 and the rotation of the preceding stage decoration portion 3312. The first-stage decorative portion 3312 is rotated via a not-shown upper left rotation transmission mechanism (not shown) that meshes with a not-shown driven gear attached and fixed to the shaft. A magnet 3312a having a small cylindrical shape is arranged and fixed on the left side surface of the preceding decorative portion 3312 facing the right side surface of the base decorative portion 3311 near the rotation axis of the preceding decorative portion 3312. Specifically, the magnet 3312a is located near the rotation axis of the pre-decoration part 3312, and is positioned on the left side of the pre-decoration part 3312 such that its axis is parallel to the rotation axis of the pre-decoration part 3312. In addition to being arranged perpendicular to the interior, the left side is accommodated in the internal space of the first-stage decorative portion 3312 such that the left side does not project from the left side of the first-stage decorative portion 3312 toward the right side of the base-stage decorative portion 3311. Is fixed. The magnet 3312a is disposed in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the first decoration part 3312. This is because the rotation of the first decoration part 3312 is caused by the rotation of the first decoration part 3312 by the rear upper left rotation drive motor 3313. Is a position that does not occur.

  Since the magnet 3312a is fixed in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the first-stage decorative portion 3312, the rotation of the output shaft (rotation axis) of the rear upper left rotation drive motor 3313 is performed via the above-described rear left upper rotation transmission mechanism (not shown). When the rotation is transmitted to the rotation axis of the step decoration section 3312 and the preceding step decoration section 3312 starts rotating, the trajectory becomes a circular path.

  Therefore, on the back upper left front stage decorative substrate 3311a, a Hall element, and a position corresponding to one position on the circular orbit (facing the magnetized surface of the small cylindrical magnet 3312a) are provided. A rear upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, which is constituted by peripheral circuits and can detect a change in magnetic pole, is mounted. The back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab detects the magnetism of the magnet 3312a fixed to the precedent decoration part 3312, specifies the rotational position of the precedent decoration part 3312, and sets the original position. The detailed description will be described later. Note that the original position (standby position) of the rotational position of the preceding decorative portion 3312 is, for example, the position shown in FIG. 145, FIG. 155, and FIG. A state in which the vertices of the respective triangles of the decorative portion 3312 match to form one triangular pyramid can be cited.

  The base decorative portion 3311 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is not shown in detail, but on the rear surface, a first mounting boss protruding rearward from the center near the bottom (left side) in a cylindrical shape, and a first mounting boss. A second mounting boss protruding rearward from a portion on the right side of the boss in a cylindrical shape; and a third mounting boss protruding rearward from a portion above the first mounting boss in a cylindrical shape. . The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is movably mounted on the back left moving arm 3330 via the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss.

  The back lower left movable decorative body 3320 is a trapezoidal base decorative part 3321 whose shape in front view narrows to the right, and is rotatably attached to the right side of the base decorative part 3321, and the tip is directed rightward. A triangular pyramid shaped first-stage decorative portion 3322, a back lower left rotation drive motor 3323 (see FIG. 180) mounted inside the base-stage decorative portion 3321 for rotating the first-stage decorative portion 3322, The lower left lower base decoration board attached to the interior of the decoration section 3321 for emitting and decorating the base decoration section 3321, and the front decoration section 3322 mounted on the right side surface of the base decoration section 3321 to emit light. And a lower left lower front decorative board 3321a for performing the operation. The base decorative portion 3321 and the preceding decorative portion 3322 are formed to have a light-transmitting property.

  A plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decoration unit 3321 to which the base decoration board 3321 is attached are mounted on the back left lower base decoration board. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3321aa (in this embodiment, eight full-color LEDs 3321aa (1) to 3321aa (8)) that irradiate light toward the left side of the first-stage decorative portion 3322 are mounted on the back left lower first-stage decorative substrate 3321a. ing.

  The rotation of the output shaft (rotary shaft) of the lower back left rotary drive motor 3323 is performed by rotating a main gear (not shown) attached to and fixed to the output shaft (rotary shaft) of the lower back left rotary drive motor 3323 and the rotation of the preceding stage decoration portion 3322. The preceding decorative portion 3322 is rotated via a not-shown lower left rotation transmission mechanism in which a not-shown driven gear attached and fixed to the shaft meshes. A magnet 3322a having a small cylindrical shape is arranged and fixed near the rotation axis of the preceding decorative portion 3322 on the left side surface of the preceding decorative portion 3322 facing the right side surface of the base decorative portion 3321. Specifically, the magnet 3322a is located near the rotation axis of the pre-decoration part 3322, and is positioned on the left side surface of the pre-decoration part 3322 such that its axis is parallel to the rotation axis of the pre-decoration part 3322. In addition to being arranged perpendicular to the interior, the left side is accommodated in the internal space of the preceding decorative portion 3322 such that the left side does not project from the left side of the preceding decorative portion 3322 toward the right side of the base decorative portion 3311. Is fixed. The magnet 3322a is disposed in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the first decoration part 3322. This is because the rotation of the first decoration part 3322 by the lower back left rotation drive motor 3323 causes the rotation axis of the first decoration part 3322 to have a resonance phenomenon. Is a position that does not occur.

  Since the magnet 3322a is fixed in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the preceding decorative portion 3322, the rotation of the output shaft (rotation axis) of the rear lower left rotation drive motor 3323 is firstly performed via the above-described rear lower left rotation transmission mechanism (not shown). When the rotation is transmitted to the rotation axis of the step decoration section 3322 and the preceding step decoration section 3322 starts to rotate, the trajectory becomes a circular path.

  Therefore, the back left lower first-stage decorative substrate 3321a is provided with a Hall element at a position corresponding to one position on the circular orbit (facing the magnetized surface of the small cylindrical magnet 3322a), and A lower back left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3321ab, which is constituted by peripheral circuits and can detect a change in magnetic pole, is mounted. The back lower left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3321ab detects the magnetism of the magnet 3322a fixed to the precedent decoration part 3322, specifies the rotational position of the precedent decoration part 3322, and sets the original position. The detailed description will be described later. Note that the original position (standby position) of the rotational position of the preceding decorative portion 3322 is, for example, the position shown in FIG. 145, FIG. 155, and FIG. 160 (a), and the base decorative portion 3321 and the preceding stage. The state in which the vertices of the triangles of the decorative portion 3322 coincide with each other to form one triangular pyramid can be exemplified.

  Although not shown in detail, the base decorative portion 3321 of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 has a first mounting boss protruding rearward from a center near the bottom (left side) in a columnar shape on the rear surface, and a first mounting boss. A second mounting boss protruding rearward from a portion on the right side of the boss in a cylindrical shape; and a third mounting boss protruding rearward in a columnar shape from a portion below the first mounting boss. . The lower back left movable decorative body 3320 is movably attached to the back left moving arm 3330 via the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss.

  The back left moving arm 3330 extends in the up-down direction, and the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are movably attached to the movable arm base 3331. And a back left moving drive motor 3332 for moving the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320.

  Although not shown in detail, the back left moving arm 3330 has a spur gear-shaped pinion gear attached to the rotating shaft of the back left moving drive motor 3332, and a vertical direction above the vertical center of the moving arm base 3331. An upper slider slidably attached to the upper arm and having an upper rack gear meshing with the pinion gear, and an upper slider slidably mounted vertically below the center in the vertical direction of the moving arm base 3331. A lower slider having a lower rack gear meshing with the pinion gear from the side opposite to the upper rack gear.

  The movable arm base 3331 has an upper first slit in which the first mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3311 of the upper back movable decorative body 3310 is slidably inserted, and a second mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3311 slides. An upper second slit that is slidably inserted, and an upper third slit into which the third mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3311 is slidably inserted. The upper first slit extends linearly in the vertical direction. The upper second slit extends downward in a circular shape at a rotation angle of 30 degrees around the upper end side of the upper first slit, and then linearly extends downward. The upper third slit extends downward in a circular shape at a rotation angle of 30 degrees around the upper end side of the upper first slit, and then linearly extends downward.

  The moving arm base 3331 has a lower first slit in which the first mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3321 of the lower back movable decorative body 3320 is slidably inserted, and a second mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3321. The lower second slit is slidably inserted, and the lower third slit is slidably inserted into the third mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3321. The lower first slit extends linearly in the vertical direction. The lower second slit extends upward in a circular shape at a rotation angle of 30 degrees around the upper end side of the lower first slit, and then linearly extends upward. The lower third slit extends upward in a circular shape at a rotation angle of 30 degrees around the upper end side of the lower first slit, and then linearly extends upward. The lower first slit, the lower second slit, and the lower third slit are an upper first slit, an upper second slit, and an upper third slit with respect to a horizontal line passing through the center of the rotation axis of the back left movement drive motor 3332. Is formed symmetrically with the line.

  The second mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3311 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is mounted near the upper end of the upper slider. The lower slider has the second mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3321 on the lower back left movable decorative body 3320 mounted near the lower end.

  The back left traversing mechanism 3350 is attached to the left side of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. Although not shown in detail, the back left traverse mechanism 3350 includes a back left traverse drive motor 3351 and a bar-shaped back left traverse arm that rotates around one end by driving the back left traverse drive motor 3351. ing. The tip of the back left traversing arm is connected to the back left traversing arm 3330. By rotating the back left traversing arm by the back left traversing drive motor 3351, the back left traversing arm 3330 is moved through the back left traversing arm. Can be traversed.

  The back left back decorative plate 3360 has a hologram seal attached to the front surface. The lower left upper decorative body 3370 is attached to a lower side at substantially the same height as the upper edge of the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010. The back lower left decorative body 3380 has an upper side mounted at substantially the same height as the lower edge of the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010. The back left back decorative plate 3360, the back left upper decorative body 3370, and the back left lower decorative body 3380 have their respective front ends mounted at substantially the same position as the front end of the back box 3010, and are arranged behind and behind the back effect unit. The lower back moving arm 3130 of the 3100, the upper back moving arm 3230 of the back upper staging unit 3200, and the like can be hidden invisible from the front.

  In addition, the back left back decorative plate 3360 is located on the rear side of the panel plate 1110 in the game panel 1100 in a state where the back left back decorative plate 3360 is assembled to the game board 5, and cooperates with a back right back decorative plate 3460 described later to form a panel. The decorative pattern 1150 formed on the plate 1110 is easily seen from the player side (front).

  Subsequently, an operation of the back left rendering unit 3300 will be described. First, the movement of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 will be described. In the normal state, the front decorative portion 3312 of the upper back left movable decorative body 3310 and the front decorative portion 3322 of the lower back left movable decorative body 3320 are in front of the base decorative portion 3311 and the base decorative portion 3321 in front view. It is in a state of a rotational position forming a triangle. In this state, when the back upper left rotary drive motor 3313 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower rotary drive motor 3323 of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 are driven, respectively, the preceding decorative portion 3312 and the preceding decorative portion are respectively driven. 3322 can be rotated (see FIG. 162).

  Next, the movement of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 with respect to the back left moving arm 3330 will be described. In the initial state, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 has the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss formed of the upper first slit, the upper second slit, and the upper third slit of the moving arm base 3331. Located at the top of each. In this state, the first mounting boss and the second mounting boss of the rear upper left movable decorative body 3310 are horizontally arranged, the base side (left side) of the rear upper left movable decorative body 3310 extends vertically, and the tip is directed to the right. (See FIG. 160 (a)). When the pinion gear is rotated in a predetermined direction by driving the back left movement drive motor 3332 from the initial state, and the upper slider is moved downward through the upper rack gear meshing with the pinion gear, the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 Since the second mounting boss is attached to the upper slider, the second mounting boss is pulled downward, and the upper left movable decorative body 3310 rotates clockwise around the first mounting boss. Will be done.

  At this time, the second mounting boss and the third mounting boss of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 move the respective arc-shaped extending portions of the upper second slit and the upper third slit of the moving arm base 3331 downward. Slides to Then, when the second mounting boss reaches the lower end of the arc-shaped portion in the upper second slit by the upper slider moving downward, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 moves clockwise around the first mounting boss. To the lower right side (second state) (see FIG. 160 (b)). In this state, the lower side of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 extends horizontally.

  When the upper left slider is further moved downward by driving the back left moving drive motor 3332 in a state in which the upper left movable decorative body 3310 is rotated clockwise by 30 degrees due to the downward movement of the upper slider, the upper left movable decorative body is rotated. The body 3310 moves downward while keeping the posture. In this case, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 correspond to the upper first slit, the upper second slit, and the upper third slit of the moving arm base 3331. The inside of each is slid to its lower end, and the downward movement stops. In this state, the lower side of the upper left movable decorative body 3310 is in a state (first state) in which the lower side approaches the center of the movable arm base 3331 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 160 (c)).

  From this state, when the back left moving drive motor 3332 is driven in the reverse direction to move the upper slider upward through the pinion gear, the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 in the first state moves in a direction opposite to the above-described movement. To return to the initial state.

  On the other hand, in the lower back left movable decorative body 3320, in the initial state, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss include the lower first slit, the lower second slit, and the lower third slit of the moving arm base 3331. It is located at the lower end of each of the slits. In this state, the first mounting boss and the second mounting boss of the lower back left movable decorative body 3320 are horizontally arranged, the base side (left side) of the lower back left movable decorative body 3320 extends vertically, and the tip is directed to the right. (See FIG. 160 (a)). When the pinion gear is rotated in a predetermined direction by driving the back left movement drive motor 3332 from the initial state, and the lower slider is moved upward via the lower rack gear meshing with the pinion gear, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 Since the second mounting boss is attached to the lower slider, the second mounting boss is pulled upward, and the lower back left movable decorative body 3320 rotates counterclockwise around the first mounting boss. Will move.

  At this time, the second mounting boss and the third mounting boss of the lower back left movable decorative body 3320 move the respective arc-shaped extending portions of the lower second slit and the lower third slit of the moving arm base 3331 upward. Slides to Then, when the second mounting boss reaches the upper end of the arcuate portion of the lower second slit by the lower slider moving upward, the lower back left movable decorative body 3320 rotates counterclockwise around the first mounting boss. It turns into a state rotated 30 degrees in the direction, and becomes a state in which the tip is directed to the upper right (second state) (see FIG. 160 (b)). In this state, the upper side of the lower back left movable decorative body 3320 extends horizontally.

  When the lower slider is further moved upward by the drive of the rear left drive motor 3332 in a state where the lower left lower movable movable body 3320 is rotated 30 degrees in the counterclockwise direction by the upward movement of the lower slider, the lower left lower movable The decorative body 3320 moves upward while keeping the rotated state. In this case, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 are formed by the lower first slit, the lower second slit, and the lower third slit of the moving arm base 3331. The inside of each is slid to the top of each, and the upward movement stops. In this state, the upper side of the lower back left movable decorative body 3320 is in a state (first state) in which the upper side approaches the center of the movable arm base 3331 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 160 (c)).

  From this state, when the back left movement drive motor 3332 is driven in the reverse direction to move the lower slider downward via the pinion gear, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 in the first state moves in a direction opposite to the above-described movement. To return to the initial state.

  Since the upper rack gear of the upper slider and the lower rack gear of the lower slider are engaged with the pinion gears with the pinion gear rotated by the back left movement drive motor 3332 interposed therebetween, the pinion gear is rotated by the back left movement drive motor 3332. When the gear is rotated, the upper slider and the lower slider move in directions different from each other up and down. Thereby, the movement of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 by the back left moving drive motor 3332 are performed simultaneously. Therefore, when the back left moving drive motor 3332 is driven from the initial state, the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, which are vertically separated and whose front ends are directed to the right, approach each other. After turning in the direction of the second state, the first state is reached by moving in the direction in which the whole approach each other.

  Next, the movement of the back left moving arm 3330 in the back left effect unit 3300 will be described. In the back left moving arm 3330, in the initial state, a portion to which the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are attached is located at the left moving end. In this state, the back left moving arm 3330 is located on the left side of the effect display device 1600 in front view. In this state, when the back left traversing arm is rotated counterclockwise in front view by the back left traversing drive motor 3351 of the back left traversing mechanism 3350, the back left traversing arm moves the back left moving arm 3330 to the right. It can be moved to the moving end. In the state where the back left moving arm 3330 is located at the right moving end (first state), the part to which the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are attached is the left and right of the effect display device 1600. It is located at a distance of about 1/3 to the right from the left end side with respect to the width in the direction (see FIG. 166).

  As shown in FIG. 160, the back left moving arm 3330 is formed in a shape in which the upper end extends rightward, and in the first state where the right end is located at the right moving end, the back lower production unit 3100 In addition, it is located at the center in the left-right direction of the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body 3210 of the back upper presentation unit 3200.

  The back left moving arm 3330 can be moved by the back left traversing mechanism 3350 between a position in an initial state, which is a left moving end, and a position in a first state, which is a right moving end. In the present embodiment, the position in the second state, which is moved about 2/3 of the distance from the initial position to the right with respect to the entire movement distance between the position in the initial state and the position in the first state. Is set (see FIG. 165).

  In the normal state, the back left production unit 3300 has the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 in an initial state, and is arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The base sides of the base decoration part 3311 and the base decoration part 3321 are vertically extended, and their respective tips face right. In the normal state, the back left moving arm 3330 is located at the left moving end in the initial state by the back left traversing mechanism 3350.

  In this normal state, the base sides of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, which are the initial states, are located near the left end in the back box 3010, and the respective base decorative parts 3311 and base base The step decoration section 3321 is located near the left end of the effect display device 1600, and the preceding decoration section 3312 and the preceding decoration section 3322 are located in front of the effect display device 1600. In the present embodiment, in a normal state, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable movable body 3320, and the rear left moving arm 3330 are in a standby position in which the initial state is respectively set (FIG. 135 and the like). See).

  As shown in FIG. 160, the rear left moving arm 3330 has a shape in which the upper end extends rightward. (The position in one state), it comes into contact with the upper movable movable body 3210 at the standby position. Therefore, when moving the back left moving arm 3330 to the right moving end (second state), it is necessary to move the back upper movable decorative body 3210 downward from the standby position. Further, when the back left moving arm 3330 is moved to the right moving end in a state where the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are directed rightward (initial state), the back left upper movable movable body 3310 is moved. Abuts on the upper back movable decorative body 3210 moved downward from the standby position. Therefore, it is necessary to move the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 to the position of the first state or the position of the second state so that the tip is directed to the lower right.

  In addition, when the back left moving arm 3330 is in the initial position, the bases of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are located near the left end in the back box 3010, so that the back left moving arm 3330 When the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 in the initial state are rotated by the drive motor 3332 so as to be in the second state, the respective base sides are brought into contact with the left side surface in the back box 3010. Touch Therefore, when the back left upper movable decoration 3310 and the back left lower decorative decoration 3320 are rotated from the initial state to the second state side by the rear left movement driving motor 3332, the rear left movement arm 3330 is moved rightward from the initial state position. It needs to be moved to the direction.

  In the back left rendering unit 3300, the back left upper base decorative board and the back left upper front decorative board of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, and the back left lower base decorative board and the back left lower base decorative board of the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are provided. By appropriately illuminating the mounted LEDs, the upper back left movable decorative body 3310 and the lower back left movable decorative body 3320 can be illuminated.

  In the present embodiment, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable movable body 3320, and the back left movable arm 3330 are located in the initial state, respectively. Is the standby position. The positions of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 when the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable movable body 3320, and the rear left moving arm 3330 are located in the first state, respectively. Is the first united position. Further, the positions of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 when the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable movable body 3320, and the rear left movable arm 3330 are located in the second state, respectively. Is the second united position.

[5-9-4. Back right production unit]
Next, the back right rendering unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. The back right rendering unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is attached to the right side of the opening 3010a in the back box 3010.

  The back right effecting unit 3400 extends in the up-down direction over the triangular pyramid-shaped back and right movable decorative body 3410 and the back and lower right movable decorative body 3420 with the tip directed leftward, and the effect display device 1600. Movable decorative body 3410 and back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are respectively movably mounted, and both upper and lower ends are supported movably in the left and right directions, respectively. And a back-right traversing mechanism 3450 that moves the right and left in the left-right direction (see FIG. 163). The back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 have an outer shape of a regular triangle when viewed from the front. In addition, the triangular pyramid-shaped back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are inclined such that the tips are located forward in the left-right direction.

  In addition, the back right rendering unit 3400 is a flat back right back decoration plate 3460 extending in the left and right direction in front of the vicinity of the upper end of the back right moving arm 3430, and extends in the left and right direction below the back decoration plate. A back upper right decorative body 3470 in which a three-dimensional truss-like decoration is formed, and a back right extending in the left-right direction in front of the vicinity of the lower end of the back right moving arm 3430 to form a three-dimensional truss-like decoration. And a lower decorative body 3480.

  The back upper right movable decorative body 3410 has a trapezoidal base decorative portion 3411 whose front view shape narrows to the left, and is rotatably attached to the right side surface of the base decorative portion 3411, with the tip directed leftward. And a back-upper-right rotation drive motor 3413 (see FIG. 181) attached to the interior of the base decoration part 3411 for rotating the front decoration part 3412. An upper right base decoration board attached to the interior of the decoration section 3411 for illuminating the base decoration section 3411, and a front decoration section 3412 mounted on the left side of the base decoration section 3411 to emit light. And a back upper right front decorative substrate 3411a for performing the operation. The base decorative portion 3411 and the preceding decorative portion 3412 are formed to have translucency.

  A plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decoration portion 3411 to which the base decoration board 3411 is attached are mounted on the back upper right base decoration board. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3411aa (in this embodiment, eight full-color LEDs 3411aa (1) to 3411aa (8) in the present embodiment) that emit light toward the right side of the preceding decorative portion 3412 are mounted on the back upper right front decorative board 3411a. ing.

  The rotation of the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the back upper right rotation drive motor 3413 is controlled by the rotation of the main gear (not shown) attached to and fixed to the output shaft (rotation shaft) of the back upper right rotation drive motor 3413 and the rotation of the preceding decorative portion 3412. The preceding decorative portion 3412 is rotated through a back upper right rotation transmission mechanism (not shown) in which a non-illustrated slave gear attached to and fixed to the shaft meshes. On the right side surface of the preceding decorative portion 3412 facing the left side surface of the base decorative portion 3411, a small cylindrical magnet 3412a is arranged and fixed near the rotation axis of the preceding decorative portion 3412. Specifically, the magnet 3412a is located near the rotation axis of the pre-decoration part 3412 and on the right side of the pre-decoration part 3412 so that its axis is parallel to the rotation axis of the pre-decoration part 3412. In addition to being arranged perpendicular to the interior, the right side is accommodated in the internal space of the first-stage decorative portion 3412 such that the right side does not protrude from the right side of the first-stage decorative portion 3412 toward the left side of the first-stage decorative portion 3411. Is fixed. The magnet 3412a is arranged in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the first decoration part 3412. This is because the rotation of the first decoration part 3412 is caused by the rotation of the first decoration part 3412 by the upper right rotation driving motor 3413. Is a position that does not occur.

  Since the magnet 3412a is fixed in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the preceding decorative portion 3412, the rotation of the output shaft (rotation axis) of the rear upper right rotation drive motor 3413 is performed via the above-described rear upper right rotation transmission mechanism (not shown). When the rotation is transmitted to the rotation axis of the step decoration part 3412 and the preceding step decoration part 3412 starts rotating, the trajectory becomes a circular path.

  Therefore, on the back upper right first-stage decorative substrate 3411a, a Hall element, and a position corresponding to one position on the circular orbit (facing the magnetized surface of the small cylindrical magnet 3412a) are provided. A rear upper right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab, which is constituted by peripheral circuits and can detect a change in magnetic pole, is mounted. The back upper right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab detects the magnetism of the magnet 3412a fixed to the preceding decorative portion 3412, specifies the rotational position of the preceding decorative portion 3412, and sets the original position. The detailed description will be described later. Note that the original position (standby position) of the rotation position of the preceding decorative portion 3312 is, for example, the position shown in FIG. 145 and FIG. 155 and the like. One example is a state in which the vertices of a triangle are coincident to form one triangular pyramid.

  Although not shown in detail, the base decorative portion 3411 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 has a first mounting boss protruding rearward from the center near the bottom (right side) in a columnar shape on the rear surface, and a first mounting boss. A second mounting boss protruding rearward from a portion on the left side of the boss in a cylindrical shape; and a third mounting boss protruding rearward from a portion above the first mounting boss in a cylindrical shape. . Via the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is movably mounted on the back right moving arm 3430.

  The back lower right movable decorative body 3420 has a trapezoidal base decorative part 3421 whose shape in front view narrows to the left, and is rotatably attached to the left side surface of the base decorative part 3421, and the tip is leftward. A bottom-end lower-end rotation drive motor 3423 (see FIG. 181) attached to the interior of the base-stage decoration portion 3421 for rotating the front-stage decoration portion 3422. A lower right base decoration board attached to the inside of the base decoration section 3421 for emitting and decorating the base decoration section 3421, and a front decoration section 3422 mounted on the left side surface of the base decoration section 3421. And a back lower right first-stage decorative substrate 3421a for emitting light. The base decorative portion 3421 and the preceding decorative portion 3422 are formed to have a light-transmitting property.

  The lower right base decorative board is mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decorative section 3421 to which the lower right base decorative board is attached. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3421aa (in this embodiment, eight full-color LEDs 3421aa (1) to 3421aa (8)) that irradiate light toward the right side of the first-stage decorative portion 3422 are mounted on the lower right lower-end decorative board 3421a. Have been.

  The rotation of the output shaft (rotary shaft) of the lower right back drive motor 3423 is performed by rotating a main gear (not shown) attached to and fixed to the output shaft (rotary shaft) of the lower right drive motor 3423, and a precedent decorative portion 3422. The front decorative portion 3422 is rotated via a not-shown lower right lower-side rotation transmission mechanism, which meshes with a not-shown driven gear attached to and fixed to the rotating shaft of. A magnet 3422a having a small columnar shape is arranged and fixed near the rotation axis of the preceding decorative portion 3422 on the right side surface of the preceding decorative portion 3422 facing the left side surface of the base decorative portion 3421. Specifically, the magnet 3422a is located near the rotation axis of the precedent decoration part 3422, and is positioned on the right side of the precedent decoration part 3422 so that its axis is parallel to the rotation axis of the precedent decoration part 3422. In addition to being arranged perpendicular to the first decorative portion 3422, the right surface thereof is accommodated in the internal space of the first decorative portion 3422 so as not to protrude from the right side of the first decorative portion 3422 toward the left side of the base decorative portion 3421. Is fixed. The magnet 3422a is arranged in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the first decoration part 3422. The rotation of the first decoration part 3422 is caused by the rotation of the first decoration part 3422 by the lower right back rotation drive motor 3423. It is a position where no phenomenon occurs.

  Since the magnet 3422a is fixed in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the preceding decorative portion 3422, the rotation of the output shaft (rotation axis) of the back lower right rotation drive motor 3423 is performed via the above-mentioned back lower right rotation transmission mechanism (not shown). When the rotation is transmitted to the rotation axis of the precedent decorative portion 3422 and the precedent decorative portion 3422 starts rotating, the trajectory becomes a circular orbit.

  Therefore, on the back lower right precedent decorative substrate 3421a, a Hall element, at a position corresponding to one position on the circular orbit (in opposition to the magnetized surface of the small cylindrical magnet 3422a), And a back lower right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3421ab which is constituted by a peripheral circuit and can detect a change in the magnetic pole. The lower right lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3421ab is used to specify the rotational position of the preceding decorative portion 3422 and set the original position by detecting the magnetism of the magnet 3422a fixed to the preceding decorative portion 3422. The circuit is described in detail later. Note that the original position (standby position) of the rotational position of the preceding decorative portion 3422 is, for example, the position shown in FIG. 145, FIG. 155, or the like, and is the position of the base decorative portion 3421 and the preceding decorative portion 3422, respectively. One example is a state in which the vertices of a triangle are coincident to form one triangular pyramid.

  The base decorative portion 3421 of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 is not shown in detail, but on the rear surface, a first mounting boss protruding rearward from a center near the bottom (right side) in a cylindrical shape, and a first mounting boss. A second mounting boss protruding rearward from a portion on the left side of the mounting boss in a cylindrical shape, and a third mounting boss protruding rearward from a portion below the first mounting boss in a cylindrical shape. I have. A lower right back movable decorative body 3420 is movably mounted on the right rear arm 3430 via the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss.

  The back right moving arm 3430 extends in the up-down direction, and is attached to a moving arm base 3431 to which the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are movably mounted. And a back right moving drive motor 3432 for moving the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420.

  Although not shown in detail, the back right movement arm 3430 is provided with a spur gear-shaped pinion gear attached to the rotation shaft of the back right movement drive motor 3432, and a vertical direction above the vertical center of the movement arm base 3431. An upper slider slidably attached to the upper arm and having an upper rack gear meshing with the pinion gear, and an upper slider slidably mounted vertically below the center of the movable arm base 3431 in the vertical direction. A lower slider having a lower rack gear meshing with the pinion gear from the side opposite to the upper rack gear.

  The movable arm base 3431 has an upper first slit in which the first mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3411 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is slidably inserted, and a second mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3411 slides. An upper second slit that is slidably inserted and an upper third slit into which the third mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3411 is slidably inserted. The upper first slit extends linearly in the vertical direction. The upper second slit extends downward in a circular shape at a rotation angle of 30 degrees around the upper end side of the upper first slit, and then linearly extends downward. The upper third slit extends downward in a circular shape at a rotation angle of 30 degrees around the upper end side of the upper first slit, and then linearly extends downward.

  The moving arm base 3331 includes a lower first slit in which the first mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3421 in the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 is slidably inserted, and a second mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3421. And a lower third slit into which the third mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3421 is slidably inserted. The lower first slit extends linearly in the vertical direction. The lower second slit extends upward in a circular shape at a rotation angle of 30 degrees around the upper end side of the lower first slit, and then linearly extends upward. The lower third slit extends upward in a circular shape at a rotation angle of 30 degrees around the upper end side of the lower first slit, and then linearly extends upward. The lower first slit, the lower second slit, and the lower third slit are, with respect to a horizontal line passing through the center of the rotation axis of the back right movement drive motor 3432, an upper first slit, an upper second slit, and an upper third slit. Is formed symmetrically with the line.

  The second mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3411 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is mounted near the upper end of the upper slider. The second mounting boss of the base decorative portion 3421 of the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 is mounted near the lower end of the lower slider.

  The back right traversing mechanism 3450 is attached to the right side of the opening 3010 a in the back box 3010. Although not shown in detail, the back right traversing mechanism 3450 includes a back right traversing drive motor 3451 and a rod-shaped back right traversing arm that rotates around one end by driving the back right traversing drive motor 3451. ing. The tip of the back-right traversing arm is connected to the back-right traversing arm 3430. By rotating the back-right traversing arm by the back-right traversing drive motor 3451, the back-right traversing arm 3430 is moved through the back-right traversing arm. Can be traversed.

  The back right back decorative plate 3460 has a hologram seal attached to the front surface. The lower right corner of the back upper right decorative body 3470 is attached at substantially the same height as the upper edge of the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010. The back lower right decorative body 3480 has an upper side mounted at substantially the same height as the lower edge of the opening 3010 a of the back box 3010. The back right back decorative plate 3460, the back right upper decorative body 3470, and the back right lower decorative body 3480 have their respective front ends attached at substantially the same position as the front end of the back box 3010, and are arranged rearward. The underside moving arm 3130 of the unit 3100, the underside moving arm 3230 of the backside effecting unit 3200, and the like can be hidden invisible from the front.

  In addition, the back right back decorative plate 3460 is located on the rear side of the panel plate 1110 in the gaming panel 1100 when assembled to the game board 5, and cooperates with the back left back decorative plate 3360 to form the panel plate 1110. Is easily seen from the player side (front).

  Next, the operation of the back right presentation unit 3400 will be described. First, the movement of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 will be described. In a normal state, the front decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the front decorative portion 3422 of the rear lower right movable decorative body 3420 are in front view with the base decorative portion 3411 and the base decorative portion 3421, respectively. It is in a state of a rotational position forming an equilateral triangle. In this state, when the back upper right rotation drive motor 3413 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right rotational drive motor 3423 of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are driven, respectively, The decorative portion 3422 can be rotated (see FIG. 162).

  Next, the movement of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 with respect to the back right moving arm 3430 will be described. In the initial state, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 has the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss having the upper first slit, the upper second slit, and the upper third slit of the movable arm base 3431. Located at the top of each. In this state, the first mounting boss and the second mounting boss of the rear upper right movable decorative body 3410 are horizontally arranged, the base side (right side) of the rear upper right movable decorative body 3410 extends vertically, and the tip is directed to the left. It is suitable. When the pinion gear is rotated in a predetermined direction by the driving of the back right movement drive motor 3432 from the initial state, and the upper slider is moved downward via the upper rack gear meshing with the pinion gear, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 Since the second mounting boss is attached to the upper slider, the second mounting boss is pulled downward, and the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 rotates counterclockwise around the first mounting boss. Will move.

  At this time, the second mounting boss and the third mounting boss of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 move the respective arc-shaped extending portions of the upper second slit and the upper third slit of the moving arm base 3431 downward. Slides to Then, when the second mounting boss reaches the lower end of the arc-shaped portion of the upper second slit by the upper slider moving downward, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 rotates counterclockwise around the first mounting boss. This is a state in which the tip is turned 30 degrees in the direction, and the tip is directed to the lower left (second state) (see FIG. 164). In this state, the lower side of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 extends horizontally.

  When the upper right slider is further moved downward by the drive of the right rear drive motor 3432 in a state where the upper right movable ornamental body 3410 is rotated 30 degrees in the counterclockwise direction by the downward movement of the upper slider, the upper right movable back is movable. The decorative body 3410 moves downward while keeping the rotated posture. In this case, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 are formed by the upper first slit, the upper second slit, and the upper third slit of the moving arm base 3431. The inside of each is slid to its lower end, and the downward movement stops. In this state, the lower side of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is in a state (first state) in which the lower arm approaches the center of the movable arm base 3431 in the vertical direction (see FIG. 166).

  From this state, when the back right movement drive motor 3432 is driven in the reverse direction to move the upper slider upward via the pinion gear, the back right movement movable body 3410 in the first state moves in a direction opposite to the above-described movement. To return to the initial state.

  On the other hand, in the lower right back movable decorative body 3420, in the initial state, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss are formed by the lower first slit, the lower second slit, and the lower second slit of the moving arm base 3431. It is located at the lower end of each of the three slits. In this state, the first mounting boss and the second mounting boss of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are horizontally arranged, the base side (right side) of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 extends vertically, and the tip is left. Is facing you. When the pinion gear is rotated in a predetermined direction by the drive of the back right movement drive motor 3432 from the initial state, and the lower slider is moved upward through the lower rack gear meshing with the pinion gear, the back right lower movable decorative body Since the second mounting boss 3420 is mounted on the lower slider, the second mounting boss is pulled upward, and the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 moves clockwise around the first mounting boss. It will rotate.

  At this time, the second mounting boss and the third mounting boss of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 correspond to the respective arc-shaped portions of the lower second slit and the lower third slit of the moving arm base 3431. Slide upward. Then, when the second mounting boss reaches the upper end of the arcuate portion of the lower second slit by the lower slider moving upward, the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 rotates clockwise around the first mounting boss. This is a state in which the tip is turned 30 degrees in the direction, and the tip is directed to the upper left (second state) (see FIG. 164). In this state, the upper side of the lower right back movable ornament 3420 extends horizontally.

  In a state where the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 is rotated clockwise by 30 degrees due to the upward movement of the lower slider, when the lower slider is further moved upward by driving the rear right moving drive motor 3432, the lower right lower back The movable decorative body 3420 moves upward with the posture kept rotating. In this case, the first mounting boss, the second mounting boss, and the third mounting boss of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are the lower first slit, the lower second slit, and the lower third slit of the moving arm base 3431. Are slid to the respective upper ends, and the upward movement stops. In this state, the upper side of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 is in a state (first state) in which it is closer to the vertical center of the moving arm base 3431 (see FIG. 166).

  From this state, when the back right movement drive motor 3432 is driven in the reverse direction to move the lower slider downward via the pinion gear, the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 in the first state is in the opposite direction to the above-described movement. Move and return to the initial state.

  Since the upper rack gear of the upper slider and the lower rack gear of the lower slider are engaged with the pinion gears with the pinion gear rotated by the back right movement drive motor 3432 in between, the pinion gear is rotated by the back right movement drive motor 3432. When the gear is rotated, the upper slider and the lower slider move in directions different from each other up and down. As a result, the movement of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 by the back right moving drive motor 3432 are performed simultaneously. Therefore, when the back right moving drive motor 3432 is driven from the initial state, the back right upper movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420, which are vertically separated from each other and whose front ends are directed to the left, have their front ends mutually. After rotating in the approaching direction to be in the second state, they are moved in the direction in which they are all approaching each other to move to the first state.

  Next, the movement of the back right moving arm 3430 in the back right effect unit 3400 will be described. In the initial state of the back right moving arm 3430, the part to which the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are attached is located at the right moving end. In this state, the back right movement arm 3430 is located on the right side of the effect display device 1600 in front view. In this state, when the back right traversing arm is rotated clockwise in front view by the back right traversing drive motor 3451 of the back right traversing mechanism 3450, the back right traversing arm moves the back right moving arm 3430 to the left. Can be moved to the end. In a state in which the back right moving arm 3430 is located at the left moving end (first state), the part to which the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are attached is the position of the effect display device 1600. It is located about 1/3 to the left from the right end to the width in the left-right direction (see FIG. 166).

  Although not shown in detail, the back right movement arm 3430 has an upper end formed in a shape extending leftward, and in the first state in which the left end is located at the left movement end, the back lower production unit It is located at the center in the left-right direction of the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body 3210 of the 3100 and the back upper presentation unit 3200.

  The back-right moving arm 3430 can be moved by the back-right traversing mechanism 3450 between a position in an initial state, which is a right moving end, and a position in a first state, which is a left moving end. In the present embodiment, the position in the second state, which is moved about 2/3 of the distance from the position in the initial state to the left with respect to the entire movement distance between the position in the initial state and the position in the first state. Is set (see FIG. 165).

  In the back right production unit 3400, in a normal state, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are in an initial state, and are arranged at predetermined intervals in the vertical direction. The base side of each of the base decorative portion 3411 and the base decorative portion 3421 is in a state of extending vertically, and each tip is directed to the left. Further, in the normal state, the back right moving arm 3430 is located at the right moving end in the initial state by the back right traversing mechanism 3450.

  In this normal state, the bases of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 which are the initial states are located near the right end in the back box 3010, and the respective base decorative parts 3411 and 3411 The base decoration unit 3421 is located near the right end of the effect display device 1600, and the preceding decoration unit 3412 and the preceding decoration unit 3422 are located in front of the effect display device 1600. In the present embodiment, in the normal state, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, and the back right moving arm 3430 are in the standby position in which the initial state is set (FIG. 135). Etc.).

  In addition, since the back right moving arm 3430 is formed in a shape in which the upper end extends leftward, the back right moving arm 3430 is moved from the second state position to the left moving end (the first state position). Then, it comes into contact with the movable upper decorative body 3210 at the standby position. Therefore, when moving the back right movement arm 3430 to the left movement end (second state), it is necessary to move the back upper movable decorative body 3210 downward from the standby position. When the back right moving arm 3430 is moved to the left moving end in a state where the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are directed leftward (initial state), the back upper right movable decorative body is moved. The tip of 3410 abuts on upper back movable decorative body 3210 moved downward from the standby position. Therefore, it is necessary to move the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 to the position of the first state or the position of the second state so that the tip is directed to the lower left.

  When the back right moving arm 3430 is in the initial position, the bases of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are located near the right end in the back box 3010. When the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 in the initial state are rotated by the moving drive motor 3432 so as to be in the second state, the respective base sides are the right side surfaces in the back box 3010. Abut. Therefore, when rotating the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 from the initial state to the second state side by the rear right moving drive motor 3432, the rear right moving arm 3430 is moved from the initial state position. It must be moved to the left.

  In the back right effecting unit 3400, the back right upper base decorative board and the back right upper front decorative board of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back right lower base decorative board and the back right lower front decorative board of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 By appropriately illuminating the LEDs mounted on the decorative substrate, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the lower right right movable decorative body 3420 can be illuminated.

  In this embodiment, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, and the back right moving arm 3430 are respectively located at the initial state, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3410. The position of the body 3420 is the standby position. In addition, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 when the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, the lower right lower movable movable body 3420, and the rear right moving arm 3430 are located in the first state, respectively. Is the first united position. Furthermore, when the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, and the back right moving arm 3430 are located in the second state, respectively, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 are located. Is the second united position.

[5-10. Production on a game board]
Next, main movable effects in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 161 to 167 and the like. FIG. 161 shows a state in which the lower back movable decorative body of the lower back effect unit is raised from the standby position from the normal state, and the lower back moving arm is movable lower back lower left movable decorative body of the back left effect unit and the lower right lower back of the back right effect unit. At the same height as the decorative body, the movable decorative body on the back of the back-up production unit is lowered from the standby position, and the back-upper moving arm is movable on the back left and upper movable unit of the back-left production unit and the back and upper right of the back-right production unit. It is a front view of the game board shown in the state made the same height as a decoration. FIG. 162 shows a state in which the lower back movable decorative body, the upper back movable decorative body, the back upper left movable decorative body, the back lower left movable decorative body, the back upper right movable decorative body, and the back lower right movable decorative body are rotated in the state of FIG. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state which is in.

  FIG. 163 is a front view of the game board showing a state in which the back left moving arm of the back left effect unit and the back right moving arm of the back right effect unit have been moved to the second state from the normal state. 164 is a front view of the gaming board showing a state in which the back upper left movable decorative body, the back lower left movable decorative body, the back upper right movable decorative body, and the back lower right movable decorative body have been moved to the second state from the state of FIG. 163. FIG. FIG. 165 shows that the back left moving arm is moved to the right and the back right moving arm is moved to the left from the normal state, and the back upper left movable decorative body, the lower right lower movable movable body, and the lower left lower movable movable body are displayed. It is a front view of a game board showing a state where an effect image is displayed on the effect display device after rotating the back upper right movable ornamental body so as to face each other. FIG. 166 is a diagram illustrating a state in which the lower back movable decorative body, the upper back movable decorative body, the back upper left movable decorative body, the back lower left movable decorative body, the back upper right movable decorative body, and the back lower right movable decorative body are in the second combined position from the normal state. It is a front view of the game board showing the state moved to. 167 is a first combination of the lower back movable decorative body, the upper back movable decorative body, the back upper left movable decorative body, the back lower left movable decorative body, the back upper right movable decorative body, and the back lower right movable decorative body from the state of FIG. 166. It is a front view of the game board which shows the state moved to the position.

  The game board 5 includes a panel plate 1110 of the game panel 1100, a start port unit 2100, a side unit 2200, a side slope 2300, an attacker unit 2400, a center role item 2500, and the like, which define the rear end of the game area 5a. Since it is formed substantially entirely transparent, in the normal state, as shown in FIG. 135 and the like, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 disposed behind the game panel 1100 through them. In the back unit 3000, the lower back movable decorative body 3110 of the lower back production unit 3100, the upper back movable decorative body 3210 of the back upper production unit 3200, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 of the back left production unit 3300, the lower left lower movable movable body 3320 , Back left back decorative plate 3360, back left upper decorative body 3370, back left lower decorative body 3380, The back upper right movable decorative body 3410, back lower right movable decorative body 3420, back right rear decorative plate 3460, back upper right decorative body 3470, back lower right decorative body 3480, etc. of the right effect unit 3400 can be visually recognized well. .

  In a normal state, as shown in FIG. 135 and the like, the lower back movable decorative body 3110 of the lower back effect unit 3100 is in the standby position, and the lower left lower decorative body 3380 of the back left effect unit 3300 and the back lower decorative body 3380 It faces forward from between the back lower right decorative body 3480 of the right effect unit 3400. In a normal state, the upper back movable decorative body 3210 of the back upper production unit 3200 is in the standby position, and the back upper left decorative body 3370 of the back left production unit 3300 and the back of the back right production unit 3400. It faces forward from between the upper right decorative body 3470. In a normal state, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 of the back left effect unit 3300 are in the standby position, and the tips are lined up and down to the right. In. Furthermore, in a normal state, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 of the back right directing unit 3400 are in the standby position, and the tips are vertically separated to the left. Lined up.

  In this normal state, the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body 3210 are vertically symmetrically arranged on the upper and lower ends of the effect display device 1600 at positions closer to the left with respect to the center in the left-right direction of the game area 5a. In addition, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the lower right upper movable movable body 3410 and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 are located at an upper position with respect to the vertical center of the game area 5a. Are arranged vertically above and below, and are arranged symmetrically to each other at the left and right ends of the effect display device 1600. Therefore, in a normal state, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized in a favorable state from the player side (front).

  The game board 5 is a back and rear production of the back unit 3000 in accordance with a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. The back lower movable decorative body 3110 of the unit 3100, the back upper movable decorative body 3210 of the back upper directing unit 3200, the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 of the back left directing unit 3300, and the back of the back right directing unit 3400 The upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the lower right lower movable decorative body 3420 perform a predetermined movable effect.

  Specifically, as a movable effect using the underside effecting unit 3100 and the underside effecting unit 3200, for example, as shown in FIG. The lower left movable decorative body 3320 and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 are respectively moved to the same height as the front end (apex) facing the center in the left-right direction, and the rear upper moving arm 3230 is moved by the rear raising / lowering mechanism 3250. The upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the upper right movable decorative body 3410 are moved to the same height as the front end (vertex) facing the center in the left-right direction. Thereby, the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body 3210 block the effect image of the effect display device 1600 and are located in front of the effect display device 1600. The movement of the movable decorative body 3210 on the back can be noticed. In addition, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, and the lower back movable decorative body 3110 are moved by the lower back moving arm 3130 by the lower left upper movable movable body 3310, the upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the upper rear movable decorative body. The body 3210 can be seen to be connected to each other by the back upper moving arm 3230, and it is possible to remind the player of a feeling that fun will occur.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 162, the rear decorative portion 3116 and the middle decorative portion 3118 of the lower back movable decorative body 3110 are moved by the lower back rotational drive motor 3112, and the rear decorative portion 3210 of the back upper movable decorative body 3210 is moved by the upper rear rotational drive motor 3212. The decoration part 3216 and the middle decoration part 3218 are connected by the back left upper rotation drive motor 3313 and the back left lower rotation drive motor 3323 to the front decoration part 3312 of the back upper left movable decoration body 3310 and the front decoration part 3322 of the back left lower movable decoration body 3320. Is rotated by the back upper right rotation drive motor 3413 and the lower right lower rotation drive motor 3423, respectively. Thereby, the inside of the game area 5a can be made lively, and the player can be entertained.

  At this time, when a plurality of LEDs arranged in the lower back moving arm 3130 and the upper back moving arm 3230 are turned on, blinking, and turned off so as to flow toward the center in the left and right direction, the left and right back left and upper movable ornaments are formed. Energy is injected into the upper back movable decorative body 3210 and the lower back movable decorative body 3110 from the 3310 and the lower back movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, and it is rotating. The effect can be shown to the player. On the other hand, when a plurality of LEDs arranged in the lower back moving arm 3130 and the upper back moving arm 3230 are turned on, blinking, and extinguished so as to flow outward in the left-right direction, the upper back movable decorative body 3210 and the lower back movable Energy is emitted from the decorative body 3110, and the left and right back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the lower left lower movable movable body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 are rotated. Can be shown to others. By such an effect, the player can be made to feel as if the expectation value is increasing, and the sense of expectation for the game can be increased.

  As a movable effect using the back left effect unit 3300 and the back right effect unit 3400, for example, as shown in FIG. 163, the back left moving arm 3330 is moved from the normal state by the back left traversing mechanism 3350 to the second state. , And the back right traversing mechanism 3450 moves the back right moving arm 3430 to the position of the second state. Thereby, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the rear upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 move toward the center in the left-right direction while facing each other. And is located in front of the effect display device 1600 by intercepting the effect image of the effect display device 1600. The movement of the body 3410 and the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 can be noticed, and the movements can be enjoyed.

  Then, from the state of FIG. 163, as shown in FIG. 164, the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 are moved from the initial state to the second state by the back left moving drive motor 3332, and the back right movement is performed. The drive motor 3432 moves the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 from the initial state to the second state. Thereby, the state where the tip of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the tip of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 face each other, and the tip of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 and the tip of the rear upper right movable decorative body 3410 face each other. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that something good will happen, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the game. At this time, the preceding decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the preceding decorative portion 3322 of the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320, the preceding decorative portion 3412 of the rear upper right movable decorative body 3410, the lower right movable decorative body 3420 May be rotated, or the effect display device 1600 may display an effect image that connects the respective tips.

  In addition, as a movable effect using the back left effect unit 3300 and the back right effect unit 3400, as shown in FIG. 165, the back left moving arm 3330 is moved rightward and the back right moving arm 3430 is moved left from the normal state. The upper and lower movable decorative bodies 3310 and 3420, and the lower left and lower movable decorative bodies 3320 and 3410 are rotated from the initial state so as to face each other. Thus, the effect display device 1600 displays an effect image that connects the respective tips. Thereby, an “X” -shaped effect image is displayed so as to connect the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 facing each other, and the lower left lower movable movable body 3320 and the rear upper right movable decorative body 3410 to connect to each other. Therefore, it is possible to make the player think that something good will happen, and it is possible to increase the expectation for the game. At this time, the preceding decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the preceding decorative portion 3322 of the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320, the preceding decorative portion 3412 of the rear upper right movable decorative body 3410, the lower right movable decorative body 3420 May be respectively rotated.

  Furthermore, as a movable production using the back lower production unit 3100, the back upper production unit 3200, the back left production unit 3300, and the back right production unit 3400, for example, as shown in FIG. The movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are moved to the second united position. . Thereby, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 are fixed. Since they are arranged so as to be gathered on the hexagonal circumference at intervals, an impact can be given to the player, and an advantageous gaming state in which the player has an advantage (for example, "big hit game") Can be thought to occur.

  When the state is changed from the normal state to the state of the second united position as shown in FIG. 166, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable movable body 3320 Alternatively, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 may be simultaneously moved to the second united position. Alternatively, the player may be moved to the second united position in an appropriate order, and by sequentially moving to the second united position, in each movement, the player is determined by whether or not to move to the second united position. In addition to being thrilled and excited, various movable effects can be performed, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored.

  Then, from the state of FIG. 166, as shown in FIG. 167, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, And the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 is moved to the first united position. Accordingly, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are densely arranged. Because it is possible to collectively form one large hexagonal decoration, it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that are drawn are "big hits". It can be convinced that there is, and can enhance the interest in the game.

  When the state of the first united position as shown in FIG. 167 is established, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable movable body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body The body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 may be simultaneously moved to the first combined position from the second combined position or from the normal standby position. Alternatively, the player may be moved to the first united position in an appropriate order, and by sequentially moving to the first united position, in each movement, the player is determined by whether or not to move to the first united position. In addition to being thrilled and excited, various movable effects can be performed, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get bored.

  Subsequently, main light emission effects in the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. FIG. 168 is a front view of the game board in a state where the first pattern is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate of the rendering unit. FIG. 169 is a front view of the game board in a state where the second pattern is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate of the rendering unit. FIG. 170 is a front view of the game board showing a second pattern of the presentation effect unit according to the embodiment different from FIGS. The game board 5 includes a game panel 1100 and a front unit according to a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result which is drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. 2000 display effect units 2600 perform a predetermined light emission effect.

  Specifically, as a lighting effect using the game panel 1100, the decoration pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 is light-emission-decorated by the light emission of the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130. As a result, a geometric pattern consisting of a plurality of equilateral triangular outlines is illuminated and decorated on the rear side of the area where the game balls B circulate in the game area 5a. The light emission effect can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained.

  As the light-emitting effect using the display effect unit 2600 of the front unit 2000, for example, as illustrated in FIG. 168, a plurality of light-emitting effects mounted on the first design decorative substrate 2612 disposed above the light guide plate 2601 are provided. Of the LEDs 2611, the first LED 2611a emits light, and only the first pattern portion 2610a constituting a part of the first pattern 2610 emits light. Thereby, a plurality of equilateral triangle patterns similar to the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) are displayed in front of the effect display device 1600, so that nothing happens to the player. I can make you think. In addition, the second LED 2611b of the first pattern decoration board 2612 is caused to emit light, and only the second pattern portion 2610b constituting a part of the first pattern 2610 is light-emission decorated. Thereby, a plurality of equilateral triangular patterns having a size similar to the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) and different in size from the first pattern portion 2610a are displayed in front of the effect display device 1600. It can make the player think that something will happen.

  In addition, the third LED 2611c of the first design decoration board 2612 is caused to emit light, and only the third design part 2610c that constitutes a part of the first design 2610 is made to emit light. Thus, a plurality of equilateral triangle patterns similar to the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in front of the effect display device 1600 and having a different size from the first picture portion 2610a and the second picture portion 2610b. Is displayed, it is possible to make the player think that something will happen. Further, the fourth LED 2611d of the first design decoration board 2612 is caused to emit light, and only the fourth design part 2610d constituting a part of the first design 2610 is made to emit light. Thereby, it is similar to the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110) in front of the effect display device 1600, and has a different size from the first picture portion 2610a, the second picture portion 2610b, and the third picture portion 2610c. Since a plurality of equilateral triangle patterns are displayed, it is possible to make the player think that something will happen.

  Further, on the first design decorative board 2612, the first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, and the fourth LED 2611d are repeatedly illuminated in this order, so that the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the third pattern are formed. The portion 2610c and the fourth pattern portion 2610d are repeatedly illuminated and decorated. Accordingly, in the first pattern 2610, in the portion of the large triangle pattern, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, the fourth pattern portion 2610d, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern The portion 2610b and the third picture portion 2610c are eccentrically overlapped with each other toward the center of the game area 5a, and in the small triangular picture portion, the first picture portion 2610a, the second picture portion 2610b, and the third picture portion are provided. Since they are concentrically arranged toward the center in the order of 2610c and the fourth picture portion 2610d, it is possible to show a light-emitting effect such as an animation having a movement moving from the outside toward the center, It can surprise and entertain the player, as well as make the player think there is something good, It is possible to heighten a sense of waiting.

  In addition, the fourth LED 2611d, the third LED 2611c, the second LED 2611b, and the first LED 2611a are repeatedly emitted in this order to emit light of the fourth pattern portion 2610d, the third pattern portion 2610c, the second pattern portion 2610b, and the first pattern portion 2610a. Light emission decoration is repeated in order. This makes it possible to show the player a luminous effect such as an animation that moves from the center side to the outside, so that the player can be surprised and entertained, It can be made to think that there is something good, and the player's expectation for the game can be raised.

  When the first LED 2611a, the second LED 2611b, the third LED 2611c, and the fourth LED 2611d emit light, they may emit light in different colors. As a result, the luminous decoration that changes to a rainbow color can be shown to the player, and the player can be entertained. The switching of the section 2610d can be easily understood, and the animation effect can be more strongly exerted.

  In the first design 2610, after the first design 2610a, the second design 2610b, the third design 2610c, and the fourth design 2610d are simultaneously illuminated and decorated, the first design 2610a and the second design 2610a are formed. 2610b, the third picture part 2610c, and the fourth picture part 2610d may be sequentially illuminated. By this, the stationary first pattern 2610 is initially displayed by light emission, so that the player can be made to think that it is a light emission decoration by the conventional light guide plate, and thereafter, the first pattern 2610 is displayed. By moving like an animation, the player can be greatly surprised, and the effect of the light guide plate 2601 can be further enhanced.

  As a light-emitting effect using the display effect unit 2600, for example, as shown in FIG. 169, a plurality of LEDs 2621 mounted on a second pattern decorative substrate 2622 disposed on the right side of the light guide plate 2601 emit light. Then, the second pattern 2620 is illuminated. As a result, a guide (message) for the player including the characters “CHANCE!” Is displayed as the second picture 2620 in front of the display screen of the effect display device 1600, and the guide gives the player a chance. Can be suggested, and the sense of expectation for the game can be increased.

  Further, as a light-emitting effect using a display effect unit 2600 different from those in FIGS. 168 and 169, for example, as shown in FIG. 170, the light-emitting effect is mounted on a second pattern decorative board 2622 disposed on the right side of the light guide plate 2601. The plurality of LEDs 2621 emit light, and the second pattern 2630 is illuminated. Thereby, the horizontal pattern, the upper right diagonal line, and the left diagonal diagonal line forming the decorative pattern 1150 formed on the panel board 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 are each extended with a thick width in a geometric pattern 2630. However, since the decoration is illuminated, the player can see the decoration with a sense of unity between the outside and the inside of the center role 2500, and can entertain the player.

  The luminous decoration of the decorative pattern 1150 on the panel plate 1110 of the gaming panel 1100 and the luminous decoration of the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 in the presentation unit 2600 may be performed simultaneously. This allows the player to show a light-emitting decoration having a sense of unity between the outside and the inside of the center role 2500, and to entertain the player.

  Subsequently, an effect that combines the movable effect and the light-emitting effect on the game board 5 will be described in detail mainly with reference to FIGS. 171 to 173. FIG. 171 shows that the first pattern is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate of the rendering unit, and the lower back movable decorative body, the upper back movable decorative body, the back upper left movable decorative body, the lower left lower movable decorative body, the lower right upper movable movable body, It is a front view of the game board shown in a state in which the back lower right movable decorative body has been moved to the second united position. FIG. 172 shows that the first pattern is illuminated and decorated on the light guide plate of the rendering unit, and the lower back movable decorative body, the upper back movable decorative body, the back upper left movable decorative body, the lower left lower movable decorative body, the lower right upper movable movable body, It is a front view of the game board which shows the state in which the lower right back movable decorative body was moved to the first united position. FIG. 173 shows that the second pattern is illuminated and decorated in the light guide plate of the rendering unit according to the embodiment different from that of FIG. It is a front view of the game board in which the body, the back upper right movable decorative body, and the back lower right movable decorative body have been moved to the first combined position.

  The game board 5 has the above-described movable effect and light emitting effect according to the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result which are drawn by receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 or the second starting port 2004. Is performed in an appropriate combination. Specifically, for example, as shown in FIG. 171, the light guide plate 2601 of the rendering unit 2600 is illuminated with the first pattern 2610 to emit light, and the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable The decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are moved to the second united position.

  As a result, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable movable body 3420 are forward of Since six large triangular pattern parts in one pattern 2610 are located, depending on the part of the large triangular pattern of the first pattern 2610, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back left upper movable movable body 3310 The back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be decorated, and the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, and the lower left upper movable movable body 3310 can be decorated. The appearance of the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be changed. Therefore, a different impression from the state of FIG. 166 can be given to the player, so that a variety of effects can be shown to the player, and it is possible to make the player hard to get tired of. As compared with, it can be made to think that a better thing will happen, and the expectation for the game can be raised.

  In addition, as an effect obtained by appropriately combining the above-described movable effect and the light-emitting effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 3110, upper back movable decorative body 3210, back upper left movable decorative body 3310, back lower left movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are moved to the first combined position. Thereby, a large triangle pattern of the first pattern 2610, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and Since the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 overlaps the front and rear, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the lower left upper movable movable body 3310, the lower left lower movable movable body 3320, the lower right upper movable are possible. The decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be decorated to change their appearance. 167 can give the player an impression that is clearly different from the state of FIG. 167, so that a strong impact can be given to the player, and the first special lottery result and the second special lottery result that have been drawn. Is a “big hit” and the interest in the game can be increased.

  Further, as an effect obtained by appropriately combining the above-described movable effect and the light-emitting effect, for example, as shown in FIG. 173, the light guide plate 2601 of the display effect unit 2600 of the embodiment different from the above is caused to emit the second pattern 2630 by light emission decoration. At the same time, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 are combined into a first united body. Move to position. Thus, in front view, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 The horizontal pattern, the upper right diagonal line, and the left diagonal diagonal line forming the decorative pattern 1150 of the game panel 1100 are formed by extending a thick line geometric pattern 2630 in front of the adjacent pattern 2630. Because of the luminous decoration, the second pattern 2630 makes it difficult to see between them, and the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the upper back left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable movable body 3320 , It is possible to enhance the sense of unity of the decoration mode formed by the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420, and the movable effect is assisted. More dramatic effect and it can give enhanced.

  In a state where the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2620 (the second pattern 2630) of the light guide plate 2601 are luminously decorated, the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body 3210 which are moved to the rear thereof are moved. The back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 may be appropriately illuminated. Thereby, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 decorated with light emission are provided. Since the light from the light reaches the player's eyes through the light guide plate 2601, it is possible to show the player a light-emitting decoration with high brightness that cannot be achieved by the light guide plate 2601 alone, and to entertain the player. it can.

  In the game board 5 of the present embodiment, the above-described movable effect and the light-emitting effect can be appropriately combined, and can also be combined with an effect image (display effect) displayed on the display screen of the effect display device 1600. it can. This makes it possible to present a variety of pattern effects to the player by appropriately combining the light-emitting effect, the movable effect, the display effect, and the like. It is possible to entertain the player, and it is possible to prevent the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

[6. Configuration of Peripheral Control Unit]
Next, a peripheral control unit 1500 arranged on the rear side of the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. 13 (on the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). Will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 174 to 178. 174 is a front exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 175 is a rear exploded perspective view of the peripheral control unit, FIG. 176 is a front view of the peripheral control unit, and FIG. 177 is a line XX of FIG. 178 is a sectional view taken along the arrow A in FIG. 176. Here, the back side of the pachinko machine 1 is described as the front side of the peripheral control unit 1500.

  As shown in FIGS. 174 and 175, the peripheral control unit 1500 has a transparent cover 1501 having a box shape that is open at the rear and is longer in the left-right direction than in the up-down direction, and main control for controlling the progress of the game. A peripheral control board 1510 capable of controlling the progress of the effect based on a command from the main control board 1310 of the unit 1300, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, and a peripheral control board 1510 A liquid crystal output board 1530 electrically connected to the liquid crystal display board; a peripheral control board 1510; a peripheral data ROM board 1520; and a metal shield plate 1540 capable of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic noise entering the liquid crystal output board 1530. A conductive material attached to (adhered to) a predetermined portion of a metal shield plate 1540 A sexual member 1545 includes a transparent base member 1502 for closing the opening of the cover member 1501, a. In the internal space of the cover 1501, various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached at predetermined positions together with a metal shield board 1540, so that the shield board 1540 is attached. A peripheral control board box 1505 (sealing board box) including the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502 is formed by being sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and various substrates and closing the opening of the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502.

[6-1. Cover body]
Peripheral data that can store various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 in addition to the peripheral control board 1510 is provided on various substrates attached in the internal space of the cover body 1501. There are a ROM board 1520 and a liquid crystal output board 1530 that can output drawing data for drawing an image on the effect display device 1600. The peripheral control board 1510 has a horizontally long rectangular shape having an area of about two-thirds when the cover 1501 is viewed from the back, and is arranged on the left side of the cover 1501. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged such that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a square shape, and On the other hand, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 has a square shape twice larger than the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and is disposed on the lower right side of the cover 1501.

  The board between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later, and the board between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected by a board-to-board connector described later. Connected. As a result, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the same ground. (GND). The ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are electrically connected to the ground (GND) lines of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. Connected.

  The cover body 1501 is made of a non-conductive resin, is molded transparent, and covers the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of a horizontally long rectangular cover flat plate 1501a (plate thickness: 2 mm) when viewed from the front. The side walls 1501b to 1501e are formed in a box shape having an opening by protruding rearward (front side of the pachinko machine 1).

  The cover flat plate 1501a is for mounting the air-cooling fan FAN at a position slightly above the center of the cover plate 1501a when viewed from the front and at a position corresponding to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 mounted on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. A FAN mounting recess 1501aa having a square shape is formed so as to protrude toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. A plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa are respectively formed on the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa along a plurality of concentric circles centered on the center of the bottom surface in the vertical and horizontal directions. At the four corners of the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, predetermined cylindrical shaped holes inserted into the through holes th1 to th4 are located at positions corresponding to the through holes th1 to th4 formed at the four corners of the air cooling fan FAN having a square shape. Guide projections 1501aab1 to 1501aab4 each having a height (a distance dimension shorter than a distance dimension in the depth direction of the air-cooling fan FAN) are formed so as to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501. By forming the slit 1501aaa as an arc-shaped slit, it is possible to prevent various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 from being illegally taken out of the peripheral control board 1510.

  The cover flat plate 1501a has a pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 formed diagonally near the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. When the air-cooling fan FAN is mounted by being pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, the front surface of the air-cooling fan FAN and the front surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal pan screw (not shown) having a shape integrally formed with a pan head and a flat washer is screwed into the pair of mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a. As a result, the flat washer, which is the seat portion of the pan screw with the seat, comes into contact with the front of the air cooling fan FAN and the front of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, so that the air cooling fan FAN jumps out of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. Can be prevented.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a gap having a predetermined distance dimension between the surface of the peripheral control IC 1510a (the surface on which the product number and model is printed) and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa. In this embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

  The cover flat plate 1501a communicates with the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and is located at a position higher than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa (a distance shorter than the distance from the front of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). ), A wiring extraction recess 1501ab is formed so as to protrude toward the opening of the cover body 1501. When the air-cooling fan FAN is attached and fixed to the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a plurality of wires from the air-cooling fan FAN can be pulled out from the wire pull-out recess 1501ab.

  When viewed from the front, the cover flat plate 1501a is located at a position corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control switch 1510d attached to the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a along the lower side. The connector recess 1501ac is formed as one closed substantially horizontally elongated rectangular area (more precisely, a convex area having the volume control switch 1510d and the connector CN1 as an upper part and the connectors CN2 to CN7 as a lower part). It is formed to protrude toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at a position lower than the bottom surface (a position having a distance dimension longer than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). I have. On the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and a volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 are formed at positions corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. Note that the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac substantially occupies a lower right region when the cover flat plate 1501a is viewed from the front. Therefore, as a measure against insufficient strength and warpage of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a) caused by an increase in the area of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 and volume control are provided on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. It is a position that does not interfere with the hole 1501ac8, and two vertically extending reinforcing ribs 1510aci1 and 1510aci2 are formed to protrude forward at a predetermined interval.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 become connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac. And from the volume adjustment holes 1501ac8. At this time, when the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted, the mounting height is lower than the distance dimension from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac to the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. That is, when viewed from the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac, the plug is hidden even when the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN1 to CN7 are inserted by the protruding wall of the cover flat plate 1501a on the upper side of the bottom of the connector recess 1501ac. It cannot protrude from the surface of the cover plate 1501a. The volume control switch 1510d is lower than the height of the connectors CN1 to CN7 and cannot protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, even if dust, metallic powder, or the like attached to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a falls from the cover side wall 1501b, the dust or the like adheres to the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the volume control switch 1510d. Can be prevented.

  When viewed from the front, the cover flat plate 1501a has one closed rectangular area along the lower side corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 attached to the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The opening of the cover body 1501 is located at a position where the connector concave portion 1501ad is lower than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa (a position having a distance dimension longer than the distance dimension from the front surface of the cover flat plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa). The bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad and the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac are disposed on the same plane. Connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 are formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad at positions corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, respectively.

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are exposed from the connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed on the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ad. . At this time, when the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 are inserted, the mounting height is lower than the distance dimension from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac to the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. That is, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the upper surface of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac is hidden by the projecting wall of the cover flat plate 1501a even if the plugs corresponding to the connectors CN8 and CN9 are inserted. It cannot protrude from the surface of the cover plate 1501a. Accordingly, even if dust, metal powder, or the like, attached to the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a falls from the cover side wall 1501b, it can be prevented from adhering to the connectors CN8 and CN9. It has become.

  The cover flat plate 1501a has a wiring lead-out opening 1501ae formed at a position corresponding to the CN 10 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 along the left side thereof when viewed from the front. The mounting recess 1501af for connecting the wiring cover 1503 having a horizontally long rectangular shape that can communicate with the wiring drawing opening 1501ae and can close the wiring drawing opening 1501ae is smaller than the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa described above. It is formed to protrude toward the opening of the cover body 1501 at a high position (a position having a shorter distance dimension than the distance dimension from the front of the cover plate 1501a to the bottom surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa). The mounting recess 1501af is provided at a position corresponding to the through hole 1503a formed in the wiring cover body 1503 at a predetermined height of a columnar shape inserted into the through hole 1503a (a distance shorter than a distance dimension in the depth direction of the wiring cover body 1503). A projection 1501afa having a dimension (dimensions) is formed so as to protrude toward the side opposite to the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the mounting hole 1501afb1 is formed at a position corresponding to the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503. , 1501afb2.

  When the wiring cover 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af, the front surface of the wiring cover 1503 and the front surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover 1501 are arranged on the same plane. ing. In this state, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503 and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. The wiring cover 1503 can be fixed to the mounting recess 1501af.

  When the wiring cover body 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af, the wiring cover opening 1501ae is closed, and a plurality of wirings (for transmitting drawing data to the effect display device 1600) connected to the connector CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are provided. The wiring cover body 1503 can function as a cover for protecting the plurality of wirings from being touched. The wiring cover body 1503 is made of a non-conductive resin, and is molded transparently.

  When the cover body 1501 is viewed from the front, plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb are formed near the opening side of the cover body 1501 on the left side wall 1501c and protrude outward at predetermined intervals in the center. In addition, a hinge hook 1501cc disposed above the guide 1501ca and protruding outward, and a hinge hook 1501cd disposed below the guide 1501cb and protruding outward are respectively formed. A chamfer is formed on the rear side of the left end of each of the guides 1501ca and 1501cb. On the other hand, L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda projecting forward are formed on the front side of the left ends of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd. A cover-side sealing portion 1501ea that protrudes outward is formed at the center of the cover body 1501 on the right cover side wall 1501e.

  The cover plate 1501a corresponds to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 when viewed from the rear so that the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged on the left side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. At the position, four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 are formed to protrude from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. Around the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, a soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral control. On the back side of the substrate 1510, copper solder foils (so-called “lands”) 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 each having a circular shape are formed, and the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4, 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 are respectively formed by a peripheral control board. A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral control board 1510 so as to be electrically connected to a ground (GND) line 1510.

  When attaching the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540c1a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of a metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, is mounted on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is arranged so as to match the boss hole 1501ag1, and the through hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 described later is aligned with the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. So that Of the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510, the through holes 1510r1 and 1510r4 are replaced with the through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the shield plate 1540 and the L shape of the shield plate 1540. The through holes 1540c2a formed in the mounting piece 1540c1 and the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a are arranged so as to match with the through holes 1510r2 and 1510r3 formed in the peripheral control board 1510. Are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, by inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing them into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4, the peripheral control board 1510 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. In this state, of the lands 1510rf1 to 1510rf4 formed on the front surface side of the peripheral control board 1510, the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are in contact with each other. At the same time, the lands 1510rf2 and 1510rf3 are in contact with the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss holes 1501ag2 and 1501ag3 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In addition, the lands 1510rb1 to 1510rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the seat surface of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (screw portion) of the metal pan screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are electrically connected to the lands 1510rf1 and 1510rf4 formed on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. The circuit 1540 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is the same. Because the metal shield plate 1540 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output. The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of the substrate 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Is electrically connected, the metal shield plate 1540 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510, thereby being grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630. .

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the heads of the metal pan-head screws inserted and screwed into the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 open the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. The cover side walls 1501b to 1501e are arranged inside (i.e., do not protrude outside the open side end faces).

  The cover plate 1501a corresponds to four through-holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 when viewed from the rear so that the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is disposed on the upper right side of the rear surface of the cover body 1501. A pair of mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 and a pair of mounting boss protruding portions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 are formed diagonally from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions where the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 are formed. Have been. Around the four through-holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, a soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520; Copper foils (so-called “lands”) 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 each having a circular shape are formed on the back side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and these lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 and 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 are formed respectively. A wiring pattern is formed on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 so as to be electrically connected to a ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520.

  When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is mounted on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b1a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of a metal shield plate 1540 described later is formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is arranged so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ah2. Then, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Thus, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover 1501 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. In this state, the land 1520rf4 of the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf4 formed on the front side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is in contact with the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540. At the same time, the lands 1520rf1 to 1520rf3 correspond to the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover plate 1501a and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501ah1. It will be in contact. Further, the lands 1520rb1 to 1520rb4 formed on the back surface side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the seat surface of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (thread portion) of the metal pan screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a.

  As a result, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1520rf4 formed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, so that the metal shield plate 1540 The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of the ROM board 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530, and is the same. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output. The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of the substrate 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. The metal shield plate 1540 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, thereby being grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630. Become.

  When the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of a metal pan screw inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 and screwed into the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. It is arranged inside the end face on the opening side (that is, so as not to protrude outside the end face on the opening side of the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e), and on the back side of the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the back side of the cover plate 1501a. The fixed back surface of the peripheral control board 1510 is arranged on the same plane.

  The cover plate 1501a corresponds to four through-holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 when viewed from the back so that the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is disposed on the lower right side of the back surface of the cover body 1501. At a position, a pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 and a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 are formed to project diagonally from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. ing. Around the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, a soldering copper foil (so-called “land”) 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 having a circular shape on the surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and a liquid crystal output. Copper solder foils (so-called “lands”) 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 each having a circular shape are formed on the back side of the substrate 1530, and the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 and 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 are respectively formed on the liquid crystal output substrate. A wiring pattern is formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 so as to be electrically connected to the ground (GND) line 1530.

  When attaching the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540b2a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of a metal shield plate 1540, which will be described later, is mounted on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is arranged so as to match the boss hole 1501am1. Then, the through holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Then, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and screwed toward the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. The output board 1530 can be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Thus, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. In this state, of the lands 1530rf1 to 1530rf4 formed on the front surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, the land 1530rf1 is in contact with the back surface of the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540. At the same time, the lands 1530rf2 to 1530rf4 abut against the mounting surfaces (boss surfaces) of the mounting boss protrusions 1501n1 and 1501n2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a and the mounting surface (boss surface) of the mounting boss holes 1501am2. At the same time, the lands 1530rb1 to 1530rb4 formed on the back surface side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the seat surface of the metal pan screw are in contact with each other. Further, the shaft (thread portion) of the metal pan screw is screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Accordingly, the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to the land 1530rf1 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, so that the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the liquid crystal output substrate. The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) at 1530. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510 and the ground (GND) line of the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and is the same. Since the metal shield plate 1540 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output board 1530, the metal shield plate 1540 is connected to the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM. The circuit is grounded to the ground (GND) of the substrate 1520. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Is electrically connected, the metal shield plate 1540 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, thereby being grounded to the ground (GND) line of the power supply substrate 630. .

  When the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the head of a metal pan screw inserted into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 and screwed into the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. And is fixed to the back side of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 and the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. The rear surface of the peripheral control substrate 1510 and the rear surface of the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 fixed to the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a are arranged on the same plane.

  Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the metal shield plate 1540, so that the cover plate 1501 is attached. In a state where the peripheral control IC 1510a is sandwiched and fixed between the FAN mounting recess 1501aa and the rear surface of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, a gap having the above-described predetermined distance dimension is provided. (In the present embodiment, 2.3 mm) is formed.

  In the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az are formed on the right side, the lower right side, the lower left side, and the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa, respectively. When the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment concave portion 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the space inside the cover body 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the wings, thereby controlling the periphery. By taking in air from outside the unit 1500 through these ventilation holes 1501az, the space inside the cover body 1501 (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) can be air-cooled. These ventilation holes 1501az have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the up-down direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm.

  When the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed in the cover body 1501 are formed. A gap is formed, and a gap is formed between the volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the volume control hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover 1501. Further, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, the two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501 are formed. A gap is formed. Therefore, when the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the wings. In addition, air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the above-described ventilation holes 1501az, and the above-mentioned gaps (the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the seven The clearances formed in the connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7, the volume adjustment switches 1510d provided in the peripheral control board 1510, the gaps formed in the volume adjustment holes 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 Two connectors CN8 provided And CN9, via the two connector hole 1501ac9,1501ac10 formed in the cover body 1501, a gap) formed, so that the capturing.

  The sum (total area) of the plurality of arc-shaped slit holes 1501aaa formed on the bottom surface of the FAN attachment recess 1501aa (total area) is the area of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the plurality of cover flat plates 1501a of the cover body 1501. The clearances described above (the seven connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the seven connector holes 1501ac1 to 1501ac7 formed on the cover body 1501) and the volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 , A volume adjustment hole 1501ac8 formed in the cover body 1501, a gap formed in the cover body 1501, two connectors CN8 and CN9 provided in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and two connector holes 1501ac9 and 1501ac1 formed in the cover body 1501. If is smaller than that the area of the gap) to be formed, it was added to the. Therefore, when the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment recess 1501aa rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover body 1501 to be blown out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the wings. Air from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 is formed in a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and in a plurality of shield plates 1540 housed in the space between the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. When the air is taken in through the ventilation holes 1540az, the flow velocity of the air flowing into each of the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 can be suppressed to be small.

[6-2. Base body]
The base body 1502 for closing the opening of the cover body 1501 is made of a non-conductive resin, is molded transparent, and has a horizontal rectangular base plate 1502a on the upper side, left side, lower side, and right side when viewed from the front. The base side walls 1502b to 1502e are formed in a box shape having an opening by projecting forward (toward the rear side of the pachinko machine 1). The size of the opening formed by the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 is slightly larger than the size of the opening formed by the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501. Accordingly, in a state where the opening of the cover body 1501 is closed by the base body 1502 by covering the cover body 1501 with the base body 1502, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 are provided inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502. Are fitted and inscribed (surface contact).

  When viewed from the front, the base plate 1502a is arranged at predetermined intervals along the lower side, at a position not interfering with the connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, for wiring to these connectors CN2 to CN7. Vertically elongated disconnection prevention rib portions 1502aa1 to 1502aa3 are formed to prevent the peripheral control board 1510 from warping due to the force at the time of inserting the connector for connection and disconnection of the electric wiring pattern formed on the peripheral control board 1510. Then, a force for inserting a connector for connecting a wiring to the connector CN1 or a force for operating the volume adjustment switch 1510d at a position not interfering with the connector CN1 and the volume adjustment switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The peripheral control board 1510 is warped by the Electrical wiring pattern formed on the zero elongated disconnection preventing rib portion 1502aa4 in the lateral direction to prevent the breakage is formed.

  Further, the base flat plate 1502a is located on the right side when viewed from the front, at a position corresponding to an L-shaped circuit grounding piece 1540d which is formed by bending a metal shield plate 1540 described later. A rectangular through-hole 1502ab that is slightly longer than the back surface of the ground piece 1540d and that is long in the vertical direction is formed.

  When the base body 1502 is viewed from the front, an engaging portion 1502ca projecting outward is formed near the opening side of the base body 1502 on the left base side wall 1502c. The engaging portion 1502ca has guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab at positions corresponding to the plate-like guide portions 1501ca and 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501, and hinge hook portions 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501. Hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed at corresponding positions. The hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad are formed with U-shaped groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf.

  The plate-like guide portions 1501ca, 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 described above are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502caa, 1502cab, and the U-shaped grooved bag portions 1502cae, 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac, 1502cad are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502cae, 1502caf. The L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover 1501 are inserted. The L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped grooved bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. By wrapping around, the L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are hooked on the U-groove-shaped bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. It can be engaged.

  In the center of the right base side wall 1502e, a base-side sealing portion 1502ea projecting outward at a position corresponding to the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 is formed. Further, through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 for mounting the peripheral control unit 1500 to the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5 are formed on the upper side and the lower side of the right base side wall 1502e, respectively.

[6-3. Shield plate]
The metal shield plate 1540, which can reduce (suppress) electromagnetic noise entering the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530, has a horizontally long rectangular shield when viewed from the front. L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 bent rearward by a predetermined distance (12 mm from the back surface of shield flat plate 1540a in the present embodiment) at the upper center on the left side and the lower center on the left side of flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). Are formed respectively.

  Further, when viewed from the front, the metal shield plate 1540 has a predetermined distance dimension on the upper right side and the lower right side of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm) (in the present embodiment, L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 bent backward by 12 mm from the rear surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed respectively, and are located at the center of the horizontally long rectangular shield flat plate 1540a (plate thickness: 1.2 mm). Between the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2, an L-shaped circuit grounding piece 1540d bent backward by a predetermined distance (in the present embodiment, 25 mm from the back surface of the shield plate 1540a) is formed. A conductive elastic member 1545 is attached (adhered) from the upper end to the lower end of the back surface of the L-shaped circuit grounding piece 1540d.

  The shield flat plate 1540a has cutouts formed therearound so as not to interfere with the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e, and is substantially located at a position corresponding to the FAN mounting concave portion 1501aa and the wiring drawing concave portion 1501ab of the cover flat plate 1501a. A square opening 1540aa is formed. Accordingly, various boards such as the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. In a state of being sandwiched and fixed between the cover body 1501 and various substrates, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 do not interfere with the outer periphery of the shield plate 1540a, and the FAN mounting recess 1501aa of the cover plate 1501a and Wiring leading recess 1501ab is inserted without contacting opening 1540aa of shield plate 1540a.

  The metal shield plate 1540 is formed by bending so that the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 and the back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 are arranged on the same plane. The back surfaces of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, 1540c2 and the surface of the shield flat plate 1540a are formed so as to be parallel to each other. In the present embodiment, the distance dimension from the front surface of the shield flat plate 1540a to the back surface of the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1, 1540b2, 1540c1, 1540c2 is 13.2 mm.

  Through holes 1540b1a and 1540b2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540b1 and 1540b2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah2 and 1501am1 formed on the back surface of the cover 1501 described above. As described above, the mounting boss holes 1501ah2 project from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1520r1 to 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520, as described above. It is one mounting boss hole of a pair of mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed. As described above, the mounting boss holes 1501am1 protrude from the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501 at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1530r1 to 1530r4 formed in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, as described above. One of the formed pair of mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2.

  Through holes 1540c1a and 1540c2a are formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 at positions corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 formed on the back surface of the cover 1501 described above. As described above, these mounting boss holes 1501ag1 and 1501ag4 are located at positions corresponding to the four through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 from the back surface of the cover plate 1501a toward the opening side of the cover body 1501. And two mounting boss holes out of the four mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed to protrude.

  Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the metal shield plate 1540, so that the cover plate 1501 is attached. In a state of being sandwiched and fixed between the substrate and various substrates, a distance dimension of a predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a (this embodiment). In the embodiment, a space having 14.8 mm) is formed, and two spaces are formed by disposing the metal shield plate 1540 in this space.

  The two spaces have a distance of a first predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface of the cover plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 described later. A second space 1505a (in this embodiment, 12 mm) having a first space 1505a (see FIG. 177) and a second space 1505a between a front surface of a shield plate 1540a of a metal shield plate 1540 and a back surface of the cover plate 1501a described later. And a second space 1505b (see FIG. 177) having a distance dimension of a predetermined height (1.6 mm in the present embodiment).

  In the first space 1505a, various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 (a peripheral control IC 1510a, a control ROM 1510b described later, an SDRAM 1510c described later, a real-time clock IC not illustrated, a backup power supply 1510e described later, a power supply creation circuit not illustrated, A resistor (not shown), a capacitor (not shown), LEDs ML1 to ML4 described later, special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 described later, various electronic components provided on a peripheral data ROM board 1520 (a peripheral data ROM 1520a described later, a resistor not illustrated, a capacitor not illustrated), While a special connector SCN3 described later) and various electronic components (a resistor not shown, a capacitor not shown, a special connector SCN4 described later, etc.) provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are housed therein. The second space 1505b, various electronic parts and the like is not at all accommodated. This is because various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise can be accommodated in the first space 1505a to take measures against electromagnetic wave noise, and various electronic components that generate heat in the second space 1505b. This is because heat generated from various electronic components and the like in the first space 1505a is efficiently transmitted to the second space 1505b via the metal shield plate 1540 by not housing the first space 1505a. That is, the metal shield plate 1540 has a function as a heat sink in addition to a function of reducing (suppressing) electromagnetic noise.

  In the shield plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540, ventilation holes 1540az having the same shape are respectively formed at positions corresponding to the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. That is, like the ventilation hole 1501az, these ventilation holes 1540az are formed to have a diameter of 3 mm, a pitch width in the left-right direction of 6.5 mm, and a pitch width in the vertical direction of 6.0 mm to 6.5 mm. I have. When the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN attached to the FAN attachment concave portion 1501aa of the cover 1501 rotate, the rotation causes the air in the inner space of the cover 1501 to blow out to the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 via the wings. Thereby, air is taken in from the outside of the peripheral control unit 1500 through the ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and the ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield plate 1540a of the shield plate 1540. The first space 1505a (particularly, the peripheral control IC 1510a) in the space inside the body 1501 can be air-cooled, and the metal shield plate 1540 can be air-cooled.

[6-4. Conductive elastic member]
The conductive elastic member 1545 attached (adhered) to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit grounding piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 is a conductive member having a cushioning property (elasticity), and includes a conductive coating portion 1545a, It is composed of a foam 1545b having a rectangular shape as a core material covered by the conductive covering portion 1545a, and a conductive adhesive tape 1545c stuck to the conductive covering portion 1545a. Examples of the covering portion 1545a include those in which a metal coating of copper and nickel is formed on a polyester woven fabric, those in which a conductive layer of copper and nickel is formed on a polyimide film, and the like. Examples of the foam 1545b include a polyurethane foam having heat resistance. As the conductive adhesive tape 1545c, for example, a conductive double-sided adhesive tape using an acrylic adhesive can be given. The surface of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c is protected by a peel paper until it is used, and the peel paper is peeled off when the conductive coating portion 1545a is attached (adhered) to another member.

  The conductive elastic member 1545 has a rectangular shape having a width of 5 mm and a height of 3 mm, and the conductive adhesive tape 1545c has a rectangular shape having a width of 2 mm and a height of 0.035 mm. have.

[6-5. Various connectors]
A peripheral control board 1510 mounted in the internal space of the cover 1501 includes a CPU, a RAM, a VDP, a VRAM, a sound source, a serial ATA controller (Advanced Technology Attachment, hereinafter referred to as “SATA controller”), and various I / Os. A peripheral control IC 1510a in which an O interface or the like is integrated on one semiconductor chip, and various programs and progresses of the effects that can control the progress and demonstration of the game effects (demonstration performed while waiting for the player). Various control information (peripheral data) stored in a control ROM 1510b which stores various prescribed schedule data in advance and a peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on a peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be transferred and stored. DRAM (Synchronous Dynamic
Random Access Memory (SDRAM) 1510c composed of 1510c1 and 1510c2, a slide-type volume control switch 1510d that can control the volume, and a backup power supply that can supply power to a real-time clock IC (not shown) even when power is cut off 1510e, a power supply generating circuit (not shown) for generating various power supply voltages, and various connectors CN1 to CN7. The peripheral control IC 1510a, the ROM 1510b, the SDRAM 1510c provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 have a smaller IC pin interval and various connectors CN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. To CN7, the pin interval between the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 is narrowed, and the number of connectors on the peripheral control board 1510 is increased, so that the interval between the connectors CN1 to CN7 is narrowed, and the interval between the connector CN7 and the special connector SCN2 is also narrowed. ing.

  The control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510 has a storage capacity of 128 Mbits, and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 each have a storage capacity of 2 Gbits. The peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a storage capacity of 62 Gbit.

  Various I / O interfaces of the peripheral control board 1510 include various serial I / Os and various parallel I / Os. Various serial I / Os include SPI (Serial Peripheral Interface) communication, UART (Universal Asynchronous Receiver Transmitter) communication, I2C (Inter-Integrated Circuit) communication, and the like.

  In the present embodiment, UART communication is adopted as a communication method for receiving a command from the main control board 1310 (communication is performed via the connector CN5), and various boards provided on the game board 5 side and various boards provided on the door frame side are provided. For example, SPI communication or I2C communication is employed as a communication method for transmitting control data to the communication device (a communication is performed via a corresponding connector among connectors CN3, CN6, and CN7).

  In the present embodiment, for example, by using SPI communication or I2C communication, an electric drive source provided on the game board 5 side (for example, various motors provided in various effect units, and communicates via the connector CN6 or the connector CN7). And an electric drive source provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, an operation ring drive motor 342 and an operation button lifting drive motor 367 provided in the effect operation unit 300), and communicate via the connector CN3. ) Is transmitted to the drive control IC for driving the game board 5, and various sensors provided on the game board 5 side (for example, various detection sensors provided in various effect units, which communicate via the connector CN6). From various sensors provided on the door frame 3 side (for example, various detection sensors provided in the effect operation unit 300). , And the and receives signals from communicating through the connector CN3.) As the detection data. In this embodiment, the transfer speed by the SPI communication is set to 250 kbps, and the transfer speed by the I2C communication is set to 1 kbps.

  As various parallel I / Os, there is a GPIO (General Purpose Input / Output, general-purpose IO). In the present embodiment, a signal from the air-cooling fan FAN that transmits the rotation state of the air-cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 is input to the GPIO (via the connector CN1), or is provided on the game board 5 side. Signals from various sensors for confirming the operation of the controlled object and the origin position are input to the GPIO (via the connector CN6), or a control signal for the controlled object (not shown) provided on the game board 5 is transmitted from the GPIO (to the connector CN6). And outputs a signal from the GPIO to the LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 for notifying that the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating. In the present embodiment, GPIO is used so as to function as serial communication. For example, in a predetermined interrupt process (for example, an interrupt process generated every 16 milliseconds (ms)), a clock signal is generated from the GPIO, and data is output bit by bit from the GPIO based on the clock signal. Can produce serial data. By using such a GPIO so as to function as serial communication, in a predetermined interrupt process (for example, an interrupt process generated every 16 milliseconds (ms)), for example, a plurality of LEDs provided on the game board 5 side (Communicated via the connector CN1), the light emission data can be output as a plurality of game board side serial systems, and a plurality of LEDs (communicated via the connector CN6) provided on the door frame 3 side. ) Can be transmitted by a plurality of door frame side serial systems.

  In the present embodiment, for example, GPIO is assigned to the connector CN1, and SPI communication and I2C communication are assigned to the connector CN3 (that is, the connector CN3 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and I2C communication coexist). , UART communication is assigned to the connector CN5, SPI communication and GPIO are assigned to the connector CN6 (that is, the connector CN6 is assigned as a connector in which SPI communication and GPIO coexist), and SPI communication is assigned to the connector CN7. Is assigned.

  The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a can establish communication conforming to the SATA standard with the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and realizes a high transfer rate of 2 Gbps (corresponding to 3 Gbps). The SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a transfers various kinds of control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a at high speed in accordance with an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. , And SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 at high speed.

  The SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are DDR3 SDRAMs (Double Data Rate3 Synchronous Dynamic Random Access Memory) and can realize a high data communication speed. In the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, various control information (peripheral data) from the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is transferred at high speed by the SATA controller of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  The peripheral control board 1510 further includes a special connector SCN1 for connecting the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the board, and a special connector SCN2 for connecting the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the board. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a special connector SCN3 for connecting between the peripheral control board 1510 and the board. The liquid crystal output board 1530 includes a special connector SCN4 for connecting the peripheral control board 1510 to the board.

  The peripheral control board 1510 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on a display device such as an effect display device from the special connector SCN2 in the form of a plurality of types of video signals. Examples of the plurality of types of video signal systems include a plurality of types such as an RGB system, an LVDS system, a Mobile Industry Processor Interface (MIPI) system, an Embedded Display Port (eDP) system, and a clockless system. In this system, four systems (a total of four systems) are adopted: one system for the RGB system, two systems for the LVDS system (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and the MIPI system. In the present embodiment, one of the two LVDS systems (for example, the first LVDS system) is adopted as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. ing. A peripheral control board that employs, for example, the eDP system instead of the MIPI system, and uses one system for the RGB system, two systems for the LVDS system (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and one system for the eDP system 1510 can also be created.

  The peripheral control board 1510 further includes an LEDML1 near the control ROM 1510b, an LEDML2 near the SDRAM 1510c, an LEDML3 near the special connector SCN1, and an LEDML4 near the special connector SCN2. As will be described later, various voltages (DC +35 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) are directly supplied to the peripheral control board 1510 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. The LED ML1 confirms (monitors) a state in which DC +5 V is supplied, and maintains the lighting state in a state in which DC +5 V is supplied. The LED ML2 is for confirming (monitoring) a state where DC +12 V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in a state where DC +12 V is supplied. The LED ML3 is for confirming (monitoring) a state where DC +35 V is supplied, and the lighting state is maintained in a state where DC +35 V is supplied. The LEDML4 is for confirming (monitoring) the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the lighting state is maintained while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating.

  Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the metal shield plate 1540, so that the cover plate 1501 is attached. As described above, in a state of being sandwiched and fixed between the substrate and the various substrates, a predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in the present embodiment) is formed, and two spaces are formed by disposing a metal shield plate 1540 in this space. As described above, the two spaces have the first predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface of the cover plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. The distance between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 177) having the distance dimension (12 mm in the present embodiment) and the front surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. And a second space 1505b (see FIG. 177) having a distance dimension of 2 (1.6 mm in this embodiment) at a predetermined height.

  As described above, the first space 1505a accommodates various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, various electronic components provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the like. ing. The first space 1505a thus formed can be brightly illuminated by turning on the LEDs ML1 to ML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510.

  The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are provided on the peripheral control board 1510 in that they have a floating mechanism. The structure is completely different from the connectors CN1 to CN7 and the connectors CN8 to CN10 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. Each of these connectors CN1 to CN10 is a socket, and the socket and the plug are fitted by inserting and pushing in a plug of the corresponding connector in a direction perpendicular to the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The sockets of the connectors CN1 to CN10 have a structure in which the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 do not move vertically when viewed from the front when they are fitted.

  The special connectors SCN1 and SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are plugs, respectively, and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are sockets, respectively.

  The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, whereby the socket and the plug are fitted. When the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fitted, the socket is in the front-rear direction when viewing the peripheral data ROM board 1520 (peripheral control board 1510) from the front (the back and front of the pachinko machine 1). ), A floating mechanism capable of absorbing an error in the front-rear direction that occurs when the user pushes in by moving a predetermined distance range toward the direction (1). The socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached to the peripheral data ROM board 1520 in a state where the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is attached and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even if the (peripheral control board 1510) moves to the maximum within the above-described predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, the front (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 does not contact the rear surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Further, a gap is formed between the front (upper surface) of the socket of the special connector SCN3 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501.

  The socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, whereby the socket and the plug are fitted. When the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fitted, when the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control board 1510) is viewed from the front, the socket is in the front-back direction (the direction between the back and front of the pachinko machine 1). ) Is provided with a floating mechanism capable of absorbing an error in the front-rear direction which occurs when the push-in operation is performed by moving a predetermined distance range toward (). Note that the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 may be mounted on the liquid crystal output board 1530 (peripheral control) in a state where the liquid crystal output board 1530 is mounted and fixed at a predetermined position on the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Even if the board 1510) is moved to the maximum within the above-described predetermined distance range when viewed from the front, a special (so that the front (upper surface)) of the socket of the special connector SCN4 does not contact the back surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A gap is formed between the front (upper surface) of the socket of the connector SCN4 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501.

  Here, the reason why the special connector SCN3 is used for the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the special connector SCN4 is used for the liquid crystal output board 1530 will be briefly described. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes a peripheral data ROM 1520a that can store various control information (peripheral data) to be controlled by the peripheral control board 1510. As various types of control information (peripheral data), image data such as a background image, a character image, and a design image for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, and various decorative substrates provided on the door frame 3 and the game board 5 Light emission data that defines the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishment, etc.) of various LEDs mounted on the vehicle, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, etc. Driving data and the like for driving and controlling the various movable effectors provided can be cited.

  The peripheral data ROM 1520a is a NAND flash (non-volatile) memory, is inexpensive, has a large capacity, and can write various data at high speed as compared with a NOR flash (non-volatile) memory. The peripheral data ROM 1520a has a low operating voltage, can suppress power consumption, and can realize a high transfer rate by communication conforming to the SATA standard.

  As described above, by adopting a NAND flash (non-volatile) memory as the peripheral data ROM 1520a, it is possible to realize cost reduction, contribute to suppression of power consumption, and read out various stored data at a high transfer rate. it can. However, although the peripheral data ROM 1520a can reduce power consumption due to its low operating voltage, it is easily affected by noise due to its low operating voltage. Further, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit various data stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, in the present embodiment, a configuration is not adopted in which the boards between the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected via wiring (harness). By adopting a configuration in which the control board 1510 is electrically connected to the control board 1510 by an inter-board connector, the influence of noise entering the inter-board transmission path is reduced.

  The procedure for mounting various boards in the internal space of the cover 1501 will be described later. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 inserts the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided therein into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. Since the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 need to be fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a after being pushed in, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism is adopted. By connecting the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a plurality of connection terminals formed in the plug and the socket can be absorbed. Prevent damage to the surrounding The transmission path between the substrate and the control substrate 1510 and the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 can be can be reliably formed.

  As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a non-conductive resin as described above, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding, though within the design dimensional distance tolerance. Even in such a case, by employing the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided with the above-described floating mechanism, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is fixed together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a. By absorbing an error in the front-rear direction generated at the time of connection, damage to a plurality of connection terminals formed on the plug and the socket is prevented, and a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is formed. It can be formed reliably.

  The liquid crystal output board 1530 outputs drawing data of an image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 transmitted from the peripheral control substrate 1510 from the connector CN10, so that the effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600 (for example, for a player). An image that informs that a big hit gaming state that is more advantageous than the normal state occurs, an image that conveys that no big hit gaming state occurs, and a state where the big hit gaming state occurs although the big hit gaming state does not occur This is an important substrate for drawing an image (such as an image indicating that the user is approaching) as an image. Therefore, it is necessary to accurately and reliably transmit drawing data of an image to be drawn on the effect display device 1600 from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 are not electrically connected to each other via wiring (harness) between the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510. By adopting a configuration in which the connector 1515 is electrically connected to an inter-board connector, the influence of noise entering the inter-board transmission line is reduced.

  The procedure for attaching various substrates in the internal space of the cover body 1501 will be described later, but the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 inserts a socket of the special connector SCN4 included in the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 into a plug of the special connector SCN2 included in the peripheral control substrate 1510. After being pushed in, it is necessary to fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Therefore, a socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism is adopted. By absorbing the error in the front-rear direction generated when the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the peripheral control board 1510, the connection terminals formed on the plug and the socket can be removed. Peripheral control board to prevent damage The transmission path between the substrate 510 and the liquid crystal driving substrate 1530 can be can be reliably formed.

  As described above, since the cover body 1501 is made of a non-conductive resin as described above, the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 may be warped after molding, though within the design dimensional distance tolerance. Even in such a case, by adopting the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, the liquid crystal output board 1530 is fixed together with the peripheral control board 1510 to the back side of the warped cover flat plate 1501a. By absorbing an error in the front-rear direction generated at the time, damage to a plurality of connection terminals formed on the plug and the socket is prevented, and a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is reliably formed. Can be formed.

  When the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, as described above, the back side of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 Since the rear surface and the rear surface of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the same plane, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are arranged on the peripheral control substrate 1510 with respect to the front surface. Since the distance dimension in the front-rear direction (that is, the depth direction) of the peripheral control unit 1500 can be reduced as compared with the case of performing the three-dimensional arrangement, for example, a large effect unit (operating a movable effect Electrical drive source and drive mechanism, and various sensors for detecting the origin position and operating position) It can contribute to ensuring the depth direction of the distance dimension of fit.

[6-6. How to assemble the peripheral control unit]
Here, a method of assembling the peripheral control unit 1500 will be described. First, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed. Subsequently, the socket of the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed.

  Subsequently, in order to attach the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, a through hole 1540c1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of the metal shield plate 1540. Are arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are connected to the back surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. The through-hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is disposed so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag4 formed on the rear side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Arranged to match the hole 1501ah2 and made of metal A through hole 1540b2a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540b2 of the shield plate 1540 are arranged to fit the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, the through holes 1520r1 and 1520r3 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 are inserted. The holes 1530r2 and 1530r4 are inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 have an arrangement corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are formed. The holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, and the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. Are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2 formed at the bottom.

  Subsequently, a metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1520r2 and 1520r4 formed in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and screwed into the mounting boss holes 1501ah1 and 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. To fix the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the back side of the cover plate 1501a, and insert metal pan head screws (not shown) into the through holes 1530r1 and 1530r3 formed in the liquid crystal output board 1530 to form it on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a by screwing it into the mounting boss holes 1501am1 and 1501am2. Thus, the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the L-shaped attachment piece 1540b2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is attached. The state is sandwiched between the cover 1501 and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530.

  Subsequently, since the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are arranged corresponding to the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a, they are directly or finely adjusted. If necessary, the through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in the peripheral control board 1510 are finely adjusted and arranged so as to match the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. By inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into the holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 and screwing them into the mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4, the peripheral control board 1510 is fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. As a result, the L-shaped mounting pieces 1540c1 and 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 are sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the peripheral control board 1510. That is, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are mounted together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover plate 1501a, so that the shield plate 1540 The body 1501 is held and fixed by the various substrates.

  As described above, among the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 is finally fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  The peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501ai1 and 1501ai2 formed on the back surface side of the cover flat plate 1501a to restrict the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is connected to the cover flat plate 1501a. While the movement in the vertical and horizontal directions is restricted by being inserted into the mounting boss protrusions 1501an1 and 1501an2 formed on the back side, the peripheral control board 1510 has mounting bosses for restricting in the vertical and horizontal directions. The protrusion is not formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. This is because the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a to restrict the vertical and horizontal directions, and the dimensional error due to such restraint is reduced by the peripheral control board 1510. When fixed to the back side of 1501a, absorption is performed by the respective dimensional tolerances of through holes 1510r1 to 1510r4 formed in peripheral control board 1510 and mounting boss holes 1501ag1 to 1501ag4 formed on the back side of cover flat plate 1501a. You can do it.

  Subsequently, in a state where the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the liquid crystal output board 1530, and the peripheral control board 1510 are fixed to the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a, plate-like guide portions 1501ca, 1501cb formed on the cover body 1501 are formed. The guide receiving portions 1502caa and 1502cab formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the base body 1502 are inserted into the guide receiving portions 1502ca and 1502cab. It is inserted into the U-shaped grooved bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad formed on the engaging portion 1502ca of the 1502.

  Subsequently, the L-shaped hooks 1501cca and 1501cda of the hinge hooks 1501cc and 1501cd formed on the cover body 1501 are in contact with the U-shaped grooved bag portions 1502cae and 1502caf of the hinge receiving portions 1502cac and 1502cad. Then, the base body 1502 is turned around so as to cover the opening side of the cover body 1501, and the L-shaped circuit grounding piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 passes through the through hole 1502ab of the base body 1502 and covers the base body 1502 as it is. When the L-shaped circuit grounding piece 1540d is put on the body 1501, the L-shaped circuit grounding piece 1540d protrudes from the back surface of the base body 1502. Metal one-way screw Screwed toward the base side sealing section 1502ea formed on the base member 1502 by entering. When the metal one-way screw is screwed in, the distal end surface of the metal anchor rivet expands outward at the base side sealing portion 1502ea, thereby forming the cover side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502. And the base side sealing portion 1502ea to be sealed.

  In such a sealed state, the cover side walls 1501b to 1501e of the cover body 1501 fit inside the base side walls 1502b to 1502e of the base body 1502 and are in a state of inscribed (surface contact). In this sealed state, the L-shaped circuit grounding piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 projects from the back surface of the base body 1502, and the L-shaped circuit grounding piece 1540d extends from the back surface of the base body 1502. The distance dimension (protrusion length) extending to the back surface is 6.8 mm.

  In order to release such a sealed state, the cover-side sealing portion 1501ea formed on the cover body 1501 must be broken by a tool. Therefore, by looking at the traces of the opening and closing, it is possible to discover the unauthorized opening and closing of the peripheral control board box 1505 composed of the cover body 1501 and the base body 1502, and a deterrent to the illegal operation of the peripheral control board box 1505. Has been raised.

  Subsequently, the air-cooling fan FAN is pushed into the FAN mounting recess 1501aa formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501, and a plurality of wires from the air-cooling fan FAN are drawn from the wire drawing recess 1501ab formed on the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A pan screw with a metal seat (not shown) (a screw having an integrated pan head and flat washer) is screwed into the drawer and the mounting holes 1501aac1 and aac2 from the front to the rear of the cover plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, a plurality of wirings (harnesses) to the effect display device 1600 are connected to the connector CN10 of the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 via the wiring lead-out opening 1501ae formed in the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. Is inserted and attached, and the wiring cover body 1503 is fitted into the mounting recess 1501af formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. A metal pan screw (not shown) is inserted into the through holes 1503b1 and 1503b2 formed in the wiring cover body 1503, and screwed into the mounting holes 1501afb1 and 1501afb2 from the front to the rear of the wiring cover body 1503, respectively. 1503 is fixed to the mounting recess 1501af. Accordingly, the plurality of wirings are covered by the wiring cover body 1503 and cannot be touched.

  Subsequently, the peeling sheet of the conductive adhesive tape 1545c of the conductive elastic member 1545 is peeled off, and the conductive elastic member is attached to the back surface of the L-shaped circuit grounding piece 1540d of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502. Attach (adhere) 1515 adhesive tape 1545c.

  When the peripheral control unit 1500 assembled in this manner is attached to the mounting portion formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box that houses the effect display device 1600, behind the game panel 1100 provided on the game board 5. When the peripheral control unit 1500 is viewed from the front, the left side of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the engaging portion 1502ca side formed on the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500) is placed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box. A transparent synthetic resin box is inserted by inserting a metal pan screw (not shown) into the through holes 1502eb1 and 1502eb2 formed in the base body 1502 of the peripheral control unit 1500. It is fixed by screwing it toward a mounting hole that forms a mounting portion formed on the back surface side of.

  As described above, effect display device 1600 includes a frame-shaped metal frame, a metal back cover that covers the entire rear surface of the metal frame, and a transparent synthetic resin box. The frame-shaped metal frame houses a liquid crystal panel, a backlight, a driving circuit, and the like. The entire rear surface of the frame-shaped metal frame is closed and fixed by a metal back cover, and is housed in a transparent synthetic resin box. The effect display device 1600 is controlled by the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 as described above, and is electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500. To the same ground (GND). When the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the attachment portion formed on the back surface side of the transparent synthetic resin box of the effect display device 1600, the L-shaped circuit grounding piece of the metal shield plate 1540 protruding from the back surface of the base body 1502 1540d passes through a through-hole (not shown) formed on the back side of the transparent synthetic resin box, and as shown in FIG. 178, contacts the metal back cover of the effect display 1600 via the conductive elastic member 1545. It will be in contact. At this time, the conductive elastic member 1545 is pushed in and crushed in the height direction (in this embodiment, the height of the conductive elastic member 1545 is crushed by 1 mm to 1.5 mm). Can be absorbed by the conductive elastic member 1545. Thus, the metal shield plate 1540 of the peripheral control unit 1500 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected to each other, and the peripheral control board accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 is connected. Since it is electrically connected to a ground (GND) line such as 1510 and can be set to the same ground (GND), it is necessary to construct an environment that is strong against electromagnetic noise for the peripheral control unit 1500 and its surroundings. Can be.

  In the above-described assembling method, in the procedure for mounting various substrates in the internal space of the cover body 1501, for example, first, a through hole 1540c1a formed in an L-shaped mounting piece 1540c1 of a metal shield plate 1540 is inserted. The through-hole 1540c2a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540c2 of the metal shield plate 1540 is disposed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a so as to match the mounting boss hole 1501ag1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. It is arranged so as to match the formed mounting boss hole 1501ag4, and the through hole 1540b1a formed in the L-shaped mounting piece 1540b1 of the metal shield plate 1540 is attached to the mounting boss hole 1501ah2 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a. And the metal shield plate 1540 A through hole 1540b2a formed in shape attachment pieces 1540B2, arranged to fit the mounting boss hole 1501am1 formed on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a.

  Subsequently, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is disposed at the above-described predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510 (the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is located on the upper right side of the cover body 1501 when the cover body 1501 is viewed from the back side. And the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is fixed to the above-described predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a of the peripheral control board 1510 (the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 is a cover body viewed from the back side of the cover body 1501). After being fixed to the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the socket of the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in. The special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 The peripheral control board 1510 is inserted into the plug of the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and pushed in, and the peripheral control board 1510 is positioned at the above-described predetermined position (the peripheral control board 1510 is (It is arranged on the left side.) Even in such a mounting procedure of various substrates, by adopting the sockets of the special connectors SCN3 and SCN4 provided with the above-mentioned floating mechanism, by absorbing the error in the front-rear direction generated at the time of pushing, the plug and the socket can be connected. The connection paths formed between the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the peripheral control board 1510 can be reliably formed, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 and the periphery can be prevented. A transmission path between the control board 1510 and the board can be reliably formed.

  By the way, there are a plurality of types of game boards mounted on pachinko machines having different game specifications. In the present embodiment, various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be divided into three and attached to the back side of the cover plate 1501a of the cover body 1501. The peripheral control board 1510 is a board that can be used in common regardless of the game specifications of the game board mounted on the pachinko machine, and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a according to the game specification of the game board. Are stored depending on the game specification of the game board by storing the peripheral data corresponding to the game data, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is a board dependent on the type of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600.

  Accordingly, the peripheral control board 1510 is a board that does not depend on the game specifications of the game board, and does not depend on the type of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600, and is a common board. Therefore, it can be reused (reused). Further, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 including a peripheral data ROM 1520a in which peripheral data corresponding to each game specification of the game board is stored, and a peripheral control board 1510 are electrically connected by the above-described inter-board connector. Therefore, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be easily replaced according to the game specifications of the game board.

  As a method of a video signal input to a display device such as an effect display device, for example, as described above, there are a plurality of types of systems such as an RGB system, an LVDS system, a MIPI system, an eDP system, and a clockless system. The liquid crystal output board 1530 and the peripheral control board 1510 corresponding to these plural types are electrically connected by the above-described board-to-board connector. That is, the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can be easily replaced according to the method of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. In the present embodiment, as described above, one of the two LVDS systems (for example, the first LVDS system) is used as the system of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. Is adopted, the liquid crystal output board 1530 adapted to the method of the video signal (LVDS method) input to the effect display device 1600 is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 by the above-described inter-board connector.

  In the present embodiment, the cover 1501, the base 1502, and the wiring cover 1503 are made of a non-conductive resin and are formed by being transparently formed. Various boards such as a peripheral data ROM board 1520 and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are mounted at predetermined positions together with a metal shield plate 1540, so that the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed between the cover body 1501 and the various substrates. Then, the metal shield plate 1540 is configured to be grounded to the ground (GND) of various substrates. As described above, the ground (GND) line of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is electrically connected to the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4. Connected. Therefore, electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 is used as circuit ground via the metal shield plate 1540 as the ground of various substrates (GND) and the ground of the power supply substrate 630. (GND), and can be removed from the frame ground board 559 shown in FIG. 102 (b) by leading it to the ground of the island facility of the game hall. Thus, it is not necessary to provide a dedicated filter for removing such electromagnetic wave noise on various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630), which contributes to cost reduction of various substrates (including the power supply substrate 630). Can be.

  Here, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az formed in the cover flat plate 1501a of the cover body 1501 and a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az formed in the shield flat plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 are provided. Will be described. As described above, the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az can not only cool the space inside the cover 1501 but also have a function of confirming the presence or absence of fraud.

  Specifically, when the peripheral control unit 1500 is assembled as described above, as shown in FIG. 176, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are attached to the peripheral control board. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b included in the control ROM 1510, the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number) , Pin numbers, etc.), that is, the surface of the control ROM 1510b, the state of the IC pins, and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing are checked from multiple angles. So that the area is larger than the shape of the control ROM 1510b. It is. Thus, in addition to the correspondence between the control ROM 1510b and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing, the modification of the control ROM 1510b can be confirmed via the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. . Further, the LED ML1 arranged near the control ROM 1510b keeps the lighting state in a state where the DC +5 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, and therefore the LED ML1 is originally supplied with the DC + 5V. Although it has a function of confirming (monitoring) the state of the control ROM 1510b, it also has a function as a spotlight for illuminating the control ROM 1510b brightly, thereby improving the visibility of the surface of the control ROM 1510b and the state of the IC pins. , And the visibility of the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be improved.

  A plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520), and further provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 respectively (for example, , Connector pin count, IC (Direction, part number, pin number, etc.), that is, silk printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the state of the IC pins, the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520, respectively. Are distributed so as to form a large area where the contents can be almost confirmed from angles in multiple directions. Thereby, the correspondence between the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the content printed on the peripheral control board 1510, the content printed on the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the content printed on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are displayed. In addition to the corresponding relationship, the modification of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, It can be confirmed through a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az. Further, the LED ML3 disposed near the special connector SCN1 is maintained in a lighting state in a state where DC +35 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. Although it has a function of checking (monitoring) the state of supply, it is used as a spotlight for brightly illuminating the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN3 on the peripheral data ROM board 1520. Of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, the visibility of the state of the IC pins, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 by silk printing, respectively. The visibility of the peripheral control board 1510 And it is capable to contribute to the improvement of the visibility of the substrate between the connector according to the the special connector SCN1 and peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 special connectors provided in SCN3 obtaining.

  A plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az arranged on the lower left side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa can confirm the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. The area is larger than the shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530). 1530 and 1530, so that the contents (for example, the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the component number, the pin number, etc.) printed on the silk screen can be visually recognized. Thereby, the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the content printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 by the correspondence between the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the content printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 by the silkscreen printing. In addition to the correspondence, the modification of the inter-board connector by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 is confirmed through a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az. can do. In addition, the LEDML4 arranged near the special connector SCN2 keeps the lighting state while the peripheral control IC 1510a is operating, and therefore, the operation of the peripheral control IC 1510a is originally confirmed (monitored). Although having the function, the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530 have a function as a spotlight for brightly illuminating an inter-board connector with the special connector SCN4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The visibility of the contents printed on the liquid crystal output board 1530 by silk printing is improved, and the visibility of the inter-board connector is improved by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. , Can contribute to It has become the jar.

  Further, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az disposed on the lower right side of the FAN mounting recess 1501aa are provided with the product number and model printed on the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, and the SDRAM 1510c1 and SDRAM 1510c1. The state of the IC pin 1510c2 and the content (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be visually recognized, that is, the surface of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. And the state of the IC pins and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing are distributed so as to be larger than the shapes of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, respectively, so that the areas can be confirmed from various angles. Are located. Thereby, in addition to the correspondence between the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing, the modification of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 can be confirmed through the ventilation holes 1501az and 1540az having a plurality of circular shapes. Can be. Further, since the LEDML2 disposed near the SDRAM 1510c composed of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 is kept turned on when DC +12 V is supplied from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620, Although it originally has a function of confirming (monitoring) a state where DC +12 V is supplied, the surface of the SDRAM 1510c (that is, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2) is further provided with a spotlight function of illuminating the SDRAM 1510c brightly. , The visibility of the state of the IC pins, and the visibility of the content silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be improved.

  In addition, among a plurality of blades constituting the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN, a gap between the blades (specifically, a gap between the blades when an inspector rotates the wings of the air-cooling fan FAN). From this, the part number of the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 can be confirmed. This makes it possible to confirm whether or not an illegal board is arranged around the peripheral control IC 1510a through the plurality of circular ventilation holes 1501az.

  In the present embodiment, since the LEDML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are of a surface mount type, have a wide angle of about 120 degrees, and have a weak directivity, Also suitable for lighting applications. Various boards such as a peripheral control board 1510, a peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 are attached to a predetermined position on the back side of the cover flat plate 1501a together with the metal shield plate 1540, so that the cover plate 1501 is attached. As described above, in a state of being sandwiched and fixed between the substrate and the various substrates, a predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension (14.8 mm in the present embodiment) is formed, and two spaces are formed by disposing a metal shield plate 1540 in this space. As described above, the two spaces have the first predetermined height between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back surface of the cover plate 1501a) and the back surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540. The distance between the first space 1505a (see FIG. 177) having the distance dimension (12 mm in the present embodiment) and the front surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540 and the back surface of the cover plate 1501a. And a second space 1505b (see FIG. 177) having a distance dimension of 2 (1.6 mm in this embodiment) at a predetermined height. As described above, the first space 1505a accommodates various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510, various electronic components provided on the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, various electronic components provided on the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and the like. ing. The first space 1505a thus formed can be brightly illuminated by the LEDs ML1 to ML4 provided on the surface of the peripheral control board 1510 which is also suitable for use as illumination.

  In addition, since the shield plate 1540 is made of metal, it has a gloss, and a region on the back surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540, which faces the light emitting surfaces of the LEDs ML1 to LEDML4 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. In addition, it also has a function as a reflector that can reflect the light emitted from the LEDML1 to the LEDML4 to the surroundings and return the light to the peripheral control board 1510 again. These reflective portions may be configured to further apply a glossy colored paint.

  As shown in FIG. 4, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5 near the game board 5 and the payout unit 560 is provided on the side of the game board 5. Are arranged, so that the game balls rub against each other in the ball path constituted by these, and are charged and electrostatically discharged, thereby becoming a noise source. Therefore, in the vicinity of the game board 5 where the ball path is formed, there is an environment that is affected by electromagnetic wave noise due to electrostatic discharge from the game ball. In addition, the pachinko machines 1 are arranged in a row opposite to the island facilities in the game hall. As described above, the periphery of the game board 5 is in an environment that is extremely susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a non-conductive resin and transparently molded as described above. In addition, various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are attached at predetermined positions together with a metal shield plate 1540, and the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched between the cover body 1501 and the various substrates. In this case, the metal shield plate 1540 is electrically connected to grounds (GND) of various substrates to form a circuit ground. In the present embodiment, the ground (GND) lines of the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are connected to the ground of the power supply board 630 in the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 as described above. A configuration was adopted in which the same ground (GND) was provided by electrically connecting to the (GND) line.

  Thereby, the cover body 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base The electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the body 1502 is grounded as a circuit ground via a metal shield plate 1540 as ground (GND) of various substrates such as a peripheral control substrate 1510, a peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and a liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and a power supply. The ground (GND) of the board 630 and the frame ground board 559 shown in FIG. 102 (b) can be removed by guiding to the ground of the island facility of the game hall. In other words, the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base Electromagnetic noise that has entered from the body 1502 can be removed from the frame ground board 559 to the ground of the island facility of the game hall through the metal shield plate 1540 as circuit ground called circuit ground.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 4, a ball tank 552 and a tank rail 553 are arranged above the game board 5 near the game board 5 and the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5. In a state where the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the rear surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000, the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board The inter-board connector with the special connector SCN3 provided on the 1520 and the inter-board connector with the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged near the center of the ball tank 552. So that it can be placed away from the tank rail 553 You have me. As described above, the tank rail 553 can drop the metal powder of the game ball B to the outside through the cutout portions 553aa formed in the main guiding portion 553a. By arranging the inter-connector away from the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of electrical trouble due to the metal powder of the game balls B in the inter-board connector described above.

  Further, a board-to-board connector including a special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN3 provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and a special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and a special connector SCN4 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530. The board-to-board connector is a state in which the peripheral control unit 1500 is attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000). In FIG. 176, as shown in FIG. 176, the arrangement can be made long in the up-down direction, so that the area to which dust, powder having some metallic property, or the like adheres can be minimized. If the above-described inter-board connector is arranged to be long in the left-right direction, the area to which dust, powder having some metallic property, or the like adheres is extremely increased. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 176, the connectors CN1 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are long in the left-right direction, so that dust and some metallic property are reduced. Although the area to which the powders and the like have become extremely large, as described above, when viewed from the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac, the upper side of the bottom surface of the connector recess 1501ac is formed by a projecting wall called a cover flat plate 1501a. Even if the plugs corresponding to CN1 to CN9 are inserted, the plugs are hidden and cannot protrude from the surface of the cover flat plate 1501a, so that the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the cover flat plate 1501a Dust, dust having some metallic property, etc. adhered to the cover side wall 1501 It is dropped from, so that it can be prevented from adhering to the connector CN1～CN9. As described above, the direction in which the above-described inter-board connector is arranged and the direction in which the connectors CN1 to CN9 are arranged so that dust, powder having any metallic property, etc. can be prevented from adhering to each electric terminal. Is selected.

  By the way, conventionally, a gaming machine equipped with a ROM in which image data such as patterns, various background images, characters, and characters are stored, and an effect control board on which a CPU for controlling a display device that displays various images is mounted. It has been proposed (for example, JP-A-2006-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, there are a plurality of types of video signal systems input to the display device. For this reason, in the gaming machine described in this document, it is necessary to modify and produce the effect control board in accordance with the video signal input to the display device, and it is difficult to suppress the cost of the effect control board. there were.

  Conventionally, a ROM in which image data such as patterns, various background images, characters, and characters are stored, an effect control board (effect control means) on which a CPU for controlling a display device for displaying various images is mounted, and the like. (For example, JP-A-2006-116667 (FIG. 2)). By the way, the game balls supplied from the island equipment of the game hall to the gaming machine are charged with static electricity by rubbing the game balls when circulating between the island equipment of the game hall and the gaming machine. It is necessary to take measures against electromagnetic noise due to electrostatic discharge from the battery.

[7. Control configuration]
Next, a control configuration for performing various controls of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. 179 to 181. FIG. 179 is a block diagram schematically showing the control configuration of the pachinko machine, FIG. 180 is a block diagram schematically showing the connection relationship with the panel drive board, and FIG. 181 is a block diagram showing a continuation of FIG. As shown in FIG. 115, the main control configuration of the pachinko machine 1 includes a main control board 1310 and a peripheral control board 1510 attached to the game board 5, and a payout control board 633 attached to the main body frame 4. And each control is shared. The main control board 1310 can control a game operation (game progress). The peripheral control board 1510 can control the progress of the effect based on various commands from the main control board 1310. The payout control board 633 includes a payout control unit 633a that can control the payout of the game ball B and the like, and a firing control unit 633b that can control the firing of the game ball B by rotating the handle 182. I have.

[7-1. Main control board]
As shown in FIG. 179, a main control board 1310 capable of controlling the progress of the game controls a power-on process executed at the time of power-on and a game executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the power-on. A main control MPU 1310a, which is a microprocessor having a built-in ROM for storing various processing programs such as a main control program for controlling the operation and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data, and receives detection signals from various sensors. A main control input circuit 1310b, a main control output circuit 1310c for outputting various signals to an external board or the like, a main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d for driving various solenoids, A power failure monitoring circuit 1310e that monitors for signs of a momentary power failure, and is built into the main control MPU 1310a. A RAM clear switch 1310f for completely erasing the information stored in the RAM that is provided with a. The main control MPU 1310a is operated by a high frequency circuit of a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided on the main control board 1310.

  The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in RAM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in RAM”) and a built-in ROM (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in ROM”). In addition, a watchdog timer (hereinafter referred to as “main control built-in WDT”) for monitoring the operation (system), a function for preventing improper operation, and the like are also built in.

  The main control MPU 1310a has a built-in nonvolatile RAM. The non-volatile RAM previously stores a unique ID code to which a unique code (a code having only one in the world) for identifying an individual by a manufacturer that manufactures the main control MPU 4100a is stored. Since the ID code once assigned is stored in the nonvolatile RAM, it cannot be rewritten using an external device. The main control MPU 4100a can take out the ID code from the nonvolatile RAM and refer to it.

  The main control MPU 1310a also has a built-in circuit that is forcibly reset by hardware when affected by electrical noise (hereinafter, referred to as a "built-in reset circuit"). The built-in reset circuit monitors the contents of a predetermined register of the main control MPU 1310a, and when the register changes to an inconsistent content, forcibly resets the main control MPU 1310a to the effect that it has been affected by electrical noise. This is a circuit to reset. Such a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit has a mechanism that cannot be invalidated by being controlled by a user program. Therefore, when a forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is performed, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control side power-off process described later, and executes the main control side power-on process described later again. Will be done. In this case, since the main-control-side power-off process is not executed, a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, as described later, so that the contents of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased ( Clear). Even if the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the reset signal is not output from the built-in reset circuit of the main control MPU 1310a to the payout control board 633. Only the MPU 1310a) is restarted, and the payout control board 633 is kept in the activated state.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a is a hardware random number circuit (hereinafter, referred to as “main control built-in hardware”) that updates a jackpot determination random number used for determining whether to generate a jackpot game state among various random numbers related to the game. Random number circuit ”). The hard random number circuit with built-in main control generates a random number within a predetermined numerical range (in the present embodiment, a numerical value range of 0 to 65535 is set as the minimum value and the maximum value is set in advance in the present embodiment). The circuit is configured such that a predetermined value is not fixed (that is, the initial value is not fixed), and a different value is set each time the main control MPU 1310a is reset. Specifically, when the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit first sets a clock signal (main signal) input to the main control MPU 1310a to a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value. Based on a clock signal output from a crystal oscillator (not shown) provided separately from the control MPU 1310a, other values within the predetermined numerical range are extracted one after another without duplication, and within the predetermined numerical range. Is completed, once again, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted, and another value within the predetermined numerical range is rapidly extracted based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. Extract values one after another without duplication. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a determines the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a big hit determination random number. Is set as

  The main control input circuit 1310b is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information input with detection signals from various sensors at its various input terminals, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the main control input circuit 1310b is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is input. That is, since the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals is not reset by the main control system reset, the main control input circuit 1310b outputs various signals based on the information from the various output terminals. It is configured as a circuit to be output.

  The main control output circuit 1310c is configured as an open collector output type whose emitter terminal is grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external board or the like are input to various input terminals thereof. A main control output circuit with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the reset information, a main control output circuit without a reset function without a reset function having no reset terminal, It is composed of The main control output circuit with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the main control output circuit with the reset function resets the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by the main control system reset, and thereby outputs a signal based on the information. Are configured as circuits that do not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the main control output circuit without a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a main control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the main control output circuit without a reset function outputs a signal based on the information because the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is not reset by the main control system reset. It is configured as a circuit output from the various output terminals.

  A first starting port sensor 3002 (the above-described first starting port sensor main side 3002a and a first starting port sensor subordinate side 3002b) for detecting a game ball B received in the first starting port 2002, a second starting port 2004 The second starting port sensor 2402 for detecting the game ball B received in the game, the general winning port sensors 2401 and 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001, and detecting the game ball B passing through the gate unit 2003 The detection signals from the gate sensor 2506 that performs the game, the special winning opening sensor 2403 that detects the game ball B received in the special winning opening 2005, and the magnetic sensor 3003 that detects the illegal magnetism in the game area 5a, The signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  The respective detection signals from the first starting port sensor 3002 and the second starting port sensor 2402 are input to the main control board 1310 without passing through another board, that is, the main control input circuit 1310b The signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control MPU 1310a. On the other hand, the respective detection signals from the general winning opening sensors 2401 and 3001, the gate sensor 2506, the special winning opening sensor 2403, and the magnetic sensor 3003 are transmitted through the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly through the main control. The signal is input to the board 1310 and is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  The main control MPU 1310a outputs a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function 1310ca based on these detection signals, so that the main control output circuit with reset function outputs the main control solenoid. By outputting a control signal to the drive circuit 1310d, a drive signal is output from the main control solenoid drive circuit 1310d to the starting port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414 via the panel relay board 1710, that is, indirectly. Or, by outputting a drive signal from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function, the status display, the normal symbol display, and the normal display of the function display unit 1400 are output from the main control output circuit with reset function. Hold indicator, first special design indicator, first special Pending number indicator, the second special symbol display device, the second special reserved number indicator, the respective drive signals to the round indicator, without passing through the other substrate, that is directly or outputs.

  In addition, the main control MPU 1310a outputs various information (game information) relating to a game from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with a reset function, thereby outputting the payout control board 633 from the main control output circuit with a reset function. The main control with reset function by outputting various information (game information) related to the game to the main control output circuit with reset function from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output circuit with reset function The output circuit outputs a signal (power failure clear signal) to the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e.

  In the present embodiment, the first starting port sensor 3002 (the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b), the second starting port sensor 2402, the gate sensor 2506, and the special winning opening While a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch is used for the sensor 2403, a contact type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch is used for the general winning opening sensors 2401 and 3001. This is because the game ball B frequently enters the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 and frequently passes through the gate unit 2003, so that the first starting port sensor 3002 and the second starting port sensor 2402 , And the detection of the game ball B by the gate sensor 2506 frequently occurs. For this reason, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the first startup port sensor 3002, the second startup port sensor 2402, and the gate sensor 2506.

  In addition, when an advantageous game state (“big hit” game, etc.) that is advantageous to the player occurs, the special winning opening 2005 is opened and the game ball B frequently enters, so that the game ball by the special winning opening sensor 2403 is used. Detection of B also occurs frequently. Therefore, a proximity switch having high durability and long life is used for the special winning opening sensor 2403 as well. On the other hand, in the general winning opening 2001 where the game ball B does not frequently enter, the detection by the general winning opening sensors 2401 and 3001 does not frequently occur. Therefore, a mechanical switch having a shorter life than the proximity switch is used for the general winning opening sensors 2401 and 3001.

  Also, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands related to payout as serial data from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function, thereby transmitting the payout control board 633 from the main control output circuit without reset function. , Various commands are transmitted as serial data. When normally receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control board 633 outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect to the main control board 1310. This signal (payer ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  Further, the main control MPU 11310a receives various commands regarding the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the payout control board 633 as serial data in the main control input circuit 1310b, so that the main control input circuit 1310b inputs the predetermined serial input port. The terminal receives various commands as serial data. When the various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received as serial data, the main control MPU 1310a outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the main control output with reset function. The main control output circuit with the reset function outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to the payout control board 633.

  Further, the main control MPU 1310a transmits various commands relating to control of the game effect and various commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 from the output terminal of the predetermined serial output port to the main control output circuit without reset function as serial data. Various commands are transmitted as serial data from the main control output circuit without the reset function to the peripheral control board 1510.

  Various voltages (DC +35 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are supplied to the main control board 1310 via the payout control board 633. The power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the main control board 1310 is provided with an electric double layer capacitor (hereinafter simply referred to as “capacitor”) as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. BC0 (see FIG. 183 and the like). The capacitor BC0 allows the main control MPU 1310a to store various types of information in the main control built-in RAM even in the power-off process even when the power is turned off. When the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated within a predetermined period from power-on, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is stored in the main control built-in RAM. Is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the main control MPU 1310a completely erases (clears) the RAM from the main control built-in RAM. I have. This operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output to the main control output circuit without reset function, and is output from the main control output circuit without reset function to the payout control board 633.

  The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is supplied with DC + 12V and DC + 35V from the power supply board 630, and monitors the DC + 12V and DC + 35V for signs of power failure or momentary power failure. The power failure monitoring circuit 1310e outputs a power failure warning signal to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning when detecting a power failure or an instantaneous power failure of DC + 12V and DC + 35V. While being input to the input terminal, the main control board 1310 (output via the main control output circuit 1310c), and the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab of the payout control board 4110. Is input to Further, the power failure notice signal is input to the peripheral control board 1510 via the main control board 1310. Note that the power failure notice signal may be configured to be input to a board or the like on which the door frame 3 is mounted.

  In the present embodiment, the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is applied to two power lines: a power line to which +12 V DC is supplied (+12 V power line) and a power line to which +35 V DC is supplied (+35 V power line). By monitoring the voltages respectively, it is possible to more accurately grasp the sign of a power failure such as a power failure or a momentary power failure as compared with the case of monitoring the voltage applied to one of the + 12V power line and the + 35V power line. Is available.

[7-2. Dispensing control board]
In addition to the payout control of the game ball B, a payout control board 633 that performs a launch control, a ball feeding control, and the like of the game ball B performs a payout control unit 633 a that performs various controls related to payout, and performs a firing control by the firing solenoid 542. A launch control unit 633b for performing ball feeding control by the ball feeding solenoid 145, an error LED display 633c for displaying the state of the pachinko machine 1, and an error LED display 633c for canceling an error displayed on the error LED display 633c. And an error cancel switch 633d.

[7-2-1. Dispensing control section]
As shown in FIG. 179, the payout control unit 633a that performs various controls related to payout on the payout control board 633 controls a power-on process that is performed when the power is turned on, and is executed after a predetermined time has elapsed from the power-on. A payout control MPU 633aa, which is a microprocessor including a ROM for storing various processing programs including a payout control program for controlling a payout operation of a game medium and various commands and a RAM for temporarily storing data, etc. A payout control input circuit 633ab to which a detection signal from a sensor is input, a payout control output circuit 633ac for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like, and a drive signal for outputting a drive signal to a payout motor 584 of a payout device 580. And a payout motor drive circuit 633ad.

  The payout control MPU 633aa has a built-in RAM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in RAM”), a built-in ROM (hereinafter referred to as “payout control built-in ROM”), and its operation ( A watchdog timer (hereinafter, referred to as “payout control built-in WDT”) for monitoring the system) and a function for preventing fraud are also built in.

  The payout control input circuit 633ab is not provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting information input with detection signals from various sensors, and does not have a reset function. Therefore, the payout control input circuit 633ab is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the payout control input circuit 633ab outputs various signals based on the information from the various output terminals by not resetting the information based on the detection signals from the various sensors input to the various input terminals by the payout control system reset. It is configured as a circuit to be output.

  The dispensing control output circuit 633ac is configured as an open collector output type having an emitter terminal grounded to ground (GND), and various signals for outputting various signals to an external substrate or the like are input to various input terminals thereof. A payout control output circuit with a reset function having a reset function provided with a reset terminal for forcibly resetting the output information, a payout control output circuit without a reset function without a reset function without a reset terminal, It is composed of The payout control output circuit with a reset function is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is input. That is, the dispensing control output circuit with the reset function is configured to reset the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like by the dispensing control system reset, and thereby output a signal based on the information. Are configured as circuits that do not output at all from the various output terminals. On the other hand, the payout control output circuit without reset function 4120cb is configured as a circuit to which a system reset signal from a payout control system reset (not shown) is input. In other words, the dispensing control output circuit without the reset function is configured such that a signal based on the information for outputting various signals input to the various input terminals to an external board or the like is not reset by the dispensing control system reset. It is configured as a circuit output from the various output terminals.

  A detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 of the foul cover unit 150, a detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 of the ball guiding unit 570, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590 of the dispensing device 580, and a dispensing detection of the dispensing device 580. The detection signal from the sensor 591 and the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 are input to a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

  A detection signal from a door frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the door frame 3 with respect to the main frame 4 and a detection signal from the main frame opening switch for detecting the opening of the main frame 4 with respect to the outer frame 2 are output from a payout control input circuit. It is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via 633ab.

  Various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received via a payout control input circuit 633ab at an input terminal of a serial input port of the payout control MPU 633aa in a serial data system. An operation signal (detection signal) of the RAM clear switch 1310f from the main control board 1310 is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

  When normally receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 as serial data, the payout control MPU 633aa outputs a signal (payment ACK signal) to that effect from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output with reset function. By outputting to the circuit, a signal (payer ACK signal) is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function to the main control board 1310.

  Further, the payout control MPU 633aa transmits various commands for indicating the state of the pachinko machine 1 as serial data to the payout control output circuit without reset function from the output terminal of the serial output port, thereby outputting the payout control output without reset function. Various commands are transmitted from the circuit to the main control board 1310 as serial data. When the various commands from the payout control board 633 are normally received as serial data, the main control board 1310 outputs a signal (main payment ACK signal) to that effect to the payout control board 633. This signal (main payment ACK signal) is input to the input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab.

  The dispensing control MPU 633aa outputs a drive signal for driving the dispensing motor 584 from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the dispensing control output circuit with a reset function, thereby driving the dispensing control output circuit with a reset function. A signal is output to the payout motor drive circuit 633ad, a drive signal is output from the payout motor drive circuit 633ad to the payout motor 584, and the state of the pachinko machine 1 is output from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the error LED display 633c. By outputting a drive signal for display to the payout control output circuit with reset function, a drive signal is output from the payout control output circuit with reset function to the error LED display 633c.

  The error LED display 633d is a segment display, and displays the status of the pachinko machine 1 by displaying alphanumeric characters, figures, and the like. The contents displayed and notified by the error LED display 633d include the following. For example, when the figure “−” is displayed, it is notified that “normal”, and when the number “0” is displayed, it is “connection abnormal” (specifically, the main control board 1310 That the electrical connection between the board and the payout control board 633 is abnormal), and when the number "1" is displayed, it means "ball out" (specifically, ball out). Based on the detection signal from the detection sensor 574, it notifies that there is no game ball B in the guiding path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570, and when the number "2" is displayed, it is "ball ball" (specifically). Specifically, based on the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the payout blade 589 and the game ball B are engaged with each other to notify that the payout blade 589 is difficult to rotate), and the number “3” is displayed. When the "Count switch (Specifically, a problem has occurred in the payout detection sensor 591 based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591), and when the number "5" is displayed, "retry" is performed. (Specifically, the number of retries of the payout operation has reached a preset upper limit), and when the number “6” is displayed, it is “full”. Specifically, based on the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the lower plate 202 is notified that the game ball B in which the lower plate 202 is stored is full, and when the number “7” is displayed, “CR” is displayed. Not connected "(that is, that the electrical connection is cut off at any point from the payout control board 633 to the CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1), and the numeral" 9 "is displayed. When displayed Is in stock (prize ball stock (unpaid) is present) "(specifically, the number of game balls B that have not been paid out has reached a predetermined ball number). I have.

  Further, the payout control MPU 633aa outputs the number of game balls B actually paid out as a prize ball from the output terminal of the predetermined output port to the payout control output circuit with the reset function, whereby the payout control with the reset function is performed. The output circuit outputs the number of game balls actually paid out as prize balls to the external terminal board 558 via a resistor (not shown).

  Further, the payout control board 633 outputs various information (game information) relating to the game from the main control board 1310 to the external terminal board 558 via a resistor (not shown). The external terminal plate 558 is provided with a plurality of photocouplers (not shown) (built-in with built-in infrared LED and photo IC), and through the plurality of photocouplers, a game hall (a hall). ), The number of balls of the game balls B and various information (game information, error contents relating to the payout operation of the game balls or the fact that there is an error) are transmitted to the hall computer installed in the hall computer. The external terminal board 558 and the hole computer are electrically insulated by a plurality of photocouplers, and an abnormal voltage is applied to the hole computer via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1 to cause the hole computer to operate. The computer is designed not to malfunction or break down, and the main control board 1310, which can proceed with the game from the hall computer via the external terminal board 558 of the pachinko machine 1, can control the payout and the like. An abnormal voltage is applied to the payout control board 633 that can perform and the peripheral control board 1510 that can control the progress of the effect, so that a malfunction or a failure is about to occur. The hall computer recognizes the number of game balls B actually paid out by the pachinko machine 1 as prize balls, the game information of the pachinko machine 1, and the like, and thereby, the payout information of the game balls B by the payout operation of the pachinko machine 1 (so-called payout information). , Pitch information) and the game of the player.

  The ball lending request signal of the game ball B from the ball lending button 224 and the prepaid card return request signal from the return button 225 are input to a CR unit installed outside the pachinko machine 1. . The CR unit transmits a signal designating the number of balls of the game balls B to be lent according to the ball lending request signal to the payout control board 633 in a serial manner, and this signal is transmitted to the payout control MPU 633aaa via a CR unit input / output circuit (not shown). Input is made to an input terminal of a predetermined input port. Further, the CR unit updates the remaining amount of the inserted prepaid card according to the number of the lent game balls B, and outputs a display signal of the remaining amount to the ball lending operation unit 220. The information is input to the ball lending display unit of the lending operation unit 220 and is displayed.

  Note that various kinds of voltages (DC +35 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) are directly supplied to the payout control board 633 from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620. As described above, the power supply board 630 that supplies various voltages to the payout control board 633 has the capacitor BC0 (see FIG. 183 and the like) serving as a backup power supply for supplying power to the main control board 1310 for a predetermined time even when the power is turned off. Reference). With this capacitor BC0, the payout control MPU 633aa in addition to the main control MPU 1310a can store various types of information in the payout control built-in RAM (payout storage unit) even in the power-off process. When the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated within a predetermined period from when the power is turned on, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) is output from the payout control input circuit. The signal is input to an input terminal of a predetermined input port of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control MPU 633aa, and is completely erased (cleared) from the payout control built-in RAM by the payout control MPU 633aa.

[7-2-2. Launch control section]
The launch control unit 633b performs launch control by the launch solenoid 542 and ball delivery control by the ball delivery solenoid 145. Although not shown in detail, the firing control unit 633b includes a firing control input circuit to which detection signals from various sensors related to firing are input, an oscillation circuit that outputs a clock signal at regular time intervals, and a clock signal based on the clock signal. A firing timing control circuit for outputting a firing reference pulse for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a, a firing solenoid driving circuit for outputting a drive signal to the firing solenoid 542 based on the firing reference pulse, and a firing reference. A ball feeding solenoid driving circuit that outputs a driving signal to the ball feeding solenoid 145 based on the pulse. The firing timing control circuit generates a firing reference pulse based on the clock signal from the oscillation circuit so that 100 game balls B are shot toward the game area 5a per minute, and outputs the generated reference pulse to the firing solenoid drive circuit. And generates a ball feeding reference pulse obtained by multiplying the firing reference pulse by a predetermined number and outputs it to the ball feeding solenoid driving circuit.

  In relation to the handle unit 180, a detection signal from the handle touch sensor 192 that detects whether a palm or a finger is touching the handle 182 and whether or not the launch of the game ball B is forcibly stopped according to the player's will The detection signal from the single-button operation sensor 194 for detecting whether or not is input to the firing control input circuit and then to the firing timing control circuit. When the CR unit and the CR unit connection terminal board are electrically connected, the signal is input to the firing control input circuit as a CR connection signal, and is input to the firing timing control circuit. A signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, which electrically adjusts the strength of launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a in accordance with the rotational position of the handle 182, is input to the firing solenoid drive circuit.

  The firing solenoid drive circuit generates a drive current for launching the game ball B toward the game area 5a with a launch strength corresponding to the rotational position of the handle 182 based on a signal from the handle rotation detection sensor 189, and the launch reference pulse The input is output to the firing solenoid 542 as a trigger. On the other hand, the ball feeding solenoid drive circuit outputs a constant current to the ball feeding solenoid 145 in response to the input of the ball feeding reference pulse, and thereby the game balls stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. B is received into the ball feeding unit 140, and when the input of the ball feeding reference pulse is completed, the output of the constant current is stopped, and the received game ball B is sent to the ball launching device 540 side. send. As described above, the drive current output from the firing solenoid drive circuit to the firing solenoid 542 is variably controlled, while the drive current output from the ball feed solenoid drive circuit to the ball feed solenoid 145 is constant. Is controlled.

[7-3. Peripheral control board]
As described above, the peripheral control board 1510 controls the progress of the effect based on various commands from the main control board 1310, and includes a CPU, a RAM, a VDP, a VRAM, a sound source, a SATA controller, and various I / Os. A peripheral control IC 1510a in which an interface or the like is integrated on one semiconductor chip, a control ROM 1510b in which various programs and various schedule data for defining the progress of the effect are stored in advance, and a peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in a peripheral data ROM board 1520 are stored. 1510c composed of SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 capable of transferring and storing various control information (peripheral data), a slide-type volume control switch 1510d capable of controlling the volume, and a real And backup power source 1510e which can also supply power during power failure to the time clock IC, and includes a power supply generating circuit (not shown) to create various supply voltages, and peripheral control input circuit (not shown), the. Various I / O interfaces include various serial I / O ports, various parallel I / O ports, and the like.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs various types of control information (periphery) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 as one process of an initial setting process when the power is turned on (including a case where power is restored from a power failure). ) Is transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. As described above, since the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 and the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 have a transfer speed of 2 Gbps, control information stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a is transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. Transfers at high speed. As described above, the control information (peripheral data) is provided in the door frame 3 and the game board 5 as image data such as a background image for drawing various effect images on the effect display device 1600, a character image, and a design image. Light emission data that defines the light emission mode (lighting, gradation, blinking, extinguishment, etc.) of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards, sound data such as music, voice, warning sound, notification sound, door frame 3 and games It is drive data for driving and controlling various movable effectors provided on the board 5.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a to temporarily store information associated with processing or to delete the information. Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes the start-up of its own system, it reads various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on various commands from the main control board 1310 and proceeds with the effect. .

  Further, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes the start of its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on the various commands, and reads the various schedule data. In accordance with the schedule data, various control information (peripheral data) transferred to the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are read, control is performed to draw an image on the effect display device 1600, and the various LED light emission modes are adapted to the various effects. In such a manner, various effects are performed by performing control such that sound such as music and sound effects matched to the various effects flows.

  The VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a generates image data for reading image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and drawing an image on the effect display device 1600 on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Control to output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. The drawing data is transmitted to the effect display device 1600 via the liquid crystal output substrate 1530, and various images are drawn on the effect display device 1600. When the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a is ready to receive screen data defining the screen configuration, the VDP notifies the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a by outputting a V blank signal to the CPU.

  The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads and generates sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and outputs the sound data. Control is performed so that sounds such as music and sound effects matched to various effects are played from the 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, the main frame speaker 622 of the main frame 4, and the like. When a slide volume control switch 1510d provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is operated, the volume control signal is input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. The sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a can adjust the volume according to the input volume adjustment operation signal based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the top center speaker 462 on the door frame 3 side, the top side speaker An audio signal (for example, a 2ch stereo signal, a 4ch stereo signal, a 2.1ch surround signal, or a 4.1ch surround signal, etc.) is output to the base frame 464 and the main frame speaker 622 for the bass sound of the main frame 4. By doing so, it is possible to provide a more realistic sound effect (sound production) than before.

  When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a completes the startup of its own system and receives various commands from the main control board 1310, it reads various schedule data stored in the control ROM 1510b based on the various commands, and reads the read schedule data. Along with, the game board side emission data for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a full-color LED, a single-color LED or the like provided on each decorative board of the game board 5 is transmitted from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. It is read and transmitted as a command from various serial I / O ports to each decorative board of the game board 5 via the panel drive board 1720, or is driven to various drive motors provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5 Game board side drive data for outputting a signal to SDRAM Read from 510c1 and 1510c2 and transmit as commands to panel drive board 1720 from various serial I / O ports, or drive to operation ring drive motor 342 provided on door frame 3 and operation button up / down drive motor 367 Door-side drive data for outputting a signal, and a door-side for outputting a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a full-color LED, a single-color LED, or the like provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 The door-side driving light-emitting data composed of the light-emitting data is read out from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and transmitted as a command from various serial I / O ports to the door frame 3 side. The panel drive board 1720 is provided on the game board 5 based on the received game board side drive data (that is, the command) when receiving the game board side drive data from the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a). A drive motor control circuit (not shown) capable of outputting a drive signal to various drive motors provided in the various effect units is provided.

  Detection signals from various detection sensors for detecting the positions (standby position (original position), each united position) provided in the various effect units of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 are transmitted to the panel drive board 1720 and the periphery. The signals are input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the control input circuit. Further, a detection signal from the press detection sensor 381 of the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3, a detection signal from the elevation detection sensor 382, a detection signal from the first rotation detection sensor 347, and a second rotation detection sensor 348 Are received by the various serial I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. Also, signals from the air-cooling fan FAN that convey the rotation state of the air-cooling fan FAN provided in the peripheral control unit 1500 of the game board 5 are input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit. .

  Various voltages (DC +35 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V) from the power supply board 630 of the board unit 620 are directly supplied to the peripheral control board 1510. The power supply creation circuit (not shown) provided on the peripheral control board 1510 includes a plurality of control voltages corresponding to various electronic components provided on the peripheral control board 1510 from one voltage (for example, DC +12 V) among various voltages from the power supply board 630. Types are created and supplied.

  The peripheral control IC 1510a includes an external WDT (watchdog timer) (not shown), and the peripheral control IC 1510a uses the external WDT to diagnose whether or not its own system is out of control.

[7-3-1. Panel drive board]
Here, a brief description will be given of a panel drive board 1720 which is a subordinate board of the peripheral control board 1510. Here, the relationship with each decorative board of the game board 5 will be described, and then, the relationship with various drive motors of various effect units and the relationship with various detection sensors will be described.

[7-3-1a. Relationship with each decorative board of game board]
As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 outputs a lighting signal, a blinking signal, or a gradation lighting signal to a full-color LED, a single-color LED, or the like provided on each decoration board of the game board 5. Is read out from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 and transmitted as commands from various serial I / O ports to each decorative board of the game board 5 via the panel drive board 1720. Each decorative board of the game board 5 is provided with one or more LED constant current drive circuits capable of flowing a predetermined constant current to the LEDs.

  As each decorative board of the game board 5, a plurality of LEDs 2611 for a first pattern 2610 that is illuminated and decorated by irradiating light from the upper surface of the light guide plate 2601 in the rendering unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 are mounted. A second pattern on which a plurality of LEDs 2621 for a second pattern 2620 to be illuminated and decorated by irradiating light from the right side of the light guide plate 2601 in the display unit 2600 of the front unit 2000 are mounted. Decorative substrate 2622.

  In addition, as each decoration board of the game board 5, an upper left panel decoration is provided with a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that are arranged at the upper left corner in the front view of the panel holder 1120 and irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel board 1110. There is a substrate 1131 and a lower left panel decoration substrate 1132 that is arranged at the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 in front view and on which a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a that irradiate light toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 are mounted.

  Further, as the decorative boards of the game board 5, a plurality of full-color LEDs for emitting and decorating the lower movable movable decorative body 3110 in the lower back staging unit 3100 of the lower unit 3000 are respectively mounted on the lower back decorative board 3121 and the lower back front. There is a decorative substrate 3122 and a not-illustrated underside moving decorative board on which a plurality of full-color LEDs for emitting and decorating the underside moving arm 3130 in the underside rendering unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 are mounted.

  Also, as each decorative board of the game board 5, a plurality of full-color LEDs for emitting and decorating the upper back movable decorative body 3210 in the back upper staging unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 are mounted on the back upper back decorative board and the back side, not shown. There is a front decorative substrate and a not-shown back-up moving decorative board on which a plurality of full-color LEDs for emitting and decorating the back-up moving arm 3230 in the back-up rendering unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 are mounted.

  In addition, as the respective decoration boards of the game board 5, a plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa for emitting and decorating the front decoration portion 3312 of the back left upper movable decorative body 3310 in the back left rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 are mounted. There is a substrate 3311a, and a lower left lower front decorative board 3321a on which a plurality of full-color LEDs 3321aa for emitting and decorating the front decorative portion 3322 of the rear lower left movable decorative body 3320 in the rear left effecting unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000 are mounted.

  As shown in FIG. 181, a plurality of full-color LEDs 3411aa for emitting light and decorating the front decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 in the back right effecting unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 are mounted as the decorative boards of the game board 5. Back upper right front decoration board 3411a and a plurality of full color LEDs 3421aa for emitting and decorating the front decoration portion 3422 of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 in the back right effecting unit 3400 of the back unit 3000. And a step decoration substrate 3421a.

[7-3-1b. Relationship with various drive motors of various production units]
As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 reads, from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, game board-side drive data for outputting drive signals to various drive motors included in various effect units provided on the game board 5. The command is transmitted from the various serial I / O ports to the panel drive board 1720 as a command. As described above, the panel drive board 1720 receives the game board side drive data from the peripheral control board 1510 (peripheral control IC 1510a) by a drive motor control circuit (not shown), and the drive motor control circuit (not shown) Based on the board-side drive data (that is, the command), a drive signal is output to various drive motors provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5.

  Referring back to FIG. 180, as various drive motors provided in various effect units, a lower-back rotational drive motor that rotates the rear-stage decorative portion 3116 and the middle-stage decorative portion 3118 of the lower back movable decorative body 3110 in the lower back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000. 3112, and a lower-bottom lifting drive motor 3151 that raises and lowers the lower-side movable decorative body 3110 by rotating the lower-bottom raising / lowering arm of the lower-back rendering unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 to raise and lower the lower-bottom moving arm 3130. is there.

  In addition, as various drive motors provided in various effect units, a rear upper rotation drive motor 3212 that rotates a rear stage decorative portion 3216 and a middle stage decorative portion 3218 of the rear upper movable decorative body 3210 in the rear upper effect unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000, A back-up / down drive motor 3251 that raises / lowers the back-side movable decorative body 3210 by rotating the back-up / down movement arm in the back-up presentation unit 3200 of the back unit 3000 to raise / lower the back-down movement arm 3130 and the back-up movement arm 3230. There is.

  In addition, as various drive motors provided in various effect units, a rear upper left rotation drive motor 3313 that rotates the front stage decorative portion 3312 of the rear upper left movable decorative body 3310 in the rear left effect unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000, and a rear surface of the rear unit 3000 A lower back left rotation drive motor 3323 that rotates the front decoration section 3322 of the lower back left movable decorative body 3320 in the left rendering unit 3300, and a back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and a back lower left movable decorative body in the back left rendering unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000. A back left movement drive motor 3332 for moving the 3320, and a back left movement drive motor 3351 that rotates the back left movement arm of the back left effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 and traverses the back left movement arm 3330. is there.

As various drive motors provided in various effect units, as shown in FIG. 181, a rear upper right rotation drive motor 3413 for rotating the preceding decorative portion 3412 of the rear upper right movable decorative body 3410 in the rear right effect unit 3400 of the rear unit 3000. And a lower right lower rotation drive motor 3423 for rotating the front decoration section 3422 of the lower right lower movable decoration 3420 in the rear right rendering unit 3400 of the rear unit 3000, and a rear upper right movable in the rear right rendering unit 3400 of the rear unit 3000. The back right moving drive motor 3432 for moving the decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420, and the back right traversing arm of the back right rendering unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 are rotated to traverse the back right moving arm 3430. And a rear right traverse drive motor 3451 to be driven.
[7-3-1c. Relationship with various detection sensors]

  As described above, the detection signals from the various detection sensors for detecting the positions (standby position (original position) and each united position) provided in the various effect units of the back unit 3000 provided on the game board 5 are, as described above, panel driving. The signals are input to various parallel I / O ports of the peripheral control IC 1510a via the peripheral control input circuit of the peripheral control IC 1510a on the board 1720 and the peripheral control board 1510.

  As shown in FIG. 180, as a variety of detection sensors for detecting the positions (standby position (original position), each united position) provided in the various effect units, as shown in FIG. The optical lower back rotation detection sensor 3120 for detecting the standby position (original position) of the rear decoration portion 3116 and the middle decoration portion 3118 of the 3110, and the lower back raising / lowering arm of the lower back effect unit 3100 of the back unit 3000 are rotated. The lower back movable arm 3130 is moved up and down to detect the standby position (original position) at which the lower back movable decorative body 3110 is moved to the lowermost position. The lower back moving arm 3130 is moved up and down by rotating the lower back raising / lowering arm in the lower back production unit 3100 to move the lower back movable unit. And back under the moving position detecting sensor (not shown) of the optical type for detecting the position moved the body 3110 to the most upward, there is.

  In addition, the standby position (original position), the first united position, and the second united position of the lower back movable decorative body 3110 are determined by detection signals from the lower back standby position detection sensor and the lower back upper movement position detection sensor. It is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a on the basis of this.

  As various detection sensors for detecting the positions (standby position (original position), each united position) provided in the various effect units, the rear decorative portion 3216 of the upper back movable decorative body 3210 in the rear upper effect unit 3200 of the rear unit 3000 An optical back upper rotation detection sensor 3220 for detecting a standby position (original position) with the middle decorative portion 3218, and a back raising / lowering arm of the back upper effect unit 3200 of the back unit 3000, and a lower back moving arm 3130. The upper back movable arm 3230 is moved up and down to detect the standby position (original position) where the upper back movable decorative body 3210 is moved to the uppermost position. The back raising / lowering arm of the upper effect unit 3200 is rotated to raise the lower back moving arm 3130 and raise the upper back moving arm 3230. And back vertical movement position detection sensor (not shown) of the optical type for detecting the position moved the back on a movable decorative body 3210 to the most downward by, there is.

  In addition, the standby position (original position), the first united position, and the second united position of the back upper movable decorative body 3210 are based on detection signals from the back upper standby position detection sensor and the back up / down movement position detection sensor. This is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  As the various detection sensors for detecting the positions (standby position (original position), each united position) provided in the various effect units, the front decorative portion 3312 of the rear upper left movable decorative body 3310 in the rear left effect unit 3300 of the rear unit 3000 is used. , A magnetic back-upper-left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab mounted on the back-upper-upper-front decorative board 3311a for detecting the standby position (original position) of the back-up position, and a back-back lower-left movable in the back-left rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 A magnetic back-left lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3321ab mounted on the back lower left front-stage decorative substrate 3321a for detecting the standby position (original position) of the rotation position of the front decorative portion 3322 of the decorative body 3320, and a back unit 3000 Light for detecting an initial state in which the back left moving arm 3330 in the back left rendering unit 3300 is located at the left moving end. A back left initial state detection sensor (not shown) and an optical back left movement (not shown) for detecting a state where the back left moving arm 3330 in the back left rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 is located at the right moving end. A state detection sensor, a state in which the base side (left side) of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 in the back left rendering unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 extends vertically and the tip is directed to the right, and the base of the lower left lower movable movable body 3320 An optical back-side upper / lower initial state detection sensor (not shown) for detecting a state in which the side (left side) extends vertically and the tip is directed rightward (see VR creation drawing V135 (a)), and a back unit 3000 The state in which the lower side of the upper left movable decorative body 3310 in the rear left effect unit 3300 is close to the vertical center of the moving arm base 3331 and the lower left movable And back left vertical approaching state detecting sensor (not shown) of the optical type upper side of Kazaritai 3320 detects a state close to the center in the vertical direction of the moving arm base 3331, there is.

  Note that the standby position (original position) of the first-stage decorative portion 3312 of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 is based on a detection signal from the magnetic back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab mounted on the back left upper first stage decorative substrate 3311a. The standby position (original position) of the front decorative portion 3322 of the lower back left movable decorative body 3320 is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a and the magnetic back lower left magnetic pole change detection mounted on the lower back lower front decorative substrate 3321a. It is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a based on the detection signal from the circuit 3321ab.

  Further, the initial state, the first state, and the second state of the back left moving arm 3330 are set by the peripheral control IC 1510a based on detection signals from the back left initial state detection sensor and the back left movement state detection sensor. In addition, the initial state, the first state, and the second state of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back left lower movable decorative body 3320 described above are based on the back left upper and lower initial state detection sensor and the back left upper and lower approach state detection sensor. Is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a based on the detection signal. As a result, the standby position (original position), the first united position, and the second united position of the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the back left moving arm 3330 are detected as the back left initial state detection. It is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a based on detection signals from the sensor, the back left moving state detection sensor, the back left up / down initial state detection sensor, and the back left up / down approach state detection sensor.

  As shown in FIG. 181, as the various detection sensors for detecting the positions (stand-by position (original position), each united position) provided in the various effect units, as shown in FIG. 181, the rear upper right movable decorative body in the rear right effect unit 3400 of the rear unit 3000. A magnetic back-upper right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab mounted on the back upper right front-stage decorative board 3411a for detecting the standby position (original position) of the rotation position of the front-stage decorative portion 3412 of 3410, and the back right of the back unit 3000 A magnetic back lower right magnetic pole mounted on the back right lower front decorative board 3421a for detecting the standby position (original position) of the rotation position of the front decorative portion 3422 of the rear lower right movable decorative body 3420 in the rendering unit 3400. The change detection circuit 3421ab and the back right moving arm 3430 in the back right effecting unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 are located at the right moving end. An optical-type back right initial state detection sensor (not shown) for detecting an initial state, and an optical type for detecting a state where the back right moving arm 3430 in the back right effecting unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 is located at the left moving end. , A back right movement state detection sensor (not shown), a back right upper side movable decorative body 3410 in the back right effecting unit 3400 of the back unit 3000, a base side (right side) vertically extending, and a tip is directed to the left and a back right side. An optical back and right upper and lower initial state detection sensor (not shown) for detecting a state in which the base side (right side) of the lower movable decorative body 3420 extends vertically and the tip is facing left, and a back and right effect unit of the back unit 3000 The state where the lower side of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 in 3400 is close to the vertical center of the movable arm base 3431 and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 And back right vertical approaching state detecting sensor (not shown) of the optical type for detecting the state in which the lateral sides close to the center in the vertical direction of the moving arm base 3431, there is.

  The standby position (original position) of the front decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 is based on a detection signal from the magnetic back right upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab mounted on the back upper right front decorative substrate 3411a. In addition to being set by the peripheral control IC 1510a, the standby position (original position) of the front decorative portion 3422 of the rear lower right movable decorative body 3420 is set at the magnetic lower right lower right mounted on the rear right lower front decorative substrate 3421a. It is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a based on the detection signal from the magnetic pole change detection circuit 3421ab.

  The initial state, the first state, and the second state of the back right moving arm 3430 are set by the peripheral control IC 1510a based on detection signals from the back right initial state detecting sensor and the back right moving state detecting sensor. In addition, the initial state, the first state, and the second state of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back right lower movable decorative body 3420 are a back right upper and lower initial state detection sensor and a back right upper and lower approach state detection sensor. Is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a based on the detection signal from the CPU. Thereby, the standby position (original position), the first united position, and the second united position of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, and the back right moving arm 3430 are set to the back right initial state. It is set by the peripheral control IC 1510a based on detection signals from the detection sensor, the back right moving state detection sensor, the back right up / down initial state detection sensor, and the back right up / down approach state detection sensor.

[8. Ground wire system]
As described above, the frame ground substrate 559 shown in FIG. 102 can collect electromagnetic wave noises generated at various places and ground the ground to the island facilities of the game hall. Here, the system of the ground wire by the frame ground substrate 559 will be described with reference to FIG. 182 is a diagram showing the configuration of the frame ground substrate 559, FIG. 182 (a) is a side view of the frame ground substrate 559, FIG. 182 (b) is a mounting surface of the frame ground substrate 559, and FIG. c) is a circuit diagram of the frame ground substrate 559, and FIG. 182 (d) is a table showing an explanation of each ground terminal provided on the frame ground substrate 559. As shown in FIG. 182 (a), the frame ground board 559 has its mounting surface facing down (that is, the connector outlets of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 face down, respectively). It is housed and mounted inside the board housing part 551aa formed on the top plate part 551a of the payout base 551 shown in FIG. 102 (b).

  As shown in FIG. 182 (b), the frame ground substrate 559 has ground terminals ECN1, ECN5, ECN4, and ECN2 arranged in a line from the right side to the left side along the upper side, and the center of the left side. A lower ground terminal ECN3 is arranged. The ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5 will be briefly described. As shown in FIG. 182 (d), the ground terminal ECN1 serves as an interface ground and is provided on the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. The connection terminal is electrically connected to the ground terminal ECN2 via an interface ground wire. The ground terminal ECN2 is electrically connected to the ground connection terminal of the game hall island equipment via the island equipment ground wire as an island equipment ground. The ground terminal ECN3 is shown as a ball tank ground in the ball tank 552 shown in FIG. 102 (b) (specifically, outside the side wall of the ball tank 552 near the substrate accommodating portion 551aa). Attach one end of the ball tank ground wire with a metal screw The other end of the ground wire is electrically connected to the ground terminal ECN4. The ground terminal ECN4 serves as a metal ground for the main body frame, and the metal main body frame reinforcing frame 530 in the main body frame base unit 500 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. (Specifically, one end of the main frame metal ground wire is attached to a metal screw (not shown) on the upper side of the main frame reinforcing frame 530, and the other end of the main frame metal ground wire is electrically connected. The ground terminal ECN5 is electrically connected to a ground terminal provided on the power board 630 of the board unit 620 of the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. 113 as a power ground via a power ground wire.

  As shown in FIG. 182 (c), the circuit of the frame ground substrate 559 has a ground terminal ECN3 serving as a ball tank ground electrically connected to one end of a resistor ER1, and the other end of the resistor ER1 serving as a power ground. The ground terminal ECN5, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground, and the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground are each electrically connected, and the ground terminal ECN4 as the body frame metal ground is electrically connected to one end of the resistor ER2. The other end of the resistor ER2 is electrically connected to a ground terminal ECN5 serving as a power supply ground, a ground terminal ECN2 serving as an island facility ground, and a ground terminal ECN1 serving as an interface ground. That is, the other end of the resistor ER1 and the other end of the resistor ER2 are electrically connected. In this embodiment, 510 ohms (Ω) and 2 watts (W) are employed as the resistors ER1 and ER2.

  Electromagnetic noise flowing to the ground terminal ECN1 as the interface ground is guided through the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground and the island facility ground wire to the ground of the island facility at the game hall, and is removed. Electromagnetic noise flowing to the terminal ECN3 is guided to the ground of the island facility in the game hall via the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground and the island facility ground wire, is removed, and flows to the ground terminal ECN4 as the main frame metal ground. The electromagnetic noise is guided to the ground of the island facility in the game hall via the earth terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground and the island facility ground wire, is removed, and the electromagnetic noise flowing to the ground terminal ECN5 as the power ground is the island facility. A game hall via the ground terminal ECN2 as the ground and the island equipment ground wire It is adapted to be removed is guided to the ground of the island facility.

  As shown in FIG. 98, a ball tank 552, a payout unit 560, and the like are attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4. The game tank B is supplied to the ball tank 552 from the island facility of the game hall, and the game ball B is supplied from the ball tank 552 to the payout unit 560. The game balls B are polished in the island facility of the game hall, or rubbed against each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1, and emit electromagnetic wave noise by being charged and electrostatically discharged. For this reason, static electricity easily accumulates in the area where the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 in which the game balls B can stay and the payout unit 560 are installed, and around the area.

  Accordingly, in the present embodiment, the frame ground substrate 559 is disposed near the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity is likely to accumulate. In the frame ground substrate 559, the ground terminal ECN3 serving as a ball tank ground, and the main body frame metal The ground terminal ECN4 and the ground terminal ECN2 are gradually connected to the ground terminal ECN2 as the ground terminal and the ground terminal ECN4 is connected to the ground terminal ECN2. It can be led to the ground of the island equipment in the game hall via the ground wireIn other words, electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the ball tank 552 or the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity easily accumulates is transferred from the frame ground board 559 via the ball tank 552 or the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 to a frame ground called a frame ground. By leading to the earth of the island facility of the game hall, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the ball tank 552 and the payout unit 560 can be removed by flowing to the earth of the island facility of the game hall.

  On the other hand, when electromagnetic noise enters the metal shield plate 1540 housed in the peripheral control board box 1505 shown in FIG. 174, the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 It invades the ground (GND) line, flows into the ground (GND) line of the power supply board 630, and from the ground connection terminal of the power supply board 630 to the ground terminal ECN5 as the power supply ground on the frame ground board 559 via the power supply ground line. The flow is guided from the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground to the ground of the island facility in the game hall via the island facility ground wire, and is removed. In other words, the cover 1501 of the peripheral control unit 1500 attached to the rear side of the game panel 1100 of the game board 5 (the rear side of the effect display device 1600 attached to the back of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000), and the base The electromagnetic wave noise that has entered from the body 1502 is guided from the frame ground board 559 to the ground of the island facility of the game hall through the metal shield plate 1540 as a circuit ground called a circuit ground, thereby forming a cover body for the peripheral control unit 1500. Electromagnetic noise that has entered from the base body 1501 and the base body 1502 can be removed by flowing to the earth of the island facility in the game hall.

  In the present embodiment, of the ground terminals ECN1 to ECN5, the ground terminal ECN3 serving as the ball tank ground and the ground terminal ECN4 serving as the main frame metal ground are, as described above, in a region that is strongly affected by electromagnetic wave noise. Therefore, a large-sized ground terminal is adopted, and the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground, as described above, transmits the electromagnetic noise flowing into the frame ground substrate 559 to the game hall. A large ground terminal is used because it is guided to the island facility ground for removal. The ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 employing this large ground terminal are square with a cross section of 1.14 mm on a side, rated current: 7 A (when AC / DC, AWG # 18 is used), rated voltage: It has general specifications of 250 V (AC / DC), applicable electric wire range: AWG # 22 to # 18, and has a height of 13.4 mm as shown in FIG. When the housing corresponding to ECN4 is inserted, the mounting height becomes 18.6 mm).

  On the other hand, the electromagnetic noise flowing into the ground terminal ECN1 serving as the interface ground and the ground terminal ECN5 serving as the power ground is smaller than the above-described ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4, and the current is small. For the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5, small ground terminals are used. The ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 adopting the small-sized ground terminals are square having a cross-sectional shape of 0.64 mm on a side, rated current: 3 A (when AC / DC, AWG # 22 is used), and rated voltage: It has general specifications of 250 V (AC / DC), applicable electric wire range: AWG # 30 to # 22, and has a height of 7 mm as shown in FIG. 182 (a) (the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5 have When the corresponding housing is inserted, the mounting height is 9.8 mm).

  In the present embodiment, the respective ground wires (the island facility ground wire, the ball tank ground wire, and the body frame ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4 are electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5. Since the current due to the electromagnetic noise is larger than the respective ground wires (interface ground wire, power supply ground wire), the respective ground wires (island facility ground wire, ball tank) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN2 to ECN4. The thickness of the ground wire (main frame ground wire) is larger than the thickness of each ground wire (interface ground wire, power supply ground wire) electrically connected to the ground terminals ECN1 and ECN5. In this embodiment, 1.6 mm is adopted as the thickness of the frame ground substrate 559 as shown in FIG. 182 (a).

  As described above, since the electromagnetic wave noise generated in various places is once collected on the frame ground substrate 559, the electromagnetic noise can be led from the frame ground substrate 559 to the ground of the island facility of the game hall and removed therefrom. The substrate 559 has a function of destaticizing.

  In addition, since the electromagnetic wave noise generated in various places is temporarily collected on the frame ground board 559 and guided to the ground of the island equipment of the game hall from the frame ground board 559, it can be removed. The ground wire (wiring) from the ball tank 552 disposed on the upper side is routed to the power supply board 630 disposed on the lower side of the pachinko machine 1, and the electromagnetic wave noise is once aggregated in the power supply board 630 to provide the island facilities of the game hall. The arrangement of the ground wire (wiring) becomes extremely simple as compared with the configuration of leading to the ground and removing.

  In addition, since the external terminal plate 558 and the frame ground substrate 559 can be arranged in the board accommodating portion 551aa of the payout base 551 in a state of being close to each other, a plurality of electric wire connections provided on the external terminal plate 558 can be provided. Terminal 558a (a plurality of external terminals (in the present embodiment, there are ten external terminals XCN1 to XCN10 arranged in a line from left to right as viewed from behind the payout base unit 550). ) And a hall computer provided in a game hall, respectively, by wiring, an earth terminal ECN2 as an island facility ground on the frame ground board 559, and a ground connection terminal provided in the island facility of the game hall. , And the work of electrically connecting the island equipment ground wire (wiring), and can be performed as a series of work Because, it is possible to contribute to improvement in workability.

  Further, since the frame ground board 559 is configured to be able to be disposed in the board accommodating portion 551aa of the payout base 551, the ground terminal ECN2 as the island facility ground of the frame ground board 559 and the island facility of the game hall are provided. Various control boards provided on the game board 5 (for example, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 for controlling the progress of the game) are provided with island facility ground lines (wirings) for electrically connecting the provided ground connection terminals. Control board 1510 that can control the progress of the display, a peripheral data ROM board 1520 electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510, a liquid crystal output board 1530, and the like). It is possible to eliminate adverse effects on electronic components (including connectors) provided in the device.

  Further, by disposing the frame ground substrate 559 in the vicinity of the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity easily accumulates, the main body frame 4 and the ball tank 552, which are strongly affected by electromagnetic wave noise, and the vicinity of the dispensing unit 560 And a metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 of the body frame base unit 500, a ground terminal ECN3 as a ball tank ground and a ground terminal ECN4 as a body frame metal ground on the frame ground substrate 559, respectively. The length of the ground wire (ball tank ground wire, body frame metal ground wire) to be electrically connected is made extremely short, and electromagnetic noise is guided from the frame ground board 559 to the ground of the island facility in the game hall to remove it. Can be.

  Further, by disposing the frame ground substrate 559 near the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity easily accumulates, the ball tank 552 where static electricity easily accumulates and the frame earth substrate 559 exhibiting a static elimination action are electrically connected. The length of the ball tank ground wire (wiring) is determined by the length of the body frame metal ground wire (wiring) for electrically connecting the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 to the frame ground substrate 559 that exhibits a static elimination action, and the length of the power supply. The length of a power supply ground line (wiring) for electrically connecting the substrate 630 to the frame ground substrate 559 that exerts the charge eliminating function, and the interface that electrically connects the interface substrate 635 to the frame ground substrate 559 that exerts the charge removing effect. It can be configured to be the shortest as compared with the length of the ground wire (wiring).

  Further, by disposing the frame ground substrate 559 near the ball tank 552 and the dispensing unit 560 where static electricity easily accumulates, the ball tank 552, which is strongly affected by electromagnetic wave noise, and the body frame 4 near the dispensing unit 560 In contrast to the metal body frame reinforcing frame 530 of the body frame base unit 500, the frame ground board 559 has a ground terminal ECN3 as a ball tank ground and a ground terminal ECN4 as a body frame metal ground. Although a large current flows, the resistance is reduced by the resistances ER1 and ER2 of the frame ground substrate 559, so that the operation of the power supply substrate 630 is not affected. It is guided to the ground of the island facilities in the game hall through the ground wire for removal. Can.

  By the way, as disclosed in the related art, the respective grounds are temporarily integrated on a power supply board disposed on the CR unit side below the main body frame so as to easily supply the AC power of 24 V to the CR unit, and the power supply board is connected to the power supply board. There has been proposed a gaming machine that is connected to the ground of an island facility and grounded (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2012-120593 (paragraph [0335], FIGS. 84 and 85)). Since the power supply board is generally heavy, it is often placed below the gaming machine. Therefore, in order to consolidate the ground on the power supply board, it is necessary to route the ground wire from the ball tank or the prize ball device on the upper part of the gaming machine toward the lower power supply board. By laying the ground wire in this way, electromagnetic noise may be transmitted to various control boards existing on the way and may have an unexpected effect. In addition, since the ground wire is integrated on the power supply board, if any problem occurs on the power supply board, the ground may be affected, or current may flow through the ground wire, which may affect the operation of the power supply board. there were. In addition, when the ground of the island facility is located above the gaming machine, it is necessary to route the ground wire collected by the power supply board from the lower side to the upper side again for connection, which may be complicated.

[9. Power supply board]
Next, the power supply board 630 provided in the power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 113 will be described with reference to FIGS. 183 to 188. 183 is a circuit diagram for explaining the outline of the circuit configuration of the power supply board, FIG. 184 is a partially enlarged perspective view of the power supply board, FIG. 185 is a view taken in the direction of arrow B in FIG. 184, and FIG. 187 shows silk printing of an electronic component printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board (No. 1), FIG. 187 shows silk printing of the electronic component printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board (No. 2), and FIG. It is a perspective view explaining the outline of. Here, the circuit configuration of the power supply board will be described first, followed by the method of identifying electronic components having the same shape, the confirmation of the fusing of the fuse, the capacity of the capacitor, and the countermeasures for the electronic components to be discontinued.

  As described above, in the island facility of the game hall, there is a transformer (not shown), which steps down the commercial power supply voltage of AC100V to the power supply voltage for gaming machines of AC24V. When a plug of a power cord (not shown) is inserted into a power outlet of 24 VAC, which is a power supply voltage for a gaming machine of an island facility in a game hall, 24 VAC is supplied to the power supply board 630. The power supply board 630 generates various power supplies (various DC voltages such as DC +35 V, DC +12 V, DC +5 V, etc.) from 24 V AC supplied from the island facility of the game hall, and supplies the power supply board 630 to each board in the pachinko machine 1. doing.

[9-1. Circuit configuration of power supply board]
As shown in FIG. 183, the circuit of the power supply board 630 includes a power switch 630a, a noise suppression circuit 630b, a rectifier circuit 630c, a power factor improvement circuit 630d, a smoothing circuit 630e, a power supply creation circuit 630f, a power supply destruction circuit 630g, and a backup power supply. The circuit 630h is mainly configured.

  24V AC from the island facility in the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 via a power cord (not shown). When AC24V from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power line connector DCN1 via a power line (not shown), the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 (in this embodiment, a transparent glass tube having a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm) (The supporting terminals at both ends are made of metal), and are input to the input terminals 3 and 1 of the power switch 630a via a type B fusing specified by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law. Specifically, the line 1 of AC24V (hereinafter, described as “AC24V1” (may be described as “L side”) is input to the input terminal 3 of the power switch 630a. 24 V line 2 (hereinafter referred to as “AC 24 V 2” (may be referred to as “N side”) is input to the input terminal 1 of 630 a. Output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the noise suppression circuit 630b.

  When a staff member such as a store clerk of the game hall turns on the power switch 630a, the input terminal 3 and the output terminal 4 are electrically connected to each other, and the AC24V1 is connected to various circuits of the power supply board 630 via the noise suppression circuit 630b. At the same time as the supply is started, the input terminal 1 and the output terminal 2 become electrically conductive, and the supply of AC24V2 to the various circuits of the power supply board 630 via the noise suppression circuit 630b is started. Thus, the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be turned on by turning on the power switch 630a. On the other hand, when a staff such as a store clerk of the game hall turns off the power switch 630a, the input terminal 3 and the output terminal 4 become electrically non-conductive, and the AC24V1 is connected to various circuits of the power substrate 630. The supply is cut off, and the input side terminal 1 and the output side terminal 2 become electrically non-conductive, so that the supply of AC24V2 to the various circuits of the power supply board 630 is cut off. Thus, the power of the pachinko machine 1 can be shut off by the OFF operation of the power switch 630a.

  In addition, while the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall remains ON, the staff such as the game hall clerk turns on the breaker of the game hall to turn on the pachinko machine installed in the game hall. The power may be turned on all at once, or the pachinko machines installed in the game hall may be turned off all at once by turning off the breaker in the game hall.

[9-1-1. Noise suppression circuit]
The noise countermeasure circuit 630b includes a common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC which is a circuit for common mode noise countermeasure, a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC which is a circuit for normal mode noise countermeasure, and a choke coil L1, and the output of the power switch 630a. The side terminals 4 and 2 are input to the common mode noise suppression circuit CMC, the normal mode noise suppression circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1.

  The common mode noise suppression circuit CMC includes capacitors C1 and C2 and varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2. The capacitors C1 and C2 have the same capacity and remove common mode noise. On the other hand, the varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 are surge absorbing elements (surge absorbers) and have the same varistor voltage. The varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 remove noise that cannot be reduced by the capacitors C1 and C2.

  One end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, the other end of the capacitor C1 is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C2, and the other end of the capacitor C2 is connected to AC24V2 via the power switch 630a. It is electrically connected. Further, one end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to the AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, the other end of the varistor ZNR1 is electrically connected to one end of the varistor ZNR2, and the other end of the varistor ZNR2 is connected via the power switch 630a. It is electrically connected to AC24V2. The other end of the capacitor C1, one end of the capacitor C2, the other end of the varistor ZNR1, and one end of the varistor ZNR1 are electrically connected and input to the ground connection terminal DCN5 as a frame ground FG2. This ground connection terminal DCN5 is electrically connected to the ground terminal ECN5 of the frame ground substrate 559 shown in FIG. 182 via a power supply ground wire (not shown).

  The normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC includes a capacitor C3 and a varistor ZNR3. The capacitor C3 removes normal mode noise generated in AC24V1 and AC24V2. The varistor ZNR3 is a surge absorbing element (surge absorber) and removes noise that could not be removed by the capacitor C3.

  One end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to AC24V1 via the power switch 630a, and the other end of the capacitor C3 is electrically connected to AC24V2 via the power switch 630a. One end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to AC24V1 via a power switch 630a, and the other end of the varistor ZNR3 is electrically connected to AC24V2 via a power switch 630a.

  AC24V1 output from the output terminal 4 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 via the common mode noise suppression circuit CMC and the normal mode noise suppression circuit NMC, and is also input to the power supply line connector DCN2 as AC24VA, AC24V2 output from the output terminal 2 of the power switch 630a is input to the choke coil L1 via the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, and is also input to the power line connector DCN2 as AC24V. . The choke coil L1 is a component for preventing common mode noise of AC24V1 and AC24V2, and prevents noise disturbance. The power line connector DCN2 is provided outside the pachinko machine 1 via a power line for an interface board (not shown), an interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 114, and a power line for a CR unit (not shown). It is electrically connected to a CR unit (not shown) and supplies AC24VA and AC24V to a CR unit (not shown).

  The AC24V1 and AC24V2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c.

[9-1-2. Rectifier circuit]
The rectifier circuit 630c includes N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter, referred to as “FETs”) Q1 and Q2 and a peripheral circuit 630ca. The peripheral circuit 630ca is a peripheral circuit of the FETs Q1 and Q2, and mainly includes a plurality of electronic components such as a resistor, a diode, and a Zener diode.

  The AC24V1 having the common mode noise reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D1, and is input to the gate terminal of the FET Q1 via the peripheral circuit 630ca. The signal is directly input to the drain terminal of the FET Q2 without passing through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The AC24V2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 is input to the anode terminal 1 and the anode terminal 3 of the Schottky barrier diode D2, and is input to the gate terminal of the FET Q2 via the peripheral circuit 630ca. The signal is directly input to the drain terminal of the FET Q1 without passing through the peripheral circuit 630ca. The source terminals of the FETs Q1 and Q2 are input to the CAI terminals of the power generation circuit 630f, respectively.

  AC24V1 and AC24V2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 are rectified to DC by switching by the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the peripheral circuit 630ca, and are connected to the cathode terminal 2 of the Schottky barrier diode D1 and the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D2. 2 and are output from each. The types of packages of the FET Q1, the FET Q2, the Schottky barrier diode D1, and the Schottky barrier diode D2 are so-called TO-220F, which are the same type and are fixed to the radiation fin HS1 (see FIG. 184). ing. The radiation fin HS1 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 by being soldered and fixed to the power supply board 630.

  As described above, the AC24V1 and AC24V2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c and also input to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, respectively, and the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6. And output to the AC-DET terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

  The rectified DC output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 are input to the power factor improvement circuit 630d via the choke coil L2.

[9-1-3. Power factor improvement circuit]
The power factor improvement circuit 630d includes N-channel field effect transistors (hereinafter, referred to as “FETs”) Q3 and Q4, and a peripheral circuit 630da. The peripheral circuit 630da is a peripheral circuit of the FETs Q3 and Q4, and mainly includes a plurality of electronic components such as a resistor, a diode, and an inductor.

  The direct current whose common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L2 is input to the anode terminals 1 and 3 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10, respectively, and is directly connected to the drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 without passing through the peripheral circuit 630da. Respectively. To the gate terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4, a power-factor improvement circuit gate signal from the PFC-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit is input via the peripheral circuit 630da. Source terminals and drain terminals of the FETs Q3 and Q4 are grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply substrate 630 via the peripheral circuit 630da.

  The direct current whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L2 suppresses generation of harmonics by switching by the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the peripheral circuit 630da to improve the power factor, and the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10. Is output from each. The package types of the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D9 and D10 are the same as the package types of the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 (the above-described TO-220F). It is fixed to the fin HS2 (see FIG. 184). The radiation fin HS2 is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 by being soldered and fixed to the power supply board 630.

  The DC whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improvement circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e.

[9-1-4. Smoothing circuit]
The smoothing circuit 630e includes a plurality of electrolytic capacitors (not shown). The negative terminals of the plurality of electrolytic capacitors are respectively grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630, and the DC terminals whose power factors are improved by the power factor improvement circuit 630d are input to the positive terminals thereof. The smoothing circuit 630e gently (smooths) the pulsating current from the DC whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 630d, outputs the pulsating current to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power generation circuit 630f, and outputs the fuse FUSE3 (this embodiment). In the form, it has the same shape as the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and is formed through a transparent glass tube having a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm (support terminals at both ends are made of metal), and a type B blowout specified by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law. The power is supplied from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 as +35 V DC. The power supply line supplied through the fuse FUSE3 is a + 35V power supply line of each board in the pachinko machine 1.

[9-1-5. Power supply creation circuit]
When the DC from the smoothing circuit 630e is input to the PFC-OU terminal, the power generation circuit 630f generates DC + 12V and DC + 5V from the input DC. The power supply creation circuit 630f outputs the created DC + 12V from the + 12V terminal and supplies it from the power supply board 630 to each board inside the pachinko machine 1, and outputs the created DC + 5V from the + 5V terminal to output the created DC + 5V from the power supply board 630 to the pachinko machine. 1 to each substrate. The power supply line supplied from the + 12V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f becomes the + 12V power supply line of each board inside the pachinko machine 1, and the power supply line supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f becomes + 5V of each board inside the pachinko machine 1. Power supply line.

  The power supply creation circuit 630f controls the switching by the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the peripheral circuit 630da in the power factor improvement circuit 630d by controlling the output of the power factor improvement gate signal from the PFC-GATE terminal to the power factor improvement circuit 630d. To suppress the generation of harmonics.

  In the power supply generation circuit 630f, AC24V1 and AC24V2 whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the AC-DET terminal via the diodes D5 and D6. The power supply creation circuit 630f monitors the voltage input to the AC-DET terminal, and determines whether to output a power supply breakdown circuit gate signal from the FUSE-GATE terminal to the power supply breakdown circuit 630g.

  The plug of the power cord (not shown) is not inserted into the power supply outlet of 24 VAC, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the game facility, and is incorrectly inserted into the power supply outlet of 100 VAC, which is the commercial power supply voltage higher than the power supply voltage of 24 VAC for the game machine. When inserted, a power supply voltage higher than DC +35 V is input from the smoothing circuit 630e to the PFC-OUT terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f.

  The power supply generation circuit 630f determines the magnitude of the power supply voltage based on the power supply voltage whose common mode noise has been reduced by the choke coil L1 input to the AC-DET terminal (threshold value: the present embodiment) In this case, the voltage is set to about 50 V.), a power supply destruction circuit gate signal can be output to the power destruction circuit 630g.

  When the power generation circuit 630f outputs a power destruction circuit gate signal to the power destruction circuit 630g, the power destruction circuit 630g self-destructs and enters a short mode. When the power supply destruction circuit 630g enters the short mode, when the power switch 630a is in the ON state, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is supplied to the power supply via the noise suppression circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, and the power supply destruction circuit 630g. By flowing at a stretch toward the CGND terminal of the creation circuit 630f, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are blown.

  The GND terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f is grounded to the ground (GND) of the power supply board 630. The ground (GND) of the power supply board 630 to which the GND terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f is grounded becomes the ground (GND) line of each board inside the pachinko machine 1.

[9-1-6. Power supply destruction circuit]
The power supply destruction circuit 630g includes an N-channel field effect transistor (hereinafter referred to as "FET") Q5, resistors R25 and R24, and a capacitor C22. The drain terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2. The gate terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor 25, and the other end of the resistor R25 is electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. The source terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to one end of the resistor R24, is electrically connected to one end of the capacitor C22, and is electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. The other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 have one end electrically connected to the other end opposite to the resistor R25 electrically connected to the gate terminal of the FET Q5. In addition to the other end of the resistor R25, the other end of the resistor R24 and the other end of the capacitor C22 are electrically connected to the FUSE-GATE terminal.

  When a gate signal for the power supply destruction circuit is input from the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f to the gate terminal of the FET Q5 via the resistor R25, the power supply destruction circuit 630g operates to operate the FET Q5 to connect the source terminal to the drain terminal of the FET Q5. When a large current flows toward the drain (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 become overcurrent), the FET Q5 is destroyed, and the state of the short mode in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 conduct is maintained. Is done. The FET Q5 has the same package type (the above-described TO-220F) as the package type of the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10. , Q2, Q3, Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10, are arranged at positions not in contact with the radiation fins HS1, HS2. Specifically, the FET Q5 is arranged between the radiating fins HS1 and HS2 and is not fixed to the radiating fins HS1 and HS2 at all (see FIGS. 184 and 185). The purpose of this is to absorb and cool the heat via the radiation fins HS1 and HS2 so that the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3 and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10 are not destroyed by heat generation. On the other hand, when the FET Q5 operates and a large current flows from the drain terminal to the source terminal of the FET Q5 (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 become overcurrent), the FET Q5 is short-circuited due to heat generation. This is to contribute to being destroyed in time.

  In other words, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the power outlet of 24 VAC, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the game hall island facilities, and is erroneously inserted into the power outlet of 100 VAC, which is the commercial power voltage higher than the power supply voltage of 24 VAC for the game machine. When the power supply generation circuit 630f is inserted, the magnitude of the power supply voltage is set to a predetermined value (threshold value) based on the power supply voltage in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 input to the AC-DET terminal. : In this embodiment, the voltage is set to about 50 V.) When the voltage reaches the voltage, a gate signal for a power supply destruction circuit is output to the power destruction circuit 630g, and control is performed so that the FET Q5 self-destructs. This maintains a short-circuit state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 conduct, and the source terminal of the FET Q5 is electrically connected to the CGND terminal of the power generation circuit 630f. In the ON state, the current passing through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 is supplied to the power supply generation circuit 630f via the FET Q5 in the short mode in the noise suppression circuit 630b, the rectification circuit 630c, and the power supply destruction circuit 630g. By flowing into the CGND terminal at a stretch, a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are blown. Only the power supply board 630 is destroyed, and the plug of the power supply cord is commercialized. A which is the power supply voltage Even inserted incorrectly into a power outlet of 100 V, so that the can be reliably prevented that the pachinko machine 1 within each substrate except the power substrate 630 is broken.

  In addition, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the power outlet of 24 VAC, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the game hall island facilities, and is erroneously inserted into the power outlet of 100 VAC, which is the commercial power voltage higher than the power supply voltage of 24 VAC for the game machine. In a state where the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is broken by being inserted, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are replaced with ones which are not blown, and the plug of the power supply cord is AC24V which is a power supply voltage for a game machine of an island facility in a game hall. Even if it is plugged into a power outlet, since the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is already destroyed and the short mode is maintained, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the power switch 630a, the noise suppression circuit 630b, and the rectification circuit 630c , And the power destruction circuit 630g When a large current flows toward the CGND terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f via the FET Q5 in the short mode, a large current flows through the replaced fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, and one of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 or Both will blow again. In other words, unless the power supply board 630 in which the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g has already been destroyed is replaced with a normal power supply board 630 in which the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is not destroyed, the plug of the power supply cord is connected to the island facility of the game hall. Even if it is plugged into an AC 24V power outlet, which is a power supply voltage for gaming machines, it is not possible to start a game.

[9-1-7. Backup power supply circuit]
The backup power supply circuit 630h includes a Schottky barrier diode D20 and a capacitor BC0. The Schottky barrier diode D20 has a low forward voltage drop and a high switching speed. The anode terminal of Schottky barrier diode D20 is electrically connected to a power supply line (that is, a + 5V power supply line) supplied from the +5 V terminal of power supply generation circuit 630f, and the cathode terminal of Schottky barrier diode D20 is connected to capacitor BC0. It is electrically connected to the plus (+) terminal. The negative (-) terminal of the capacitor BC0 is grounded to the ground (GND). The main power supply line serving as a backup power supply line from the terminal between the cathode terminal of Schottky barrier diode D20 and the plus (+) terminal of capacitor BC0 to the main control built-in RAM of main control MPU 1310a provided on main control board 1310 shown in FIG. A circuit is formed in which a wiring pattern for extracting the VBB and the payout VBB serving as a backup power supply line to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 179 is formed. I have.

  That is, the negative (-) terminal of the capacitor BC0 is grounded to the ground (GND). A main VBB serving as a backup power supply line to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310 from the terminal between the cathode terminal of the Schottky barrier diode D20 and the plus (+) terminal of the capacitor BC0, and the payout control The payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the substrate 633 is a circuit divided into two systems, a payout VBB serving as a backup power supply line to the payout control built-in RAM.

  When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the power supply line (that is, the +5 V power supply line) supplied from the +5 V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f becomes a Schottky barrier diode D20. And supplies it to the capacitor BC0 to charge the capacitor BC0, and supplies it to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310 as the main VBB to hold various information stored in the main control built-in RAM The payout VBB is supplied to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, and holds various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM.

  On the other hand, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (including the case where the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall is shut off all at once by turning off the breaker of the game hall), and a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. In this case, DC +5 V by the power supply line (that is, the +5 V power supply line) supplied from the +5 V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630 f is not supplied to the capacitor BC0. In response, capacitor BC0 starts discharging. This discharge prevents the supply to the power supply line (that is, the +5 V power supply line) supplied from the +5 V terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f by the Schottky barrier diode D20, while providing the main control board 1310 as the main VBB. The information is supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a and holds various information stored in the main control built-in RAM. Then, various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is held.

  That is, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (including a case where the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall is shut off all at once by turning off the breaker of the game hall), and a power failure or momentary power failure occurs. In this case, even if DC +5 V from the power supply line (that is, the +5 V power supply line) supplied from the +5 V terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630 f is not supplied to the capacitor BC 0, the capacitor BC 0 discharges the main control board 1310 as the main VBB. Various kinds of information stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided are held, and stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 as the payout VBB. Various information is stored.

[9-2. Method of identifying electronic components having the same shape]
Next, a method for identifying electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630 will be described. As described above, the electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply board 630 include the FETs Q1 and Q2 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c, and the FETs Q3 and Q4 and the Schottky transistors of the power factor correction circuit 630d. The package types of the barrier diodes D9 and D10 and the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g are the same (TO-220F), and the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 have the same shape (diameter: 5 mm, length). Length: 20 mm transparent glass tube (support terminals at both ends are made of metal).

  Although the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are completely different types of electronic components, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 and D10 are electronic components that are not destroyed, and the FET Q5 is the only electronic component that is destroyed. Therefore, in the present embodiment, as the electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply substrate 630, the only one of the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 that is destroyed. In order to make it easy to identify the components, silk printing printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 has characteristics different from those of the other components.

  Specifically, for the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10, which are non-destructive electronic components, as shown in FIG. The line and the thick white line indicating the direction in which the electronic components are to be arranged are silk-printed, and the silk-printed TSLK1 to 4 for the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 and the silk-printed for the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4. Thus, TSLKs 5 to 8 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. The thick white line is the side fixed to the radiation fins HS1 and HS2. In FIG. 184, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 need to be disposed adjacent to each other to fix the radiation fins HS1 and HS2. It is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 such that the silk printing of the white outline on which the HS2 is arranged and the thick white lines of the silk printing TSLK1 to 8 are connected.

  On the other hand, as for the FET Q5 which is the only electronic component to be destroyed, as shown in FIG. 186 (b), a white outline and a plurality of white oblique lines arranged at equal intervals in the outline are shown. The ad1 and the thick white line indicating the direction in which the electronic components are arranged are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 by silk printing TSLK9 as silk printing. That is, the white oblique line ad1 is represented as a characteristic pattern.

  As described above, even if the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 have the same shape, the silk print printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. By observing the white diagonal line ad1 represented as a characteristic pattern among the TSLKs 1 to 9, which electronic component among different types of electronic components having the same shape is more closely watched than other electronic components. It is possible to identify whether the electronic component should be used. Thus, it is possible to very easily specify which electronic component among the different types of electronic components having the same shape is the only electronic component to be destroyed.

  When the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff such as the clerk of the amusement hall to the FETQ5 by telephone, the silk print TSLK9 having the white hatched ad1 represented as a characteristic pattern. By instructing to search for, the clerk such as a game hall clerk can accurately grasp the position of the FET Q5. Become.

  Thereby, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff such as the clerk of the game hall to give the FETQ5 by telephone, the clerk of the game hall clerk etc. The noticeable FET Q5 can be specified among a plurality of electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630. Therefore, of the plurality of electronic components, the remarkable FET Q5 can be identified from the other electronic components FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10.

  The FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, and Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 are completely different electronic components as described above, whereas the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are the same. Although it is a kind of electronic component, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the power outlet of 24 VAC, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine in the island facilities of the game hall, and the commercial power supply voltage is 100 VAC, which is higher than the 24 VAC power supply voltage for the gaming machine. As described above, the FET Q5 of the power supply destruction circuit 630g is self-destructed and the short mode is maintained, and a large current flows through the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, thereby causing one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 to fail. Is blown. In other words, after the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, one or both of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 become destructive electronic components as a trace that the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC100V that is a commercial power supply voltage. I have. Therefore, in the present embodiment, among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 as electronic components having the same shape mounted on the power supply substrate 630, the electronic components to be destroyed are easily printed on the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 so as to be easily identified. It employs silk printing that has different characteristics from the others.

  Specifically, as shown in FIG. 187 (a), for the fuse FUSE3, which is an electronic component that is not destroyed even when the plug of the power cord is accidentally inserted into a power outlet of AC100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage, as shown in FIG. Is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 as silk print.

  On the other hand, FIG. 187 (b) shows fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which are electronic components whose power cord plugs are destroyed by mistake as traces of being plugged into an AC100V power outlet which is a commercial power supply voltage. As described above, the white outline and the region ad2 in which the outline is solidly painted white are silk-printed, and the silk-printed FSLKs 2, 3 are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. That is, the area ad2, which is solid white, is represented as a characteristic pattern. Although both ends of the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are respectively soldered to the power supply board 630, support metal fittings (not shown) are solidly painted white in the area inside the white outline and the area around the support metal fittings. The area ad2 can be visually checked, and the white solid area ad2 corresponding to the transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which is the area inside the white outline, is transparent. It can be surely seen through a transparent glass tube.

  As described above, even when the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are electronic components having the same shape, the white color represented as a characteristic pattern among the silk-printed FSLK1-3 printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. By visually observing the solid area ad2, it is possible to identify which of the same type of electronic components having the same shape is an electronic component that should be watched as compared with other electronic components. It has become. This makes it extremely easy to determine which of the electronic components of the same type having the same shape is the electronic component indicating that the plug of the power cord has been accidentally inserted into the AC 100 V power outlet that is the commercial power supply voltage. Can be specified.

  When the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff such as the clerk of the amusement hall to specify the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 by telephone, the white solid area shown as a characteristic pattern is used. By instructing to search for the silk-printed FSLKs 2 and 3 having the ad2, the staff such as the game hall clerk can accurately grasp the positions of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2. It becomes easy to communicate with staffs such as clerks.

  Thereby, when the person in charge of the service center of the manufacturer of the pachinko machine 1 instructs the staff of the game hall such as the clerk of the game hall to use the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the person in charge of the game hall clerk and the person in charge of the service center become the person in charge of the service center. Of the electronic components mounted on the power supply board 630, the notable fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 can be specified. Therefore, among the plurality of electronic components, the notable fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 can be distinguished from the fuse FUSE3 which is another electronic component.

[9-3. Check fuse blowing]
Next, a description will be given of the confirmation of fusing of the same type of fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 having the same shape and mounted on the power supply board 630. As described above, the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3 are transparent glass tubes (the supporting terminals at both ends are made of metal). When the fuses are blown, the fuse wires housed in the transparent glass tubes are broken and the transparent glass tubes are cut. Soot adheres to the inside. Among the fuses FUSE1, FUSE2, and FUSE3, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are electronic components that can show a trace in which a plug of a power cord is accidentally inserted into a power outlet of AC100V, which is a commercial power supply voltage, as described above. If the plug of the power cord is mistakenly inserted into a power outlet of AC100V which is a commercial power supply voltage, the power cord is blown. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the silk prints FSLK2 and 3 described above are printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 as silk prints on the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 so that the state of the blown fuse lines can be easily checked. As described above, the silk-printed FSLKs 2 and 3 correspond to transparent glass tubes except for both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 because the solid white area ad2 is represented as a characteristic pattern as described above. By visually observing the solid white region ad2 through a transparent glass tube, it is possible to easily confirm the presence or absence of a break in the fuse line accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2.

  Thereby, a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall or a worker who installs the pachinko machine 1 (replaces the game board 5) inserts a plug of a power cord for supplying a power supply voltage to the pachinko machine 1 with AC24V which is a power supply voltage for the game machine. When the pachinko machine 1 is turned on by mistakenly plugging it into a power outlet of 100 V AC which is a commercial power supply voltage and turning on the power switch 630a of the power supply board 630, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 Of these, the fuse wire housed in one or both of the transparent glass tubes breaks and soot adheres to the inside of the transparent glass tube. Even if the plug is inserted into the power outlet, the power cannot be turned on and it is an initial failure. " Wiring errors), it is so that it can not (can not excuse) to cheat.

  On the other hand, as described above, the silk print FSLK1 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630 as the silk print on the fuse FUSE3. In the present embodiment, green color is adopted as the resist for the power supply substrate 630. Further, in the present embodiment, a green resist is solid-painted in a region of the mounting surface of the power supply substrate 630 corresponding to the silk print FSLK1 for the fuse FUSE3. No wiring pattern is laid out in the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 (that is, the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3). Since the wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid the region, no wiring pattern is formed in this region.) This is because the transparent wire of the fuse FUSE3 and the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the fuse are visually observed through the transparent glass tube so that the fuse wire accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 can be obtained. In this case, the visibility of the fuse line can be confirmed by improving the visibility of the state.

  In the area of the solid glass resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3, even if all the wiring patterns are laid out, the transparent state of the fuse FUSE3 is the same as when no wiring pattern is laid out. The visibility of the state of the fuse line accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE3 is improved by visually observing the area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube through the transparent glass tube. Thus, it is possible to easily check whether or not the fuse wire is disconnected.

  As described above, the power supply line connector DCN2 of the power supply board 630 is connected to the interface board power supply line (not shown), the interface board 635 of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. 114, and the CR unit power supply line (not shown). It is electrically connected to a CR unit (not shown) installed outside the pachinko machine 1, and supplies AC24VA and AC24V to the CR unit (not shown). In other words, the interface board 635 has a function of supplying power to a CR unit (not shown) in addition to a function of relaying various signals. The interface board 635 is formed of a fuse FUSE (not shown) (in this embodiment, a transparent glass tube having a diameter of 5 mm and a length of 20 mm (support terminals at both ends are made of metal), and a type B blowout specified by the Electrical Appliance and Material Safety Law). 187 (a) is printed on the mounting surface of the fuse FUSE3 of the power supply board 630 described above. The area of the mounting surface of the interface substrate 635 corresponding to the silk printing for the fuse FUSE (not shown) is solid-colored with a green resist. No wiring pattern is laid out in the solid-colored green resist region corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown) (that is, the solid-filled region corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE not shown). Since the wiring pattern is formed so as to avoid the green resist region, no wiring pattern is formed in this region.) This is because the area of the solid-colored green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown) is visually observed through the transparent glass tube and is accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE. The visibility of the state of the fuse line is improved so that the presence or absence of disconnection of the fuse line can be confirmed. The fuse FUSE (not shown) provided on the interface board 635 can be provided in one of AC24VA and AC24V supplied from the power supply line connector DCN2 of the power supply board 630, or can be provided in both. You can also.

  Also, in the solid-colored green resist region corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE (not shown), even if all the wiring patterns are laid out, as in the case where no wiring pattern is laid out, it is not shown. The area of the solid green resist corresponding to the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE is visually inspected through the transparent glass tube so that the state of the fuse wire accommodated in the transparent glass tube of the fuse FUSE can be checked. The visibility can be improved, and the presence or absence of disconnection of the fuse line can be easily confirmed.

[9-4. Capacitor capacity]
Next, the capacitance of the capacitor BC0 will be described. As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on or the power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the capacitor BC0 is connected to the power supply line (that is, the + 5V power supply) supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f. Line), DC + 5V can be charged by being supplied to the capacitor BC0 via the Schottky barrier diode D20. On the other hand, the pachinko machine 1 is shut off (the breaker of the game hall). The power supply supplied from the + 5V terminal of the power supply generation circuit 630f when a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs when the power supply of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall is shut off all at once by turning OFF the power supply. The discharge is performed in response to the fact that DC +5 V by the line (that is, +5 V power supply line) is not supplied to the capacitor BC0. To start.

  Due to the discharge of the capacitor BC0, the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off (including the case where the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall is shut off all at once by turning off the breaker of the game hall), a power failure or the like. When a momentary power failure occurs, backup power is supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 as the main VBB so that various information stored in the main control built-in RAM is held. In addition, the backup power supply is supplied as the payout VBB to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633, so that various information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is held. It has become.

  When the operation of the game hall ends, a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall turns off the breaker of the game hall, thereby simultaneously turning off the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall. Then, when starting the next business (usually, the power switch of the pachinko machine installed in the game hall is kept in the ON state), a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall changes the breaker of the game hall. Is turned on, the power of the pachinko machines installed in the game hall is simultaneously turned on. At this time, if the capacity of the capacitor BC0 is small, the discharging of the capacitor BC0 is completed during the period from the end of the business of the game hall to the start of the next business, so that the main control board 1310 has Various information of the main control built-in RAM of the control MPU 1310a and the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633 cannot be held. With this, when a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall turns on the breaker of the game hall at the time of starting business, when the pachinko machines installed in the game hall are simultaneously turned on, the RAM clear switch is turned on. Regardless of whether the operation is performed or not, the main control MPU provided on the main control board determines a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM in the power-on processing and completely erases the contents of the main control built-in RAM ( Since all the pachinko machines simultaneously execute the RAM clear notification for notifying that the game has been cleared, the RAM clear notification sound flowing from the speakers of all the pachinko machines sounds in the game hall. In this case, in all the pachinko machines, the dispensing control MPU provided on the dispensing control board judges the checksum (sum value) error of the dispensing control built-in RAM in the processing at the time of power-on, and completes the contents of the dispensing control built-in RAM. Erase (clear).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the capacity of the capacitor BC0 is selected so that the RAM clear notification is not performed even when the game hall is closed and the next business is started. Specifically, the capacity of the capacitor BC0 is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided on the main control board 1310 as the main VBB for about three days (about 72 hours) after the business of the gaming hall ends. Various kinds of information which are supplied and stored in the main control built-in RAM can be held and supplied to the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control section 633a of the payout control board 633 as the payout VBB. Those having a capacity capable of holding various information stored in the RAM are selected. The selection of this capacity depends on the power consumption of the main VBB supplied to the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310, and the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. Is also about 10 times larger than the power consumption of the pay VBB supplied to the power supply. The power consumption of the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 is the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. Power consumption is large.

[9-5. Discontinued Electronic Components Measures]
Next, a countermeasure for electronic parts whose production is stopped will be described. First, due to the circumstances of the pachinko machine 1, a lead-type electronic component is mounted on a mounting surface, which is a front surface side, of a substrate treated as a main substrate such as a power supply substrate, a main control substrate, and a payout control substrate. It is necessary to solder on the soldering side which is the side. However, lead-type electronic components are important in manufacturers of game machines such as pachinko machines, slots, and fusion game machines, but other general electric manufacturers are capable of miniaturizing surface mount type ( (What is called an SMD type). For this reason, production may be stopped due to a decrease in the number of production of lead-type electronic components. If a lead-type electronic component obtained from one electronic component manufacturer is discontinued and a search is made for an alternative, there is a high probability that another electronic component manufacturer will also discontinue production. This leads to the use of a lead-type electronic component with a time limit, which makes it difficult to mount the lead-type electronic component on a substrate that will eventually be treated as a main substrate.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the SMD type electronic component can be configured as a lead type electronic component, and the lead type electronic component can be mounted on a mounting surface of a substrate treated as a main substrate. . Here, the Schottky barrier diode D20 of the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 will be described.

  As shown in FIG. 188 (a), the Schottky barrier diode D20 is located on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate D20a at a position corresponding to the anode D20ca and the cathode D20cb serving as terminals of the SMD type Schottky barrier diode D20b. SMD land patterns D20da and D20db are formed at the positions where one ends of the leads D20ea and D20eb corresponding to the SMD land patterns D20da and D20db are disposed, and lead land patterns D20fa and D20fb are formed at the positions where the SMD land patterns D20da and D20db are arranged. , D20db and wiring patterns D20ga, D20gb for electrically connecting the lead land patterns D20fa, D20fb.

  The SMD land patterns D20da and D20db formed on the surface (mounting surface) of the substrate D20a are arranged and soldered so as to correspond to the anode side D20ca and the cathode side D20cb serving as terminals of the SMD type Schottky barrier diode D20b. The anode D20ca, the cathode D20cb and the SMD land patterns D20da and D20db are soldered, and one ends of the leads D20ea and D20eb are soldered to the lead land patterns D20fa and D20fb, respectively. Then, the entire surface (mounting surface) and the back surface of the substrate D20a are molded by encasing the entire surface with an epoxy resin to form an SMD type Schottky barrier diode D20b and an electronic component body D20h covering one end of the leads D20ea and D20eb. The Schottky barrier diode D20 can be configured as a lead-type electronic component in which two leads D20ea and D20eb protrude from the electronic component body D20h. As shown in FIG. 188 (b), a symbol D20ha indicating the forward direction of the Schottky barrier diode D20 is printed on the front surface and / or the back surface of the electronic component body D20h. Although not shown, a manufacturer name and a product number (a number listed in a catalog) of the Schottky barrier diode D20 are also printed on the front surface and / or the back surface of the electronic component body D20h.

  As described above, since the SMD type electronic component can be configured as a lead type electronic component, even when the production of the lead type electronic component is reduced and the production is stopped and it becomes difficult to obtain it, This can be achieved by using SMD type electronic components used by electric manufacturers.

  In the above-described embodiment, the Schottky barrier diode D20 has been described. However, the present invention can be applied to an SMD type capacitor, an SMD type resistor, an SMD type coil, and the like. Further, the same SMD type electronic components can be arranged in an array in which a plurality of the same SMD type electronic components are arranged in a line, thereby forming a lead type electronic component.

  Next, a countermeasure is taken against a commercial power supply voltage when a plug of a power supply cord for supplying AC power from the island facility in the game hall to the pachinko machine 1 is erroneously inserted into a power outlet of a commercial power supply voltage (100 VAC). Another configuration of the present invention (hereinafter, referred to as “configuration for countermeasures against commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment”) will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 189 shows a configuration of countermeasures for commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment. In FIG. 189, members having the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIG. 183 (hereinafter, described as “configuration for countermeasures against commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment”) are given the same reference numerals. expressed.

[Comparison between the configuration of the countermeasure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment and the configuration of the countermeasure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment]
In the configuration of the countermeasure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment, the power supply destruction circuit 630g includes the FET Q5, the resistors R25 and R24, and the capacitor C22 as described above, and the power supply destruction circuit 630f receives the power supply destruction from the FUSE-GATE terminal of the power supply creation circuit 630f. When a circuit gate signal is input to the gate terminal of the FET Q5 via the resistor R25, the FET Q5 operates to cause a large current to flow from the drain terminal to the source terminal of the FET Q5 (the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 become excessive). When the FET Q5 is destroyed due to the current, the short-circuit state in which the drain terminal and the source terminal of the FET Q5 conduct is maintained.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment, the noise countermeasure circuit 630b includes a common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC and a normal mode noise countermeasure circuit as described above. And the output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are input to the common mode noise suppression circuit CMC, the normal mode noise suppression circuit NMC, and the choke coil L1. I have.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment, the AC24V1 and the AC24V2 whose common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 are input to the rectifier circuit 630c and the diode D5, as described above. The signals are input to the anode terminal of D6, respectively, output from the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, and input to the AC-DET terminal of the power generation circuit 630f.

  Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment, when the AC 24 V from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power supply line connector DCN1 via the power cord (not shown) as described above, the fuse FUSE1 , FUSE2 to the input terminals 3, 1 of the power switch 630a. As described above, for the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the white outline and the area ad2 in which the outline is solidly painted white are silk-printed, and the silk-printed FSLKs 2 and 3 are mounted on the power supply board 630. Printed on the surface. That is, the area ad2, which is solid white, is represented as a characteristic pattern. Although both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are soldered to the power supply board 630, as described above, the support fittings (not shown) are white in the area inside the white outline and the area around the support fittings. The solid-filled area ad2 can be viewed, and is a solid white area corresponding to a transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, which is an area inside the white outline. ad2 can be surely seen through a transparent glass tube.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the countermeasures against the commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 189, 24 VAC from the island facility of the game hall is supplied to the power supply line connector DCN1 via a power cord (not shown). Then, the L side (AC24V1) is input to the input terminal 3 of the power switch 630a via the fuse FUSE1, and the N side (AC24V2) is input directly to the input terminal 1 of the power switch 630a. Is done. As described above, for the fuse FUSE1, the white outline and the area ad2 in which the outline is solidly painted white are silk-printed, and the silk-printed FSLK2 is printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. ing. That is, the area ad2, which is solid white, is represented as a characteristic pattern. As described above, although both ends of the fuse FUSE1 are soldered to the power supply board 630, the support fittings (not shown) are solidly painted white in the area inside the white outline and the area around the support fittings. The area ad2, which has been solid-filled in white, is the area inside the white outline and corresponds to the transparent glass tube excluding both ends of the fuse FUSE1. It can be surely seen through the glass tube.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment, the fuse FUSE2 in the configuration of the countermeasure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment is omitted from the 24 V AC from the island facility of the game hall. Briefly describing this, in the configuration of countermeasures against commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2 are connected to both power cords (L side (AC24V1), N side ( AC24V2)), but no problem occurred even if one (N side (AC24V2)) was omitted in a test conducted by the applicant. Thus, in the configuration of the measure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 189, one of the AC 24V (N side (AC24V2)) from the island facility of the game hall is connected to the input terminal 1 of the power switch 630a. The cost can be reduced by inputting it as is.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment, the same switch as the power switch 630a in the configuration of the countermeasure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment is employed. In brief, this is because the power switch 630a needs to reliably disconnect / connect both the L side and the N side of 24 VAC from the island facility of the game hall. Thus, the power switch 630a in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment is similar to the power switch 630a in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the first embodiment. Both the L side and the N side can be disconnected / connected at the same time.

  In the configuration of the countermeasures against the commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 189, the N side of AC24V (AC24V2) from the island facility of the game hall and the input terminal 1 of the power switch 630a are connected. It is electrically connected to one of the micro gap type arresters AL1. The other of the micro gap type arrester AL1 is electrically connected to the frame ground FG2 of the ground connection terminal DCN5. When a high voltage (referred to as "surge voltage") intrudes into AC24V from the arcade facility due to a lightning strike, the microgap arrestor AL1 surges the surge voltage to the frame ground FG2 of the ground connection terminal DCN5. The surge voltage is limited by flowing as a current to prevent a surge voltage from being applied to the power switch 630a, or a high voltage (surge voltage) temporarily generated by turning on / off the power switch 630a is supplied to the ground connection terminal DCN5. The surge voltage is limited by flowing a surge current to the frame ground FG2 to prevent the surge voltage from being applied to the power switch 630a. Further, when the pachinko machine 1 is installed in the game hall, a worker passes by the micro gap type arrester AL1, and the ground terminal ECN2 (island equipment ground) of the frame ground substrate 559 shown in FIG. If the terminal and the ground connection terminal of the island facility of the game hall are electrically connected to each other via the ground wire of the island facility, the electromagnetic wave noise is used as security to secure the N side of AC24V from the island facility of the game hall (AC24V2 ), The noise immunity can be increased.

  Further, in the configuration of the commercial power supply voltage countermeasure according to the second embodiment, the common mode noise countermeasure circuit CMC, the normal mode noise countermeasure circuit NMC, the choke coil, L1 and a surge absorber SA1 forming a power supply destruction circuit 630g '. The output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a are connected to a common mode noise suppression circuit CMC, a normal mode noise suppression circuit NMC, and a power supply destruction circuit. 630g ', and input to the choke coil L1. The surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g 'has a higher reaction speed than the varistors ZNR1 and ZNR2 of the common mode noise suppression circuit CMC and the varistor ZNR3 of the normal mode noise suppression circuit NMC (for example, as the surge absorber SA1). One end is electrically connected to the 24 V AC L side (24 V AC1) via the power switch 630 a, and the other end is connected to the 24 V AC N side (24 V through the power switch 630 a). AC24V2), and when a circuit voltage exceeding the rated voltage (breakdown voltage) is input, a large current flows and it is destroyed, causing a short circuit and a short mode.

  Although a varistor may be used as the surge absorber SA1, a silicon surge absorber (also called a semiconductor varistor, VRD, or the like) is used here. The silicon surge absorber is capable of absorbing a surge voltage having a sharp rise compared to a normal varistor, and utilizes an avalanche (electron avalanche) effect of a pn junction of silicon. This silicon surge absorber has characteristics that it has a very quick response to a surge, has a very good control voltage characteristic, and has a very small leakage current. Since the surge absorber SA1 is an AC circuit, a bidirectional type is used, and a rated voltage (breakdown voltage) of 47 V which is about twice the input voltage may be selected.

  Further, in the configuration of the measure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment, the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c are electrically connected to the No. 2 (COM) terminal of the relay RL1. , Is electrically connected to one end of the thermistor TH1. The other end of the thermistor TH1 is electrically connected to the third (NO) terminal of the relay RL1, and is also electrically connected to one end of the choke coil L2. The other end of the choke coil L2 is electrically connected to the power factor improvement circuit 630d. Four terminals of the relay RL1 are grounded to ground (GND), and a first terminal of the relay RL1 is electrically connected to a relay drive circuit 630i described later. As a result, both ends of the thermistor TH1 are electrically connected between the terminals of the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1 (that is, between the contacts). The thermistor TH1 is of a type in which the resistance value decreases as the temperature rises. The characteristics of the thermistor TH1 are as follows. Therefore, a capacitor having a curve in which the value of the allowable capacitor becomes small and which is not destroyed even when a commercial power supply voltage of AC 100 V is applied is selected.

  The DC whose power factor has been improved by the power factor improving circuit 630d is input to the smoothing circuit 630e, input to the power generation circuit 630f, and also input to the relay driving circuit 630i. When the DC from the smoothing circuit 630e is input, the relay drive circuit 630 generates an operating voltage (+24 V) that can operate the coil of the relay RL1, and supplies the operating voltage (+ 24V) to the first terminal of the relay RL1.

  The rectified DC output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c respectively is generated when the power switch 630a is turned ON due to insufficient power from the relay drive circuit 630i (relay drive circuit 630i). Since the coil of relay RL1 is not operating (because the power supply by + 24V from 630i is insufficient), relay RL1 cannot be turned on (that is, relay RL1 remains off). The second terminal (COM) and the third terminal of the relay RL1 are inputted to the power factor improving circuit 630d via the thermistor TH1 and the choke coil L2 without passing through the relay RL1 in a non-conductive state. You. Thus, the rectified DC output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c respectively flows toward the thermistor TH1 only, and when the DC starts to flow into the thermistor TH1, the resistance value Is high and a weak current flows through the load subsequent to the thermistor TH1, but when the temperature of the thermistor TH1 gradually increases due to the current flowing through the thermistor TH1, the resistance value of the thermistor TH1 decreases accordingly. Apply a strong current to the load.

  On the other hand, when the power switch 630a is turned on to switch from a state in which the coil of the relay RL1 does not operate to a state in which the coil of the relay RL1 operates by the power from the relay driving circuit 630i (by power supply at +24 V from the relay driving circuit 630i), the relay RL1 Is turned on, the terminal No. 2 (COM) and the terminal No. 3 of the relay RL1 are brought into conduction, and the rectified DC output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c, respectively. In addition to the thermistor TH1, the current is divided between the terminals of the relay RL1 between the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal (that is, between the contacts), and flows therethrough, and is input to the power factor correction circuit 630d via the choke coil L2. Is done. As a result, the rectified DC output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c respectively flows between the terminal (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1 (that is, between the contacts). ), The current to the thermistor TH1 decreases, the temperature of the thermistor TH1 decreases, and the resistance of the thermistor TH1 increases accordingly, so that the second (COM) terminal and the third terminal of the relay RL1 are connected. The current passing between the terminals (that is, between the contacts) increases.

  As described above, the thermistor TH1 is of a type in which the resistance value decreases as the temperature rises, and the rectified direct current output from the cathode terminals 2 of the Schottky barrier diodes D1 and D2 of the rectifier circuit 630c respectively. When the current flows to TH1, the temperature of the thermistor TH1 increases and the resistance value decreases, so that the current to the load subsequent to the thermistor TH1 increases. In other words, the current flowing through the choke coil L2 is limited until the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises. When this function is used, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the power outlet of 24 VAC, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine of the island equipment in the game hall, and the power supply of 100 VAC, which is the commercial power voltage higher than the 24 VAC, which is the power supply voltage for the gaming machine, is used. If the plug is erroneously inserted into the outlet, the circuit voltage applied to the surge absorber SA1 greatly exceeds the rated voltage (breakdown voltage) by the time the temperature of the thermistor TH1 rises, and a large current flows through the surge absorber SA1. The absorber SA1 is destroyed, and a short mode can be set.

  In such a state, when the power switch 630a is in the ON state, a large current flows through the fuse FUSE1 via the surge absorber SA1 in the short mode in the noise suppression circuit 630b, and the fuse FUSE1 is turned off. It will be blown. Further, when the fuse FUSE1 is blown while the surge absorber SA1 is in the short mode, a large current does not continue to flow through the surge absorber SA1. Therefore, the elements of the surge absorber SA1 scatter and the surge absorber SA1 is It can be prevented from being destroyed in the open mode. As a result, only the power supply board 630 is destroyed, and even if the power cord is erroneously plugged into a power outlet of 100 V AC which is a commercial power supply voltage, each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except the power supply board 630 is destroyed. This can be reliably prevented.

  In the configuration of the measure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the second embodiment, the AC-DET terminal for monitoring the power supply voltage in which the common mode noise is reduced by the choke coil L1 in the measure against the commercial power supply voltage according to the first embodiment. The circuit configuration does not become complicated because it is not necessary to provide a FUSE-GATE terminal for outputting a gate signal for a power supply destruction circuit and a CGND terminal for flowing a large current to the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2.

  In addition, the plug of the power cord is not inserted into the power outlet of 24 VAC, which is the power supply voltage for the game machine of the island equipment in the game hall, and is erroneously inserted into the power outlet of 100 VAC, which is the commercial power voltage higher than the power supply voltage of 24 VAC for the game machine. When the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g 'is broken by being inserted, the fuse FUSE1 is replaced with a fuse which has not been blown, and the plug of the power supply cord is replaced with the power supply voltage for the gaming machine in the island facility in the gaming hall. Even if it is plugged into a 24V AC power outlet, the surge absorber SA1 constituting the power supply destruction circuit 630g 'is already destroyed and the short mode is maintained, so the fuse replaced via the surge absorber SA1 A large current flows through FUSE1 and fuse FUSE1 So that the blown. That is, if the power supply board 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 forming the power supply destruction circuit 630g 'has already been destroyed is not replaced with a normal power supply board 630 in which the surge absorber SA1 forming the power supply destruction circuit 630g' is not destroyed, Even if the plug of the power cord is plugged into a power outlet of 24 VAC, which is a power supply voltage for a gaming machine in an island facility in a gaming hall, a game cannot be started.

  Incidentally, conventionally, a gaming machine provided with a power supply unit capable of creating various power supplies required for the gaming machine based on an external power supply supplied from outside the gaming machine has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-008221). In the official gazette (FIG. 2), when a person in charge of a service center of a game machine manufacturer instructs a staff member such as a clerk of a game hall to specify a specific part of the power supply means by telephone, the person in charge of the service center is instructed. In addition, there is a problem that it is difficult to specify a notable component among a plurality of components mounted on the power supply unit.

  Conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine including a power supply unit that creates various power supplies based on the power supply from the game island facilities and supplies the power to the board (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2014-083337 (paragraph [0038]). )). The game island facility converts a commercial AC power supply (AC 100 V) into a step-down gaming machine AC power supply (AC 24 V). However, if the power cord for supplying power from the island facilities to the gaming machine is inserted into the AC outlet of the commercial AC power supply instead of the AC outlet of the gaming machine AC power supply, the commercial AC power supply Because of the high voltage, abnormal power was output from the power supply means, and there was a risk that various substrates inside the gaming machine would be destroyed.

[10. Circuit of main control board, circuit of payout control board]
Next, the circuits and the like of the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 shown in FIG. 179 will be briefly described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 190 is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of a main control board, FIG. 191 is a schematic circuit diagram showing a circuit of a payout control board, and FIG. 192 is a perspective view illustrating an outline of wiring to a board treated as a main board. FIG. First, the power supply and input signals in the circuit of the main control board 1310 will be described, and the power supply and input signals in the circuit of the payout control board 633 and the wiring to the board treated as the main board will be described.

[10-1. Power supply and input signal in circuit of main control board]
Among the power supplies in the circuit of the main control board 1310, the control power supply of the main control MPU 1310a is supplied with DC + 5V from the power supply creation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply board 630 and is stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. The supplied backup power is supplied from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 as the main VBB.

  As shown in FIG. 190, first, the DC +5 V from the power supply generation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply board 630 is input to the main control filter circuit 1310h. The main control filter circuit 1310h mainly includes a main control three-terminal filter MIC0. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. The main control three-terminal filter MIC0 has its first terminal applied with +5 V DC from the power supply generating circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply board 630, its second terminal grounded to ground (GND), and its third terminal. DC + 5 V from which noise components have been removed is output from the terminal. The DC +5 V applied to the first terminal is first connected to the other end of the capacitor MC0 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), thereby first removing a ripple (AC component superposed on the voltage). Has been smoothed.

  The DC + 5V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC1 and the electrolytic capacitor MC2 (in this embodiment, the capacitance is 470 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). Ripple is further removed and smoothed by the connection. This smoothed DC +5 V is applied to a VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. In addition, when a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the game hall is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a after the momentary power failure occurs. The voltage is applied as DC +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms).

  One end of the VDD terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC3 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and the DC + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing the ripple. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  A VBB terminal, which is a power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor MC4, one end of which is connected to ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the plus terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the backup power supply circuit 630h on the substrate 630. Accordingly, the main VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 is applied to the VBB terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a via the resistor MR0.

  Among the input signals in the circuit of the main control board 1310, for example, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2506, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403, and a detection from the general winning opening sensor 2401. The signal, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the like are input to the main control input circuit 1310b via the panel relay board 1710, and the first start-up. The detection signal from the mouth sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402 are directly input to the main control input circuit 1310b without passing through the panel relay board 1710.

  A detection signal from the gate sensor 2506, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, a detection signal from the first starting opening sensor 3002, a detection signal from the second starting opening sensor 2402, a detection signal from the big winning opening sensor 2403, The detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 2401 and the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003 are input to the input terminals PA0 to PA6 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, respectively. The input port PA is composed of 8 bits, and the input terminal PA7 is an empty terminal. The input terminal PA7, which is an empty terminal, is grounded to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, there are four general winning ports 2001, and the general winning port sensors 3001 detect the game balls B received in the three general winning ports 2001 included in the side unit 2200, respectively. Are input to the input terminal PA1 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the game ball B received in one general winning opening 2001 included in the attacker unit 2400 is detected. The detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 2401 is input to the input terminal PB5 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  Further, in the present embodiment, as described above, the first starting port sensor 3002 is constituted by two sensors (double sensors) of the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the first starting port sensor sub-side 3002b. I have. The detection signal from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (that is, directly connected to the main control board 1310), whereas the first starting port sensor The detection signal from the slave side 3002b is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 (that is, indirectly electrically connected). The detection signal from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a is input to the input terminal PA2 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the first starting port sensor sub side 3002b. Is input to the input terminal PB2 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  An operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is input to the input terminal PB0 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b. This input port PB is composed of 8 bits, like the input port PA. Although not shown, a power failure notification signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e is input to the input terminal PB1 of the input port PB, and detection signals from other sensors are also supplied to the input port PB via the main control input circuit 1310b. The input terminals that are input to the respective predetermined input terminals and become vacant terminals are grounded to ground (GND) as vacant terminal processing, similarly to the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA.

[10-2. Power supply and input signal in circuit of payout control board]
Among the power supplies in the circuit of the payout control board 633, the control power supply of the payout control MPU 633aa is supplied with +5 V DC from the power supply creation circuit 630f (630f ′) of the power supply board 630 and is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa. The supplied backup power is supplied from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 as the power supply VBB.

  As shown in FIG. 191, the direct current +5 V from the power supply creation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply board 630 is first input to the payout control filter circuit 633h. The payout control filter circuit 633h mainly includes a payout control three-terminal filter PIC0. The dispensing control three-terminal filter PIC0 is a T-type filter circuit and has excellent attenuation characteristics magnetically shielded with ferrite. In the payout control three-terminal filter PIC0, +5 V DC from the power supply generation circuit 630f (630f ') of the power supply board 630 is applied to the first terminal, and the second terminal is grounded to the ground (GND). DC + 5 V from which noise components have been removed is output from the terminal. The DC + 5V applied to the first terminal is first connected to the other end of the capacitor PC0, which is grounded to the ground (GND), so that the ripple (AC component multiplied by the voltage) is first removed. Has been smoothed.

  The DC + 5V output from the third terminal is electrically connected to the other ends of the capacitor PC1 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 (in this embodiment, capacitance: 180 microfarads (μF)), one end of which is grounded to the ground (GND). Ripple is further removed and smoothed by the connection. The smoothed DC +5 V is applied to a VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa. In addition, when a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the game hall is cut off, the electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor PC2 is applied to the VDD terminal which is a power supply terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa after the momentary power failure occurs. The voltage is applied as DC +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms). The power consumption of the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the main control MPU 1310a provided in the main control board 1310 is the control voltage (DC + 5V) supplied to the payout control MPU 633aa provided in the payout control unit 633a of the payout control board 633. Of the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310 (the capacitance: 470 microfarads (μF) in the present embodiment) is larger than that of the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633. In the embodiment, a value larger than the capacitance (180 microfarads (μF)) is selected. Thereby, the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 are connected to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 of the main control board 1310 and the electrolytic capacitor PC2 of the payout control board 633 when a momentary power failure occurs and the power supply from the game hall is cut off. Each of the charged electric charges is applied as DC +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after the momentary power failure occurs.

  One end of the VDD terminal of the dispensing control MPU 633aa is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC3 whose one end is grounded to the ground (GND), and the DC + 5V applied to the VDD terminal is smoothed by further removing the ripple. The VSS terminal, which is the ground terminal of the payout control MPU 633aa, is grounded to the ground (GND).

  The VBB terminal, which is a power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa, is electrically connected to the other end of the capacitor PC4 whose one end is connected to the ground (GND). It is electrically connected to the plus terminal of the capacitor BC0 of the backup power supply circuit 630h on the substrate 630. Thus, the payout VBB from the backup power supply circuit 630h of the power supply board 630 is applied to the VBB terminal which is the power supply terminal of the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa via the resistor PR0.

  Among the input signals in the circuit of the payout control board 633, for example, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 194, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, and a signal from the payment detection sensor 591 The detection signal and the RAM clear signal from the main control board 1310 are input to the payout control input circuit 633ab.

  The detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 194, the detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, and the RAM clear signal from the main control board 1310 are: The signals are input to the input terminals PA0 to PA5 of the input port PA of the payout control MPU 633aa via the payout control input circuit 633ab. The input port PA is composed of 8 bits, and the input terminals PA6 and PA7 are empty terminals. The input terminals PA6 and PA7, which are empty terminals, are grounded to the ground (GND) as an empty terminal process.

  A power failure notice signal from a power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input to an input terminal PB0 of an input port PB (not shown) via a payout control input circuit 633ab, and also a detection signal from another sensor. The input terminals which are respectively input to the predetermined input terminals of the input port PB via the payout control input circuit 633ab and become the vacant terminals are the same as the input terminals PA6 and PA7 of the input port PA, and the vacant terminals are ground ( GND).

[10-3. Wiring to board treated as main board]
The board handled as the main board includes a power supply board 630, a main control board 1310, a payout control board 633, and the like. If the wiring to the board treated as the main board is fraudulently altered, the operation of the board treated as the main board will be uneasy and a large amount of game balls will be paid out as prize balls, and the illegal game balls will be illegally When the wiring to each of these boards is illegally modified, it is necessary to find the modified wiring at an early stage because there is a possibility of being obtained by an actor.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 192 (a), the wiring to the power supply board 630 includes a connector SHG (not shown, but the connector SHG includes a manufacturer name and a product number (a number described in a catalog). The name of the manufacturer of the wiring and the product number (the number listed in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as an unauthorized identifier on the covering portion of each wiring connected to ()). More specifically, for example, the connector SHG is a connector having a total of 22 pins from a first pin to a 22nd pin, and the first pin has a manufacturer name: XXX as an unauthorized identifier SLAB on a covering portion of the wiring SCBL1. And the product number: ABC123 (a number published in the catalog) are repeatedly printed, and the second pin has the manufacturer name: XXX as the fraudulent identifier SLAB on the covering portion of the wiring SCBL2, and the product number: ABC123 (the number published in the catalog) Is repeatedly printed. The length of the wiring to the power supply board 630 must be at least as large as the manufacturer's name: XXX and the product number: ABC123 (the number listed in the catalog) as the fraudulent identifier SLAB in the wiring's coating. Has the length in which the fraudulent identifier SLAB is repeatedly printed twice.

  Note that the covering portion of the wiring SCBL1 connected to the first pin is white, and is a color (for example, black) that is easily visible with respect to the color of the covering portion, and is a fraudulent identifier SLAB as a manufacturer name: XXX, and a product number: ABC123 (the number published in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the covering portions of the wirings SCBL2 to SCBL22 connected to other pins may be of another color (monochrome (for example, red or gray) different from white, or a plurality of colors. (E.g., red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.), or a color that is easily visible with respect to the color of the covering portion (e.g., a single color or a plurality of colors). ), The manufacturer name: XXX and the product number: ABC123 (the number published in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as the fraudulent identifier SLAB.

  As shown in FIG. 192 (b), wiring to the main control board 1310 is connected to a connector MHG (not shown, but the connector MHG has a manufacturer name and a product number (a number described in a catalog)). On the covering portion of each wiring, the name of the wiring manufacturer and the product number (the number published in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as an unauthorized identifier. Specifically, for example, the connector MHG is a connector having a total of 30 pins from a first pin to a thirty pin, and the first pin has a manufacturer name: YYYYY as a fraudulent identifier MLAB on a covering portion of the wiring MCBL1. And the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number published in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and on the second pin, the manufacturer name: YYYYY as the fraudulent identifier MLAB on the covering portion of the wiring MCBL2, and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (posted in the catalog) Number is repeatedly printed. The length of the wiring to the main control board 1310 should be at least as long as the manufacturer name: YYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number listed in the catalog) can be confirmed as an unauthorized identifier MLAB in the covering portion of the wiring. Has the length in which the unauthorized identifier MLAB is repeatedly printed twice.

  The covering portion of the wiring MCBL1 connected to the first pin is white, and the color of the covering portion is easily visible (for example, black), and the manufacturer name: YYYYY, and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (a number listed in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the covering portions of the wirings MCBL2 to MCBL30 connected to other pins may be of another color (monochrome (for example, red or gray) different from white. Or a plurality of colors (for example, red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.) may be used, and a color that is easily visible to the color of the covering portion (for example, a single color or a plurality of colors) ), And the manufacturer name: YYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (a number listed in a catalog) are repeatedly printed as an unauthorized identifier MLAB.

  As for the wiring to the payout control board 633, as shown in FIG. 192 (b), a connector HHG (not shown, the connector HHG is connected to a manufacturer name and a product number (a number published in a catalog)). On the covering portion of each wiring, the name of the wiring manufacturer and the product number (the number published in the catalog) are repeatedly printed as an unauthorized identifier. Specifically, for example, the connector HHG is a connector having a total of 30 pins from a first pin to a thirty pin, and the first pin has a manufacturer name: YYYYY as a fraudulent identifier HLAB on a covering portion of the wiring HCBL1. And the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number published in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the second pin has the manufacturer name: YYYYY as the fraudulent identifier HLAB on the covering portion of the wiring HCBL2, and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (published in the catalog) Number is repeatedly printed. The length of the wiring to the payout control board 633 should be at least as long as the manufacturer name: YYYYY and the product number: DEFXYZ-1 (the number listed in the catalog) can be confirmed as the fraudulent identifier HLAB on the covering portion of the wiring. Has the length in which the fraudulent identifier HLAB is repeatedly printed twice.

  The covering portion of the wiring HCBL1 connected to the first pin is white, and is a color (for example, black) that is easily visible with respect to the color of the covering portion, and is a fraudulent identifier HLAB as a manufacturer name: YYYYY; DEFXYZ-1 (the number published in the catalog) is repeatedly printed, and the covering portions of the wirings HCBL2 to HCBL30 connected to other pins may be of another color (monochrome (for example, red or gray) different from white. Or a plurality of colors (for example, red, yellow, blue, green, orange, pink, gray, black, etc.) may be used, and a color that is easily visible to the color of the covering portion (for example, a single color or a plurality of colors) ), A manufacturer name: YYYYY, and a product number: DEFXYZ-1 (a number published in a catalog) are repeatedly printed as an unauthorized identifier HLAB.

  In this way, even if the wiring to the board treated as the main board is illegally modified, the name of the manufacturer and the product number (the number published in the catalog) are repeatedly printed on the connector and the wiring connected to the connector. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to discovering the modified wiring at an early stage. In addition, as wiring to the board treated as the main board, wiring that is difficult to obtain is preferable even if it is listed in a catalog.

  In the present embodiment, two of the first starting port sensor main sides 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 for detecting the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 provided in the game board 5 are provided. The wiring and the two wirings from the second starting port sensor 2402 for detecting the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 provided on the game board 5 are respectively connected to the main control board via connectors (not shown). 1310 is directly electrically connected. On the other hand, the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 that detects the game ball B received in the first starting port 2002 provided in the game board 5 is provided on the game board 5. A gate sensor 2506 for detecting a game ball B passing through the gate portion 2003, a special winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting a game ball B received in a special winning opening 2005 provided in the game board 5, and a general winning provided in the game board 5 Two sensors from various sensors such as a general winning opening sensor 2401 and 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the mouth 2001 and a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting near the first starting port 2002 provided in the game board 5. Are electrically connected and aggregated in the panel relay board 1710 via respective connectors, and are also connected via one connector. , It is electrically connected to the main control board 1310.

  For this reason, the two wires from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the two wires from the second starting port sensor 2402 that constitute the first starting port sensor 3002 are erroneously transmitted to the main control board 1310. There is a risk of electrical connection. Therefore, in the present embodiment, one of the colors of the covering portions of the two wires from the first starting port sensor 3002 is yellow and the other is pink, and the covering portion of each wire is a Are repeatedly printed, respectively. One of the colors of the covering portions of the two wires from the second starting port sensor 2402 is white and the other is black. Are printed repeatedly. This allows the manufacturer to identify the two wires from the first starting port sensor 3002 and the two wires from the second starting port sensor 2402, respectively, at the manufacturer. In addition, in the gaming hall, a clerk such as a clerk of the gaming hall identifies the two wirings from the first starting port sensor 3002 and the two wirings from the second starting port sensor 2402, respectively. You can do it.

  Further, in the present embodiment, a connector having a 2.5 mm pitch as a connector for electrically connecting two wires from the first starting port sensor main side 3002 a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310. Is selected, and a connector having a 2.0 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting two wires from the second starting port sensor 2402 to the main control board 1310. Thus, two wires from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 and two wires from the second starting port sensor 2402 correspond to themselves. Since it is possible to have a physical structure that can be electrically connected, in the manufacturer, the worker of the line is required to perform the first starting port sensor 3002 constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 in the manufacturing process. It is possible to reliably prevent a work error (wiring error such as incorrect insertion) between two wires from the 3002a and two wires from the second starting port sensor 2402. A clerk such as a clerk of the game hall checks the first starting port sensor 3002 when confirming the presence or absence of impropriety, and when temporarily removing and returning the wiring by maintenance. An operation error (wiring error of incorrect insertion) between two wirings from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and two wirings from the second starting port sensor 2402 is reliably prevented. be able to.

  In the present embodiment, the general winning opening sensor 3001 for detecting the game balls B received in the three general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200 and the one general winning opening 2001 provided in the attacker unit 2400 are received. Connectors having the same shape are selected as connectors for electrically connecting two wires from the general winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B to the panel relay board 1710. In this embodiment, although there are four general winning openings 2001, even if a game ball enters any of the general winning openings 2001, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as prize balls with the entering ball. This is because it does not contribute to the progress of the game or the change of the production. Further, even when a configuration in which two wires from the general winning opening sensors 2401 and 3001 are directly electrically connected to the main control board 1310 without using the panel relay board 1710 is adopted, the general winning is achieved. Connectors having the same shape are selected as connectors for electrically connecting the two wires from the mouth sensors 2401 and 3001 to the main control board 1310. This is because, as described above, although there are four general prize holes 2001, no matter which general prize hole 2001 a game ball enters, a predetermined number of game balls are paid out as a prize ball with the entry. This is because it does not contribute to the progress of the game or the change of the production.

  Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with various entrances in an advantageous area of a game board and provided with each sensor (detection means) at each entrance to detect the passage of a game ball ( For example, JP-A-2006-154676 (paragraphs [0014] to [0016], FIGS. 2 to 4). However, if the wiring from the detection means passing through the entrance with similar application is erroneously electrically connected, there is no problem in terms of electrical specifications, so damage can be avoided, but the detection signal of the entrance is erroneously received It will affect the progress of the game. However, since the applications are particularly similar, there is a problem that the erroneous connection may not be immediately noticed in some cases.

[11. Decorative boards for door frame]
Next, each decorative board provided in the door frame 3 shown in FIG. 91 will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 193 to 197. FIG. 193 is a block diagram illustrating electrical connection of each decorative substrate provided on the door frame, FIG. 194 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a decorative substrate including one LED constant current drive circuit, and FIG. 195 is an LED. FIG. 196 is a block diagram illustrating an example of a decorative board including two constant current driving circuits. FIG. 196 is a schematic diagram illustrating a method of arranging the LED constant current driving circuits. FIG. Here, the electrical connection between each decorative board and the frame door sub relay board provided in the door frame 3 will be described, the outline of the LED constant current drive circuit, the decorative board including the LED constant current drive circuit, and the LED constant current. A method for arranging the driving circuits will be described.

  First, as described above, the door frame 3 surrounds the outer periphery of the door window 101a, so that the upper left decorative member 271, the upper right decorative member 276, the upper central decorative member 312a, the left side decorative door member 404, The side window decoration part 410b of the window decoration member 412, the door frame right side decoration body 419, and the door frame top decoration body 453 are arranged, respectively, and the plate upper left decoration body 271, the plate upper right decoration body 276, and the plate Below the upper center decoration 312a, a lower left dish 281, a lower right decoration 286, and a lower center decoration 312b are arranged, respectively.

  The upper left dish decoration 271 is provided with a left upper decoration board 273 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the upper left dish 271, and is mounted on the upper left decoration board 273 behind the upper left decoration 271. Light-emitting decoration is performed by a full-color LED (six in this embodiment). The dish upper right decorative body 276 has a dish upper right decorative board 278 formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending left and right along the dish upper right decorative body 276 behind the dish upper right decorative board 278. Light-emitting decoration is performed by a full-color LED (five in this embodiment). On the dish center upper decorative body 312a, a dish center upper decorative board 314 formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape is arranged along the dish center upper decorative body 312a, and the dish center upper decorative board is arranged. Light-emission decoration is performed by a plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on the 314.

  The door frame left side decorative body 404 is formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the door frame left side decorative body 404 behind the left side upper decorative board 402a and the left side lower decorative board 402b. And a plurality of full-color LEDs (in the present embodiment, left upper decorative board 402a in this embodiment) mounted on left upper decorative board 402a and left lower decorative board 402b. 5 and the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has 10). The side window interior decorative portion 410b is provided in a plurality of rows in the vertical direction of the side window interior decorative member 412, and a rear side thereof is formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the side window interior decorative member 412. The decorative portion decorative board 413 in the window is arranged, and the light emitting decoration is performed by a plurality of full-color LEDs (12 in this embodiment) mounted on the decorative portion decorative substrate 413 in the side window. The door frame right side decorative body 419 is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically along the door frame right side decorative body 419 on the rear side thereof. The upper right side decorative board 418a and the lower right side decorative board 418b are formed. A full-color LED (in the present embodiment, the upper right side decorative substrate 418a is mounted on the right side upper decorative substrate 418a and the lower right side decorative substrate 418b). , And the right side lower decorative substrate 418b has 10).

  The door frame top decorative body 453 is provided with a door frame top central decorative board 455 formed in an elongated band shape extending left and right along the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453 at the rear thereof. A door frame top left decorative substrate 456 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the left side portion of the top decorative body 453 is arranged, and extends left and right along the right side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. And a door frame top right decorative substrate 455, a door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and a door frame top right decorative substrate 457, respectively. Light-emitting decoration by full-color LEDs (in this embodiment, 11 on the door frame top center decorative board 455, 7 on the door frame top left decorative board 456, and 6 on the door frame top right decorative board 457) It is.

  In the lower left dish decoration 281, a lower left dish decoration board 283 formed in an elongated band shape extending left and right along the lower left dish decoration 281 is arranged behind the decoration 281. Light-emitting decoration is performed by a full-color LED (six in this embodiment). The lower right decorative plate 288 is disposed behind the lower right decorative substrate 288 formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the lower right decorative body 286. The light-emitting decoration is performed by a plurality of full-color LEDs (six in the present embodiment) mounted on the LCD. The dish center lower decorative body 312b is provided with a dish center lower decorative board 316 formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape along the dish center lower decorative body 312b behind the dish center lower decorative board. Light-emission decoration is performed by a plurality of full-color LEDs (10 in this embodiment) mounted on the 316.

  The effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 69 provided on the plate unit 200 in the door frame 3 includes the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 formed in a form in which the ring is divided into front and rear as described above, The effect operation ring decorative substrate 352 includes a front decorative substrate 352a formed in an elongated strip shape having a front semi-circular shape, and a rear decorative substrate 352b formed in an elongated strip shape having a rear semi-circular shape. , Is composed of. The rotation operation unit 302 of the rendering operation unit 300 shown in FIG. 69 includes a plurality of full-color LEDs (nine in the present embodiment) mounted on the front decoration board 352a and a plurality of full-color LEDs (9 in this embodiment) mounted on the rear decoration board 352b. In the present embodiment, nine) are illuminated and decorated.

  As described above, each decorative substrate provided in the door frame 3 is formed in an elongated strip shape. Thus, by increasing the distance dimension in the vertical and horizontal directions of the game board 5, a plurality of movable bodies, decorative members, display devices, and the like can be provided on the game board 5 shown in FIG. A body, a large display device, or the like can also be provided.

[11-1. Electrical connection between each decorative board and frame door sub relay board]
Plate upper left decorative substrate 273, plate upper right decorative substrate 278, plate center upper decorative substrate 314, left side upper decorative substrate 402a, left side lower decorative substrate 402b, side disposed on various decorative bodies and decorative portions provided in door frame 3 Decorative part inside window decorative board 413, upper right side decorative board 418a, lower right side decorative board 418b, door frame top center decorative board 455, door frame top left decorative board 456, door frame top right decorative board 457, dish lower left decorative board 283, the lower right decorative plate 288, the lower central decorative plate 316, the front decorative substrate 352a, the rear decorative substrate 352b, etc., and the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 shown in FIG. The electrical connection with the provided door frame sub-relay board 105 will be briefly described with reference to FIG.

  The door frame sub relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is connected to the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 174 via the interface board 635 provided in the main frame 4 shown in FIG. The light emission data SDAT1 and the clock signal SCLK1, which are the first serial system on the door frame side, and the light emission data SDAT2 and the clock signal SCLK2, which are the second serial system on the door frame side, are input independently from each other. I have. The door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the + 12V power line of the power board 630 shown in FIG. 183 via the interface board 635 to input DC + 12V and to connect the ground ( (GND) line and electrically grounded to ground (GND).

[11-1-1. Door frame side first serial system]
The first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub-relay board 105 are the plate unit relay of the plate unit 200 shown in FIG. The signal is input to the board 214 and is input to the handle decoration board 184 of the handle unit 180 shown in FIG.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the plate unit relay board 214 are the lower left decorative board 283, the lower right decorative board 288, 70 are input to the operation unit relay board 392 of the effect operation unit 300 shown in FIG.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the lower left dish plate 283 are input to the upper left decor substrate 273, respectively. That is, the lower left dish plate 283 serves as a bridge board that transmits the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the upper left dish plate 273. The decorative substrate 283 and the upper left decorative substrate 273 are electrically connected in a rosary. The first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) from the plate unit relay board 214 are input to the lower left decorative board 283 serving as a bridge board. And an unshown input connector for outputting the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the upper left plate 273. An output connector is provided. On the other hand, the upper left decorative plate 283 electrically connected to the lower left decorative substrate 283 (that is, the lower stage decorative substrate 283 is the rear stage and the last stage) is illustrated by the lower left decorative substrate 283. Only the input connector (not shown) to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from the output connectors, are input. .

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the lower right plate decorative substrate 288 are input to the upper right plate decorative plate 278, respectively. That is, the lower right decorative board 288 serves as a bridge board that transmits the first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the upper right decorative board 278 on the door frame side. The lower right decorative substrate 288 and the dish upper right decorative substrate 278 are electrically connected in a rosary. The first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) from the plate unit relay board 214 are input to the lower right decorative board 288 serving as a bridge board. An input connector (not shown) is provided, and a door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are output to the dish upper right decorative board 278, respectively. No output connector is provided. On the other hand, the upper right decorative plate 278 electrically connected to the lower right decorative substrate 288 (that is, the lower right decorative substrate 288 which is a stage subsequent to the lower right decorative substrate 288) is a lower right decorative substrate. Only the input connector (not shown) to receive the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) which are respectively output from the output connectors 288 (not shown) are provided. ing.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the operation unit relay board 392 of the rendering operation unit 300 are provided on the plate center decoration board 314 and the plate. The information is input to the lower center decorative substrate 316 and the front decorative substrate 352a of the effect operation ring decorative substrate 352, respectively.

  The door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the front decorative board 352a are input to the rear decorative board 352b. In other words, the front decorative board 352a serves as a bridge board that transmits the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the rear decorative board 352b. And the rear decoration substrate 352b are electrically connected in a rosary. On the pre-decoration board 352a serving as a bridge board, the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) from the operation unit relay board 392 of the staging operation unit 300 are respectively provided. An input connector (not shown) for inputting is provided, and the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are output to the rear decoration board 352b. (Not shown) is provided. On the other hand, an output connector (not shown) of the front decorative substrate 352a is provided on the rear decorative substrate 352b electrically connected to the front decorative substrate 352a in a daisy chain (that is, a rear stage and a final stage after the front decorative substrate 352a). Only the input connector (not shown) to which the first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND), respectively, which are respectively output from the door frame are provided.

  Here, for example, the lower left decorative board 283 to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) are input from the dish unit relay board 214 will be briefly described. The lower left decorative plate 283 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 283a, a heat distribution circuit 283c, and six full-color LEDs, sdLED1 to sdLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 283a is a sink (sink) type constant current drive circuit 283x that can supply a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6, and a maximum current setting that can set the maximum current of the current flowing to the sdLED1 to sdLED6. And a circuit 283y. The constant current drive circuit 283x performs control to supply a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the plate unit relay board 214. As described above, since the constant current drive circuit 283x is a sink (sink) type, it generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 283x can be distributed by part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 283x by the heat distribution circuit 283c.

  Also, for example, the upper left decorative board 273 to which the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) from the lower left dish decorative board 283 are input will be briefly described. The upper left decorative board 273 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 273a, a heat distribution circuit 273c, and six full color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6. The LED constant current drive circuit 273a is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left decorative board 283, and is a sink (sink) type constant current drive circuit 273x that can supply a constant current to the suLED1 to suLED6. , And a maximum current setting circuit 273y that can set the maximum current of the current flowing through the suLED1 to the suLED6. The constant current drive circuit 273x controls the supply of a constant current to the suLED1 to suLED6 based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1 and clock signal SCLK1) from the lower left decorative board 283. As described above, the constant current drive circuit 273x is a sink (sink) type, and generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through the suLED1 to the suLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 273x is handled by the heat distribution circuit 273c, so that the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 273x can be dispersed.

[11-1-2. Door frame side second serial system]
The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame sub-relay board 105 are the lower left side decoration of the door frame left side decoration board 402. While being input to the substrate 402b, the decorative portion decorative substrate 413 in the side window, the lower right decorative substrate 418b of the door frame right side decorative substrate 418, and the door frame top relay substrate 467 of the door frame top unit 450 shown in FIG. Are entered respectively.

  DC + 12V and ground (GND) input to the lower left side decorative substrate 402b of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402 are input to the upper left side decorative substrate 402a of the door frame left side decorative substrate 402. The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450 are the door frame top right decorative board. 457.

  The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top right decorative board 457 are input to the door frame top center decorative board 455, respectively. ing. That is, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is a bridge substrate that transmits the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top central decorative substrate 455. Thus, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 and the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 are electrically connected in a daisy chain. The door frame top right decorative board 457 serving as a bridge board includes a door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame top relay board 467 of the door frame top unit 450, DC + 12V, and ground. (GND) is provided, and an input connector (not shown) is provided. The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) are connected to the top center of the door frame. An output connector (not shown) for outputting to the decorative board 455 is provided. The door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is electrically connected to the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 (that is, the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 is provided after the door frame top right decorative substrate 457). And an input connector (not shown) to which the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from the output connectors, are provided. An output connector (not shown) for outputting the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC +12 V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 is provided. .

  The door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) input to the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 are input to the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, respectively. ing. In other words, the door frame top center decorative board 455 becomes a bridge board that transmits the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) to the door frame top left decorative board 456. Thus, the door frame top center decorative substrate 455 and the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 are in a state of being electrically connected in a rosary. On the other hand, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456 that is electrically connected to the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 in a daisy chain (that is, is a stage after the door frame top central decorative substrate 455 and the final stage) has a door. Door frame-side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND), which are respectively output from an output connector (not shown) of the frame top center decorative board 455, are respectively input. Only the connector for the device is provided.

  Here, for example, the door frame left side decorative board 402 to which the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) from the door frame sub relay board 105 are input. The lower left lower decorative substrate 402b will be briefly described. The lower left lower decorative substrate 402b includes two LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, a heat distribution circuit 402bc, and ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. .

  The LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left decorative board 283 and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the upper left decorative board 273. And a maximum current setting circuit 402bay that can set the maximum current flowing through the hdLED1 to the hdLED8. The constant current drive circuit 402bax supplies a constant current to eight full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub relay board 105. Perform control.

  The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left decorative board 283, and the LED constant current drive circuit 273a of the upper left decorative board 273. The sink (sink) type constant current drive circuit 402bbx, which allows a constant current to flow through the hdLED10 and the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the upper left side decorative board 402a, and the hdLED9, hdLED10, and left And a maximum current setting circuit 402bby that can set the maximum current of the current flowing through huLED1 to huLED5 of the upper side decorative substrate 402a. The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) from the door frame sub-relay board 105, and is used to mount the substrate (left side lower decorative board 402b). Control is performed to supply a constant current to the hdLED9, hdLED10, and huLED1 to huLED5 of the upper left side decorative substrate 402a.

  As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is a sink (sink) type, and generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through huLED1 to huLED8. As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a sink (sink) type, and generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through the hdLED9, hdLED10, and huLED1 to huLED5. Therefore, the heat generation of the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be dispersed by taking part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax by the heat distribution circuit 402bc. Further, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be distributed by the heat distribution circuit 402bc and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the upper left decorative substrate 402a. ing.

  As described above, part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax can be dissipated by only the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the board (the lower left decorative board 402b) on which the constant current drive circuit 402bax is mounted. On the other hand, a part of the heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx becomes a subsequent substrate in addition to the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the board on which the constant current drive circuit 402bbx is mounted (the lower left side decorative board 402b). Heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be dispersed by the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the upper left decorative board 402a.

  The constant current drive circuit 402bbx is configured to pass a constant current to huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left upper decorative board 402a, which is a succeeding substrate, across the board on which it is mounted (the lower left decorative board 402b). Have been. For this reason, an operation for electrically connecting the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b and the left-side upper decorative substrate 402a is always involved. The operator who performs this operation may use the finger of the connector of the lower left side decorative board 402b, the connector of the upper left side decorative board 402a, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the lower left side decorative board 402b, or the heat of the upper left side decorative board 402a. In order to touch the distribution circuit 402ac, it is necessary to prevent the lower left decorative board 402b and the upper left decorative board 402a from being damaged by static electricity. Therefore, the heat dissipating circuit 402bc of the lower left decorative board 402b and the heat dispersing circuit 402ac of the upper left decorative board 402a have the function of dispersing the heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx, It also has a function that can prevent electronic components from being damaged.

  As described above, the upper left decorative board 402a receives the DC + 12V and the ground (GND) from the lower left lower decorative board 402b, and also has five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. Lines through which current flows are input. As described above, the upper left side decorative substrate 402a includes the heat dispersion circuit 402ac in addition to the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5. As described above, the heat distribution circuit 402ac has a function of dispersing heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bbx and a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

[11-1-3. Light emission data]
Here, the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 will be briefly described. The light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 are data for designating a light emission mode, and include ID information and floor information. Key information. The ID information is information indicating which one of the LED constant current drive circuits to be designated among the LED constant current drive circuits provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation is designated from gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127.

[11-2. Overview of LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, an outline of the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIG. In the present embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is the same circuit. Therefore, here, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a provided on the dish left lower decorative board 283 will be described. As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a sets a sink (sink) type constant current drive circuit 283x capable of flowing a constant current to the sdLED1 to sdLED6, and sets the maximum current of the current flowing to the sdLED1 to sdLED6. And a maximum current setting circuit 283y.

[11-2-1. Constant current drive circuit]
The constant current drive circuit has 24 output channels, and can output a current for each channel. In this embodiment, an output channel LR is provided for an LED element emitting red (R), an LED element emitting green (G), and an LED element emitting blue (B), which constitute one full-color LED. , LG, and LB are individually controlled to use three output channels. That is, in the present embodiment, the light emission mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 for a maximum of eight full-color LEDs with one constant current drive circuit. Is available.

  The constant current driving circuit 283x includes a linear power supply 283xa, a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current driving unit 283xi. It is mainly composed.

[11-2-1a. Linear power supply]
The linear power supply 283xa is a circuit capable of receiving an input of +12 V DC from a +12 V power supply line and creating and supplying an internal power supply Vreg (in this embodiment, +5 V DC) used in the constant current drive circuit 283x. The internal power supply Vreg generated by the linear power supply 283xa includes a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current driving unit. 283xi, and a reset unit 283xb, a data line buffer 283xc, a clock line buffer 283xd, an address setting unit 283xe, an oscillator 283xf, a logic processing unit 283xg, a PWM unit 283xh, and a constant current driving unit 283xi. Is supposed to work.

  The constant current drive circuit 283x is not electrically connected to the + 5V power supply line of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 183, and independently generates + DC 5V as the internal power supply Vreg and uses it in the constant current drive circuit 283x. I have. This is because, when a + 5V power line from the power supply board 630 is used, the + 5V power line is used by routing electric wiring, so that the length of the + 5V power line that supplies DC + 5V is increased, and noise is reduced. Easy to invade. Then, when the external noise is transmitted to the + 5V power supply line and DC + 5V is input to the constant current drive circuit 283x, there is a possibility that the LED may flicker due to the external noise. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the + 5V power supply line from the power supply board 630 is not required for the constant current drive circuit 283x, so that the + 12V power supply line to the constant current drive circuit 283x having extremely high noise resistance compared to the + 5V power supply line. In the linear power supply 283xa, a configuration in which DC + 5V is independently created as the internal power supply Vreg is adopted.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the external noise is transmitted to the internal power supply Vreg by using the internal power supply Vreg only in the constant current drive circuit 283x without outputting the internal power supply Vreg from the constant current drive circuit 283x to another substrate. Since it can be made difficult, the internal power supply Vreg can be stabilized. This stabilizes the internal power supply Vreg, thereby contributing to preventing flickering of the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 due to external noise. Therefore, it is possible to increase the resistance to external noise. In addition, the input electric wiring and the external transmission electric wiring for the + 5V power supply line are not required, which can contribute to downsizing of the connector.

[11-2-1b. Reset section]
The reset unit 283xb generates an internal reset signal RST based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa, outputs the signal to the constant current drive circuit 283x, initializes the constant current drive circuit 283x, and operates the constant current drive circuit 283x. It is a so-called power-on reset circuit that can be started. The internal reset signal RST output from the reset unit 283xb is input to the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current driving unit 283xi. Then, the data line buffer 283xc, the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current driving unit 283xi are initialized, and the data line buffer 283xc, The operation of the clock line buffer 283xd, the address setting unit 283xe, the oscillator 283xf, the logic processing unit 283xg, the PWM unit 283xh, and the constant current driving unit 283xi starts.

  The constant current drive circuit 283x receives, for example, a reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 shown in FIG. 174, and independently generates a reset signal as the internal reset signal RST and uses the internal reset signal RST in the constant current drive circuit 283x. I have. For example, when a line for transmitting a reset signal from the peripheral control board 1510 (hereinafter, referred to as a “reset signal transmission line”) is used, the reset signal transmission line may be used by routing electric wiring. Therefore, the length of the reset signal transmission line for transmitting the reset signal becomes longer, so that noise easily enters. Then, when the external noise is transmitted to the reset signal transmission line and the reset signal is input to the constant current driving circuit 283x, the constant current driving circuit 283x is reset by the influence of the external noise and the LED may be turned off. Thus, in the present embodiment, a configuration is adopted in which the reset signal transmission line is not required for the constant current drive circuit 283x, and the reset unit 283xb of the constant current drive circuit 283x independently generates a reset signal as the internal reset signal RST. did.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the reset signal is not input from the external substrate, and the internal reset signal RST is not output from the constant current driving circuit 283x to another substrate, and only in the constant current driving circuit 283x. By using this, external noise can be made difficult to be transmitted to the internal reset signal RST, so that the internal reset signal RST can be stabilized. Thus, the internal reset signal RST is stabilized (that is, the initialization of the constant current drive circuit 283x is stabilized), so that the constant current drive circuit 283x due to external noise is not reset, and the output channels LR1 to LR8, This can contribute to prevention of unexpected turning off and flickering of the LED elements constituting the full-color LED corresponding to LG1 to LG8 and LB1 to LB8. Therefore, it is possible to increase the resistance to external noise. In addition, the need for the input electric wiring and the external transmission electric wiring for the reset signal transmission line is eliminated, which can contribute to downsizing of the connector.

[11-2-1c. buffer]
The data line buffer 283xc is a line for transmitting serial data (here, the light emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) from outside the constant current drive circuit 283x (hereinafter, referred to as a “data line”). Is a circuit capable of shaping the waveform of a signal to which serial data is input and transmitting the serial data and outputting the waveform to the logic processing unit 283xg and the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x. The clock line buffer 283xd transmits a clock signal (here, the clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) from outside the constant current drive circuit 283x (hereinafter, referred to as a "clock line"). Is a circuit capable of receiving a clock signal, shaping the waveform of the clock signal, and outputting the waveform to the logic processing unit 283xg and the outside of the constant current drive circuit 283x.

  As described above, the data line and the clock line are transmitted across a plurality of boards and relay boards. For this reason, the lengths of both the data line and the clock line are increased, so that noise easily enters. Therefore, in the present embodiment, by providing the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd in the constant current drive circuit 283x, noise that has entered the data line or the clock line immediately before being input to the constant current drive circuit 283x is provided. In such a manner that the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd shape the waveforms so that the signal is not transmitted to the logic processing unit 283xg and the subsequent substrate.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, even when both the data line and the clock line are long, it is possible to form the data line and the clock line that are resistant to noise. As a result, signal transmission resistant to noise can be realized. Therefore, it is possible to increase the resistance to external noise.

[11-2-1d. Address setting section]
The address setting unit 283xe sets 64 addresses as IDs (IDs that can identify an individual) of the constant current drive circuit 283x based on the internal power supply Vreg from the linear power supply 283xa using three ID resistors (not shown). You can do it.

  As described above, in the present embodiment, the ID that can identify the individual of the constant current drive circuit 283x is set in advance by the address setting unit 283xe by a hardware configuration of three ID resistors (not shown). It is not set appropriately by receiving data by software.

[11-2-1e. Oscillator, logic processing unit]
The logic processing unit 283xg outputs serial data from the outside of the constant current driving circuit 283x (here, the light emission data SDAT1 of the door frame side first serial system) shaped in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd. The shaped clock signal (here, the clock signal SCLK1 of the door frame side first serial system) from outside the constant current drive circuit 283x is input. The logic processing unit 283xg includes its own ID in the ID information of the serial data (light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) based on the address which is its own ID set by the address setting unit 283xe. In some cases, the gradation information is fetched from the serial data, and the gradation of the output channel is set in the PWM unit 283xh based on the signal (control clock signal) from the oscillator 283xf so that the gradation information becomes the fetched gradation information. On the other hand, when the ID information of the serial data (light emission data SDAT1 of the first serial system on the door frame side) does not include its own ID, the gradation information in the serial data is not taken in and set in the PWM unit 283xh. Control to maintain the current content.

[11-2-1f. PWM section]
The PWM unit 283xh can control the brightness (gradation) of the LED in each output channel from off to lighting (maximum luminance) in a total of 128 levels from 0 (zero) to 127. That is, gradation is controlled by one PWM gradation control unit (not shown) for one output channel. That is, the PWM unit 283xh individually includes the PWM gradation control units 1 to 24 corresponding to the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 (that is, 24 PWM gradation control units). ing. When the gradation is set, each of the PWM gradation control units 1 to 24 controls the constant current driving unit 283xi so that a current having the set gradation is passed.

[11-2-1 g. Constant current driver]
The constant current driver 283 xi is provided with one constant (not shown) for one output channel so that the gradation is set to the PWM gradation controller 1 to the PWM gradation controller 24 provided in the above-described PWM unit 283 xh. The current driver allows a constant current to flow through the LED elements constituting the full-color LED. That is, the constant current driver 283xi includes the constant current drivers 1 to 24 individually (that is, 24 constant current drivers) corresponding to the PWM gradation controllers 1 to 24.

  The constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 include one end of a resistor Rr for setting a maximum current flowing through a red (R) light emitting LED element constituting a full color LED in eight output channels LR1 to LR8. It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to ground (GND). The constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 include one end of a resistor Rg for setting a maximum current flowing through a green (G) light emitting LED element forming a full color LED in eight output channels LG1 to LG8. It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to ground (GND). The constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 have one end of a resistor Rb for setting the maximum current flowing through the blue (B) light-emitting LED element constituting a full-color LED in eight output channels LB1 to LB8. It is electrically connected and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded to ground (GND).

  The anode terminal of the red (R) LED element, the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element, and the blue (B) LED element that constitute the full-color LEDs corresponding to the constant current drivers 1 to 24, respectively. The anode terminal is electrically connected to a + 12V power supply line, and receives a direct current of + 12V.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs respectively corresponding to the constant current drivers 1 to 8 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR8 (that is, the constant current drivers) via the corresponding heat spreading resistors. 1 to a constant current driver 8) so that a constant current flowing through a red (R) LED element constituting a full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8, respectively. Has become. The cathode terminals of the green (g) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs respectively corresponding to the constant current drivers 9 to 16 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG8 (that is, the constant current drivers) via the corresponding heat dispersion resistors. 9 to the constant current driver 16), so that a constant current flowing through the green (G) LED element constituting the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 side, respectively. ing. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs respectively corresponding to the constant current drivers 17 to 24 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB8 (that is, the constant current drivers) via the corresponding heat dispersion resistors. 17 to the constant current driver 24), so that a constant current flowing through the blue (B) LED element constituting the full-color LED can be sucked into the constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24, respectively. ing.

  The constant current driver 1 to the constant current driver 8 respectively draw constant currents flowing through the individually set red (R) LED elements forming the full-color LED, thereby forming the red (R) LED elements forming the full-color LED Can emit light. The constant current driver 9 to the constant current driver 16 respectively draw a constant current flowing through the individually set green (G) LED elements forming the full-color LED, and thereby the green (G) LED elements forming the full-color LED Can emit light. The constant current driver 17 to the constant current driver 24 respectively absorb the constant current flowing through the individually set full-color LED blue (B) LED elements, thereby forming the full-color LED blue (B) LED elements. Can emit light.

  As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit can perform dimming lighting by emitting 24 LED elements, that is, eight full-color LEDs with a individually set constant current. Thus, it is possible to perform turning off, lighting with one gradation, blinking with one gradation, and the like.

[11-2-2. Maximum current setting circuit]
The maximum current setting circuit includes the above-described resistor Rr for setting the maximum current flowing through the red (R) light-emitting LED element constituting the full-color LED in the eight output channels LR1 to LR8, and the output channels LG1 to LG8. A resistor Rg for setting the maximum current flowing through the LED element emitting green (G) constituting the full-color LED in eight output channels up to LG8, and a full-color LED in eight output channels LB1 to LB8. And a resistor Rb for setting the maximum current flowing through the LED element that emits blue (B) light.

  As described above, one end of the resistor Rr is electrically connected to the constant current drivers 1 to 8 provided in the constant current driver 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rr is grounded to the ground (GND). I have. As described above, one end of the resistor Rg is electrically connected to the constant current drivers 9 to 16 included in the constant current driver 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rg is grounded to the ground (GND). I have. As described above, one end of the resistor Rb is electrically connected to the constant current drivers 17 to 24 included in the constant current driver 283xi, and the other end of the resistor Rb is grounded to the ground (GND). I have.

[11-3. Decorative board with LED constant current drive circuit]
Next, a decorative substrate including an LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 194 and 195. Here, a decorative board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit will be described, and a decorative board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits will be described. The above-described LED constant current drive circuit provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3 is configured as the same circuit. For this reason, the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 described above are denoted by the same reference numerals in FIGS. 194 and 195 for convenience of description.

[11-3-1. Decorative board with one LED constant current drive circuit]
First, as a decorative board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, for example, as shown in FIG. 194, a dish lower left decorative board 283 includes an LED constant current drive circuit 283a, six full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6, A distribution circuit 283c is provided.

  The door frame sub-relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 via the interface board 635 provided in the main body frame 4 as described above. Light emission data SDAT1, which is the first serial system on the door frame side, and a clock signal SCLK1 are input. As described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line of the power supply board 630 via the interface board 635 to receive DC +12 V, and to ground the power supply board 630. (GND) line and grounded to ground (GND).

  As described above, the dish lower left decorative board 283 has the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1), DC + 12V, and ground (GND) of the dish unit 200 from the door frame sub-relay board 105. It is input via the plate unit relay board 214. The DC +12 V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a, and constitutes sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs, an anode terminal of a red (R) LED element, an anode terminal of a green (G) LED element, and It is also input to the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via the heat dispersion resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, respectively. Drivers 1 to 6) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a via the heat dispersion resistors sdRg1 to sdRg6, respectively. Driver 9 to constant current driver 14) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs sdLED1 to sdLED6 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current driving circuit 283a (the above-described constant current, The driver 17 to the constant current driver 22) are electrically connected. The output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a are not connected.

  When the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1 includes its own ID based on the door frame side first serial system (the light emission data SDAT1 and the clock signal SCLK1), the LED constant current drive circuit 283a starts the light emission data SDAT1. The gradation information is fetched, and the sdLED1 to sdLED6, which are full-color LEDs, are individually controlled and lighted so that the fetched gradation information is obtained.

  As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 283a is of a sink (sink) type, and generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through the sdLED1 to sdLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 283x) is covered by the heat dispersion resistors sdRr1 to sdRr6, sdRg1 to sdRg6, and sdRb1 to sdRb6 that constitute the heat dispersion circuit 283c. Thus, the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 283x) can be dispersed.

  Note that the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) from the door frame sub-relay board 105 is decorated on the upper left of the plate via the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (the above-described constant current drive circuit 283x). The DC +12 V and the ground (GND) are input to the board upper left decorative board 273 via the dish lower left decorative board 283 while being input to the board 273. This prevents the noise that has invaded the data line or the clock line immediately before being input to the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (the above-described constant current drive circuit 283x) from being transmitted to the subsequent upper left dish plate 273 serving as the subsequent substrate. The waveform can be shaped in the LED constant current drive circuit 283a (in the data line buffer 283xc and the clock line buffer 283xd provided in the above-described constant current drive circuit 283x).

  The DC +12 V is input to the LED constant current drive circuit 273a, and constitutes a full color LED, suLED1 to suLED6, an anode terminal of a red (R) LED element, an anode terminal of a green (G) LED element, and It is also input to the anode terminal of the blue (B) LED element.

  The cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LR1 to LR6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the heat dispersion resistors suRr1 to suRr6, respectively. Drivers 1 to 6) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements constituting the full color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the heat dispersion resistors suRg1 to suRg6, respectively. Driver 9 to constant current driver 14) are electrically connected. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are connected to the output channels LB1 to LB6 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a via the heat dispersion resistors suRb1 to suRb6, respectively. The driver 17 to the constant current driver 22) are electrically connected. Note that the output channels LR7, LR8, LG7, LG8, LB7, LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 273a are not connected.

  When the ID information of the light emission data SDAT1 includes its own ID based on the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1 and clock signal SCLK1), the LED constant current drive circuit 273a starts from this light emission data SDAT1. The gradation information is fetched, and the full-color LEDs suLED1 to suLED6 are individually controlled and lighted so that the fetched gradation information is obtained.

  As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 273a is a sink (sink) type, it generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through the suLED1 to the suLED6. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 273x) is covered by the heat dispersion resistors suRr1 to suRr6, suRg1 to suRg6, and suRb1 to suRb6, which constitute the heat dispersion circuit 273c. This makes it possible to disperse the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 273a (accurately, the constant current drive circuit 273x).

  In addition, as a decorative board provided with one LED constant current drive circuit, in addition to the lower left decorative board 283 and the upper left decorative board 273, a lower right decorative board 288, an upper right decorative board 278, and a top left decorative board 456 are provided. , And a door frame top right decorative board 457.

[11-3-2. Decorative board with two LED constant current drive circuits]
Next, as a decorative board provided with two LED constant current drive circuits, for example, as shown in FIG. 195, the lower left lower decorative board 402b is an LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, 402bb, and hdLED1 which is 10 full-color LEDs. To hdLED10 and a heat distribution circuit 402bc.

  The door frame sub-relay board 105 provided in the door frame base unit 100 of the door frame 3 is serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510 via the interface board 635 provided in the main body frame 4 as described above. Light emission data SDAT2 and a clock signal SCLK2, which are the second serial system on the door frame side, are input. As described above, the door frame sub-relay board 105 is electrically connected to the +12 V power supply line of the power supply board 630 via the interface board 635 to receive DC +12 V, and to ground the power supply board 630. (GND) line and grounded to ground (GND).

  As described above, the left side lower decorative board 402b receives the input of the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), direct current + 12V, and ground (GND) from the door frame sub relay board 105. I have. The DC + 12V is input to the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb, and constitutes the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. The anode terminal of the red (R) LED element and the anode terminal of the green (G) LED element. , And blue (B) LED elements.

  In the present embodiment, as described above, the emission mode is controlled by individually controlling the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 for a maximum of eight full-color LEDs with one constant current drive circuit. It can be controlled. For this reason, among the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the light emission mode is controlled by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba for the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8, and the remaining two LEDs are controlled. The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb controls the light emission mode for the hdLED9 and hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs. Further, the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is five full-color LEDs mounted on the upper left side decorative substrate 402a, which is a subsequent substrate across the substrate on which the LED itself is mounted (that is, the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b). The light emission mode of huLED1 to huLED5 is controlled.

  Of the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements forming the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to sdLED8 are the same as the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8, respectively. The heat dispersion resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8 are electrically connected to the output channels LR1 to LR8 (the above-described constant current drivers 1 to 8) of the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba, and the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are connected. The cathode terminals of the constituent green (G) LED elements are connected to the output channels LG1 to LG8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (the above-described constant current drivers 9 to 16) via the heat dispersion resistors hdRg1 to hdRg8, respectively. And electricity , And the cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements constituting the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are output channels LB1 to LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba via heat dispersion resistors hdRb1 to hdRb8, respectively. It is electrically connected to the constant current drivers 17 to 24 described above.

  Among ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the cathode terminals of the red (R) LED elements constituting the full-color LEDs hdLED9 and sdLED10 are different from the two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10, respectively. The heat-dissipation resistors hdRr9 and hdRr10 are electrically connected to the output channels LR1 and LR2 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (the constant current driver 1 and the constant current driver 2 described above). The cathode terminals of the constituent green (G) LED elements are connected to the output channels LG1 and LG2 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (the above-described constant current driver 9 and constant current driver 1) via heat dispersion resistors hdRg9 and hdRg10, respectively. ), And the cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that constitute the full color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are output channels of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via heat dispersion resistors hdRb9 and hdRb10, respectively. LB1 and LB2 (the constant current driver 17 and the constant current driver 18 described above) are electrically connected.

  Also, for the five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the left-side upper decorative substrate 402a, which is a substrate subsequent to the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, the red color configuring the full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 ( The cathode terminal of the LED element R) is connected to the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistances huRr1b to huRr5b on the upper left side decorative substrate 402a and the heat dispersion resistances huRr1a to huRr5a on the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b, respectively. The cathode terminals of the green (G) LED elements that are electrically connected to the output channels LR3 to LR7 (the constant current drivers 3 to 7 described above) and constitute the huLED1 to huLED5 that are full-color LEDs are respectively Decoration on left side The output channels LG3 to LG7 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (the constant current drivers 11 to constant current described above) via the heat dispersion resistances huRg1b to huRg5b on the plate 402a and the heat dispersion resistances huRg1a to huRg5a on the lower left decorative board 402b. The cathode terminals of the blue (B) LED elements that are electrically connected to the driver 15) and that constitute huLED1 to huLED5, which are full-color LEDs, are heat dissipating resistances huRb1b to huRb5b and left, respectively, on the upper left side decorative substrate 402a. Electrically connected to the output channels LB3 to LB7 (the above-described constant current drivers 19 to 23) of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb via the heat dispersion resistors huRb1a to huRb5a in the lower side decorative substrate 402b. To have. The output channels LR8, LG8, LB8 of the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb are not connected.

  When the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2 includes its own ID based on the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2), the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba starts the light emission data SDAT2. Gradation information is fetched, and among the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 are individually controlled and lighted so that the fetched gradation information is obtained. .

  The LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is a door frame side second serial system (light emission data) input via the data line buffer 402baxc and the clock line buffer 402baxd in the constant current drive circuit 402ba constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba. When the ID information of the light emission data SDAT2 includes its own ID based on the SDAT2 and the clock signal SCLK2), the gradation information is fetched from the light emission data SDAT2, and the gradation information is set so as to be the fetched gradation information. Of the two full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, the remaining two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 are individually controlled and turned on, and the left side, which is a substrate subsequent to the left-side lower decorative substrate 402b, is used. Upper decorative substrate 40 Is the five independent control huLED1~huLED5 a full-color LED of and turned dimming implemented in a.

  As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba is of a sink (sink) type, it generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through eight hdLED1 to hdLED8 among the ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. I do. Therefore, part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) is covered by the heat dispersion resistors hdRr1 to hdRr8, hdRg1 to hdRg8, and hdRb1 to hdRb8 which constitute the heat dispersion circuit 402bc. As a result, heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bax) can be dispersed.

  As described above, since the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb is of a sink (sink) type, the constant current flowing through two hdLED9 and hdLED10 among the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 is absorbed by the LED constant current driving circuit 402bb. Heat is generated by sucking a constant current flowing through five full-color LEDs huLED1 to huLED5 mounted on the upper left side decorative substrate 402a, which is a substrate subsequent to the lower side decorative substrate 402b. Therefore, a part of the heat generated by the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx) is transferred to two hdLED9 and hdLED10 out of the ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. Five pieces of heat dissipating resistors hdRr9, hdRr10, hdRg9, hdRg10, hdRb9, hdRb10, which constitute the heat dispersing circuit 402bc, and are mounted on the left upper decorative board 402a, which is the subsequent board of the left lower decorative board 402b For the huLED1 to huLED5, which are full-color LEDs, the heat dispersion resistors huRr1a to huRr5a, huRg1a to huRg5a, huRb1a to huRb5a, which constitute the heat dispersion circuit 402bc in the lower decorative board 402b on the left side, and upper left side. The heat dissipating resistors huRr1b to huRr5b, huRg1b to huRg5b, and huRb1b to huRb5b, which constitute the heat dissipating circuit 402ac in the decorative board 402a, serve as the LED constant current driving circuit 402bb (more precisely, the constant current driving circuit 402bbx). The heat can be dissipated.

  Further, as described above, the heat distribution circuit 402bc of the lower left decorative board 402b and the heat distribution circuit 402ac of the upper left decorative board 402a are the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb (more precisely, the constant current drive circuit 402bbx). In addition to the function of dispersing the heat generated by the device, the device also has a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

  Note that, in addition to the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, a plate center upper decorative substrate 314, a plate center lower decorative substrate 316, a side window decorative portion decorative substrate 413, and a right side There is a lower decorative substrate 418b and a door frame top central decorative substrate 455.

  In addition to the left upper decorative board 402a, there is a right upper decorative board 418a as a decorative board without any LED constant current drive circuit.

[11-4. Arrangement Method of LED Constant Current Drive Circuit]
Next, an arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuit will be described in detail with reference to FIGS. 196 and 197. In the present embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is the same circuit as described above. Here, a description will be given as an electronic component in which the constant current driving circuit constituting the LED constant current driving circuit is integrated on one semiconductor chip. As a type of the IC package of the constant current drive circuit, a surface mount type (SMD, height: 0.9 mm) having a square planar shape (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). ), So-called VQFN. Of the four end sides of the constant current drive circuit, one end side is the input side, and the remaining three end sides are the output side 1 to the output side 3, respectively. In FIG. 197, various electronic components are omitted and some silk printing is omitted for the sake of clarity of the drawing.

  As described above, each decorative board of the door frame 3 in this embodiment is formed in an elongated strip shape, and has one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. There is. Since the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuits on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is substantially the same, here, the left side formed in a vertically elongated strip-shaped plate having two LED constant current drive circuits is provided. The lower decorative substrate 402b and the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape will be described.

[11-4-1. Decorative board under the left side]
As shown in FIG. 196 (a), the left side lower decorative substrate 402b includes LED constant current drive circuits 402ba, 402bb, ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, and the like. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are ten full-color LEDs, are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative board 402b, which is the front side of the pachinko machine 1, whereas the LED constant current drive circuits 402ba and 402bb are Are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b which is the back side of the pachinko machine 1. A connector LDUCN for connecting the upper left side decorative substrate 402a and the electric wiring is mounted on the upper side of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, and the LED on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is not mounted. On the lower end side of the surface 402by, a connector LDLCN for connecting the electric wiring to the door frame sub relay board 105 is mounted.

  A white resist is solidly applied to the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. In the present embodiment, the reflectivity of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) is generated by the solid color white resist on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. Can be enhanced.

  On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the area indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are to be completely printed as silk printing. It has not been. Further, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, the board management number of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is not formed as a blank character by a white resist.

  This is because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b due to the light emission of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 is reduced by the part number corresponding to the full color LED and the region indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged. Is preventing that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the left side lower decorative board 402b on the LED mounting surface 402bx from being lowered due to the light emission of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10.

  The door frame left side decorative body 404 shown in FIG. 91 provided on the door frame 3 is formed in a translucent milky white as described above, but is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1. When the player moves the head (face), the line of sight changes according to the direction of the head (face), and the player visually recognizes the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b provided in the door frame left side decorative body 404. Even if it is possible to do so, in the first place, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged. Since the area indicating the position is not printed at all as silk printing, the player has no relation to the game at all with full color LE. Corresponding part numbers, and a region indicating where to place the full color LED are prevented from being viewed by the player and. Therefore, a number specifying the full color LED hdLED1 to hdLED10 (that is, a part number corresponding to the full color LED hdLED1 to hdLED10) and an auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full color LED hdLED1 to hdLED10 (that is, a full color LED) An area indicating a position where a certain hdLED1 to hdLED10 is arranged) can be made difficult for a player to see.

  Note that, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, a component number corresponding to the connector LDLCN and an area indicating a position where the connector LDLCN is arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. This prevents the player from visually recognizing the part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN that has no relation to the game and the area indicating the position where the connector LDLCN is arranged.

  The LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is solid-coated with a white resist. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, each have a package made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white), and the connector LDUCN has a housing that is white (also referred to as a natural color, white). Color) that is recognized as the same color as the color). That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that covers (solid-painted) the entirety are mounted. As described above, in the present embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. Not. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color have reduced reflectivity on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of a full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, the board management number of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is printed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b by a foil-cut character (that is, a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed). The character is formed as a pattern, and the surrounding copper foil is removed to form a blank character). The white character is solid-coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, and the foil-cut character is formed. Covered. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut characters is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component. Note that the board management number of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is obtained by replacing the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b with the non-LED mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b by using a foil-cut character (that is, a wiring pattern). May be formed on a layer (copper plane) in which a character is formed by a wiring pattern that is a copper foil, and the surrounding copper foil may be removed to form a character. On the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, a character with a foil-cut character (that is, a character is formed by a wiring pattern of copper foil on a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed). (A blank character formed by removing a copper foil). The LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b are formed as a solid ground, as described later. For this reason, the board management number of the left side lower decorative board 402b is determined by using a foil-cut character (that is, forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil on a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed) and removing the surrounding copper foil. Instead of a solid character formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx and a solid earth on the LED non-mounting surface 402by, the character is formed as a character with a character cut out on one or both surfaces. May be.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, various dispersions Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as resistors are to be arranged are printed by silk solid printing with solid yellow lines (or black solid lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are printed near these areas by silk printing. Each is printed in yellow (or black). Specifically, for example, a region indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 197 (a)) as a silk print, and the lower left lower decorative substrate. IC1 (see FIG. 197 (a)), which is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of 402b and is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax, is in the vicinity of the area LSLKa and is printed upward. Are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b by a yellow solid line (or a black solid line). A region indicating the position where the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged is printed as a solid yellow line (or a black solid line) LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd (see FIG. 197 (a)). Are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are located near and to the right of these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd. , R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 197 (a)) corresponding to and are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, respectively. I have.

  On the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, a region corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, is a yellow dashed line as silk print. (Or black dashed lines) LSLK1 to LSLK10 (in FIG. 197 (a), only the dashed lines LSLK4 and LSLK5 corresponding to the hdLED4 and hdLED5, which are full-color LEDs, respectively) are printed, and these areas are also printed. Part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs in the vicinity of LSLK1 to LSLK10 and upward or downward (FIG. 197 (a) shows LED4, LED which is a part number corresponding to hdLED4 and hdLED5 which are full-color LEDs Only expressed respectively.) Are respectively printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing.

  Note that, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating the position where the connector LDLCN to be mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is arranged is shown by a yellow dashed line as silk printing. (Or black dashed line), and a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing in the vicinity of this area.

  Further, the resistor, the capacitor, and the like mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has The package is made of a black resin, and the connector LDLCN is made of a resin whose housing has any one of black, brown, or blue. As described above, since electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectivity due to light emission of full-color LEDs, the LED non-mounting surface Has been implemented.

  Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, lighting inspection is individually performed on hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b (for example, (One LED element emitting red (R), an LED element emitting green (G), and an LED element emitting blue (B) constitute one full-color LED.) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is not shown as silk print near the plurality of check pins. It is printed in yellow (or black). The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thus, when the operator performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other, and the various states can be inspected. Some of the plurality of check pins can check the content of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax or the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  In the embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and a connector that does not have a white color have a low reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full-color LED. Since the reflectance on the mounting surface was reduced, the LED was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all. However, of the LED mounting surface due to the emission of the full-color LED, the area corresponding to the member arranged in front is the LED mounting surface. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance in the above, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white, or connectors that do not have white may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the LED non-mounting surface, a region indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is to be arranged is printed as a silk print with a yellow dashed line (or a black dashed line) (not shown). The part number corresponding to the part or connector is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

  The LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b are formed as a so-called solid earth that grounds a region other than a land pattern and a wiring pattern of electronic components and connectors to the ground (GND). The solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b and the solid ground formed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes (not shown). I have.

  As described above, since the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically, as viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b The width dimension from the left end side 402beg1 to the right end side 402beg2 is only about 1.78 times the width dimension from the left end side to the right end side of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx. For this reason, when the ends of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative board 402b, the lands of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx Since the distance dimension between the edge of the pattern and the left edge 402beg1 or the right edge 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is extremely short, the wiring pattern will be drawn from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge. However, since the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the distance between adjacent wiring patterns are limited by the minimum distance, it is difficult to pull out all the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the end side. .

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The configuration was adopted.

  In the present embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, when viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the lower right end of the four ends of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx is input. By arranging it near the left end side 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b so as to be the terminal on the left side, the input side terminal is connected to the door frame side second serial system (light emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) shown in FIG. ), +12 V DC, ground (GND), and the resistances Rr and Rg of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402bby are input, and the lower left side, the upper left side, and the upper right side are mainly the terminals of the output side 1 to the output side, respectively. 195. Output terminals 1 to 3 are output channels LR1 to LR8 and LG1 shown in FIG. LG8, LB1~LB8, and door frame side second serial line (emission data SDAT2, clock signal SCLK2) to output the like. Note that the terminal on the output side 1 has a terminal to which the resistance Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, 402bby is input, and the output side 2 and the output side 3 have a terminal to which ground (GND) is input. I have.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, two of the four end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left end side 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. In addition to being arranged in a state, the remaining two end sides can be arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. As a result, the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the minimum distance dimension from the respective lead pads of the land patterns arranged on the four end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are limited. Also, all the wiring patterns can be drawn out. Therefore, it is possible to secure a region where the wiring (wiring pattern) is drawn from the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, a group 1 including four full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED4 among eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8, and four full-color LEDs. Since the constant current driving circuit 402bax can be arranged between the group 2 composed of the hdLED5 and the hdLED8, when the wiring pattern from the constant current driving circuit 402bax to the group 1 and the group 2 is routed, the length thereof is increased. Can be formed uniformly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of routing the wiring patterns to the group 1 and the group 2 from being lengthened or shortened to one of the group 1 and the group 2. Efficiency of wiring pattern arrangement and routing in a work can be improved.

  In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, the constant current drive circuit 402bax is connected to the central portion in the vertical direction on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative board 402b (the hdLED6 which is a full-color LED of FIG. 196 (a), the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be arranged in the vertical direction on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative board 402b (FIG. 196 (a)). (The portion where the hdLED 6 which is a full-color LED is disposed) is closer to the upper side, and can be disposed above the hdLED 8 which is a full-color LED configured in the group 2 whose emission is controlled by the constant current drive circuit 402bax. . Thus, a region for routing the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 402bax to the eight full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED8 can be secured on the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx The area for routing the wiring pattern to the two full-color LEDs hdLED9 and hdLED10 and the five left-side upper decorative boards 402a shown in FIG. 402b.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 402bay and 402bby, a capacitor (not shown) is soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The resistors Rr, Rg, Rb, and the capacitor (not shown) are a surface mount type (SMD) having a rectangular planar shape, and are in a so-called EIA format 0805 (2012 by name, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length). : 1.25 mm). That is, the sizes of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitor (not shown) are compared with the sizes of the constant current driving circuits 402bax, 402bbx (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). Extremely small. Therefore, the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitor (not shown) are different from the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx, and the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb have one ends in the longitudinal direction at the left end of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. The capacitor (not shown) is disposed so as to be parallel to 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2, and has one end in the longitudinal direction perpendicular to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Are arranged as follows. In other words, each edge of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx arranged such that the edge of the land pattern is inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, Rr, Rg, Rb, and one end in the longitudinal direction of the capacitor (not shown) are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, respectively, so as to be non-parallel.

  In addition, as described above, the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuit on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is such that the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is set at 45 degrees with respect to the left edge and the right edge of the decorative board. The door frame top decorative body 453, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 of the door frame top decorative body 453, which are arranged in an inclined state and are almost the same, are doors. Unlike the other decorative substrates of the frame 3, when the door frame top center decorative substrate 455, the door frame top left decorative substrate 456, and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 are arranged on the door frame top decorative body 453, Since the width from the upper edge to the lower edge is large, the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is divided into the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top. It is arranged so as to be parallel to the upper side and lower side of the right decorative substrate 457. That is, in the present embodiment, the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is parallel to the edge of the decorative substrate, and the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit is non-parallel to the edge of the decorative substrate. And are mixed. In the present embodiment, the door frame top center decorative board 455 includes, in addition to the eleven full color LEDs provided therein, another center decorated board on which five not shown full color LEDs are mounted. Two LED constant current drive circuits (a first LED constant current drive circuit (a first constant current drive circuit, a first maximum current setting circuit), a second LED constant current drive circuit (a second constant current drive circuit, Illustrated by one LED constant current driving circuit (here, a second LED constant current driving circuit (second constant current driving circuit, second maximum current setting circuit)). Not provided with two heat-distribution circuits (a first constant-current drive circuit is a first heat-distribution circuit (heat-distribution resistor), and a second constant-current drive circuit is a second heat-distribution circuit (heat dispersion resistance)) Light emission control directly through the door frame top The left decorative board 456 includes, in addition to the seven full-color LEDs provided therein, another left decorative board on which one full-color LED (not shown) is mounted, and one LED constant current drive circuit (constant) provided therein. The light emission is directly controlled by a current driver circuit and a maximum current setting circuit via one heat dispersing circuit (heat dispersing resistor) included in the self-illustrating device (not shown), and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457 includes six full-color LEDs included in itself. In addition, another right decorative board on which two full-color LEDs (not shown) are mounted is connected to oneself (not shown) by one LED constant current drive circuit (constant current drive circuit, maximum current setting circuit) provided for itself. Light emission is controlled directly via one provided heat distribution circuit (heat dispersion resistance). The other central decorative substrate is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the central portion of the door frame top decorative body 453, and the other left decorative substrate is formed on the left side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. The other right decorative substrate is formed in an elongated strip shape extending left and right along the right side portion of the door frame top decorative body 453. It is necessary to provide a heat spreading circuit (heat spreading resistor) on each of the other central decorative boards, other left decorative boards, and other right decorative boards. As described above, the heat dispersing circuit (here, the second heat dispersing circuit (heat dissipating resistance)) provided on the door frame top center decorative board 455 itself and the heat dispersing circuits of the other central decorative boards are different from each other. In addition to the function of dispersing the heat generated by the second LED constant current drive circuit (more precisely, the second constant current drive circuit) provided on the center decorative substrate 455 itself, it also prevents damage to electronic components due to static electricity. It also has the ability to do so. Further, as described above, the heat distribution circuit provided on the door frame top left decorative board 456 itself and the heat distribution circuit provided on the other left decorative board itself are the LED constant current drive circuit (accurately provided on the door frame top left decorative board 456 itself). Has a function of dispersing heat generated by the constant current drive circuit) and a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity. In addition, as described above, the heat distribution circuit provided on the door frame top right decorative board 457 itself and the heat distribution circuit provided on the other right decorative board are the LED constant current drive circuit (accurately provided on the door frame top right decorative board 457 itself). Has a function of dispersing heat generated by the constant current drive circuit) and a function of preventing damage to electronic components due to static electricity.

  In addition, the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be inclined 45 degrees with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, and ten full-color LEDs are arranged. When viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are closer to the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b and along the vertical direction of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are located closer to the left end side 402beg1 of the left side lower decorative board 402b when viewed from the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative board 402b. L of lower left side decorative substrate 402b Adopting a configuration of placing the D non-mounting surface 402By. As described above, the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are of a sink (sink) type, and generate heat by sucking a constant current flowing through each LED element. For this reason, also in the left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in the shape of an elongated strip extending vertically, by separating the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx from the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, Heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx can be made less likely to be affected by the ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10.

  In addition, by arranging the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx at a 45-degree angle with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the constant current drive circuit is provided. One in which the ends of the land patterns 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left end and the right end of the decorative board (that is, the door frame top center decorative board 455 of the door frame top decorative body 453, the door frame top left decorative) In comparison with the substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457), the decorative substrate in which the edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged non-parallel to the left edge and the right edge of the decorative substrate is used. Can be further reduced in width from the left end side to the right end side. Thereby, it is possible to contribute to increasing the distance dimension of the game board 5 in the left-right direction.

[11-4-2. Decorative board on plate center]
As shown in FIG. 196 (b), the dish center upper decorative board 314 includes LED constant current drive circuits 314a and 314b, ten full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, and the like. While hLED1 to hLED10, which are ten full-color LEDs, are mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, which is the upward side of the rendering operation unit 300, the LED constant current drive circuit 314a , 314b are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, which is on the upper side of the effect operation unit 300. 196 (b) is rotated 90 degrees to the left (that is, the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is actually arranged along the dish center upper decorative body 312a). On the right side along the upper edge 314eg1 of the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper plate center decoration board 314, a connector HCN for connecting the operation unit relay board 392 and the electric wiring is mounted.

  The white resist is solid-painted on the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper plate 314. In this embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is solid-coated with a white resist, so that hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, emit light forward (i.e., toward the upward side of the rendering operation unit 300). Can be increased in reflectance.

  On the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, a part number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and an area indicating a position where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged, are completely printed as silk printing. It has not been. Also, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, the board management number of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is not formed as a blank character by white resist.

  This is because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 due to the emission of the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 is reduced by the part number corresponding to the full color LED and the area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged. Is preventing that. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the dish from being reduced due to the light emission of the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10.

  Further, as described above, the plate center upper decorative body 312a of the unit front cover 312 provided on the door frame 3 is formed in a translucent milky white as described above, but is located in front of the pachinko machine 1. When the player sitting on the head moves his / her head (face), his / her line of sight changes depending on the direction of the head (face). Even when the mounting surface 314x can be visually recognized by the player, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 initially has a part number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a full-color LED. And hLED1 to hLED10 indicating the position where the hLEDs are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, so that the player has no relation to the game at all. It has not full LED with the corresponding part numbers, and a region indicating where to place the full color LED is prevented from being viewed by the player. Therefore, a number (that is, a part number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 that is a full color LED) that specifies hLED1 to hLED10 that is a full color LED and an auxiliary line that indicates a mounting position of hLED1 to hLED10 that is a full color LED (that is, a full color LED) (A region indicating a position where certain hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged) can be made difficult for a player to visually recognize.

  Note that, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, the part number corresponding to the connector HCN and the area indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged are not printed at all as silk printing. This prevents the player from visually recognizing the part number corresponding to the connector HCN that has no relation to the game for the player and the area indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged.

  In addition, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is covered with a white resist. HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, each package is made of a white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called a natural color; Color) that is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that covers (solid-painted) the entirety are mounted. As described above, in the present embodiment, electronic components (not shown) such as resistors and capacitors not shown in white and connectors not having white are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the plate. Not. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color have reduced reflectivity on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of a full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

  Also, the board management number of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is a foiled character (that is, a wiring that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed) on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314. It is formed as a blank character formed by forming a character with a pattern and removing the surrounding copper foil), and the foil-cut character is formed by a white resist solid-painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the plate. Covered. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut characters is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component. Note that the board management number of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is obtained by replacing the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 with the LED non-mounting face 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314 with foil-cut characters (that is, the wiring pattern). May be formed in a layer (copper plane) in which a character is formed by a wiring pattern that is a copper foil, and the surrounding copper foil may be removed to form a character. On the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper plate 314 on the center of the plate, a character with a foil pattern (that is, a character is formed by a wiring pattern of copper foil on a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed). (A blank character formed by removing a copper foil). Further, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are formed as a solid ground, as described later. For this reason, the board management number of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is determined by using a foil-cut character (that is, a character is formed by a wiring pattern that is a copper foil in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed) and the surrounding copper foil is removed. Instead of a solid character formed on the LED mounting surface 314x and a solid earth on the LED non-mounting surface 314y. May be.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the constant current driving circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 314a, the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, various dispersions are provided. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as resistors are arranged are printed by silk printing (not shown) by a solid yellow line (or black solid line), and a part number corresponding to the electronic component is printed near these areas by silk printing. The prints are printed in yellow (or black) (not shown).

  On the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, a region corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, is not shown as silk-printed yellow. (Or black dashed lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10, respectively, and a part number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which is a full-color LED near these regions HSLK1 to HSLK10 is yellow (or not shown) as silk printing. , Black).

  Note that, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, a region indicating a position where the connector HCN to be mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is arranged is shown by a yellow chain line (not shown) as silk printing. (Or a black dashed line), and a part number corresponding to the connector HCN is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing near this area.

  Further, the resistor, the capacitor, and the like mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 do not have a white color, and the constant current driving circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has The package is made of black resin. Thus, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance of the full-color LED due to light emission decreases.

  Further, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, lighting inspection is individually performed on hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, (One LED element emitting red (R), an LED element emitting green (G), and an LED element emitting blue (B) constitute one full-color LED.) A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is not shown as silk print near the plurality of check pins. It is printed in yellow (or black). The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thus, when the operator performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other, and the various states can be inspected. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax or the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  The LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are formed as a so-called solid earth that grounds an area excluding a land pattern and a wiring pattern of electronic components and connectors to ground (GND). The solid earth formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center decoration board 314 and the solid earth formed on the LED non-mounting face 314y of the dish center decoration board 314 are electrically connected by a plurality of through holes (not shown). I have.

  In this embodiment, the reflectance of the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED is reduced. Electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color, emit light by the full-color LED. Since the reflectivity on the LED mounting surface was reduced, the LED mounting surface was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectivity of the surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white, and connectors that do not have white may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the LED non-mounting surface, a region indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is to be arranged is printed as a silk print with a yellow dashed line (or a black dashed line) (not shown). The part number corresponding to the part or connector is printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing.

  As described above, the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is formed in an elongated strip shape having a semicircular arc shape, and thus the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 shown in FIG. 196 (b) is rotated 90 degrees to the left. When viewed (that is, the state in which the decorative plate 314 on the center of the dish is actually arranged along the decorative body 312a on the center of the dish), the upper edge 314eg1 to the lower edge 314eg2 of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decorative board 314 on the center of the dish. Is only about 1.78 times the width from the left edge to the right edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx. For this reason, if the ends of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be parallel to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the land of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx Since the distance dimension between the edge of the pattern and the upper edge 314eg1 or the lower edge 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 becomes extremely short, let's draw the wiring pattern from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the edge. However, since the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the distance between adjacent wiring patterns are limited by the minimum distance, it is difficult to pull out all the wiring patterns from each lead pad of the land pattern arranged on the end side. .

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the ends of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 and the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The configuration was adopted.

  In the present embodiment, by adopting such an arrangement, when viewed from the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decoration board 314 on the center of the plate, the lower left end of the four ends of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx is input. By arranging it near the upper end side 314eg1 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 so as to be the terminal on the side, the input side terminal is connected to the door frame side first serial system (light emission data SDAT1, clock signal SCLK1) shown in FIG. ), DC +12 V, ground (GND), and the resistances Rr and Rg of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by are input, and the upper left end, the upper right end, and the lower right end are mainly terminals of the output side 1 to the output side, respectively. 3, the output side 1 to the output side 3 are the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, LB1 to LB8, and The door frame side first serial line (emission data SDAT1, clock signals SCLK1) to output the like. Note that the terminal on the output side 1 has a terminal to which the resistance Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by is input, and the output side 2 and the output side 3 have a terminal to which ground (GND) is input. I have.

  Further, by adopting such an arrangement, two of the four end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the upper end side 314eg1 of the dish center upper decorative board 314. In addition to being arranged in a state, the remaining two end sides can be arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the lower end side 314eg2 of the decoration substrate 314 above the center of the dish. As a result, from the respective lead pads of the land patterns arranged on the four end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx, the pattern width of the wiring pattern and the minimum distance dimension are restricted to the interval between adjacent wiring patterns. Also, all the wiring patterns can be drawn out. Therefore, it is possible to secure an area where the wiring (wiring pattern) is drawn out from the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular shape.

  In addition, by adopting such an arrangement, a group 1 including four full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED4 among eight full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8, and four full-color LEDs. Since the constant current drive circuit 314ax can be arranged between the group 2 including the hLED5 and the hLED8, when the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to the group 1 and the group 2 is routed, its length is reduced. Can be formed uniformly. As a result, it is possible to prevent the length of routing the wiring patterns to the group 1 and the group 2 from being lengthened or shortened to one of the group 1 and the group 2. Efficiency of wiring pattern arrangement and routing in a work can be improved.

  Also, by adopting such an arrangement, when the decorative plate 314 above the plate center shown in FIG. 196 (b) is rotated to the left by 90 degrees (that is, the decorative substrate 314 above the plate center is 196ax, the constant current drive circuit 314ax is a full-color LED in a semicircular center portion of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper plate center decoration board 314 (FIG. 196 (b)). The hLED 6 can be disposed closer to the right side than the hLED 6 is disposed, and the constant current drive circuit 314bx is provided in the semi-circular center portion of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314 (FIG. ), Which is closer to the left side than the portion where the hdLED 6 which is a full-color LED is disposed, and whose light emission is controlled by the constant current drive circuit 314ax. It can be arranged on the left of hLED8 a full-color LED configured to 2. Thus, a region for routing the wiring pattern from the constant current drive circuit 314ax to the eight full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED8 can be secured on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, and the constant current drive circuit 314bx An area for routing wiring patterns to the two full-color LEDs hLED9 and hLED10 can be secured on the dish center upper decorative substrate 314.

  In the present embodiment, in addition to the resistors Rr, Rg, and Rb of the maximum current setting circuits 314ay and 314by, a capacitor (not shown) is soldered to the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The resistors Rr, Rg, Rb, and the capacitor (not shown) are a surface mount type (SMD) having a rectangular planar shape, and are in a so-called EIA format 0805 (2012 by name, horizontal length: 2.0 mm, vertical length). : 1.25 mm). That is, the sizes of the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitor (not shown) are compared with the sizes of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx (horizontal length: 6.0 mm, vertical length: 6.0 mm). Extremely small. Therefore, the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb and the capacitor (not shown) are different from the constant current drive circuits 314ax, 314bx, and the resistors Rr, Rg, Rb have one ends in the longitudinal direction at the upper end of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The capacitor (not shown) is disposed so as to be parallel to 314eg1 and the lower side 314eg2, and one end in the longitudinal direction is perpendicular to the upper side 314eg1 and the lower side 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. Are arranged as follows. In other words, each end of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx arranged such that the edge of the land pattern is inclined at 45 degrees with respect to the upper edge 314eg1 and the lower edge 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, Rr, Rg, Rb, and one end of the capacitor (not shown) in the longitudinal direction are arranged on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 such that they are non-parallel.

  In addition, the ends of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees with respect to the upper end 314eg1 and the lower end 314eg2 of the upper plate 314, and ten full-color LEDs are provided. HLED1 to hLED10 are viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, and are closer to the lower end side 314eg2 of the dish center upper decorative board 314 and formed in a semicircular shape of the LED mounting face 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314. In contrast, the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are located closer to the upper end side 314eg1 of the dish center upper decorative board 314 when viewed from the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314. In this case, a configuration is adopted in which the decorative plate 314 is placed on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the upper plate 314. The constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are of the sink (sink) type, as described above, as in the case of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. Fever. For this reason, even in the upper center decorative substrate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having a semicircular arc shape, the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx are separated from the ten full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 by separating them. Heat generated by the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx can be made less affected by the hLED1 to hLED10, which are the ten full-color LEDs.

  In addition, the constant current driving circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged such that the edges of the land patterns are inclined 45 degrees with respect to the upper edge 314eg1 and the lower edge 314eg2 of the upper plate 314. One in which the ends of the land patterns 314ax and 314bx are arranged to be parallel to the left end and the right end of the decorative board (that is, the door frame top center decorative board 455 of the door frame top decorative body 453, the door frame top left decorative) Compared with the substrate 456 and the door frame top right decorative substrate 457), the decorative substrate in which the edges of the land patterns of the constant current driving circuits 314ax and 314bx are arranged non-parallel to the left edge and the right edge of the decorative substrate is used. Can be further reduced in width from the left end side to the right end side. This can contribute to increasing the distance dimension in the left-right direction and the distance dimension in the front-rear direction of the effect operation unit 300, so that the large effect operation unit 300 can be provided on the door frame 3 and the effect operation unit can be provided. A light emission effect by 300 can be performed.

[11-4-3. Generic pad on the bottom of IC package of constant current drive circuit]
As described above, the IC packages of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx of the lower left decorative board 402b and the constant current drive circuits 314ax and 314bx of the dish center upper decorative board 314 are flat as described above. It is a surface mounting type having a square shape, and is a so-called VQFN. Here, an IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b will be described with reference to FIG.

  A metal pad FP is exposed at the center of the bottom surface of the IC package of the constant current drive circuit 402bax, and a so-called Exposed Pad (hereinafter referred to as "EPad") is formed. This IC package can be improved in heat dissipation and bonding by being soldered to a substrate.

  In the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402bax, a land pattern EP for EPad having a square shape is provided in addition to each lead pad. The land pattern EP for EPad is electrically connected to the solid ground of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative board 402b. In the area of the EPad land pattern EP, nine thermal vias TV are arranged in a formation lattice. These thermal vias TV electrically connect the land pattern EP for EPad and the solid ground formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. For this reason, it is impossible to draw out the wiring pattern from each lead pad into the area of the EPad land pattern EP.

  As described above, the constant current drive circuit 402bax is a sink (sink) type, and generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through each LED element. That is, heat generated by the constant current drive circuit 402bax is transmitted from the EPad to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b and the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b via the EPad land pattern EP. By diffusing, it is possible to dissipate heat in the entire left side lower decorative substrate 402b.

  The relationship between the EPad land pattern EP and the nine thermal vias TV will be briefly described. The junction area where the constant current drive circuit EPad (metal pad FP) is soldered to the EPad land pattern EP has a constant current. The number and diameter of the thermal vias TV are selected so as to be 50% or more of the EPad (metal pad FP) of the drive circuit. Thereby, the junction area where the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit and the land pattern EP for EPad are soldered is not too large to prevent the occurrence of voids, and this junction area is not too small and stable. It is possible to obtain an improved bonding strength. The land pattern EP for EPad may be divided into a lattice shape. In this case, too, in order to prevent the generation of voids and obtain a stable bonding strength, as described above, the constant current driving circuit (The metal pad FP) must be 50% or more of the EPad (metal pad FP) of the constant current drive circuit.

  Further, in contrast to the case where the ends of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the constant current drive circuits 402bax, 402bbx When the edge of the land pattern is arranged at a 45 degree angle with respect to the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the heat dissipation effect of the constant current drive circuit 402bax against heat generation is high. Become. When the end sides of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the EPad land pattern EP is similarly set to the left. In the case where the side edges of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx are arranged in parallel with the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower side decorative substrate 402b so as to be inclined by 45 degrees. , EPad land patterns EP are also arranged in a state inclined at 45 degrees. When the edge of the EPad land pattern EP is arranged in parallel with the left edge 402beg1 and the right edge 402beg2 of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the edge of the EPad land pattern EP and the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b are arranged. The distance dimension between the left end side 402beg1 or the right end side 402beg2 and the distance dimension to the substrate end side are reduced, in other words, the room for heat radiation on the substrate is reduced. . On the other hand, the left end side 402beg1 of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b when the end side of the land pattern EP for EPad is arranged at a 45 degree angle with respect to the left end side 402beg1 and the right end side 402beg2 of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. Alternatively, the distance dimension between the right end side 402beg2 and the distance between the vertex of the EPad land pattern EP and the substrate side is a shorter portion, but the two sides in contact with the vertex are not parallel to the substrate side. Since the room for heat dissipation on the substrate is large, it can be said that the heat dissipation effect is higher than when the edge of the EPad land pattern EP and the edge of the substrate are parallel.

  As described above, each decorative board of the door frame 3 in this embodiment is formed in an elongated strip shape, and has one LED constant current drive circuit and two LED constant current drive circuits. In the present embodiment, as an example, as described above, a left side lower decorative substrate 402b formed in a vertically elongated strip shape and having two LED constant current driving circuits, and a semicircle An upper plate center decoration plate 314 formed in the shape of an elongated strip having an arc shape will be described, and a part number corresponding to the full-color LED and an area indicating a position where the full-color LED is arranged will be described. A part number corresponding to a full-color LED that can prevent the reflectance on the mounting surface from decreasing and has no relation to the game for the player at all. And a region indicating where to place a full-color LED has been described in detail that it is taken measures such reflectance decrease that can be prevented from being viewed by the player. Here, another configuration of the present invention in which a measure such as a decrease in reflectance is taken (hereinafter, referred to as “a configuration of a measure for a decrease in reflectance according to the second to fourth embodiments”) is shown in FIGS. This will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 198 shows a configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment. FIG. 199 shows a configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment. FIG. FIG. 201 is an enlarged view of the D ″ part in FIG. 199 as viewed from the LED non-mounting surface, FIG. 201 is a configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, and FIG. 202 is a D ′ ″ in FIG. FIG. 4 is an enlarged view of a part from a non-LED mounting surface. In FIGS. 198 to 202, those having the same functions as those of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 196 and 197 (hereinafter, described as a configuration for measures against a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment) are shown. Are denoted by the same reference numerals. In FIG. 200, various electronic components are omitted and some silk printing is omitted for the sake of clarity. Further, in FIG. 202, various electronic components are omitted from the viewability of the drawing.

[Comparison of configuration of countermeasures such as reduction of reflectance according to the first embodiment with configuration of countermeasures such as reduction of reflectance according to second embodiment]
In the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a full-color LED. The area indicating the positions where the hdLEDs 1 to hdLED 10 that are LEDs are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. As described above, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, as described above. Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are to be arranged are printed by silk solid printing with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are silk-screened near these areas. The prints are printed in yellow (or black), respectively. As described above, the area corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, is silk-screened on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. In addition to being printed with yellow dashed lines (or black dashed lines) as printing, the part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing near these areas, respectively. Have been.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 has the component numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. And the area indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged, are not printed at all as silk printing. And, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a and the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay are provided on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center decoration board 314. Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are to be arranged are printed as silk printing by solid yellow lines (or black solid lines) (not shown), and component numbers corresponding to the electronic components are provided near these areas. Are printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing. As described above, the area corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, is formed on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 as described above. The printed parts are printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 (not shown) as printing, and the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 are used as silk printing. Each is printed in yellow (or black) not shown.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 198 (a), the hdLED1 which is a full-color LED is provided on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b. , The part numbers corresponding to the hdLED10, and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are printed as silk-screen printing, respectively. Specifically, regions indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are printed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b with silk solid printing with solid yellow lines LSLK1 to LSLK10, respectively. In the vicinity of the areas LSLK1 to LSLK10, LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are yellow on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative board 402b as silk print. Each is printed.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b, a region indicating a position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is printed as a silk print by a solid yellow line (not shown), and a region corresponding to the connector LDLCN is provided near this region. Are printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

  The LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is solid-coated with a white resist. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, each have a package made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white), and the connector LDUCN has a housing that is white (also referred to as a natural color, white). Color) that is recognized as the same color as the color). That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that covers (solid-painted) the entirety are mounted. As described above, in the second embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color have reduced reflectivity on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of a full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, lighting inspection is performed individually on hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b (for example, 1 (For each of the LED elements that emit red (R) light, the LED element that emits green light (G), and the LED element that emits blue light (B), which constitute one full-color LED). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is displayed in yellow near the plurality of check pins as silk print. It is printed in. The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thus, when the operator performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other, and the various states can be inspected. Some of the plurality of check pins can check the content of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax or the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 200, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the constant current driving circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba and the resistances Rr, Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are provided. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as Rg and various dispersion resistances are to be arranged are printed by silk solid printing with solid yellow lines (or black solid lines), and component numbers corresponding to the electronic components near these areas. Are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing, respectively. Specifically, for example, a region indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 200A) as a silk print, and the lower left lower decorative substrate. IC1 (see FIG. 200 (a)), which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax, is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the 402b near and above the area LSLKa, and is silk-screened. Is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b by a solid yellow line (or a black solid line). A region indicating the position where the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged is printed as a solid yellow line (or a black solid line) LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd (see FIG. 200A). Are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are located near and to the right of these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd. R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 200 (a)) corresponding to and are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, respectively. I have.

  Further, the resistor, the capacitor, and the like mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has The package is made of a black resin, and the connector LDLCN is made of a resin whose housing has any one of black, brown, or blue. As described above, since electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectivity due to light emission of full-color LEDs, the LED non-mounting surface Has been implemented.

  In the configuration for measures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b are solid-coated with white resist. This increases the reflectance of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) by emitting white solid resist on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. You can do it.

  Further, in the configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectivity or the like according to the second embodiment, as shown in FIG. 198 (b), hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are provided on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. Corresponding part numbers and areas indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are printed as silk printing. Specifically, areas indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are printed as silk prints on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 with yellow solid lines HSLK1 to HSLK10, respectively. LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are printed in yellow on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 in the vicinity of the areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 and the right side. Have been.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, an area indicating the position where the connector HCN is arranged is printed as a silk print by a solid yellow line (not shown), and the area corresponding to the connector HCN is located near this area. Are printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

  In addition, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is covered with a white resist. HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, each package is made of a white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called a natural color; Color) that is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that covers (solid-painted) the entirety are mounted. As described above, in the second embodiment, electronic components (not shown) such as resistors and capacitors that are not shown in white and connectors that do not have white are not mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate 314. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color have reduced reflectivity on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of a full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

  On the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, lighting inspection is performed individually on hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, 1). (For each of the LED elements that emit red (R) light, the LED element that emits green light (G), and the LED element that emits blue light (B), which constitute one full-color LED). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is displayed in yellow near the plurality of check pins as silk print. It is printed in. The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thus, when the operator performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other, and the various states can be inspected. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax or the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, various dispersion resistors, and the like. Areas indicating the positions where the electronic components are to be arranged are printed as silk printing by solid yellow lines (or black solid lines) (not shown), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are shown as silk printing near these areas. Not printed in yellow (or black).

  In the second embodiment, the resistor, the capacitor, and the like mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center decoration board 314 do not have a white color, and the constant current driving circuit 314ax ( 314bx) has a package made of black resin. Thus, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance of the full-color LED due to light emission decreases.

  In the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the second embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decoration substrate 314 above the plate center are solid-coated with a white resist. Accordingly, the solid color white resist applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 reflects light emitted from the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, forward (that is, the upward direction of the rendering operation unit 300). The rate can be increased.

  As described above, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b includes the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full-color LEDs, and the full-color LED. And the area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate 314 above the plate center is a component corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. While the numbers and the areas indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the second embodiment has the left side. The LED mounting surface 402bx of the side lower decorative substrate 402b is -The part numbers (yellow letters and yellow numbers) corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are LEDs, and the area (yellow solid line) indicating the positions where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged, are printed as silk printing, respectively. In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, the part numbers (yellow letters and yellow numbers) corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs, and hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs are provided. This is different from the region (the solid yellow line) indicating the arrangement position in that the region is printed as silk printing.

  With the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, it is possible to increase the reflectance of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1). It has become. In addition, a white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is used to reflect the light emitted from the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, forward (that is, the upward direction of the staging operation unit 300). Can be enhanced. For this reason, when the area | region which shows the part number corresponding to a full-color LED, and the position where a full-color LED is arrange | positioned is black-printed as silk printing, the black-printed silk-printing makes the LED by light emission of a full-color LED. The reflectance on the mounting surface is reduced, and there is a problem that the light emission of the full-color LED is not used efficiently. Further, various decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decorative body 271, the lower left decorative body 281, the upper right decorative body 276, the lower right decorative body 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 91) The plate center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the side window decorative member 412, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are as described above. Although the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and moves his / her head (face), the line of sight changes according to the direction of the head (face), although it is formed in translucent milky white, the door frame 3 In some cases, a player may be able to visually recognize the LED mounting surface of various decorative boards provided in various decorative bodies provided in the game. Then, there arises a problem that the player sees the part number corresponding to the full-color LED that has no relation to the game at all and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

  Therefore, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the second embodiment, the area indicating the part number corresponding to the full-color LED that has no relation to the game for the player at all and the position where the full-color LED is arranged is silk-printed. An auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, an area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be disposed) is printed on the white resist formed on the LED mounting surface by printing in a light yellow color different from black. ) Or a number specifying a full-color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED) can be made difficult.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the second embodiment, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged are silk-printed, and the yellow, which is lighter than black, is different from black. By performing printing, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full-color LED.

  The configuration of the countermeasure such as the reflectance reduction according to the second embodiment can also provide the same operation and effect as the configuration of the countermeasure such as the reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment. In other words, the number specifying the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED) and the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged) are made difficult for the player to see. In addition to this, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface from being lowered due to the emission of the full-color LED.

  In the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the second embodiment, the auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged is silk-printed, and is different from black, (When printing in yellow), a polarity mark of the full-color LED may be added to clearly indicate the mounting direction of the full-color LED.

  In the second embodiment, the electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and the connectors that do not have a white color have a lower reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED. Is not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced by the LED. However, in the LED mounting surface by full-color LED emission, the region corresponding to the member arranged in front is the LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white, and connectors that do not have white may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the LED mounting surface, a region indicating the position where the electronic component or connector is to be arranged is printed as a silk print by a solid yellow line (not shown), and a part number corresponding to the electronic component or connector is provided near this region. Is printed in yellow (not shown) as silk printing.

[Comparison of configuration of countermeasures such as reduction of reflectance according to the first embodiment with configuration of countermeasures such as reduction of reflectance according to third embodiment]
In the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a full-color LED. The area indicating the positions where the hdLEDs 1 to hdLED 10 that are LEDs are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. As described above, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, as described above. Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are to be arranged are printed by silk solid printing with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are silk-screened near these areas. The prints are printed in yellow (or black), respectively. As described above, the area corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, is silk-screened on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. In addition to being printed with yellow dashed lines (or black dashed lines) as printing, the part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing near these areas, respectively. Have been.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 has the component numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. And the area indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged, are not printed at all as silk printing. And, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a and the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay are provided on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center decoration board 314. Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are to be arranged are printed as silk printing by solid yellow lines (or black solid lines) (not shown), and component numbers corresponding to the electronic components are provided near these areas. Are printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing. As described above, the area corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, is formed on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 as described above. The printed parts are printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 (not shown) as printing, and the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 are used as silk printing. Each is printed in yellow (or black) not shown.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. The component numbers corresponding to .about.hdLED 10 are foil-cut characters (that is, characters formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil on a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, and removing the surrounding copper foil ( In FIG. 199 (c), only a foil-colored character LED7 is shown as a part number corresponding to the hdLED7 which is a full-color LED.)), And an area indicating positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged. A foil-cut area excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, a wiring pattern is formed) (Copper plane), except for each terminal and wiring pattern, in the region formed by extracting the copper foil (FIG. 199 (c), only the foil-extracted region LSLK7 is shown as a region corresponding to hdLED7 which is a full-color LED) ))), And the foil-cut area and the foil-cut characters are respectively covered with a white resist solid-painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. Specifically, regions indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b as foil removal regions LSLK1 to LSLK10, respectively. In the vicinity of the regions LSLK1 to LSLK10, LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10, are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b as left characters. The foil-removed area and the foil-removed characters are respectively covered with a white resist which is solid-painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut characters is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component.

  Note that, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating a position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is a foil-cut region (not shown) except for each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown). Layer (copper plane), except for each terminal and wiring pattern, is formed as a region where copper foil is removed), and a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is not shown near this region. It is formed as a blank character (that is, a blank character formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil on a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil).

  The LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is solid-coated with a white resist. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, each have a package made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white), and the connector LDUCN has a housing that is white (also referred to as a natural color, white). Color) that is recognized as the same color as the color). That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that covers (solid-painted) the entirety are mounted. As described above, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative board 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color have reduced reflectivity on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of a full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

  On the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, lighting inspection is individually performed on hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b (for example, 1 (For each of the LED elements that emit red (R) light, the LED element that emits green light (G), and the LED element that emits blue light (B), which constitute one full-color LED). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through-holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is provided near the plurality of check pins (not shown). In other words, the wiring pattern is a copper foil on the layer (copper plane) where the wiring pattern is formed. It is formed as a cutout characters) formed by far the copper foil around make. The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thus, when the operator performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other, and the various states can be inspected. Some of the plurality of check pins can check the content of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax or the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 200, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, the constant current driving circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba and the resistances Rr, Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are provided. Areas indicating positions where electronic components such as Rg and various dispersion resistances are to be arranged are printed by silk solid printing with solid yellow lines (or black solid lines), and component numbers corresponding to the electronic components near these areas. Are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing, respectively. Specifically, for example, a region indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged is a yellow solid line (or a black solid line) LSLKa (see FIG. 200A) as a silk print, and the lower left lower decorative substrate. IC1 (see FIG. 200 (a)), which is a part number corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax, is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the 402b near and above the area LSLKa, and is silk-screened. Is printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b by a solid yellow line (or a black solid line). A region indicating the position where the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are arranged is printed as a solid yellow line (or a black solid line) LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd (see FIG. 200A). Are printed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, and the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay are located near and to the right of these regions LSLKb, LSLKc, and LSLKd. R1, R2, and R3 (see FIG. 200 (a)) corresponding to and are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, respectively. I have.

  Further, the resistor, the capacitor, and the like mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has The package is made of a black resin, and the connector LDLCN is made of a resin whose housing has any one of black, brown, or blue. As described above, since electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectivity due to light emission of full-color LEDs, the LED non-mounting surface Has been implemented.

  In the configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectivity or the like according to the third embodiment, a white resist is solid-painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b. This increases the reflectance of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) by emitting white solid resist on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. You can do it.

  In addition, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as the decrease in the reflectance according to the third embodiment, as shown in FIG. 199 (b), the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 includes full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10. The corresponding part number is formed as a foil-cut character (that is, a cut character formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil on a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil). In addition, a region indicating a position at which hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged is a terminal area (not shown) except a wiring pattern (not shown). And the wiring pattern, excluding the copper foil). WHITE resists areafill to D mounting surface 314x and its foil vent area and the foil outline characters are covered respectively. Specifically, regions indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 as foil removal regions HSLK1 to HSLK10, respectively. LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full color LEDs, are formed in the vicinity of the areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 to the right and are formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 as blank characters, respectively. The foil-removed area and the foil-removed character are respectively covered by a white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper center decorative substrate 314. The wiring pattern forming the foil-cut characters is formed so as to be electrically insulated from the electronic component.

  Note that, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, an area indicating a position where the connector HCN is arranged is a foil-cut area (not shown) excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown). Layer (copper plane), except for each terminal and wiring pattern, is formed as a region where copper foil is removed), and a part number corresponding to the connector HCN is not shown near this region. It is formed as a blank character (that is, a blank character formed by forming a character with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil on a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed and removing the surrounding copper foil).

  In addition, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is covered with a white resist. HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, each package is made of a white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called a natural color; Color) that is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that covers (solid-painted) the entirety are mounted. As described above, in the third embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color, are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the plate. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color have reduced reflectivity on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of a full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

  On the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, lighting inspection is performed individually on hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, 1). (For each of the LED elements that emit red (R) light, the LED element that emits green light (G), and the LED element that emits blue light (B), which constitute one full-color LED). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through-holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is provided near the plurality of check pins (not shown). In other words, characters are formed on the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is It is formed as a cutout characters) formed by far the copper foil. The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thus, when the operator performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other, and the various states can be inspected. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax or the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  On the other hand, on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, various dispersion resistors, and the like. Areas indicating the positions where the electronic components are to be arranged are printed as silk printing by solid yellow lines (or black solid lines) (not shown), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are shown as silk printing near these areas. Not printed in yellow (or black).

  In the third embodiment, the resistor, the capacitor, and the like mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center decoration board 314 do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 314ax ( 314bx) has a package made of black resin. Thus, electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance of the full-color LED due to light emission decreases.

  In the configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectivity or the like according to the third embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 are solid-coated with white resist. Accordingly, the solid color white resist applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 reflects light emitted from the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, forward (that is, the upward direction of the rendering operation unit 300). The rate can be increased.

  As described above, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as the decrease in the reflectance according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative board 402b includes the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and the full-color LED. And the area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is not printed at all as silk-screen printing, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is a component corresponding to the full color LED hLED1 to hLED10. While the numbers and the regions indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment has the left side. The LED mounting surface 402bx of the side lower decorative substrate 402b is -The part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are LEDs, are formed by removing the foil (that is, forming a character using a copper wiring pattern on a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed) and removing the surrounding copper foil. In addition, a region where the positions of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is a foil-cut region excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, a layer on which the wiring pattern is formed). (Copper plane), except for each terminal and wiring pattern, a region formed by extracting the copper foil), and is a white resist solid-coated on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The foil area and the foil letters are covered by On the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate 314, a part number corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, is a character without foil (that is, a character with a copper foil wiring pattern in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed). And a region where the positions of the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged, excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown). (That is, in the layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed, except for each terminal and the wiring pattern, it is formed as a region formed by removing the copper foil). The foil-removed area and the foil-removed character are respectively defined by a white resist solid-coated on the surface 314x. They differ in that they are covered.

  With the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, it is possible to increase the reflectance of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1). It has become. In addition, a white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is used to reflect the light emitted from the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, forward (that is, the upward direction of the staging operation unit 300). Can be enhanced. For this reason, when the area | region which shows the part number corresponding to a full-color LED, and the position where a full-color LED is arrange | positioned is black-printed as silk printing, the black-printed silk-printing makes the LED by light emission of a full-color LED. The reflectance on the mounting surface is reduced, and there is a problem that the light emission of the full-color LED is not used efficiently. Further, various decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decorative body 271, the lower left decorative body 281, the upper right decorative body 276, the lower right decorative body 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 91) The plate center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the side window decorative member 412, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are as described above. Although the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and moves his / her head (face), the line of sight changes according to the direction of the head (face), although it is formed in translucent milky white, the door frame 3 In some cases, a player may be able to visually recognize the LED mounting surface of various decorative boards provided in various decorative bodies provided in the game. Then, there arises a problem that the player sees the part number corresponding to the full-color LED that has no relation to the game at all and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

  Therefore, in the configuration of the measure such as the reflectance reduction according to the third embodiment, a part number corresponding to a full-color LED that has no relation to the game for the player is formed as a foil-cut character, and the game is completely for the player. By forming an area indicating a position where a full-color LED having no relationship is arranged as a foil-cut area, and covering the foil-cut character and the foil-cut area with a white resist solid-painted on the LED mounting surface, respectively, the An LED wiring pattern, a foil removal area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, an area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged), a number specifying the full-color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED), Is made of copper foil to make the same color, and the white color formed on the LED mounting surface By being covered by the dist, a foil removal area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, an area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged) is found, or a number specifying the full-color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED) ) Can be difficult to find.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment, a part number corresponding to a full-color LED that has no relation to the game for the player and a corresponding part number is formed as a foil-cut character, and the game is completely for the player. By forming an area indicating a position where a full-color LED having no relationship is arranged as a foil-cut area, and covering the foil-cut character and the foil-cut area with a white resist solid-painted on the LED mounting surface, respectively, the It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing due to the emission of the LED.

  The configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in reflectance according to the third embodiment can also provide the same operation and effect as the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment. That is, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the number identifying the full-color LED (that is, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED) and the foil-cut area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged). In addition to this, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface from being lowered due to the emission of the full-color LED.

  Further, in the configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectivity or the like according to the third embodiment, the step of silk printing on the LED mounting surface can be omitted. Manufacturing costs can be reduced.

  Note that, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the third embodiment, the foil-cut area indicating the mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, when the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged is formed as the foil-cut area). Alternatively, a polarity mark of a full-color LED may be added to indicate the mounting direction of the full-color LED.

  Further, in the third embodiment, the electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and the connectors that do not have a white color, whose reflectance is reduced on the LED mounting surface due to the light emission of the full-color LED, emit light of the full-color LED. However, the LED was not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface was reduced, but the area corresponding to the member arranged in front of the LED mounting surface due to the emission of the full-color LED was the LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white, or connectors that do not have white may be arranged in that region. In this case, on the LED mounting surface, a region indicating the position where the electronic component or the connector is to be arranged is a foil-cut region (not shown) excluding each terminal (not shown) and a wiring pattern (not shown) (that is, a layer (copper plane) on which the wiring pattern is formed). ), Except for each terminal and wiring pattern, is formed as a copper foil-extracted area), and near this area, a part number corresponding to an electronic component or a connector (not shown) is a foil-cut character (not shown). That is, in a layer (copper plane) on which a wiring pattern is formed, a character is formed with a wiring pattern that is a copper foil, and the character is formed as a cut character formed by removing the surrounding copper foil.

[Comparison of configuration of countermeasures such as reduction of reflectance according to the first embodiment with configuration of countermeasures such as reduction of reflectance according to fourth embodiment]
In the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b has a part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a full-color LED. The area indicating the positions where the hdLEDs 1 to hdLED 10 that are LEDs are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing. As described above, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b has the constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba, the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, as described above. Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are to be arranged are printed by silk solid printing with yellow solid lines (or black solid lines), and the part numbers corresponding to the electronic components are silk-screened near these areas. The prints are printed in yellow (or black), respectively. As described above, the area corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, is silk-screened on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. In addition to being printed with yellow dashed lines (or black dashed lines) as printing, the part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are printed in yellow (or black) as silk printing near these areas, respectively. Have been.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the first embodiment, as described above, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 has the component numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. And the area indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged, are not printed at all as silk printing. And, as described above, the constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a and the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay are provided on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the plate center decoration board 314. Areas indicating the positions where electronic components such as various dispersion resistors are to be arranged are printed as silk printing by solid yellow lines (or black solid lines) (not shown), and component numbers corresponding to the electronic components are provided near these areas. Are printed in yellow (or black) (not shown) as silk printing. As described above, the area corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, is formed on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 as described above. The printed parts are printed with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines) HSLK1 to HSLK10 (not shown) as printing, and the part numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, in the vicinity of these areas HSLK1 to HSLK10 are used as silk printing. Each is printed in yellow (or black) not shown.

  On the other hand, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. The white resist-extracted character using a white resist whose part number corresponding to .about.hdLED10 is coated twice (FIG. 201 (c) shows only the white resist-extracted character as the part number corresponding to hdLED7 which is a full-color LED. ), And a region indicating the positions where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are to be arranged is a white resist removal region using a twice-coated white resist (FIG. 201 (c) shows a full color LED hdLED7). And only the white resist removal region LSLK7 is shown as a region corresponding to. It has been made. Specifically, first, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is made of a white resist as the first time of the twice-coated white resist, and the entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is formed of a white resist. It is covered (that is, the white resist is solid-painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b as the first of the twice-coated white resists). The LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b is a region indicating the position where the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged as the second time of the twice-coated white resist (the arrangement of the predetermined pin numbers is As shown in FIG. 201 (c), the fifth pin arrangement of the full color LED hdLED7 is included in the white resist removal area LSLK7 as a region corresponding to the full color LED hdLED7. A notch portion is formed at a position corresponding to the indicated notch mark.) Is masked as white resist removal regions LSLK1 to LSLK10, and the vicinity of these white resist removal regions LSLK1 to LSLK10 and leftward Or hdLED1 to hd, which are full color LEDs, In a state where the ED10 with a corresponding part numbers LED1~LED10 is masked as a white resist outline characters, the whole of the LED mounting surface 402bx on the left side under the decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. As a result, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the entire surface is covered with the first layer of white resist and the second layer of white resist is formed. The entire area is covered except for the area masked by the resist, so that the masked area is depressed as a recess, and the areas indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged are white resist removal areas LSLK1 to LSLK10. While being formed, LED1 to LED10, which are part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full color LEDs, are formed as characters without white resist.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the white resist of the first layer and the transmittance of the white resist of the second layer on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b are the same. Because of the adoption, shading occurs in the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer, and the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b passes through the second layer of white resist Looking at the underlayer (the copper foil portion and the region excluding the copper foil portion, the same applies hereinafter), the first layer of the white resist looks pale. That is, when the underlayer of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the characters without white resist in the first layer of white resist can be identified. ing.

  Note that, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating a position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is formed as a white resist removal region (not shown), and a component corresponding to the connector LDLCN is provided near this region. The number is formed as a white resist-cut character (not shown). In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the transmittance of the first-layer white resist is the same as the transmittance of the second-layer white resist. When shading occurs between the white resist of the layer and the white resist of the second layer, and the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is seen through the white resist of the second layer, the first layer The white resist on the eyes will appear pale. Thus, when the underlayer of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second-layer white resist, the white resist-extracted region in the first-layer white resist can be identified. Has become.

  Further, since the white resist is applied twice to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the white resist-exposed character and the white resist-extracted region in the first layer white resist and the second resist are formed. The refractive index of light of the white resist of the layer changes. Thus, when the base of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist-exposed characters and the white resist-extracted region in the first layer of white resist are identified. You can do it.

  The entire LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, each have a package made of white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white), and the connector LDUCN has a housing that is white (also referred to as a natural color, white). Color) that is recognized as the same color as the color). That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). The hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that covers (solid-painted) the entirety are mounted. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have white color and connectors that do not have white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color have reduced reflectivity on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of a full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, lighting inspection is individually performed on hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b (for example, 1). (For each of the LED elements that emit red (R) light, the LED element that emits green light (G), and the LED element that emits blue light (B), which constitute two full-color LEDs). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is provided in the vicinity of the plurality of check pins, with a white resist removal character not shown. It is formed as. The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thus, when the operator performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other, and the various states can be inspected. Some of the plurality of check pins can check the content of serial data to the constant current drive circuit 402bax or the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 202, on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative substrate 402b, as shown in FIG. 202, the constant current driving circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current driving circuit 402ba, and the resistors Rr, Rb of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay, An area indicating a position where electronic components such as Rg and various dispersion resistors (not shown) are to be arranged is formed as a white resist-extracted area using a twice-coated white resist similarly to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative board 402b. In addition, in the vicinity of these regions, the component numbers corresponding to the electronic components are formed as white resist removal characters using a twice-coated white resist similarly to the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative board 402b. . Specifically, first, the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is the first of the twice-coated white resists, and the entire LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is white. The resist is covered with the resist (that is, the white resist is solid-painted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b as the first of the twice-coated white resists). The LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is, for example, a region indicating the position where the constant current drive circuit 402bax is to be disposed (the predetermined pin number arrangement) 202. In the white resist removal area LSLKa as an area corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax shown in FIG. 202, the first pin and the 36th pin of the constant current drive circuit 402bax are provided. A cutout portion is formed at a position corresponding to the cutout mark indicating the arrangement.) Is masked as white resist cutout region LSLKa, and a constant current is present near these white resist cutout region LSLKa and upward. IC1 (see FIG. 202A), which is a part number corresponding to the drive circuit 402bax, is a white resist. In a state that is masked as can characters, the whole of the LED non-mounting surface 402by the left under the decorative substrate 402b is covered with a white resist. As a result, a two-layer white resist is formed on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b in the same manner as the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The entire area is covered with the white resist and the entire area is covered except for the area masked with the second layer of white resist, so that the masked area is depressed as a recess, and corresponds to the constant current drive circuit 402bax. In addition, a white resist removal area LSLKa is formed as an area to be performed, and a part number IC1 corresponding to the constant current drive circuit 402bax is formed as a white resist removal character.

  Note that the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is a white resist (not shown) in which an area indicating a position where electronic components such as the resistors Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 402bay and various dispersion resistors (not shown) are arranged. In the vicinity of this area, the part numbers corresponding to the resistors Rr, Rb, and Rg mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b have white resist removal characters R1, R2 (not shown). Part numbers corresponding to electronic parts such as resistors and capacitors (not shown), which are formed as R3 and are not shown, are formed as white resist removal letters (not shown). On the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, a region indicating a position where the connector LDLCN is arranged is formed as a white resist-extracted region (not shown), and a part number corresponding to the connector LDLCN is provided near this region. It is formed as a character (not shown) without white resist.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the first-layer white resist and the transmittance of the second-layer white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are the same. , The shading occurs between the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer, and the LED non-mounting surface of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b passes through the white resist of the second layer. Looking at the 402-by underlayer (the copper foil portion and the region excluding the copper foil portion, the same applies hereinafter), the first layer of the white resist looks pale. Accordingly, when the underlayer of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist formed characters formed on the first layer of white resist can be identified. And a white resist removal area can be identified.

  Also, since the white resist is applied twice to the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, the white resist-exposed characters and the white resist-extracted region in the first layer of white resist, The refractive index of light of the second layer of white resist changes. Thus, when the underlayer of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the left lower decorative substrate 402b is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist-exposed characters and the white resist-extracted region in the first layer of white resist are identified. You can do it.

  Further, the resistor, the capacitor, and the like mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower side lower decorative substrate 402b do not have a white color, and the constant current drive circuit 402bax (402bbx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has The package is made of a black resin, and the connector LDLCN is made of a resin whose housing has any one of black, brown, or blue. As described above, since electronic components such as resistors, capacitors, and ICs that do not have white color, and connectors that do not have white color have low reflectivity due to light emission of full-color LEDs, the LED non-mounting surface Has been implemented.

  In the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b are solid-coated with white resist. This increases the reflectance of the full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 to the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1) by emitting white solid resist on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. You can do it.

  In the configuration of measures against a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, as shown in FIG. 201B, hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are provided on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. The corresponding part number is formed as a white resist-exposed character using a twice-coated white resist, and a region indicating the position where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged uses the double-coated white resist. It is formed as a white resist removal area. Specifically, first, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is the first of two coats of white resist, and the entire LED mounting face 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is made of white resist. It is covered (that is, the white resist is solid-painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish substrate 314 on the center of the dish as the first of the twice-coated white resists). The LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is an area indicating a position where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are to be arranged (the arrangement of the predetermined pin numbers is the second time) in the white resist applied twice. For example, in the white resist removal area HSLK7 as an area corresponding to the hLED7 which is a full-color LED, a notch mark for instructing the arrangement of the fifth pin of the hLED7 which is a full-color LED is included. Notches are formed at corresponding positions.) Are masked as white resist removal regions HSLK1 to HSLK10, and hLED1 which is a full-color LED near these white resist removal regions HSLK1 to HSLK10 and to the right. LED which is a part number corresponding to ~ hLED10 ~LED10 is in a state of being masked as white resist outline characters, the whole of the LED mounting surface 314x of the disc center on the decorative substrate 314 is covered by a white resist. Thus, although a two-layer white resist is formed on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the entire surface is covered with the first layer white resist and the second layer white resist is formed. By covering the entire area except for the area masked by the resist, the masked area is depressed as a recess, and the areas indicating the positions where the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are to be arranged are white resist removal areas HSLK1 to HSLK10. In addition, the LED1 to LED10, which are the part numbers corresponding to the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10, are formed as the characters without white resist.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the first-layer white resist and the transmittance of the second-layer white resist on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center decoration board 314 are the same. Because of the adoption, shading occurs between the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the dish passes through the white resist of the second layer. Looking at the underlayer, the first layer of white resist looks pale. That is, when the underlayer of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is viewed through the second layer of white resist, characters without white resist in the first layer of white resist can be identified. ing.

  In addition, on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314, a region indicating a position where the connector HCN is arranged is formed as a white resist-extracted region (not shown), and a component corresponding to the connector HCN is provided near this region. The number is formed as a white resist-cut character (not shown). In the fourth embodiment, as described above, the transmittance of the first-layer white resist is the same as the transmittance of the second-layer white resist. Shading occurs between the white resist of the layer and the white resist of the second layer. When the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the dish is viewed through the white resist of the second layer, the first layer is formed. The white resist on the eyes will appear pale. Accordingly, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second layer of white resist, a white resist-extracted region in the first layer of white resist can be identified. Has become.

  In addition, since the white resist is applied twice to the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the white resist removal character and the white resist removal area in the first layer white resist and the second resist are removed. The refractive index of light of the white resist of the layer changes. Thus, when the base of the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist-exposed characters and the white resist-extracted region in the first layer of white resist are identified. You can do it.

  In addition, the entire LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is covered with a white resist. HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, each package is made of a white resin (a color recognized as being the same color as white), and the connector HCN has a white housing (also called a natural color; Color) that is recognized as the same color as the color). In other words, the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). HLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector HCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as the same color) as a white resist that covers (solid-painted) the entirety are mounted. As described above, in the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have a white color and connectors that do not have a white color are completely mounted on the LED mounting surface 314 x of the plate 314 on the center of the plate. It has not been. In other words, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color, and connectors that do not have a white color have reduced reflectivity on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of a full-color LED. Not implemented at all.

  On the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, lighting inspection is performed individually on hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 (for example, 1). (For each of the LED elements that emit red (R) light, the LED element that emits green light (G), and the LED element that emits blue light (B), which constitute one full-color LED). A plurality of check pins (not shown) are formed as test pads (or through holes) connected to the wiring pattern, and a part number corresponding to each of the plurality of check pins is provided near the plurality of check pins. It is formed as. The check pins are not coated with white resist. Thus, when the operator performing the inspection brings the probe (not shown) into contact with the check pin, the probe (not shown) and the check pin are electrically connected to each other, and the various states can be inspected. Some of the plurality of check pins can confirm the contents of the serial data to the constant current drive circuit 314ax or the constant current drive circuit 314bx.

  On the other hand, the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center decoration board 314 has a constant current drive circuit 314ax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 314a, the resistances Rr, Rb, Rg of the maximum current setting circuit 314ay, and various dispersion resistors not shown. Similarly to the LED mounting surface 314x of the upper plate 314, a region indicating the position at which electronic components are to be disposed is formed as a white resist removal region using a twice-coated white resist. In the vicinity, a component number corresponding to the electronic component is formed as a white resist-extracted character using a twice-coated white resist, similarly to the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314.

  In the fourth embodiment, the transmittance of the first-layer white resist and the transmittance of the second-layer white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center decoration board 314 are the same. , The shading occurs between the white resist of the first layer and the white resist of the second layer, and the LED non-mounting surface of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the plate is passed through the white resist of the second layer. Looking at the base of 314y, the white resist of the first layer looks faint. Thereby, when the underlayer of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the dish is seen through the second layer of white resist, the white resist-extracted characters formed on the first layer of white resist can be identified. And a white resist removal area can be identified.

  In addition, since the white resist is applied twice to the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314, the white resist removal characters and the white resist removal area in the first layer of white resist, The refractive index of light of the second layer of white resist changes. Thus, when the underlayer of the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is viewed through the second layer of white resist, the white resist-exposed characters and the white resist-extracted region in the first layer of white resist are identified. You can do it.

  Further, the resistor, the capacitor, and the like mounted on the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 do not have a white color, and the constant current driving circuit 314ax (314bx) integrated on one semiconductor chip has The package is made of black resin. As described above, the electronic components such as the resistor and the capacitor having no white color are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface because the reflectance due to the emission of the full-color LED is reduced.

  In the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative board 314 are solid-coated with a white resist. Accordingly, the solid color white resist applied to the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative board 314 reflects light emitted from the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, forward (that is, the upward direction of the rendering operation unit 300). The rate can be increased.

  As described above, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the first embodiment, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b includes the part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full-color LEDs, and the full-color LED. And the area indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10 are arranged is not printed at all as silk printing, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the plate 314 above the plate center is a component corresponding to the hLED1 to hLED10 which are full-color LEDs. While the numbers and the regions indicating the positions where the full-color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are arranged are not printed at all as silk printing, the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the fourth embodiment has the left side. The LED mounting surface 402bx of the side lower decorative substrate 402b is -The part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are LEDs, are formed as white resist-exposed characters using a twice-coated white resist, and the region indicating the position where the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, are arranged is twice. It is formed as a white resist removal area using a painted white resist, and the LED mounting surface 314x of the decoration substrate 314 on the center of the plate is coated twice with the component numbers corresponding to hLED1 to hLED10 which are full color LEDs. And a region indicating a position where the full color LEDs hLED1 to hLED10 are to be arranged is formed as a white resist-removed region using a twice-coated white resist. Are different in that .

  With the white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b, it is possible to increase the reflectance of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 toward the front (that is, the front side of the pachinko machine 1). It has become. In addition, a white resist solidly painted on the LED mounting surface 314x of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314 is used to reflect the light emitted from the hLED1 to hLED10, which are full-color LEDs, forward (that is, the upward direction of the staging operation unit 300). Can be enhanced. For this reason, when the area | region which shows the part number corresponding to a full-color LED, and the position where a full-color LED is arrange | positioned is black-printed as silk printing, the black-printed silk-printing makes the LED by light emission of a full-color LED. The reflectance on the mounting surface is reduced, and there is a problem that the light emission of the full-color LED is not used efficiently. Further, various decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 (for example, the upper left decorative body 271, the lower left decorative body 281, the upper right decorative body 276, the lower right decorative body 286, and the unit front cover 312 shown in FIG. 91) The plate center upper decorative body 312a and the dish center lower decorative body 312b, the door frame left side decorative body 404, the side window decorative member 412, the door frame right side decorative body 419, and the door frame top decorative body 453) are as described above. Although the player is seated in front of the pachinko machine 1 and moves his / her head (face), the line of sight changes according to the direction of the head (face), although it is formed in translucent milky white, the door frame 3 In some cases, a player may be able to visually recognize the LED mounting surface of various decorative boards provided in various decorative bodies provided in the game. Then, there arises a problem that the player sees the part number corresponding to the full-color LED that has no relation to the game at all and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is arranged.

  Therefore, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist removal character using a white resist in which a part number corresponding to a full-color LED having no relation to the game at all and a corresponding part number is applied twice. By forming a region indicating a position where a full-color LED, which has no relation to the game for the player, at all, as a white resist removal region using a twice-coated white resist, the mounting position of the full-color LED is formed. It is difficult to find out a white resist removal area indicating the full color LED (that is, an area indicating the position where the full color LED is arranged) or find a number specifying the full color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full color LED). Can be.

  Further, in the configuration of the countermeasures such as a decrease in reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, a white resist-exposed character using a white resist in which a part number corresponding to a full-color LED having no relation to the game for the player and a corresponding part number is applied twice. By forming a region indicating a position where a full-color LED, which has no relation to the game for the player at all, is arranged as a white resist-extracted region using a twice-coated white resist, the light emission of the full-color LED It is possible to prevent the reflectance on the LED mounting surface from decreasing.

  Also in the configuration of the countermeasure such as the reflectance reduction according to the fourth embodiment, the same operation and effect as the configuration of the countermeasure such as the reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment can be obtained. That is, a number specifying a full-color LED (that is, a part number corresponding to the full-color LED) or a white resist-extracted area using a twice-painted white resist indicating a mounting position of the full-color LED (that is, a position where the full-color LED is arranged) ) Can be made difficult for a player to visually recognize, and the reflectance of the LED mounting surface due to the emission of the full-color LED can be prevented from lowering.

  Moreover, in the configuration of the countermeasure such as a decrease in the reflectance according to the fourth embodiment, the step of silk printing can be omitted on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface, respectively. The reduction in the number of steps can contribute to lowering the substrate manufacturing cost.

  In the fourth embodiment, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have a white color and a connector that does not have a white color have a reduced reflectance on the LED mounting surface due to light emission of the full-color LED. Is not mounted on the LED mounting surface at all because the reflectance on the LED mounting surface is reduced by the LED. However, in the LED mounting surface by full-color LED emission, the region corresponding to the member arranged in front is the LED. If it is difficult to contribute to the reflectance on the mounting surface, electronic components such as resistors and capacitors that do not have white, and connectors that do not have white may be arranged in that region. In this case, a region indicating a position where electronic components such as a resistor and a capacitor (not shown) to be mounted on the LED mounting surface and a connector are arranged is formed as a terminal (not shown) and a white resist removal region (not shown). In addition, a component number corresponding to an electronic component such as a resistor and a capacitor (not shown) mounted on the LED mounting surface and a connector is formed as a white resist-cut character (not shown).

  Further, in the fourth embodiment, although two layers of white resist are formed on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the decorative substrate, the entire surface is covered with the first layer of white resist, The entire area is covered except for the area masked by the second layer of white resist, so that the masked area is depressed as a recess, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED and the connector are arranged is formed as a white resist-free area. Although the part numbers corresponding to the full-color LED and the connector are formed as the white resist-exposed characters, the white resist-extracted region and the white resist-extracted characters may be formed by using another method. . For example, after the white resist is solid-coated once or plural times on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the decorative substrate, before the white resist is dried, a region indicating a position where a full-color LED or a connector is arranged. A method of forming a white resist removal area by pressing a plate, and forming a white resist removal character by pressing a plate indicating a part number corresponding to a full-color LED or a connector, an LED mounting surface of a decorative board and After the white resist is solid-coated once or more than once on the LED non-mounting surface, the white resist is dried, and then, by laser irradiation, an area indicating a position where a full-color LED or a connector is arranged is defined as a white resist-extracted area. Form the part number corresponding to the full color LED and connector And a method of forming as outline characters.

  Incidentally, conventionally, there have been proposed gaming machines provided with various substrates that can be supplied with power from a power supply substrate and control illuminations (for example, JP-A-2006-1921989 (FIG. 8)). By the way, in a gaming machine, a line for transmitting power and a line for transmitting a control signal to various boards are routed, and as the length of the lines becomes longer, various boards may be affected by external noise and malfunction. was there.

  Conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a front frame configured to cover a window which is opened forward and backward with a see-through protective plate on a gaming board (for example, JP-A-2006-1921989 (paragraph [0014]). , And FIG. 1)). By the way, by enlarging the game area formed on the game board, the thickness of the left and right sides of the front frame is reduced, so that the decorative board accommodated in the left and right sides also has a strip shape. In addition, since the display device and the movable body are provided on the game board, the area occupied by the display device and the movable body in the game board is increased, so that the decorative board provided on the game board also has a strip shape. However, when the light emission control means for controlling the light emitting means is provided on the strip-shaped decorative substrate, there is a problem that it is difficult to secure an area for drawing out the wiring from the light emission control means to the light emitting means.

  Conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine provided with a movable accessory device which is arranged in a standby manner in front of and below a display screen of an effect display device and operates at the time of an effect (for example, JP-A-2015-058064). Gazette (paragraph [0040], FIG. 4, FIG. 8, and FIG. 9). In the movable accessory device, a decorative substrate on which a light emitting unit facing the back surface of the light emitting unit (lens) on the design surface is mounted. However, there is a risk that the player may visually recognize a number specifying a light emitting unit mounted on a decorative board that has no relation to the game, an auxiliary line indicating a mounting position of the light emitting unit, or the like through the light emitting unit.

  In addition, a game machine to which a decorative board on which a light emitting unit is mounted has been conventionally proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-154676 (paragraph [0019], FIG. 5)). A variety of effects using the light emitting effect by such light emitting means are provided to the player. However, when the light emitted from the light emitting means is reflected by the mounting surface of the decorative board, the reflectance is reduced due to a number specifying the light emitting means mounted on the decorative board, an auxiliary line indicating the mounting position of the light emitting means, and the like. It was difficult to make the substrate a bright light emitting surface.

[12. Decorative boards for game boards]
Next, among the decorative boards provided in the game board 5, a decorative board on which a magnetic type magnetic pole change detection circuit is mounted will be described in detail with reference to FIG. FIG. 203 is a block diagram showing an example of a decorative substrate provided with a magnetic type magnetic pole change detection circuit and the like.

  First, among the decorative boards provided on the game board 5, as the decorative board on which the magnetic type magnetic pole change detection circuit is mounted, as described above, the back upper left movable decorative body in the back left effect unit 3300 of the back unit 3000 A back left upper front decoration board 3311a on which a magnetic back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab for detecting the standby position (original position) of the rotation position of the front decoration section 3312 of 3310 and a back left effect of the back unit 3000 are mounted. A back lower left front pole decorative substrate 3321a on which a magnetic back lower left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3321ab for detecting a standby position (original position) of the rotational position of the front decorative portion 3322 of the rear lower left movable decorative body 3320 in the unit 3300 is mounted; , The rotational position of the preceding decorative portion 3412 of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 in the back right rendering unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 The back upper right front decorative board 3411a on which the magnetic back right upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab for detecting the standby position (original position) is mounted, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 in the back right effecting unit 3400 of the back unit 3000 There is a back lower right pre-decoration board 3421a on which a magnetic back lower right magnetic pole change detection circuit 3421ab for detecting the standby position (original position) of the rotation position of the pre-decoration section 3422 is mounted.

  In the present embodiment, the back left upper front decoration board 3311a, the back left lower front decoration board 3321a, the back upper right front decoration board 3411a, and the back right lower front decoration board 3421a have the same circuit configuration and the LED mounting surface. And the arrangement of the LED non-mounting surface is the same (the type of electronic components and the package are the same), and the countermeasures such as the reflectance reduction on the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface are also the same. The upper left front decorative board 3311a will be described.

  The back upper left first-stage decorative board 3311a receives, via the panel drive board 1720, the light emission data PSDAT1 and the clock signal PSCLK1, which are the door frame side serial system serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided in the peripheral control board 1510, respectively. ing. In addition, the upper left back decorative board 3311a is electrically connected to the + 12V power supply line of the peripheral control board 1510 through the panel drive board 1720, and receives + 12V DC, and the ground (GND) of the peripheral control board 1510. ) Is electrically connected to the line and grounded to ground (GND). The upper left back decorative board 3311a may be configured to be electrically connected directly to the + 12V power supply line of the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 183 so that DC + 12V is input. It may be configured to be directly electrically connected to the ground (GND) line and grounded to the ground (GND).

  The back upper left decorative board 3311a includes a back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, an LED constant current drive circuit 3311ac, a heat distribution circuit 3311ad, and eight full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8).

  The back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is capable of detecting a change in the magnetic pole, and mainly includes a linear power supply 3311aba, a hall element 3311abb, an amplifier circuit 3311abc, a Schmitt circuit 3311abd, an output current limiting circuit 3311abe, and an FET 3311abf. Configured as open drain output.

  The linear power supply 3311aba is a circuit to which DC + 12V is input from a + 12V power supply line to create and supply an internal power supply to be used in the rear upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab. The internal power is supplied to the Hall element 3311abb, the amplifier circuit 3311abc, and the Schmitt circuit 3311abd, and can operate. The source terminals of the linear power supply 3311aba, the amplifier circuit 3311abc, the Schmitt circuit 3311abd, and the FET 3311abf are grounded to a ground (GND) line.

  The Hall element 3311abbb can detect the strength of the magnetic flux density, and outputs an analog signal whose voltage changes according to the strength of the magnetic flux density to the amplifier circuit 3311abc. The amplification circuit 3311abc amplifies the analog signal from the Hall element 3311abbb and outputs the signal to the Schmitt circuit 3311abd. The Schmitt circuit 3311abd adjusts the waveform of the signal amplified by the amplifier circuit 3311abc and outputs the adjusted signal to the gate terminal of the FET 3311abf that is the final stage. The FET 3311abf outputs the logic of the detection signal ULORG from its drain terminal according to a signal from the Schmitt circuit 3311abd input to its gate terminal. Since the FET 3311abf is used as an open drain output, the drain current to the drain terminal of the FET 3311abf is limited by the output current limiting circuit 3311ab.

  The back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab switches the logic of the detection signal ULORG from HI to LOW when the magnet approaches the Hall element 3311abbb and the magnetic flux density in the direction perpendicular to the plane of the Hall element 3311abb becomes larger than the operating point (Bop). When the magnet moves away from the surface of the Hall element 3311abb and the magnetic flux density becomes smaller than the return point (Brp), the logic of the detection signal ULORG is switched from LOW to HI.

  The back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is arranged such that its Hall element 3311abb is located in the vicinity of the rotation axis of the preceding decorative portion 3312 shown in FIG. Have been.

  In the present embodiment, the back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is a small electronic component integrated on one semiconductor chip, and as a type of the IC package, the planar shape is a rectangular shape (horizontal length: 2). It is a surface mount type (SMD, height: 1.1 mm) having a height of 0.9 mm and a vertical length of 1.6 mm, and is a so-called SOT. Since the back-upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab is a small electronic component, the back-left upper-front decorative board 3311a (that is, the upper-left back) of the preceding decorative section 3312 attached to the right side of the base decorative section 3311 shown in FIG. The distance dimension (the distance dimension (clearance) between the magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab and the left side of the preceding decorative section 3312 which is the bottom surface of the triangular pyramid-shaped preceding decorative section 3312 shown in FIG. In this embodiment, the length is about 1.5 mm.) Can be reduced.

  In addition, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 (similar to the lower left lower movable movable body 3320, the lower right upper movable movable body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420) is a small movable decorative body. An optical underside rotation detection sensor 3120 or the like for detecting a standby position (original position) of the rear stage decorative portion 3116 and the middle stage decorative portion 3118 of the underside movable decorative body 3110 in the underside production unit 3100 of the underside unit 3000 shown in the drawing. As described above, a large-sized optical sensor is used as a sensor for detecting the standby position (original position) of the movable decorative member 3312 (the same applies to the decorative members 3322, 3412, and 3422). This is structurally difficult.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, a small electronic component called a back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab (the same applies to the back left lower front decorative board 3321a, the upper right front decorative board 3411a, and the lower right lower front decorative board 3421a). By using a magnetic sensor), it is employed as a sensor for detecting the standby position (original position) of the preceding decorative portion 3312 (the same applies to the preceding decorative portions 3322, 3412, 3422) which is a movable body. Although this magnetic sensor has a greater variation in detection than the above-described optical sensor, in the present embodiment, the first-stage decorative portion 3312 (first-stage decorative portions 3322, 3412, and 3422), which are movable bodies, are also similar. )), Even if the standby position (original position) is displaced and displaced, the dislocation is small and the probability of giving the player a sense of discomfort is low.

  The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 (the same applies to the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320, the lower right upper movable movable body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420) moves in the left and right direction, moves in the up and down direction, Since the step decoration part 3312 (first-stage decoration parts 3322, 3412, and 3422) rotates, such a back upper left movable decorative body 3310 (back lower left lower movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and lower right lower back) are provided. During the operation of the movable decorative body 3420), the back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab (the back left lower front decorative board 3321a, the upper right front decorative board 3411a, and the lower right front decorative board 3421a are also the same). In some cases, light from various light sources (a plurality of light sources) provided on the game board 5 may be incident on the LED mounting surface from multiple directions.

  For this reason, the above-described optical is provided on the LED mounting surface of the back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab (the same applies to the back left lower front decorative board 3321a, the upper right front decorative board 3411a, and the lower right front decorative board 3421a). When a sensor of the type is mounted, light from various light sources (a plurality of light sources) provided on the game board 5 may be erroneous detection as disturbance light (light pollution).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the magnetic sensor described above is employed for such a reason. Therefore, erroneous detection of the standby position (original position) of the preceding decorative portion 3312 (the preceding decorative portions 3322, 3412, 3422) due to the light emitted from various light emitting sources (plural light emitting sources) provided on the game board 5 is performed. Can be prevented.

  In the present embodiment, the optical sensors provided in the various effect units described above are configured such that light from various light sources (a plurality of light sources) provided on the game board 5 is blocked by other members (or disturbance light). (Light pollution is reduced to a degree that does not cause light pollution), and there is no risk of erroneous detection due to the light.

  The LED constant current drive circuit 3311ac is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left decorative board 283 shown in FIG. 194, and supplies a constant current to the full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8). And a maximum current setting circuit 3311ac that can set the maximum current of the full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8). It is configured. The constant current drive circuit 3311ac is the same circuit as the constant current drive circuit 283x in the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left decorative board 283 shown in FIG. 194, and the game board side serial system (light emission) from the peripheral control board 1510. Based on the data PSDAT1 and the clock signal PSCLK1, control is performed to supply a constant current to the full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8). As described above, the constant current drive circuit 3311ac is a sink (suction) type, and generates heat by sucking a constant current flowing through the full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8). Therefore, the heat generation of the constant current driving circuit 3311ac can be distributed by part of the heat generated by the constant current driving circuit 3311ac. The heat distribution circuit 3311ad is the same circuit as the heat distribution circuit 283c in the LED constant current driving circuit 283a of the lower left decorative board 283 shown in FIG. 194.

  The light emission data PSDAT1 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 has the same configuration as the above-described light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The light emission data PSDAT1 is data for specifying a light emission mode, and is composed of ID information and gradation information. The ID information is information indicating which one of the LED constant current driving circuits to designate from among the LED constant current driving circuits provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation is designated from gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127.

  As described above, the LED constant current drive circuit 3311ac is the same circuit as the LED constant current drive circuit 283a of the lower left dish decoration board 283 shown in FIG. 194, and a detailed description thereof will be omitted.

  In addition, the rear left upper front decorative board 3311a has eight full-color LEDs 3311aa (1) to 3311aa (8) and a rear left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab on the LED mounting surface. The LED constant current drive circuit 3311ac and the like are mounted on the LED non-mounting surface. The back upper left first-stage decorative substrate 3311a includes the above-described configuration for measures such as the reflectance reduction according to the first embodiment, the configuration for the measures such as the reflectance reduction according to the second embodiment, and the reflectance according to the third embodiment. Either the configuration of the countermeasure such as the reduction and the configuration of the countermeasure such as the reflectance reduction according to the fourth embodiment can be adopted.

  Incidentally, conventionally, there has been proposed a gaming machine in which the production operation of a display device or a decoration device provided on a game board is controlled by a production control device (control means) (for example, JP-A-2006-154676 (paragraph [ 0071], FIG. 3, and FIG. 22)). By the way, the game board has an environment that is strongly affected by electromagnetic wave noise. Due to the structure of the game board, the environment affected by the electromagnetic wave noise among various wirings connected to the effect control device (control means) is present. If electromagnetic wave noise enters another wiring via the routed wiring, the effect control device (control means) may malfunction due to the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise from the other wiring.

  Further, conventionally, a gaming machine having a movable body in a gaming board has been proposed (for example, Japanese Patent Application Laid-Open No. 2006-154676 (paragraph [0067], FIGS. 18 and 19)). The movable body has a protruding detection piece, and the detection piece is detected by an optical detection switch provided separately from the movable body to specify the position of the movable body. By the way, when an optical detection switch is provided on a movable body to detect a specific position of the movable body, the light is emitted by a plurality of light-emitting bodies provided on a game board while the movable body is operating. There is a possibility that disturbance light is incident on the optical detection switch, and the detection switch erroneously detects the light.

[13. Brightness setting of indirect light and direct light]
The light guide plate such as the light guide plate 2601 in the panel plate 1110 of FIG. 143 and the display effect unit 2600 of FIG. 151 has a plurality of LEDs (toward the peripheral surface of the panel plate 1110 of FIG. 151, a plurality of LEDs 2611 for the first pattern 2610 that are illuminated and decorated by irradiating light from the upper surface of the light guide plate 2601 in FIG. 151, and light from the right side of the light guide plate 2601. Of the second pattern 2620 that is light-emission-decorated when the light is incident on the light guide plate 2021. Hereinafter, there are times when the LEDs are referred to as “LEDs used as indirect light”.) Is irradiated.

  Various LEDs provided in various units on the door frame side such as the effect operation unit 300, the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410, and the door frame top unit 450 provided in the door frame 3 in FIG. Other LEDs that are not used in the light guide plate such as various LEDs provided in various units on the game board side, such as the underside production unit 3100, the underside production unit 3200, the back left production unit 3300, and the back right production unit 3400 provided on the panel 5. (Hereinafter, it may be described as “LED used as direct light”) is irradiated as direct light. Therefore, if the luminance of the LED used as the indirect light and the luminance of the LED used as the direct light are the same, the indirect light from the light guide plate is darker than the direct light. The player wants to adjust the current brightness of the various LEDs provided on the game board 5 and the door frame 3 to be dark when the current brightness is too bright, and to brighten the brightness when the current brightness is not too dark.

  Incidentally, various LEDs are mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side, and one or a plurality of LED constant current drive circuits are mounted thereon. As described above, this LED constant current drive circuit controls the brightness (gradation) of the LED from the extinguishing to the lighting (maximum luminance) in a total of 128 levels from 0 (zero) to 127. Is what you can do.

  The light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 are data for designating the light emission mode, and include ID information and gradation information, as described above. I have. The ID information is information indicating which one of the LED constant current drive circuits to be designated among the LED constant current drive circuits provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation is designated from gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127.

  Also, as described above, the light emission data PSDAT1 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510 has the same configuration as the light emission data SDAT1 and SDAT2 serially output from the peripheral control IC 1510a provided on the peripheral control board 1510. The light emission data PSDAT1 is data for designating a light emission mode, and includes ID information and gradation information. The ID information is information indicating which one of the LED constant current driving circuits to designate from among the LED constant current driving circuits provided on each decorative board of the game board 5. The gradation information is information indicating which gradation is designated from gradation 0 (zero) to gradation 127.

  The gradient specified in the above-described gradation information is used in the effect operation unit monitoring process in the peripheral control unit steady-state process of the peripheral control unit power-on process described later performed by the peripheral control IC 1510a and the lamp pallet setting process in the received command analysis process. Is set. In this lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as direct light and the brightness of the LED used as indirect light are determined based on a lamp pallet setting table including a specified luminance value, a normal pallet value, and a special pallet value. , Respectively. The peripheral control IC 1510a analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads (extracts) the emission mode generation schedule data from the control ROM 1510b based on the analyzed various commands, and executes a lamp pallet setting process. Then, the above-mentioned gradation information can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and during the demonstration (demonstration performed in a waiting state of the player) or during the progress of the production ( For example, during a predetermined period of a specific effect), the above-described gradation information set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be updated by executing the lamp pallet setting process.

  Here, the luminance designation value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value that constitute the lamp pallet setting table will be briefly described. As the specified luminance value, one specified luminance value may be set in a range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) luminance specified value which is the minimum luminance (unlit) to the 31st specified luminance value which is the maximum luminance. The normal pallet value and the special pallet value, which will be described later, are preset in correspondence with the 0th (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value. The player (or a clerk such as a clerk of a game hall) operates the operable effect operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303) to operate the first luminance designated value to have the 31st luminance which becomes the maximum luminance. One specified luminance value can be set up to the specified value.

  For example, a player (or a clerk such as a clerk of a game hall) rotates the rotation operation unit 302 clockwise, and the 0th (zero) luminance designation at which the current luminance temporarily becomes the minimum luminance (extinguished). When the brightness is set to the first brightness specification value at which the brightness is next higher than the value, a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear formula) from the first brightness specification value to the 31st brightness specification value which is the maximum brightness is set. Along with the tone curve or the spline curve tone curve), the brightness of the LED used as indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as direct light are changed to be high, When the clockwise rotation operation is performed and the current luminance is set to the maximum luminance, a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, from the 31st luminance designated value which is the maximum luminance to the first luminance designated value) Linear tone curve, or along the spline curve tone curve), and the LED used as an indirect light luminance changes to low, and brightness of the LED to be used as a direct light. When the player (or a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall) rotates the rotary operation unit 302 to select a desired luminance and presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired luminance is determined. In the present embodiment, a case where a player (or a clerk such as a clerk of a game hall) can set the luminance during a demonstration (demonstration effect performed in a player waiting state) or an effect is prepared in advance. At this time, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall) can set the desired brightness by operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303. Further, when a player (or a clerk such as a clerk of a game hall) operates the rotation operation unit 302 at a predetermined position in the display area of the effect display device 1600 during the progress of the demonstration or the effect, the first luminance designated value to the By displaying a bar-shaped indicator indicating the position up to the 31 luminance designated value, the desired luminance of the player (or a clerk of a game hall or the like) is visually shown as an image of the desired luminance. You can do it. Further, in the present embodiment, the fourteenth luminance designated value is set as an initial value (default).

  Normally, the pallet value is such that the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side which are directly irradiated as light is set as the above-mentioned gradation information. is there. As the normal palette value, one of 17 levels is selected from the minimum palette value (20%), which is the minimum value, to the maximum palette value (100%), which is the maximum value, in 5% steps, and one of the 17 levels is selected. In a range of 32 levels from the 0th (zero) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value, which is the designated value, a palette value corresponding to one luminance designation is determined by a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve). , Or a spline-like tone curve).

  The minimum pallet value (20%) is a maximum pallet value corresponding to one luminance specification in a range of 32 steps from the 0th (zero) luminance specification value to the 31st luminance specification value which is the above-mentioned luminance specification value. (100%) is a value of 20%, and the values (%) described in parentheses of the other pallet values are also 0th (zero) luminance designation values, which are the above-mentioned luminance designation values. Within the range of 32 steps up to the 31st luminance specification value, the value is for the maximum pallet value (100%) corresponding to one luminance specification.

  In the present embodiment, the maximum pallet value (100%) is previously selected as the normal pallet value for various decorative substrates provided on the game board side and the various decorative substrates provided on the door frame side, which are irradiated directly as light. Of the various decorative boards provided on the game board side which are set as the above-mentioned gradation information and which are radiated as direct light, a specific decorative board (not shown) (LED which is dazzling to the player) is set on the pallet. The value (50%) is selected in advance and set as the above-mentioned gradation information.

  In the special pallet value, the brightness of various LEDs mounted on various decorative substrates used for the light guide plate irradiated as indirect light is set as the above-mentioned gradation information. The special pallet value, unlike the normal pallet value, exists in only one step and is one of 32 levels ranging from the 0th (0th) luminance designation value to the 31st luminance designation value which is the above-mentioned luminance designation value. The palette value corresponding to the luminance designation is set as the above-mentioned gradation information along a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve).

  As described above, if the luminance of the LED used as the indirect light is the same as the luminance of the LED used as the direct light, the indirect light from the light guide plate is darker than the direct light. Therefore, in the present embodiment, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is set using a special pallet value instead of the normal pallet value set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light. It is possible to visually recognize the state in which the light guide plate emits light by indirect light by setting the first luminance designated value at which the luminance is next to the 0th (zero) luminance designated value which is the minimum luminance (extinguished). The lowest possible luminance is set to a value substantially equal to the eighteenth luminance designated value when the normal pallet value is set to the maximum pallet value (100%), and ranges from the first luminance designated value to the 31st luminance designated value. Among them, the pallet value corresponding to one specified luminance value is set according to a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve).

  As described above, in the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as the direct light and the LED used as the indirect light are determined based on the lamp pallet setting table including the specified luminance value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. And the brightness of the LED used as direct light when the player (or a staff such as a clerk of a game hall) operates the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 with respect to the luminance of the LED used as the direct light. While being set along the normal pallet value corresponding to the designated value, the player (or a staff member such as a clerk of a game hall) controls the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit with respect to the brightness of the LED used as indirect light. The value is set in accordance with the special pallet value corresponding to the designated luminance value by the operation of step 303. Accordingly, when the player feels that the brightness of the LED used as the direct light is dazzling, and reduces the brightness by operating the rotary operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, the LED is used as the direct light. The luminance of the LED used is set to the minimum luminance (that is, the first luminance specification value at the next higher luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance specification value at which the minimum luminance (turns off)), and in conjunction with this, Therefore, the luminance of the LED used as the indirect light is also set to the minimum luminance (that is, the first luminance specification value at which the luminance is next to the 0th (zero) luminance specification value that is the minimum luminance (extinguished)). Also, the luminance of the LED used as indirect light is set to a value substantially equal to the eighteenth luminance designated value when the normal pallet value is set to the maximum pallet value (100%). Because, the light guide plate lowest luminance can visually recognize the state in which the emission by indirect light is set.

  In addition, the programmer who designs the light emission mode individually adjusts the brightness of the various LEDs mounted on the various decorative boards provided on the game board side and the various decorative boards provided on the door frame side for the LEDs used as direct light. Even if it is not set, the light emission mode according to the flow of the effect is set, and the flow of the effect by the light emission mode of various LEDs mounted on various decorative boards provided on the game board side and various decorative boards provided on the door frame side is set. , The normal pallet value is set to a small pallet value (for example, 50%) for a specific decorative substrate that is too dazzling (or a slightly darker luminance can produce a more effective rendering effect), and other pallet values are set. By setting the normal pallet value to the maximum pallet value (100%) for the decorative substrate, the balance of the entire light emitting mode can be changed very easily. In other words, the player (or a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall) operates the operable effect operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303) to change the first luminance designated value to the 31st luminance which becomes the maximum luminance. Even if one specified brightness value up to the specified brightness value is set, a small pallet value (for example, 50%) corresponding to one specified brightness value is set for a specific decorative board. Since one luminance designation value and the corresponding maximum pallet value (100%) are set for the other decorative substrates, the relationship between the mutually set light emission modes (bright or dark) is set. ) Can be very easily adjusted without breaking the relationship.

  Furthermore, although the brightness of the indirect light from the light guide plate is more difficult to adjust than the direct light, the LED used as the indirect light has a special pallet value different from the normal pallet value (that is, independent of the normal pallet value). Can set the luminance. Thereby, the brightness of the LED used as indirect light is controlled by the special pallet value, and the brightness of the LED used as direct light is usually controlled by the pallet value. And the brightness of the LED used as direct light can be easily adjusted.

[14. Game content]
The contents of the game played by the pachinko machine 1 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 136 and 137. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the game ball B stored in the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200 is operated by the player rotating the handle 182 of the handle unit 180 arranged at the lower right corner of the front of the door frame 3. Is driven into the upper portion of the game area 5a through the outer rail 1001 and the inner rail 1002 of the game board 5, and the game with the game ball B is started. The game ball B driven into the upper part in the game area 5a flows down either the left side or the right side of the center role 2500 depending on the driving strength. The driving strength of the game balls B can be adjusted by the amount of rotation of the handle 182, and the stronger the ball can be driven in the clockwise direction, the maximum of 100 game balls B can be continuously played in one minute. That is, the game ball B can be hit at 0.6 second intervals.

  In the game area 5a, a plurality of obstacle nails N are implanted at appropriate positions in a predetermined gauge arrangement on the front surface of the game panel 1100 (panel board 1110), and the game ball B comes into contact with the obstacle nail N. Thus, the falling speed of the game ball B is suppressed, and various movements are given to the game ball B, so that the movements can be enjoyed. In addition, in the game area 5a, in addition to the obstacle nail N, a windmill (not shown) which is rotated by the contact of the game ball B is provided at an appropriate position.

  When the game ball B driven into the upper part of the center role 2500 enters the left side of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 from the highest point in front view, it contacts the plurality of obstacle nails N, It flows down in the area on the left side of the center role 2500. Then, when the game ball B flowing down the left area of the center role 2500 enters the warp entrance 2501 opened on the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500, it is supplied to the stage 2503 from the warp exit 2502.

  The game ball B supplied to the stage 2503 rolls on the stage 2503, moves back and forth, and is discharged forward from the center in the left-right direction. When the game ball B is released from the center of the stage 2503 into the game area 5a, the portion is located right above the first starting port 2002, and is therefore received with high probability in the first starting port 2002. When the game balls B are received in the first starting port 2002, a predetermined number (for example, three) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  The game ball B released from the stage 2503 of the center role 2500 into the game area 5a may be accepted in the first starting port 2002 or the general winning opening 2001 of the starting port unit 2100.

  By the way, when the game ball B that has flowed to the left side of the center role 2500 does not enter the warp entrance 2501, it is brought to the center in the left-right direction by the side slope 2300 or the obstacle nail N, and the general winning opening 2001 of the side unit 2200. Alternatively, there is a possibility that the first start port 2002 of the start port unit 2100, the general winning opening 2001, or the like may be accepted. When the game balls B are received in the general winning opening 2001, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is done.

  On the other hand, when the game ball B hit into the upper part of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a enters the right side of the highest portion of the outer peripheral surface of the center role 2500 (so-called right-handed). , Enters the space formed by the gate space forming portion 2505 of the center role 2500, and passes through the gate portion 2003 arranged in this space with a certain probability. The game ball B flowing in the space where the gate portion 2003 is arranged is discharged from the right guide passage 2510 to the upper part of the attacker unit 2400.

  Below the downstream end of the right guide passage 2510, a general winning opening 2001 of the attacker unit 2400 is arranged. When the game ball B is received in the general winning opening 2001 and detected by the general winning opening sensor 2401, A predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls B are paid out to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633.

  By the way, when the right-playing game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 and is detected by the gate sensor 2506, a normal lottery is performed in the main control board 1310, and the normal lottery result obtained is “normal hit”. The closed second starting port 2004 of the attacker unit 2400 is opened for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 to 10 seconds), and the game ball B can be received in the second starting port 2004. . Then, when the game balls B are received in the second starting port 2004, a predetermined number (for example, four) of the game balls B are supplied to the upper plate 201 from the payout device 580 via the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Will be paid out.

  In the present embodiment, in the normal lottery performed by the game ball B passing through the gate unit 2003, a certain period of time is set from the start of the normal lottery to the suggestion of the normal lottery result (for example, 0). .01 to 60 seconds, usually also referred to as fluctuation time). The suggestion of the normal lottery result is displayed on the function display unit 1400 and the sub function display unit 2520 of the game board 5. The second start port 2004 is opened after the normal fluctuation time has elapsed.

  Note that if the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 during the period from when the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003 to when the normal lottery result is suggested, it is not possible to start suggesting the normal lottery result. The start of the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is suspended until the suggestion of the ordinary lottery result is completed. In addition, the number of reserves of the ordinary lottery result is limited to four, and if it is more than that, even if the game ball B passes through the gate unit 2003, it is discarded without suspension. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  When the game ball B is received in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment displays an advantageous gaming state (for example, “big hit”, A special lottery result that generates “medium hit”, “small hit”, “probability change (probability change)”, “time reduction (time reduction)” is performed, and the selected special lottery result is It suggests to the player over a predetermined period of time (for example, 0.1 to 360 seconds, also referred to as a special fluctuation period), and the lottery is performed by receiving the game ball B in the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004. Special lottery results include "losing", "small hit", "2R big hit", "5R big hit", "15R big hit", "probable change (probability change)", "time saving (time reduction)", " Probably variable time saving " Per "," the second big hit ", and the like.

  The special lottery results (first special lottery results and second special lottery results) drawn by receiving the game balls B into the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004 are used as special lottery results for generating an advantageous gaming state. In this case, after the elapse of the special fluctuating time, the special winning opening 2005 becomes ready to accept the game ball B in a predetermined opening / closing pattern. When the game ball B is received in the special winning opening 2005 when the special winning opening 2005 is in the open state, a predetermined number (for example, 10 or 13) is provided from the payout device 580 by the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633. Is paid out to the upper plate 201. Therefore, when the special winning opening 2005 is capable of accepting the game balls B, by allowing the special winning opening 2005 to receive the game balls B, many game balls B can be paid out and the player can be entertained. it can.

  When the special lottery result is “small hit”, the special winning opening 2005 is in an open state in which the game ball B can be received for a predetermined short time (for example, between 0.2 seconds to 0.6 seconds). Is repeated a plurality of times (for example, twice). On the other hand, when the special lottery result is “big hit”, a predetermined time (for example, about 30 seconds) elapses after the special winning opening 2005 is opened to accept the game ball B, or the special winning opening 2005 When one of the conditions of the predetermined number (for example, 10) of the game balls B is satisfied, the opening / closing pattern in which the game balls B cannot be received in the closed state (one opening / closing pattern is referred to as one round) Is repeated a predetermined number of times (a predetermined number of rounds). For example, 2 rounds for “2R jackpot”, 5 rounds for “5R jackpot”, and 15 rounds for “15R jackpot” are repeated to generate an advantageous gaming state advantageous to the player.

  In the "big hit", after the big hit game is over, the probability that a special lottery result such as "big hit" is drawn ("probable change") or the display time of the effect image indicating the special lottery result is changed. ("Time savings").

  When the special lottery result (for example, the second special lottery result) is “second big hit”, after the special winning opening 2005 can accept the game ball B in a predetermined pattern, the special game state is set to ST (special time). ). This ST is to maintain a state of certainty and time saving during a predetermined number of times of change.

  In the present embodiment, during the period from the start of the special lottery to the indication of the special lottery result drawn by the acceptance of the game ball B to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, the first starting port 2002 and the When the game ball B is received in the second starting port 2004, the suggestion of the special lottery result cannot be started. Therefore, the suggestion of the special lottery result is not started until the suggestion of the special lottery result previously drawn is completed. Suspended. The maximum number of the reserved special lottery results to be retained is up to four for the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, respectively. Even if the game ball B is accepted in 2004, the special lottery result is discarded without holding. This suppresses an increase in the burden on the game hall due to accumulation of reservations.

  This special lottery result is suggested by the function display unit 1400 and the effect display device 1600. In the function display unit 1400 and the sub function display unit 2520, the main control board 1310 is directly controlled to suggest a special lottery result. The suggestion of the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 indicates that a plurality of LEDs are repeatedly turned on and off to blink for a predetermined period of time, and thereafter, the special lottery result is indicated by a combination of the lit LEDs.

  On the other hand, the effect display device 1600 is indirectly controlled by the peripheral control board 1510 based on the control signal from the main control board 1310, and suggests a special lottery result as an effect image. The effect image suggesting the special lottery result on the effect display device 1600 is such that three pattern lines composed of a plurality of patterns are displayed side by side in the left-right direction, and each of the pattern lines is changed, and the pattern line that is variably displayed is displayed. Are sequentially stopped and displayed, and the respective picture rows are stopped and displayed such that the pictures of the three picture rows to be stopped and displayed have a combination corresponding to the special lottery result. When the special lottery result is other than "losing", after the three picture rows are stopped and each picture is stopped and displayed, a finalized image indicating the special lottery result is displayed on the effect display device 1600, and the lottery is performed. An advantageous game state (for example, a small hit game, a big hit game, etc.) according to the special lottery result occurs.

  In addition, the time indicating the special lottery result in the function display unit 1400 (the blinking time of the LED (fluctuation time)) and the time indicating the special lottery result in the effect display device 1600 (the fixed image due to the fluctuation of the pattern row is displayed). (The time until it is displayed) is different, and the function display unit 1400 and the sub function display unit 2520 are set to a longer time.

  In addition, on the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to displaying the effect image for indicating the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the effect operation in the effect operation unit 300 in the door frame 3 according to the special lottery result selected by lottery. A player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303 of the unit 301 can be performed. In the player participation type effect, the operation ring drive motor 342 can rotate or vibrate the rotation operation unit 302, assist the rotation operation, inhibit the rotation operation, and operate the operation button lifting drive motor. With 367, the pressing operation unit 303 can be raised to make it stand out, and the player's participation-type effect can be enjoyed by operating the effect operation unit 301.

  In the peripheral control board 1510, each decorative board provided on the door frame 3, each decorative board provided on the game board 5, and a back effect unit 3100 of the display effect unit 2600 and the back unit 3000, It is possible to perform a luminous production, a movable production, and the like by appropriately using the production unit 3200, the back left production unit 3300, the back right production unit 3400, and the like. It is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

  Furthermore, in the peripheral control board 1510, in a player participation type effect of operating the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303, a correct operation is performed when a player makes a mistake or does not perform an operation to be performed. To the player. Specifically, for example, when a pressing operation of the center pressing operation unit 303a is requested, the outer peripheral pressing operation unit 303b is pressed, or when the rotating operation unit 302 is rotated, the vibration is generated by the vibration speaker 354. That effect is displayed on the effect display device 1600.

  In addition, on the peripheral control board 1510, in addition to the display of the effect image for indicating the special lottery result by the effect display device 1600, the display effect unit of the table unit 2000 on the gaming board 5 in accordance with the special lottery result selected by lottery. 2600, back-side production unit 3100 of back unit 3000, back-up production unit 3200, back-left production unit 3300, back-right production unit 3400, etc., can be used to perform light-emitting production, movable production, display production, and the like. It is possible, and it is possible to entertain the player by various effects, and it is possible to suppress the player's interest in the game from decreasing.

[15. Various control processing of main control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the main control board 1310 shown in FIG. 179 in accordance with the progress of the game of the pachinko machine 1 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 204 is a flowchart showing an example of the main control-side power-on process, FIG. 205 is a flowchart showing the main control-side power-on process of FIG. 204, and FIG. 206 is an example of the main control-side timer interrupt process. It is a flowchart which shows. First, various random numbers used in the game control will be described, and then, the operation of an initial value updating type counter, main control side power-on processing, and main control side timer interrupt processing will be described.

[15-1. Various random numbers]
As various random numbers used in the game control, a big hit determination random number for use in determining whether or not to generate a big hit game state, and whether to generate a reach (reach out of reach) when the big hit game state is not generated. Reach judgment random number for use in determination, and a variable display pattern for use in determining a variable display pattern of a special symbol variably displayed on the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 A random number, a jackpot symbol random number for use in determining a jackpot symbol derived and displayed on the first special symbol indicator and the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 when generating a jackpot gaming state, and the jackpot Big hit symbol initial value determination random number for use in determining the initial value of symbol random number, function display unit when generating small hit game state 400 small hit symbol for use in determining the small hit symbol derived and displayed by the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of 400, for use in determining the initial value of the random number for this small hit symbol A random number for determining an initial value for a small hit symbol is prepared. In addition to these random numbers, a normal symbol hit determination random number for use in determining whether to open or close a movable piece capable of accepting a game ball in the second starting port 2004, and this normal symbol hit determination The random number for determining the initial value of the normal symbol hit determination for use in determining the initial value of the random number for use and the normal value for determining the variable display pattern of the normal symbol that is variably displayed on the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 A random number for a symbol variation display pattern and the like are prepared.

  Of the various random numbers used for such game control, the jackpot determination random number is updated by hardware, while the other random numbers are updated by software.

  For example, the big hit determination random number is directly updated by hardware by a main control built-in hardware random number circuit built in the main control MPU 1310a. When the main control MPU 1310a is reset, the main control built-in hardware random number circuit sets a value within a predetermined numerical range as an initial value at a high speed based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a. After successively extracting other values within the predetermined numerical range, and completing extraction of all values within the predetermined numerical range, once again extracting one value within the predetermined numerical range, the main control Based on the clock signal input to the MPU 1310a, other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted one after another. The main control built-in hard random number circuit repeatedly performs such a high-speed lottery, and the main control MPU 1310a determines the value extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit at the time of acquiring the value from the main control built-in hard random number circuit as a big hit determination random number. Is set as

  On the other hand, the counter for updating the random number for symbol determination is usually updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and the range from the minimum value to the maximum value will be described later. Each time the main control timer interrupt process is performed, the value is incremented by 1 to count up. The counter counts up from the random number for determining an initial value for normal symbol determination to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the random number for determining an initial value for normal symbol determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the normal symbol hit determination initial value determination random number is updated. Such a method of updating the counter is referred to as an “initial value update type counter”. The random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for selecting one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination. .

  In this embodiment, when the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 is operated when the power is turned on, or when the main control MPU 1310a shown in FIG. The checksum value (sum value) obtained by calculating the sum of the various information stored in the main controller as a numerical value and calculating the sum is the checksum value stored in the main control side power-off processing (power-off). When the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared, for example, when it does not coincide with the (sum value), the random number for initial value determination for symbol hit determination is usually read from the built-in nonvolatile RAM by the main control MPU 1310a. The same fixed value is always taken out from the fixed numerical value range of the counter that takes out the ID code and updates the random number for symbol hit determination based on the taken out ID code. Perform initial value derivation to output a fixed value this derivation has a mechanism to be set. That is, the same fixed value derived on the basis of the ID code by the execution of the initial value deriving process is always overwritten and updated with the random number for initial value determination for symbol hit determination. As described above, the value to be set to the random number for determining the initial value for the symbol hit determination is derived using the ID code, and the nonvolatile RAM built in the main control MPU 1310a by the manufacturer of the main control MPU 1310a. The first security measure is that the ID code is not rewritten even if an external device is used to store the ID code, and the initial value derivation process is performed when the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared. The second security measure that derives the same fixed value based on the second security measure prevents the analysis from being performed by taking two steps of security measures.

  Here, an advantage of extracting an ID code from a nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a and using the extracted ID code as a random number for determining an initial value for a normal symbol hit determination will be described. For example, a person who attempts to illegally obtain a game ball to be paid out as a prize ball obtains the game board 5 by some method and disassembles the same, and obtains an ID code previously stored in a nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a. Even if it is possible to grasp the timing when the value of the counter for updating the random number for the normal symbol hit determination and the normal symbol hit determination value coincides with the unauthorized acquisition, the ID code is unique for identifying the individual. Since the code is assigned, the ID code is completely different from the ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM incorporated in the main control MPU 1310a 'provided in the other game board 5'. In other words, in the other game board 5 ', the timing at which the value of the counter for updating the normal symbol hit determination random number matches the normal symbol hit determination value is completely different from that of the obtained game board 5. In other words, the ID code obtained by disassembling and analyzing the obtained game board 5 is useless at all in the other game board 5 ′, that is, the other pachinko machine 1 ′, and thus the ID code is analyzed by being disassembled. Even if a momentary blackout is generated at each of the obtained predetermined intervals and the game ball is passed through the gate unit 2003 of the gate unit 2300 at each of the predetermined intervals, the movable piece is opened and closed to open the game ball to the second starting port 2004. Can not generate a game state in which the game can be accepted.

[15-2. Main control side power-on processing]
First, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, the main control MPU 1310a has a circuit configuration such that a stack pointer is set to a predetermined address as a default. The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or a return address of the present routine when the subroutine is terminated and the process returns to the present routine. For example, it indicates an address on the stack for temporary storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked.

  Under the control of the main control MPU 1310a, the main control-side power-on processing is performed as shown in FIGS. When the main control-side power-on process is started, the main control MPU 1310a sets a RAM access permission (step S10). Update of the main control built-in RAM can be performed by setting the RAM access permission.

  Subsequent to step S10, the main control MPU 1310a performs initial value setting and activation setting of the main control built-in WDT (step S12). Here, a watchdog timer control register (hereinafter, referred to as a “built-in”) built in the main control MPU 1310a to set an initial value in the main control built-in WDT that monitors whether the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a is operating normally. WDT control register "). The timer setting value is set in the WDT control register), the main control built-in WDT is started, and the time counting until the main control MPU 1310a is reset is started. When the main control built-in WDT is started, time counting by the main control built-in WDT is started, and a watchdog timer clear register (built-in to the main control MPU 1310a) is provided until the time counted reaches the time set by the timer set value. If the timer clear setting value is not set in the "WDT clear register" below, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. On the other hand, when the main control built-in WDT is activated and time measurement is started, if the timer clear set value is set in the WDT clear register until the time measured reaches the time set by the timer set value, The time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the time measurement is started again. As described above, the operation (system) of the main control MPU 1310a operates normally by repeatedly performing the processing of clearing the time measured by the main control built-in WDT until the time set by the timer set value is reached and restarting the time measurement. Can be monitored.

  Subsequent to step S12, the main control MPU 1310a performs a power failure clearing process (step S14). In the power failure clearing process, a wait timer process is performed to determine whether a power failure warning signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e has been input. The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches a predetermined voltage. On the other hand, in the event of a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped), the voltage drops. When the voltage drops below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. Similarly, when the voltage becomes lower than the power failure notice voltage from the time when the power is turned on until the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage, a power failure notice signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e. Therefore, the wait timer process is a process for waiting until the voltage becomes higher than the power failure notice voltage and stabilizes after the power is turned on. In the present embodiment, the waiting time (wait timer) is set to 200 milliseconds (ms). Have been.

  Subsequent to step S14, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the RAM clear switch 1310f has been operated (step S16). In this determination, while the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is HI, the main control MPU 1310a determines to perform RAM clear and determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated. When the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is LOW, it is determined that the RAM is cleared and the RAM clear switch 1310f is determined to be operated.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated in the determination in step S16, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value 1 to the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S18). On the other hand, in the determination of step S16, when determining that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated, the main control MPU 1310a sets a value 0 to a RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG (step S20). That is, the main control MPU 1310a is in a state where a RAM clearing process for initializing a RAM (that is, a main control built-in RAM) built in the main control MPU 1310a can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on. The above-mentioned RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is the game information related to the game such as the probability variation, the unpaid prize ball, and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) stored in the main control built-in RAM of the main control MPU 1310a. This flag indicates whether or not various types of information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter) are to be deleted. The flag is set to a value of 1 when various types of information are deleted and a value of 0 when various types of information are not deleted. . The value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG set in steps S18 and S20 is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a.

  Subsequent to step S18 or step S20, the main control MPU 1310a performs wait time standby processing (step S22). In this wait time waiting process, the system waits until the system that performs the drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 starts (boots). In the present embodiment, 2.5 seconds (s) is set as a standby time (boot timer) until booting.

  Subsequent to step S22, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S24). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e as a power failure warning. The determination in step S24 is made based on this power failure notice signal. When determining in step S24 that the main control MPU 1310a determines that the power failure notice signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a returns to step S24 again, and repeats the determination in step S24 as long as the power failure notice signal is continuously input. Thereby, the timer clear setting value is set to the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT started in step S12, the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. , The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. After that, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control-side power-on processing again. It should be noted that a detailed description of the point that the determination in step S24 is performed subsequent to the wait time waiting process in step S22 will be described later.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines that there is no input of the power failure notice signal in the determination of step S24, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is 0 (step S26). As described above, the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when erasing various information and the value 0 when not erasing various information. In step S26, when the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that various information is not to be deleted, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum (step S28). This checksum is for calculating the sum of various types of information stored in the main control built-in RAM assuming that the values are numerical values.

  Subsequent to step S28, the main control MPU 1310a compares the calculated checksum value (sum value) with the checksum value (sum value) stored in the main control-side power-off process (at power-off) described later. It is determined whether they match (step S30). When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S30 that they match, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether the backup flag BK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S32). The backup flag BK-FLG stores and retains various types of information, game sum information such as a checksum value (sum value) and a value of the backup flag BK-FLG in a main control built-in RAM in a main control side power-off process described later. This flag indicates whether or not the main control-side power-off processing has been completed normally, and is set to a value 1 when the main control-side power-off processing has not been normally completed. In the inspection process of the manufacturing line of the main control board 1310, when the main control board 1310 is first turned on after manufacturing for inspection, the checksum calculation in step S28 and the determination in step S30 are performed. Will be described in detail later.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S32 that the backup flag BK-FLG has the value 1, that is, determines that the main control-side power-off process has been completed normally, A work area is set (step S34). For this setting, power recovery time information is read from the ROM (that is, the main control built-in ROM) built in the main control MPU 1310a, and the power recovery time information is set in a work area of the main control built-in RAM. Thereby, various information is read from the game backup information, and various commands corresponding to the various information are stored in a predetermined storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In addition, "recovery" refers to the state in which the power is turned on from the state in which the power is turned off, the state in which the power is restored after a power outage or momentary power outage, and illegal means (for example, a person who commits wrongdoing The high-frequency output from the hidden high-frequency output device is applied to the main control board 1310 to reset the main control MPU 1310a itself, and thereafter return to the original state.

  Subsequent to step S34, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value 0 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S36). As a result, various kinds of information, checksum values (sum values), and the like are changed by performing various kinds of processing thereafter. If the value 1 is not set in the FLG, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared as described later.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S26, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is not the value 0 (the value is 1), that is, when it is determined that various information is to be deleted, or in the determination of the step S30, When the control MPU 1310a determines that the checksum values (sum values) do not match, or in the determination in step S32, the main control MPU 1310a determines that the backup flag BK-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0). That is, when it is determined that the main-control-side power-off process has not been completed normally, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared (step S38). Here, the main control MPU 1310a writes the value 0 into the main control built-in RAM. The main control MPU 1310a may read a predetermined value from the main control built-in ROM as an initial value and set it. The main control MPU 1310a is used when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f instructs RAM clear and erases various information, when the sum values do not match, or when the main control side When the power-off process has not been completed normally, the unique ID code stored in advance in the nonvolatile RAM of the main control MPU 1310a is extracted, and the random number for symbol-per-pattern determination is updated based on the extracted ID code. Performs an initial value derivation process that always derives the same fixed value from the fixed numerical value range of the counter, and uses this fixed value to determine the initial value of the random number for normal symbol hit determination described above. Set to random number for decision.

  Subsequent to step S38, the main control MPU 1310a sets a work area of the main control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S40). This setting is performed by reading the initial information from the main control built-in ROM and setting the initial information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. As a result, the game backup information is initialized, and for example, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is set (set) to a value 0 which is an initial value.

  Subsequent to step S36 or step S40, the main control MPU 1310a performs an interrupt initial setting (step S42). This setting is for setting an interrupt cycle when a later-described main control timer interrupt process is performed. In the present embodiment, it is set to 4 milliseconds (ms).

  Subsequent to step S42, the main control MPU 1310a performs serial communication initialization (step S44). Here, various serial input / output ports (for example, a serial input / output port (reception channel and transmission channel) for the payout control board 633) and a serial input / output port (reception channel and transmission channel for the peripheral control board 1510) built in the main control MPU 1310a are described. The transmission serial port prescaler is configured to set the communication speed and the presence / absence of parity, and the transmission serial port control register is also used to perform initialization of the transmission circuit and transmission permission.

  Subsequent to step S44, the main control MPU 1310a performs a test signal output port initialization setting (step S46). Here, in a testing machine of a gaming machine, a test signal output port (not shown) for outputting various inspection information is initialized (set to OFF data output) or the like when the power is turned on.

  Subsequent to step S46, the main control MPU 1310a performs activation setting of the main control built-in hardware random number circuit (step S48). Here, among the various random numbers related to the game, the big hit determination random number used for determining whether or not to generate the big hit game state is stored in the hard random number control register built in the main control MPU 1310a in order to be updated by hardware. In addition to the setting of latching and acquiring a random number, the hard random number setting register is set to start the main control built-in hard random number circuit. When the main random number circuit with built-in main control is activated by these settings, other values within a predetermined numerical range are rapidly extracted without duplication based on a clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, and the predetermined values are determined one after another. When all the values within the predetermined numerical range have been extracted, one value within the predetermined numerical range is extracted again, and based on the clock signal input to the main control MPU 1310a, the predetermined numerical range is rapidly extracted. Are extracted one after another without duplication. Note that the main control MPU 1310a outputs a latch signal to the main control built-in hard random number circuit when acquiring a random number (random value) from the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and outputs the main control built-in hardware when the latch signal is input. The random number (random number value) extracted by the random number circuit is obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a. The main control MPU 1310a sets the obtained random number value as the random number for jackpot determination.

  Subsequent to step S48, the main control MPU 1310a performs reservation setting of a command to be transmitted when the power is turned on (step S50). Here, based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, the power is turned on (power recovery). A power-on status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command, which are divided into a transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. To memorize. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34, various kinds of information are read out from the game backup information and various kinds of commands corresponding to the various kinds of information are stored. is there. In such a case, after the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information is completed, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information An output determination counter notification command is transmitted. These commands are transmitted in a later-described main control timer interrupt process. It should be noted that a detailed description will be given of the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on is performed in step S50.

  Subsequent to step S50, the main control MPU 1310a performs interrupt permission setting (step S52). With this setting, the main control timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set in step S42, that is, every 4 ms.

  Subsequent to step S52, the main control MPU 1310a determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S54). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, if the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e to the main control MPU 1310a as a power failure warning. Is done. The determination in step S54 is made based on the power failure notice signal.

  When the main control MPU 1310a determines in step S54 that there is no input of the power failure notice signal, the main control MPU 1310a performs a non-hit random number updating process (step S56). In this non-hit random number update processing, the above-described random numbers for reach determination, random numbers for variable display patterns, random numbers for determining a large hit symbol initial value, random numbers for determining a small hit symbol initial value, and the like are updated. As described above, in the non-hit random number updating process, the random numbers that are not involved in the hit determination (big hit determination) are updated by software. The above-mentioned random number for normal symbol determination, random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination, random number for normal symbol variation display pattern, and the like are also updated by the non-hit random number updating process.

  Subsequent to step S56, the process returns to step S54 again, and the main control MPU 1310a determines whether or not a power failure notice signal has been input. Then, steps S54 to S56 are repeated. Note that the processing of steps S54 to S56 is referred to as "main control side main processing".

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S54, when the main control MPU 1310a determines that the power failure notice signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a performs the interrupt disable setting (step S58). By this setting, the main control side timer interrupt processing described later is not performed, writing to the main control built-in RAM is prevented, and rewriting of the above-described various information including game information and other information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S58, the main control MPU 1310a starts outputting a power failure clear signal (step S60). Here, the same process as the process of starting output of the power failure clear signal in the power failure clear process of step S14 is performed.

  Subsequent to step S60, the main control MPU 1310a stops drive signals output to, for example, various indicators of the function display unit 1400, the starting port solenoid 2412, the attacker solenoid 2414, and the like (step S62).

  Subsequent to step S62, the main control MPU 1310a calculates a checksum and stores the calculated value (step S64). This checksum is calculated assuming that the game information in the work area of the main control built-in RAM, excluding the storage area of the above-mentioned checksum value (sum value) and the value of the backup flag BK-FLG, is regarded as a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S64, the main control MPU 1310a sets the value 1 to the backup flag BK-FLG (step S66). Thereby, the storage of the game backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S66, the main control MPU 1310a performs setting of prohibition of RAM access (step S68). The setting of the RAM access prohibition disables access to the main control built-in RAM, thereby preventing the contents of the main control built-in RAM from being updated.

  Subsequent to step S68, an infinite loop is entered. In this infinite loop, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT started in step S12, the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. When the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset. After that, the main control MPU 1310a performs the main control-side power-on processing again. The processing of steps S58 to S68 and the infinite loop are referred to as "main control-side power-off processing".

  As described above, the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit when affected by electrical noise. In this case, the main control MPU 1310a cannot make the determination in step S54, and cannot perform the main control-side power-off process. For this reason, when the main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the built-in reset circuit, the main control MPU 1310a is reset without executing the main control-side power-off process, and executes the main control-side power-on process again. . That is, since the main control-side power-off process is not executed, the checksum value (sum value) in the main-control-side power-off process immediately before the forced reset by the built-in reset circuit is not stored. The checksum value (sum value) stored when the main control-side power-off process is executed when the power is cut off and the checksum calculated in step S28 when the power is reset by the built-in reset circuit and restarted. The value (sum value) must not match, and a checksum (sum value) error of the main control built-in RAM always occurs, and the contents of the main control built-in RAM are completely erased (cleared) in the process of step S38. The Rukoto.

  The pachinko machine 1 (main control MPU 1310a) is reset when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, and performs the main control-side power-on processing by restoring power thereafter.

  In step S30, it is checked whether or not the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM is normal. Then, in step S32, it is determined whether or not the main control-side power-off processing has been completed normally. Has been inspected. In this way, by double checking the game backup information stored in the main control built-in RAM, it is checked whether or not the game backup information has been stored due to fraud.

  Here, the point that the determination of the presence or absence of the power failure notice signal in step S24 is performed following the wait time standby processing in step S22 will be described. First, regarding a problem in the case where there is no determination of the presence or absence of the power failure notice signal in step S24, that is, in the case where the value of the RAM clear flag is determined in step S26 following the wait time standby processing in step S22, and the subsequent processing is advanced. Will be described.

  As described above, the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a is connected to the electrolytic capacitor MC2 shown in FIG. 190 when a power outage or a momentary power outage occurs and the power supply from the island facilities of the game hall is cut off. The charged electric charge is applied as DC +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs. That is, even when the power from the island facilities of the game hall is cut off due to a momentary power failure or power outage, the charged electric charge is applied as DC +5 V to the hardware called the electrolytic capacitor MC2, so that the island of the game hall can be operated. The power-off process on the main control side can be completed within a period of about 7 ms after the power supply from the equipment is cut off. This is because when a player is playing a game, that is, when performing a main control side main process or a main control side timer interrupt process to be described later, a power outage or momentary blackout occurs and an island facility in the game hall is provided. When the power supply from the power supply is shut off, the main control-side power-off processing can be surely completed.

  However, as an extremely rare phenomenon, in the wait time standby process in step S22 upon power recovery, a standby time (boot timer: in this embodiment, a system for performing drawing control of the peripheral control board 1510 is started (booted). 2.5 seconds is set), and immediately before the standby time is reached, if a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, a hardware component such as an electrolytic capacitor MC2 is connected to the VDD terminal which is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a. Is charged as DC +5 V, but within a period of about 7 ms, an interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and thereafter, an interrupt permission setting is performed in step S52. Even if the contents of the main control built-in RAM are updated by the timer interrupt processing, the main control side power supply is turned on. It may become impossible to complete when processing main control side power-off during the process. For this reason, the main control-side power-on process is started again when the power is restored without storing the value of the calculated checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM.

  Then, the main control-side power-on process is started at the time of the power recovery this time, and the wait time standby process of step S22 is completed without occurrence of an instantaneous power failure or power failure. In step S30, a value obtained by calculating the checksum based on the contents of the above and the value stored in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs is determined to be the same. Instead, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is cleared in step S38. In other words, the RAM clear switch 1310f is forcibly stored in the main control built-in RAM even if the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated by a clerk or the like of the game hall when the power is restored and there is no intention to display the RAM clear by the clerk or the like of the game hall. There is a problem that the above-mentioned game backup information is erased (cleared).

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process of determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure notice signal is input, Returning to the determination in step S24, the determination in step S24 is repeated as long as the power failure notice signal is continuously input. Thereby, the timer clear setting value is set in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT started in step S12, the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT is cleared, and the timekeeping is started again. The main control MPU 1310a can be forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT. Before performing the wait time standby process in step S22, the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is set in step S18 or step S20, but the value of the RAM clear notification flag RCL-FLG is Since the data is stored in the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the control MPU 1310a, the contents (game information) of the main control built-in RAM are not changed at all even if the RAM access permission is set in step S10.

  As described above, immediately after the wait time waiting process in step S22, the process of determining whether or not the power failure notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure notice signal is input (that is, step S24). If it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is cut off after waiting in the wait time standby processing in S22), the process returns to the determination in step S24 again, and as long as the power failure notice signal continues to be input. By repeatedly performing the determination in step S24, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can be forcibly reset and the main control board 1310 can be restarted. The game information and other information (for example, the value of the main award ball number information output determination counter is not displayed. Various information including the information) can be prevented from being updated, so as never change occurs in the checksum calculation result. As a result, the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 determines that the checksum calculation result of step S28 and the stored value of the checksum calculation and storage of step S64 match when restarted. Therefore, the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure does not occur is initialized. Therefore, at the time of power recovery, it is possible to prevent the game information immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure occurs from being initialized.

  Immediately after the wait time standby process in step S22, a process for determining whether or not a power failure notice signal is input is provided as step S24, and when the power failure notice signal is not input (that is, in step S22). When it is determined by the determination in step S24 that the power to the pachinko machine 1 is not interrupted after waiting in the wait time waiting process), the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 performs the game while the pachinko machine 1 is in progress. Even if the power supply to the main control MPU 1310a is cut off, power is supplied to the VDD terminal, which is a power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a, by the electrolytic capacitor MC2, so that the game information on the progress of the game and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) For storing various information including information indicating the value of an information output determination counter). The main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 can complete the main control MPU 1310a of the main control MPU 1310a, because the main control MPU 1310a can complete the processing of steps S58 to S68, which is the processing, and the main control-side power-off processing constituted by an infinite loop. When the main control MPU 1310a restarts, the calculation result of the checksum in step S28 matches the calculation result of the checksum in the backup process (that is, the value stored and calculated in step S64). Therefore, the game information stored and held in the main control built-in RAM immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure occurs is not initialized. That is, the main control board 1310 can be started by being restored to the game information immediately before the momentary power failure or the power failure occurs.

  Further, immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22, when it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal has been input, the main control MPU 1310a forcibly resets the content of the main control built-in RAM by the main control built-in WDT. Can be restarted again without any update of the main control side, while immediately after the wait time waiting process of step S22, if it is determined in step S24 that the power failure notice signal has not been input, As described above, the main-control-side power-off process can be reliably completed within a "power-supply-securing period during a momentary power failure or power outage" of about 7 ms by hardware. In other words, in the present embodiment, the power supply from the island facility of the game hall is interrupted due to a momentary power failure or power failure during the process of turning on the main control side power when the power is restored, and the main control The electric charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal, which is a power supply terminal of the MPU 1310a, as DC +5 V for a period of about 7 milliseconds (ms) after a power outage or momentary power outage occurs. Therefore, when the main control-side power-off processing cannot be completed within the “shortage of blackout or power supply securing period” of about 7 ms by the hardware of the electrolytic capacitor MC2, the processing immediately after the wait time standby processing in step S22 is performed. In step S24, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal has been input. If the power failure notice signal has been input, it is determined in step S24. As long as the power failure notice signal continues to be input, the determination in step S24 is repeated to set the timer clear in the WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a for the main control built-in WDT started in step S12. By setting the value and clearing the timekeeping by the main control built-in WDT and starting the timekeeping again, the main control built-in WDT can forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a.

  The main control MPU 1310a is forcibly reset by the main control built-in WDT by such software, so that a step after step S24 (specifically, an interrupt initial setting is performed in step S42, and thereafter, in step S52, The content of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, the number of main prize balls) is prevented by preventing the progress to the main control side timer interrupt process described later by setting an interrupt permission and starting the control flow. Various kinds of information including information indicating the value of the information output determination counter) can be prevented from being updated. When the power supply from the island facilities of the game hall is cut off due to such a power failure or momentary power failure, the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and other information (for example, the main prize ball number information output determination And other information including information indicating the value of the counter for the main control) and the contents of the main control built-in RAM (game information and The other information (for example, various information including information indicating the value of the main award ball number information output determination counter) can be divided into two parts: a part covered by hardware so as not to be changed at all. It is possible to reliably prevent the contents of the main control built-in RAM (various information including game information and other information (for example, information indicating a value of a main prize ball number information output determination counter)) from being changed. So that the can.

  Next, the point that the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 will be described. In step S50, as described above, the power is turned on (power is restored) based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the main control internal RAM in the setting of the work area of the main control internal RAM in step S34. In order to convey, a power-on status command classified as power-on, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and the main control is built as transmission information. It is stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM. The power-on main control return destination command mainly includes information indicating a driving state of the starting port solenoid 2412 and information indicating a driving state of the attacker solenoid 2414. Here, first, a problem when the power-on main control return destination command does not include information indicating the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2412 and information indicating the driving state of the attacker solenoid 2414, Next, a description will be given of a problem in a case where the power-on main control return destination command does not reserve the command transmitted at power-on in step S50.

  For example, when the peripheral control board 1510 controls the display of the big hit game state screen (for example, a big hit game effect screen) in the display area of the effect display device 1600, the main control board 1310 drives the attacker solenoid 2414. When a momentary power failure or power outage occurs while the special winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member, and thereafter the power is restored, the main control board 1310 performs the main control in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area of the built-in RAM, the game state is restored to the state immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs, so that the drive of the attacker solenoid 2414 is started and the special winning opening 2005 is opened and closed. The state is shifted from the state closed by the member to the state opened.

  However, when an instantaneous power failure or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 generates a jackpot game state as a game state, a momentary power failure or power outage occurs, and thereafter, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 returns to the main control board 1310 when the power is restored. Based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the terminal, the screen can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 according to the probability and the time saving state according to the probability and the time saving state. It is not possible to display at all which round. That is, for example, a special winning opening 1 count display command for detecting the number of game balls entering the special winning opening 2005 by detecting a gaming ball entering the special winning opening 2005 and being detected by the special winning opening sensor 2403 is a main control board. Even when the peripheral control board 1510 receives and transmits the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the number of game balls entering the special winning opening 2005 on the screen according to the probability and the time saving state. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the display device 1600, it cannot be displayed at all which round (that is, what round) in the jackpot game state.

  In such a situation, the main control board 1310 stops driving of the attacker solenoid 2414 when, for example, ending the fourth round (the fourth round) of the jackpot game state, and the large winning opening 2005 is opened by the opening / closing member. From the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. When the main control board 1310 starts the fifth round (fifth round) of the jackpot game state, the drive of the attacker solenoid 2414 is started to open the big winning port 2005 from the state closed by the opening and closing member. (That is, the fifth round of the special winning opening 2005) To send a special winning opening open the fifth display command instructing the open start) from the main control board 1310 to the peripheral control board 1510. As a result, the peripheral control board 1510 finally switches the screen indicating the start of the five rounds of the jackpot game state from the screen according to the probability and the time saving state described above and displays the screen in the display area of the effect display device 1600.

  Also, for example, a screen (for example, a message indicating that the movable piece is open) indicating that the game state is in a game state in which game balls can be accepted into the second starting port 2004 and the game state is advantageous to the player. The main control board 1310 drives the starting port solenoid 2412 to open the movable piece while the peripheral control board 1510 is controlling the display of the screen to the effect display device 1600 in the display area of the second starting port. When a momentary power failure or a power failure occurs while the 2004 is open, and the power is restored thereafter, the main control board 1310 sets the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34. Based on the power recovery time information set in the work area, the game state is restored to a state immediately before a momentary power failure or power failure occurs, so that the starting port solenoid 2412 starts to be driven and the movable piece is closed. So that the transition to the state for closing the second start-up port 2004 by work.

  However, when an instantaneous power failure or power outage occurs, the peripheral control board 1510 receives various commands from the main control board 1310 and recovers when power is restored. Then, when power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 can return based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. However, when the main control board 1310 is in a gaming state in which a gaming ball can be received in the second starting port 2004 and a gaming state advantageous to the player is generated, an instantaneous blackout or power failure occurs. Then, when the power is restored, the peripheral control board 1510 displays a screen according to the probability and the time saving state based on the probability and the time saving state indicated by the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 at the time of power restoration. Even if it can be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 and can return, it is in a gaming state in which game balls can be received in the second starting port 2004 and the gaming state is advantageous for the player. The peripheral control board 1510 cannot display a screen to be conveyed in the display area of the effect display device 1600 at all. For this reason, the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine is surprised that a momentary power failure or power failure has occurred, and when the power is restored, the game ball is accepted into the second starting port 2004 immediately before the momentary power failure or power failure occurs. There is also a case where the player has forgotten that the game state is enabled, and in such a case, the game state at the time of power restoration is returned to the game state in which game balls can be accepted to the second starting port 2004. Nevertheless, when the power is restored, a screen for instructing a game (that is, a screen for instructing a game to enter a game ball into the second starting port 2004) is not displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, so that the game is played. There is also a problem that the player does not know what game to play.

  As described above, in the above two examples, there is a problem that it is not possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the power failure or the power failure immediately after the power recovery. In other words, a player sitting at the front of the pachinko machine will mistakenly think that the pachinko machine appears to be in a frozen state when the power is restored after a momentary power failure or power outage, and that the pachinko machine has failed. There was a problem.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including when the power is turned on, and also when the power is restored after a power failure or an instantaneous power failure occurs, the power-on state command is issued). In step S50, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main control return destination command, A counter notification command for output determination of the number of main prize balls is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in a later-described main control timer interrupt process.

  Thereby, based on the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310 and the power-on main control return destination command received from the main control board 1310, for example, in the above-described example, in the four rounds of the jackpot gaming state, When an instantaneous power failure or power outage occurs and power is restored after that, the drive of the attacker solenoid 2414 is started as a return destination of the main control board 1310, and the large winning opening 2005 is opened from the state closed by the opening and closing member. Since the transition to the state can be transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral control board 1510 specifies a screen indicating that it is the fourth round of the jackpot game state (that is, a screen indicating the number of the round). Cannot be displayed in the display area of the effect display device 1600, but in the big hit game state, the attacker solenoid 2 The screen for notifying that the large winning opening 2005 has been opened by the opening / closing member by starting the driving of the 14 (for example, "It is a big hit. The big winning opening is open. A screen telling the player to play the game as if it were a ball) is displayed in the display area of the staging display device 1600, and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine receives a power win 2005 after the power is restored. In the above-described example, for example, in the above-described example, a game state in which game balls can be accepted to the second starting port 2004 is provided, and a game state advantageous to the player is provided. In this state, when an instantaneous power failure or power failure occurs and power is restored, the drive of the starting port solenoid 2412 is started as a return destination of the main control board 1310 to open the movable piece. Screen that informs the user that the second starting port 2004 has been opened (for example, "The movable piece is open. Please play the game so that the game ball enters the second starting port.") Is displayed on the display area of the effect display device 1600, and the player sitting on the front of the pachinko machine enters a game ball into the second starting port 2004 after power is restored. It is possible to instruct the player to play the ball.

  Thus, when a momentary power failure or power failure occurs and power is restored after that, it is possible to instruct the main control board 1310 to return to the peripheral control board 1510 in detail. Therefore, it is possible to quickly return to the gaming state immediately before the power failure or the momentary power failure after the power recovery. In other words, a player sitting at the front of the pachinko machine will mistakenly think that the pachinko machine appears to be in a frozen state when the power is restored after a momentary power failure or power failure, and that the pachinko machine has failed. Can be prevented.

  Next, in a main control board inspection step which is an inspection step of a production line of the main control board 1310, the checksum of step S28 when the power is first turned on after the main control board 1310 is manufactured for inspection. The calculation and the determination in step S30 will be described. In the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after being manufactured for inspection, the main control board 1310 includes the above-described processing of steps S58 to S68 as a backup processing and an infinite loop. Since the main control MPU 1310a of the main control board 1310 has never executed the control-side power-off process, even if the checksum based on the contents of the main control built-in RAM is calculated in step S28, the process proceeds to step S30. In the comparison determination, the checksum values cannot match, and the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared in step S38.

  Thereby, when the reservation setting of the command to be transmitted at the time of power-on is performed in step S50, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information classified as power-on. A power-on state command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball are generated by creating an output determination counter notification command and storing it as transmission information in a transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Only three commands, that is, the number information output determination counter notification command, are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In the main control timer interrupt processing described later, a power-on state command is transmitted first, a power-on main control return destination command is transmitted, and then a power-on main prize ball number is transmitted. An information output determination counter notification command is transmitted. By utilizing this, in the main control board inspection process, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after manufacturing for inspection, a power-on state command is issued from the main control board 1310 as the first command. This is transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection process.

  By the way, the power-on state command is such that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated when the power is turned on (including when the power is turned on, and when the power is restored due to the occurrence of a power failure or a momentary power failure). When the RAM is cleared, information indicating the fact and the power-on (including power-on, power-recovery in which power is restored after a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs in addition to power-on) are described above. Information indicating which state (probability and time saving state) to return from among the low-probability time-saving state, the high-probability time-saving state, the low-probability non-time-saving state, and the high-probability non-time-saving state, and the model code of the pachinko machine And the information shown. Here, a description will be given of a problem when the power-on state command does not include information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine.

  When creating a so-called max type, middle type and sweet digital type as the pachinko machine 1 (more precisely, the main control board 1310), the model code of the pachinko machine corresponds to the copyright of the work. What kind of game specification (for example, in addition to the game specification that if the probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the number of times the special symbol changes is limited (for example, 30 or 70 times) ), It is possible to specify whether or not the game specification (such as a so-called ST machine)) in which a probability variation occurs in the performed state.

  In the production line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured, the main control board 1310 for the copyright of a plurality of works may be mixed. Then, the worker of the production line determines which of the copyrights of a plurality of types of works (for example, the copyrights of the works A, B, D, C, D, and F) is the main copyright for any of the works. It is not clear whether the main control board 1310 is flowing on the manufacturing line to manufacture the control board 1310, or the main control board for one copyright (for example, the copyright of the movie D) among the copyrights of a plurality of types of works. Although the main control board 1310 is flowing on the production line to manufacture the 1310, the main control board 1310 is manufactured to manufacture the main control board 1310 for another copyright (for example, the copyright of the work of the cartoon F). There is an assumption and misunderstanding that it is flowing on the production line.

  For this reason, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured on the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, if the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of works are mixed, the worker of the manufacturing line will It is not possible to confirm which work the copyright of the manufactured main control board 1310 is for, and for any copyright of the same work, which model type (max type, middle type, sweet digital type, It is not possible to confirm whether the game specification is a game specification (ST type) or a game specification (if a probability change occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs).

  Thereby, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 and the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of works are mixed, the main control board 1310 for the copyrights of the plurality of works is mixed. With the mixture of 1310, the game is sent to a game board assembly line for attaching the main control board 1310 to the game board 5. For this reason, the operator of the game board assembly line may attach a main control board 1310 to the game board 5 that does not correspond to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. As a result, there is a problem that the production efficiency of the game board 5 is reduced.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, when the main control board 1310 is powered on (including power recovery and power recovery when power is restored due to a power failure or an instantaneous power failure), the model code of the pachinko machine is used. In step S50, a power-on status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main control return destination command, which are classified as power-on, are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. A counter notification command for output determination of the number of main prize balls is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. These commands are transmitted in a later-described main control timer interrupt process.

  Thus, the worker of the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1 turns on the power of the main control board 1310 in the main control board inspection step which is an inspection step of the manufacturing line, so that the inspection apparatus Based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from, that is, constituting the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine, the above-described Max type indicating the model type, the middle type, And a sweet digital type, a series code for specifying which type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification (for example, if a probability change occurs, the next big hit game state In addition to the game specifications that the state is continued until it occurs, the probability fluctuation in the state where the number of changes of the special symbol is limited By watching the detailed model information displayed on the inspection monitor based on the game specification code for specifying the game specification (such as ST machine) that the main control board 1310 determines which work is the copyright of the work. It is possible to determine which model type (maximum type, middle type, and sweet digital type) for the copyright of the same work, and what game specifications It is also possible to determine whether the game is a game specification or ST machine in which the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs when the probability fluctuation occurs.

  Accordingly, when the main control board 1310 is manufactured in the manufacturing line of the maker that manufactures the pachinko machine 1, even if the main control boards 1310 for the copyrights of a plurality of works are mixed, the main control board inspection process of the manufacturing line is performed. The worker can accurately determine the model type of the main control board 1310, the copyright of the work, and the game specification by looking at the inspection monitor, and separates the main control board 1310 for the copyright of the work for each of the following main control boards 1310. It can be sent to the game board assembly line. Then, the operator of the game board assembly line can securely attach the main control board 1310 corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work to the game board 5, and the main control board not corresponding to the game board 5 for the copyright of the work. It is possible to prevent a decrease in production efficiency of the game board 5 caused by an operation of attaching the 1310 to the game board 5. Therefore, it is possible to contribute to improvement of the production efficiency of the game board 5.

[15-3. Main control timer interrupt processing]
Next, the main control timer interrupt processing will be described. The main control-side timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at an interrupt cycle (4 ms in this embodiment) set in the main control-side power-on processing shown in FIGS.

  When the main control timer interrupt process is started, the main control MPU 1310a switches the register bank as shown in FIG. 206 (step S100). The general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the main control MPU 1310a has two register banks including a first register bank and a second register bank. The first register bank is used in the main control main process in the above-described main control side power-on process, while the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt process of this routine. In step S100, since the second register bank is used in the main control side timer interrupt processing of this routine, the second register bank is used from the first register bank used in the main control main processing in the main control side power-on processing. The register bank is switched to the register tank of the above. Note that, in the present embodiment, when the main control timer interrupt process, which is the present routine, is started, the process of saving each register on the stack is not necessary.

  Subsequent to step S100, the main control MPU 1310a performs a timer subtraction process (step S102). In this timer subtraction process, for example, the time when the first special symbol display and the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 are turned on according to the variable display pattern determined in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process described later, The main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) transmits the time in which the normal symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is turned on in accordance with the ordinary symbol and the ordinary symbol variable display pattern determined in the ordinary electric accessory control processing described later. When determining whether or not a payer ACK signal for notifying that the various commands are normally received by the payout control board 633 is input, time management such as an ACK signal input determination time set as a determination condition is performed. . Specifically, when the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the ordinary symbol fluctuation display pattern is 5 seconds, the timer interruption cycle is set to 4 ms. Therefore, every time this timer subtraction processing is performed, the fluctuation time is reduced by 4 ms. When the result of the subtraction becomes 0, the fluctuation time of the fluctuation display pattern or the normal symbol fluctuation display pattern is accurately measured.

  In the present embodiment, the ACK signal input determination time is set to 100 ms. Each time the timer subtraction process is performed, the ACK signal input determination time is subtracted by 4 ms, and the result of the subtraction becomes 0, thereby accurately measuring the ACK signal input determination time. The various times and the ACK signal input determination time are stored in the time management information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as time management information.

  Subsequent to step S102, the main control MPU 1310a performs a switch input process (step S104). In this switch input process, various signals input to input terminals of various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are read and stored as input information in an input information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. More specifically, the main control MPU 1310a detects, for example, a detection signal from the gate sensor 2506, a detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, and a detection from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002. Signal, a detection signal from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b constituting the first starting port sensor 3002, a detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402, a detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403, a general winning opening sensor 2401 , A detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003, an operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f (RAM clear signal), and a notification that the payout control board 633 has normally received the prize ball command transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later. ACK signal from the payout control board 633 for transmitting the Is stored in the input information storage area of the built-in RAM. When the detection signal from the first start-up sensor 3002 and the detection signal from the second start-up sensor 2402 are read, respectively, a start-up winning command corresponding to the other is transmitted as transmission information to the main control built-in RAM. It is stored in the transmission information storage area. That is, when there is a detection signal from the detection signal from the first start-up opening sensor 3002, a start-up winning command corresponding to this detection signal is stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. When there is a detection signal from the mouth sensor 2402, a starting port winning command corresponding to the detection signal is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

  In the present embodiment, when the switch input processing is started, the state is input to all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a (including the case where the vacant terminal processing is performed). First, each is read as a first time, and after a lapse of a predetermined time (for example, 10 μs), each is read again as a second time. Then, the result read for the second time is compared with the result read for the first time. It is determined whether any of the comparison results have the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is read again as the third time, and the result read in the third time is compared with the result read in the second time. It is again determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is not the same, the result is read again as the fourth time, and the result read at the fourth time is compared with the result read at the third time. It is again determined whether or not any of the comparison results has the same result. If the result is the same, it is treated as if there were no game balls.

  As described above, in the switch input processing, the state in which all the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a are input (including those in which the unused terminal processing is performed) is performed for the first to third times. By performing the reading twice, that is, the reading twice for comparison by performing the comparison and the reading twice for comparing the second to fourth times, the erroneous detection due to the influence of chattering, noise, or the like can be avoided. Since it is possible to perform the detection, the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 3001, the detection signal from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002, the first The detection signal from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b constituting the starting port sensor 3002, the detection signal from the second starting port sensor 2402, The detection signal from the sensor 2403, the detection signal from the general winning opening sensor 2401, the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 3003, the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f, and the prize ball transmitted in the prize ball control processing described later. It is possible to improve the reliability of the payer ACK signal from the payout control board 633 that informs that the payout control board 633 has normally received the command.

  Subsequent to step S104, the main control MPU 1310a performs an input terminal failure monitoring process (step S105). In this input terminal failure monitoring process, the status of the input terminals of the various input ports of the main control MPU 1310a that have been subjected to the vacant terminal process is performed based on the information obtained in the switch input process of step S104. Specifically, for example, since the input terminal PA7 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a is grounded to the ground (GND) as an unused terminal process, the logic state is always LOW. Therefore, in the input terminal failure monitoring processing, information obtained in the switch input processing in step S104 as to whether or not the logical state of the input terminal to which the vacant terminal processing is applied among the input terminals of the various input ports is LOW. Perform based on. When the main control MPU 1310a determines that the logic state of the input terminal to which the vacant terminal processing has been performed is not LOW, the main control MPU 1310a is divided into a notification display for notifying that a failure has occurred in a peripheral circuit of the main control MPU 1310a. Is stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S105, the main control MPU 1310a performs a hit random number update process (step S106). In the hit random number updating process, the above-described random number for the big hit symbol and the random number for the small hit symbol are updated. In addition to these random numbers, a random number for determining a jackpot symbol initial value, which is updated in the non-hit random number updating process in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. And the random number for initial value determination for small hit symbols is also updated. The random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol and the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol are updated in the main control-side main process and the main control-side timer interrupt process, respectively, to further enhance the randomness. . On the other hand, the random number for the big hit symbol and the random number for the small hit symbol are random numbers related to the hit determination (big hit determination), and therefore each time the counter is incremented, each time the hit random number updating process is performed. The above-mentioned random number for normal symbol determination and the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination described above are also updated by the hit random number updating process.

  For example, as described above, the counter for updating the random number for symbol hit determination is an initial value update type counter, which is updated within a predetermined fixed numerical value range from the minimum value to the maximum value, and this minimum value The range from to the maximum value is counted up by adding 1 to the value each time the main control timer interrupt processing is performed. It counts up from the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination to the maximum value, and then counts up from the minimum value to the random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination. When the counter finishes counting up the range from the minimum value to the maximum value of the normal symbol hit determination random number, the hit random number updating process updates the initial value determination random number for hit determination. The random number for initial value determination for normal symbol hit determination can be obtained by executing an initial value lottery process for selecting one value from a fixed numerical range of a counter for updating the random number for normal symbol hit determination. .

  In the present embodiment, the random number for determining a big hit symbol initial value and the random number for determining a small hit symbol initial value are determined in step S56 in the main control side power-on process (main control side main process) shown in FIG. 205. Although the update is performed in the hit random number update process and the hit random number update process in step S106 in the main control timer interrupt process of the present routine, the processing time of this routine becomes uneven every time the interrupt timer is generated. If the number of times of execution of the non-hit-hit random number updating process in step S56 becomes random by repeatedly executing the main process on the main control side within the remaining time until the generation of the interrupt timer, the random number for determining the initial value for the big hit symbol , And the random number for determining the initial value for the small hit symbol may be updated only in the non-hit random number updating process in step S56. .

  Subsequent to step S106, the main control MPU 1310a performs a prize ball control process (step S108). In this prize ball control process, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area to create a prize ball command for paying out game balls based on the input information, or the main control board 1310, the payout control board 633, and the like. Or a self-check command for confirming the connection state between the substrates. Then, the created award ball command and self-check command are transmitted to the payout control board 633 as main payment serial data. For example, when one game ball enters the special winning opening 2005, a prize ball command for paying out 15 balls as a prize ball is created, and the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls. Therefore, the output of the main prize ball number information output signal is set to convey this effect, stored as output information in the output information storage area, and a prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control board 633, When a payer ACK signal for notifying that the payout control board 633 has normally received the command is not input within a predetermined time, a self-check command for confirming a connection state between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 is issued. It is created and transmitted to the payout control board 633.

  In the prize ball control process in step S108, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on the input information, the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls reaches 10 balls. In this case, a main prize ball number information output command, which is classified into other sections, is created to convey that effect, and is stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information. The main award ball number information output command is created based on the value of the main award ball number information output determination counter. The value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter is determined based on the input information read out from the input information storage area described above and based on the input information, that is, the general winning opening 2001 and the first starting opening 2002 provided on the game board 5. , A second starting port 2004, a special winning port 2005, and other various winning ports (hereinafter referred to as "various winning ports provided in the game board 5"). The number of game balls to be put out is counted, and is stored and updated in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM in the prize ball control processing in step S108. In the prize ball control processing in step S108, the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter stored in the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and the read main prize ball number information output determination counter is read out. Is read from the input information storage area described above, the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls is added based on the input information, and the value indicating the added number of balls is 10 Is exceeded (that is, when the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls has reached 10), a main prize ball number information output command is created to convey that effect, and the transmission information The value stored in the output information storage area and the value indicating the exceeded number of balls is used as the value of the main prize ball number information output determination counter as the prize ball schedule information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. It is adapted to store update.

  Subsequent to step S108, the main control MPU 1310a performs a frame command receiving process (step S110). The payout control board 633 transmits various 1-byte (8-bit) commands (for example, a frame state 1 command, an error release navigation command, and a frame state 2 command) that are classified into state displays. In the frame command receiving process, when various commands are normally received as payer serial data, information to that effect is transmitted to the payout control board 633 and stored as output information in the output information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Also, the main control MPU 1310a shapes the command normally received as payer serial data into a 2-byte (16-bit) command (various commands (frame state 1 command, error cancel navigation command, And frame state 2 command)), and are stored in the above-described transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  Subsequent to step S110, the main control MPU 1310a performs a fraud detection process (step S112). In this cheating detection processing, an abnormal state related to the prize ball is confirmed. For example, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and the logic of the detection signal from the first startup port sensor main side 3002a and the logic of the detection signal from the first startup port sensor slave side 3002b are compared. If the logic is different, an illegal ball (a game ball or a metal ball of approximately the same diameter as a game ball or approximately the same as that of a game ball) to which a flexible string-like operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire, or a catheter) is attached. It is determined that fraudulent acts (hereinafter referred to as "radiation irradiation goto") by radio wave irradiation using a synthetic resin ball having a diameter are performed, and the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter is incremented by 1 (increment). I do. The value of this radio wave goto counter is incremented each time it is determined that radio wave irradiation goto is performed in the fraud detection processing. When the RAM is cleared, the value 0 (zero) is set as an initial value. It has become so. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value (in the present embodiment, the value 250 is set as the upper limit value based on 4 ms, which is an interrupt cycle in which the fraud detection processing is performed by the main control timer interrupt processing). A radio wave irradiation goto notification command, which is classified into a notification display indicating that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed, is created and stored in the above-described transmission information storage area as transmission information.

  Here, the radio wave irradiation goto will be described briefly. A ball or a synthetic resin ball having substantially the same diameter as the ball) is driven into the game area 5a from the upper plate 201 via the ball feeding unit 140 by the ball launching device 540 to enter the first starting port 2002, Radio wave irradiation is performed in a state where the game ball is stopped in an area for detecting a game ball passing through the mouth sensor (a ball passage detection area of the first starting port sensor). Thus, when the radio wave irradiation is performed in a state where the game ball is parked in the ball passage detection area of the first starting port sensor (that is, when the radio wave irradiation is turned ON), the logic of the detection signal from the first starting port sensor is changed. While the logic that the game ball is not detected is obtained, while the radio wave irradiation is not performed (that is, the radio wave irradiation is turned off), the logic of the detection signal from the first starting port sensor becomes the logic that the game ball is detected. . In other words, while the game ball is parked in the ball passage detection area of the first starting port sensor, the radio wave irradiation is turned on and the radio wave irradiation is turned off, so that the ball passing detection of the first starting port sensor is repeated. A signal indicating that a plurality of game balls have passed through the area can be generated in a pseudo manner and output from the first starting port sensor to the main control board 4100.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the first starting port sensor subside 3002b are dimensioned to be larger than the erroneous detection prevention distance dimension so that such a radio wave irradiation goto can be found. They are spaced apart by a distance (43 mm in this embodiment). As a result, an illegal ball having a flexible string-like operation line attached thereto is hit into the game area 5a by the ball launching device 540 from the upper plate 201 via the ball feeding unit 140, and enters the first starting port 2002. Then, an area for detecting a game ball passing through the first starting port sensor main side 3002a (a ball passing detection area on the first starting port sensor main side 3002a) or a game ball passing the first starting port sensor subordinate side 3002b Even if a stationary state can be formed in the area where the ball is detected (the ball passing detection area of the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b), the player performing the misconduct turns on the radio wave irradiation or radiates the radio wave. The logic of the detection signal from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a and the logic of the detection signal from the first starting port sensor main side 3002b always differ by repeatedly turning off and on. When the value of the radio wave irradiation goto counter reaches the upper limit value, a radio wave irradiation goto notification command that is divided into a notification display that indicates that the radio wave irradiation goto is being performed is created, and the transmission information is described above. It can be stored in the transmission information storage area. In the present embodiment, by reliably detecting and notifying the radio wave irradiation goto by such a mechanism, it is possible to contribute to the fact that a staff such as a clerk of a game hall can discover the radio wave irradiation goto at an early stage. It has become.

  In the fraud detection process of step S112, for example, the input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and when the detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403 is input when the game is not in the jackpot game state (the special winning opening). For example, when a game ball enters the ball in 2005), a prize abnormal display command classified as a notification display as an abnormal state is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S112, the main control MPU 1310a performs a special symbol and special electric accessory control process (step S114). In this special symbol and special electric accessory control process, a latch signal is output to the main control built-in hard random number circuit, and a random number (random value) extracted by the main control built-in hard random number circuit when the latch signal is input is used as the main signal. It is obtained from a hard random number latch register built in the control MPU 1310a, and the obtained random number value is set as a big hit determination random number. Then, it is determined whether or not the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) matches the big hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. (It is determined whether or not a big hit game state is to be generated (referred to as "special lottery")), or the value of a counter for updating the random number for the big hit symbol is taken out, and a certainty hit determination previously stored in the main control built-in ROM is taken out. For example, it is determined whether or not the value matches the value (whether or not to generate a probability change).

  Here, “probability variation” means that the probability of a big hit changes to a high probability (at the time of a probable change) which is set higher than that at a normal time (a low probability). In the present embodiment, the value 32668 to the value 32767 is set as the range of the big hit determination value (big hit determination range) in the low probability, and is read from the normal time determination table, whereas the value 31768 to the value is read in the high probability. 32767 is set, and is read from the probability change determination table. As described above, in the special symbol and special electric accessory control process in step S114, the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value obtained from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) and the main control built-in ROM are stored in advance. When determining whether or not the stored big hit determination value matches, the big hit determination random number (that is, the random number value acquired from the hard random number latch register built in the main control MPU 1310a) is included in the big hit determination range. It depends on whether it is done.

  When these determination results (lottery results) are based on the first starting port sensor 3002, various commands related to the special effect 1 tuning effect are created, while the determination results (lottery results) are based on the second starting port sensor 2402. If it is caused by the special figure 2, various commands related to the tuning effect are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area, and the variable display pattern of the special symbol is determined based on the random number for the variable display pattern described above. Then, the first special symbol display or the second special symbol of the function display unit 1400 is turned on in accordance with the determined special symbol variation display pattern so as to light the first special symbol indicator or the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400. The output of the lighting signal to the display is set and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above. In addition, depending on the game state to be generated, for example, when a big hit game state is set, various commands (big hit opening command, big win opening 1 opening N-th display command, big winning opening 1 closing display command, big win opening 1 closing display command) (A winning port 1 count display command, a jackpot ending command, and a jackpot symbol display command) are created and stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, or, for example, a drive signal to the attacker solenoid 2414 is operated to open and close the opening and closing member. When the output is set and stored in the output information storage area as the output information, or when the number of times the special winning opening 2005 changes from the closed state to the open state (round) is two, the round display of the function display unit 1400 is set to two. To turn on the round display lamp, Setting the output power, storing the output information in the output information storage area, and when the number of rounds is fifteen, a lighting signal to the fifteenth round display lamp so as to light the fifteenth round display lamp of the round display of the function display unit 1400. The output of the function display unit 1400 is set to output the lighting signal to the status display of the function display unit 1400 so that the output is stored in the output information storage area as the output information, and whether or not the probability variation has occurred is lit in a predetermined color. It is stored in the output information storage area as output information.

  Subsequent to step S114, the main control MPU 1310a performs a normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process (step S116). In the normal symbol and normal electric accessory control process, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and a gate winning process is performed based on the input information. In this gate winning process, it is determined from the input information whether a detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 has been input to the input terminal of the input port. When the detection signal is input to the input terminal of the input port based on this determination result, the value of the counter for updating the above-described normal symbol hit determination random number is extracted, and the gate information of the main control built-in RAM is extracted as gate information. The information is stored in the information storage area.

  The gate information storage area is provided with a 0-th section to a third section (four sections), and the gate information is stored in the order of the 0-th section, the first section, the second section, and the third section. It has become. For example, when the gate information is stored in the 0th to 2nd sections of the gate information storage, when the detection signal from the gate sensor 2506 is input to the input terminal of the input port, the gate information is stored in the third section of the gate information storage. Store in parcel.

  The gate information stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage is set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM. When this gate information is set, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the second section of the gate information storage is stored in the first section of the gate information storage, and the gate information is stored in the first section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the third section of the information storage is shifted to the second section of the gate information storage, and the third section of the gate information storage becomes an empty area. For example, when the gate information is stored in the first section and the second section of the gate information storage, the gate information of the first section of the gate information storage is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage, and the gate information of the first section is stored in the 0th section of the gate information storage. The gate information of the two sections is shifted to the first section of the gate information storage, and the second section of the gate information storage and the third section of the gate information storage become free areas. Here, when the gate information is stored in the first section to the third section of the gate information storage, the normal total display of the function display unit 1400 is turned on by using the total number of stored gate information as the reserve sphere. Based on the obtained gate information, the output of the lighting signal of the ordinary hold display of the function display unit 1400 is set, and stored as output information in the output information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to the gate winning process, the gate information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM is read, and a random number for a symbol hit determination is usually extracted from the read gate information and stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM. It is determined whether or not it matches the normal symbol hit determination value (referred to as “normal lottery”). Whether or not the movable piece is opened and closed is determined based on the result of the determination (the result of the lottery by the normal lottery). When the opening / closing operation is performed in this determination, the movable piece is in the opened state, so that the second starting port 2004 is in a game state in which game balls can be received, and a game state advantageous to the player is achieved. The variable display pattern of the ordinary symbol corresponding to this determination is determined based on the above-described random number for the ordinary symbol variation display pattern, and various commands classified into the ordinary figure tuning effect-related are created, and the transmission information storage described above as the transmission information is performed. In the area, the output of the lighting signal to the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 in accordance with the determined variable display pattern of the ordinary symbol, and the output information In the output information storage area described above.

  Also, for example, when the value of the extracted random number for the normal symbol hit determination coincides with the normal symbol hit determination value stored in advance in the main control built-in ROM, various commands related to the normal electric winning effect are created and transmitted. While the information is stored in the transmission information storage area, the output of the drive signal to the starting port solenoid 2412 is set so as to open and close the movable piece, and stored as the output information in the output information storage area described above. When the value of the symbol hit determination random number does not match the normal symbol hit determination value stored in the main control built-in ROM in advance, the normal symbol variation display pattern is determined based on the above-described ordinary symbol variation display pattern random number. , Create a variety of commands that are related to the general figure synchronizing production related, and store it as transmission information in the transmission information storage area described above, The output of the lighting signal to the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so as to light the ordinary symbol display of the function display unit 1400 in accordance with the determined ordinary symbol variation display pattern, and the output information storage area described above as the output information To memorize.

  Subsequent to step S116, the main control MPU 1310a performs a port output process (step S118). In this port output processing, output information is read from the output information storage area described above from output terminals of various output ports of the main control MPU 1310a, and various signals are output based on the output information. The main control MPU 1310a outputs a main payment ACK signal when normally receiving various commands from the payout control board 633 from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the main control MPU 1310a based on the output information. Or a driving signal is output to an attacker solenoid 2414 that opens and closes the opening / closing member of the special winning opening 2005 when the jackpot is in the gaming state, and a driving signal is output to a starting port solenoid 2412 that opens and closes the movable piece. In addition to this, 15 round jackpot information output signal, 2 round jackpot information output signal, probability fluctuation information output signal, special symbol display information output signal, regular symbol display information output signal, information output signal during working hours, start opening prize Various information (game information) signals relating to the game such as an information output signal are sent to the payout control board 633. A force to or.

  Subsequent to step S118, the main control MPU 1310a performs a peripheral control board command transmission process (step S120). In this peripheral control board command transmission process, the transmission information is read from the transmission information storage area described above, and this transmission information is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 as main circumference serial data. This transmission information includes various commands that are created in the main-control-side timer interrupt process that is the main routine and that are classified into special figure 1 tuning effects, various commands that are classified in special figure 2 tuning effects, and big hits. (For example, a special winning opening one count display command corresponding to a special winning opening count command based on a detection signal from the special winning opening sensor 2403 when a game ball entering the special winning opening 2005 is detected) , Various commands that are classified as power-on, various commands that are generally related to synchronizing effects, various commands that are generally related to directing, various commands that are classified as information displays, and various types that are classified as status displays. Commands, various commands related to tests, and other various commands (for example, the main control board 1310 is The main prize ball number information output signal is output as main prize ball number information each time the number of game balls to be paid out as prize balls on the basis of the game balls entering the various prize holes reaches 10 balls. , A main prize ball number information output command for instructing the hall computer to transmit the information via the external terminal board 558). In the main circumference serial data, one packet is composed of three bytes. Specifically, the main serial data has a status indicating a type of command having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), a mode indicating a variation of an effect having a storage capacity of 1 byte (8 bits), and a status. And a sum value calculated by assuming the mode as a numerical value, and the sum value is created at the time of transmission.

  In this peripheral control board command transmission process, various commands are transmitted as main serial data to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of status, mode, and sum value. As described above, when a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, the charge charged in the electrolytic capacitor MC2 is applied to the VDD terminal that is the power supply terminal of the main control MPU 1310a as DC + 5V. At least the main serial transmission port built in the main control MPU 1310a transfers the command set in the transmission buffer register to the transmission shift register by the serial management unit and completes transmission from the transmission shift register as main serial data. Is available. When the pachinko machine 1 is powered on or when power is restored after a power failure or momentary power failure occurs after the power is turned on, the power is transmitted when the power is turned on in step S50 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. 205. Power-on status command, power-on main control return destination command, and power-on main prize ball number information output counter Since the notification command is created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, the main power serial data includes a power-on state command, a status, a mode, and a sum value in the order of: A status, a mode, and a sum value which are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 and subsequently constitute a power-on main control return destination command. Transmitted to peripheral control board 1510 in order, subsequently constitutes the power-on main prize ball number information output determining counter notification command, and transmits status, mode, and a peripheral control board 1510 in the order of thumb value. In the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM, in the setting of the work area of the main control built-in RAM in step S34 in the main control side power-on processing, various kinds of information are read out from the game backup information, and according to the various kinds of information. In some cases, various commands are stored. In such a case, after the transmission of various commands corresponding to the game information among the various information is completed, the power-on state command, the power-on main control return destination command, and the power-on main prize ball number information An output determination counter notification command is transmitted.

  Subsequent to step S120, the main control MPU 1310a clears the main control built-in WDT (step S122), and ends this routine. The clearing of the main control built-in WDT in step S122 is performed by setting a timer clear set value in a WDT clear register built in the main control MPU 1310a. As a result, the time measurement by the main control built-in WDT is cleared. Then, the clocking by the main control built-in WDT is restarted, so that the main control built-in WDT does not have to forcibly reset the main control MPU 1310a.

  Note that, as described above, the main control board 1310 stores the above-described backup for storing the game information according to the progress of the game before the power to the pachinko machine 1 is shut off during the progress of the game. The power can be cut off on the pachinko machine 1 based on the game information on which the backup process has been executed as a return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 when the power is restored, while the process can be completed. In this routine, a power-on main control return destination command for instructing the driving state of the starting port solenoid 2412 and the attacker solenoid 2414, which are the electric driving sources by the port output processing in step S118 in this routine, is output to the peripheral control board 1510. You can do it. That is, the main control board 1310 performs the reservation setting of the command transmitted at the time of power-on in step S50 in the main control-side power-on process shown in FIG. A power-on state command classified as power-on for notifying that power is turned on (power recovery) based on the power-on information set in the work area of the main control built-in RAM in the setting of the work area. A power-on main control return destination command and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. In the peripheral control board command transmission process, a power-on state command is configured as main serial data, The status, the mode, and the sum value are transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of the power-on main control return destination command, which is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of the status, the mode, and the sum value, Subsequently, the power supply is transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510 in the order of the status, the mode, and the sum value, which constitute the counter notification command for determining the number of main prize balls when outputting power.

  Therefore, based on the power-on main control return destination command from the main control board 1310, the peripheral control board 1510 displays the return destination of the progress of the game by the main control board 1310 at the time of power recovery, in the display area of the effect display device 1600. Can be effected and displayed. With this, when a momentary power outage or power outage occurs while the player is playing a game and the power is subsequently restored, the game state immediately before the instantaneous power outage or the power outage can be quickly restored after the power is restored. And the effect of the main control board 1310 on the display area of the effect display device 1600 can be displayed and notified of the return destination of the progress of the game, so that the system of the pachinko machine 1 is in a clumped state, a so-called frozen state. It is possible to prevent a player from being mistaken for a malfunction as seen by the player. Therefore, by returning to the gaming state immediately before the instantaneous power failure or the power failure immediately after the power recovery, it is possible to prevent a player from being mistaken for a failure.

  In the main control board inspection step, which is an inspection step of the main control board 1310 manufacturing line, when the main control board 1310 is first powered on after manufacturing for inspection, as described above, FIG. In step S38 in the main control-side power-on processing shown, the entire area of the main control built-in RAM is always cleared. Accordingly, in the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on in step S50 in the same processing shown in FIG. 205, if the reservation setting of the command transmitted at power-on is performed, the power-on state command classified as power-on A power-on main control return destination command and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command are created and stored as transmission information in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM. Only three commands, a status command, a power-on main control return destination command, and a power-on main prize ball number information output determination counter notification command, are stored in the transmission information storage area of the main control built-in RAM as transmission information. In the peripheral control board command transmission process of step S120 in this routine, As the serial data, configure the power-on state command, send to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and then configure the power-on main control return destination command, The status, mode, and sum value are transmitted to the inspection device of the main control board inspection process in the order of status, mode, and sum value, and subsequently constitute a counter notification command for determining the output of the main prize ball information at power-on. The signals are transmitted to the inspection device in the main control board inspection step in order. The inspection device of the main control board inspection process forms information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine based on the information indicating the model code of the pachinko machine included in the power-on state command received from the main control board 1310. , A series code for specifying the type among the max type, the middle type, and the sweet type indicating the model type, a copyright code for specifying the copyright of the work, and a game specification. (For example, in addition to the game specification that when the probability fluctuation occurs, the state is continued until the next big hit game state occurs, the game specification that the probability fluctuation occurs in a state where the number of times of the special symbol changes is limited (ST Machine), etc., and based on the game specification code for identifying the It has become.

[16. Various control processing of payout control board]
Next, various control processes performed by the payout control board 633 illustrated in FIG. 179 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 207 is a flowchart showing an example of the processing when the payout control unit is turned on. FIG. 208 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the processing when the payout control unit is turned on in FIG. 207. FIG. FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing the continuation of the power-on process, and FIG. 210 is a flowchart showing an example of the payout control unit timer interrupt process. First, the payout control unit power-on processing will be described, and then the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described.

[16-1. Dispensing control unit power-on processing]
First, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, as shown in FIG. 207 to FIG. 209, a process at the time of turning on the payout control unit is performed under the control of the payout control MPU 633aa of the payout control unit 633a on the payout control board 633. . When the payout control unit power-on processing is started, the payout control MPU 633aa sets an interrupt mode (step S500). In this interrupt mode, the priority order of interrupts of the payout control MPU 633aa is set. In the present embodiment, a payout control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is set as the highest priority, and when an interrupt of this payout control unit timer interrupt process occurs, that process is performed with priority.

  Subsequent to step S500, the payout control MPU 633aa performs input / output settings (I / O input / output settings) (step S502). In this I / O input / output setting, various input ports and various output ports of the payout control MPU 633aa are set.

  Subsequent to step S502, the payout control MPU 633aa performs wait timer processing 1 (step S506), and determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S508). The voltage does not rise immediately after the power is turned on until the voltage reaches a predetermined voltage. On the other hand, when a power failure or a momentary power failure (a phenomenon in which the supply of power is temporarily stopped) occurs, the voltage drops, and when the voltage falls below the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. You. Similarly, during the period from when the power is turned on to when the voltage rises to the predetermined voltage, if the voltage becomes lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is input from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310. Therefore, the wait timer process 1 in step S506 is a process for waiting after the power is turned on until the voltage becomes larger than the power failure notice voltage and stabilizes. In the present embodiment, the wait time (wait timer) is 200 milliseconds (wait timer). ms) is set. The determination in step S508 is performed based on a power failure notification signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310.

  Subsequent to step S508, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether the RAM clear switch 1310f of the main control board 1310 has been operated (step S512). This determination does not indicate that the RAM is cleared when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is HI based on the logic of the operation signal from the RAM clear switch 1310f. While it is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated, when the logic of the operation signal (RAM clear signal) from the RAM clear switch 1310f is LOW, it is determined that the instruction is to instruct RAM clear. Then, it is determined that the RAM clear switch 1310f is operated.

  When determining in step S512 that the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f has been operated, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG to a value of 1 (step S514). In other words, the payout control MPU 633aa is in a state where the RAM clearing process for initializing the RAM (that is, the payout control built-in RAM) built in the payout control MPU 4120a can be executed for a predetermined time from when the power is turned on.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S512, when the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the RAM clear switch 1310f is not operated, the payout control MPU 633aa sets a value 0 to the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG (step S516). The payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is stored in the payout control built-in RAM of the payout control MPU 633aa, for example, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, prize ball information storage area). And the state of the logic of the PRDY signal stored in the CR communication information storage area and the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. This flag indicates whether or not the payout information relating to the payout of the existing PRDY signal output setting information) is to be erased. Note that the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG set in steps S514 and S516 is stored in a general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) of the payout control MPU 633aa.

  Subsequent to step S514 or step S516, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a setting to permit access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S518). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM can be made, and for example, payout information can be written (stored) or read out.

  Subsequent to step S518, the payout control MPU 633aa sets a stack pointer (step S520). The stack pointer indicates, for example, an address stacked on the stack for temporarily storing the contents of a storage element (register) in use, or temporarily indicates a return address of the present routine when the subroutine is terminated and the process returns to the present routine. It indicates the address on the stack for storage, and the stack pointer advances each time the stack is stacked. In step S520, an initial address is set in the stack pointer, and from this initial address, the contents of the register, the return address, and the like are stacked on the stack. Then, the stack pointer is returned to the initial address by reading sequentially from the last stack to the first stack.

  Subsequent to step S520, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether or not the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0 (step S522). As described above, the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is set to the value 1 when the payout information is erased, and to the value 0 when the payout information is not erased.

  In the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU 633aa calculates the checksum when the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG has a value of 0, that is, when it is determined that the payout information is not deleted (step S524). This checksum is to calculate the sum of the payout information stored in the payout control built-in RAM assuming that the payout information is a numerical value.

  Subsequent to step S524, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether or not the calculated checksum value matches the checksum value stored in the payout control unit power-off processing (at the time of power-off) described later. (Step S526). If the payout control MPU 633aa determines in step S526 that they match, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether or not the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1 (step S528). The payout backup flag HBK-FLG is a flag indicating whether or not payout backup information such as payout information and a checksum value has been stored and held in the payout control built-in RAM in a power supply cutoff process described later. The value is set to 1 when the control unit power-off processing has been completed normally, and to 0 when the payout control unit power-off processing has not been completed normally.

  In the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG has a value of 1, that is, determines that the payout control unit power-off process has ended normally, Is set (step S530). In this setting, in addition to setting the value 0 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG, power recovery time information is read from the ROM (that is, the payout control built-in ROM) built in the payout control MPU 633aa. The information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM. As a result, various flags, various information stored in various information storage areas, and the like (for example, prize stored in the prize ball information storage area) are the above-described payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM. PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of the PRDY signal is stored in the CR communication information storage area, such as the ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, Information used for various processes is set based on payout information on payout of mismatch counter reset determination time and the like stored in the time management information storage area. Note that “power recovery” includes not only a state where the power is turned on after the power is turned off, but also a state where the power is restored after the power failure or the momentary power failure.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S522, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether the payout RAM clear notification flag HRCL-FLG is not the value 0 (the value is 1), that is, determines that the payout information is to be deleted, or in the determination of the step S526, When the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the checksum values do not match, or in the determination of step S528, the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the payout backup flag HBK-FLG is not the value 1 (the value is 0), that is, If it is determined that the payout control unit power-off processing has not been completed normally, the entire area of the payout control built-in RAM is cleared (step S532). This clears the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S532, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the work area of the payout control built-in RAM as an initial setting (step S534). For this setting, the initial information is read from the payout control built-in ROM, and the initial information is set in the work area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S530 or step S534, the payout control MPU 633aa performs an interrupt initial setting (step S536). This setting is for setting an interrupt cycle when a payout control unit timer interrupt process described later is performed. In the present embodiment, it is set to 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S536, the payout control MPU 633aa performs interrupt permission setting (step S538). With this setting, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at the interrupt cycle set at step S536, that is, every 2 ms.

  Subsequent to step S538, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value A to the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S539). By setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in this watchdog timer clear register HWCL in order, the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S539, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S540). As described above, when the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off or a power failure or a momentary power failure occurs, when the voltage becomes equal to or lower than the power failure warning voltage, a power failure warning signal is transmitted from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310 e of the main control board 1310 as a power failure warning. Will be entered. The determination in step S540 is made based on the power failure notice signal.

  When determining in step S540 that the payout control MPU 633aa determines that the power failure notice signal has not been input, the payout control MPU 633aa determines whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 (step S542). The 2 ms elapse flag HT-FLG is a flag for measuring 2 ms in a payout control unit timer interrupt process which is performed every 2 ms, which will be described later, and is set to a value 1 when 2 ms has elapsed and a value 0 when 2 ms has not elapsed. Is set.

  In the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU 633aa returns to step S540 when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 0, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has not elapsed, and the payout control MPU 633aa receives the power failure notice signal as an input. It is determined whether or not it has been performed.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S542, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value of the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG to 0 when the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG is 1, that is, when it is determined that 2 ms has elapsed (step S544). ).

  Subsequent to step S544, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S546). At this time, the value B is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value A set in step S539.

  Subsequent to step S546, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a port output process (step S548). In this port output process, various information is read from the output information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and various signals are output from the output terminals of the various output ports of the payout control MPU 633aa based on the various information. In the output information storage area, for example, payer ACK information indicating that various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) relating to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received, and drive control to the payout motor 584 are performed. Various information such as driving information, awarded ball number information of the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, and LED display information displayed on the error LED display 633c are stored, and the payout is performed based on the output information. When various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 are normally received from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the control MPU 633aa, a payer ACK signal is output to the main control board 1310 or a drive signal is output to the payout motor 584. Or the number of balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 as a prize ball number information output signal. And outputs to the terminal plate 558 (in this embodiment, and outputs the winning balls count information output signal to the external terminal board 558 each payout motor 584 is actually paid out ten game balls.

  Specifically, a prize ball information output determination counter for determining whether or not to output prize ball information is provided. Is counted based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input process of step S550 described later, and the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584. Is stored and updated in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM by a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the game.

  In a process (program) (not shown) for monitoring the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584, a prize ball information output determination counter stored in the prize ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM is used. The number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 is added to the value and updated based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 in the port input processing in step S550 described later.

  In the port output process of step S548, the value of the prize ball information output determination counter is read from the prize ball information storage area, and when the read value of the read prize ball information output determination counter exceeds the value of 10 ( That is, when the number of game balls actually paid out by the payout motor 584 reaches ten, a prize ball number information output signal is output to the external terminal board 558 (in this case, the number of balls that have exceeded the number is displayed). The value is stored and updated in the award ball information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as a value of the award ball number information output determination counter.), And a display signal is output to the error LED display 633c.

  Subsequent to step S548, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a port input process (step S550). In this port input processing, various signals input to the input terminals of the various input ports of the payout control MPU 633aa are read and stored as input information in the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. For example, an operation signal (RAM clear signal) of the RAM clear switch 1310f, a detection signal from the blade rotation detection sensor 590, a detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, a detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154, a BRQ signal from the CR unit , A BRDY signal and a CR connection signal, and a main payment ACK signal from the main control board 1310 that informs the main control board 1310 that the various commands transmitted in the command transmission processing described later have been normally received. It is stored in the input information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S550, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a timer update process (step S552). In this timer updating process, when determining whether or not a ball bleeding state has occurred due to the discharge blade 589 to which the rotation of the rotation shaft of the discharge motor 584 is transmitted, a ball bleed determination time set as a criterion condition, The skip determination time which is set when the fixed position determination of the payout blade 589 is not performed, and which is set as a determination condition when determining whether or not the lower plate 202 is full with the stored game balls. When determining whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number based on the full tank determination time and the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574. In addition to performing time management, such as a ball-out determination time set as the determination condition, the number of game balls that have been paid out and received by the ball housing portion 589b of the payout blade 589, and the actual A determination is made as to whether or not to reset an inconsistency counter INCC for monitoring whether or not payout of game balls inconsistent due to mismatch with the number of balls detected by the payout detection sensor 591 is repeatedly performed. At this time, time management of the mismatch determination counter reset determination time set with the determination condition is performed. For example, when the ball dust determination time is set to 5005 ms, the timer interrupt period is set to 2 ms. Therefore, every time this timer update process is performed, the ball dust determination time is subtracted by 2 ms, and the result of the subtraction is a value. When it becomes 0, the ball gazing judgment time is accurately measured. These various determination times are stored in the time management information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM as time management information.

  Subsequent to step S552, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a CR communication process (step S554). In this CR communication process, input information is read from the above-described input information storage area, and based on the input information, it is determined whether or not various signals (BRQ signal, BRDY signal, and CR connection signal) from the CR unit are input. judge. The payout control MPU 633aa exchanges various signals with the CR unit based on various signals from the CR unit. In the processing for setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530, as described above, various flags, which are payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM, and various information stored in the various information storage areas (For example, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. stored in the prize ball information storage area, and the PRDY stored in the CR communication information storage area) Information used for various processes is set based on payout information related to payout of PRDY signal output setting information in which the logic state of a signal is set.

  By this processing, for example, even after a momentary power failure or power failure, the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, and the like at the time of power recovery are stored as payout backup information. It is possible to restore to the values of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary or blackout. Thereby, even when the payout device 580 is performing the payout operation of the game balls, the payout operation cannot be continued due to a momentary power failure or power outage, and the payout operation can be continued when the power is restored. As a result, the game balls can be paid out to the upper plate 201 and the lower plate 202 without excess and deficiency. In other words, in the CR communication process, the payout control MPU 633aa exchanges various signals with the CR unit and, when paying out the game balls to the upper plate 201 or the lower plate 202, causes an instantaneous blackout or power outage and the CR unit And the exchange of various signals is interrupted, and even if it becomes impossible to continue paying out game balls, when the power is restored, the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. The value is restored to the value of the prize ball stock number PBS, the actual ball count PB, the drive command number DRV, the mismatch counter INCC, etc. immediately before the momentary power failure or power outage stored as the payout backup information, Recovery of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 633aa) and the CR unit immediately before a power outage or power outage It is possible to continue from, so that it is possible to continue to payout of game balls.

  In this way, the exchange of various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 633aa) and the CR unit is restored to the state immediately before the instantaneous stop or stop when the power is restored, even if the instantaneous stop or stop occurs. Therefore, various signals from the pachinko machine 1 (the payout control MPU 633aa) and the CR unit are not changed by the influence of the instantaneous stop or stop. Therefore, the reliability of exchanging various signals between the pachinko machine 1 (the payout control MPU 633aa) and the CR unit can be improved.

  Further, various information stored in the CR communication information storage area is included in the payout backup information. In the CR communication processing, upon power recovery, the PRDY signal output setting information is read from the CR communication information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM set in the processing for setting the work area of the payout control built-in RAM in step S530. If the read-out PRDY signal output setting information is set to, for example, the logical state of the PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the lending ball is impossible, the PRDY signal is controlled to be paid out. It outputs to the CR unit from an output terminal of a predetermined output port of the MPU 633aa. The value of the inconsistency counter INCC of the prize ball information storage area stored in the payout control built-in RAM and included in the payout backup information, for example, in a retry operation monitoring process performed as one process of the main operation setting process. It is determined whether or not the value of the inconsistency counter INCC is smaller than the inconsistency threshold value INCTH based on the following formula. Is determined, that is, it is determined that the payout operation of the game ball by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state, the value 1 is set to the retry error flag RTERR-FLG, As an output setting of an error state to the CR unit, for example, when not communicating with the CR unit, The logic state of the PRDY signal informing of dispensing operation is not possible (LOW) is set to PRDY signal output setting information stored in the CR communication information storage area for exiting.

  Thus, in the CR communication process, the logic state of the PRDY signal is read from the CR communication information storage area and the PRDY signal is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa by the next timer interrupt from the time of power recovery. To the CR unit. As described above, for example, if the operation of paying out the game balls by the payout device 580 is in an abnormal state immediately before the instantaneous stop, the state is restored when the power is restored, so that it is extremely early after the power is restored. At this stage, a PRDY signal indicating that the payout operation for paying out the lending ball is impossible is output from the output terminal of a predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa to the CR unit, and the payout device 580 is sent to the CR unit. Can be notified that the payout operation of the game ball due to is abnormal. Thus, it is possible to prevent BRDY, which is a useless ball lending request signal, from being output from the CR unit at an extremely early stage from the time of power recovery.

  In the CR communication process, in the port input process of step S550, the CR connection signal is read from the input information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM, and based on the CR connection signal, when the logic is HI, that is, when the pachinko machine is used. When the power is turned on and the payout control board 633 is electrically connected to the CR unit, PRDY is sent to inform that the payout operation for paying out the lending ball is possible. The logic state of the signal is output as HI from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the payout control MPU 633aa to the CR unit, while the logic is LOW, that is, when the pachinko machine 1 is powered on, When the payout control board 633 and the CR unit are not electrically connected, the payout operation for paying out the lending ball is impossible. To convey the fact is outputted from the output terminal of the predetermined output port of the dispensing control MPU633aa to CR unit logic state of the PRDY signal as LOW. The state of the logic of the EXS signal indicating that one payout operation has been started or ended is stored as EXS signal output setting information in the CR communication information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM. A CR connection signal indicating whether or not the CR unit is electrically connected is stored in the state information storage area as CR connection information.

  Subsequent to step S554, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a full tank and out-of-ball check process (step S556). In the full tank and out-of-ball check process, the input information is read from the input information storage area described above, and based on the input information, the game ball in which the lower plate 202 is stored by the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154. It is determined whether or not the game ball is full, or the number of game balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the above-described ball guiding unit 570 by a detection signal from the ball cutting sensor 574 is equal to or more than a predetermined number. Or not. For example, whether or not the lower plate 202 is full of the stored game balls is determined by using the timer interrupt cycle 2 ms in the current full and full ball detection process from the full tank detection sensor 154. When the detection signal is ON, and the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full and ball exhaustion check processing, that is, the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is changed from OFF to ON. When the transition is made, the timer for the above-described full tank determination time is started in the timer update processing in step S552. When the full tank determination time reaches the value 0 in the timer update processing, that is, when the full tank determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON in the full tank and out-of-ball check processing. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is ON, it is determined that the lower plate 202 is full of the stored game balls, and the full tank information for notifying the fact is stored in the above-described state information storage area. I do. On the other hand, when the detection signal from the full tank detection sensor 154 is OFF, the full tank information notifying that the lower plate 202 is not full with the stored game balls is stored in the state information storage area.

  The determination of whether or not the number of game balls taken into the guidance passage 570a of the ball guidance unit 570 is equal to or more than a predetermined number is also performed by using the timer interrupt cycle 2ms, and checking the current full tank and running out of balls. When the detection signal from the ball-out switch is turned ON, and the detection signal from the ball-out switch becomes OFF in the previous (2 ms before) full and ball-out check processing, that is, the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 becomes When the state transitions from OFF to ON, the counting of the above-mentioned ball out determination time is started in the timer update processing of step S552. Then, when the ball-out determination time reaches a value of 0 in the timer update processing, that is, when the ball-out determination time is reached, whether the detection signal from the ball-out detection sensor 574 is ON in this full and ball-out determination processing. Determine whether or not. In this determination, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is ON, it is determined that the number of game balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is equal to or larger than a predetermined number, and the ball is informed. While the information is stored in the state information storage area, when the detection signal from the ball cutting detection sensor 574 is OFF, it is determined that the number of game balls taken into the guiding passage 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not more than the predetermined number. The ball breaking information to that effect is stored in the state information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S556, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a command receiving process (step S558). In this command receiving process, various commands (prize ball command and self-check command) related to payout from the main control board 1310 are received. When the various commands are normally received, payer ACK information notifying the fact is stored in the output information storage area. On the other hand, when the various commands cannot be received normally, a connection error that indicates that an error has occurred in the connection between the main control board 1310 and the payout control board 633 (an error has occurred in the various command signals). Information is stored in the state information storage area described above.

  Subsequent to step S558, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a command analysis process (step S560). In the command analysis process, the command received in step S558 is analyzed, and the analyzed command is stored as received command information in the received command information storage area of the payout control built-in RAM.

  Subsequent to step S560, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a main operation setting process (step S562). In this main operation setting process, operation settings such as prize balls, ball lending, ball elimination and ball damage are performed, a retry operation is determined, and the number of unpaid balls (award ball stock number) is monitored. .

  Subsequent to step S562, the payout control MPU 633aa performs an LED display data creation process (step S564). In this LED display data creation processing, various information is read from the above-described state information storage area, display data to be displayed on the error LED display 633c of the payout control board 633 is created, and the above-described output information storage area is written as LED display information. Remember. For example, the above-mentioned out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, and based on this out-of-ball information, when the number of game balls taken into the guiding path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not a predetermined number or more, a corresponding action is taken. The display data (display value 1 (the number “1”) in this embodiment) is created, and the LED display information is stored in the output information storage area.

  Subsequent to step S564, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a command transmission process (step S566). In this command transmission process, various types of information are read from the above-described status information storage area, and various commands (frame status 1 command, error cancel navigation command, and frame status 2 command) classified into status display are created based on the various information. And sends it to main control board 1310. For example, when the out-of-ball information is read from the state information storage area, based on the out-of-ball information, if the number of game balls taken into the guiding path 570a of the ball guiding unit 570 is not a predetermined number or more, the frame state 1 A command is created and transmitted to the main control board 1310.

  Subsequent to step S566, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL (step S568). By setting the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL following the value B set in step S546. As a result, the value A, the value B, and the value C are sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and the watchdog timer is cleared.

  Subsequent to step S568, the process returns to step S539 again, where the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value A in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, and determines in step S540 whether a power failure notice signal has been input. If there is no signal input, it is determined in step S542 whether the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG has a value of 1 or not. Sets the value 0 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG, sets the value B in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S546, performs port output processing in step S548, performs port input processing in step S550, and performs step S552. The timer is updated in step S5. In step S556, a full or missing ball check process is performed, a command reception process is performed in step S558, a command analysis process is performed in step S560, and a main operation setting process is performed in step S562. LED display data creation processing is performed in S564, command transmission processing is performed in step S566, the value C is set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL in step S568, and steps S539 to S568 are repeatedly performed. Note that the processing from step S539 to step S568 is referred to as “payout control unit main processing”.

  The processing content of the payout control unit main processing differs depending on the progress of the game by the main control board 1310. For this reason, the time required for the processing of the payout control MPU 633aa varies. Therefore, in the port output process of step S548, the payout control MPU 633aa preferentially outputs the payer ACK signal that indicates that various commands related to payout from the main control board 1310 have been normally received to the main control board 1310. I have. As a result, the payout control MPU 633aa secures a processing time so that other fluctuating processing can be sufficiently performed.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S540, when the payout control MPU 633aa determines that a power failure notice signal has been input, the payout control MPU 633aa performs interrupt prohibition setting (step S570). With this setting, the later-described payout control unit timer interrupt processing is not performed, writing to the payout control built-in RAM is prevented, and the above-described rewriting of payout information is protected.

  Subsequent to step S570, the payout control MPU 633aa stops outputting the drive signal to the payout motor 584 (step S574). Thereby, the payout of the game balls is stopped.

  Subsequent to step S574, the payout control MPU 633aa performs a clear setting of the watchdog timer (step S576). As described above, the clear setting is performed by sequentially setting the value A, the value B, and the value C in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL.

  Subsequent to step S576, the payout control MPU 633aa calculates the checksum and stores the calculated value (step S578). This checksum is calculated as the sum of the payout information of the work area of the payout control built-in RAM except for the storage area of the value of the checksum calculated in step S524 and the value of the payout backup flag HBK-FLG.

  Subsequent to step S578, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value 1 to the payout backup flag HBK-FLG (step S580). Thus, the storage of the payout backup information is completed.

  Subsequent to step S580, the payout control MPU 633aa sets prohibition of access to the payout control built-in RAM (step S582). With this setting, access to the payout control built-in RAM is prohibited, writing and reading are disabled, and the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is protected.

  Subsequent to step S582, the payout control MPU 633aa enters an infinite loop. In this infinite loop, since the value A, the value B, and the value C are not sequentially set in the watchdog timer clear register HWCL, the watchdog timer is not cleared. Therefore, the payout control MPU 633aa is reset, and thereafter, the power-on processing of the payout control unit is performed again. Note that the processing of steps S570 to S582 and the infinite loop are referred to as “dispensing control unit power-off processing”.

  The pachinko machine 1 (payout control MPU 633aa) is reset when a power outage or a momentary power outage occurs, and performs the power-on processing of the payout control unit by restoring the power thereafter.

  In step S526, it is checked whether or not the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is normal. Then, in step S528, it is determined whether or not the power-off processing of the payout control unit has been completed normally. Has been inspected. As described above, the payout backup information stored in the payout control built-in RAM is double-checked to check whether or not the payout backup information has been stored due to fraud.

[16-2. Dispensing control unit timer interrupt processing]
Next, the payout control unit timer interrupt processing will be described. The payout control unit timer interrupt processing is repeatedly performed at every interrupt cycle (2 ms in the present embodiment) set in the power up processing of the payout control unit shown in FIGS. 207 to 209.

  When the payout control unit timer interrupt process is started, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the timer interrupt to prohibition and switches (saves) the register as shown in FIG. 210 (step S590). Here, the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register) used in the above-described payout control unit main processing is switched to the auxiliary register. By using this auxiliary register in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing, the value of the general-purpose register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the general-purpose registers used in the main processing of the payout control unit from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S590, the payout control MPU 633aa sets the value 1 to the 2 ms elapsed flag HT-FLG (step S592). The 2 ms elapse flag HT-FLG is a flag that counts 2 ms every time the payout control unit timer interrupt processing is performed, that is, every 2 ms. Each is set.

  Subsequent to step S592, the payout control MPU 633aa switches (returns) the register (step S594). This return switches from the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing to the general-purpose storage element (general-purpose register). By using this general-purpose register in the main processing of the payout control unit, the value of the auxiliary register is not overwritten. This prevents the contents of the auxiliary register used in the payout control unit timer interrupt processing from being destroyed.

  Subsequent to step S594, the payout control MPU 633aa sets interruption permission (step S596), and ends this routine.

[17. Various control processing of peripheral control board]
Next, various processes of the peripheral control board 1510 for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 (main control MPU 1310a) shown in FIG. 179 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 211 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit power-on processing, FIG. 212 is a flowchart showing an example of the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt processing, and FIG. 213 is an example of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing. FIG. 214 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and FIG. 215 is a flowchart illustrating an example of peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing. First, the peripheral control unit power-on process will be described, followed by the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process, and the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt process. . In this embodiment, as the priority of the interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing is set highest, followed by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing, and the peripheral control unit. They are set in the order of V blank interrupt processing.

  As described above, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 has the CPU, RAM, VDP, VRAM, sound source, SATA controller, and various I / O interfaces integrated on one semiconductor chip.

[17-1. Peripheral control unit power-on processing]
First, the power-on processing of the peripheral control unit will be described with reference to FIG. When the power of the pachinko machine 1 is turned on, a peripheral control unit power-on process is performed as shown in FIG. 211 under the control of the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control unit power-on process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs an initial setting process (step S1000). In this initial setting process, a process for initializing the peripheral control IC 1510a itself, a process for determining hot start / cold start, a process for setting a wait timer after reset, a process for transferring various control information (peripheral data), and the like. I do. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a first performs a process of initializing the peripheral control IC 1510a itself, but the time required for the process of initializing the peripheral control IC 1510a is on the order of microseconds (μs), and the peripheral control IC 1510a is extremely short. Can be initialized. As a result, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a enters a state in which interrupt permission is set, so that, for example, in a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, a command related to control of a game effect output from the main control board 1310 is output. And a state in which various commands such as commands relating to the state of the pachinko machine 1 can be received.

  Subsequent to step S1000, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a current time information acquisition process (step S1002). In this current time information acquisition process, calendar information for specifying the year, month and day and time information for specifying the hour, minute, and second are acquired from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC (not shown), and the peripheral control IC 1510a shown in FIG. The current calendar information and current time information are set in the RAM.

  In the present embodiment, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a acquires the calendar information and the time information from the built-in RAM of the real-time clock IC only once when the power is turned on. After performing the current time information acquisition process, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a clear signal to an external WDT (not shown) so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1002, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sets the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0 (step S1004). This V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute a later-described peripheral control unit steady-state process. Is not set, the value is set to 0. The V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to transmit a V blank signal indicating that the screen data (information defining the screen configuration) from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be accepted. The value 1 is set in the later-described peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing which is executed in response to the execution. In this step S1004, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value 0 to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. After setting the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG to 0, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a clear signal to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1004, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1 (step S1006). When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is not the value 1 (it is the value 0), the process returns to step S1006 again to determine whether the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is the value 1. It is repeatedly determined whether or not. By repeating such a determination, the state becomes a standby state until the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a outputs a clear signal to the external WDT after judging whether or not the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1 so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset. ing.

  In the determination of step S1006, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has a value of 1, that is, when it determines to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing, the CPU first sets the steady processing flag SP-FLG. The value 1 is set (step S1008). This steady processing flag SP-FLG is set to 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and to 0 when the peripheral control unit steady processing is completed.

  Subsequent to step S1008, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a 1 ms interrupt timer activation process (step S1010). In the 1 ms interrupt timer activation process, a 1 ms interrupt timer for executing a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is activated, and the number of times the 1 ms interrupt timer is activated and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed. The value 1 is set to the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN for counting the number of times, and the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is also initialized. The 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is updated by the 1ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit.

  Subsequent to step S1010, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs an effect operation unit monitoring process (step S1014). In the effect operation unit monitoring process, in the effect operation unit information acquisition process in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process described later, the first rotation detection sensor 347, the second rotation detection sensor 348, and the pressure detection provided in the effect operation unit 300 are provided. The rotation (rotation direction) of the rotation operation unit 302 based on detection signals from various detection sensors (hereinafter, referred to as “various sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300”) such as the sensor 381 and the elevation detection sensor 382. Various information (for example, rotation (rotation direction) history information of the rotary operation unit 302 created based on detection signals from various sensors provided in the rendering operation unit 300) obtained by acquiring the operation of the pressing operation unit 303, and the pressing operation The operation history information of the unit 303 is set based on the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Monitors operation whether the rotational direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the rotary operation unit 302, appropriately determined whether to reflect the status of the operation of the rotation direction and the pushing operation section 303 of the rotary operation unit 302 to the game effects.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one process of the effect operation unit monitoring process. In the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as the direct light and the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light are based on the above-described lamp pallet setting table including the specified luminance value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. And are set respectively. During the demonstration (demonstration performed in a waiting state of the player) or during the production, the lamp pallet setting process is executed, and the player (or a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall) performs the production operation section 301 (rotation operation). When the user operates the unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303) to set one specified luminance value from the first specified luminance value to the 31st specified luminance value which is the maximum luminance, the set luminance is set. The above-described gradation information set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be updated so as to have the specified value.

  Subsequent to step S1014, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a display data output process (step S1016). In this display data output process, in a display data creation process described later, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a and generates the image data on the VRAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The drawing data for one screen (one frame) is output to the liquid crystal output substrate 1530. Thereby, various screens (images) are drawn (displayed) on the effect display device 1600. In the display data output process, when drawing is performed that exceeds the VDP drawing capability of the peripheral control IC 1510a, output of the generated drawing data for one screen (one frame) is canceled. I have. This makes it possible to prevent the processing time from being delayed. However, although a so-called frame drop occurs, the vibration speaker 354, the top center speaker 462, the top side speaker 464, and the main body frame by the sound data output processing described later. A mechanism is provided in which various loudspeakers such as the speaker 622 (hereinafter, referred to as “various loudspeakers”) can prioritize an effect by music, sound effect, or the like in accordance with various effects.

  Subsequent to step S1016, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a sound data output process (step S1018). In this sound data output processing, in a sound data creation processing described later, a sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on an instruction from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and outputs sound to various speakers from the set output channel. Output. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects that match various effects flow from various speakers.

  Subsequent to step S1018, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a scheduler update process (step S1020). In this scheduler update process, various schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a is updated. For example, in the scheduler update process, in order to instruct what number of screen data from the top screen data to be output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a, out of the screen data arranged in time series constituting the screen generation schedule data. To update the pointer.

  In the scheduler update process, a pointer is set to indicate the order of the emission data from the first emission data among the emission data arranged in time series that constitute the emission mode generation schedule data. Update.

  In the scheduler update process, the first sound among the sound command data indicating sound data such as music and sound effects, the notification sound and the notification sound, which are arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data, The pointer is updated in order to indicate which sound command data from the command data is to be output to the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Also, in the scheduler update process, among the drive data of the electric drive sources such as motors and solenoids arranged in a time series constituting the electric drive source schedule data, what number of drive data from the first drive data is set as an output target. Update the pointer to indicate what to do. The drive data of the electric drive sources, such as motors and solenoids, arranged in time series and constituting the electric drive source schedule data includes a peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt which is repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, which will be described later. It is updated by the motor and solenoid drive processing in the processing. In the motor and solenoid driving process that is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms timer interrupt occurs, the motor and the solenoid are driven in accordance with the driving data indicated by the pointer, and the next driving specified in time series is performed. The pointer is updated to the data, and the pointer is updated each time its own process is executed. In other words, since the drive data indicated by the pointer updated in the motor and solenoid drive processing is forcibly updated in the scheduler update processing, it is assumed that the pointer is temporarily specified for some reason in the motor and solenoid drive processing. Even if other drive data is instructed from the drive data that should be performed, the drive data is forcibly updated in the scheduler update process so as to instruct the drive data that should originally be instructed.

  Subsequent to step S1020, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a reception command analysis process (step S1022). In the received command analysis process, various commands transmitted from the main control board 1310 are received in a peripheral control unit command reception interrupt process described later, and the received various commands are analyzed. Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received in the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In the received command analysis processing, the various commands are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Analyzes the various commands performed. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads, from the control ROM 1510b, the screen generation schedule data, the light emission mode generation schedule data, the sound generation schedule data, the electric drive source schedule data, and the like based on the analyzed various commands ( (Extracted) Set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a also performs a lamp pallet setting process as one process of the received command analysis process. In the lamp pallet setting process, the brightness of the LED used as the direct light and the brightness of the LED used as the indirect light are based on the above-described lamp pallet setting table including the specified luminance value, the normal pallet value, and the special pallet value. And are set respectively. The peripheral control IC 1510a analyzes various commands from the main control board 1310, reads (extracts) the emission mode generation schedule data from the control ROM 1510b based on the analyzed various commands, and executes a lamp pallet setting process. Then, the player (or a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall) operates the rendering operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303) to obtain the maximum luminance from the first luminance designated value. When one specified luminance value up to 31 specified luminance values is set, the above-described gradation information can be updated and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a so as to have the specified specified luminance value. It has become.

  Further, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the command from the main control board 1310 received in the peripheral control unit command interrupt processing is, for example, a start-up winning command for instructing the start of a start-up winning effect, a normal symbol A normal symbol storage command for identifying the number of holds (0 to 4), a symbol synchronization effect start command for instructing the start of a symbol synchronization effect, a symbol memory command output when the number of start-retention changes, a special winning opening It analyzes whether or not it is a special winning opening 1 count display command output every time a game ball is accepted in 2005, and recognizes which game state is currently in play.

  Various commands from the main control board 1310 are received by the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In the received command analysis processing, the various commands are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Performs analysis of various commands. Various commands are classified into various commands related to Toku-zu 1 entrained production, various commands classified into Toku-zu 2 synchronized production, various commands classified into jackpot-related, various commands classified into power-on, and various commands. Various commands classified in the synchronizing production-related, various commands classified in the normal electric role production-related, various commands classified in the notification display, various commands classified in the status display, various commands classified in the test-related and There are various other commands.

  Subsequent to step S1022, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a warning process (step S1024). In this warning process, when the command analyzed in the received command analysis process of step S1022 includes various commands classified into notification display, the display is set to an abnormality display mode for executing various abnormality notifications. Screen generation schedule data, light emission mode generation schedule data, sound generation schedule data, electric drive source schedule data, and the like are read out (extracted) from the control ROM 1510b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In the warning process, when a plurality of abnormalities occur at the same time, the abnormality notification is performed from the pre-registered priority in descending order of priority, and the abnormality is automatically changed to another abnormal notification after the abnormality is resolved. It is supposed to. This allows multiple abnormalities to be monitored at the same time without losing the information that another abnormality has occurred and one abnormality has occurred after the occurrence of one abnormality and before resolving the abnormality. Can be.

  Subsequent to step S1024, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs an RCT acquisition information update process (step S1026). In this RTC acquisition information update process, the calendar information and the time information acquired in the current time information acquisition process in step S1002 and stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are updated. By this RCT acquisition information update process, the hour, minute, and second, which are the time information stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, are updated, and based on the updated time information, the calendar information is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The date is updated.

  Subsequent to step S1026, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a display data creation process (step S1030). In this display data creation process, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update process of step S1020, and the screen data indicated by the pointer out of the time-series screen data constituting the screen generation schedule data is read from the control ROM 1510b. It is read (extracted) and output to the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  When screen data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads out image data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 based on the input screen data and draws (displays) it on the effect display device 1600. Drawing data for one screen (one frame) is generated in the built-in VRAM.

  Subsequent to step S1030, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a sound data creation process (step S1032). In this sound data creation processing, the pointer is updated in the scheduler update processing of step S1020, and among the sound instruction data arranged in time series constituting the sound generation schedule data, the sound instruction data indicated by the pointer is changed to It is read (extracted) from the control ROM 1510b and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. When sound command data is input from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a reads sound data from the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and outputs sound data such as music and sound effects in accordance with the track numbers specified in the sound command data. At the same time, the output channel to be used is set according to the output channel number.

  In the sound data creation processing, each time the sound data creation processing is performed (that is, each time the peripheral control unit regular processing is performed), the sound volume adjustment switch 1510d is controlled based on the sound volume adjustment operation signal from the sound volume adjustment switch 1510d. The slide position is specified. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a controls the sound source of the peripheral control IC 1510a so that the sound volume corresponds to the slide position of the volume adjustment switch 1510d, and the sound data output process of step S1018 sets the sound data in this sound data creation process. The sound data is output from the output channel to various speakers. As a result, sounds such as music and sound effects matched to various effects are played from various speakers.

  In addition, the notification sound and the notification sound flow without depending on the volume control based on the slide operation of the volume control switch 1510d, and the volume from the mute to the maximum volume is controlled by the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a by the program. The sound source of the control IC 1510a can be controlled and adjusted. The volume adjusted by this program can be smoothly changed from mute to maximum volume. For example, even when a staff such as a store clerk in a game hall slides the volume adjustment switch 1510d to set the volume to a low level, the effect sound such as music and sound effects from various speakers is reduced, but the pachinko machine 1 When a malfunction has occurred or when the player is cheating, a notification sound set to a high volume (in this embodiment, the maximum volume) can be played. Therefore, even if the sound volume of the effect sound is reduced, it is possible to prevent a staff such as a clerk of the game hall from becoming unaware of the occurrence of a malfunction or a wrongdoing of the player by the notification sound. Also, based on the current volume set by the volume adjustment based on the slide operation of the volume adjustment switch 1510d, the volume at which the advertising sound is played is reduced so as not to disturb the music and sound effects, while the advertising sound is adjusted. It is possible that the screen (image) displayed on the effect display device 1600 is rendered more powerful in addition to the music and sound effects by increasing the volume of the flowing sound, and the game state shifts to a game state advantageous to the player. You can even tell them you are expensive.

  Subsequent to step S1032, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a backup process (step S1034). In this backup processing, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are copied and backed up in a backup area for regular processing provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the contents stored in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are copied. The data is copied and backed up in a backup area for regular processing provided in 1510c2.

  Subsequent to step S1034, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a WDT clear process (step S1036). In the WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

  Subsequent to step S1036, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a sets the value 0 in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit regular processing (step S1038), and returns to step S1004 again to detect the V blank signal. The flag VB-FLG is initialized by setting the value to 0, and the determination in step S1006 is repeated until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process described later. That is, in step S1006, the process waits until the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG. If it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1, the process proceeds from step S1008 to step S1008. The process of S1038 is performed, and the process returns to step S1004 again. As described above, when it is determined in step S1006 that the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG has the value 1, the processing in steps S1008 to S1038 is performed. The processing of steps S1008 to S1038 is referred to as “peripheral control unit regular processing”.

  In the peripheral control unit steady processing, first, in step S1008, it is determined that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, and the routine processing is started by setting the value 1 to the steady processing flag SP-FLG. In step S1010, the 1 ms interrupt timer activation processing is started. , And steps S1014,..., And step S1036, and finally, in step S1038, when the value 0 is set in the steady processing flag SP-FLG as completion of execution of the peripheral control unit regular processing, the processing is completed. Become. The peripheral control unit steady processing is executed when the value of the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is 1 in step S1006. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG indicates that the V blank signal indicating that the screen data can be accepted from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is transmitted from the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a to the peripheral control IC 1510a. The value 1 is set in a peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt process (to be described later) that is executed in response to an input to the CPU. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. 0.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, the peripheral control unit steady processing is repeatedly executed about every 33.3 ms.

[17-2. Peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing executed when a V blank signal indicating that the screen data from the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can be accepted is input from the VDP of the peripheral control IC 1510a. Will be described. When the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, as shown in FIG. 212 (step S1045). As described above, the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 1 when the peripheral control unit steady processing of steps S1008 to S1038 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. The value is set to 0 when the processing is completed.

  In the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the steady processing flag SP-FLG is not the value 0 (is 1), that is, determines that the peripheral control unit steady processing is being executed, End the routine. On the other hand, in the determination of step S1045, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0, that is, determines that the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed, the CPU determines that the V blank signal detection flag VB -Set the value 1 to FLG (step S1050), and end this routine. As described above, the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG is a flag for determining whether or not to execute the peripheral control unit steady processing. The value is set to 0 when the partial steady-state processing is not executed.

  In the present embodiment, it is determined whether or not the steady processing flag SP-FLG has a value of 0 in the determination of step S1045, that is, whether or not the peripheral control unit regular processing has been completed, and the peripheral control unit regular processing is executed. When the process is completed, the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG in step S1050. This is because the V blank signal is input while the peripheral control unit is performing the normal processing. When the value 1 is set to the V blank signal detection flag VB-FLG, it is determined that the peripheral control unit regular processing is to be executed by the determination in step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. Since the processing is forcibly canceled in the middle and the peripheral control unit regular processing is started from the beginning, the peripheral control unit shown in FIG. In the power-on process (peripheral control unit regular process), the value of the steady process flag SP-FLG is set to 1 in step S1008 to indicate that the peripheral control unit regular process is being executed. In step S1038 of the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit stationary process) in FIG. 211, the value is set to 0 in the stationary process in-process flag SP-FLG. Is transmitted to the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of the present routine, and the routine processing flag SP-FLG is determined in step S1045 in the peripheral control unit V blank signal interrupt processing of the present routine. It is determined whether or not the value is 0, that is, whether or not execution of the peripheral control unit steady processing has been completed. To have. In other words, this is a process in a case where the peripheral control unit normal processing cannot be completed by the time the V blank signal is input and the next V blank signal is input, and the processing is aborted.

  As a result, in the current peripheral control unit regular processing, if the processing cannot be completed in about 33.3 ms and the processing is dropped, the next time in the determination of step S1006 in the peripheral control unit power-on processing in FIG. In a standby state until the V blank signal is input. In other words, the time required to execute the peripheral control unit steady-state processing of this time when the processing has failed is about 66.6 ms. Normally, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, which will be described later, is repeatedly executed each time a 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit power-on process (peripheral control unit steady process) of FIG. Is executed only 32 times for one peripheral control unit steady-state process. However, if the current peripheral control unit steady-state process which has failed as described above exists, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is performed 64 times. Instead, it is executed only 32 times. In other words, even when the peripheral control unit regular processing has failed, consistency between the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the progress state of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is the timer interrupt control, is not guaranteed. It does not collapse. Therefore, even if the peripheral control unit steady processing is not performed, it is possible to reliably match the progress state of the effect.

[17-3. Peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process which is repeatedly executed each time the 1 ms interrupt timer is generated by the activation of the 1 ms interrupt timer in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. 211 will be described. . When the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is less than 33, as shown in FIG. 213 (step S1100). As described above, the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is determined by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process in step S1010 of the peripheral control unit steady process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. This is a counter that counts the number of times a certain peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process has been executed. In the present embodiment, as described above, the frame frequency of the effect display device 1600 (the number of screen updates per second) is set to approximately 30 fps per second as described above. 0.3 ms (= 1000 ms ÷ 30 fps). That is, since the peripheral control unit regular processing is repeatedly executed at about every 33.3 ms, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing, and then the next peripheral control unit regular processing is performed. Is executed, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is executed only 32 times. Specifically, when the 1 ms interrupt timer is started in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady processing, the first 1 ms timer interrupt occurs first, and the second,..., And 32 th 1 ms timer interrupts are sequentially performed. Will occur.

  In the determination of step S1100, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the 1ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than 33 times, that is, that the 33rd 1ms timer interrupt has occurred and the peripheral control unit 1ms timer interrupt processing has started. When it is determined, this routine is terminated. If the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, in the present embodiment, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process is set to the peripheral control unit V Although set higher than the blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. In other words, in this embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, In order to execute the peripheral control unit V blank interrupt process, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. Then, after the 1 ms interrupt timer is restarted in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit regular processing due to the generation of the V blank signal, the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing due to the first occurrence of the 1 ms timer interrupt is started. ing.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1100, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the 1-ms timer interrupt execution count STN is smaller than 33, the CPU adds 1 to the 1-ms timer interrupt execution count STN (increment, step S1102). By adding the value 1 to the number of times of execution of the 1 ms timer interrupt STN, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started by the 1 ms interrupt timer starting process of step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. The number of times the 1 ms timer interrupt processing of the peripheral control unit as this routine is executed is increased by one time.

  Subsequent to step S1102, motor and solenoid drive processing is performed (step S1104). In this motor and solenoid driving process, the pointer is designated by the pointer in the driving data of the electric driving sources such as the motors and solenoids arranged in time series which constitute the electric driving source schedule data set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. In accordance with the drive data to be driven, the electric drive sources such as the motor and the solenoid are driven, and the pointer is updated to the next drive data specified in time series, and the pointer is updated each time the motor and the solenoid drive process are executed. I do. Thus, an electric drive source such as a motor and a solenoid managed by the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a (for example, an electric drive source provided on the door frame 3 and an electric drive source provided in various effect units provided on the game board 5) ) Is driven according to the electrical drive source schedule data.

  Subsequent to step S1104, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs movable body information acquisition processing (step S1106). In this movable body information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors included in various effect units provided on the game board 5 are input, thereby obtaining history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, original information). Position history information, movable position history information, etc.) are created and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. The CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is based on the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, based on the original positions (standby positions) of the various movable bodies provided in the various effect units provided on the game board 5. The movable position is grasped by setting the position and acquiring the movable position.

  Subsequent to step S1106, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs effect operation unit information acquisition processing (step S1108). In this effect operation unit information acquisition process, it is determined whether or not detection signals from various sensors provided in effect operation unit 300 have been input, so that the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors (for example, rotation operation unit) The rotation (rotation direction) history information of the 302 and the operation history information of the pressing operation unit 303 are created, and set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a. From the history information of the detection signals from the various sensors set in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, the rotation direction of the rotation operation unit 302 and the presence / absence of operation of the pressing operation unit 303 can be obtained.

  Subsequent to step S1108, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a backup process (step S1110), and ends this routine. In this backup process, the contents stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are copied and backed up in a 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the contents stored in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are copied. The data is copied and backed up in a 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2. In the present embodiment, the 1 ms timer interrupt processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a and the regular processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a are set to different areas, and the SDRAM 1510c1 , 1510c2, and a backup area for steady-state processing provided in the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 are set to different areas.

  As described above, in the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process, various processes related to the effects in steps S1104 to S1108 are executed as the progress of the effect within the period of 1 ms. In contrast, in the peripheral control unit steady-state process in the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. I have. In the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, when the 1 ms timer interrupt execution count STN is not smaller than the value 33 in step S1100, that is, when the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt occurs and the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing is started. Since this routine is terminated as it is, even if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control unit by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt will After the start of the 1 ms timer interrupt process is forcibly canceled, the 1 ms interrupt timer is started again in step S1010 in the peripheral control unit steady process due to the generation of the V blank signal, and then the peripheral control by the generation of the first 1 ms timer interrupt is performed. 1ms timer division It is adapted to start the actual processing. In other words, consistency between the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit steady processing and the state of progress of the effect by the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt processing, which is timer interrupt control, is not lost. Therefore, it is possible to reliably match the progress state of the effect.

  Further, as described above, the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly changes depending on the liquid crystal size of the effect display device 1600, and the V blank signal is output even in the manufacturing lot of the peripheral control board 1510 on which the peripheral control IC 1510a is mounted. The output interval may change slightly. In the present embodiment, since the V blank signal is a signal that controls the entire system of the peripheral control board 1510, if the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt happens to precede the next V blank signal, the peripheral control In order to execute the section V blank interrupt processing, the start of the peripheral control section 1 ms timer interrupt processing by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. That is, in the present embodiment, even when the interval at which the V blank signal is output slightly changes, the start of the peripheral control unit 1 ms timer interrupt process by the 33rd 1 ms timer interrupt is forcibly canceled. It is possible to absorb a time lag due to a slight change in the interval at which the V blank signal is output.

[17-4. Peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing]
Next, peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing for receiving various commands from the main control board 1310 will be described. When various commands from the main control board 1310 are started to be transmitted as serial data, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a transmits the main peripheral serial data to the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC 1510a by one byte (8 bits). ) Is fetched into the reception buffer, and when this fetching is completed, an interrupt is generated with this as a trigger, and the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is performed. In the main serial data, one packet is composed of 3 bytes, the status is allocated as the first byte, the mode is allocated as the second byte, and the status and mode are regarded as numerical values as the third byte, and the total is obtained. Is calculated.

  When the peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the one-byte reception period timer has timed out, as shown in FIG. 214 (step S1200). The one-byte reception period timer sets a period during which one-byte (8-bit) information of main serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310 can be received.

  In the determination of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, the 1-byte (8-bit) information of the main circumference serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. If it is determined that it is within the receivable period, the 1-byte information received from the reception buffer of the serial I / O port of the peripheral control IC 1510a is fetched (step S1202), and the value 1 is added to the reception counter SRXC (increment). Step S1204). The reception counter SRXC is a counter that indicates the number of times the data has been extracted from the reception buffer. When the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, is extracted from the reception buffer, the value is 1, and the mode that is the second byte of the main serial data is When the value is taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 2, and when the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data is taken out from the reception buffer, the value becomes 3. The reception counter SRXC is set to an initial value 0 when the power is turned on or the like.

  Subsequent to step S1204, it is determined whether or not the reception counter SRXC has the value 3, that is, whether or not the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has been extracted from the reception buffer (step S1206). In this determination, following the status which is the first byte of the main serial data, the mode which is the second byte of the main serial data, and the sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data are sequentially transmitted from the reception buffer. It is determined whether or not it has been removed.

  In the determination of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether the reception counter SRXC has a value other than 3, that is, the mode in which the status is the first byte of the main serial data and is still the second byte of the main serial data. If it is determined that the sum value, which is the third byte of the main serial data, has not been sequentially extracted from the reception buffer, a 1-byte reception period timer is set (step S1208), and this routine ends. By setting the 1-byte reception period timer in step S1208, the mode in which the second byte of the main serial data or the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data can be received is set.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1206, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the value of the reception counter SRXC is 3, that is, after the status that is the first byte of the main serial data, When it is determined that a certain mode and the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data are sequentially extracted from the reception buffer, an initial value 0 is set in a reception counter SRXC (step S1210), and the sum value is calculated (step S1210). S1212). This calculation is performed by regarding the status, which is the first byte of the main serial data, and the mode, which is the second byte of the main serial data, already taken out of the reception buffer in step S1202 as numerical values, and sums them (sum value). ) Is calculated.

  Subsequent to step S1212, it is determined whether or not the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 matches the sum value calculated in step S1212 (step S1212). S1214). The sum value which is the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 is the sum value assigned as the third byte of the main serial data among the main serial data from the main control board 1310. Therefore, it should match the sum value calculated in step S1212. However, the pachinko machine 1 is supplied with game balls from the island facilities of the game hall, and when the game balls rub against each other, they are electrostatically discharged to generate noise. It is under the environment that is easy to receive.

  Therefore, in the present embodiment, on the peripheral control board 1510 side, the status assigned as the first byte of the received main serial data and the mode assigned as the second byte of the main serial data are regarded as numerical values. Then, the sum (sum value) is calculated, and the calculated sum value matches the sum value allocated as the third byte of the main circumference serial data among the main circumference serial data from the main control board 1310. Has been determined. Accordingly, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether or not the main circumference serial data has changed to a non-regular main circumference serial data under the influence of noise between the main control board 1310 and the peripheral control board 1510. Can be determined.

  In the determination of step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a matches the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202 with the sum value calculated in step S1212. When it is determined that the status has been received, the status allocated as the first byte of the main serial data and the mode allocated as the second byte of the main serial data are stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a (step S1216). ), End this routine.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1200, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the 1-byte reception period timer has not timed out, that is, the 1-byte (8-bit) of the main circumference serial data transmitted from the main control board 1310. When it is determined that the time period over which information can be received is exceeded, or in the determination of step S1214, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines the sum value of the third byte of the main serial data already extracted from the reception buffer in step S1202. If it is determined that the sum does not match the sum value calculated in step S1212, the routine ends.

[17-5. Peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing]
Next, the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing executed when the power failure notice signal from the power failure monitoring circuit 1310e of the main control board 1310 is input from the main control board 1310 will be described. When the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing is started, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a first activates a 2-microsecond timer as shown in FIG. 215 (step S1300), and determines whether the power failure notice signal is input. Is determined (step S1302). In the determination of step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the power failure notice signal has not been input, the CPU ends this routine as it is.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1302, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the power failure notice signal has been input, it determines whether 2 microseconds have elapsed (step S1304). In this determination, it is determined whether the timer started in step S1300 has elapsed 2 microseconds. If it is determined in step S1304 that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a has not elapsed for 2 macroseconds, the process returns to step S1302 to determine whether or not the power failure notice signal has been input. If it is determined, the routine is terminated as it is, while if it is determined that the power failure notice signal has been input, it is determined again in step S1304 whether 2 microseconds have elapsed. That is, in the determination of step S1304, it is determined whether or not the power failure notice signal has been input for two microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing of this routine is started.

  In the determination of step S1304, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the power failure notification signal has been input for 2 microseconds after the peripheral control unit power failure notification signal interrupt processing of this routine is started, the CPU performs the power saving processing. Performed (step S1306). In this power saving process, the power consumption of the entire system of the pachinko machine 1 is reduced by sequentially turning off the backlight of the effect display device 1600, turning off the excitation of the motor and the solenoid provided on the game board 5, and turning off various LEDs. By suppressing, even if the power of the pachinko machine 1 is cut off, a stable operation is ensured only for a period of 20 milliseconds, which is a period during which the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a can operate.

  Subsequent to step S1306, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs a command reception waiting process (step S1308). In this command reception standby process, assuming that there are various commands being transmitted by the main control board 1310, at least a period of 17 milliseconds is set so that the peripheral control IC 1510a can receive the command being transmitted. It is designed to wait. When the command is received, the above-described peripheral control unit command reception interrupt processing is started, and the received command is stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Subsequent to step S1308, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs command backup processing (step S1310). In this command backup processing, the command stored in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a is copied and backed up to a regular processing backup area provided in the RAM of the peripheral control IC 1510a.

  Subsequent to step S1310, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines whether a power failure notice signal has been input (step S1312). In the determination of step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the power failure notice signal has been input, it performs a WDT clear process (step S1314). In this WDT clear processing, a clear signal is output to the external WDT so that the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is not reset.

  On the other hand, in the determination of step S1312, when the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines that the power failure notification signal is not input, or returns to step S1312 again after step S1314, and determines whether the power failure notification signal is input. Is determined. That is, it is determined infinitely whether or not the power failure notice signal is input. By continuing the determination indefinitely as described above, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a cannot output a clear signal to the external WDT when it determines that the power failure notice signal has not been input in the determination of step S1312, While the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset, if the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a determines in step S1312 that the power failure notice signal has been input, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a performs WDT clear processing in step S1314, CPU does not reset. When the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset, the peripheral control unit power-on processing shown in FIG. 211 is restarted.

  As described above, if the input of the power failure notification signal continues in the infinite loop as determined in step S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset immediately before the power failure occurs by executing the WDT clear processing in step S1314. So that they do n’t. On the other hand, if the input of the power failure notification signal is canceled without being continued in the infinite loop in the determination in step S1312, the WDT clear processing is not executed, so that the output of the clear signal to the external WDT is interrupted. Has become. Thus, even if the peripheral control unit power failure notice signal interrupt processing, which is the main routine, is erroneously started due to noise or the like, and the noise occurs beyond the period of 2 microseconds and the determination in step S1302 is passed, If the input of the power failure notice signal is not continued and canceled in the infinite loop in the determination in S1312, the CPU of the peripheral control IC 1510a is reset because the WDT clear processing in step S1314 is not executed. Such noise can be dealt with by automatically resetting and returning.

[18. Characteristic operation and effect of the present embodiment]
As described above, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 in the rendering unit 2600 of the table unit 2000 are not displayed by light emission, and the game panel 1100 In a state where the decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 is not illuminated by the panel decorative LED 1130a of the panel decorative substrate 1130 (normal state), the decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 is formed so as to be always visible from the front. The visibility is assisted by the back left back decoration plate 3360 of the back left production unit 3300 and the back right back decoration plate 3460 of the back right production unit 3400 in the back unit 3000 arranged behind the panel plate 1110. , The player is within the game area 5a. It is possible to recognize that the decorative pattern 1150 is formed outside the frame-shaped center role 2500, and the light guide plate 2601 is in a transparent state. It is possible for the player to visually recognize the effect display device 1600 or the like that can display the effect image arranged rearward in the inside in a good state. At this time, since the frame-shaped center role 2500 provided in the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 is made transparent and the decoration pattern 1150 can be visually recognized from the front, the decoration pattern 1150 can be seen through the center role 2500. The part located behind the center role 2500 can also be visually recognized, and the entire decorative pattern 1150 can be visually recognized.

  The decorative pattern 1150 is illuminated from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 and can be illuminated by light incident from the side of the panel plate 1110, so that light from other than the side can also be directed in an appropriate direction. Since it is possible to reflect the light, the light from the LEDs of the decorative body and the movable decorative body provided in the pachinko machine 1, the light of the lighting in the gaming hall where the pachinko machine 1 is installed, and near Depending on the light from the other installed pachinko machines, the position of the eyes of the player sitting in front of the present pachinko machine 1, and the like, the appropriate portions of the decorative pattern 1150 can be seen to shine, so that the decoration is performed. The appearance of the pattern 1150 will change in various ways, which is clearly different from a conventional pachinko machine in which a decorative sheet is attached to a game panel (panel board). It is possible to show the player in the game area 5a of the elephant (atmosphere), to strongly attract the interest of the player, and to make the pachinko machine 1 highly appealing to the player. The decoration of the board 1110 can be enjoyed by the player, and a decrease in the interest of the player can be suppressed.

  In this normal state, light is emitted from the side surface of the panel plate 1110 by the light emission of the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration substrate 1130 provided at the corners (upper left corner and lower left corner) of the panel holder 1120 having a square outer shape. When the decorative pattern 1150 is illuminated and decorated, the entire decorative pattern 1150 looks shining, so that the decorative pattern 1150 can be conspicuous, and the appearance of the portion outside the center role 2500 in the game area 5a can be improved. At the same time, the interest of the player can be strongly attracted and the appeal to the player can be enhanced. In addition, since the decorative pattern 1150 is made to emit light, the appearance of the decorative pattern 1150 can be made different from that when the light emitting decoration is not made. Therefore, the decoration of the panel plate 1110 which cannot be seen with the conventional pachinko machine. , The decoration pattern 1150 is illuminated and decorated, so that the player can think that something is good, such as the arrival of a chance. It is possible to increase a sense of expectation and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, when the decorative pattern 1150 is illuminated and decorated, and the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 in the rendering unit 2600 is illuminated, the outer side of the frame-shaped center role 2500 in the game area 5a. The part is illuminated and decorated by the decorative pattern 1150, and the part in the frame of the center role 2500 is illuminated and displayed (luminous decoration) by the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601. Since the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 are patterns of a design that is continuous with each other, the whole of the game area 5a is a single pattern (here, a geometric pattern including a plurality of contours of regular triangles). Since the luminous decoration is performed by the decoration of the learning pattern, the entire appearance in the game area 5a is displayed. It is possible to improve, it is possible to entertain the decoration in the game area 5a to the player. At this time, since the portion of the center role 2500 that contacts the front surface of the panel plate 1110 is formed transparent, the decorative pattern 1150 formed on the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110 forms Since the portion located behind the portion in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 can be viewed from the front through the center role 2500, the decorative pattern 1150 and the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2610 of the light guide plate 2601 can be seen. The break between the pattern 2630 can be made as small as possible, and for the player, the decorative pattern 1150 and the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 are continuous integral decorations. The recognition can be facilitated. Therefore, the giant light-emitting decoration can be shown to the player by the decorative pattern 1150 of the panel plate 1110 and the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601, thereby giving a strong impact to the player. This makes it possible for the player to be convinced that something good will happen, thereby further increasing the sense of expectation for the game and suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Further, the panel decoration board 1130 is arranged at the upper left corner and the lower left corner of the panel holder 1120 having a rectangular outer shape, and an LED as a back-side light emitting means is mounted at a position behind the panel board 1110 and far from the panel decoration board 1130. Since the back upper right base decorative board and the lower right base decorative board of the back right effecting unit 3400 are arranged, the decorative pattern 1150 extends from the panel decoration LED 1130a of the panel decoration board 1130 to the side of the panel board 1110. Since it is possible to decorate a part where the incident light is difficult to reach with the back light emitting means, it is possible to decorate the entire decoration pattern 1150 with uniform brightness, and to achieve the above-described operation and effect. 1 can be reliably embodied.

  In addition, the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 are emitted to the center role 2500 provided in the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110 with respect to the decorative pattern 1150 formed on the rear surface of the transparent panel plate 1110. Since the transparent light guide plate 2601 that can be displayed is provided, the positions of the decorative pattern 1150 and the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 in the front-rear direction can be made as close as possible. Therefore, it is possible to further enhance the sense of unity when the light emitting decoration is performed together with the decorative pattern 1150 and the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601, and it is possible to more easily achieve the above-described effects. .

  Further, a transparent light guide plate 2601 capable of emitting and displaying the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 is provided within the frame of the frame-shaped center role 2500 provided in the opening 1112 of the panel plate 1110. When the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 is displayed by light emission, a member (for example, displayed on the effect display device 1600) disposed in the frame of the center role 2500 (behind the opening 1112). The effect image, the underside movable decorative body 3110 of the underside effecting unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, the underside movable decorative body 3210 of the underside effecting unit 3200, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 of the backside effecting unit 3300, and the underside left bottom Movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and back lower right movable decorative body 3420) of back right directing unit 3400 are derived. The first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the plate 2601 makes it difficult to see, and the player can be made aware of the luminescent display of the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601, and the interest of the player can be increased. The decoration of the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 can be enjoyed by being attracted to the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601.

  Further, as described above, the inside of the frame of the center role 2500 in the game area 5a can be decorated with the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601, and the center role in the game area 5a. Since the decoration outside the frame of 2500 can be light-emitting-decorated by the decorative pattern 1150, the timing at which the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 is luminously decorated and the timing at which the decorative pattern 1150 is luminously decorated are appropriately combined. This makes it possible to show a variety of light emitting effects to the player, thereby making it difficult for the player to get tired of the game, making it possible for the player to entertain, and suppressing a decrease in interest in the game.

  In addition, since a portion of the center role 2500 that is in contact with the front surface of the panel plate 1110 is formed transparent, compared to the case where a cutout is provided so that the decorative pattern 1150 can be visually recognized from the front, Since the surface (front surface) of the part can be made smooth, it is possible to make it difficult to influence the distribution of the game balls B in the game area 5a, and to prevent the game balls B from moving unintentionally. The movement (flow) of the game ball B in the game area 5a can be enjoyed, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, since the panel holder 1120 is formed in substantially the same shape as the front component 1000 having a square outer shape and a substantially circular inner shape, the width between the inner circumference and the outer circumference of the panel holder 1120 is reduced to four corners. Is the widest. In addition, since the panel decoration board 1130 is attached to the upper left corner and the lower left corner of the four corners of the panel holder 1120, a space for attaching the panel decoration board 1130 can be easily secured. Since the panel decoration substrate 1130 is located outside the panel plate 1110 whose outer periphery is held by the panel holder 1120 when viewed from the front, the panel decoration substrate 1130 is not seen in the game area 5a when viewed from the front, and the game area The appearance in 5a can be improved.

  Further, the panel holder 1120 is provided on the rear side of the front component 1000, and the front of the panel decoration substrate 1130 provided on the panel holder 1120 can be covered with the front component 1000. The side) can make the panel decoration substrate 1130 hard to see, and the appearance outside the game area 5a can be improved. In addition, since the panel decoration substrate 1130 can be made difficult to see from the player side by the front component 1000, it is difficult for the player to notice the presence of the panel decoration substrate 1130, so that the player The decoration pattern 1150 of the panel board 1110 is hardly considered to be light-emitting decoration, and when the decoration pattern 1150 is light-emitting decorated, a strong impact can be given to the player, and the light emission of the decoration pattern 1150 can be provided. The decoration can be enjoyed, and the decrease in interest can be suppressed.

  Furthermore, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, in the normal state, the back movable decoration 3110 of the back production unit 3100 in the back unit 3000, the back movable decoration 3210 of the back production unit 3200, A back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and a back lower left movable decorative body 3320 of the back left rendering unit 3300, and a back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and a back lower right movable decorative body 3420 of the back right rendering unit 3400 are respectively located near the outer periphery of the game area 5a. Are in a standby position where they are separated from each other and dispersed, and the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable movable body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body The body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can decorate the vicinity of the outer periphery of the game area 5a, In 2000, the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 of the rendering unit 2600 are not luminously displayed, and the light guide plate 2601 is in a transparent state, and is arranged at the center of the game area 5a. The effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized in a good state.

  In this standby position, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable decoration are provided. Since the bodies 3420 are separated from each other, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable are formed. The player determines that the decorative bodies 3420 are gathered at the first united position or the second united position as the specific position to form a predetermined decorative mode (a hexagonal first decorative mode or an annular second decorative mode). Can be hardly recalled, and the impact when assembled can be increased. In this normal state, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, upper back movable decorative body 3210, back upper left movable decorative body 3310, back lower left movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and lower right lower movable movable body 3420 When moving from the standby position to the first merging position or the second merging position, the first decoration mode or the second decoration mode is formed in the vicinity of the center of the game area 5a to form the first decoration mode or the second decoration mode. The appearance can surprise the player, and can strongly attract the interest of the player.

  Then, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are placed in the first combined position. When the first pattern 2610 as a specific pattern of the light guide plate 2601 is caused to emit light in a state where the light guide plate 2601 has been moved to the second combined position, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, and the upper left back are formed by the first pattern 2610. The decorations of the movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be changed, and the light emitting portion (first By changing the design part 2610a, the second design part 2610b, the third design part 2610c, and the fourth design part 2610d), the underside movable decorative body 311 is changed. The first decorative mode and the second decoration formed by the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 Since the decoration of the mode can be changed in various ways, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back The pattern of the effect by the lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be made various, it is possible to make the player hard to get tired, and it is possible to give a strong impact to the player, and to give something to the player. It can be assumed that there is a good thing, and it is possible to suppress a decrease in interest of the player in the game.

  Also, in the light guide plate 2601, the first pattern portion 2610a, the second pattern portion 2610b, the third pattern portion 2610c, and the fourth pattern portion 2610d of the first pattern 2610 emit light in order to emit a moving pattern. Since the first pattern 2610 can be displayed, the player can be made to feel strange by moving the first pattern 2610, and the player's interest can be strongly attracted. Can be enjoyed, and a decrease in interest in the game can be suppressed.

  On the other hand, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are combined into a first united body. When the second pattern 2630 is emitted as a specific pattern of the light guide plate 2601 in a state where the light guide plate 2601 is moved to the position or the second united position, the second pattern 2630 allows the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, and the upper left back. The outer peripheries of the movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be emphasized, and the second decorative pattern 2630 makes the movable decorative body larger. In addition to being able to show, by the second pattern 2630, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back left upper movable movable body 3310, the back left lower movable movable decoration 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be connected to each other, so that the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the lower left upper movable movable body 3310, the lower left lower movable movable decoration are provided. The body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 and the second pattern 2630 form one large decoration, which can give a strong impact to the player. It is possible to raise expectation for the game by assuming that there is something good.

  The lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are in the standby position. At the time, the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 are caused to emit light as the specific pattern of the light guide plate 2601, and the first combination position and the second combination position are set near the center of the game area 5a. Decorate the lower back movable decorative body 3110, upper back movable decorative body 3210, back upper left movable decorative body 3310, back lower left movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and back lower right movable decorative body 3420 at the second united position. Since the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 to be lighted are displayed near the center of the game area 5a, the first pattern 210 and the second pattern 2630 are displayed from the player side (front). 10 or the second pattern 2630 can be visually recognized in a good condition, it is possible to entertain the first pattern 2610 and second pattern 2630 to the player. Then, in a state where the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 emit light, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back left upper movable movable body 3310, the back left lower movable movable body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body When the body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are moved from the standby position to the first combined position and the second combined position, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, and the lower left upper movable movable body 3310 The lower back movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can show the player an effect that is integrated with the first picture 2610 and the second picture 2630. In this way, a strong impact can be given to the player, and it is possible to entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  In addition, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are located at the first combined position. In the state of being moved to the second back position, the back lower back decoration board 3121, the lower back front decoration board 3122, the back upper back decoration board, the back upper front decoration board, the back left upper base decoration board, the back left upper front decoration Substrate, back left lower base decorative board, back left lower front decorative board, back upper right base decorative board, back upper right front decorative board, back right lower base decorative board, back right lower front decorative board When the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601 are illuminated and displayed, and the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 are indirect light, the LED is a light close to direct light. Because there is, the first pattern 26 Since the brightness of the portion of the LED becomes higher in the 0 or the second pattern 2630, the player can see the light emission effect which could not be seen with the conventional pachinko machine by the first pattern 2610 or the second pattern 2630 and the LED. And can have a strong impact on the player, as well as make the player think that there is something good, and increase the expectation for the game to suppress the decline in interest. Can be.

  Furthermore, the back lower back decorative board 3121, the back lower front decorative board 3122, the back upper back decorative board, the back upper front decorative board, the back left upper base decorative board, the back left upper front decorative board, the back left lower base decorative board, the back By lighting the LEDs mounted on the lower left front decorative board, the back upper right decorative board, the upper right front decorative board, the lower right lower decorative board, and the lower right lower decorative board, Since the movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be illuminated, The lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 glow brightly. Lower movable decoration 3 10, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable decorative body 3420 can be made to stand out. Similarly, the luminous decoration of the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 is played. People can be entertained.

  In addition, since a plurality of movable decorative bodies that move from the standby position to the first combined position or the second combined position are provided, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, and the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 are provided. And a plurality of movable decorative bodies including the lower back lower movable movable body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 are separately moved from the standby position to the first combined position or the second combined position. Because, after moving one movable decorative body to the first combined position or the second combined position, depending on whether the next movable decorative body moves to the first combined position or the second combined position, It is possible to excite the player with excitement and excite the player, and by appropriately combining the timing at which each movable decorative body moves to the first combined position or the second combined position. The movable effects by a plurality of movable decorative body can be made more versatile, it is possible to suppress the reduction of interest and hardly get bored the player.

  Further, as described above, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 , The light emission of the first pattern 2610 and the second pattern 2630 on the light guide plate 2601, and the back lower back decorative board 3121, the lower back front decorative board 3122, the back upper back decorative board, the back upper front decorative board, the back left upper base Decorative board, upper left upper decorative board, lower left lower decorative board, lower left upper decorative board, upper right upper decorative board, upper right upper decorative board, lower right lower decorative board, lower right lower Various effects can be presented to the player by appropriately combining the light emission of the LED mounted on the first-stage decorative board, and it is possible to prevent the player from getting bored and to suppress a decrease in interest. it can.

  In addition, by the light emission display of the second pattern 2630 of the light guide plate 2601, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, And since it is made to complement between the back lower right movable decorative bodies 3420, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back left upper movable movable body 3310, the back left lower movable movable body 3320, the back Even if the upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the lower right lower movable decorative body 3420 have a gap without contacting each other, the gap can be hidden by the second pattern 2630. The upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 are in contact with each other. Therefore, it is not necessary to increase the movement accuracy of each, and the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable movable body 3320, the upper right movable movable decorative body 3410, and The moving accuracy of the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be made lower, and the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the upper left upper movable movable body 3310, the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320, the lower right upper movable It is possible to suppress an increase in cost for the moving mechanism of the decorative body 3410 and the lower right movable movable body 3420.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a pair of first movable decorative bodies as the lower movable effector 3110 of the lower lower stage effect unit 3100 and a lower movable ornamental body 3210 of the upper effect unit 3200, The back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the back lower left movable decorative body 3320 of the back left rendering unit 3300 as the second movable decorative body, and the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the lower right movable decorative body 3420 of the back right rendering unit 3400, Each of them is in a standby position, and the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body 3210 face each other in the vertical direction around the effect display device 1600 arranged at the center of the game area 5a in front view. And the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320, and the lower right upper movable movable body 3410 and the lower right right Since the moving decorative bodies 3420 face each other in the left and right direction around the effect display device 1600, they are separated from each other and dispersed, so that the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body 3110 are arranged. The body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right right movable decorative body 3420 decorate the periphery of the effect display device 1600 and the periphery of the gaming area 5a. In addition, the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 can be visually recognized from the player side in a favorable state, and the effect image can be enjoyed by the player.

  In the standby position, the pair of back left moving arm 3330 and back right moving arm 3430, and the pair of back lower moving arm 3130 and back upper moving arm 3230 are separated from each other, and the lower back movable decorative body 3110 is separated. The game area 5a in front view together with the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back left upper movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 (the effect display device) 1600), the back left moving arm 3330, the back right moving arm 3430, the back lower moving arm 3130, and the back upper moving arm 3230 display the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600. It is possible to make the effect image displayed on the effect display device 1600 easy to see from the player side (front) without blocking, and It is possible to entertain an effect image in the state.

  Then, the pair of lower back movable arms 3130 and the upper back movable arm 3230 are moved closer to each other to move the pair of lower back movable decorative bodies 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body 3210 to a first combined position as a predetermined position, and The back left moving arm 3330 and the back right moving arm 3430 are moved closer to each other, and a pair of back left upper movable decorative body 3310 and back lower left movable decorative body 3320 and back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are moved downward. When the movable decorative body 3110 and the upper movable movable body 3210 are moved to the first combined position as a position connecting the movable decorative body 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body 3210, they are densely gathered at the center of the game area 5a and in front of the effect display device 1600 in front view. Form one large first decorative aspect. Thus, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable so as to block the effect image displayed on the performance display device 1600. Since the decorative body 3410 and the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 move to form a large hexagonal first decorative mode, the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body are provided to the player. 3210, a back upper left movable decorative body 3310, a back left lower movable decorative body 3320, a back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and a back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be noticed. The decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 (a plurality of movable decorative bodies) In addition to being able to entertain, the appearance of a large first decoration mode in the center of the game area 5a in front of the effect display device 1600 can surprise the player, and something good for the player It is possible to increase the sense of expectation for the game by assuming that there is a game.

  Further, the pair of lower back movable decorative bodies 3110 and 3210 is moved by the pair of lower back moving arms 3130 and upper back moving arms 3230 between the standby position as a predetermined position and the first combined position. At the same time as being moved to the union position, a pair of back left upper movable decorative body 3310, back left lower movable decorative body 3320, back right upper movable movable body 3410 and back lower right movable decorative body are formed by a pair of back left movable arm 3330 and back right movable arm 3430. By moving 3420 to a second united position between a standby position as a position for connecting the pair of lower back movable decorative bodies 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body 3210 to each other and a first united position, the lower back movable decoration Body 3110, upper back movable decorative body 3210, back upper left movable decorative body 3310, back lower left movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and back lower right movable decorative body 342 Are formed in a ring shape along the periphery of the hexagon, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back left upper movable movable body 3310, the lower left lower movable movable body 3320 , The back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 can be shown to the player a decoration that is clearly different from the large hexagonal first decorative mode densely assembled. A variety of effects can be achieved by different decoration modes using the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420. Can be made hard to get tired of, and a decrease in interest can be suppressed. Also, from the state of the standby position, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable movable body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420, in the effect of moving to the first united position via the second united position, whether or not to move from the standby position to the second united position, whether to move from the second united position to the first united position, In each scene, the player can be thrilled and throbbed, and a multi-stage effect can entertain the player and suppress a decrease in interest.

  By the way, the six lower back movable decorative bodies 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are in the standby position. When moving to the first united position or the second united position from the above, in the standby position state, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, Since the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are separated from each other, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the lower left upper movable movable body 3310, the lower left lower movable movable body 3320 are provided. It is possible to make it difficult for the player to recall that the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 gather to form the first decoration mode or the second decoration mode. . In addition, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are moved from the standby position to the second position. When moving to the one united position or the second united position, the back lower movable decorative body 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body 3210 move without changing their directions, and the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 and the lower left lower movable movable body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 have their directions changed and move, and the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the lower right back movable decorative body 3420 have different orientations at the standby position and the first combined position, and therefore, at the standby position, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, The decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 move to the first united position to form the first decorative mode. Can be hardly recalled to the player.

  More specifically, in a normal state, one vertex is directed upward in the lower back movable decorative body 3110, and one vertex is directed downward in the upper back movable decorative body 3210. In the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, one vertex (tip) is directed rightward, and in the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, one vertex (tip) is directed leftward. Then, in the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body 3210, in the same posture, they move upward and downward, respectively, and are located at the first combined position and the second combined position, and the back upper left movable decorative body 3310 In the back and lower left movable decorative body 3320, the tip facing the right moves to the first united position and the second combined position while changing the posture so as to face the lower right and upper right, respectively, and the back upper right movable decorative body 3320 In the 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, the respective tips facing the left move to the first united position or the second united position while changing their postures so as to face the lower left and the upper left. The movable decorative bodies arranged vertically and horizontally in different directions move to the first united position so that their vertices converge at one point, or move to the second united position so as to be arranged in a ring, and form one large decoration. body That is intended to form, it can be difficult to occur to the player.

  Therefore, the six lower back movable decorative bodies 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body are provided. When the 3420 is moved from the standby position to the first united position or the second united position, they move the player unexpectedly, which can surprise the player and give a strong impact to the player. In addition to this, it is possible to make the player think that there is something good, and it is possible to increase a sense of expectation for the game and suppress a decrease in interest.

  Further, in each of the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, respectively Is a movement different from the movement between the standby position and the first united position (a second movement, more specifically, a movement of rotating about an axis extending forward and backward in the lower back movable decorative body 3110 and the upper back movable decorative body 3210) The upper left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320, the upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the lower right lower movable decorative body 3420 can perform a rotation around an axis extending left and right. Lower movable decorative body 3110, back upper movable decorative body 3210, back upper left movable decorative body 3310, back lower left movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and back lower right movable decorative body 34 By performing the second movement at an appropriate position between the standby position and the first united position, the player can see the first decorative mode of the first united position and the second decorative mode of the second united position. An effect different from the effect can be shown, and it is possible to make it difficult for the player to get tired of the various effects, to make the player more entertaining, and to suppress a decrease in interest in the game.

  Further, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the back left lower movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 are each referred to as a triangular pyramid. Specific apex of an acute angle (a vertex facing upwardly of the lower back movable decorative body 3110, a vertex facing downwardly of the upper back movable decorative body 3210, a back upper left movable decorative body 3310, and a back lower left movable Since it has a vertex (tip) facing the right of the decorative body 3320 and a vertex (tip) facing the left of the back upper right movable decorative body 3410 and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420), The lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the upper back left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable decorative body 3320, the lower right upper movable movable body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body 3420 are in the standby position. When moving between the united position and performing the second movement, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable for the player. The decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be easily recognized as moving, and the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the back upper movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable It is possible to entertain the movements of the decorative body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420, thereby suppressing a decrease in interest.

  Furthermore, a back upper left movable decorative body 3310, a back lower left movable decorative body 3320, a back upper right movable decorative body 3410, a back lower right movable decorative body 3420, a lower back movable decorative body 3110, and a back upper movable decorative body 3210 are formed by a pair of back left and right movable decorative bodies. Since the moving arm 3330 and the back right moving arm 3430 and the pair of the lower back moving arm 3130 and the upper back moving arm 3230 are provided respectively, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decoration are provided. When the body 3310, the back lower left movable decorative body 3320, the back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and the back lower right movable decorative body 3420 can be moved separately when assembled at the first united position or the second united position. , Lower back movable decorative body 3110, back upper movable decorative body 3210, back upper left movable decorative body 3310, back left lower movable movable body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3 By appropriately selecting the order of moving (moving) the 10 and the lower right back movable decorative body 3420, it is possible to make the variation of the movable effect more versatile, and it is difficult to get the player bored by the various movable effects, and it is interesting. Can be suppressed.

  According to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 132 as the lottery result by the lottery means. 135, a variety of light sources (a plurality of light sources) provided on the game board 5 of FIG. 135 as a plurality of light emitters, and the preceding decorative portion of FIG. 159 as a movable body. 159. As the magnetic detection unit, the back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, the back left lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3321ab, the back right upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab, and the back right lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3421ab are provided. ing.

  Various light-emitting sources (a plurality of light-emitting sources) provided on the game board 5 can emit light. 159, the magnet 3312 of the preceding decorative portion 3312, the magnet 3322a of the preceding decorative portion 3322, the magnet 3412a of the preceding decorative portion 3412, and the preceding stage. It has a magnet 3422a of the decorative part 3422. The back upper left magnetic pole change detecting circuit 3311ab, the lower left lower magnetic pole change detecting circuit 3321ab, the lower right upper magnetic pole change detecting circuit 3411ab, and the lower right lower magnetic pole change detecting circuit 3421ab are formed by the magnet 3312 of the preceding decorative portion 3312 and the preceding decorative portion 3322. The magnet 3322a, the magnet 3412a of the preceding decorative portion 3412, and the magnet-bearing surface of the magnet 3422a of the preceding decorative portion 3422 are disposed separately from the preceding decorative portions 3312, 3322, 3412, and 3422. The magnetic poles of the magnet 3312 of the step decoration part 3312, the magnet 3322a of the step decoration part 3322, the magnet 3412a of the step decoration part 3412, and the magnet 3422a of the step decoration part 3422 are detected, and the step decoration parts 3312, 3322, and 3412 are detected. , 3422 as standby position It is capable of detecting the original position).

  While the preceding decorative portions 3312, 3322, 3412, and 3422 are operating, light emitted from various light-emitting sources (a plurality of light-emitting sources) provided on the game board 5 is a back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, and a back left lower magnetic pole change detection. It can be input to the circuit 3321ab, the back right upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3411ab, and the back right lower magnetic pole change detection circuit 3421ab.

  As described above, while the first-stage decorative portions 3312, 3322, 3412, and 3422 are operating, light emitted from various light-emitting sources (a plurality of light-emitting sources) provided on the game board 5 is transmitted to the rear upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab, Although the lower left magnetic pole change detecting circuit 3321ab, the upper right lower magnetic pole change detecting circuit 3411ab, and the lower right lower magnetic pole change detecting circuit 3421ab can be incident, this light is not affected at all by disturbance light. The magnetic pole change detecting circuit 3311ab, the lower left lower magnetic pole change detecting circuit 3321ab, the upper right lower magnetic pole change detecting circuit 3411ab, and the lower right lower magnetic pole change detecting circuit 3421ab use the magnet 3312 of the preceding decorative portion 3312, the magnet 3322a of the preceding decorative portion 3322, The magnet 3412a of the preceding decorative portion 3412 and the magnet of the preceding decorative portion 3422 Tsu is the specific position standby position by detecting the magnetic poles of bets 3422a Sakidan escutcheon 3312,3322,3412,3422 (original position) can be detected. Therefore, erroneous detection of the standby position (original position), which is a specific position of the preceding decorative portions 3312, 3322, 3412, 3422, by light emitted from various light emitting sources (a plurality of light emitting sources) provided on the game board 5 is prevented. can do.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, an effect is produced based on a command from the main control board 1310 included in the main control unit 1300 of FIG. 13 as a main control board capable of controlling the progress of a game. As an effect control board capable of controlling the progress, a peripheral control board 1510 included in the effect control unit 1500 of FIG. 13 is provided. The pachinko machine 1 further includes a peripheral data ROM board 1520 shown in FIG. 174 as a ROM board, and a liquid crystal output board 1530 shown in FIG. 174 as a video signal output board. The peripheral data ROM board 1520 has a peripheral data ROM 1520a shown in FIG. 174 as a ROM in which control information (peripheral data) relating to effects based on game specifications is stored in advance. The liquid crystal output substrate 1530 can output to the effect display device 1600 a signal compatible with the type of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600 of FIG. 130 as a display device.

  As a first connector, a plug of the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 of FIG. 174 and a special connector provided on the peripheral data ROM board 1520 of FIG. 174 are provided between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520. It is electrically connected to a socket of the SCN 3 by a board-to-board connector capable of connecting between the boards. As a second connector different from the first connector, a plug of the special connector SCN2 provided in the peripheral control board 1510 of FIG. 174 and a liquid crystal output board 1530 of FIG. 174 are provided between the peripheral control board 1510 and the liquid crystal output board 1530. Are electrically connected to each other by a board-to-board connector that can be connected between boards by a socket of a special connector SCN4 provided in the connector.

  The peripheral control board 1510 can control the progress of the effect by the control information (peripheral data) read from the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and can output video signals to the liquid crystal output board 1530 in a plurality of types. . Examples of a plurality of types of video signal systems include an RGB system, an LVDS system, a MIPI system, an eDP system, and a clockless system. In the present embodiment, four systems (a total of four systems) of one system of RGB system, two systems of LVDS system (first LVDS system, second LVDS system), and MIPI system are used as a system of a plurality of types of video signals. ) Has been adopted.

  The peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data ROM board 1520, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 are housed in the peripheral control board box 1505 in FIG. 174 as the same board box.

  As described above, the peripheral data ROM 1520a in which the control information (peripheral data) relating to the production based on the game specification is stored in advance is provided on the dedicated substrate, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520 which is a separate substrate from the peripheral control substrate 1510, and the production display device. A board that outputs a signal compatible with the method of the video signal input to 1600 is provided on a dedicated board called a liquid crystal output board 1530 which is a separate board from the peripheral control board 1510. That is, if the peripheral control board 1510 is not modified and newly manufactured in accordance with the control information (peripheral data) related to the production based on the game specifications, the peripheral control board 1510 conforms to the method of the video signal input to the production display device 1600. Since it is not modified and newly manufactured, it can be configured as a common substrate that does not depend on the game specifications or the type of the video signal input to the effect display device 1600. This eliminates the need to manufacture a plurality of types of peripheral control boards 1510 in accordance with the game specifications and the method of the video signal input to the staging display device 1600, and reduces costs by manufacturing only the same peripheral control board 1510. Can be contributed to. Therefore, the cost of the peripheral control board 1510 can be suppressed.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the payout device 580 of FIG. 93 in which one payout passage 580a to which the game balls B stored in the ball tank 552 of FIG. 93 are supplied is formed. ing. The dispensing device 580 includes at least the dispensing motor 584 in FIG. 105 and the dispensing blade 589 in FIG. 105 as a ball feed rotating unit. The payout motor 584 can rotate the rotation axis by 18 degrees as a predetermined angle in response to the step driving. The dispensing blade 589 rotates via a drive gear 585, a first transmission gear 586, a second transmission gear 587, and a dispensing gear 588a of a dispensing gear member 588, the rotation of the rotation shaft of the dispensing motor 584 constituting a rotation transmitting member. As a result, a plurality of ball receiving portions 589b are formed at equal intervals as ball receiving recesses that can receive and send out the game balls B one by one (three are formed at equal intervals every 120 degrees). .

  The reduction ratio of the rotation transmitting member is determined in advance so that the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout blade 589 does not become an integer. Specifically, the reduction ratio n is set to the number of teeth Z0 (= 9) of the drive gear 585 / the number of teeth Z3 (= 24) of the dispensing gear 588a of the dispensing gear member 588 by calculation based on mechanics. The rotation angle of the dispensing blade 589 can be detected by a plurality of detecting pieces 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 in FIG. 105 as a light shielding piece provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the dispensing blade 589. Specifically, the blade rotation detection sensor 590 can detect the detection piece 588b of the payout gear member 588.

  As described above, the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball B by the payout blade 589 is not an integer, and the reduction ratio of the rotation transmitting member is not an integer. Each time the ball is dispensed, the positioning position is different each time. Thus, the positions where the game balls and the payout blades 589 contact each time are different each time, so that the adhesion positions of the dust and the dust can be dispersed. Also, if the above-mentioned reduction ratio n of the rotation transmitting member is set so as to cause such a positioning error, the error accumulates. The rotation angle is detected by a plurality of detecting pieces 588b of the dispensing gear member 588 shown in FIG. 105 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the dispensing blade 589, and is reset when the accumulated error accumulates to some extent. Thereby, the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out is secured. Therefore, in the pachinko machine 1, by changing the rotation position of the ball feed rotation unit that receives and sends out the game balls every time the game balls are paid out, the position where the dust and the dust are attached is dispersed, so that the ball and the dust are dispersed. On the other hand, a strong payout device 580 can be provided.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the progress of the effect is based on the ordinary lottery result, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result as the lottery result by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300. 174 is provided as peripheral control board 1510 as effect control means capable of controlling the operation. In the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, a metal shield plate 1540 of FIG. 174 as a first shield and a metal back cover and a conductive coating portion of the effect display device 1600 of FIG. 178 as a second shield are further illustrated. 178 conductive elastic members 1545 are provided. The metal shield plate 1540 is formed of a metal as a conductive member. The metal back cover in effect display device 1600 is formed of metal as a conductive member. The conductive elastic member 1545 is formed by covering the surface of a foam 1545b shown in FIG. 178 as a conductive member with a conductive covering portion 1545a shown in FIG. 178 as a core member formed of the elastic member.

  The peripheral control board 1510 is disposed between the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600, and the metal shield plate 1540 and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically conductive. The connection is made electrically via an elastic member 1545.

  As described above, in the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 is disposed between the metal shield plate 1540 formed of the conductive member and the metal back cover of the effect display device 1600. At the same time, the metallic shield plate 1540 and the metallic back cover of the effect display device 1600 are electrically connected via the conductive elastic member 1545, so that the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise on the peripheral control board 1510 can be reduced. Can be reduced by the shield plate 1540 made of metal and the metal back cover in the effect display device 1600. Therefore, the influence of electromagnetic wave noise can be reduced.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the game board 5 of FIG. 126, the ball tank 552 of FIG. 126, and the tank rail 553 of FIG. 126 are provided. The game board 5 is provided with a back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 of the game board 5 of FIG. 126 on the rear side as a box body to which the effect control unit 1500 of FIG. 126 is attached as a board box. The ball tank 552 can store game balls. The tank rail 553 allows the game balls stored in the ball tank 552 to flow downstream.

  The effect control unit 1500 as a board box is housed in the space of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided in the game board 5. In the tank rail 553, a cutout portion 553aa in FIG. 126 is formed as a hole through which foreign matter (for example, metal powder generated by abrasion of the game ball B) generated by the flowing game ball B can drop. The game board 5 has an upper wall 3010 a disposed below the tank rail 553 as an upper surface of a back box 3010 of a back unit 3000 provided in the game board 5 when attached to the pachinko machine 1. In this pachinko machine 1, foreign matter falling from the notch 553aa formed in the tank rail 553 can be received on the upper wall 3010a as the upper surface of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided in the game board 5. .

  As described above, foreign matter falling from the notch 553aa formed in the tank rail 553 can be received on the upper wall 3010a of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided in the game board 5, so that foreign matter can be received. Even if it falls from the notch 553aa formed in the tank rail 553, it is possible to prevent the fallen foreign matter from entering the space of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000 provided in the game board 5. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent an electrical trouble due to a foreign object falling on the effect control unit 1500 as a board box housed in the space of the back box 3010 of the back unit 3000. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an electric trouble due to a foreign object falling from the tank rail 553.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. The power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 183 is provided as a power supply means capable of generating various voltages based on the power supply voltage from the game hall outside the gaming machine. I have.

  The power supply substrate 630 is a plurality of components having the same shape, and includes the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9 of FIG. 183 having the same package type (TO-220F). , D10. On the mounting surface of the power supply board 630, among a plurality of components having the same shape, the silk print TSLK9 of FIG. 186 (b) is used as a silk print for a specific component. Silk printing is performed so that it can be distinguished from the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 in FIG. 183.

  Specifically, as the silk printing of the FET Q5, which is a specific component, the silk printing TSLK9 of FIG. 186 (b) is silk-printed on the mounting surface of the power supply board 630. The FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, and Q4 of FIG. 183 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, and D10 of FIG. 183 are silk-printed TSLK1 to TSLK8 of FIG. Silk printed. In the silk print TSLK9, a white oblique line ad1, which does not exist in the silk prints TSLK1 to TSLK8, is represented as a characteristic pattern.

  As described above, as a plurality of parts having the same shape, the FETs Q1, Q2, Q3, Q4, Q5 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, Even if D10 is provided on the power supply substrate 630, among a plurality of components having the same shape, the silk-printed TSLK9 for the FET Q5, which is a specific component, is replaced by FETs Q1, Q2, which are other components excluding the specific component. Q3, Q4 and the Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10 are silk-printed so as to be distinguished from each other. Q4 and Schottky barrier diodes D1, D2, D9, D10. There. Therefore, a notable part can be distinguished from other parts among a plurality of parts.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. The game can be advanced based on, for example, and it is possible to perform light emission control on hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are ten full-color LEDs provided on the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b in FIG. 195 as light emitting means. As a possible light emission control means, a constant current drive circuit 402bax constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402ba provided on the lower left decorative board 402b of FIG. 195 and a constant current drive circuit 402bbx constituting the LED constant current drive circuit 402bb are provided. The left side of the door frame of FIG. And a left side under the decorative board 402b which is formed in an elongated strip shape extending vertically along the Id decorative body 404.

  The constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx are formed to have a substantially rectangular planar shape, and each side thereof extends along both ends in the longitudinal direction of the strip-shaped lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. They are arranged to be non-parallel. Specifically, the ends of the land patterns of the constant current drive circuits 402bax and 402bbx shown in FIG. 197 are inclined 45 degrees with respect to the left end 402beg1 and the right end 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b. Is arranged as.

  In this manner, the strip-shaped lower left side decorative substrate 402b has the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx having a substantially rectangular planar shape, and includes the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bax. Each side of the current drive circuit 402bbx is arranged so as to be non-parallel along both longitudinal sides of the strip-shaped lower left decorative substrate 402b. Thus, compared to the case where the sides of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx are arranged so as to be parallel along both longitudinal sides of the strip-shaped lower left decorative board 402b. Since a region sandwiched between both ends in the longitudinal direction of the belt-shaped lower side lower decorative substrate 402b and each side of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx can be formed large, Wiring can be drawn out from each side of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx to be electrically connected to ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. Therefore, in the strip-shaped lower left decorative substrate 402b, it is possible to secure a region where the wiring is drawn out from each side of the constant current drive circuit 402bax and the constant current drive circuit 402bbx.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. The game can be progressed based on the above, etc., and LED mounting in which ten full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 provided on the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b in FIG. 196 (a) are mounted as light emitting means. A left side lower decorative substrate 402b of FIG. 196 (a) having a surface 402bx and an LED non-mounting surface 402by on which the light emitting unit is not mounted is provided.

  The left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a white resist as a white coating film, and chain lines LSLK1 to LSLK10 in FIG. 197 (a) as mounting auxiliary symbols (in FIG. 197 (a), chain lines corresponding to hdLED4 and hdLED5 which are full-color LEDs). LSLK4 and LSLK5 are respectively shown.) And part numbers corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are full-color LEDs in FIG. 197 (a) (FIG. 197 (a) shows part numbers corresponding to hdLED4 and hdLED5 which are full-color LEDs. Only certain LEDs 4 and 5 are shown). The white resist is formed on the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b and the entire surface of the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b. The mounting auxiliary symbols specify the chain lines LSLK1 to LSLK10 as auxiliary lines indicating the mounting positions of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative board 402b, and the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10. A part number corresponding to hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a predetermined color paint different from the white resist on the white resist on the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left decorative board 402b as yellow ( Or black).

  As described above, the auxiliary lines (that is, the chain lines LSLK1 to LSLK10) indicating the mounting positions of the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative board 402b in FIG. The number specifying the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which are the full-color LEDs of 197 (a) (that is, the component number corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10, which is the full-color LED) is the LED non-display of the lower side lower decorative board 402b of FIG. 197 (a). On the white resist on the mounting surface 402by, a paint of a predetermined color different from the white resist is formed in yellow (or black). That is, a white resist is formed on the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b in FIG. 196 (a), and the mounting positions of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are the full-color LEDs in FIG. The auxiliary lines shown (that is, the yellow dashed lines (or black dashed lines) LSLK1 to LSLK10) and the numbers specifying the hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are the full-color LEDs in FIG. 197 (a) (that is, the hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are full-color LEDs) And the corresponding yellow (or black) part number) are not formed at all. Therefore, the numbers specifying the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are the full-color LEDs in FIG. 197 (a) (that is, the yellow (or black) part numbers corresponding to the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are the full-color LEDs) and the full color in FIG. 197 (a) Auxiliary lines (that is, yellow dashed lines (or black dashed lines) LSLK1 to LSLK10) indicating the mounting positions of the LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 can be made difficult for the player to see.

  Further, the white resist formed on the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b in FIG. 196 (a) is formed by the light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are the full-color LEDs in FIG. 196 (a). ) Can increase the reflectivity on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b, so that the numbers specifying the hdLED1 to hdLED10 that are the full-color LEDs of FIG. 197, and auxiliary lines (that is, yellow dashed lines (or black dashed lines) LSLK1) indicating the mounting positions of hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are the full-color LEDs of FIG. 197 (a). LSLK10), the full color shown in FIG. It is possible to prevent a decrease in reflectance in the LED mounting surface 402bx on the left side under the decorative substrate 402b in FIG. 196 (a) of light emitted hdLED1~hdLED10 is ED. Therefore, it is possible to prevent the reflectance of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b of FIG. 196 (a) from being reduced by the light emission of the hdLED1 to hdLED10 which are the full-color LEDs of FIG. 196 (a).

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, various boards inside the pachinko machine 1 (for example, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 13 and the peripheral control board of the peripheral control unit 1500 in FIG. 13) 1510) is provided with a power supply board 630 of FIG. The power supply board 630 includes the fuse FUSE1 of FIG. 189 as a fuse, the surge absorber SA1 of FIG. 189 as a surge voltage absorbing element, the rectifier circuit 630c of FIG. 189 as a rectifier circuit, and the power supply circuit 630f ′ of FIG. 189 as power supply means. I have. The fuse FUSE1 can receive an AC power from an island facility in a game hall as an external device of the game machine. The surge absorber SA1 is capable of absorbing a surge voltage of an AC power supply input via the fuse FUSE1. The rectifier circuit 630c can rectify AC power input via the surge absorber SA1 into DC power. The power supply creation circuit 630f 'can supply power to various substrates inside the pachinko machine 1 based on a DC power supply input via the rectifier circuit 630c.

  When a commercial power supply voltage (100V AC) having a voltage higher than the power supply voltage for a game machine (24V AC) is input as an AC power supply from the island facilities of the game hall through the fuse FUSE1, the surge absorber SA1 reduces the surge voltage to an allowable voltage. The fuse FUSE1 is short-circuited by being destroyed beyond the threshold value, so that a large current flows through the fuse FUSE1 to form a circuit for blowing the fuse FUSE1.

  As described above, when the commercial power supply voltage (100V AC) having a voltage higher than the power supply voltage for the game machine (24V AC) is input to the surge absorber SA1 via the fuse FUSE1, as the AC power supply from the island facility in the game hall, the surge voltage is increased. Is broken when the voltage exceeds the allowable voltage, so that a short circuit occurs and a large current flows through the fuse FUSE1, thereby forming a circuit for blowing the fuse FUSE1. As a result, even if the power cord for supplying the AC power from the island facility in the game hall to the pachinko machine 1 is erroneously inserted into the power outlet of the commercial power supply voltage (100V AC), the power supply board 630 is destroyed. However, it is possible to reliably prevent various substrates inside the pachinko machine 1 except for the power supply substrate 630 from being broken. Therefore, it is possible to prevent various substrates inside the pachinko machine 1 from being destroyed when a commercial power supply voltage (AC 100 V) having a voltage higher than the power supply voltage for the gaming machine (AC 24 V) is supplied.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. The game can be advanced based on the above, etc., and ten full-color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 provided on the left side lower decorative substrate 402b of FIG. 196 (a) as light emitting means are provided on the LED mounting surface 402bx. It has a left side lower decorative substrate 402b of FIG. 196 (a) to be mounted.

  The left side lower decorative substrate 402b has a solid white resist as a white coating film, and a connector LDUCN of FIG. 196 (a) as a connector. The white coating film is formed on the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b.

  The LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b has full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 having the same color or the same color as the white coating, and the same color or the same color as the white coating. And a connector LDUCN having a housing of a distinguishable color. Specifically, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b is solid-coated with a white resist, and the packages of the full color LEDs hdLED1 to hdLED10 are white (the color is recognized to be the same color as white). The connector LDUCN is made of a white resin (also referred to as a natural color, a color recognized as being the same color as the white (natural color)). That is, the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b is an electronic component having a package of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-coated). HdLED1 to hdLED10, which are full-color LEDs, and a connector LDUCN having a housing of the same color (a color recognized as being the same color) as a white resist that is entirely covered (solid-painted) are mounted, and are white. Electronic components such as resistors and capacitors (not shown) that do not have the LED and connectors that do not have the white color are not mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative substrate 402b at all.

  As described above, a white coating film (that is, a white resist) is formed on the entire surface of the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left decorative substrate 402b in FIG. Has a package of the same color or a color that can be identified as the same color as the hdd1 to hdLED10, and a housing of the same color as the white coating film (that is, the white resist) or a color that can be identified as the same color. Since the connector LDUCN and the connector LDUCN are mounted respectively, even if the full color LED hdLED1 to hdLED10 and the connector LDUCN are mounted on the LED mounting surface 402bx of the lower left lower decorative board 402b, the LED of the lower left lower decorative board 402b is mounted. The entire surface of the mounting surface 402bx is a white coating film (that is, a white resist) It has the same color or colors that can be identified as the same color. This can contribute to making the LED mounting surface 402bx of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b a bright light emitting surface. Therefore, the left side lower decorative substrate 402b can be a bright light emitting surface.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the gate portion 2003 of FIG. 130 in the gaming area 5a of the gaming board 5 of FIG. A gate sensor 2506, a general winning opening sensor 2401, 3001, a first starting opening sensor 3002, a second starting opening sensor 2402, a large winning opening sensor 2403, etc. And a game can be advanced based on a detection signal from the detecting means.

  Among the plurality of entrances, for example, the first initiation opening 2002 and the second activation opening 2004 as the entrances having similar uses are the first activation opening sensor 3002 and the second activation opening sensor 2402 which are detection means corresponding to the first activation opening 2002 and the second activation opening 2004, respectively. Are provided differently. Specifically, a connector having a 2.5 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting two wires from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310. In addition, a connector having a 2.0 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting two wires from the second starting port sensor 2402 to the main control board 1310. As described above, the gate sensor 2506, which is a detection means corresponding to the gate unit 2003 as an entrance similar to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, is provided on the game board 5 as described above. A special winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting a game ball B received in the winning opening 2005, a general winning opening sensor 2401, 3001 for detecting a gaming ball B received in a general winning opening 2001 provided in the game board 5, and the gaming board 5. Along with various sensors such as a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting near the first starting port 2002 provided on the panel relay board 1710, the main control board is electrically connected and collected through one connector. 1310 is electrically connected.

  As described above, among the plurality of entrances, for example, as the entrances having similar uses, the first start-up port 2002 and the first start-up port sensor 3002 which are detection means corresponding to the second start-up port 2004, and the second start-up port Since the shape of the connector of the starting port sensor 2402 is provided differently, for example, the first starting port 2002 and the first starting port which are detection means corresponding to the second starting port 2004 as the entrance ports having similar uses. The erroneous connection of the connectors of the sensor 3002 and the second starting port sensor 2402 can be prevented. The gate sensor 2506, which is a detection means corresponding to the gate unit 2003 as a ball entrance similar in use to the first starting port 2002 and the second starting port 2004, includes a large winning port sensor 2403, a general winning port sensor 2401, Along with the various sensors such as the magnetic sensor 3001 and the magnetic sensor 3003, they are electrically connected and integrated in the panel relay board 1710, and are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via one connector. That is, a first starting port 2002, a second starting port 2004, which are entrance ports having similar uses, and a first starting port sensor 3002, a second starting port sensor 2402, and a gate which are detection means corresponding to the gate unit 2003. Misconnection of the connector of the sensor 2506 can be prevented. Therefore, erroneous connection can be prevented.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 132 as the game control means, the ball tank 552 in FIG. 13 as the ball tank, and the ball guide path in FIG. The ball guiding unit 570 includes a payout device 580 shown in FIG. 13 as a payout device.

  The main control board 1310 is mounted with the main control MPU 1310a of FIG. 150 as a game control microprocessor, and the main control MPU 1310a is based on a first special lottery result or a second special lottery result as a lottery result by lottery means. In addition, the game can be advanced, and the function display unit 1400 can be displayed and controlled as a display unit provided at a predetermined position on the front side of the game board 5 in FIG. is there. Specifically, as shown in FIG. 130, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a, and the main control MPU 1310a executes the main control timer interrupt processing of FIG. In the special symbol and special electric accessory control processing of step S114 in step S114, when the lottery result is based on the first starting port sensor 3002, various commands related to the special figure 1 tuning effect are created as the first special lottery result. When the lottery result is obtained by the second starting port sensor 2402, various commands related to the special figure 2 tuning effect are created as the second special lottery result, and are stored in the transmission information storage area as transmission information, and the special symbol is created. Is determined based on the random number for the variation display pattern described above, and the variation display pattern of the determined special symbol is determined. The output of the lighting signal to the first special symbol display or the second special symbol display of the function display unit 1400 is set so that the first special symbol display or the second special symbol indicator of the function display unit 1400 is lit according to Is stored in the output information storage area described above as output information.

  The ball tank 552 is arranged above the game board 5 and can store game balls. The ball guiding unit 570 is arranged near the game board 5 and can guide the game balls stored in the ball tank 552 to the downstream side via the tank rail 553 in FIG. The payout device 580 is arranged near the game board 5 and based on a payout instruction (an instruction to pay out game balls one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633) guided by the ball guiding unit 570. Can be paid out.

  The wiring FCBL in FIG. 150 is a ball tank 552 as a wiring for electrically connecting the connector MFCN for the function display unit in FIG. 150 as a connector provided on the main control board 1310 and a connector (not shown) provided in the function display unit 1400. , A ball guiding unit 570, and a payout device 580. The game balls are polished in the island facility of the game hall, or rubbed against each other in the circulation between the island facility and the pachinko machine 1, and emit electromagnetic noise by being charged and electrostatically discharged. Therefore, static electricity easily accumulates in and around the area where the ball tank 552, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580, in which the game balls can stay, are installed. That is, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the connector MFCN for the function display unit provided on the main control board 1310 and the connector (not shown) provided on the function display unit 1400 is under an environment susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise. .

  The main control MPU 1310a mounted on the main control board 1310 and the function display unit connector MFCN provided on the main control board 1310 are spaced apart by a predetermined distance. More specifically, the main control MPU 1310a arranges the function display unit connector MFCN below a center line passing through the midpoint between the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310. By arranging the main control MPU 1310a above, the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a are separated from each other on the main control board 1310.

  As described above, the wiring FCBL that electrically connects the connector MFCN for the function display unit provided on the main control board 1310 and the connector (not shown) provided on the function display unit 1400 is provided in an environment susceptible to electromagnetic wave noise. Therefore, the main control MPU 1310a mounted on the main control board 1310 and the function display unit connector MFCN provided on the main control board 1310 are separated from each other by a predetermined distance dimension (that is, as described above). The function display unit connector MFCN is arranged below the center line, whereas the main control MPU 1310a is arranged above the center line. May be attenuated so as not to affect the main control MPU 1310a. It has been cut way. Therefore, main control MPU 1310a can be protected from wiring into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Further, according to the pachinko machine 1 of the present embodiment described above, the first special lottery result or the second special lottery result selected by the main control board 1310 of the main control unit 1300 in FIG. 23, as a means of operation that can be operated by the player, the effect operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302, pressing operation unit 303) of the effect operation unit 300 in FIG. As the effect member, the effect operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 of FIG. 23, the door frame left side unit 400, the door frame right side unit 410, the door frame top unit 450, etc. The back production unit 3100, the back production unit 3200, the back left production unit 3300, and the back right production unit 3 provided in the game board 5 As the first type light emitting means used for light emission of various units on the game board side such as 00, a rendering operation unit 300 provided on the door frame 3 in FIG. 23, a door frame left side unit 400, a door frame right side unit 410, and a door Various LEDs provided in various units on the door frame side such as the frame top unit 450, the underside production unit 3100, the underside production unit 3200, the back left production unit 3300, the back right production unit 3400, etc. provided in the game board 5 of FIG. The various LEDs provided in the various units on the game board side and other effect members different from this effect member are used for light emission of the light guide plate 2601 in the panel plate 1110 of FIG. 143 and the surface effect unit 2600 of FIG. As two kinds of light emitting means, a plurality of panel decoration LEs for irradiating light toward the peripheral surface of panel panel 1110 in FIG. 143. 1130a, a plurality of LEDs 2611 for the first pattern 2610 that are illuminated and decorated by illuminating light from the upper surface of the light guide plate 2601 in FIG. 151, and the second LED 2611 that is illuminated and decorated by illuminating light from the right side of the light guide plate 2601. The plurality of LEDs 2621 for the two patterns 2620, the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a and the plurality of LEDs 2611 as the second kind light emitting means, and the brightness of the plurality of LEDs 2621 and various types provided in the door frame side various units as the first kind light emitting means. Brightness adjustment means that can adjust the brightness of the LED and the various LEDs provided in the various units on the game board side based on the operation by the rendering operation unit 301 (rotation operation unit 302 and pressing operation unit 303) as the operation means. In step S1014 in the peripheral control unit regular process of the peripheral control unit power-on process of FIG. And an output operation unit monitoring process and a lamp pallet setting process performed as one process of the received command analysis process in step S1022.

  The lamp pallet setting process, which is a brightness adjusting unit, is a demonstration (demonstration performed in a player waiting state) with the effect operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303), which is the operation unit, within a predetermined period. And during the progress of the effect, as a plurality of specified brightness values, based on the operation performed on the first specified brightness value to the 31st specified brightness value, corresponding to one specified brightness value, as a normal specified brightness value Various LEDs provided for door frame side various units which are the first type light emitting means by selecting a normal pallet value set for the brightness of the LED used as direct light, and various LEDs provided for the game board side various units Of the LED used as indirect light as a special brightness setting value different from the normal brightness setting value. Select special pallets value of the second kind light emitting means is a plurality of panels decorative LED1130a, thereby making it possible to set the brightness of the plurality of LED2611, and a plurality of LED2621.

  Specifically, in the lamp pallet setting process, for example, a player (or a clerk such as a clerk of a game hall) rotates the rotary operation unit 302 clockwise, and the current brightness temporarily becomes the minimum brightness ( When the first luminance value is set to the next highest luminance level after the 0th (zero) luminance value that is turned off, the first luminance value is shifted to the 31st luminance value that is the maximum luminance. The brightness of the LED used as the indirect light and the brightness of the LED used as the direct light are increased along a predetermined mathematical formula (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve). On the other hand, when the rotation operation section 302 is rotated counterclockwise and the current luminance is set to the maximum luminance, the first luminance is changed from the maximum luminance designated value of the 31st luminance to the first luminance. The luminance of the LED used as the indirect light and the luminance of the LED used as the direct light are calculated according to a predetermined mathematical expression (for example, a linear tone curve or a spline curve tone curve) toward a constant value. Change to lower. When the player (or a staff member such as a clerk of the game hall) rotates the rotary operation unit 302 to select a desired luminance and presses the pressing operation unit 303, the selected desired luminance is determined.

  As described above, the effect operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303), which is the operation means, is operated during a demonstration (demonstration performed in a waiting state of a player) within a predetermined period or during an effect. Based on the result, the brightness of the LED used as the direct light, which is the normal brightness setting value, corresponding to one of the first to 31st brightness specifying values, which is the plurality of brightness specifying values. The normal pallet value set for is selected and set as the brightness of the various LEDs provided in the door frame side various units as the first type light emitting means, and the various LEDs provided in the game board side various units, A special pallet value set for the brightness of the LED used as indirect light, which is a special brightness setting value, is selected and a plurality of panel decoration LEDs 11 as the second kind light emitting means are selected. 0a, is adapted to be set as the luminance of the plurality of LED2611, and a plurality of LED2621. Thereby, the player operates the demonstration operation unit 301 (the rotation operation unit 302 and the pressing operation unit 303) as the operation means within a predetermined period of time (demonstration performed in a waiting state of the player) and progress of the production. By operating inside, the various types of LEDs provided in the door frame side various units, which are the first type light emitting means, and the various types of LEDs provided in the game board side various units, so that the desired brightness is obtained, The brightness of the plurality of panel decoration LEDs 1130a, the plurality of LEDs 2611, and the plurality of LEDs 2621, which are seed light emitting units, can be set. Therefore, the brightness can be easily adjusted.

[19. Another example]
It should be noted that the present invention is not limited to the above-described embodiment at all, and it goes without saying that the present invention can be implemented in various modes as long as it belongs to the technical scope of the present invention.

  For example, in the above-described embodiment, the lower back movable decorative body 3110, the upper back movable decorative body 3210, the back upper left movable decorative body 3310, the lower left lower movable movable body 3320, the lower right upper movable movable body 3410, and the lower right lower movable movable body Although the shape of each of the front views of 3420 is shown as an equilateral triangle, the shape is not limited to this, and for example, “square”, “hexagon”, “octagon”, “fan”, “star” Shape ", etc.

  Also, in the above-described embodiment, the lower back moving arm 3130 and the upper back moving arm 3230 are each provided with one movable decorative body. However, the present invention is not limited to this. A plurality of movable decorative bodies may be provided on the back upper moving arm 3230.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the back left movement arm 3330 and the back right movement arm each include two movable decorative bodies are shown. However, the present invention is not limited to this. The right moving arm 3430 may be provided with one or three or more movable decorative bodies.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the movable decorative bodies (lower-back movable decorative body 3110 and upper-back movable decorative body 3210) of the lower back-rendering unit 3100 and the upper back-rendering unit 3200 are in the standby position and the first united position in the same posture. Although it is shown that it moves between the positions, the present invention is not limited to this, but in the lower back production unit 3100 and the back upper production unit 3200, the movable posture changes between the standby position and the first united position. It may be a decorative body.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the movable decorative bodies of the back left rendering unit 3300 and the back right rendering unit 3400 (back upper left movable decorative body 3310, back left lower movable decorative body 3320, back upper right movable decorative body 3410, and back lower right movable movable body The decorative body 3420) changes the posture and moves between the standby position and the first united position. However, the present invention is not limited to this, and the back left production unit 3300 and the back right production unit 3400 may be used. Alternatively, the movable decorative body may be moved between the standby position and the first combined position without changing the posture.

  In the above-described embodiment, the peripheral control board 1510 includes the plugs for the special connectors SCN1 and SCN2, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 includes the socket for the special connector SCN3, and the liquid crystal output board 1530 includes the socket for the special connector SCN4. However, they may be arranged so that the direction in which information and signals flow can be visually recognized. In such a case, the side that transmits information or signals can be a plug (or socket), and the side that receives information or signals can be correspondingly a socket (or plug). For example, in the above-described embodiment, since various types of control information (peripheral data) stored in the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided in the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are transferred from the peripheral data ROM board 1520 to the peripheral control board 1510, the peripheral data The ROM board 1520 is on the transmitting side and the peripheral control board 1510 is on the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral data ROM board 1520 is provided with a special connector serving as a plug (or a special connector serving as a socket), and correspondingly, a peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector (or a plug and a special connector) serving as a socket. Special connector). Further, in the above-described embodiment, since a plurality of types of video signals are output from the peripheral control board 1510 to the liquid crystal output board 1530, the peripheral control board 1510 is on the transmitting side and the liquid crystal output board 1530 is on the receiving side. In such a case, the peripheral control board 1510 is provided with a special connector serving as a plug (or a special connector serving as a socket), and correspondingly, a liquid crystal output board 1530 is provided with a special connector (or serving as a plug) as a socket. Special connector).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are configured by being transparently molded as a non-conductive resin. It may be formed by molding an opaque black resin, or if the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of a conductive resin, they may be formed by translucent colored molding. It may be. Even with such a configuration, since the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 are made of conductive resin, the above-described peripheral control board is provided on the back surface side of the cover body 1501 (cover flat plate 1501a). By fixing various substrates such as the 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 with pan head screws made of metal, as described above, the circuit ground is established to the ground (GND) of these various substrates. Can be configured. As a result, noise that has entered from the cover body 1501, the base body 1502, and the wiring cover body 1503 can flow to the ground (GND) of various substrates as circuit ground, and the noise can be removed.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the dispensing blade 589 is provided with a plurality of blade pieces 589a having an arc shape extending outward in a flat plate shape at intervals of 120 degrees in the circumferential direction. May be provided at intervals of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction. FIG. 216 is a cutaway rear cross-sectional view of a dispensing device provided with a dispensing blade 589 provided with four arcuate blade pieces 589a and provided with a radio wave sensor, which is a modification of the dispensing device. FIG. 216 is a rear cross-sectional view of the dispensing device of the dispensing unit corresponding to FIG. 105 described above, which is cut at the center in the front-rear direction of the dispensing blade, and is denoted by the same reference numeral as FIG. In the case where the discharge blade 589 has four blade pieces 589a having an arc shape, not shown in FIG. 216, the above-described discharge gear member 588 is a flat plate-like detection piece having an arc shape extending outward. 588b are provided at intervals of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction, and the area of 90 degrees in the circumferential direction of the dispensing gear member 588 is defined as a 45-degree area where the detection piece 588b is formed as a light-shielding range. It is managed by a total of 18 step rotations including the 9 step rotation of the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 and the 9 step rotation of the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 with the 45 ° area where the detection piece 588b is not formed as the light receiving range. Thus, the reduction ratio n is selected, and the payout of one game ball B is performed by rotating the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 by 18 steps. In other words, the drive gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission The reduction ratio n can be determined by selecting the number of teeth of the gear 587 and the number of teeth of the dispensing gear 588a of the dispensing gear member 588, respectively.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the payout device 580 includes the payout detection sensor 591 attached to the payout device main body 581 and the payout device rear lid 582 at the downstream end of the payout passage 580a and detecting the game ball B. However, a radio wave sensor for detecting radio waves may be provided near the payout detection sensor 591. The payout detection sensor 591 uses a non-contact type electromagnetic proximity switch, and detects the passing of the game ball B. However, when affected by radio waves, the game ball B actually passes. Nevertheless, it is possible to make it appear that the gaming ball B has not passed due to malfunction. In this case, the payout control board 633, to which the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 is input, determines that the payout of the game ball B is not completed based on the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591, and By performing control to rotate the rotation shaft of 584 excessively, a large amount of game balls B are paid out. As shown in FIG. 216, the payout device 580 includes a radio wave sensor 594 near the payout detection sensor 591 in order to detect such a fraudulent act of acquiring the game ball B illegally (referred to as “radio wave goto”). Can be provided. The detection signal from the radio wave sensor 594 is input to the payout control board 633. When the payout control board 633 determines that an abnormal radio wave is emitted based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 594, The rotating shaft of the payout motor 584 is urgently stopped, and a radio wave notification command to that effect is transmitted to the main control board 1310. At this time, the payout control board 633 may be configured to output a radio wave notification signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. When the main control board 1310 receives the 8-bit radio wave goto notification command from the payout control board 633, the main control board 1310 changes the radio-wave goto notification command from the 8-bit width to the 16-bit width and sets the radio goto warning sound to the maximum volume. At the same time, various LEDs are set to be in a warning notification light emission mode (for example, a light emission mode that flashes red) by setting various LEDs to be informed that radio waves can be notified, and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the radio wave goto notification command having a 16-bit width, the effect display device 1600 displays a large message “An abnormality has occurred” and controls various LEDs to a warning notification light emission mode. I do.

  Instead of the radio wave sensor 594, a contact-type ball passage sensor 594 ', which is a contact-type ON / OFF operation type mechanical switch, may be used. The detection signal from the contact-type ball passage sensor 594 'is input to the payout control board 633, and the payout control board 633 outputs the detection signal from the payout detection sensor 591 and the detection signal from the contact-type ball passage sensor 594'. On the basis of this, when the number of balls that have paid out the game balls B do not match, it can be determined that some kind of fraud has been performed. When it is determined that any wrongdoing has been performed, the payout control board 633 urgently stops the rotation axis of the payout motor 584 and transmits a goto notification command to that effect to the main control board 1310. At this time, the payout control board 633 may be configured to output a goto notification signal to the hall computer via the external terminal board 558. When the main control board 1310 receives the 8-bit goto notification command from the payout control board 633, the goto notification command is changed from the 8-bit width to the 16-bit width, the goto warning sound is set to the maximum volume, and various types of speakers are used. At the same time, various LEDs are set to a warning notification light emission mode (for example, a light emission mode that flashes red), and the LED is shaped so that a goto can be notified and transmitted to the peripheral control board 1510. When the peripheral control board 1510 receives the goto notification command having a 16-bit width, the effect display device 1600 displays a large message, "An abnormality has occurred," and controls various LEDs to a warning notification light emission mode. .

  In the above-described embodiment, the payout motor 584 is a stepping motor, but may be a DC motor. In this case, when the DC motor is step-driven, the rotation shaft is step-rotated at a predetermined angle of 18 degrees in accordance with the step drive. That is, the DC motor rotates its rotation axis by 18 degrees in one step rotation.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the rotation shaft of the payout motor 584 is connected to the drive transmission gear 585, the first transmission gear 586, the second transmission gear 587, and the payout gear 588a of the payout gear member 588, which constitute a rotation transmitting member. , The rotation of the dispensing motor 584 at a low speed, the rotation transmission member (for example, a plurality of gears (for example, the first transmission gear 586 ′, The second transmission gear 587 ′ and the payout gear 588a ′) of the payout gear member 588 may be configured to increase the speed and rotate the payout blade 589. In this case, the speed-up ratio of the rotation transmitting member is determined in advance so that the number of step drives to the payout motor 584 corresponding to the delivery of one game ball by the payout blade 589 is not an integer. Each time one ball is paid out, the positioning position is different each time. Thus, the positions where the game balls and the payout blades 589 contact each time are different each time, so that the adhesion positions of the dust and the dust can be dispersed. When the speed increase ratio of the rotation transmitting member described above is set to cause such a positioning error, the error accumulates. The rotation angle is detected by a plurality of detecting pieces 588b (light-shielding pieces) of the dispensing gear member 588 provided coaxially with the rotation axis of the dispensing blade 589, and is reset when the accumulated error accumulates to some extent. Thereby, the accuracy of the number of game balls to be paid out is secured. Therefore, even in such a pachinko machine 1 in which the speed increase ratio of the rotation transmitting member is determined in advance, the rotation position of the payout blade 589 that receives and sends out the game balls is changed every time the game balls are paid out, and the dust and dust are changed. By dispersing the positions where the particles adhere, it is possible to have a dispensing device 580 that is strong against dust and dust.

  In the above-described embodiment, various substrates such as the peripheral control substrate 1510, the peripheral data ROM substrate 1520, and the liquid crystal output substrate 1530 are mounted together with the metal shield plate 1540 at predetermined positions on the back side of the cover plate 1501a. In a state where the shield plate 1540 is sandwiched and fixed between the cover body 1501 and the various substrates, the predetermined distance between the front surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a) and the rear surface of the cover flat plate 1501a. A space having a distance dimension of height (14.8 mm in the present embodiment) is formed, and two spaces are formed by disposing a metal shield plate 1540 in this space. Space is the surface of the various substrates (the surface facing the back side of the cover plate 1501a) and the metal shield plate A first space 1505a having a first predetermined height distance dimension (12 mm in the present embodiment) between the shield plate 1540a and the rear surface of the shield plate 1540a, and a front surface of the shield plate 1540a of the metal shield plate 1540; And a second space 1505b having a second predetermined height distance dimension (1.6 mm in the present embodiment) between the cover plate 1501a and the rear surface. In other words, the distance dimension at the first predetermined height is formed larger than the distance dimension at the second predetermined height. In the case where a large-sized production unit (an electric drive source and a drive mechanism capable of operating a movable production body, and various sensors for detecting an origin position and an operation position) is arranged on the game board 5, the depth direction is If there is a margin in the distance dimension, the distance dimension at the first predetermined height and the distance dimension at the second predetermined height may be configured as the same distance dimension at the predetermined height. The distance dimension at the predetermined height may be configured to be larger than the distance dimension at the first predetermined height. Even with such a configuration, it is possible to take measures against electromagnetic wave noise by accommodating various electronic components and the like that are easily affected by electromagnetic wave noise in the first space 1505a, and to prevent heat in the second space 1505b. By not accommodating various electronic components and the like that emit light, heat generated from various electronic components and the like in the first space 1505a can be efficiently transmitted to the second space 1505b via the metal shield plate 1540.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of circular ventilation holes 1540az are formed in the metal shield plate 1540d, so that the product number printed on the surface of the control ROM 1510b provided on the peripheral control board 1510 is formed. And the model (or management number), the state of the IC pins of the control ROM 1510b, and the contents (for example, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) silk-printed on the peripheral control board 1510 can be visually recognized. Also, the product numbers and models printed on the surfaces of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510, the states of the IC pins of the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the contents printed on the peripheral control board 1510 by silk printing (for example, the direction of the IC, Part number, pin number, etc.) and peripheral data ROM The product number and model (or management number) printed on the surface of the peripheral data ROM 1520a provided on the board 1520, the state of the IC pins of the peripheral data ROM 1520a, and the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 are respectively silk-printed. (E.g., the number of pins of the connector, the direction of the IC, the part number, the pin number, etc.) of the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1, 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a. It is also possible to provide a rectangular opening at the position of the shield plate 1540d. Note that, in addition to the control ROM 1510b, the SDRAMs 1510c1 and 1510c2, and the peripheral data ROM 1520a, a rectangular opening may be provided at the position of the metal shield plate 1540d so that the periphery thereof can be visually recognized. . In addition, the shape of the inter-board connector (the special connector SCN1 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520) can be checked so that the connection state of the inter-board connector between the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral data ROM board 1520 can be confirmed. A rectangular opening may be provided at a position of a metal shield plate 1540d corresponding to an area larger than the area formed by the special connector SCN3, and a peripheral control board 1510 and a liquid crystal output board. The shape of the inter-board connector (the shape formed by the special connector SCN2 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and the special connector SCN4 on the liquid crystal output board 1530) so that the connection state of the inter-board connector with the 1530 can be confirmed. The position of the metal shield plate 1540d corresponding to the large area It may be configured to provide a rectangular opening in.

  In the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover flat plate 1510a of the cover body 1501. However, the cover side walls 1501b to 1505b provided on the upper, left, lower, and right sides of the cover flat plate of the cover body 1501 are provided. Except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side of the 1501e, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed singly or in combination. For example, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501c provided on the left side, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only on the cover side wall 1501d provided on the lower side, or a cover side wall provided on the right side. A plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed only in the 1501e, or a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed by combining a plurality of cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the cover plate 1510a, the left side, the lower side, and the right side. . Even with this configuration, foreign matter (for example, metal powder generated by abrasion of the game balls B) drops toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 through the ventilation holes 1501az. Intrusion can be prevented. Thus, it is possible to prevent an electrical trouble due to foreign matter falling on various substrates of the peripheral control substrate box 1505. Therefore, it is possible to prevent an electric trouble due to a foreign object falling from the tank rail 553. The reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the peripheral control board box 1505 is formed through the ventilation hole 1501az. When foreign matter (for example, metal powder generated by abrasion of the game ball B) which falls on the inside of the game ball B falls and intrudes into the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505, the foreign matter falling on the various substrates becomes This is because the probability of occurrence of trouble increases.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az are formed in the cover plate 1510a of the cover body 1501, but the cover side walls 1501b to 1505b provided on the upper side, the left side, the lower side, and the right side of the cover plate of the cover body 1501 are provided. Of the 1501e, a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az may be formed in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively, except for the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side. In this case, by forming a plurality of ventilation holes 1501az in the cover side walls 1501c to 1501e provided on the left side, the lower side, and the right side, respectively, it is possible to contribute to suppressing a rise in the temperature of the peripheral control board box 1505. The reason why the ventilation hole 1501az is not formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side is that, as described above, if the ventilation hole 1501az is formed in the cover side wall 1501b provided on the upper side, the ventilation hole 1501az is formed through the ventilation hole 1501az. Foreign matter (for example, metal powder generated by abrasion of the game balls B) falling toward the inside of the peripheral control board box 1505 and entering, causing the peripheral control board box 1505 to drop onto various substrates. This is because the probability that an electrical trouble due to a foreign matter will occur increases.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a plurality of cutout portions 553aa are formed in the main guide portion 553a of the tank rail 553 so that metal powder generated by abrasion of the game ball B can be removed from the main guide portion 553a. However, one notch, hole, or groove may be formed in the ball passage on which the game ball B rolls, similarly to the notch 553aa. Specifically, in the ball guiding unit 570 shown in FIG. 110 having one guide path 570a for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner downward, the metal of the game ball B in the guide path 570a A cutout, a hole, or a groove that can remove the powder from the guiding passage 570a to the outside can be formed on the rear surface of the guiding unit base 571 of the guiding unit 570 shown in FIG. As shown in FIG. 110, a payout device 580, a board unit 620, and the like are arranged below the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580 has a board and the like on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is mounted. The board unit 620 includes a power supply board 630, a payout control board 633, an interface board 635, and the like shown in FIG. 111, and various boards are arranged. For this reason, when a notch, a hole, or a groove is formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571, a game ball that falls through the notch, the hole, or the groove formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571. It is necessary to prevent the B metal powder from adhering to various substrates disposed below the guidance unit 570. Therefore, an eave-shaped member can be formed by projecting rearward along the upper side of the dispensing device rear cover 582 of the dispensing device 580 shown in FIG. 103, and can be formed on the rear surface of the guiding unit base 571. The positions of the cutouts, holes, or grooves to be made and the positions of various substrates such as the substrate on which the blade rotation detection sensor 590 is mounted in the dispensing device 580 can be shifted, and both can be adopted. It can also be configured. In addition, the eave-shaped member is moved rearward along the upper side of the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply board 630, the payout control board box 632 of the payout control board 633, the interface board cover 636 of the interface board 635, and the like shown in FIG. The power supply board cover 631, the dispensing control board box 632, and the interface board cover 636 can be formed by protruding the power supply board cover 631, the positions of the notches, holes, or grooves formed on the rear surface of the guidance unit base 571. And the position can be shifted, or both can be adopted. It should be noted that the power supply board cover 631 of the power supply board 630, the payout control board box 632 of the payout control board 633, and the cover side walls provided on the upper side of the interface board cover 636 of the interface board 635 shown in FIG. This can also prevent the metal powder of the game ball B from adhering to various substrates. In the main control board 1310 disposed below the peripheral control board box 1505, the main control unit 1300 having the main control board 1310 is disposed at a position where the peripheral control board box 1505 becomes an eave, By arranging an eave-shaped member corresponding to 1300 or not forming a ventilation hole in the cover side wall provided on the upper side of the main control unit 1300, it is possible to prevent the metal powder of the game ball B from adhering.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the power supply switch 630a, the noise suppression circuit 630b, the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor improvement circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power supply creation circuit 630f, and the power supply destruction circuit 630g are provided on one power supply board 630. Although various electronic components and the like are provided, it may be configured to be provided separately on two substrates. For example, the power supply board 630 includes a first power supply board 630A and a second power supply board 630B, and the first power supply board 630A and the second power supply board 630B are provided in the power supply unit 620c of the board unit 620 shown in FIG. It can also be configured. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply board 630A mainly includes the power supply line connectors DCN1 and DCN2, the ground connection terminal DCN5, the fuses FUSE1 and FUSE2, the power switch 630a, the noise suppression circuit 630b, and the wiring connector A shown in FIG. 183. The circuit of the second power supply board 630B includes the diodes D5 and D6, the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor improvement circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power supply creation circuit 630f, the power supply destruction circuit 630g, and the choke coil L2 shown in FIG. , Fuse FUSE3, and wiring connector B. The wiring connector A of the first power supply board 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply board 630B are electrically connected via power supply wiring. AC24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a on the first power supply board 630A are connected to the wiring on the second power supply board 630B via the noise suppression circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring. When input to the connector B, in addition to being input to the rectifier circuit 630c, it is input to the anode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, respectively, output from the cathode terminals of the diodes D5 and D6, and input to the power generation circuit 630f. It will be. Note that various DC voltages such as DC +35 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V, which are created in the second power supply board 630 </ b> B, are supplied from the second power supply board 630 </ b> B to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except the first power supply board 630 </ b> A. You.

  In addition, the power supply board 630 shown in FIG. 189 in the above-described embodiment may be configured by being divided into two boards, a first power supply board 630A and a second power supply board 630B. In this case, the circuit of the first power supply board 630A includes the power supply line connectors DCN1 and DCN2, the ground connection terminal DCN5, the fuse FUSE1, the micro gap type arrester AL1, the power supply switch 630a, the noise suppression circuit 630b, and the wiring shown in FIG. The circuit of the second power supply board 630B mainly includes the connector A, and the circuit of the rectifier circuit 630c, the power factor improvement circuit 630d, the smoothing circuit 630e, the power supply creation circuit 630f, the relay drive circuit 630i, the relay RL1, It mainly comprises a thermistor TH1, a choke coil L2, a fuse FUSE3, and a wiring connector B. The wiring connector A of the first power supply board 630A and the wiring connector B of the second power supply board 630B are electrically connected via power supply wiring. AC24V1 and AC24V2 output from the output terminals 4 and 2 of the power switch 630a on the first power supply board 630A are connected to the wiring on the second power supply board 630B via the noise suppression circuit 630b, the wiring connector A, and the power supply wiring. Input to connector B. Note that various DC voltages such as DC +35 V, DC +12 V, and DC +5 V, which are created in the second power supply board 630 </ b> B, are supplied from the second power supply board 630 </ b> B to each board inside the pachinko machine 1 except the first power supply board 630 </ b> A. You.

  In the above-described embodiment, the arrangement method of the LED constant current drive circuits on each decorative board of the door frame 3 is almost the same, and as shown in FIG. 197, the edge of the land pattern of the constant current drive circuit 402bax is A configuration is adopted in which the left side edge 402beg1 and the right edge side 402beg2 of the left side lower decorative substrate 402b are arranged so as to be inclined by 45 degrees, and a predetermined number of full-color LEDs are divided into groups 1 and 2. Although the configuration in which the constant current drive circuit 402bax is arranged between the group 1 and the group 2 is adopted, the present invention can be applied to a long and thin plate-shaped decorative board provided in the game board 5. Examples of the elongated plate-shaped decorative substrate provided in the game board 5 include a decorative board provided in various effect units of the game board 5.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the LED constant current drive circuit in each decorative board of the door frame 3 controls the light emission by flowing a constant current to the eight full-color LEDs. , Red, green, yellow, orange, blue, green and the like. Monochromatic LEDs can also be used. In this case, a single LED constant current drive circuit can control the emission of up to 24 single-color LEDs.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the DC terminal +12 V from the power supply substrate 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided on each decorative substrate of the door frame 3. The internal power supply Vreg (DC +5 V) created by the provided linear power supply (the linear power supply 283xa provided in the constant current drive circuit 283x of the LED constant current drive circuit 283a shown in FIG. 194) is used for lighting the LED within the allowable current range of the linear power supply. May be used. For example, among the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 of the above-described constant current drive circuit, at most one single-color LED (for example, within the allowable current range of the linear power supply for one output channel) (for example, When an LED other than a red LED is electrically connected, an internal power supply Vreg (DC + 5 V) created by a linear power supply is input to the anode terminal of the single-color LED, and the single-color LED is The cathode terminal is configured to be electrically connected to one output channel via the heat spreading resistor of the heat spreading circuit described above. In addition, among the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 to LG8, and LB1 to LB8 of the above-described constant current drive circuit, up to two single-color LEDs (for example, within the allowable current range of the linear power supply for one output channel) (for example, When red LEDs are electrically connected in series, the internal power supply Vreg (DC +5 V) created by a linear power supply is configured to be input to the anode terminal of the first-stage LED, and the cathode terminal of the last-stage LED is connected to the anode terminal of the first-stage LED. It can be configured to be electrically connected to one output channel via the heat spreading resistor of the above-described heat spreading circuit. The decorative board configured as described above can be applied to a decorative board provided in the game board 5 in addition to the door frame 3.

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, DC +12 V from the power supply board 630 is input to the cathode terminal of the LED element provided on each decorative board of the door frame 3, and the output channels LR1 to LR8, LG1 of the constant current drive circuit are provided. To LG8 and LB1 to LB8, the cathode terminal of the LED element forming one full-color LED is electrically connected to one output channel via the heat dispersion resistor of the heat dispersion circuit described above. However, a plurality of full-color LEDs may be electrically connected in series to one output channel. In this case, the number of full-color LEDs is two or three. When it is necessary to further increase the number of full-color LEDs for one output channel, instead of using +12 V DC from the power supply board 630, use +35 V DC from the power supply board 630 as a voltage for lighting the LED. May be. The decorative board configured as described above can be applied to a decorative board provided in the game board 5 in addition to the door frame 3.

  In the above-described embodiment, the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457 of the door frame top decorative body 453 are the door frame top center decorative board 455 and the door. When the frame top left decorative board 456 and the door frame top right decorative board 457 are arranged on the door frame top decorative body 453, the width dimension from the upper edge to the lower edge of the decorative board is large. Although the edge of the land pattern is arranged to be parallel to the upper and lower edges of the door frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, the door Of the frame top center decorative board 455, the door frame top left decorative board 456, and the door frame top right decorative board 457, any one decorative board and any two decorative boards The end side of the land pattern of the constant current driving circuit, may be arranged so as to be non-parallel to the upper side and lower side of the decorative substrate. The door frame top right decorative board 457 directly controls the light emission of, for example, the other right decorative board on which two full-color LEDs are mounted, in addition to the full color LED provided therein, by the LED constant current drive circuit provided therein. Alternatively, the door frame top left decorative board 456 may directly connect, in addition to its own full-color LED, another left decorative board on which one full-color LED is mounted, by its own LED constant current drive circuit. Light emission may be controlled.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the LED frame is provided on the door frame 3 such as the LED mounting surface 402bx and the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b, the LED mounting surface 314x and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. Although the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the various decorative substrates provided in each decorative body are solid-coated with white resist, they may be printed by white silk printing instead. In this case, after the LED mounting surface and the LED non-mounting surface of the various decorative substrates are entirely printed by white silk printing, the part number corresponding to the full-color LED, and the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be arranged, are used as silk printing. Each is printed in yellow (or black).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the various decorative substrates provided on the decorative bodies provided on the door frame 3 such as the LED non-mounting surface 402by of the lower left side decorative substrate 402b and the LED non-mounting surface 314y of the dish center upper decorative substrate 314. On the LED non-mounting surface, areas corresponding to the full-color LEDs mounted on the LED mounting surface of various decorative substrates were printed as silk prints with yellow chain lines (or black chain lines), respectively. (I.e., when printing the area indicating the position where the full-color LED is to be placed as a silk print with a yellow dashed line (or a black dashed line)), add the polarity mark of the full-color LED to the auxiliary line. It may be configured to specify the mounting orientation.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2402, and the lower substrate holder 1200 is provided. However, similarly to the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor main side 2402a and the second starting port sensor subside 2402b are arranged at least separated by the erroneous detection prevention distance dimension. It may be composed of two sensors (double sensors). In this case, similarly to the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2402 including two sensors (double sensors) of the second starting port sensor main side 2402a and the second starting port sensor subside 2402b. , The game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 can be reliably detected. In addition, an illegal ball (a game ball, a metal ball having substantially the same diameter as this, or a synthetic resin ball having substantially the same diameter as this) to which a flexible string-shaped operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire, or a catheter) is attached. ) Is detected and reported in the fraud detection process of step S112 in the main control timer interrupt process of FIG. 206, whereby a staff such as a game hall clerk can perform radio wave irradiation. Can be found at an early stage.

  In this case, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is first detected by the second starting port sensor main side 2402a by passing through the second starting port sensor main side 2402a, and then the second starting port sensor subside. After passing through 2402b, it is detected by the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b, and then discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below. In addition, the detection signal from the second starting port sensor main side 2402a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (that is, directly connected to the main control board 1310), A detection signal from the mouth sensor slave side 2402b is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 (that is, indirectly electrically connected). The detection signal from the second starting port sensor main side 2402a is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the second starting port sensor sub side 2402b. Is input to the input terminal PB3 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  As described above, the panel relay board 1710 detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 provided in the game board 5 in addition to the detection signal from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b. A first starting port sensor slave side 3002b constituting one starting port sensor 3002, a gate sensor 2506 for detecting a game ball B passing through a gate section 2003 provided on the game board 5, and a large winning port 2005 provided on the game board 5 are provided. A special winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the received game ball B, a general winning opening sensors 2401 and 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the game board 5, Two wires from various sensors such as a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting near one start port 2002 are connected via respective connectors. While being aggregated is connected, via one of the connectors is electrically connected to the main control board 1310.

  Further, the detection signal from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and the detection signal from the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the same panel relay board 1710. ing. For this reason, a connector having a 2.5 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the two wirings from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b to the panel relay board 1710, and the second starting port sensor slave is used. A connector having a 2.0 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting two wires from the side 2402b to the panel relay board 1710. Thus, the two wires from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and the two wires from the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b can be electrically connected to their own counterparts. In the manufacturing process, the operator of the line needs two wirings from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and the second starting port sensor slave side in the manufacturing process. It is possible to reliably prevent a work error of incorrect wiring between the two wirings from 2402b (wiring error of incorrect insertion), and in a game hall, a clerk such as a store clerk of the game hall checks whether there is any fraud. In the case of confirmation, when the wiring is temporarily removed and returned by maintenance, the two wirings from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b Two and wiring al, miswiring that operational error (wiring that insert mistakes) can be reliably prevented.

  In the above-described embodiment, the general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game balls B received in the three general winning openings 2001 included in the side unit 2200, and the general winning opening 2001 included in the attacker unit 2400, respectively. The connector for electrically connecting each of the two wires from the general winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B to the panel relay board 1710 has been selected to have the same shape, but there are four general connectors. When contributing to the progress of the game or a change in the performance as the ball enters the winning opening 2001, a general winning opening sensor 3001a for detecting the game balls B received in the three general winning openings 2001 provided in the side unit 2200, respectively. , 3001b, 3001c, and two wires from the general winning opening sensor 2401. General winning hole sensors 3001a, 3001b, respectively and two wiring from 3001C, connector shape may be respectively different. By doing so, it is possible to provide a physical structure in which each of the two wirings from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c can be electrically connected to the corresponding wiring. In the manufacturing process, the line operator ensures that in the manufacturing process, a work error (wiring error such as incorrect insertion) in which two wires from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c are incorrectly connected. In the game hall, a clerk such as a clerk of the game hall checks the presence or absence of impropriety, and when the wiring is temporarily removed and returned by maintenance, the general winning opening sensor 2401, An operation error of incorrectly wiring two wirings from each of 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c. Wiring errors) that inserted mistake can be reliably prevented. In the case where a configuration is employed in which two wires from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c are electrically connected directly to the main control board 1310 without passing through the panel relay board 1710. Are different from each other in the shape of the connector. As described above, this has a physical structure in which each of the two wirings from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c can be electrically connected to the corresponding wiring. Therefore, in the manufacturing process, the manufacturer of the line may make an error in the manufacturing process such as incorrect wiring of two wires from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c (wiring error such as incorrect insertion). ) Can be reliably prevented, and in the game hall, the clerk at the game hall, such as a clerk at the game hall, receives a general prize when checking the presence or absence of impropriety and when temporarily removing the wiring for maintenance and returning it to its original state. Incorrect wiring of each of the two wirings from the mouth sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, 3001c Cormorant work miss (wiring that inserted mistakes) can be reliably prevented.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is detected by the gate sensor 2506. However, similar to the first starting port sensor 3002, the gate sensor main side 2506a and the gate sensor subside 2506b May be configured with two sensors (double sensors) that are arranged at least separated by the erroneous detection prevention distance dimension. In this case, similarly to the first starting port sensor 3002, by adopting the gate sensor 2506 composed of two sensors (double sensors) of the gate sensor main side 2506a and the gate sensor subside 2506b, the gate unit 2003 is provided. The game ball B that has passed through can be reliably detected. In addition, an illegal ball (a game ball, a metal ball having substantially the same diameter as this, or a synthetic resin ball having substantially the same diameter as this) to which a flexible string-shaped operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire, or a catheter) is attached. ) Is detected and reported in the fraud detection process of step S112 in the main control timer interrupt process of FIG. 206, whereby a staff such as a game hall clerk can perform radio wave irradiation. Can be found at an early stage.

  In this case, the game ball B that has passed through the gate portion 2003 is first detected by the gate sensor main side 2506a by passing through the gate sensor main side 2506a, and is detected by the gate sensor subside 2506b by passing through the gate sensor subside 2506b. Will be done. Further, detection signals from the gate sensor main side 2506a and the gate sensor slave side 2506b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 (that is, indirectly electrically connected). Has been). The detection signal from the gate sensor main side 2506a is input to the input terminal PA0 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the gate sensor slave side 2506b is input to the main control input circuit 1310b. Is input to an input terminal PC0 of an input port PC of the main control MPU 1310a (this input port is composed of 8 bits).

  Further, the detection signal from the gate sensor main side 2506a and the detection signal from the gate sensor subside 2506b are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the same panel relay board 1710. For this reason, a connector having a 2.5 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting two wires from the gate sensor main side 2506a to the panel relay board 1710, and two connectors from the gate sensor slave side 2506b. A connector having a 2.0 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting the above wiring to the panel relay board 1710. Thus, a physical structure in which two wires from the gate sensor main side 2506a and two wires from the gate sensor slave side 2506b can be electrically connected to their corresponding counterparts. In the manufacturing process, the line operator incorrectly connects two wires from the gate sensor main side 2506a and two wires from the gate sensor slave side 2506b in the manufacturing process. Work mistakes (wiring mistakes such as incorrect insertion) can be reliably prevented, and in the gaming hall, staff such as clerks in the gaming hall temporarily remove the wiring for maintenance when checking for fraud. When returning to the original position, two wirings from the gate sensor main side 2506a and two wirings from the gate sensor slave side 2506b are mistaken. Work that line Miss (wiring that inserted mistakes) can be reliably prevented.

  Also, in the above-described embodiment, the connector has a 2.5 mm pitch as a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310. Although a connector having a 2.0 mm pitch is selected as a connector for electrically connecting two wires from the second starting port sensor 2402 to the main control board 1310, the first starting Four wirings, which are a combination of two wirings from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the mouth sensor 3002 and two wirings from the second starting port sensor 2402, are configured as one connector. Alternatively, a configuration may be adopted in which one connector including the four wires is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. In this case, a connector for electrically connecting the two wires from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 to the main control board 1310, and a connector from the second starting port sensor 2402 Since the connector that electrically connects the wires to the main control board 1310 and the connector that electrically connects the wires to the main control board 1310 can be configured as a single connector composed of four wires without being separated from each other, In the manufacturing process, the worker of the line has two wirings from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 and two wirings from the second starting port sensor 2402. In addition to this, it is possible to reliably prevent work mistakes such as incorrect wiring (wiring errors such as incorrect insertion), and in the game hall, clerks such as game hall clerks make sure that there is no fraud. In the case where the wiring is temporarily removed and replaced by maintenance, two wirings from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a constituting the first starting port sensor 3002 and the second starting port sensor 2402 It is possible to reliably prevent an operation error of erroneous wiring between the two wirings (wiring error of incorrect insertion).

  Further, by adopting this aspect, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is sent to the rear side of the game panel 1100 after being detected by the second starting port sensor 2402, and the lower substrate holder 1200 is provided. However, similarly to the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor main side 2402a and the second starting port sensor subside 2402b are arranged at least separated by the erroneous detection prevention distance dimension. It may be composed of two sensors (double sensors). In this case, similarly to the first starting port sensor 3002, the second starting port sensor 2402 including two sensors (double sensors) of the second starting port sensor main side 2402a and the second starting port sensor subside 2402b. , The game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 can be reliably detected. In addition, an illegal ball (a game ball, a metal ball having substantially the same diameter as this, or a synthetic resin ball having substantially the same diameter as this) to which a flexible string-shaped operation line (a linear member such as a thread, a piano wire, a wire, or a catheter) is attached. ) Is detected and reported in the fraud detection process of step S112 in the main control timer interrupt process of FIG. 206, whereby a staff such as a game hall clerk can perform radio wave irradiation. Can be found at an early stage.

  In this case, the game ball B received in the second starting port 2004 is first detected by the second starting port sensor main side 2402a by passing through the second starting port sensor main side 2402a, and then the second starting port sensor subside. After passing through 2402b, it is detected by the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b, and then discharged to the substrate holder 1200 below. Also, two wires from the first starting port sensor main side 3002a forming the first starting port sensor 3002 and two wirings from the second starting port sensor main side 2402a forming the second starting port sensor 2402. Are combined into one connector, and one connector composed of the four wires is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The detection signal from the second starting port sensor main side 2402a is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 (that is, directly connected to the main control board 1310), while the second starting port sensor is electrically connected to the main control board 1310. The detection signal from the slave 2402b is electrically connected to the main control board 1310 via the panel relay board 1710 (that is, it is indirectly electrically connected). The detection signal from the second starting port sensor main side 2402a is input to the input terminal PA3 of the input port PA of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b, and the detection signal from the second starting port sensor sub side 2402b. Is input to the input terminal PB3 of the input port PB of the main control MPU 1310a via the main control input circuit 1310b.

  As described above, the panel relay board 1710 detects the game ball B received in the first start port 2002 provided in the game board 5 in addition to the detection signal from the second start port sensor slave side 2402b. A first starting port sensor slave side 3002b constituting one starting port sensor 3002, a gate sensor 2506 for detecting a game ball B passing through a gate section 2003 provided on the game board 5, and a large winning port 2005 provided on the game board 5 are provided. A special winning opening sensor 2403 for detecting the received game ball B, a general winning opening sensors 2401 and 3001 for detecting the game ball B received in the general winning opening 2001 provided in the game board 5, Two wires from various sensors such as a magnetic sensor 3003 for detecting magnetism acting near one start port 2002 are connected via respective connectors. While being aggregated is connected, via one of the connectors is electrically connected to the main control board 1310.

  Further, by adopting this aspect, the detection signal from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and the detection signal from the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b are transmitted to the main control board 1310 via the same panel relay board 1710. Are electrically connected to the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b, and the two wirings from the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b are combined into four wires. The connector may be configured as one connector, and one connector including the four wires may be electrically connected to the panel relay board 1710. In this case, a connector for electrically connecting two wires from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b forming the first starting port sensor 3002 to the panel relay board 1710 and the second starting port sensor 2402 are formed. A connector for electrically connecting the two wirings from the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b to the panel relay board 1710 is not a separate entity, but a single connector composed of four wirings. In the manufacturing process, the manufacturer of the line needs two wires from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and two wires from the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b in the manufacturing process. It is possible to reliably prevent a work mistake (wiring error such as incorrect insertion) between a book wiring and a wrong wiring. In order to confirm the presence / absence of fraud, when the wiring is temporarily removed for maintenance and returned, the two wirings from the first starting port sensor slave side 3002b and the second starting port sensor slave side 2402b It is possible to reliably prevent an operation error of erroneous wiring between the two wirings (wiring error of incorrect insertion).

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the general winning opening sensor 3001 that detects the game balls B received in the three general winning openings 2001 included in the side unit 2200, and the general winning opening 2001 included in the attacker unit 2400, respectively. The connector for electrically connecting each of the two wires from the general winning opening sensor 2401 for detecting the game ball B to the panel relay board 1710 has been selected to have the same shape, but there are four general connectors. In the case of contributing to the progress of the game or a change in the performance as the ball enters the winning opening 2001, a general winning opening sensor 3001a for detecting the game balls B received in the three general winning openings 2001 of the side unit 2200, respectively. , 3001b, 3001c, and two wires from the general winning opening sensor 2401. And two wirings from the general winning opening sensors 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c, respectively, to form eight wirings as one connector (single connector), and one of the eight wirings. One connector may be configured to be electrically connected to panel relay board 1710. In this case, the physical structure is such that the two wires from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c are not connected to each other but are one connector composed of eight wires. In the manufacturing process, the operator of the line may make an error in the manufacturing process, that is, an incorrect wiring of the two wires from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c (a wiring error of a wrong insertion). In the game hall, the staff in the game hall, such as clerks at the game hall, can check the presence or absence of fraud, and if the wiring is temporarily removed for maintenance and then returned to the normal Work of incorrect wiring of each of two wires from the sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c Vinegar (wiring that inserted mistakes) can be reliably prevented. It should be noted that eight wirings obtained by combining two wirings from the general winning opening sensor 2401 and two wirings from the general winning opening sensors 3001a, 3001b, 3001c are combined into one connector (single connector). It is also possible to adopt a configuration in which one connector composed of the eight wires is directly electrically connected to the main control board 1310 without passing through the panel relay board 1710. Even with such a configuration, as described above, one connector composed of eight wirings without using the two wirings from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c separately. In the manufacturing process, the manufacturer of the line refers to an incorrect wiring of the two wirings from the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, and 3001c in the manufacturing process. Work mistakes (wiring errors such as incorrect insertion) can be reliably prevented, and at the game hall, staff at the game hall, such as clerks at the game hall, temporarily remove the wiring for maintenance when checking for fraud. In the case of returning to the original state, each of the general winning opening sensors 2401, 3001a, 3001b, Mis task of wiring errors of wiring (interconnection of cuttings mistakes) can be reliably prevented.

  In the above-described embodiment, the wiring FCBL electrically connected via a connector (not shown) provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400 is connected from the upper right corner of the game board 5 as shown in FIG. When it is routed to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent downward below the rear surface of the back box 3010, and formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. When they are routed from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, they are bent from the upper side to the left side. And is bent again downward on the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 toward the lower side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. The main control unit 1300 is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the rear lower portion of the game panel 1100 by being gathered by the formed wiring processing pieces, and attached to the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200. When it is drawn downward along the left side of the main control board box 1320, it is bent toward the right side of the main control board box 1320, and the function display unit connector MFCN is provided along the lower side of the main control board box 1320. May be electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN.

  By doing so, the distance dimension between the wiring FCBL and the left side of the package of the main control MPU 1310a can be set to be larger than the above-described first wiring separation distance dimension. Of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 through a space having a distance dimension from the main control MPU 1310a to the left side of the package of the main control MPU 1310a. Because the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the game board 5 is located below the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4. By being disposed, static electricity easily accumulates in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are mounted, and when electromagnetic noise is emitted due to the electrostatic discharge, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are removed. This is because there is a case in which a wiring FCBL, which is arranged below and electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310, is intruded.

  In a case where the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected to each other through the panel relay board 1710 by adopting such an aspect, the above-described configuration is applied to the panel relay board 1710. It is preferable to provide an element that can reduce or eliminate electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL. Thus, it is possible to prevent the electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring FCBL from affecting the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, main control MPU 1310a can be protected from wiring FCBL into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Examples of such an element include a resistor and a filter circuit. From the observation result of the waveform of the electromagnetic noise, it is known that the waveform width of the electromagnetic noise falls within about 2 microseconds (μs) as described above, and the filter circuit has a larger width than such a waveform width. It is designed to pass signals having a waveform width.

  Further, as such an element, in addition to a resistor, a filter circuit, and the like, as described above, an EMC countermeasure component (a coil, a bead, a capacitor, and the like) can also be given. The capacitors are inserted so as to be electrically connected in series to the FCBL. If a capacitor is used, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wirings FCBL. When a more abrupt attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the plurality of wirings FCBL. May be inserted respectively.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the wiring FCBL electrically connected through a connector (not shown) provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400 is connected to the upper right corner of the game board 5 as shown in FIG. When it is routed to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent downward below the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a plurality of vertical lines are formed along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. Although the wiring FCBLs collected by the wiring processing pieces 3011 are bent toward the left side on the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500, the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 is temporarily The game panel 1 is routed along the side and is gathered by the lower wiring processing piece provided on the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. The main control unit 1300 is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the rear lower portion of the lower side of the main control unit 1300. When it is routed toward the main control board box 1320, it is bent toward the right side, and is routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 to below the function display unit connector MFCN. When electrically connected to the connector MFCN, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL may affect the peripheral control unit 1500.

  Specifically, on the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500, as shown in FIG. 176, connectors CN2 to CN7 provided on the peripheral control board 1510 and connectors CN8 and CN9 provided on the liquid crystal output board 1530 are arranged. . Various wirings respectively corresponding to the connectors CN2 to CN9 are electrically connected. For this reason, various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 and the wiring FCBL intersect or contact with each other (straddling arrangement), so that electromagnetic noise entering the wiring FCBL is electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9. , The effect image is drawn on the effect display device 1600 due to the influence of the electromagnetic wave noise invading the line FCBL (for example, disturbance of the pattern such as a black screen). Occurs).

  Therefore, the wiring FCBL does not cross around the wiring FCBL so that the wiring FCBL does not run along the lower part of the peripheral control unit 1500 (the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500) (the various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9). It is preferable to configure so as not to be in a contact arrangement (a straddling arrangement). For example, as a method of laying out the wiring FCBL in which the various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 and the wiring FCBL do not intersect or come into contact with each other (a straddling arrangement), a drawing provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400 is illustrated. When the wiring FCBL electrically connected through a connector which is not connected is routed from the upper right corner of the game board 5 to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent from the upper side to the left side, On the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent again downward of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is collectively formed by a plurality of wiring processing pieces formed in the vertical direction along the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. Before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the lower rear portion of the panel 1100, the substrate holder 1200 is bent to reach the upper side. When the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 attached to the rear surface of the main body 1200 is pulled downward along the left side of the main control board box 1320, it is bent toward the right side of the main control board box 1320 and is bent. May be electrically connected to the function display unit connector MFCN after being routed below the function display unit connector MFCN along the lower side.

  By doing so, the distance dimension between the wiring FCBL and the left side of the package of the main control MPU 1310a can be made larger than the above-described first wiring separation distance dimension. Through the space having the distance dimension from the wiring FCBL to the left side of the package of the main control MPU 1310a, it is possible to prevent intrusion into various pins of the main control MPU 1310a protruding toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320. Because the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, as shown in FIGS. 97 and 98, the game board 5 is located below the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4. By being disposed, static electricity easily accumulates in and around the area where the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are mounted, and when electromagnetic noise is emitted due to the electrostatic discharge, the ball tank 552 and the tank rail 553 are removed. This is because there is a case in which a wiring FCBL, which is arranged below and electrically connects the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310, is intruded.

  In a case where the function display unit 1400 and the main control board 1310 are electrically connected to each other through the panel relay board 1710 by adopting such an aspect, the above-described configuration is applied to the panel relay board 1710. It is preferable to provide an element that can reduce or eliminate electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring FCBL. Thus, it is possible to prevent the electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring FCBL from affecting the main control MPU 1310a. Therefore, main control MPU 1310a can be protected from wiring FCBL into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Examples of such an element include a resistor and a filter circuit. From the observation result of the waveform of the electromagnetic noise, it is known that the waveform width of the electromagnetic noise falls within about 2 microseconds (μs) as described above, and the filter circuit has a larger width than such a waveform width. It is designed to pass signals having a waveform width.

  Further, as such an element, in addition to a resistor, a filter circuit, and the like, as described above, an EMC countermeasure component (a coil, a bead, a capacitor, and the like) can also be given. The capacitors are inserted so as to be electrically connected in series to the FCBL. If a capacitor is used, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wirings FCBL. When a more abrupt attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into each of the plurality of wirings FCBL. May be inserted respectively.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the function display unit connector MFCN is arranged below the center line passing through the midpoint between the right side and the left side of the main control board 1310, but above the center line. Although the main control MPU 1310a is arranged in the above, the positional relationship is reversed and the main control MPU 1310a is arranged below the center line, whereas the function display unit connector MFCN is arranged above the center line. In this case, the function display unit connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a may be arranged so as to be separated from each other on the main control board 1310. Even with such a configuration, the main control MPU 1310a can be arranged to be separated from the function display unit connector MFCN to which the wiring FCBL is electrically connected. The connector MFCN and the main control MPU 1310a can be prevented from entering the various pins of the main control MPU 1310a projecting toward the bottom plate of the main control board box 1320 via a space separated from the main control board 1310. Therefore, main control MPU 1310a can be protected from wiring FCBL into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the wiring FCBL electrically connected through a connector (not shown) provided on the back side of the function display unit 1400 is connected to the upper right corner of the game board 5 as shown in FIG. When it is routed to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent downward below the rear surface of the back box 3010, and is formed in a plurality in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. Of the main control unit 1300 which is bent before reaching the upper side of the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 attached to the rear lower portion of the game panel 1100 by being gathered by the respective wiring processing pieces 3011 to be attached. It was routed downward along the right side of the main control board box 1320. In the state where the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, the area where the wiring FCBL is routed is located in front of the payout unit 560 attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. Had been placed. As described above, the payout unit 560 includes a ball guiding unit 570 having a single guiding path for guiding the game ball B from the tank rail 553 in a meandering manner, and a single guiding path for the ball guiding unit 570. A payout device 580 that pays out the game balls B guided by each of the game balls B one by one based on an instruction from the payout control board 633, and an upper full tank path unit 600 that guides the game balls B passing through the payout device 580 downward. And a lower full ball path unit 610 for guiding the game ball B passing through the upper full tank path unit 600 to the door frame 3 side or the substrate unit 620 side. In other words, the area where the wiring FCBL is routed in this manner is located in front of the ball guiding unit 570, the payout device 580, and the lower full tank path unit 610 when the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1. Had been arranged. Therefore, when the main control MPU 1310a can be protected from the wiring FCBL into which the electromagnetic wave noise can enter, in addition to the wiring of the wiring FCBL, the ball tank 552, the ball guiding unit 570, and the dispensing device 580 , So as not to be routed in a wiring space formed between the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200 and the bottom plate of the main control substrate box 1320 (or formed on the rear surface of the substrate holder 1200). After being routed along the lower side of the main control board box 1320 to below the function display unit connector MFCN, the electric power is transferred to the function display unit connector MFCN so that the function display unit connector MFCN is not housed and routed along the wiring housing groove. It may be configured to be connected to each other.

  In the above-described embodiment, the function display unit 1400 is attached to the upper left corner of the front component 1000 outside the game area 5a, but a plurality of full-color LEDs are provided in this area instead of the function display unit 1400. A decorative board to be mounted may be attached. A plurality of wirings (hereinafter, may be simply referred to as “wirings”) that are electrically connected to each other via a connector (not shown) provided on the back surface side of the decorative substrate, for example, with reference to FIG. 132. To be more specific, when the game board 5 is routed from the upper right corner to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent downward below the rear surface of the back box 3010, and A plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the right side are combined together, bent toward the left side below the peripheral control unit 1500, and connected to the corresponding peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510). After the wire is routed to the lower part of the game board, the wire can be electrically connected to the connector. When it is routed from the upper corner to the rear surface of the game panel 1100 and the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent from the upper side to the left side, and the lower side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 on the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. And bent together toward the right side below the peripheral control unit 1500 by a plurality of wiring processing pieces 3011 formed in the vertical direction along the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. After the wiring is routed below the connector of the peripheral control unit 1500 (peripheral control board 1510) to be connected, the wiring may be electrically connected to the connector.

  In the state where the game board 5 is mounted on the pachinko machine 1, the area where the wiring is routed by such a wiring routing method is the payout attached to the payout base unit 550 in the main body frame 4 shown in FIG. Since it is arranged in front of the unit 560 or in the vicinity (below) of the ball tank 552, as described above, there is a possibility that electromagnetic noise enters the wiring.

  Therefore, while the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500 arranges the connector below the center line passing through the middle point between the right side and the left side of the peripheral control board 1510, By disposing the peripheral control IC 1510a above, the connector and the peripheral control IC 1510a are separated from each other on the peripheral control board 1510. Accordingly, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be arranged at a distance from the connector of the peripheral control board 1510 to which the wiring is electrically connected, so that the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring causes the connector and the peripheral control IC 1510a to be connected to the peripheral control board 1510a. It is possible to prevent various pins of the peripheral control IC 1510a from invading through the space separated at 1510. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from wiring into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Further, by arranging the peripheral control IC 1510a away from the connector of the peripheral control board 1510 to which the wiring is electrically connected, even if electromagnetic noise enters the wiring, the peripheral control IC 1510a is not affected. On the control board 1510, or in a space where the connector of the peripheral control board 1510 and the peripheral control IC 1510a are separated from each other on the peripheral control board 1510, electromagnetic wave noise that enters through this wiring can be attenuated. Also in this regard, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from wiring into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Although the decorative board and the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500 are directly electrically connected by wiring, the decorative board and the peripheral control board 1510 in the peripheral control unit 1500 are electrically connected via the panel relay board 1710. It is also possible to configure so that the connection is established. In this case, it is preferable that the panel relay board 1710 be provided with an element capable of reducing or eliminating the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring (that is, a plurality of wirings that transmit a control signal from the peripheral control board 1510 to the decorative board). It is preferable to provide an element capable of reducing or eliminating electromagnetic wave noise. Accordingly, it is possible to prevent the electromagnetic noise entering through the wiring from affecting the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from wiring into which electromagnetic noise can enter.

  Examples of such an element include a resistor and a filter circuit. It is known from the observation result of the electromagnetic wave noise waveform that the waveform width of the electromagnetic wave noise falls within about 2 microseconds (μs). Designed to pass.

  Further, as such an element, in addition to a resistor, a filter circuit, and the like, an EMC countermeasure component (a coil, a bead, a capacitor, and the like) can also be given. Are connected so as to be connected in series, respectively, and when a capacitor is used, they are inserted so as to be electrically connected in parallel to a plurality of wirings. If a more abrupt attenuation characteristic is required, a circuit configured by combining a coil and a capacitor may be inserted into a plurality of wirings, or a bead and a capacitor may be inserted. Circuits configured in combination may be inserted respectively.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the upper left panel decoration board 1131 is disposed behind the function display unit 1400, and the wiring UPCBL electrically connected via the connection connector 1131a provided on the back side of the upper left panel decoration board 1131. As shown in FIG. 132, when the rear side of the game panel 1100 is bent upward as shown in FIG. (Or in a contact state), when it is routed to the upper side of the rear surface of the back box 3010, it is bent downwardly of the rear surface of the back box 3010, and a plurality of the upper boxes are formed in the vertical direction along the right side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. The wiring processing pieces 3011 to be processed are collected together. When it is routed to the upper side of the surface, it is bent from the upper side toward the left side, and is bent again downward on the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010 toward the left side of the rear surface of the back box 3010. When they are gathered by a plurality of wiring processing pieces formed in the vertical direction along the side and routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 and to the upper side of the drive board unit 1700, the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 moves to the right side. After being bent toward the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 and being drawn up above a predetermined connector of the panel drive board 1720 in the drive board unit 1700, it is electrically connected to the predetermined connector. You may make it. In this case, various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 shown in FIG. 176 are routed along the lower side of the peripheral control unit 1500 to separate them from the upper side of the drive board unit 1700, though not shown. . Thus, the wiring FCBL routed along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 does not intersect or contact (straddle) various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9. With this configuration, the wiring UPCBL routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 and along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700 and the peripheral control of the peripheral control board 1510 housed in the peripheral control unit 1500 As a positional relationship between the mounting position of the IC (the peripheral control IC 1510a shown in FIG. 150) and the peripheral control IC 1510a, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be disposed above a center line passing through the midpoint between the right side and the left side of the peripheral control 1510. . In other words, by disposing the peripheral control IC 1510a above the center line passing through the midpoint between the right side and the left side of the peripheral control board 1510, the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a are separated from each other. can do. Accordingly, the peripheral control IC 1510a of the peripheral control board 1510 accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 is arranged apart from the wiring UPCBL routed below the peripheral control unit 1500 and along the upper side of the drive board unit 1700. Therefore, the electromagnetic wave noise that has entered the wiring UPCBL is accommodated in the peripheral control unit 1500 via the space separating the wiring UPCBL and the peripheral control IC 1510a, and the noise of the peripheral control IC 1510a mounted on the peripheral control board 1510 is reduced. Intrusion into various pins can be prevented. Therefore, the peripheral control IC 1510a can be protected from the wiring UPCBL into which the electromagnetic noise can enter.

  In the above-described embodiment, the back left upper magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab (back left lower front decorative board) serves as a sensor for detecting the standby position (original position) of the front decorative section 3312 (first decorative sections 3322, 3412, 3422). By using small electronic components (magnetic sensors) such as 3321a, upper right front decorative board 3411a, and lower right front decorative board 3421a, the first decorative section 3312 (first decorative section 3322, 3412, 3422) is used as a sensor for detecting the standby position (original position), and the magnet 3312 of the preceding decorative portion 3312 (the magnet 3322a of the preceding decorative portion 3322, the magnet 3412a of the preceding decorative portion 3412, the preceding decorative portion). By detecting the magnetism of the magnet 3422a of the 3422, the preceding decorative portion 3312 (the preceding decorative portions 3322, 34) is detected. Identify and standby position the rotational position of 2,3422) (but had set situ), it can also be used as a sensor for detecting the approach of a magnet by the magnet Goto. This is because a small electronic component (magnetic sensor) such as a back upper left magnetic pole change detection circuit 3311ab (back left lower front decorative board 3321a, back upper right front decorative board 3411a, back right lower front decorative board 3421a) is first. In a situation where the step decoration section 3312 (first step decoration section 3322, 3412, 3422) is continuously rotated, the magnet 3312 of the first step decoration section 3312 (the magnet 3322a of the first step decoration section 3322, the first step decoration section) intermittently. The magnet 3412a of the magnet 3412 and the magnet 3422a) of the preceding decorative portion 3422 should be detected. However, if the magnetism is continuously detected, the approach of an illegal magnet can be detected as a magnet. is there.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the wiring UPCBL shown in FIG. 132 and the peripheral control board 1510 as wirings for electrically connecting the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 as a specific rendering means among the plurality of rendering means. The wiring UPCBL among the wirings (not shown) for electrically connecting the substrate and the panel driving substrate 1720 is located near the ball supply means (at least one of the ball tank 552, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580). I was going through. The wiring UPCBL among the wirings forming the transmission path between the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 is the various decorative boards 184, 273 on the door frame side as other production means except for the upper left panel decorative board 1131. The wiring is formed so as not to intersect or contact with a wiring forming a transmission path between etc and the like and the peripheral control board 1510. Therefore, such a configuration can be adopted for various wirings electrically connected to the main control board 1310. For example, among various wirings electrically connected to the main control board 1310, a wiring passing under an environment strongly affected by electromagnetic noise and other wirings other than this wiring are arranged so as not to cross or contact with each other. Thus, it is possible to prevent the main control MPU 1310a (main control board 1310) that can be operated by the high-frequency circuit of the crystal oscillator from being forcibly reset by the above-described built-in reset circuit. Therefore, malfunction due to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise can be prevented.

  Also, in the above-described embodiment, the game balls supplied from the ball tank 552, the ball guiding unit 570, and the payout device 580, which are the ball supply means, are paid out to the upper plate 201 of the plate unit 200. 5, a game ball received in the general winning opening 2001, the first starting opening 2002, the second starting opening 2004, and the special winning opening 200, which are reception ports provided in the game area 5a formed in the game area 5; A ball collection device having a collection port for collecting the game balls collected in the out port 1008 provided in the formed game area 5a is provided, and the game balls collected by the ball collection device are used as ball launching devices 540. A ball transport device for transporting the game ball toward the upper plate 201 of the bowl unit 200 without paying out the game balls, and the ball launching device 540 and the game board 5 are divided. It is also possible to form a circulation path of the game balls by the game area 5a, the ball collection device, and the ball transport device to be configured to circulate a predetermined number of the game balls in a closed manner to play the game. .

  Furthermore, in the above-described embodiment, the back left upper base decorative board is mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decorative section 3311 to which the back left upper base decorative board is attached. 3311a has a plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa that irradiate light toward the left side of the preceding decorative portion 3312, but a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the back upper left base decorative board have a side view type. The plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa mounted on the back upper left front decorative board 3311a may be selected to be a side view type, or the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the back left upper base decorative board may be side-mounted. A plurality of full-color LEs to be mounted on the back upper left front-end decorative board 3311a are selected as well as the view type. The top view type 3311aa may be selected, or a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the back left upper base decorative board may be selected as the top view type and the back left upper front decorative board 3311a may be mounted. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa to be used may be of a top-view type, or a plurality of full-color LEDs to be mounted on a back left upper base decorative board may be of a top-view type, and A plurality of full-color LEDs 3311aa mounted on the decorative board 3311a may be of a side-view type.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the lower back left base decorative board is mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decorative portion 3321 to which the back lower left base decorative board is mounted. Although the plurality of full-color LEDs 3321aa that irradiate light toward the left side of the preceding decorative portion 3322 are mounted on the 3321a, a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the lower left lower base decorative board are side-view type. The plurality of full-color LEDs 3321aa to be mounted on the back lower left front-end decorative board 3321a may be selected to be a side view type, or the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted to the back left lower base decorative board may be side-mounted. A plurality of full-color LEs to be mounted on the back left lower first-stage decorative board 3321a are selected as well as the view type. A top view type 3321aa may be selected, or a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the lower back left base decorative board may be selected as a top view type and a lower left lower front decorative board 3321a may be mounted thereon. The plurality of full-color LEDs 3321aa to be used may be of a top-view type, or the plurality of full-color LEDs to be mounted on the back left bottom base decorative board may be of the top-view type, and A plurality of full-color LEDs 3321aa mounted on the decorative substrate 3321a may be of a side-view type.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the back upper right base decoration board is mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decoration portion 3411 to which the back base upper decoration board is mounted. 3411a has a plurality of full-color LEDs 3411aa that irradiate light toward the right side of the preceding decorative portion 3412, but a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the back upper right base decorative board are side-view type. In addition to the selection, a plurality of full-color LEDs 3411aa mounted on the back upper right front decorative board 3411a may be selected to be of a side view type, or a plurality of full color LEDs mounted on the back upper right base decorative board 3411a may be selected. A plurality of full-color LEs to be mounted on the back upper right front decorative board 3411a are selected. 3411aa may be selected as a top-view type, or a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the back upper right base decorative board may be selected as a top view type and mounted on the upper right front decorative board 3411a. The top view type may be selected as the plurality of full-color LEDs 3411aa to be used, or the top view type may be selected as the plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the back upper right base decorative board. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3411aa mounted on the decorative substrate 3411a may be of a side-view type.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the back lower right base decorative board is mounted with a plurality of full-color LEDs (not shown) that irradiate light toward the inner wall of the base decorative portion 3421 to which the back right lower base decorative board is attached. The decorative board 3421a has a plurality of full-color LEDs 3421aa that emit light toward the right side of the preceding decorative section 3422 mounted thereon. And a plurality of full-color LEDs 3421aa mounted on the back lower right front decorative board 3421a may be selected as a side view type, or a plurality of full color LEDs 3421aa mounted on the back lower right base decorative board. Of the side-view type full-color LED and a plurality of full-color LEs mounted on the back lower right first-stage decorative board 3421a A top-view type 3421aa may be selected, or a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the back lower right base decorative board may be selected as a top view type and a lower right lower front decorative board 3421a may be selected. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3421aa mounted on the back side may be selected as a top-view type, or a plurality of full-color LEDs mounted on the lower right base decorative board may be selected as a top-view type. A plurality of full-color LEDs 3421aa to be mounted on the lower right first-stage decorative board 3421a may be of a side-view type.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, a wiring (electrically connecting the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 to the upper left panel decoration board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510) as a specific rendering means among the plurality of rendering means. The wiring UPCBL shown in FIG. 132 and the wiring (not shown) for electrically connecting the board between the peripheral control board 1510 and the panel driving board 1720 were used as the wiring forming the transmission path for electrical connection). A wiring UPCBL ′, which is a connection cable electrically connected via a connection connector 1131a provided on the back side of the upper left panel decoration board 1131, is routed so as to be directly connected to the peripheral control board 1510. Is also good. In this case, the wiring UPCBL ′ is a wiring that forms another transmission path that is electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 (except for the upper left panel decorative board 1131, and as other effect means, various decorative boards 184 and 184 on the door frame side). 273, etc and the like and a wiring forming a transmission path between the peripheral control board 1510). Accordingly, the wiring forming the transmission path between the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510, that is, the connector 1131a provided on the back side of the upper left panel decorative board 1131 and the peripheral control board 1510 are directly electrically connected. The wiring that forms the other transmission path electrically connected to the peripheral control board 1510 when the electromagnetic wave noise that has invaded the wiring UPCBL ′ to be connected (the transmission path between the control means and the other production means except for the specific production means) It is possible to prevent intrusion into the wiring to be formed (various wirings electrically connected to the connectors CN2 to CN9 of the peripheral control unit 1500). Therefore, malfunction due to the influence of electromagnetic wave noise can be prevented.

  Further, in the above-described embodiment, the pachinko machine 1 has been described as an example, but the gaming machine to which the present invention can be applied is not limited to the pachinko machine, but a gaming machine other than the pachinko machine, for example, a slot machine (rotating type). The present invention can also be applied to a game machine) or a fusion game machine in which a pachinko machine and a slot machine are fused (a game that uses a game ball to perform a slot game). Here, a slot machine as a spinning-type gaming machine will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 217 is a schematic perspective view of the slot machine.

  As shown in FIG. 217, the slot machine 6000 includes a front door 6002 and a main body portion 6004. The front door 6002 and the main body 6004 are connected to each other via a hinge (not shown). The front door 6002 can be opened from the main body 6004 by inserting a key into a keyhole 6005 provided on the right end of the front door 6002 and turning it clockwise with the hinge as a rotation center.

  A game panel 6006 is provided on an upper half of the front door 6002, and a projection protruding forward from the game panel 6006 is formed on a lower half of the front door 6002. A medal slot 6008, bet buttons 6010 and 6012, a start lever 6014, a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, a right stop button 6020, and the like are arranged along the lower edge of the game panel 6006 in this protruding portion. Further, a storage settlement button 6022 and a decorative board 6024 are arranged in the lower half of the front door 6002, and a tray 6026 is provided below the decorative board 6024. These bet buttons 6010 and 6012, the start lever 6014, the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, and the accumulation settlement button 6022 are electrically connected to the main control board 1310 for controlling the progress of the game. Have been. The main control board 1310 is accommodated in the main control board box 1320 of the main control unit 1300 and is fixedly attached to a board holder (not shown) provided inside the main body portion 6004.

  A rectangular display window (not shown) is formed at a substantially central position of the game panel 6006. Through this display window, three variable rotating bodies (not shown) and an effect device (not shown) installed inside the slot machine 6000 are provided. It can be seen through. The three variable rotators (not shown) are attached and fixed to a body-side mounting member (not shown) provided inside the main body portion 6004. On the other hand, the effect device (not shown) is attached and fixed to a door-side attachment member (not shown) provided on the back side of the front door 6002.

  On these variable rotators, a translucent symbol band on which a plurality of types of symbols (for example, bell, watermelon, cherry, 7, V, etc.) are printed as symbol information is affixed to each tubular frame. ing. Such a cylindrical variable rotator is called a reel or a drum in a gaming machine such as a slot machine, and an output shaft of a stepping motor (not shown) is connected to each variable rotator. The drive of these stepping motors is controlled by a main control board 1310. When the output shaft of the stepping motor rotates, a plurality of types of symbols are continuously changed from top to bottom from the above-described display window. Has become visible.

  The effect device includes a plurality of movable effectors (not shown), the effect display device 1600 described above, various decorative boards on which a plurality of LEDs (not shown) are mounted, and the peripheral control unit 1500 described above. The peripheral control unit 1500 controls operation of a plurality of movable effectors, drawing control of the effect display device 1600, light emission control of a plurality of LEDs mounted on various decorative boards, and the like based on various commands from the main control board 1310. By performing various controls, the progress of the effect is controlled. The peripheral control unit 1500 includes the above-described peripheral control board 1510, peripheral data ROM board 1520, and liquid crystal output board 1530.

  The main control board 1310 has a predetermined number of medals inserted into the medal insertion slot 6008 as a game medium, starts changing the display of the symbol information based on the operation of the start lever 6014, and has a left stop button 6016, a middle stop button 6018, and a right stop button 6018. The change display of the symbol information is stopped based on the operation of the stop button 6020 or the elapse of a predetermined time. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information has a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of medals as game media to the tray 6026.

  In the fusion machine, the medal slot 6008 becomes a ball slot 6008 ', and the main control board 1310 allows a predetermined number of game balls to be thrown into the ball slot 6008' as a game medium, and the starting lever 6014 to be operated. Based on the operation of the left stop button 6016, the middle stop button 6018, the right stop button 6020, or the elapse of a predetermined time, the display of the fluctuation of the symbol information is stopped. Then, the main control board 1310 generates a profit giving state (big hit game state) on condition that the symbol information is in a predetermined specific display mode, and pays out a large amount of game balls as game media to the tray 6026.

  DESCRIPTION OF SYMBOLS 1 ... Pachinko machine, 2 ... Outer frame, 3 ... Door frame, 4 ... Main body frame, 5 ... Game board, 5a ... Game area, 558 ... External terminal board, 559 ... Frame ground board, 560 ... Payout unit, 570 ... Ball Guidance unit, 580: payout device, 580a: payout passage, 580b: ball removal passage, 581: payout device main body, 582: payout device rear cover, 583: payout device front cover, 584: payout motor, 585: drive gear, 586 ... first transmission gear, 587 ... second transmission gear, 588 ... payout gear member, 588a ... payout gear, 588b ... detection piece, 589 ... discharge blade, 589a ... blade piece, 589b ... ball container, 590 ... blade rotation detection Sensor 591 payout detection sensor 592 ball removal movable piece 593 ball removal lever 600 upper full tank path unit 610 lower full tank path unit 630 power supply board 6 0a power switch, 630b noise countermeasure circuit, 630c rectifier circuit, 630d power factor improvement circuit, 630e smoothing circuit, 630f power supply creation circuit, 630g power supply destruction circuit, 633 payment control board, 1300 main Control unit, 1310: main control board, 1500: effect control unit, 1501: cover body, 1502: base body, 1503: wiring cover body, 1510: peripheral control board, 1520: peripheral data ROM board, 1530: liquid crystal output board, 1540: shield plate, 1545: conductive elastic member, 1600: effect display device.

Claims (1)

A gaming machine that advances a game based on a lottery result by a lottery means,
The gaming machine includes an effect display device capable of displaying a predetermined still image or moving image, and a game board having a decorative body,
The decorative body is provided with a decorative substrate on which a plurality of electronic components including a light emitting body are mounted,
The decorative substrate includes a front mounting surface on which the light emitter is mounted and a back mounting surface on which the light emitter is not mounted,
A white coating film provided on the surface mounting surface of the decorative substrate, and a notation portion formed of a yellow paint on the white coating film and corresponding to the luminous body,
A light-emitting decorative portion having a light-transmitting property is arranged in front of the front mounting surface of the decorative substrate having the notation portion formed of a yellow paint on a white paint film,
A gaming machine characterized by that: